Standard Specification For Roads and Bridges Works

Draft
Standard Specifications for

Road and
Bridge Works
September 1998
(Reprinted July 2001)
Prepared by the Division of Roads and Transport Technology, CSIR
Environmental Statement
Roads and transport routes, by their nature, are potentially intrusive to the environment. Numerous
unnecessary scars have been left on landscapes, many still visible after a number of years. Public
complaints stemming from road development and the unsustainable practices associated with it as well
as the resultant increases in traffic are escalating. It is therefore important that Employers, Engineers
and Contractors ensure that roads and related structures are constructed in a responsible and
sustainable manner in order that negative impacts on the environment are minimised as far as possible,
while positive impacts associated with the provision of the infrastructure are enhanced. The
implementation of an integrated environmental management procedure during the project cycle will
identify environmental issues, either perceived or real, which can be addressed during the early stages
of the development. In new road projects, this will allow uninterrupted construction and could prevent
costly time delays, resulting from disputes and actions involving affected parties. Incorporation of the
procedure into the maintenance and operation of existing transport routes can enhance rehabilitation
and management programmes.
We have not inherited this earth from our parents, but are borrowing it
from our children
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

CONTENTS
Page
Section
SERIES 1000 : GENERAL

1100
1200
1300
1400
1500
1600
1700
Definitions and terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General requirements and provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contractors establishment on site and general obligations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Housing, offices and laboratories for the Engineers site personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accommodation of traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clearing and grubbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1100-1
1200-1
1300-1
1400-1
1500-1
1600-1
1700-1
SERIES 2000 : DRAINAGE

2100
2200
2300
2400
2500
2600
Drains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prefabricated culverts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Concrete kerbing, concrete channelling, chutes and downpipes, and concrete linings for open drains . . . .
Asphalt and concrete berms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pitching, stonework and protection against erosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gabions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2100-1
2200-1
2300-1
2400-1
2500-1
2600-1
SERIES 3000 : EARTHWORKS AND PAVEMENT LAYERS OF GRAVEL

OR CRUSHED STONE
3100
3200
3300
3400
3500
3600
3700
3800
Borrow materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection, stockpiling and breaking down the material from borrow pits and cuttings,
and placing and compacting the gravel layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mass earthworks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pavement layers of gravel material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stabilisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Crushed stone base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Waterbound macadam base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Breaking up existing pavement layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3100-1
3200-1
3300-1
3400-1
3500-1
3600-1
3700-1
3800-1
SERIES 4000 : ASPHALT PAVEMENTS AND SEALS

4100
4200
4300
4400
4500
4600
4700
4800
4900
Prime coat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Asphalt base and surfacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Materials and general requirements for seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Double seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single seal with slurry (Cape seal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sand seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Surfacing of bridgedecks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Treatment of surface defects, patching, repairing edge breaks and crack sealing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4100-1
4200-1
4300-1
4400-1
4500-1
4600-1
4700-1
4800-1
4900-1
SERIES 5000 : ANCILLARY ROADWORKS

5100
5200
5300
5400
5500
5600
5700
5800
5900
Guide blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guardrails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Road signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Road markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cattle grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Landscaping and planting plants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finishing the road and road reserve and treating old roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Painting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5100-1
5200-1
5300-1
5400-1
5500-1
5600-1
5700-1
5800-1
5900-1
SERIES 6000 : STRUCTURES

6100
6200
6300
6400
6500
6600
6700
6800
Foundations for structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Falsework, formwork and concrete finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steel reinforcements for structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Concrete for structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prestressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
No-fines concrete, joints, bearings, bolt groups for electrification, parapets and drainage for structures . . .
Structural steelwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Construction tolerances for structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6100-1
6200-1
6300-1
6400-1
6500-1
6600-1
6700-1
6800-1
SERIES 7000 : TESTING AND QUALITY CONTROL

7100
7200
Testing material and workmanship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Quality control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BIBLIOGRAPHY OF SPECIFICATIONS AND TEST METHODS
7100-1
7200-1
SERIES 1000
GENERAL
1100
1200
1300
1400
1500
1600
1700
Definition and terms

General requirements and provisions
Contractors establishment on site and general obligations
Housing, offices and laboratories for the Engineers site personnel
Accommodation of traffic
Overhaul
Clearing and grubbing
SERIES 1000 :
GENERAL
SECTION 1100 :
DEFINITIONS AND TERMS
CONTENTS
1101
1102
1103
1104
1105
1106
1107
1108
1109
1110
1111
1112
1113
1114
1115
1116
1117
1118
1119
1120
1121
1122
1123
1124
1125
1126
1127
1128
1129
1130
1131
1132
1133
1134
1135
1136
1137
1138
1139
1140
1141
ASPHALT
ASPHALT SURFACING
BASE
BORROW AREA
BORROW MATERIAL
BRIDGE
CARRIAGEWAY
CATCHWATER DRAIN OR BANK
CULVERT
CUT
EXCESS OVERBURDEN
FILL
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
GRADE LINE
GRADING MODULUS (GM)
INLET AND OUTLET DRAINS
LANE
LOT
MEDIAN
MEDIAN DRAIN
MITRE DRAIN AND BANK
PAVEMENT LAYERS
PIONEER LAYER
PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS
ROADBED
ROAD PRISM
ROAD RESERVE
ROLLER PASSES
SEAL
SELECTED LAYER
SERVICES
SIDE DRAIN
SHOULDER
SHOULDER BREAKPOINT
STABILISATION
SLOPE
SPOIL (MATERIAL)
SUBBASE
SUBSOIL DRAINAGE SYSTEM
TRAVELLED WAY
VERGE
Unless inconsistent with the context, in these Specifications,

the following terms, words or expressions shall have the
meanings hereby assigned to them. Figures 1 and 2 (at the
end of the Section) detailing cross-sectional elements of a
road should be referred to when required.
1101
ASPHALT
A mixture to predetermined proportions of aggregate, filler

and bituminous binder material prepared off the road and
usually placed by means of a paving machine.
1102
ASPHALT SURFACING
The layer or layers of asphalt constructed on top of the

base, and, in some cases, the shoulders.
1103
BASE
A layer of material constructed on top of the subbase, or in

the absence thereof, the selected layer. A base may extend
to outside the travelled way.
1104
BORROW AREA
An area within designated boundaries, approved for the

purpose of obtaining borrow material. A borrow pit is the
excavated pit in a borrow area.
1105
BORROW MATERIAL
Any gravel, sand, soil, rock or ash obtained from borrow

areas, dumps or sources other than cut within the road
prism and which is used in the construction of the Works. It
shall not include crushed stone or sand obtained from
commercial sources.
1106
BRIDGE
A structure erected over a depression, river, watercourse,

railway line, road or other obstacle for carrying motor,
railway, pedestrian or other traffic or services and having a
length of 6 m or more, measured between the abutment
faces along the centre line of the road at girder-bed level,
except that road-over-rail or rail-over-road structures are
always classed as bridges.
1107
CARRIAGEWAY
The surface normally traversed by vehicles and which

consists of one or a number of contiguous traffic lanes,
including auxiliary lanes and shoulders.
1108
CATCHWATER DRAIN OR BANK
A longitudinal drain or bank outside the road prism for

diverting water that would otherwise flow into the road prism.
1109
CULVERT
A structure other than a bridge, which provides an opening

under the carriageway or median for drainage or other
purposes.
1110
CUT
Cut shall mean all excavations from the road prism,

including side drains, excavations for cross-roads,
interchanges, and, where classified as cut, excavations for
open drains.
1100-1
1111
EXCESS OVERBURDEN
Overburden within a borrow area which is not required or is

unsuitable for use in construction.
1112
FILL
That portion of the road prism consisting of approved

imported material which lies above the roadbed and is
bounded by the side slopes, shown on the typical crosssections on the Drawings running downwards and outwards
from the outer shoulder breakpoint and on which the
selected layer, subbase, base, shoulders and, in the case of
dual carriageways, the median, are to be constructed.
Material imported to replace unsuitable material in the
roadbed shall also be classified as fill.
1113
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
The appropriate edition of the General Conditions of

Contract issued by the Road Authority for which the Contract
is being executed, together with any Special Conditions of
Contract forming part of the Contract.
1114
GRADE LINE
The grade line is a reference line in the Drawings of the

longitudinal sections of the road indicating at regular
intervals the elevations according to which the road is to be
constructed. The grade line may refer to the level of the
completed road, base or any other layer and may indicate
the elevations either along the carriageway centre line or
along any designated position on the road cross-section.
1115
GRADING MODULUS (GM)
selected to represent material or work produced by

essentially the same process and materials.
1119
MEDIAN
The area between the two travelled ways of a dual

carriageway, excluding the inner shoulders.
1120
MEDIAN DRAIN
A longitudinal drain situated between the inner shoulders of

a dual carriageway.
1121
MITRE DRAIN AND BANK
A drain constructed at an angle to the centre line of the road

to divert water from a side drain. Mitre drains include mitre
banks placed across the side drains.
1122
PAVEMENT LAYERS
The upper layers of the road comprising the selected layers,

subbase, base or gravel wearing course, and the shoulder
layers.
1123
PIONEER LAYER
An initial layer constructed over a weak roadbed where

selected material is used to provide a stable platform for the
construction of subsequent layers.
1124
PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS
The cumulative percentages by mass of material in a

representative sample of aggregate, gravel or soil retained
on the 2.00 mm, 0.425 mm and 0.075 mm sieves, divided
by 100.
The specifications relating to a specific project, which form

part of the Contract documents for such project, and which
contain supplementary and/or amending specifications to
the Standard Specifications.
1116
1125
INLET AND OUTLET DRAINS
ROADBED
Channels leading into or discharging from culverts,

stormwater conduits and minor bridges.
The natural in situ material on which the fill, or in the

absence of fill, any pavement layers, are to be constructed.
1117
1126
LANE
Part of a travelled way intended for a single stream of traffic

in one direction, which has normally been demarcated as
such by road markings.
1118
LOT
A sizable portion of work or quantity of material which is

assessed as a unit for the purpose of quality control and
1100-2
ROAD PRISM
That portion of the road construction included between the

original ground level and the outer boundaries of the slopes
of cuttings, fills and side drains. It shall not include the
selected layer, subbase, base, surfacing, shoulders or
roadbed.
1127
ROAD RESERVE
The entire area included by the boundaries of a road as

proclaimed.
1128
ROLLER PASSES
Unless otherwise specified in the Specifications or the

Project Specifications, an area will be taken to have
received one roller pass when a roller has passed over such
area once. Additional passes made only as a result of
nominal overlapping so as to ensure full coverage shall not
be taken into account.
1129
1135
STABILISATION
The treatment of the materials used in the construction of

the roadbed, fill or pavement layers by the addition of a
cementitious binder such as lime or Portland cement or the
mechanical modification of the material through the addition
of a soil binder or a bituminous binder. Asphalt and concrete
shall not be considered as materials that have been
stabilised.
1136
SLOPE
Unless otherwise stated, slope is given in terms of the ratio

of the vertical difference in elevation between any two points
and the horizontal distance between them.
SEAL
This ratio may also be expressed as a percentage.
The application of one or more layers of bituminous binder

with or without layers of crushed stone or sand in
successive layers on the carriageway, shoulders or on any
other compacted layer on which movement of traffic takes
place.
1130
1137
SPOIL (MATERIAL)
Material originating from construction operations and which

is not utilised for construction purposes.
SELECTED LAYER
1138
SUBBASE
The lower layer or layers of the pavement which is

constructed direct onto the fill, or in some cases the
roadbed. It may include roadbed material compacted in situ.
The layer of material on top of the selected layers or fill and

below the base and shoulders.
1131
1139
SERVICES
SUBSOIL DRAINAGE SYSTEM
Cables, pipes or other structures to provide, inter alia,

conduits for electricity, telephone and telegraph
connections, water, sewage, etc.
A system of subsoil drainage pipes (including any

permeable material) constructed to intercept and remove
subsoil water.
1132
1140
SIDE DRAIN
TRAVELLED WAY
An open longitudinal drain situated adjacent to and at the

bottom of cut or fill slopes.
That portion of the carriageway which includes the various

traffic lanes and auxiliary lanes but excludes the shoulders.
1133
1141
SHOULDER
(a)
When referring to this as a surface: The area
between the outside edge of the travelled way and the
shoulder breakpoint.
VERGE
The area between the outer edge of the road prism and the
boundary of the road reserve.
(b)
When referring to this as a pavement layer: The
upper pavement layer lying between the outside edge of the
base and the shoulder breakpoint.
1134
SHOULDER BREAKPOINT
The line along which the extended flat planes of the surface
of the shoulder and the outside slope of the fill and
pavement intersect. This edge is normally rounded to a
predetermined radius.
1100-3
CATCHWATER BANK
I
SHOULDER
LANE
SHOULDER
LANE
SHOULDER
SHOULDER
TRAVELLED WAY
D
ROADBED
CARRIAGEWAY
E
G
C
MEDIAN DRAIN
SUBSOIL
DRAINAGE SYSTEM
FIGURE 1
CATCHWATER
DRAIN
SIDE DRAIN
CUT
SIDE DRAIN
ROAD RESERVE BOUNDARY
MEDIAN
ROAD RESERVE BOUNDARY
CARRIAGEWAY
ROAD RESERVE
SHOULDER BREAKPOINT
CARRIAGEWAY
SHOULDER
SHOULDER
MATERIAL
TRAVELLED WAY
SEAL
BASE
SUBBASE
VERGE
SHOULDER
MATERIAL
E
G
A
SHOULDER
FILL
ROADBED
PAVEMENT
LAYERS
B
SELECTED
LAYER
ROADBED
C
D
SIDE DRAIN
VERGE
FIGURE 2
THE ROAD PRISM IN FIGURE 1: THE VOLUME EXCAVATED BETWEEN ABCDEFGHIA AND ANY FILL CONSTRUCTED ON BC & GH
THE ROAD PRISM IN FIGURE 2: THE VOLUME EXCAVATED BETWEEN BCDEFB AND THE FILL ABGA
FIGURE 1100: CROSS-SECTIONAL ELEMENTS OF A ROAD

THESE TWO DIAGRAMS ARE INTENDED TO ILLUSTRATE THE DEFINITIONS OF SECTION 1100 ONLY, AND, WHERE TO THE CONTARY, THE
DEFINITIONS SHALL PREVAIL
SERIES 1000 :
GENERAL
SECTION 1200 :
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND

PROVISIONS
CONTENTS
1201
1202
1203
1204
1205
1206
1227
1228
1229
SCOPE
SERVICES
ROAD INTERSECTIONS AND JUNCTIONS
PROGRAMME OF WORK
WORKMANSHIP AND QUALITY CONTROL
THE SETTING-OUT OF WORK AND PROTECTION
OF BEACONS
NOTICES, SIGNS AND ADVERTISEMENTS
MEASUREMENTS
PAYMENT
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION OF THE WORKS
TRAFFIC OVER COMPLETED PAVEMENT
LAYERS
ALTERNATIVE DESIGNS AND OFFERS
VARIATION FROM SPECIFIED NOMINAL RATES
OF APPLICATION OR NOMINAL MIX
PROPORTIONS
CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES IN RESPECT OF
PROPERTY OUTSIDE THE ROAD RESERVE AND
OF SERVICES MOVED, DAMAGED OR ALTERED
EXTENSION OF TIME RESULTING FROM
ABNORMAL RAINFALL
INFORMATION FURNISHED BY THE EMPLOYER
PROTECTION
OF
THE WORKS AND
REQUIREMENTS TO BE MET BEFORE
CONSTRUCTION OF NEW WORK ON TOP OF
COMPLETED WORK IS COMMENCED
REMEDIAL WORK
WATER
AUT HO RI S E D
ME A S URE ME NTS
AND
TOLERANCES
DRAWINGS PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR
USE OF EXPLOSIVES
WORK ON, OVER, UNDER OR ADJACENT TO
RAILWAY LINES
THE HANDING-OVER OF THE ROAD RESERVE
HAUL ROADS
MEASUREMENT OF DEPTH OF TRENCHES AND
FOUNDATION EXCAVATIONS
MONTHLY SITE MEETINGS
LEGAL PROVISIONS
FINAL CLEARANCE
1201
SCOPE
1207
1208
1209
1210
1211
1212
1213
1214
1215
1216
1217
1218
1219
1220
1221
1222
1223
1224
1225
1226
This Section covers matters which relate to the Contract as

a whole. Definitions, phrases or wording which would
otherwise require repetition in other sections of the
Specifications are also covered by clauses in this Section.
Matters covered by the General Conditions of Contract are
not repeated in this Section, except where necessary for
providing more detailed information.
1202
SERVICES
This Contract may include certain work relating to the

moving and reinstating of existing services that may be
affected by the construction of the Works.
The Employer will, in the Contract documents, provide

information regarding the location of existing utility services,
but the Employer does not accept responsibility for the
accuracy of this information.
The Contractor shall check and determine on the site the
positions of any services shown on the Drawings. This shall
be done by visual inspections, using detecting apparatus,
and by making excavations to expose the position of the
service at critical points. This shall also be done where no
services are shown on the Drawings but where such
services are nevertheless believed to be present. The
positions of all services so detected shall be marked
carefully and then drawn in on the Drawings. These
services will then be defined as known services. The
Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions not to
damage the services during the search, when the onus shall
rest with him to prove that, in the event of damage being
done to such services during the search, it was not his fault
that they had been damaged.
The Contractor will be held responsible for any damage
caused by him to known services, unless he can prove that
he has taken all the above precautions and that the damage
has nevertheless been caused because the position of the
known service had deviated by more than one metre from
the position as may reasonably have been deduced from the
investigation made by him.
The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions to
protect existing services during construction and during the
relocation of such services. Where protective measures
involve the construction of permanent work, the Contractor
shall execute the work in accordance with the Engineer's
instructions, and payment shall be made as provided for in
the Project Specifications.
All pipes, cables, conduits or other known services of any
nature whatsoever damaged as a result of the Contractor's
operations shall be repaired and reinstated forthwith by the
Contractor or by the Authority concerned, all at the expense
of the Contractor and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Where work is to be carried out in the vicinity of overhead
powerlines, the Contractor shall ensure that all persons
working in such areas are aware of the relatively large
distance that high voltage electricity can short to earth
when cranes, or other large masses of steel, are in the
vicinity of powerlines. The Contractor shall be required to
work outside the clearances stated in BS162 which gives
safe clearance for the various voltages.
It shall be clearly understood that, in certain instances,
existing services can be relocated only after the Contractor
has advanced sufficiently on or has completed certain
sections of earthworks or certain structures.
Whenever services are encountered which interfere with the
execution of the Works and which require to be moved and
relocated, the Contractor shall advise the Engineer, who will
determine the extent of the work, if any, to be undertaken by
the Contractor in moving, relocating and reinstating or
protecting such services.
Any work required to be undertaken by the Contractor in
protecting, moving and relocating the services for which no
provision has been made in the Contract documents, or for
which there are no appropriate tender rates, will be classed
as extra work, as provided for in the General Conditions of
Contract.
The Contractor shall work in close co-operation with private
Owners or public authorities controlling services which have
1200-1
to be protected, moved or relocated. Details regarding the

state of negotiations concluded between the Employer and
the Owner at the time of tendering in respect of the time
when either the Owner is prepared to start moving such
services or when the Contractor is required to or will be
allowed to start moving the services, and the duration of
such operations, will either be stated in the tender
documents or be made available to tenderers. Should the
Owners of services refuse to co-operate with the Contractor
in a reasonable manner in connection with the protection or
moving of services belonging to them, the Contractor shall
refer the matter to the Engineer.
When the Contractor details his programme of work as
referred to in the relevant clause of the General Conditions
of Contract, he shall, in consultation with the Engineer,
clearly indicate as to when he proposes to start with and
conclude the moving of each service or when he will require
the Owner to start with and conclude the moving of each
service. Should it thereafter, through delays on the part of
the Employer or the Owner of the service to be moved, be
impossible to adhere to the programme of work, such
programme shall be suitably amended by the Contractor in
consultation with the Engineer so as to limit, in so far as is
possible, the extent of any damages or delays. Should it be
impossible to limit entirely the damages or delays resulting
from the amendments necessary to the programme of work,
the Contractor shall be reimbursed for any additional costs
incurred or damages suffered by him.
1203
ROAD INTERSECTIONS AND JUNCTIONS
Except where otherwise specified, no additional payment

over and above payment for the various items of work
included in this Contract will be made for the construction,
in a confined space, of curves, tapers, bellmouths, traffic
islands, farm accesses and other appurtenant Works in
connection with the construction and maintenance of road
intersections and junctions.
The Contractor shall be required to provide the safe and
unrestricted flow of public traffic at all times during the
construction and maintenance of such intersections and
junctions.
1204
PROGRAMME OF WORK
Should the Contractor fall behind with the programme

submitted by him in terms of the relevant clause of the
General Conditions of Contract, which programme has been
approved by the Engineer, the Employer may, without
prejudice to his rights in terms of the relevant clause of the
General Conditions of Contract, require the Contractor to
submit, within seven days of the date on which he has
received a notice to this effect, a revised programme in
terms of this Clause, which indicates the manner in which
the Contractor undertakes to complete the Works within the
required time. Any proposal in the revised programme to
accelerate the rate of progress shall be accompanied by
positive steps to increase production by more and/or better
labour and equipment being provided on the site or by the
available labour and equipment being utilised more
effectively.
The approval by the Engineer of any programme shall have
no contractual significance other than that the Engineer
would be satisfied if the work is carried out in accordance
with such programme and that the Contractor undertakes to
carry out the work in accordance with the programme.
1200-2
Neither shall it limit the right of the Engineer to instruct the

Contractor to vary the programme should circumstances so
require. The above shall not be taken to limit the right of the
Contractor to claim for damages or extension of time to
which he may be fairly entitled in terms of the General
Conditions of Contract for delay or disruption of his
activities.
Should the Employer request and the Contractor undertake
to finish the whole or part of the Works ahead of the time
originally required by the Contract, payment for accelerating
the work shall be made only if agreed on beforehand, in
writing, and in terms of such agreement.
1205
WORKMANSHIP AND QUALITY CONTROL
The onus rests with the Contractor to produce work which

conforms in quality and accuracy of detail to all the
requirements of the Specifications and Drawings, and the
Contractor shall, at his own expense, institute a qualitycontrol system and provide experienced engineers, foremen,
surveyors, materials technicians, other technicians and
other technical staff, together with all transport, instruments
and equipment, to ensure adequate supervision and positive
control of the Works at all times.
The Contractor shall conduct tests or have them conducted
continually on a regular basis, to check the properties of
natural materials and processed natural materials and of
products manufactured on the site, such as concrete and
asphalt. Although not a requirement for the Contractor to
conduct regular tests on any commercially produced
products such as cement, bitumen, steel and pipes, the
Contractor shall remain fully responsible for any defective
material or equipment provided by him. Similarly, the quality
of all elements of the Works shall be checked on a regular
basis so as to ensure compliance with the specified
requirements.
The intensity of control and of tests to be conducted by the
Contractor in terms of these obligations is not specified but
shall be adequate to ensure that proper control is being
exercised.
Where any natural materials or products made from natural
materials are supplied, and upon completion of each
element of the construction work, the Contractor shall test
and check such materials, products and/or elements for
compliance with the specified requirements and shall submit
his results to the Engineer for approval. Such submission
shall include all his measurements and test results and shall
furnish adequate proof of compliance with the specified
requirements.
No specific pay items are provided as compensation for the
above obligations, including the provision of all samples
delivered to the Engineer, the repair of places from which
samples were taken, and the provision of the necessary
personnel and testing apparatus and facilities, for which
compensation shall be included in the tendered rates of the
Contractor for the various items of work to which these
obligations apply.
The Contractor's attention is also drawn to the provisions of
Clause 7208 in regard to instituting specific process-control
systems.
1206
THE SETTING-OUT OF WORK AND PROTECTION

OF BEACONS
The Contractors attention is drawn to the requirements of

the relevant clause of the General Conditions of Contract,
and he shall also comply with all legal provisions in regard
to surveying and setting out work.
The Contractor shall check the condition of all reference and
level beacons and shall satisfy himself that they have not
been displaced and are true in regard to position and level.
If beacons have been destroyed, displaced or damaged
before the site is handed over to the Contractor, the
Engineer will arrange to have new beacons installed. A
beacon which has been displaced shall not be used unless
its true position and level have been re-established and the
new values verified by the Engineer.
Where a beacon is likely to be displaced during construction
operations, the Contractor shall establish suitable reference
beacons at locations where they will not be displaced during
construction. No beacon shall be covered over, displaced or
destroyed before accurate reference beacons have been
established and details of the positions and levels of such
beacons have been submitted to and approved by the
Engineer. The Contractors reference beacons shall be of
at least the same quality and durability as the existing
beacons.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the method of
setting-out he proposes to employ. To ensure beyond all
doubt that the complex elements of the road, such as traffic
interchanges, structures and other important features are
located truly and correctly, the Contractor shall check all
setting-out by a second method. The Engineer may at any
time request the Contractor to submit proof that his settingout has been satisfactorily checked.
In cases where the displacement of or damage to property
beacons or trigonometrical-survey beacons is unavoidable,
the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in good time so that
he may arrange to have such beacons suitably referenced
and later on reinstated. The cost of such work, if paid for by
the Contractor, shall be reimbursable as extra work, as
provided for in the General Conditions of Contract.
For the purposes of this Clause and of the relevant clause
of the General Conditions of Contract, any beacon made
from a metal peg cast in concrete and any boundary
beacon, whether or not cast in concrete, shall be regarded
as a beacon. Centre-line pegs shall not be classified as
beacons.
To protect beacons, the boundary fences of the road
reserve shall be splayed at corners so as to avoid the use of
corner posts in the same position as property or
trigonometrical-survey beacons, all as shown on the
Drawings.
Accurate control of line and level shall be provided by the
Contractor at all stages of construction. In respect of the
road itself, control shall be at 20 m intervals or such closer
intervals as may be directed for horizontal and vertical
curves. Wherever necessary, but particularly on completion
of the fill and the base, the Contractor shall re-establish
stake-line pegs at sufficiently close intervals to determine
accurately the position of the edges of the base, surfacing
and especially kerbing, guardrails and other road elements
permanently visible.
The setting-out of work will not be measured and paid for
directly, and compensation for the work involved in setting-
out will be deemed to be covered by the rates tendered and

paid for in the various items of work included in this
Contract.
1207
NOTICES, SIGNS AND ADVERTISEMENTS
The Contractor and Subcontractors shall not erect any

signs, notices or advertisements on or along the Works or
the site of the Works without the written approval of the
Engineer.
At each end of the Works the Contractor shall provide and
erect, as part of his obligations under Section 1300, and on
approved locations, at the starting and ending points of the
Works, signboards of sound, weatherproof construction,
painted by an approved firm of signwriters in accordance
with the details shown on the Drawings.
These signs are to be erected not later than one month after
the Contractor has been given access to the site.
The Engineer shall have the right to have any sign, notice or
advertisement moved to a better position or to have it
removed from the site of the Works if it should in any way
prove unsatisfactory, inconvenient or dangerous to the
general public.
All advertisements, notices and signs shall be removed by
the Contractor upon issuance of the final certificate of
completion.
1208
MEASUREMENTS
(a)
Units of measurements
All work shall be measured in accordance with the SI

System of metric units.
(b)
Schedule of quantities
The quantities set out in the Schedule of Quantities are

estimated quantities and are used for the comparison of
tenders and for awarding the Contract. It must be clearly
understood that only the actual quantities of work done or
materials supplied will be measured for payment, and that
the scheduled quantities may be increased or decreased as
provided for in the General Conditions of Contract.
(c)
Measurement of completed work
All distances along the centre line of the road as shown on

the Drawings are horizontal distances, which will be used in
calculating the quantities of fill and pavement layers for
purposes of payment. All cross-sections shall be taken in a
vertical plane.
All materials which are specified to be measured in the
vehicle shall be hauled in vehicles of such type and size that
the actual volume may be readily and accurately
determined. Unless all vehicles are of uniform capacity,
each vehicle shall bear a plainly legible identification mark
indicating its specific approved capacity.
The quantity of bituminous and similar materials to be paid
by volume shall be measured at the temperature of
application.
1200-3
Structures shall be measured to the neat lines shown on the

Drawings and shall include any changes ordered in writing
by the Engineer and, for purposes of payment, the
calculated volume of concrete structures shall include the
volume of reinforcing steel, and minor ducts up to 150 mm
in diameter.
hauling and delivering the material to the point of use; the

construction, repair, maintenance and making good after
completion of all access roads, and all work required in
opening, using and finishing off borrow pits unless covered
by other pay items in the Schedule of Quantities.
(ii)
1209
PAYMENT
(a)
Contract rates
In computing the final Contract amount, payment shall be

based on the actual quantity of authorised work done in
accordance with the Specifications and Drawings. The
tendered rates shall apply, subject to the provisions of the
General Conditions of Contract, irrespective of whether the
actual quantities are more or less than the scheduled
quantities.
Where no rate or price has been entered against a pay item
in the Schedule of Quantities by a tenderer, it shall be
understood that he does not require any compensation for
such work. Where, however, a pay item described in these
Specifications or in the Project Specifications does not
appear in the Schedule of Quantities, the Contractor will
receive reasonable compensation for such work if required,
unless anything to the contrary has been determined
elsewhere.
The phrase "placing material" shall mean the off-loading,

spreading, blending, processing, watering, mixing, shaping
and compacting (where specified) of the material in the
pavement layers, fills and bypasses, as well as the
procuring, furnishing, applying and admixing of water; the
breaking-down of oversize material, the removing of
oversize material which cannot be broken down, correcting
irregular or uneven surfaces or layers, the thickness of
which is not to specification, finishing-off to within the
specified tolerances, the refilling of test holes and
maintaining the completed work. In the case of asphalt
courses and bituminous seals, it shall also mean the heating
and spraying of binder, the spreading of aggregate or
asphalt mixtures, rolling, compacting, finishing-off to within
the specified tolerances, and maintaining the completed
work.
The phrase "procuring, furnishing and placing" shall mean
procuring and furnishing in addition to placing, all as defined
herein.
(d)
(b)
Rates to be inclusive
The Contractor shall accept the payment provided for in the

Contract and represented by the rates tendered by him in
the Schedule of Quantities, as payment in full for executing
and completing the work as specified, for procuring,
furnishing, placing and installing all materials, for procuring
and providing labour, supervision, constructional plant, tools
and equipment, for wastage, transport, loading and offloading, handling, maintenance, temporary work, testing,
quality control including process control, overheads, profit,
risk and other obligations and for all other incidentals
necessary for the completion of the work and maintenance
during the period of maintenance.
This Clause shall apply in full to all pay items except where
these requirements may be specifically amended in each
case.
(c)
The meanings of certain phrases in payment

clauses
(i)
Procuring and furnishing ... (material)
Where any of the words "supply", "procure", "provide",

"provision of" or "furnish (material)" are used in the
description of a pay item, it shall mean the supply and
delivery to the point of use of all materials of any kind
required for the work covered by the particular pay item,
including all tax, purchase costs, claims, damages, royalties
and transport costs involved, but excluding overhaul. In the
case of borrow materials, stone and sand, it shall also
include all negotiations with the Owners concerned,
excavating, producing, preparing, processing, testing,
1200-4
Pay items
The descriptions under the pay items in the various sections

of the Specifications, indicating the work for which allowance
shall be made in the tendered rates for such pay items, are
for the guidance of the Contractor and do not necessarily
repeat all the details of work and materials required by and
described in the Specifications.
These descriptions shall be read in conjunction with the
relevant Specifications and Drawings, and the Contractor
shall, when tendering, bear in mind that his rates shall be
inclusive as specified in Subclause (b) above.
(e)
The Contractor shall note that the cost of all Works and
materials for minor construction details at bridges, for
example small quantities of caulking compound and joint
filler (other than expansion joints), anchor-bar covers, etc,
not shown in the Schedule of Quantities, shall be included
in the tendered rates for concrete.
Placing material
Materials on the site
Payment in terms of the relevant clause of the General

Conditions of Contract for materials on the site, which have
not yet been incorporated in the Works, will be calculated at
80% of their purchase price, or, in the case of crushed stone
which has not been purchased but has been produced on
the site, at 80% of a fair valuation of such material.
The Engineer may at his sole discretion allow payment
under "materials on the site" in respect of articles such as
precast beams manufactured and stored off site, subject to
their having been completed, to proof of their ownership as
being that of the Contractor, and to the articles being clearly
marked with the Contractors name, the Contract number
and other particulars in accordance with the Engineer's
instructions.
(f)
Rate-only items
Against an item in the Schedule of Quantities where no

quantity is given but a rate only is required, the Contractor
shall fill in a rate or amount which will constitute payment for
work which may be done in terms of this item. Such rateonly item is used where it is estimated that little or no work
will be required under the item, or where the item is to be
considered as an alternative for another item where a
quantity is given, or for variations in rates of application or

mix proportions in terms of Clause 1213.
Work under rate-only items will be paid for only if it has been
executed in terms of a written instruction by the Engineer.
Calculations, drawings and a modified Schedule of

Quantities (as determined hereafter) in respect of each
alternative offer or design shall accompany the alternative
tender offer.
(b)
1210
A certificate of completion of the Works in terms of the

relevant clause of the General Conditions of Contract will be
issued only if the following sections of the Works as may be
applicable have, inter alia, been duly completed:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
1211
The gravel wearing course, seals, asphalt or

concrete pavement;
all above-ground and subsoil drainage structures;
all fencing;
the finishing-off of medians and slopes of cuts and
fills;
all the necessary road signs and road-surface
markings;
all guardrails;
all structures.
TRAFFIC
LAYERS
OVER
COMPLETED
Alternative designs shall be executed strictly in accordance

with the appropriate design codes and prescriptions of the
Employer. Copies of such codes and prescriptions will be
available for perusal at the office of the Engineer, but the
onus rests with the Contractor to ensure that he complies
with the design requirements of the Employer.
(c)
PAVEMENT
Traffic over structures or pavement layers of an

uncompleted road shall, in addition to other restrictions
specified elsewhere, be restricted to equipment required for
its construction, with the proviso that traffic for hauling
material over pavement layers, in so far as is possible, shall
be limited to a minimum by the use of construction roads
and diversions.
Traffic over structures or the completed road will be
restricted to the maximum axle load permitted in terms of
statutory provisions.
Any damage to structures or
completed layers caused by the Contractors traffic shall be
repaired at his own cost.
ALTERNATIVE DESIGNS AND OFFERS
Unless anything to the contrary has been determined

elsewhere in the Contract documents, a tenderer may,
together with his tender for the original designs contained in
the Contract documents, submit alternative designs and
offers for consideration. Such alternative designs and offers
shall be subject to the following conditions and
requirements.
Tenders
An alternative offer or design will be considered only if the

tender for the original items has been fully priced and
completed.
Unless the alternative offer stipulates to the contrary, it shall
be assumed that the period for completion of the Works
shall be the same as for the original design.
An alternative offer or design shall be submitted together
with the tender for the original items or design, otherwise it
will not be considered when tenders are adjudicated.
Preliminary drawings
Preliminary drawings of the alternative designs shall also be

submitted with the tender. These drawings shall comprise
adequate layout plans, elevations and sections and shall
clearly illustrate the general efficacy of the design and its
principal elements. Foundation depths and other elements
depending on foundation conditions shall, in so far as may
be applicable, be in accordance with foundation particulars
appearing in the Contract document.
Drawings for alternative designs shall be prepared in
accordance with the provisions of Clause 1221.
(e)
(a)
Preliminary calculations
Preliminary calculations for an alternative design shall be

submitted with the tender. Such calculations shall give
adequate details so as to enable an assessment to be made
of the general efficacy of the design and of its principal
elements, also of the degree to which the design
prescriptions and codes of the Employer are being complied
with. The calculations shall be clear and in a logical
sequence and shall clearly reflect all the design
assumptions.
(d)
1212
Design codes
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION OF THE WORKS
Quantities
Each alternative offer shall be accompanied by a modified

priced Schedule of Quantities compiled in accordance with
the Standard Specifications, in so far as it is applicable,
which clearly shows the manner in which the price for the
original Schedule of Quantities which fall away or are being
changed. In addition to the Schedule of Quantities, a set of
calculations shall be supplied to show how the quantities
have been determined. All assumptions in regard to
foundation conditions or other factors which will determine
quantities shall be clearly and conspicuously marked by
underlining or colouring, and shall indicate whether or not
the assumptions have been based on information furnished
in the Contract documents (with the necessary references).
(f)
Further details
Should the Engineer find that the calculations and drawings

submitted for alternative designs are not complete enough
for proper adjudication of the alternative designs, it may
mean that no further consideration will be given to such
alternative designs. The Employer, however, reserves the
right to call on the tenderer to submit such further
calculations and drawings as may be required. If such
further details are not submitted within ten days of having
been requested, the alternative designs may possibly not be
given further consideration.
1200-5
(g)
Preliminary adjudication of alternative designs
The Engineer will undertake a preliminary scrutiny of any

alternative designs for compliance with the specified
requirements of the Employer. Should he find any mistakes
or unsatisfactory aspects, he may afford the Contractor the
opportunity to rectify them within a period to be determined
by the Engineer. However, it is emphasised that the
preliminary scrutiny of the design and tender by the
Engineer, by its very nature, cannot be comprehensive, and
no guarantee can be given in this regard that all the
mistakes made by the Contractor will in fact be detected.
Any correction of such mistakes shall be made with the
tender price of the Contractor being retained, and, wherever
necessary, the priced Schedule of Quantities for the
alternative design shall be adjusted accordingly.
(h)
Final drawings and calculations and the priced

Schedule of Quantities
Where a tender with an alternative design has been

accepted, the Contractor shall, not less than three months
before he intends starting with the construction of such
design, submit to the Engineer a complete set of working
drawings, detailed calculations and a complete Schedule of
Quantities, for approval. The Schedule of Quantities shall be
based on the preliminary Schedule of Quantities, but with
the necessary adjustments in quantities and prices and with
the tendered price for the alternative design being retained.
Within six weeks of having received the above, the Engineer
will indicate which drawings, calculations, quantities, prices
and other particulars are acceptable to him and which not,
with reasons furnished. The Contractor shall then submit to
the Engineer in good time any modified drawings and other
particulars for approval, for which he will require two weeks.
Any delay arising from the fact that the amended particulars
do not meet the requirements shall be the responsibility of
the Contractor.
No work which will be affected by an alternative design may
be commenced, unless the Drawings, Schedule of
Quantities and prices for such alternative design have been
approved. Should the Contractor fail to modify any drawings,
calculations, quantities, prices or any other particulars to the
satisfaction of the Engineer, the alternative design will be
rejected and the original design shall be constructed for the
same amount as has been tendered for the alternative
design.
(j)
Responsibility for alternative design
The approval of a design by the Engineer shall in no way

relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to produce a
design which conforms in all respects to all the specified
requirements and which will be suitable for the purpose
envisaged.
Should it appear later during construction or during the
maintenance period that the design does not conform to the
1200-6
(k)
Payments for alternative designs
Payments for alternative designs will be based on the finally

approved Schedule of Quantities and rates for such designs.
The lump sum for an alternative design will remain fixed and
will be the final amount payable to the Contractor in regard
to such design, except only for deviations arising from:
(i)
foundation conditions which differ from foundation
conditions shown in the Contract documents, or in regard to
assumptions regarding foundation conditions stated in his
tender by the Contractor and accepted by the Engineer;
Acceptance of alternative design
The Contractor shall note that the acceptance of a tender

which includes alternative designs shall mean that the
alternative designs have been approved in principle only. If
the final calculations, drawings and details do not comply
with the specified requirements, such alternative designs
may be rejected, unless they are suitably amended by the
Contractor so as to be acceptable to the Engineer.
(i)
specified requirements, the Contractor only shall be liable

for any damage arising therefrom and he shall, at his own
expense, do all the necessary work to ensure that the
structure conforms to all the specified requirements.
(ii)
changes not arising from any failure or fault of the
Contractor, but from modifications requested by the
Engineer.
(l)
Cost of checking alternative designs
The Contractor shall, in his tender for each alternative

design, include an item to cover the cost for checking his
design. This item shall be 5% of the tendered amount of the
design without any price adjustment in terms of the relevant
clause of the General Conditions of Contract being
considered, and the amount will be payable to the Engineer
only upon an authorisation issued by the Employer.
(m)
Alternative offers
Alternative offers in this context shall mean offers not

relating to a structure, such as a bridge, which requires a
comprehensive structural analysis. It involves, in the main,
offers for the use of other materials, construction
programmes, alternative routes, etc. In this case the
provisions of Clause 1212 will still apply, except in the case
where the Contractor, in consultation with the Employer,
may agree to amend or delete certain of the provisions,
depending on the nature of the offer, but subject to a written
agreement beforehand with the Employer.
1213
VARIATION FROM SPECIFIED NOMINAL RATES

OF APPLICATION OR NOMINAL MIX
PROPORTIONS
The various sections of these Specifications specify nominal

rates of application or nominal mix proportions for materials
such as bituminous materials, aggregates, fillers, stabilising
agents, paint and the like. Tenderers shall base their
tenders on these nominal rates of application and mix
proportions.
Where such nominal rates of application or mix proportions
are specified, provision is made for deviations in the
quantities of material in consequence of the rates of
application or mix proportions prescribed by the Engineer in
each particular case in consideration of the available
materials and the conditions on the site.
Where the actual rates of application or mix proportions
used in the Works vary from the specified nominal rates and
mix proportions, adjustment of compensation will be made:
(a)
as a payment to the Contractor in respect of any
authorised increase in quantities which exceed those
specified, where such increase has been ordered, in writing,
by the Engineer;
(iv)
The procedure for the moving of services and details
as to how and when this is to be done.
(v)
Any similar matter directly related to the Contractors
activities on or in respect of private property or services.
or
(b)
as a refund to the Employer in respect of the
decrease in quantities which are less than those specified,
irrespective of whether such decrease results from an
authorised decrease in the rates of application or mix
proportions, or from unauthorised reductions on the part of
the Contractor.
Payment for a prescribed rate of application or mix
proportion shall be based on the actual rate of application or
mix proportion used, provided that this does not exceed the
prescribed rate of application or mix proportion, plus any
tolerance in the rate of application or mix proportion allowed.
If the actual rate of application or mix proportion exceeds the
prescribed rate or proportion, payment shall be based on the
prescribed rate of application or mix proportion plus any
tolerance allowed. If the actual rate of application or mix
proportion is below the prescribed rate of application or mix
proportion ordered, payment shall be based on the actual
rate of application or mix proportion regardless of any
tolerance allowed. Notwithstanding the above, the Engineer
shall be fully entitled to reject work which has not been
constructed in accordance with the Specifications or the
rates of application or mix proportions prescribed by him.
The Employer shall be refunded for any decrease in the
specified rates of application or mix proportions at the same
rate per unit of measurement as that tendered by the
Contractor for additional materials required by an increase
in the rates of application or mix proportions.
1214
CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES IN RESPECT OF

PROPERTY OUTSIDE THE ROAD RESERVE AND
OF SERVICES MOVED, DAMAGED OR ALTERED
(a)
The Contractor shall exercise any rights that may be
ceded to him by an Authority in terms of any statutory
provisions for purposes of executing the Contract, on
condition that:
(i)
the Contractor complies strictly with the requirements
of such statutory provisions, particularly in regard to the
matters relating to serving notice on the Owner or
consultation with him;
(ii)
in each case a written agreement is made with the
Engineer regarding the details of the Contractors proposed
actions before the rights of the Contractor in terms of the
statutory provisions are exercised.
(b)
The Contractor shall put in writing all his agreements
with Owners of property outside the road reserve or of
services inside or outside the road reserve in respect of the
following matters:
(i)
The location, extent and use of borrow pits, haul
roads, construction roads and bypasses outside the road
reserve.
(ii)
Compensation, if applicable, for land or materials
taken or for land temporarily used or occupied.
(iii)
The reinstatement of property occupied, used,
damaged or destroyed, or compensation therefor in lieu of
reinstatement.
These agreements shall be signed by all the parties

concerned and delivered to the Engineer.
Where the Contractor cannot obtain the Owner's agreement
in writing, he shall refer the matter to the Engineer and shall
furnish him with details, in writing, of any verbal agreement
made.
(c)
Where, in addition to any agreement with the Owner
of any property to be entered upon or temporarily occupied
or any service to be moved, it is understood or required that
the Contractor shall serve notice on the Owner immediately
before actually entering upon or occupying the private
property or moving a service, and shall give proper notice
thereof in writing, and the Engineer shall be supplied with a
copy of such notice, together with acknowledgement of
receipt.
(d)
On completion of his operations, the Contractor shall
obtain, from the Owner concerned, a written statement to
the effect:
(i)
that the Contractor has fulfilled his obligations under
any written agreement, or, in the absence of a written
agreement,
(ii)
that the Owner has received all the compensation he
is entitled to and is also satisfied that all property occupied,
including borrow pits, haul roads and construction roads,
has been properly restored and is in a satisfactory condition.
In respect of services moved, altered, damaged or affected
in any way, the Contractor shall similarly obtain a written
statement from the Owner that the services have been taken
over in a satisfactory condition.
All such statements shall be signed, dated and delivered to
the Engineer.
(e)
Should the Contractor wish to use land outside the
area provided by the Employer for storing or keeping
material or equipment required for the construction of the
permanent Works, it will be subject to the following:
(i)
That the Engineer approve any area selected for this
purpose.
(ii)
That such land be physically separated from any
production plant or activities and suitably fenced in.
(iii)
That the area used for the aforesaid purpose be
surveyed, and, where the land does not belong to the
Contractor, he shall enter into a contract of lease with the
Owner of such land in respect of the full period for which
such land shall be used for such purpose, which contract
shall stipulate that the Owner shall not have any right
whatsoever to any material stockpiled on such land during
the currency of the contract of lease.
(iv)
That suitable, permanent reference beacons,
approved by the Engineer, be placed next to the area, at the
cost of the Contractor, for use by the Engineer with a view
to, if applicable, taking cross-sections for determining
quantities.
(v)
That only material used for this contract shall be
stored on such land.
1200-7
1215
EXTENSION OF TIME
ABNORMAL RAINFALL
RESULTING
FROM
Extension of time in terms of the relevant clause of the

General Conditions of Contract in respect of abnormal
rainfall shall be determined in terms of Method 1 below,
unless the Project Specifications determine that Method 2
shall be used.
The maximum extension of time which will be considered in
respect of a given period, will be the number of working days
in the period concerned on which work may be executed in
accordance with the provisions of the relevant clause of the
General Conditions of Contract.
(a)
further or concurrent delays and should be treated

separately in so far as extension of time is concerned.
Accurate rain gaugings shall be taken at a suitable point on
the site, and the Contractor shall, at his own expense, take
all necessary precautions to ensure that the rain gauges
cannot be interfered with by unauthorised persons.
Information regarding existing rainfall records, if available
from a suitable rainfall station near the site, will be supplied
in the Project Specifications, together with calculations of
extensions of time for previous years in accordance with the
above formula.
If no suitable rainfall records are available, the above
formula will not apply.
Method 1 (Rainfall formula)

(b)
Extension of time in accordance with this method shall be

calculated separately for each calendar month or part
thereof according to the formula below. It shall be
calculated for the full period of completion of the Contract,
including any extension thereof which may have been
granted:
V = (Nw - Nn) + (Rw - Rn)
X
If any value of V is negative and its absolute value exceeds
Nn, then V shall be taken as equal to minus Nn.
The symbols shall have the following meanings:
V =
Extension of time in calendar days in respect of the

calendar month under consideration.
Nw =
Actual number of days during the calendar month on

which a rainfall of Y mm or more has been recorded.
Method 2 (Critical-path method)
Where the critical-path method is specified in the Project

Specifications for determining extension of time resulting
from abnormal rainfall, it shall be applied as follows:
(i)
A delay caused by inclement weather conditions will
be regarded as a delay only if, in the opinion of the
Engineer, all progress on an item or items of work on the
critical path of the working programme of the Contractor has
been brought to a halt. Delays on working days only (based
on a five-day working week) will be taken into account for
the extension of time, but the Contractor shall make
provision in his programme of work for an expected delay of
"n" working days caused by normal rainy weather, for which
he will not receive any extension of time. The value of "n"
shall be given in the Project Specifications.
(ii)
Extension of time during working days will be granted
to the degree to which actual delays, as defined above,
exceed the number of "n" workings days as mentioned in the
Project Specifications.
Rw = Actual rainfall in mm for the calendar month under

consideration.
1216
Nn =
Average number of days in the relevant calendar

month, as derived from existing rainfall records
provided in the Project Specifications, on which a
rainfall of Y mm or more has been recorded.
Rn =
Average rainfall in mm for the calendar month, as

derived from the rainfall records supplied in the
X =
20, unless otherwise provided in the Project

Specifications.
Y =
10, unless otherwise provided in the Project

Specifications.
The total extension of time shall be the algebraic sum of the

monthly totals for the period under consideration. But if the
grand total is negative, the time for completion shall not be
reduced on account of abnormal rainfall. Extension of time
for parts of a month shall be calculated by pro rata values of
Nn and Rn being used.
The factor (Nw - Nn) shall be considered to represent a fair
allowance for variations from the average number of days
during which rainfall exceeds Y mm. The factor (Rw - Rn)
X shall be considered to represent a fair allowance for
variations from the average for the number of days during
which rainfall does not exceed Y mm but when wet
conditions prevented or disrupted work. This formula does
not take into account any flood damage, which could cause
1200-8
INFORMATION FURNISHED BY THE EMPLOYER
Certain information contained in these Contract documents

or provided separately is being offered in good faith but, in
the circumstances pertaining to the type of information
furnished, no guarantee can be given that all the information
is necessarily correct or representative of the in situ
conditions.
This applies more specifically to all soil tests, soil mapping,
drilling results, geophysical surveys, geological reports,
borrow-pit information, material surveys and reports, and
similar information, the accuracy of which is necessarily
subject to the limitations of testing, sampling, the natural
variation of material or formations being investigated and the
measure of certainty with which conclusions can be drawn
from any investigations made. It also applies to any
materials-utilisation diagram provided, as the diagram may
be subject to major alterations during the progress of the
work, depending on site conditions.
The Employer will not accept any liability for the correctness
or otherwise of the information furnished or for any resulting
damage, whether direct or consequential, should it appear,
during the course of the Contract, that the information
supplied is either incorrect or not representative.
Any reliance placed by the Contractor on this information
shall be at his own risk.
Notwithstanding the above, the Employer will accept

responsibility for the correctness of the following:
other than minor surface damage repairs shall be submitted

to the Engineer for inspection before it is covered up.
(a)
Any rock cores purported to be recovered from
designated test-drill holes.
The previously constructed layer shall be thoroughly cleaned

by the removal of all foreign material before construction of
a succeeding layer or application of a prime coat, surfacing
or surface treatment. In the case of all bituminous work in
particular, the existing layer shall be thoroughly broomed
and all dung, clay, mud and other deleterious material
completely removed. Where necessary, the surface shall
be sprayed with water before, during and after brooming to
remove all foreign material.
(b)
Visual information apparent from the inspection of
open trial pits.
(c)
The results only of any centre-line, borrow-area or
other soil tests given in the Drawings or schedules forming
part of the Contract documents.
1217
PROTECTION
OF THE WORKS
AND
REQUIREMENTS TO BE MET BEFORE
CONSTRUCTION OF NEW WORK ON TOP OF
COMPLETED WORK IS COMMENCED
The general obligations of the Contractor in terms of the

relevant clause of the General Conditions of Contract, shall,
inter alia, include the following:
(a)
The provision of temporary drainage works such as
drains, open channels, banks, etc, and providing and
operating temporary pumps and such other equipment as
may be necessary for adequately protecting, draining and
dewatering the Works and temporary Works. This will be in
addition to any permanent drainage works specified and
installed, and in addition to any temporary drainage works
specifically paid for separately as in the case of diversions.
(b)
Material in borrow pits shall not be allowed to
become excessively wet, all completed layers shall be
properly drained, dumps of material on completed layer
work shall not inhibit surface drainage or form wet spots
under and around dumps, and all parts of the Works shall
be protected against erosion by floods and rain.
Material shall not be spread on a layer that is so wet as to
result in the danger of any damage being caused to the
layer during compaction of a subsequent layer, or when
opened to traffic.
When material is spread out on the road, the Contractor
shall ensure that, during wet periods, it will have a good
cross-fall and a light compaction on the surface in order to
facilitate run-off during rainy weather.
(c)
Fill and cut slopes shall be repaired immediately
whenever damaged by surface water. Where erosion
occurs on high fills, the slopes shall be repaired by cutting
back to form benches and by compacting the backfill
mechanically to the specified controlled densities, using
suitable light equipment.
(d)
Excavations for pipe drains, culverts, service ducts
and similar structures shall be adequately protected against
the possible ingress of water during rain-storms.
(e)
All completed layer work shall be protected and
maintained until the following layer is constructed.
Maintenance shall include immediate repairs to any damage
or defects which may occur and shall be repeated as often
as may be necessary to keep the layer continuously intact
and in a good condition.
(f)
Before any completed layer is primed or a
succeeding layer is constructed thereon, any damage to the
existing layer shall be repaired, so that, after repair or
reconstruction if necessary, it will conform in all respects to
the requirements specified for that layer. All repair work
Work performed as part of the above obligations shall not be

measured and paid for separately, and the cost thereof shall
be included in the rates tendered for the various items of
work requiring protection and the items for the Contractors
establishment on the site, as specified in Section 1300.
1218
REMEDIAL WORK
When any part of the Works or any equipment or material is

found, upon examination by the Engineer, not to conform to
the requirements or at any stage before final acceptance is
damaged so that it no longer conforms to the requirements
of the Specifications, the Engineer may order its complete
removal and replacement, at the Contractors expense, with
satisfactory work, equipment or material, or he may permit
the Contractor to apply remedial measures in order to make
good any such defects or damage. The actual remedial
measures taken shall at all times be entirely at the
Contractors own initiative, risk and cost, but subject to the
Engineer's approval regarding the details thereof.
In particular, remedial measures shall ensure full
compliance with the requirements of the Specifications of
the final product, shall not endanger or damage any other
part of the Works, and shall be carefully controlled and
submitted to the Engineer for examination when completed
or at any intermediate stage as may be required.
For the guidance of the Contractor, an indication is given
below of what would normally be required in the more
common cases of defects or damage, but the Engineer will
in no way be bound to accept or approve the measures
given below, as the actual remedial measures will be
dictated by the circumstances of each particular case.
(a)
Earthworks
(i)
Where a cut slope has been over-excavated or
undercut, backfilling will not normally be allowed and the
entire slope may have to be retrimmed to obtain a uniform
slope.
(ii)
Where the floor of a cutting has been taken too
deep, it will normally require backfilling and recompaction
with selected gravel in the case of soil or gravel excavation,
and with crushed stone or suitably sized rock in the case of
hard excavations. All necessary measures shall be taken to
drain away groundwater that may accumulate in backfilled
sections.
(iii)
Excess width of fills will have to be trimmed down.
(iv)
Where erosion has damaged the surface of cuts or
fills, the damage shall be made good by backfilling with
suitable material and retrimming. In more serious cases, the
slopes may have to be cut back by benching, backfilled and
1200-9
compacted to the required standard of compaction with

suitable light equipment, and then retrimmed.
(b)
Stabilising
Any sections failing to meet the requirements specified or

damaged to the extent that they require breaking-up and
recompaction will have to be restabilised with the type and
quantity of stabilising agent ordered by the Engineer. The
Engineer may also order that the layer be removed entirely
and replaced with fresh material to be stabilised.
(c)
Local defects in pavement layers
Where remedial measures are taken to make good local

defects, the width of the area to be repaired by machines
shall be such as will be necessary to accommodate the full
width of the machines used, and it shall be of a reasonable
length to ensure effective operation by the machinery. The
depth to which material will have to be removed will depend
on the type of material. Gravel will require breaking up to a
depth of at least 75 mm and crushed stone will usually
require breaking up over its full depth. Asphalt material will
normally require removal over its full depth.
(d)
Concrete
Concrete work will normally require the cutting-back and

complete removal of any weak or honeycombed sections
and making good by using special epoxy adhesives to bind
fresh concrete to old concrete. Cracks, when permitted to
remain, shall be injected with suitable epoxy compounds,
and test cores shall then be drilled for testing the efficacy of
the injection process.
1219
Only clean water, free from undesirable concentrations of

deleterious salts and other materials, shall be used. Water
supplied to all the offices, laboratories and houses shall be
wholesome and potable to the satisfaction of the Medical
Officers in the area. All water sources used shall be
approved by the Engineer. In discharging and diverting
water the Contractor shall avoid flooding or damaging other
Works or services, causing erosion and polluting water
courses.
AUTHO RI S ED
TOLERANCES
M EASURE M E NTS
AND
The work specified in the various sections of these

Specifications shall comply with the various dimensional and
1200-10
In the description of certain pay items, where it is stated that

quantities will be determined from the authorised
dimensions, this shall be taken to mean the dimensions as
specified or shown on the Drawings or, if changed, as finally
instructed by the Engineer, without any allowance for
tolerances being specified. If the work is therefore
constructed in compliance with the authorised dimensions,
plus or minus any tolerances allowed, quantities will be
based on the authorised dimensions regardless of the actual
dimensions to which the work is constructed.
Where the work is not constructed in accordance with the
authorised dimensions, plus or minus any tolerances
allowed, the Engineer may nevertheless, in his sole
discretion, accept the work for payment. In such cases no
payment will be made in respect of quantities of work or
material in excess of those calculated from the authorised
dimensions and where the actual dimensions are less than
the authorised dimensions, minus any tolerance allowed,
quantities for payment shall be based on the actual
dimensions as constructed.
1221
DRAWINGS PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR
Where the Contractor is required to prepare any drawings

for the purpose of this Contract, they shall be prepared as
specified below and in accordance with any further
requirements specified by the Engineer.
WATER
The Contractor himself shall make arrangements for

procuring, transporting, storing, distributing and applying the
water needed for construction of the Works and for all
houses, laboratories and workshops. He shall undertake all
arrangements including pipelines and meters for connecting
to local water mains and the provision of pumps, storage
tanks and water conveyance where necessary, payment for
all fees and water charges and the satisfactory removal of
all such arrangements and provisions on completion of the
Works. No direct payment will be made for providing water,
the cost of which shall be included in the rates tendered for
the various items of work for which water is needed.
1220
other tolerances specified in each case. Where no

tolerances are specified, the standard of workmanship shall
be in accordance with normal good practice.
No
representation is made that the full specified tolerances will
be available independently of each other, and the Contractor
is cautioned that the liberal or full use of any one or more
tolerances may deprive him of the full or any use of
tolerances relating to other aspects of the work. The latter
would apply particularly in respect of level tolerances on
layer work and the related requirements regarding layer
thicknesses.
The Contractor shall be provided with one transparent

polyester standard drawing sheet and one steel schedule
sheet, which shall be used as masters for all drawings
prepared by him and submitted to the Engineer for
consideration.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his
adjudication one transparent polyester print, 0.05 mm thick,
of each drawing prepared by him. The standard of detailing
and quality of print shall be the same as those of the
Drawings supplied to the Contractor under the Contract.
The Drawings shall be compiled in the official language of
the Contract and shall comply in all respects with the
requirements of the Employer.
Accepted Drawings shall form an integral part of the
Contract documents, and any drawing not accepted and
signed will not be permitted on the site of the Works for
construction purposes and/or used for the manufacture of
any item. Notwithstanding the approval and/or acceptance
and signing of the Drawings, the Contractor shall take full
responsibility for all details, discrepancies, omissions,
errors, etc, in respect of the said Drawings as well as for the
consequences thereof.
The Contractor shall submit only fully completed Drawings
in accordance with this specification and shall not be entitled
to claim for delays resulting from the submission of
incomplete drawings. The Engineer will require a period of
four to eight weeks, depending on circumstances, for

reviewing the complete drawings.
No direct payment for design, preparation and submission
of Drawings will be made and all costs shall be included in
the rates tendered for the relevant pay items as provided in
the Schedule of Quantities. The cost of reviewing the
design/drawings shall be for the Contractors account.
1222
another, the Contractor shall obtain the latest edition, which

shall be kept on the site before any work of this nature is
commenced.
Attention is drawn particularly to the requirements contained
in the Specifications regarding the approval that must be
obtained from the Rail Authority for a work permit or
occupation of its property and the approval of falsework and
formwork plans.
USE OF EXPLOSIVES
1224
Generally the Contractor will be permitted to use explosives

for breaking up rock and hard material during excavation, for
demolishing existing structures, and for such other purposes
for which it may normally be required, subject to the
following conditions:
(a)
The Engineer will have the right to prohibit the use of
explosives in cases where, in his opinion, the risk of injury
to persons or damage to property or adjoining structures is
too high. Such action by the Engineer shall not entitle the
Contractor to any additional payment for having to resort to
other less economical methods of demolition unless
otherwise provided in the Project Specifications or the
Schedule of Quantities.
(b)
with.
The provisions of Section 3300 shall be complied
(c)
Legal provisions in regard to the use of explosives
and the requirements of the Inspector of Explosives or
equivalent shall be strictly complied with.
(d)
The Contractor shall, at his own cost, make
arrangements for supplying, transporting, storing and using
explosives.
(e)
Before any blasting is undertaken, the Contractor,
together with the Engineer, shall examine and measure up
any buildings, houses or structures in the vicinity of the
proposed blasting and establish and record, together with
the Owner thereof, the extent of any cracks or damage that
may exist before blasting operations are commenced. It
shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to make good,
at his own expense, any further damage to such houses,
buildings or structures which results from the blasting
operations.
(f)
Where there is considerable danger of damage to
power or telephone lines or underground or other services
or any other property, the Contractor shall suitably adapt his
method of blasting and the size of the charges, and shall
take adequate protective measures, such as cover blasting,
in order to limit the risk of damage as far as possible.
(g)
The Engineer shall, twenty-four hours before each
blasting operation is carried out, be advised thereof, in
writing, unless otherwise agreed on with the Engineer.
1223
WORK ON, OVER, UNDER OR ADJACENT TO

RAILWAY LINES
All work carried out on, over, under or adjacent to railway

lines shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the
latest edition of the Specifications of the relevant Rail
Authority, a copy of which will normally be included in the
Project Specifications. Where no such copy is included in
the Project Specifications or where the copy included in the
Project Specifications is amended or superseded by
THE HANDING-OVER OF THE ROAD RESERVE
The road reserve will be handed over to the Contractor for

construction, subject to such conditions as may be specified
in the Project Specifications regarding matters such as the
sequence in which sections will be handed over and must be
completed, the maximum total length of bypasses that will
be allowed to be in operation at any time, and any other
matters relating to the Contractors use and occupation of
the road reserve.
1225
HAUL ROADS
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval full

details of any haul and construction roads he proposes to
build. Such details shall be submitted well in advance in
order to afford the Engineer sufficient time to investigate
their implications. Haul roads may not be built without the
Engineer's prior approval, and shall be kept to a minimum,
particularly in areas where their impact on the environment
may be serious.
1226
MEASUREMENT OF DEPTH OF TRENCHES AND

FOUNDATION EXCAVATIONS
Where trenches or foundation excavations are required

below the level of mass excavations for the road prism, the
depth of excavation of the trenches or foundations shall be
measured from ground level after completion of the mass
excavation, unless the Engineer is satisfied that the
excavation of the trenches or foundations from the original
ground level or any lower level was unavoidable. Where
trenches are excavated in accordance with the fill method in
the completed or partly completed road prism, the depth of
excavation shall be measured from the levels at which the
Engineer instructed the Contractor to commence trench
excavations. The Contractor shall ensure that he obtains
such instructions in good time and, where required, shall
submit proposals to the Engineer for approval.
1227
MONTHLY SITE MEETINGS
The Contractor or his authorised representative shall attend

monthly meetings on the site with representatives of the
Employer and the Engineer, at dates and times to be
determined by the Employer. Such meetings will be held for
evaluating the progress of the Contract and for discussing
matters pertaining to the Contract which any of the parties
represented may wish to raise. Such meetings are not
intended for discussing matters concerning the normal dayto-day running of the Contract.
1200-11
Colour photographs showing the progress of the Works shall

be taken every month by the Contractor from positions to be
selected by the Engineer.
The number of photographs required is given in the Special
Specifications. Prints 200x150 mm of each photograph
together with the negatives shall be handed to the Engineer.
Each photograph shall be numbered and a statement shall
be submitted giving the locations, date when taken and a
brief description or title.
1228
LEGAL PROVISIONS
The Contractor shall keep himself fully conversant with the

latest enactments, provisions and regulations of all
legislative and statutory bodies, and, in all respects and at
all times, shall comply with such enactments, provisions and
regulations in regard to executing the Contract.
1200-12
1229
FINAL CLEARANCE
Upon completion of each section of the Works, the

Contractor shall cleanup the site, remove all temporary
buildings, plant and debris. He shall level off and fine grade
all excavated material which is surplus to requirements. The
whole of the site shall be left in a clean and workmanlike
condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
No separate payment shall be made for any work included
in this clause and the costs shall be deemed to be included
in the rates of the relevant items entered in the Schedule of
Quantities.
SERIES 1000 :
GENERAL
(b)
Value-related obligations . . . . . . . . . . . lump sum
SECTION 1300 :
CONTRACTOR'S ESTABLISHMENT ON SITE AND GENERAL

OBLIGATIONS
(c)
Time-related obligations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . month
CONTENTS
1301
1302
1303
SCOPE
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PAYMENT
1301
SCOPE
(i)
Setting up and maintaining his organisation, camps,
accommodation and constructional plant on the site and
their removal on completion of the contract.
(ii)
Complying with the requirements of the General
Conditions of Contract and Section 1200, including the
effecting of insurances and providing the sureties required.
This Section covers the establishment of the Contractor's

organisation, camp and constructional plant on the site and
their removal on completion of the contract. It also covers
payment for certain general obligations, risks and liabilities
and general items of cost not covered elsewhere.
1302
(a)
Camps, constructional plant and testing facilities
The Contractor shall establish his construction camps,

offices, stores, workshops and testing facilities on the site.
The exact location of these facilities shall be approved
beforehand by the Engineer. Accommodation, ablution and
other facilities for site staff shall also be provided as
required and the standard of accommodation and the
location of all facilities shall comply with the requirements of
the authorities concerned and those of the Engineer.
Prior to starting with construction, the Contractor shall also
move all constructional plant and personnel to the site. On
completion of the work and after receiving approval in writing
from the Engineer, all constructional plant, buildings, fencing
and other temporary structures shall be removed and the
camp site shall be restored to its original condition and left
neat and tidy.
(b)
Maintenance during construction
During construction the Contractor's camps, staff living

quarters and other facilities shall be maintained in a neat
and tidy condition.
(c)
Legal and contractual requirements

responsibility to the public
and
The Contractor shall take all the necessary steps to comply

with the General Conditions of Contract, particularly in
respect of the insurances and sureties required and his
general obligations to the public and the Employer. He shall
comply with all the regulations of statutory bodies.
1303
Unit
13.01 The Contractor's general

obligations:
(a)
(iii)
All general site and office overheads, profit, financing
costs, risks, legal and contractual responsibilities and other
costs and obligations of a preliminary or general nature
which are not specifically measured for payment under any
other items of payment.
The lump sum tendered under Subitem 13.01(a) above shall
represent full compensation for the fixed part of the
Contractor's general obligations (ie that part which is
substantially fixed and is not a function of the time required
for the completion of the Contract or of the value of the
work).
Should the final value of the work (excluding any payments
in terms of the General Conditions of Contract) increase or
decrease by 20% or less in relation to the tendered amount
(less any allowances, if any, in the tender for price
adjustments in terms of the General Conditions of Contract),
the lump sum tendered for Subitem 13.01(a) shall not be
subject to any variation whatsoever. However, should the
said increase or decrease of the final value of the work
exceed 20% of the tendered amount, the provisions of the
General Conditions of Contract shall apply to that portion of
the said increase or decrease which is in excess of 20% of
the tendered amount.
Payment of the lump sum tendered under Subitem 13.01(a)
will be made in three instalments, as follows:
(1)
The first instalment, 50% of the lump sum, will be
paid in the first payment certificate after the Contractor has
met all his obligations under this Section and has made a
substantial start with construction in accordance with the
approved programme.
(2)
The second instalment, 35% of the lump sum, will be
paid when the value of the work done reaches one half of
the tendered amount, excluding contingencies and price
adjustments in terms of the General Conditions of Contract.
(3)
The third and final instalment, 15% of the lump sum,
will be paid when the Works have been completed and the
Contractor has fulfilled all the requirements of this Section.
Before any payment is made under this subitem, the
Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that he has provided
camps and constructional plant of good quality on the site,
the value of which exceeds that of the first instalment.
PAYMENT
Item
Payment of the lump sums tendered under Subitems (a), (b)

and the rate per month for Subitem (c) shall, for the three
subitems together, include full compensation for all the
Contractor's charges in respect of the following items,
collectively termed the "Contractor's General Obligations".
The Contractor may also be required to furnish documentary

proof that he owns the camps and constructional plant on
the site, the value of which shall exceed that of the first
instalment.
Fixed obligations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lump sum

1300-1
In the event of the Contractor not being able to satisfy the

Engineer as to the ownership of the camps and
constructional plant, the Engineer shall have the right to
withhold parts of any payments to be made under this
subitem, until the Works have been completed.
The lump sum tendered under Subitem 13.01(b) shall
represent full compensation for that part of the Contractor's
general obligations, which are a function of only the value of
the work, but not of the period of completion. Should the
final value of the work (excluding any payments in terms of
the General Conditions of Contract) increase or decrease by
20% or less in relation to the tendered amount (less any
allowances, if any, in the tender for price adjustments in
terms of the General Conditions of Contract), the lump sum
tendered for Subitem 13.01(b) will be increased or
decreased pro rata in full settlement of any difference in
value-related general obligations resulting from an increased
or decreased value of the work.
However, should the said increase or decrease in the final
value of the work exceed 20% of the tendered amount, the
above-mentioned pro rata increase or decrease in the lump
sum tendered under Subitem 13.01(b) shall apply up to the
limit of 20%, and the provisions of the General Conditions of
Contract shall apply to that portion of the said increase or
decrease which is in excess of the said limit of 20% of the
tendered amount.
The lump sum tendered in Subitem 13.01(b) will be payable
monthly in instalments in relation to the value of work done
(excluding the value of any price adjustments in terms of
the General Conditions of Contract).
1300-2
The tendered rate per month for Subitem 13.01(c)

represents full compensation for that part of the Contractor's
general obligations which are mainly a function of
construction time. The tendered sum will be paid monthly,
pro rata for parts of a month, from the date on which the
Contractor has received a written instruction, in terms of the
General Conditions of Contract, to start the work until the
end of the period for completion of the Works, plus any
extension thereof as provided for in the General Conditions
of Contract, provided that:
(a)
should the Works be certified as having been
completed before the contractual date for completion of the
Works, the Contractor will then be entitled to payments in
regard to the unexpired period for completion;
(b)
should the progress of the Contractor in terms of the
value of work done be in arrears in regard to his approved
original programme, payments in respect of this item may
be limited to payments for that period, which, in his original
programme (after suitable adjustments in respect of the
extension of time granted) agrees with the actual value of
work done.
Any payment made under Item 13.01 will not be taken into
account when determining whether the value of a certificate
complies with the "minimum amount of interim certificate",
as laid down in the appendix to tender. The adjustments
specified in Subitems (a), (b) and (c) will be made only if the
value of the work or the period for completion were to
change and it is agreed that such adjustments will be in full
settlement of the changed compensation for amended
general obligations.
SERIES 1000 :
GENERAL
SECTION 1400 :
HO US I N G , O F F I CE S AND
LABO RATORIES FOR THE
ENGINEER'S SITE PERSONNEL
CONTENTS
1401
1402
1403
1404
1405
1406
1407
SCOPE
OFFICES AND LABORATORIES
HOUSING
SERVICES
PROVISION OF VEHICLES
GENERAL
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
1401
SCOPE
This Section covers the provision of accommodation for the

Engineer's supervisory staff. This accommodation shall
include the necessary office and laboratory accommodation,
houses and quarters for employees, and the provision of all
the necessary services.
1402
OFFICES AND LABORATORIES
(a)
General
The clear height of all offices between floor and ceiling shall
be 2.4 m minimum. All windows shall be of the type that can
open over the full window area.
All accommodation shall meet with the approval of the
Engineer.
(b)
Offices
The various types of offices required shall be as shown on

the Drawings and schedules. Unless otherwise specified or
detailed, the fittings, furniture and equipment provided in
accordance with the Schedule of Quantities shall conform to
the following requirements:
(i)
Each office desk shall have a surface area of at least
1.5 m2 and shall be provided with at least three drawers, one
of which can be locked.
(ii)
General-purpose steel cabinets shall have at least
1.5 m2 shelf area and a volume of 0.70 m3 each. Each
cabinet shall have a lock with two keys.
(iii)
Steel filing cabinets shall each be fitted with four
drawers on runners. Each cabinet shall be fitted with a lock
and shall be approximately 1 300 mm high, 460 mm wide
and 600 mm from front to back.
(iv)
Shelves shall be suitable for storing all the contract
drawings or shall else be as detailed on the Drawings.
Buildings for offices and laboratories shall be constructed

from timber, fibre-cement, or other approved materials. The
buildings shall have double walls filled with insulating
material and lined on the inside with timber or other
approved material. Ceilings shall be provided for both office
and laboratory buildings. Office buildings shall have timber
floors or concrete floors with vinyl floor tiles and laboratory
buildings shall have concrete floors. Window areas of these
buildings shall be at least equal to 25% of the floor area.
Each building shall be provided with a verandah on one
side, running for the full length of the building. The verandah
shall be 1.5 m wide and shall have a 100 mm thick concrete
floor.
(v)
Each wash-hand basin shall be fitted with taps and
a drain.
Stores shall have galvanised corrugated steel roofs and

100 mm thick concrete floors. The sides of the stores shall
be fenced off from floor level to the roof with 50 mm
diamond-mesh wire. Each store shall have one lockable
door.
(ix)
Electric power plug points shall be provided. Each
office shall have at least two 15 ampere plug points.
Office and laboratory buildings shall be painted with an

approved paint after erection. The paintwork shall be
maintained during the contract period.
Each door shall be provided with a lock and two keys.
The various units of accommodation and the fittings shall be
constructed in accordance with the details as shown on the
Drawings or provided by the Engineer.
The siting and orientation of all offices, laboratories, housing
or other accommodation shall be to the Engineer's
satisfaction and shall be decided on in consultation with him
and confirmed in writing before erection. All accommodation
shall include the provision of 220/250 volt electricity, and
where required, fresh clean potable water and sewerage,
including septic tanks, if necessary, which will be considered
as part and parcel of the accommodation provided and will
not be paid for separately, except in so far as the cost
thereof shall be covered under Item 14.08.
(vi)
Air-conditioning units and heaters shall be as
specified in Subclause 1402(f).
(vii)
Lights shall be of the fluorescent type, either double
80 watt, single 80 watt or double 55 watt, or of the
incandescent type according to that which is required or
specified.
(viii) Each draughtsman's stool shall be fitted with a
padded seat with an adjustable seat height.
(x)
Each drawing table shall have either an inclined or a
horizontal drawing surface as may be required and a smooth
top built to the dimensions shown on the Drawings.
(xi)
Chairs shall be robust and comfortable.
(xii)
A complete telephone service, together with an
exchange line and the number of extensions specified shall
be provided. The prime cost sum shall also include the cost
of all telephone calls in connection with contract
administration.
(xiii) Each conference table shall be large enough to seat
twelve persons, and shall have an area of at least 4 m2.
(xiv)
Blinds shall be one of two types, as may be required:
(1)
Adjustable venetian blinds to permit light to enter the
room, but which will exclude direct light;
(2)
Opaque roller blinds.
1400-1
(c)
Laboratories
All or any of four types of laboratories may be required:

soils laboratories
bituminous-materials laboratories
chemical laboratories
concrete-testing laboratories
The sizes, layout and other details of the laboratories shall
be as shown on the Drawings and schedules of fittings,
equipment and furniture.
The laboratories, fittings, furniture and equipment shall be
as follows:
(i)
Ordinary chairs, telephone extensions, 15 ampere
220/250 volt electricity plug points, air-conditioners, heaters
and lights shall meet the same requirements as specified for
offices.
(ii)
Shelf space provided against walls shall be of robust
construction and shelving shall be of suitable timber or fibrecement material, depending on requirements. Shelving
below work-tables shall be 390 mm above floor level, and
above working areas, 1 980 mm above floor level.
(xi)
Extractor fans, where required, shall be so mounted
as to operate noiselessly. They shall have a capacity of at
least 0.15 kW each.
(xii)
Fume cupboards shall be constructed in accordance
(xiii) Where required, concrete footings and pedestals
shall be constructed to the dimensions indicated by the
Engineer for installing certain testing equipment.
(xiv) When required, baths for curing concrete test cubes,
beams and cylinders shall be provided. The baths shall be
rectangular in shape and regarding the inside dimensions
the width shall not exceed 1.0 m and the depth shall not
exceed 0.6 m.
(xv)
When required, a 0.3 m3 capacity refrigerator shall
be supplied.
(d)
Car ports
(iii)
Work-bench areas shall be of two types as may be
required:
Car ports shall be so constructed as to protect vehicles

parked in them at all times against the direct rays of the sun
and from hail. The car ports shall be at least 20 m2 in area
and the floors shall consist of a layer of broken stone to
alleviate dusty and muddy conditions.
(1)
Of wooden construction: The tops shall be hard and
smooth and free from warping or other defects.
(e)
(2)
With concrete tops: The tops shall be at least 75 mm
thick concrete slabs with a smooth, hard steel-trowelled
finish.
All work-benches shall be robust and their upper surfaces
shall be 920 mm above floor level.
(iv)
Gas installations shall consist of the necessary gas
cylinders, regulators, tubing and taps.
(v)
High stools for use at work-benches shall be robust
and, if of fixed height, shall be 800 mm high.
(vi)
Where required, a 380 volt 3-phase electric power
supply shall be provided. Power points for ovens and a
crusher shall be suitable for the purpose. Power points in
oven rooms shall be 1.2 m above floor level.
(vii)
Concrete working floors shall be at least 125 mm
thick and provided with a hard smooth finish. The working
areas shall be either entirely open or under a shelter as may
be required.
Areas around offices
The access and other roads around the offices shall be

treated to make them dust free either by crushed stone,
suitable dust-laying chemicals, or bituminous surfacing
being used or other approved means being adopted. They
shall be well drained and kept trafficable and free from mud
at all times. Footpaths shall be similarly treated to provide
convenient access to all buildings.
(f)
Air-conditioning units and heaters
Where required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall

provide and install air-conditioning units and heaters.
The air-conditioning units shall be of the electrically
operated compressor type with closed circuit and of the
evaporation type. The capacity of the air-conditioning units
shall be at least 2.2 kW each.
Heaters shall preferably be of a space-heating type without
exposed elements and shall have a capacity of not less than
1.5 kW each.
(viii) Wash basins shall be as prescribed either of

stainless steel or precast concrete with an area of at least
0.3 m 2 and a minimum depth of 0.3 m. They shall be
provided with swan-neck type laboratory taps and drain
pipes.
The Contractor may also be required to install airconditioning units in any housing accommodation provided.
(ix)
A supply of fresh clean potable water at a constant
head of not less than 3 m at the taps shall be provided.
Storage capacity in respect of the laboratory water supply
shall be not less than 700 litres.
Ablution units shall be well-ventilated units constructed in

accordance with the details shown on the Drawings. They
may be constructed from fibre-cement sheeting with steel
frames or from other suitable approved materials, and the
floors shall be of concrete with vinyl floor tiles. Latrines shall
be provided with vitreous enamel WC pans with PVC seats
and covers and flush cisterns. Wash basins shall be of
vitreous enamel, complete with taps and drains.
(x)
Fire extinguishers shall be of the BCF
(bromochlorodifluoromethane) type manufactured to
BS 1721 and suitable for Types A, B, C and E fires. The
extinguishers shall contain not less than 2.5 kg of
extinguishing fluid and shall be fitted to the wall at suitable
positions by means of quick-release brackets. They shall be
freshly charged and the seals shall be unbroken.
1400-2
(g)
Ablution units
Provision shall be made for suitable sewerage as specified

in Clause 1404.
Where required, a separate shower and change room shall

be provided, complete with shower, hot and cold running
water and drains.
provided in order to obtain a minimum head equal to 3 m of

water at the taps, together with the pipes leading to the
supply tank.
Each latrine or shower shall be provided with a door fitted

with a latch. Each ablution unit shall be provided with an
outside door with a lock. At least two keys shall be provided
for each lock.
(b)
1403
HOUSING
(a)
Prefabricated houses
Prefabricated houses shall be constructed of wood, fibrecement or other approved material and shall have double
walls filled with insulating material. Each house shall have
a clear height from floor to ceiling of at least 2.74 m.
Glass-fibre insulating material shall also be provided on top
of the ceilings. Floors shall be of timber or alternatively of
concrete covered with suitable carpeting or vinyl tiles.
Each house shall have a floor area of at least 120 m2, with
three bedrooms, a living-room, dining-room, bathroom and
kitchen. In addition, the house shall have an enclosed
veranda of approximately 20 m2 in area.
The main frame of each house shall be of steel or light alloy.
All timber used shall be of a good quality, properly oven
dried and treated against pests. All fittings shall be
accurately installed.
Each house shall, after erection, be properly painted inside
and outside with an approved paint, and the paintwork shall
be maintained during the contract period.
Outbuildings
A car port as described in Subclause 1402(d) for one or two

cars shall be provided with each house.
A servant's room with a minimum area of 12 m2, constructed
as specified for offices and laboratories, shall be provided
with each house. A latrine with flush toilet and separate
shower shall also be provided.
(c)
Rented accommodation
(i)
Instead of the houses described above, the
Contractor may provide suitable rented or purchased
houses, approved by the Engineer, which will provide at
least the same standard of comfort as that of the
prefabricated houses described above, in the nearest town
or elsewhere.
The terms of any lease for such accommodation shall be
subject to the Engineer's approval and shall contain
provision, where the Owner agrees, for an extension of the
lease on pre-agreed terms during any extended time for
completion of the Contract, as well as provision for the lease
to be taken over by the Engineer or another Contractor in
the event of default by or insolvency of the Contractor.
Notwithstanding the Engineer's approval of the conditions of
the lease, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for
providing the accommodation for the full period required and
for suitable substitute accommodation should the alternative
accommodation be no longer available.
Each house shall be provided with the following:

(i)
A bath and shower with drain and inside flush toilet.
(ii)
A wash basin with drain pipe.
(iii)
A metal kitchen-sink unit with stainless steel basin
and draining boards and a cupboard with shelves.
(iv)
A kitchen dresser, linen cupboard, and built-in
wardrobes in the bedrooms.
(v)
A suitable geyser, a kitchen stove and refrigerator.
The geyser shall have a capacity of approximately 140 R with
a water supply from an outside tank or from a water main.
The stove shall be a four-plate stove complete with grill,
oven and splash plate. The refrigerator shall have a volume
of at least 0.3 m3.
(vi)
Cold-water pipes from a suitable source to the bath,
shower, wash basin, toilet and sink units, complete with taps
where required.
(vii)
Hot-water pipes from the geyser to the bath, shower,
wash basin and sink unit, complete with taps.
(viii) Electric lights in all rooms and passages, with plug
points in the kitchen, living-room and all bedrooms. The
house shall be fully wired and connected to a 220/250 volt
AC power source.
(ix)
Good-quality locks on all doors.
The Contractor shall also be responsible for the cost of

additional travelling expenses, if any, arising from the use of
alternative or substitute permanent housing. Such costs
may be subtracted from any moneys owing to the Contractor
for providing housing.
(ii)
The Engineer may also order the Contractor to pay
for any hotel or other accommodation or leased houses
required and available. This accommodation may be in
addition to or instead of the accommodation specified. The
Contractor shall enter into the necessary contracts for the
lease of such accommodation as may be required and shall
not unreasonably object to the terms and conditions of such
leases to be negotiated by the Engineer.
The cost of drawing up and entering into such leases shall
be refundable if paid by the Contractor. Where such
accommodation is contemplated in advance, allowance shall
be made for the cost thereof by inclusion of a suitable
provisional sum. The provision of such accommodation shall
be classed as "extra work" and payment therefor shall be
made as specified in the relevant clause of the General
Conditions of Contract.
(iii)
The Contractor's attention is drawn to the distinction
made between alternative accommodation offered by him in
terms of Subclause (i) above and accommodation he is
ordered to provide in terms of Subclause (ii) above, in so far
as the method of payment, his obligation and risks and the
period for which the accommodation is to be provided and
paid for are concerned.
(x)
Where the water supply of the house is not
connected to a water main, an external elevated cold-water
storage tank with a capacity of at least 3 000 R shall be
1400-3
(d)
Accommodation for labourers
Accommodation for labourers employed by the Engineer

shall be provided either on the site or, if this is not possible,
in the Contractor's own compound or in the nearest town.
In the latter case, the Contractor shall make provision for
daily transport of the labourers arriving on the site at 07:00
and departing from the site at 17:30. The accommodation
shall be constructed as specified for offices and laboratories
in housing units in accordance with the details shown on the
Drawings. Each unit shall be provided with opaque
windows, all of which can be opened at least halfway, and
a steel door with lock or padlock. Provision shall be made
for 6 m 2 of floor area for each labourer, in addition to a
sturdy bedstead, a new mattress of acceptable quality, a
steel locker not less than 0.7 m3 in size with hanging and
shelf space, and which can be locked, and a sturdy steel
chair. A wooden table at least 1.0 m2 in size shall be
provided for every three labourers. If shown on the
Drawings, the units shall be provided with approved heaters.
An ablution unit shall consist of one well-ventilated section
containing a flush-type latrine complete with WC pan and
PVC seat and cover, and another section containing a
shower and a wash basin, all complete with the necessary
running hot and cold water, taps, drains and sewerage. The
hut shall be of robust construction with a concrete floor and
may be steel or timber-framed and clad with galvanised-iron
or fibre-cement sheeting. It shall have a roof and only one
door provided with a lock and two keys.
A cooking unit shall consist of a hut as detailed on the
Drawings. The hut shall be of the same construction as
specified for the ablution unit. It shall be provided with a gas
or smoke-free coal-fired stove, a large wash basin at least
0.5 m2 in area and 300 m deep suitable for washing clothes,
a single kitchen sink, and at least 1.0 m2 of concrete working
slab and 1.5 m2 of shelving. All the necessary taps, drains,
sewerage, and a hot and cold-water supply shall be
provided.
A latrine shall consist of a single well-ventilated hut of the
same construction as specified for ablution huts and
containing a flush-type latrine complete with WC pan and
PVC seat and cover.
The Contractor may offer the use of already available
accommodation of equal standard in lieu of any of the
accommodation specified above.
Where electricity is available, the Contractor shall supply
electric lights in all housing units. A reasonable supply of
fuel shall be provided for firing stoves for cooking and hot
water.
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the
necessary approval from any state department or any Local
Authority having jurisdiction in the matter for:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
the siting of the accommodation;

the plans according to which the accommodation is
to be constructed;
the accommodation as constructed.
The proposals by the Contractor, which in regard to (i), (ii)

and (iii), are to be submitted to the Authorities concerned for
approval, shall be drafted in consultation with the land
Owner.
The approval for (i) and (ii) above shall be obtained prior to
construction and for (iii) prior to the handing-over for
occupation.
1400-4
1404
SERVICES
(a)
Sanitary arrangements
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all sanitary

services necessary for keeping latrines in a clean, neat and
hygienic condition.
When no municipal sewage treatment is available, the
Contractor shall provide the necessary septic tanks for all
latrines. Waste water and septic-tank effluent shall be taken
into properly designed French drains. The Contractor shall
also make provision for the removal of all rubbish.
Where the construction of septic tanks or a water-borne
sewerage scheme is not feasible, the Contractor shall
construct conservancy tanks and make arrangements for
the removal and disposal of sewage.
(b)
Water, electricity and gas
The Contractor shall provide a constant supply of clean

potable water suitable for human consumption as well as the
necessary electric power at 220/250 volts to the offices,
laboratories and housing.
The Contractor shall, at his own cost, provide and maintain
a supply of electricity and the reticulation thereof to the
housing, offices and laboratories.
The power source shall be suitable for domestic, office and
laboratory use with an anticipated large variance in load
factor. Three-phase power shall be supplied at a nominal
voltage of 400/231 volts and a nominal frequency of 50 Hz.
The source of power shall be either from a recognised
power-supply Authority or by an on-site alternator.
The electrical load shall be determined by an appropriate
diversity factor being applied to the sum of the connected
load, due allowance being had for the starting load,
efficiency and power factor of motors, or shall be estimated
on the basis of 10 kVA single phase per house, 1.2 kVA/m2
of laboratory floor area (three phase) and 0.35 kVA/m2 of
office area. Allowance shall be made for a spare capacity of
15% with a minimum of 15 kVA. A detailed load estimate
shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to any
final arrangements being made for a source of power.
In the event of electricity being generated by the Contractor,
the motor-alternator shall be suitable to maintain the voltage
so that it will not deviate by more than 5% from the nominal
voltage, and to maintain the frequency so that it will not
deviate from the nominal frequency by more than 2 Hz over
the entire load range from 0% to 100% of full load, also in
the event of switching on and off all normal loads connected
to the supply. Power shall be available to the housing,
offices and the laboratory for 24 hours per day and between
06:00 and 22:00 for other accommodation.
Power shall be distributed by means of enclosed distribution
boards with adequate weather and tamper protection,
suitably rated circuit breakers, earth-leakage units or fuses,
and by means of adequately sized underground cables and
earth conductors. Sizing of cables and rating of protective
and control devices shall take into account the load and fault
currents that can occur on the system.
The reticulation network and the wiring installation of all
buildings and structures shall be installed and maintained to
ensure absolute safety and a high standard of reliability, with
particular reference to the earthing installation and safety
and protective devices. The installations shall comply with
the requirements of SABS 0142 and SABS 1500, or

equivalent.
The Contractor shall at all times maintain the power supply,
the distribution network and the wiring installation of all
buildings and structures at the highest standard of safety
and usability.
The Contractor shall also supply liquid petroleum gas for the
burners used in the laboratories.
(c)
(b)
Unless otherwise agreed on, the offices and
laboratories shall be erected in close proximity to the
Contractor's offices and laboratories. Should the Contractor
decide to move his own offices and/or laboratories to a new
site, the offices, laboratories and other buildings erected for
the use of the Engineer shall be moved to the new site and
re-erected if required, at no additional charge.
Maintenance
The Contractor shall provide all labour, equipment and

material which may be necessary for keeping all the
buildings in a neat and clean condition, and any repairs shall
be made immediately at the request of the Engineer.
(d)
what is specified or scheduled without written confirmation

by the Engineer. No buildings shall be erected without the
Engineer's written instructions as to the exact position and
orientation of the buildings.
Cooking facilities
(c)
Housing supplied by the Contractor shall be ready for
use within six weeks of the date of such instruction, but the
Contractor may not proceed with the permanent Works
before the required offices and laboratories have been
erected by him. If the houses for the Engineer's site
personnel are not ready for occupation when the permanent
Works are commenced, the Contractor shall provide
suitable temporary board and lodging at his own cost.
The Contractor shall make available suitable cooking

facilities for the Engineer's labourers near the Engineer's
laboratories and shall supply fuel for cooking purposes.
If any further accommodation is required during the currency

of the Contract, the Engineer shall inform the Contractor at
least three months before such additional accommodation
is to be ready for use.
1405
(d)
The ownership of all offices, laboratories, housing,
sanitary facilities, laboratory equipment and other items
provided by the Contractor shall, when they are no longer
required by the Engineer, revert to the Contractor upon
written advice by the Engineer and shall be dismantled and
removed from the site.
PROVISION OF VEHICLES
The Contractor shall, if so ordered, supply new vehicles and

maintain them for the use of the Resident Engineer and his
staff.
A description of the number and types of vehicles to be
provided is given in the Special Specification.
Unless otherwise specified, the vehicles shall be owned by
the Contractor and be licensed and comprehensively
insured by the Contractor for use on the public highway
within the country by any licenced driver authorised by the
Engineer together with authorised passengers and the
carriage of goods and samples. The Contractor shall
provide fuel, oil, maintenance including replacing defective
parts, tyres and the like, whenever required, in conformity
with the vehicle manufacturers recommendations or as may
be necessary. The vehicles shall be fuelled, oiled and
maintained as aforementioned until release by the
Engineer. The vehicles on being released shall revert to the
Contractor. Each vehicle shall be fitted with a fire
extinguisher, first aid kit, tow hook and rope, tool kit, spare
wheel, wheel wrench, jack and handle and seat belts.
The Contractor shall provide a replacement for any vehicle
by a similar new vehicle after it has completed 100 000 km
if, in the opinion of the Engineer, such vehicle cannot be
maintained in a satisfactory condition.
The Contractor shall provide competent and licensed drivers
approved by the Engineer for the vehicles indicated above.
Sufficient drivers shall be available at night and at weekends
whenever work is being carried out on site.
1406
GENERAL
(a)
At the time when the Contract is awarded, the
Engineer shall furnish the Contractor with full details, in
writing, regarding the number, type and layout of all housing
units required, including details of the fittings, furniture and
equipment required. The Contractor shall not order any
housing, materials, equipment or fittings on the basis of
(e)
The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions
to prevent unauthorised entry to the offices and laboratories
and to ensure the general security of the offices and
laboratories.
(f)
The Contractor shall ensure that all accommodation
complies with the appropriate statutory provisions operative
in the area concerned.
(g)
The Contractor shall provide adequate security by
day and by night for the Engineers offices, laboratory,
vehicles and houses, and for the Engineers staff. This shall
include the provision of suitable gates and fencing and the
full-time attendance of permanent watchmen, all to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
1407
Item
Unit
14.01 Office and laboratory

accommodation:
The provision of accommodation
as specified, including roof,
external and internal walls,
windows complete with glazing,
doors with locks and fittings,
painting, floors, the provision of a 220/250 volt electrical installation with wiring,
switchboards, etc, water and
sewerage installation, complete,
in accordance with the Drawings
and Specifications, except for
items scheduled elsewhere:
1400-5
(a)
Offices (interior floor
space only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(b)
Laboratories (interior
floor space only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(c)
Open concrete working
floors, 150 mm thick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(d)
Roofs over open concrete
working floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(e)
Ablution units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(f)
Stores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(g)
Fencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . linear metre (m)
(h)
Gates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurement and payment shall be the square

metre or linear metre in the case of fencing or number of
units in the case of gates, of each item provided, measured
in accordance with the authorised inner dimensions.
(v)
Double 55 watt fluorescent-light fittings complete with
ballast and tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(vi)
Single incandescent-light
fittings complete with 100 watt
globes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(vii) Wash-hand basins complete with taps and drains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(viii) Laboratory basins complete with swan-neck taps and
drains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(ix)
Extractor fans installed
complete with own power connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(x)
Fume cupboards complete
according to the Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(xi)
Fire extinguishers, 2.5 kg,
BCF type, complete, mounted
on wall with brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
Unit
(xii) Air-conditioning units

with 2.2 kW minimum capacity,
mounted and with own power
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(a)
Chairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(xiii) Heater, space-heating

type, minimum capacity 1.5 kW . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(b)
Draughtsman's stools . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(c)
High chairs for laboratory . . . . . . . . . number (No)
Item
furniture:
(d)
Desks, complete with
drawers and locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(e)
Drawing tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(f)
Conference tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(xiv) Curing chamber for UCS

specimens, complete with water
connection, including the provision of brick partitions, plaster,
paint and shelving, all complete
according to the Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(xv) General-purpose steel
cupboards with shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurements shall be the number of units

supplied in accordance with the Specifications, Drawings
and the Engineer's instructions.
(xvi) Steel filing cabinets

with drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
Item
The unit of measurement shall be the authorised number of

units supplied and installed, complete and in accordance
with the Specifications and Drawings, together with all minor
fittings, brackets, connections, leads, mountings, etc.
Unit

fittings, installations and
equipment:
(a)
Items measured by number:
(i)
220/250 volt power points . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(ii)
400/231 volt 3-phase
power points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(iii)
Double 80 watt fluorescent-light fittings complete with
(iv)
Single 80 watt fluorescent-light fittings complete with
1400-6
(xvii) Refrigerators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(b)
Prime-cost items and
items paid for in a lump sum:
(i)
The provision of telephone service, including the
cost of calls in connection
with contract administration
and telephone rental . . . . . . . . . . . . prime cost (PC) sum
(ii)
Handling costs and profit
in respect of Subitem
14.03(b)(i) above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . percentage (%)
(iii)
The provision of 400/231
volt 3-phase electrical power installation, including all wiring,
switchboards, mains connections,
etc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lump sum
(iv)
The provision of lowpressure gas installations,
including gas-storage cylinders,
tubing, regulators, gas burners
and shut-off cocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lump sum
The prime-cost items shall be paid for in accordance with
the provisions of the General Conditions of Contract. The
tendered percentage is a percentage of the amount actually
spent under Subitem 14.03(b)(i), which shall include full
compensation for the handling costs of the Contractor, and
the profit in connection with providing the telephone service.
The tendered lump sums shall be full compensation for
providing the complete service or installation and the use
thereof, including any fixed and usage charges payable to
local or other Authorities.
(c)
Items measured by area:
(i)
Shelving as specified,
complete with brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(ii)
Work-benches complete
with concrete slab top, minimum
thickness 75 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(iii)
Work-benches complete
with wooden top, minimum thickness 25 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(iv)
Constant-temperature
baths of concrete and/or plastered brick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(v)
Foundations for laboratory equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(vi)
Roller blinds, opaque
type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(vii)
Venetian blinds . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m )
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of the

item supplied and installed. The area shall be determined
from the authorised outside dimensions in plan, except the
constant-temperature baths, which shall be measured per
square metre of water surface area irrespective of their
depth, and the blinds, which shall be measured by the width
multiplied by the height.
Item
Unit
14.04 Car ports:

Car ports, as specified, at offices and laboratory buildings . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(The unit of measurement in urban areas shall be a man

month.)
(b)
Ablution unit, as specified, including latrines, wash
basins, showers and taps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(c)
Cooking unit, complete
with stove, basin, concrete working table, shelving and sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(d)
Latrine unit as specified . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(e)
Fencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . linear metre (m)
(f)
Gates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of complete

units supplied and erected according to the Specifications
and Drawings. The unit of measure for fencing shall be the
linear metre of fencing and number of gates erected
according to the Specifications and Drawings.
Item
Unit
14.06 Prefabricated houses:

Prefabricated houses with outbuildings as specified in Subclauses 1403(a) and 1403(b) . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of
prefabricated houses complete as specified which are
provided on the Engineer's instructions.
Item
Unit
14.07 Rented, hotel and

other accommodation:
(a)
Provisional sum for providing rented housing, hotel or
other accommodation as described
in Subclause 1403(c)(ii) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . provisional sum
(b)
Handling costs and profit in respect of Subitem 14.07(a) . . . . . . percentage (%)
Expenditure under this item shall be made in accordance
with the General Conditions of Contract.
The tendered percentage is a percentage of the amount
actually spent under Subitem 14.07(a), which shall include
full compensation for the handling costs of the Contractor,
and the profit in connection with providing the rented
accommodation.
The unit of measurement shall be the number of car ports

provided.
Item
Unit
14.05 Housing for labourers:

(a)
Housing as specified,
including beds, mattresses,
chairs, tables and lockers . . . . . . . . . number of persons
1400-7
Item
Unit
14.08 Services:
Item
Unit
14.10 Provision of photostat

facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . month
The provision of water, electricity, low-pressure gas, sewerage, septic tanks, sewage
and rubbish removal, cleaning
services, maintenance and repairs, all as specified in
Clause 1404, including the
construction and maintenance
of the access roads, footpaths, etc:
The tendered rate per month shall include full provision for
providing and maintaining an approved photocopier (capable
of making A3-sized copies) and its use, including all
accessories such as paper, etc, for making a maximum
number of 1 000 A4 or equivalent number of A3 copies per
month.
Item
Unit
(a)
Services at offices
and laboratories:
14.11 Supply and maintenance

of Engineers vehicles
(i)
Fixed costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lump sum
(ii)
Running costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . month
Vehicles as specified in
special specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . km
This tendered rate/km shall include full provision for
providing the vehicle as specified, maintaining the vehicle in
good condition as well as the fuel and oil required.
(b)
Services for prefabricated houses:
(i)
(ii)
General : Method of payment
(c)
Services for rented
houses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . month
Payment under Items 14.01 up to and including 14.06 and

for Item 14.09 will be made as follows:
(d)
Services for labourers'
accommodation on the site:
80% of the amount will be paid when the item is provided

and erected, fitted or installed to the Engineer's satisfaction.
A further 10% will be paid when the value of all permanent
work done, excluding escalation, exceeds one-half of the
tendered amount, and the remaining 10% will be payable in
the certificate which follows the removal of the items from
the site.
(i)
(ii)
The lump sum and the rate per month tendered for each
subitem shall collectively include full compensation for
providing the specified services to the total number of units
which fall in the corresponding category of accommodation.
Item
Unit
14.09 Combined office and

laboratory accommodation:
(Alternative to the use of
Items 14.01 up to and including
14.05 when so required in the
Project Specifications)
Office and laboratory accommodation, including fittings,
furniture and equipment, car
ports and housing for labourers in accordance with the
details given in the project
Specifications and on the
Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lump sum
The tendered lump sum shall be in full compensation for
supplying and erecting the accommodation, fittings and
furniture as specified in the Project Specifications and
shown on the Drawings, and for the proper maintenance and
the subsequent removal thereof from the site on completion
of the Works.
1400-8
Payment for expenditure under Item 14.07 will be made in

full as and when the money is expended subject to written
proof by the Contractor of payment of the amounts. The
lump sums tendered under Item 14.08 shall include full
compensation for all fixed expenditures required in
connection with these services, and will be payable upon
completion of the work in respect of each subitem. The
tendered rates per month will be payable monthly for so long
as the services are required, but not in respect of any period
after the tendered date of completion or any extension
thereof which may have been granted.
The tendered rates for the various items scheduled in this
Section shall include full compensation for providing,
procuring, erecting, installing and/or fitting the item or
service, as may be required or specified, for the use of the
item or service, including replacements when defective, and
finally the dismantling and removal of each item, including
all transport, handling and other costs.
Payment for alternative accommodation provided in terms
of Subclause 1403(c) shall be adjusted pro rata in
accordance with the time it is required during the period of
construction or any extension thereof for which an extension
of time shall have been granted.
SERIES 1000 :
GENERAL
(c)
SECTION 1500 :
ACCOMMODATION OF TRAFFIC
The minimum vertical clearance over any section of a

diversion shall be 5.2 m.
Minimum vertical clearance
CONTENTS
(d)
1501
1502
1503
1504
1505
1506
1507
1508
1509
1510
1511
1512
1513
1514
1515
1516
1517
SCOPE
TEMPORARY TRAFFIC-CONTROL FACILITIES
WIDTH OF DIVERSIONS
TEMPORARY DRAINAGE WORKS
EARTHWORKS FOR DIVERSIONS
GRAVELLING OF DIVERSIONS OR OF EXISTING
ROADS USED AS DIVERSIONS
SELECTED-GRAVEL LAYERS, CRUSHED-STONE
OR ASPHALT BASE, STABILISATION, AND
ROADMARKING REQUIRED FOR BITUMENSURFACED DIVERSIONS
TEMPORARY BITUMEN-SURFACED DIVERSIONS
EXISTING ROADS USED AS DIVERSIONS
MAINTENANCE OF GRAVEL DIVERSIONS AND
EXISTING GRAVEL ROADS USED AS
DIVERSIONS
MAINTENANCE OF TEMPORARY DIVERSIONS
WITH BITUMINOUS SURFACING AND EXISTING
ROADS WITH BITUMINOUS SURFACING USED
AS DIVERSIONS
ACCOMMODATION OF TRAFFIC WHERE THE
ROAD IS CONSTRUCTED IN HALF WIDTHS
TEMPORARY FENCING, GATES AND GRID
GATES
THE USE OF DIVERSIONS BY THE CONTRACTOR
OBLITERATION OF DIVERSIONS
1501 SCOPE
This Section covers the construction and maintenance of
the necessary diversions and detours, barricades and signs,
and everything necessary for the safe and easy passage of
all public traffic during the construction and maintenance
periods, and also the obliteration of diversions as they
become redundant.
1502 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

(a)
Handing over the site
The site will be handed over to the Contractor in the lengths

and sequence specified in the Project Specifications.
(b)
Providing diversions
Except where the existing road is to remain in use for

through traffic, the Contractor shall provide, construct or put
in order such diversions as may be required for deviating
traffic from such sections of the road as are handed over to
him.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe and easy
passage of public traffic past and/or over sections of roads
of which he has occupation. The Contractor shall at all
times in all his operations and in using his constructional
plant take the necessary care to protect the public and to
facilitate the flow of traffic.
Property and survey beacons
Where possible, diversions shall be constructed so as not to

damage or displace property or trigonometrical-survey
beacons. In exceptional cases where this is not possible,
the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in good time so that
he may arrange to have them suitably referenced before
they are displaced.
(e)
Access to properties
The Contractor shall also provide and grant access to

persons whose properties fall within or adjoin the area over
which he is working, and in this respect the Contractor's
attention is drawn to the General Conditions of Contract. No
separate payment will be made for the provision and
maintenance of such accesses and facilities, except where
it may be required outside the road reserve.
(f)
Approval of diversions
The need for and details concerning all diversions shall be

approved by the Engineer before the construction of such
diversions commences, and the Contractor shall satisfy
himself before tendering that he can make arrangements in
respect of any diversions as may be necessary for the safe
and convenient passage of traffic.
(g)
Temporary Works
The diversions provided by the Contractor shall include the

construction of temporary gates, grid gates, fences,
drainage works, and other incidentals considered by the
Engineer to be necessary.
(h)
Public services
The Contractor, in co-operation with the Engineer, shall

make arrangements for all public services such as power
lines, telephone lines, water mains, etc, to be moved where
required for the construction of diversions, and he shall be
solely responsible for the safety of such services. No
payment will be made for any additional expenses caused
by delays in moving such services. Where the moving of
services is not required, the Contractor shall clearly indicate
where such services cross the diversion so that these points
will be clearly visible to the operating staff.
1503 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC-CONTROL FACILITIES

The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain the
necessary traffic-control devices, road signs, channelisation
devices, barricades, warning devices and road markings
(hereinafter referred to as traffic-control facilities), as shown
on the Drawings and in the relevant Road Traffic Signs
Manual, and shall remove them when no longer required.
The Contractor shall consult with officials of the police,
traffic control authority and government in the area regarding
their requirements in the control of traffic and other matters
and shall provide all assistance or facilities which may be
1500-1
required by such officials in the execution of their duties. It

shall be incumbent upon the Contractor to see to it that the
above-mentioned traffic-control facilities are present at all
times and are functioning properly, but, prior to any section
of the road which requires the above facilities being opened
to traffic, the Contractor shall submit his proposals in this
connection to the Engineer for his information and comment.
The Contractor shall inspect all traffic-control facilities at
least once daily, and report to the Engineer and immediately
make good any shortcomings. The Contractor shall
indemnify the Employer against all proceedings, claims,
actions, damages and costs which may arise from or be
related to the absence or improper functioning or placement
of road-traffic signs, barricades, traffic-control facilities,
channelisation devices, warning devices and road-traffic
markings.
Road signs, channelisation devices and
barricades no longer required may be moved for re-use,
and, if no longer suitable for use, replaced without any
additional compensation if they are required for re-use.
The type of construction, spacing and placement of trafficcontrol facilities shall be in accordance with the prescriptions
and recommendation of the latest edition of the relevant
Road Traffic Signs Manual, and in accordance with the
instructions and drawings of the Engineer. The various
traffic-control facilities which may be required are the
following:
(a)
Traffic-control devices
Traffic-control devices involve the use of flagmen, portable

STOP and GO signs, and traffic-control signs, whichever
may be the most suitable method under prevailing
circumstances. Traffic-control signs shall be erected only if
so specified in the Project Specifications or upon an
instruction in writing, by the Engineer.
(b)
Warning devices
Warning devices shall consist of amber flicker lights.
(f)
Road markings
Road markings, as specified in Section 5500, may be

required on sealed surfaces and will include road-marking
studs wherever necessary. The road markings shall be
made in accordance with the provisions of Section 5500.
Any painted road markings which no longer apply shall be
removed or overpainted with black road paint. Roadmarking studs shall be removed completely.
1504 WIDTH OF DIVERSIONS

The roadway width of gravel diversions accommodating twoway traffic shall be not less than 10 m. Where diversions
consist of two separate one-way lanes, the minimum usable
width of each lane shall be not less than 5 m.
The roadway width of a two-way diversion with a bituminous
surface shall be at least 7.4 m and shall be provided with
bituminous shoulders of at least 1.0 m on each side.
If wider diversions are required, such widths shall be
specified in the Project Specifications and/or on the
Drawings.
1505 TEMPORARY DRAINAGE WORKS

The Contractor shall construct the necessary temporary
drainage works such as side drains, catchwater drains, mitre
drains, culverts, etc, to deal adequately with any surface
run-off.
Road signs and barricades
Road signs shall include all road signs in the R, W and G

series, which shall also include danger plates and movable
barricades (ROAD CLOSED signs and the chevron type).
Road signs shall be made of steel sheets, 1.40 mm thick,
but may also be made from Chromadek; all background
letters and symbols shall be of engineering-grade retroreflective material. Road signs shall comply with the
requirements of Section 5400.
(c)
(e)
Channelisation devices and barricades
Channelisation devices shall include cones, delineators and

drums. Barricades include barrier lattices or other types as
shown on the Drawings, and movable barricades.
Steel drums shall be cut, painted white and provided with
retro-reflective tape strips as shown on the Drawings. Drums
shall be kept in position with ballast of sand or soil. Stones
shall not be used for this purpose. Drums shall be
maintained in a clean and serviceable condition.
Temporary culverts of the type and size required by the

Engineer shall be installed on existing drainage channels
wherever required by the Engineer.
Any suitable
prefabricated culverts salvaged from an existing road or an
abandoned diversion may be re-used if in a good condition
and approved by the Engineer.
Any damage caused to diversions on account of temporary
culverts installed and maintained in accordance with the
Engineer's instructions being unable to cope with floods
effectively shall be repaired. The Contractor will be paid for
the cost of such work at applicable rates or, where no such
rates exist, in accordance with the provisions of the relevant
clause of the General Conditions of Contract.
Payment for the construction of temporary culverts will be
made under the appropriate items provided in this Section
and payment for the construction of the other drainage
works for diversions and for the maintenance of all drainage
works shall be included in the rates tendered for Item 15.01,
Accommodating traffic and maintaining diversions.
1506 EARTHWORKS FOR DIVERSIONS

(d)
Barriers
Barriers for preventing vehicles from leaving the permitted

lanes may consist of guardrails on both sides of steel drums
for separating two opposite traffic streams, movable
concrete barriers (New Jersey type), or ordinary guardrails
which comply with the provisions of Section 5200.
1500-2
The Contractor shall shape and grade the diversions and

shall make full use of all material that can be obtained from
alongside the diversions, from side cuts or from the
immediate vicinity. If an adequate quantity of material
cannot be obtained in this manner, he shall import material
from other sources. Where necessary, cuttings shall be
made to obtain a satisfactory vertical alignment. The

Contractor shall also perform the necessary clearing and
grubbing, including the removal of all trees and stumps.
Where the subgrade is not sufficiently dense in its natural
state, it shall be given three roller passes compaction as
specified in Section 3400 prior to the construction of the
earthworks.
All material shall be watered, mixed and compacted with
suitable compaction equipment to give sufficient density to
the material so that it will be capable of carrying traffic
without undue wear or distress. In case of disagreement
between the Engineer and the Contractor as to the
adequacy of this compaction, a dry density of 90% of
modified AASHTO density shall be taken as the required
minimum density.
Any fills which may be necessary for any reason, eg for the
construction of fords, shall be constructed and compacted
by the Contractor as described above. Wherever possible,
fords shall be constructed from rockfill or coarse material so
as to limit, in so far as is possible, damage caused by flood
waters. Pollution and siltation of water courses shall be
controlled. The Contractor shall construct cuttings where
required.
1507 GRAVELLING OF DIVERSIONS OR OF EXISTING

ROADS USED AS DIVERSIONS
1510 EXISTING ROADS USED AS DIVERSIONS

Where existing roads are to be used as diversions, the
Contractor shall, after consultation with the Owner or
Authority having control of such road, carry out any repairs,
alterations or additions to such roads as may be required to
bring them to a condition suitable for traffic. This work will
be paid for as stipulated in Clause 1517.
1511 MAINTENANCE OF GRAVEL DIVERSIONS AND

EXISTING GRAVEL ROADS USED AS
DIVERSIONS
All gravel diversions and existing gravel roads used as
diversions shall be maintained by the Contractor in a safe
trafficable condition. Whenever required by the Engineer,
the roads and diversions shall be bladed by means of selfpropelled road graders to provide a smooth riding surface
free from corrugations. All potholes shall be repaired
immediately.
The Engineer may also instruct the Contractor to water the
diversions to keep down dust or to facilitate the proper
blading of the surface. An approved chemical dust
suppressant may be used instead of water if considered by
the Engineer to be more effective. All drainage works shall
be maintained in a good working order.
When the earthworks for diversions as described in

Clause 1506 have been completed, those sections of the
diversions and of existing gravel roads used as diversions,
as indicated by the Engineer, shall be provided with a
wearing course of suitable gravel approved by the Engineer.
The blading of surfaces of diversions and the application of

gravel and water or chemical dust suppressant shall be
measured and paid for separately, but all other maintenance
shall be deemed to be included in the rate tendered for Item
15.01, Accommodating traffic and maintaining diversions.
The Contractor shall provide, spread, water, mix and

compact such material to a density where it can carry traffic
without undue wear and tear. In case of disagreement
between the Engineer and the Contractor as to the
adequacy of the compaction, a dry density equal to 93% of
modified AASHTO density shall be taken as the required
minimum density.
1512 MAINTENANCE OF TEMPORARY DIVERSIONS

WITH BITUMINOUS SURFACING AND EXISTING
ROADS WITH BITUMINOUS SURFACING USED
AS DIVERSIONS
1508 SELECTED-GRAVEL LAYERS, CRUSHED-STONE

OR ASPHALT BASE, STABILISATION, AND ROAD
MARKING REQUIRED FOR BITUMEN-SURFACED
DIVERSIONS
Where specified in the Project Specifications or required by
the Engineer, gravel layers of selected subgrade or subbase
quality, crushed-stone base, asphalt base or stabilised
gravel layers shall be constructed and sealed and
roadmarking shall be done by the Contractor, all in
accordance with the requirements of the relevant sections
of these Specifications and the Engineer's instructions.
All roads with bituminous surfacing used by public traffic

bypassing construction shall be maintained in a good and
safe trafficable condition for the entire period during which
such roads are used. Maintenance shall include the
patching and repair of the bituminous surfacing, the clearing
of shoulders, the clearing of all drains, including culvert inlet
and outlet drains, and other incidentals and, unless
otherwise specified in the Project Specifications, also the
care and maintenance of all road markings, road signs,
guide blocks and guardrails.
The cost of all maintenance to diversions with bituminous
surfacing shall be included in the rates tendered under Item
15.01, except for the cost of repairs to the bituminous
surfacing and pavement, which shall be paid for separately
under Item 15.09.
1509 TEMPORARY BITUMEN-SURFACE DIVERSIONS

Where required in the Project Specifications or by the
Engineer, temporary diversions shall be provided with
bituminous surfacing in accordance with the requirements of
the Project Specifications or of Series 4000, or as may be
prescribed by the Engineer.
1513 ACCOMMODATION OF TRAFFIC WHERE THE

ROAD IS CONSTRUCTED IN HALF WIDTHS
Where, by reason of difficult terrain or for any other reason,
the construction of diversions is not feasible, the Contractor
shall, upon the written instruction of the Engineer, construct
the road in half widths to allow traffic to use that half of the
road not under construction. The length of the half-width
construction shall be kept to a minimum, with provision for
1500-3
traffic travelling in opposite directions to pass at frequent

intervals.
The Contractor shall arrange his work so as to allow traffic
to have free one-way access to at least half the width of the
roadway at all times during the construction period. He shall
maintain that half of the road, which is being used for traffic
for the time being, free from corrugations, to the satisfaction
of the Engineer.
Wherever possible, the Contractor shall ensure that the
entire road width shall be open at night and shall be left, at
the end of each day's work, in a good and safe trafficable
condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Should the road be not in a safe trafficable condition for twoway traffic over the entire width at the end of each day's
work, the Contractor shall provide adequate flagmen, signs,
barricades, lights and the necessary staff at his own cost to
ensure a reasonably free flow of traffic alternately in each
direction throughout the entire period when the roadway is
open to one-way traffic only.
1514 TEMPORARY FENCING, GATES AND GRID

GATES
Where ordered by the Engineer or specified on the Drawings
or in the Project Specifications, the Contractor shall make
his own arrangements for providing either new fencing and
gates or moving and subsequently reinstating existing
fencing and gates in accordance with the provisions of
Section 5300.
1515 THE USE OF DIVERSIONS BY THE CONTRACTOR

Where the Contractor constructs diversions, haul and/or
construction roads for accommodating construction traffic,
he shall construct and maintain them at his own cost and in
accordance with details previously agreed on with the
Engineer, in writing. Such roads shall be obliterated and
their surfaces properly reinstated when no longer required,
all at the Contractor's own cost.
The Contractor shall have the right to use public roads,
including diversions open to public traffic, but where his own
traffic causes excessive damage or wear to such roads or
constitutes a condition hazardous to public traffic, the
Engineer shall have the right to regulate his traffic over such
diversions and require the Contractor to provide, at his own
cost, such maintenance, including wearing-course gravel
and watering, as in the Engineer's opinion will be necessary
in addition to that which would be required to maintain the
diversions properly when not used by the Contractor's
construction traffic. Where regulation of the Contractor's
traffic does not alleviate the traffic hazard satisfactorily or
the maintenance of the diversions cannot be or is not
properly executed, the Contractor shall, where conditions
permit, divert his traffic over construction roads provided and
maintained at his own cost.
1516 OBLITERATION OF DIVERSIONS

When traffic is routed permanently onto the new road
following the completion of construction, the diversions
which are no longer required and, unless otherwise
instructed by the Engineer, such sections of obsolete roads
1500-4
and road markings as instructed by the Engineer, shall be

obliterated in accordance with Section 5800.
1517 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Item
Unit
15.01 Accommodating traffic

and maintaining diversions . . . . . kilometre (km)
The unit of measurement shall be the kilometre, measured
along the centre lines of temporary diversions, existing
roads used as diversions, and roads constructed in halfwidths. It shall not include sections along which the traffic
is diverted onto existing roads where the Contractor is not
responsible for the maintenance of such existing roads.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
accommodating traffic and maintaining diversions, including
roads constructed in half-widths and existing roads used as
diversions during construction and maintenance periods, but
excluding maintenance and repair work for which payment
is specifically made under the other pay items provided in
Section 1500. The tendered rate shall also include full
compensation for the provision of communications
equipment required for regulating the traffic, arranging for
the moving of services, solving traffic problems, complying
with the legal requirements of all Authorities concerned, for
providing temporary access to private property, and for the
provision and maintenance of temporary drainage, but
excluding the work specifically paid for under Item 15.12.
The tendered rate shall also include full compensation for
the specified general requirements and all incidental items
of cost which are required under the provisions of Section
1500 and which are not specifically paid for under the other
pay items provided in Section 1500.
Payment will be made in two equal instalments in respect of
each section. The first instalment will be made when
suitable diversions have been approved for use or when
traffic is taken over half-width construction. The second
instalment will become due when the traffic can be
accommodated on the new road, all diversions have been
obliterated and all general obligations of the Contractor have
been complied with, all to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Item
Unit
15.02 Earthworks for diversions:

(a)
Shaping of diversions . . . . . . . . . . . kilometre (km)
The unit of measurement shall be the kilometre of diversions

shaped, compacted and constructed in accordance with the
provisions of Clause 1506. Where the Contractor has to
provide access roads to private property, the length of such
access roads outside the road reserve shall be included in
the quantity measured for payment.
clearing and grubbing where necessary, the removal of
small trees and stumps, the shaping and grading, watering,
mixing and compacting of the material and all cuts and fills
constructed from material obtained from alongside the
diversions or side cut, but including only such portions of the
fills which are less than 0.5 m in height.
(b)
Cut and borrow to fill . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of fill

measured in situ from levelled cross-sections taken before
and after construction where such material is either imported
from a locality more than 100 m from the point of use or is
utilised in a portion of a fill which is in excess of 0.5 m above
the original ground level.
Where measurement by cross-sections is impractical, the
volume can be assumed to be equal to 70% of the loose
volume measured in trucks in the case of soil and gravel
material, and equal to 60% of the loose volume in trucks in
the case of hard material consisting predominantly of
particles of which the maximum dimension exceeds
100 mm.
procuring, furnishing and the placing all the classes of
material, including transporting over a free-haul distance of
0.5 km.
(c)
Cut to spoil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of

authorised excavation taken from cut in diversions or
removed from fill in redundant diversions and carted to spoil
on the instructions of the Engineer, all measured in situ
before excavation by means of levelled cross-sections.
excavating in all classes of material, loading, transporting,
off-loading, including the shaping and levelling of spoil
material and transporting over a free-haul distance of
0.5 km.
(m) Single guardrails attached

to posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(n)
Barrier rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(o)
Movable concrete barriers . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
Road markings will be paid for as specified at the end of this

Clause.
(a)
The lump sum tendered for flagmen shall include full
compensation for all flagmen who may be required to control
traffic by way of flags or portable STOP and GO signs and
shall include the provision of flags.
(b), (c), (d), (e), (f) and (h) The unit of measurement shall
be the number of each sign provided, and, as may be
applicable, completely erected.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
providing, and where applicable, erecting each sign
complete. In the case of Subitem (b) it shall also include
moving the sign as may be necessary.
(g)
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre
of sign face, measured on the face of each item provided.
providing and erecting each sign, complete with posts.
(i)
movable barricades, complete with road signs provided.
moving the barricades to fresh positions as and when
necessary.
Unit
(j)
The lump sum for traffic cones shall include full
compensation for providing as many cones as may be
necessary, irrespective of their number, and for all labour
and costs required for their placement, removal or moving
as may be necessary.
(a)
Flagmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lump sum
(k)
drums, complete with red reflectorised triangles, painted
white, and provided with ballast.
(b)
Portable STOP and GO signs . . . . . . number (No)
Item
15.03 Temporary traffic-control
facilities:
(c)
Temporary traffic-control
signs as specified or as shown on
the Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(d)
Amber flicker lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(e)
Road signs, R-series,
1 200 mm in diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(l)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of
straight or curved barricade provided and erected, complete
with two guardrails, reflective plates, end pieces and drums
to which they are attached.
(m) The unit of measurement shall be the metre of
straight or curved temporary guardrails erected, complete
with end units, posts, reflective plates, etc.
(f)
Road signs, W-series,
1 524 mm sides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(n)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of barrier
rails erected, complete with white and red bands or string
and stakes to which it is attached.
(g)
Road signs, G-series (excluding G49) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(o)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of
movable concrete barriers provided and erected.
(h)
Danger plates and delineators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
General:
(i)
Movable barricades (chevron and ROAD CLOSED types) . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(j)
Traffic cones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lump sum
(k)
Drums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The tendered rates for the respective traffic-control facilities

shall also include full compensation for their maintenance
and the replacement of items which have become
unserviceable, and their removal when no longer necessary.
75% of the tariff will be payable when the items have been
provided and erected, and 25% when finally removed from
the site.
(l)
Double guardrails attached
to drums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
1500-5
Item
Unit
15.04 Re-use or removal of traffic-control facilities:

(a)
Temporary traffic-control
signs as specified or as shown on
the Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(b)
Amber flicker lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(c)
Road signs, R and W-series . . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the kilolitre of water or litre

of diluted chemical dust suppressant applied to the
diversions on the written instruction of the Engineer. Water
required for the construction of diversions will not be
measured for payment.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for the
supply, transport and application of the water or dust
suppressant. Overhaul shall not apply to transporting the
water used for the watering of diversions.
Item
(d)
Road signs, G-series (excluding G49) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(e)
Danger plates and delineators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(f)
Drums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(g)
Double guardrails attached
to drums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(h)
Single guardrails attached
to posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
Unit
15.07 Blading of diversions

and existing roads used as
diversions by road grader . . . . . . kilometre-pass
(km-pass)
The unit of measurement for using a road grader to blade
the surfaces of diversions and existing roads used as
diversions shall be the kilometre-pass, that is, each
kilometre of the full width of diversion the entire surface of
which has been bladed by one pass of the road grader. In
the case of diversions constructed as two separate one-way
roads, they shall be considered as one full width of the
diversion for purposes of measurement.
(i)
Barrier rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(j)
Movable concrete barriers . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
Only the number of kilometre-passes actually authorised by

the Engineer, in writing, will be measured.
The unit of measurement shall be the number or metre

length of each unit removed once and re-erected. In the
case of drums, it shall include their removal to an entirely
new locality, and no payment will be made for their removal
to a fresh position virtually at the same location.
Where the blading of diversions has not been carried out

satisfactorily and the surface has not been improved as
much as can reasonably be expected from such an
operation, the Contractor shall carry out further grading work
at his own expense until a satisfactory result is obtained.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for the

dismantling, storing if necessary, transporting and reerecting in a fresh position of the various items specified
above.

providing the road graders and operators, flagmen, guards,
barricades, signs and all other costs incidental thereto and
for blading the roads to a smooth surface free from
corrugations.
Item
Unit
Item
15.05 Gravelling and repair of

diversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of gravel
provided as wearing course for the surfacing of diversions,
computed from the dimensions of the layer as actually
constructed in place, in accordance with the Engineer's
instructions.
Where measurement by the above method is considered to
be impracticable by the Engineer, the volume may be
computed by taking 70% of the loose volume of the gravel
as measured in the hauling vehicles.
procuring, furnishing, placing and compacting the gravel
wearing course, including a free-haul distance of 1.0 km,
and the repair of local sections of the diversions.
Item
Unit
15.06 Watering of diversions

(a) Watering of diversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kilolitre (kR)
(b) Diluted chemical dust suppressant . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
1500-6
Unit
15.08 Repairs, alterations and/or

additions to existing roads
used as diversions . . . . . . . . . . . provisional sum
The provisional sum provided to cover the cost of work
ordered by the Engineer in terms of Clause 1510 shall be
expended in accordance with the provisions of the relevant
clause of the General Conditions of Contract. Where the
exact nature of the work can be determined in advance,
provision may be made in the Project Specifications for
suitable rates to be tendered in lieu of providing a
provisional sum.
Item
Unit
15.09 Maintenance of the

bituminous surfacing
and pavement of temporary diversions with
and existing roads with
used as diversions . . . . . . . . . . . provisional sum
The provisional sum provided to cover the cost of work

ordered by the Engineer in terms of Clause 1512 for
repairing and maintaining the bituminous surfacing and
pavement of existing and temporary roads with bituminous
surfacing used as diversions, shall be expended in
accordance with the provisions of the relevant clause of the
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of culvert

provided and installed by the Contractor.
Item
(b)
Re-use of prefabricated
culverts complete (state type,
size and type of bedding) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
Unit
15.10 Accommodation of traffic

where the road is constructed
in half-widths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kilometre (km)
The unit of measurement for accommodating traffic where
the road is constructed in half-widths shall be the kilometre
measured along the centre line of the road which is
constructed in half-widths on the written instructions of the
Engineer.
providing all plant, equipment, tools, transport, labour,
supervision, flagmen, guards, signs, lights, barricades and
all other incidentals necessary for the proper and safe
handling of traffic as specified and shall include full
compensation for all additional costs and work resulting
from constructing the road in half widths.
Item
Unit
15.11 Traffic lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . provisional sum

The provisional sum provided to cover the cost of providing
traffic lights shall be expended in accordance with the
provisions of the relevant clause of the General Conditions
of Contract.
Item
Unit
15.12 Temporary culverts:

procuring and furnishing new culverts, all excavations,
bedding, laying and backfilling and the eventual removal of
the culverts, including excavation, loading and transporting
off the site, and the reinstating of surfaces.

installed.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for taking
up the culverts in the positions originally installed and
installing the culverts in fresh positions, including all
excavation, backfilling and bedding, the loading and
transporting, off-loading of the culverts and their eventual
removal, including excavation, loading, transporting, offloading and stacking at a suitable site, and the
reinstatement of surfaces.
Notes: The following pay items described in other
sections will be listed under this Section in the Schedule of
Quantities where they relate to work executed under this
Section.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Overhaul as specified in Section 1600.

The clearing and grubbing of large trees as specified
in Section 1700.
The removal of overburden as specified in
Section 3100.
The construction of mass earthworks and pavement
layers as specified in Series 3000.
Bituminous seals as specified in Series 4000 or in the
Temporary fencing and gates as specified in Section
5300.
Road markings as specified in Section 5500.
(a)
Provision and laying of
temporary prefabricated culverts
complete (state size, type and
bedding) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
1500-7
1500-8
SERIES 1000 :
GENERAL
(c)
SECTION 1600 :
OVERHAUL
The haul distance for cut to fill shall be the distance between
the centre of volume of the overhaul material in the cut
before excavation and the centre of volume of the portion of
the fill constructed with the overhaul material.
CONTENTS
1601 SCOPE
1602 DEFINITIONS
1601 SCOPE
This Section covers the hauling of overhaul material as
defined herein from the place of excavation or stockpile to
the position of placement, where such haul distance is in
excess of the free-haul distance as defined herein.
1602 DEFINITIONS
(a)
Overhaul material
Overhaul material shall be transported material to which

overhaul shall apply when hauled in excess of the free-haul
distance and shall include only the following materials:
(i)
Gravel, soil or rock materials used in the construction
of fills, pavement layers, banks and dykes.
(ii)
Topsoil or gravel prescribed by the Engineer as
wearing course for diversions, and selected gravel material
used for backfilling drain and culvert excavations, but
excluding permeable material used in filter drains supplied
from commercial sources.
(iii)
Spoil material resulting from the authorised
excavations of the road prism, drains, culverts and other
structures and from fills in redundant diversions.
(iv)
Crushed stone used in the construction of subbase
and base, but only when overhaul applies in the
circumstances specified in Clause 3608 Item 36.01 and
36.02.
Haul distance
The distance between the centres of volume shall be

measured along the centre line of the road, and any
additional distance of haul ascribed to the following of a
different haul route will not be considered. Cut and fill
volumes for ramps, road approaches and connections on
either side of the road shall be considered as concentrated
at the centre line of the main roadway under construction for
computing overhaul quantities for payment, unless
otherwise specified in the Project Specifications.
The haul distance for borrow material and cut to spoil
material shall be measured along the shortest route
determined by the Engineer as being feasible and
satisfactory. Should the Contractor choose to haul material
over some other longer route, computations for payment
shall nevertheless be based on the haul distance measured
along the shortest route designated by the Engineer. The
haul distance for borrow materials and cut to spoil shall be
measured to the nearest 0.1 km.
(d)
Free-haul distance
The free-haul distance shall be the distance up to which

overhaul material may be hauled before overhaul becomes
payable. This distance shall be 1.0 km in the case of all
overhaul materials, except cut and borrow to fill and cut to
spoil material where the free-haul distance is 0.5 km.
(e)
Overhaul distance
The overhaul distance applying to Item 16.02 shall be the

haul distance as defined above, less 1.0 km, measured to
the nearest 0.1 km.
Quantity of material
(b)
Overhaul
Two types of overhaul shall apply to this Contract, and,

depending on circumstances, any one or both may apply in
respect of the same hauling operation.
Restricted overhaul shall apply to fill material from cut and
borrow and to spoil material from excavations when hauled
in excess of the free-haul distance of 0.5 km in respect of
haul up to and including 1.0 km, and shall be measured and
paid for by the cubic metre of material hauled between or
over these distances.
Ordinary overhaul shall apply to all overhaul material in
respect of haul in excess of 1.0 km, and shall be measured
by the product of the volume of material hauled, measured
as specified hereafter, and the overhaul distance as defined
in Clause 1602(e) hereof.
The quantity of material overhauled shall in all cases be

measured in the same manner as the item to which the
overhaul applies.
Item
Unit
16.01 Overhaul on material

hauled in excess of a
free-haul distance of
0.5 km, for haul up
to or through 1.0 km
(restricted overhaul) . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
overhaul material hauled over the distance given above.
Both restricted and ordinary overhaul shall be paid in

respect of material having a free-haul distance of 0.5 km
when hauled in excess of 1.0 km.
1600-1
Item
Unit
16.02 Overhaul on material

hauled in excess of
1.0 km (ordinary overhaul) . . . . . . . cubic metrekilometre (m3-km)
overhaul material hauled in excess of 1.0 km, multiplied by
the overhaul distance.
Note: Both restricted and ordinary overhaul shall be payable
on material having 0.5 km free haul when this material is
hauled in excess of 1.0 km.
(b)
base
or
subbase
material
The following applies to crushed-stone base or subbase

material as specified in Section 3600 to which overhaul
applies, ie material not obtained from commercial sources.
The haul distance shall be measured from the approved
borrow pit to the crusher site and thence to the point where
used on the road. The quantity shall be the actual quantity
only of subbase or base material measured for payment and
does not include material excavated but discarded or lost at
the crusher.
(c)
Overhaul of material in excess of that required or for a
further distance as may be necessary for the completion of
the Works or otherwise not authorised by the Engineer will
not be measured for payment purposes.
Crushed-stone
(Section 3600)
Oversize material removed from the road

(Clause 3210)
The haul on all oversize material removed from the road and
taken to spoil shall be considered as two haul operations,
and overhaul shall be calculated separately as follows:
The tendered rates for overhaul shall include full

compensation for hauling material in excess of the free-haul
distance.
(i)
Haul from the point of procurement of the oversize
material to the point where it is deposited on the road
Notes: In the special cases detailed below, overhaul shall

be measured as follows:
Haul and overhaul shall be calculated in the normal manner,

but no overhaul will be payable on the first portion of the
oversize material which does not qualify for payment under
any item for the "removal of oversize material".
(a)
Gravel crushed and/or screened (Section 3200)
The haul distance on crushed and/or screened gravel shall

be taken from the point of excavation or borrow to the
crushing/screening plant and thence to the point of final use
in the road or, in the case of material sieved out and
discarded, to the point where finally placed.
Overhaul will be the total haul, minus the 1.0 km free-haul.
1600-2
(ii)
Haul from the point where it is bladed off the road to
the point of disposal
The haul distance shall be from the point alongside the road
where the oversize material is bladed off to the point where
it is finally deposited. Overhaul shall apply to all oversize
material removed, including material not paid for under any
item for the "removal of oversize material". Overhaul shall
be the haul distance minus the 1.0 km free-haul.
SERIES 1000 :
GENERAL
SECTION 1700 :
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
CONTENTS
1701
1702
1703
1704
SCOPE
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
EXECUTION OF WORK
1701 SCOPE
This Section covers the clearing of the site and the grubbing
necessary for construction of the Works covered by the
Contract, in accordance with these Specifications.
1702 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

(a)
Clearing
Clearing shall consist of the removal of all trees, brush, other

vegetation, rubbish, fences and all other objectionable
material, including the disposal of all material resulting from
the clearing and grubbing.
It shall also include the removal and disposal of structures
that obtrude, encroach upon or otherwise obstruct the work
and which can be cleared by means of a bulldozer with a
mass of approximately 20 tonnes and an engine developing
approximately 145 kW at the flywheel. Structures which
cannot be cleared in this manner shall be broken down in
accordance with the requirements of the Project
Specifications for the removal and disposal of structures.
No payment will be made for the moving of soil or gravel
material which may be inherent in or unavoidable during the
process of clearing. Clearing shall also include the removal
of all rocks and boulders of up to 0.15 m3 in size which are
exposed or lying on the surface.
Payment for fences which have to be taken down and the
material sorted, coiled and stacked shall be made under
Section 5300.
(b)
Grubbing
In the roadway all stumps and roots exceeding 75 mm in

diameter shall be removed to a depth of no less than
600 mm below the finished road level and a minimum of
75 mm below the original ground level. Where the roadbed
has to be compacted, all stumps and roots, including matted
roots, shall be removed to a depth of at least 200 mm below
the cleared surface.
Except at borrow areas, the cavities resulting from the
grubbing shall be backfilled with approved material and
compacted to a density of at least the density of the
surrounding ground.
(c)
Conservation of topsoil
Where suitable topsoil occurs within the limits of the area to

be cleared and grubbed, the Contractor shall, if so ordered
by the Engineer, remove the topsoil together with any grass
and other suitable vegetation. If not used immediately, the
topsoil shall be transported and deposited in stockpiles for

later use. The Contractor will not be required to remove
topsoil to an average depth of less than 150 mm from any
particular area.
This work shall be measured and paid for under Section
5700. Where topsoil can be removed without the necessity
of first doing clearing and grubbing, no payment will be
made for clearing and grubbing under this Section.
(d)
Conservation of vegetation
Where provided for in the Project Specifications, certain

designated plants encountered in the road reserve and
borrow areas shall be carefully protected by the Contractor.
He shall include, in his tendered rates for clearing and
grubbing full compensation for the careful removal and
planting of the plants in a protected and fenced-off area,
and, on completion of the road, the replanting of the plants
in suitable positions in the road reserve in accordance with
the Engineer's instructions.
1703 EXECUTION OF WORK

(a)
Areas to be cleared and grubbed
Normally the portions of the road reserve falling within the

limits of the road prism and certain borrow areas shall be
cleared and grubbed. The Engineer shall designate the
areas to be cleared, which shall not necessarily be limited
to those mentioned above.
The areas occupied by an existing road prism will normally
be excluded.
No clearing and grubbing shall be done other than on the
written instructions of the Engineer, who shall designate in
detail the exact areas to be cleared and grubbed and the
time when it shall be done. The Contractor shall note that,
in order to avoid reclearing, the clearing and grubbing may
have to be done at the last practicable stage of
construction.
Individual trees designated in writing by the Engineer shall
be left standing and uninjured. A penalty of US$100.00 or
the equivalent in local currency shall be imposed for every
such tree which is unnecessarily removed or damaged.
(b)
Cutting of trees
The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to

prevent damage to structures and other private or public
property. If necessary, the trees shall be cut in sections
from the top downwards. The branches of trees to be left
standing shall be trimmed so as to leave a 7 m clearance
above the carriageway.
Where clearing and grubbing on government property
would involve the cutting down of indigenous forest
containing a significant number of trees with a trunk
diameter exceeding 200 mm, the Engineer shall inform the
officials of the responsible Government Department at
tender stage before commencing with clearing and grubbing
of such areas so as to enable that Government Department
to salvage any usable timber and to identify the trees before
they are removed.
1700-1
(c)
Disposal of material
Item
Material obtained from clearing and grubbing shall be

disposed of, as indicated by the Engineer, in borrow pits or
other suitable places and covered up with soil or gravel. The
burning of material will not normally be permitted and may
be done only with the prior written approval of the Engineer.
All statutory provisions in regard to air pollution shall be
carefully observed.
All tree trunks and branches in excess of 150 mm in
diameter shall be cleaned of secondary branches, sawn into
suitable lengths and stacked at sites indicated by the
Engineer. Such timber shall not be used by the Contractor
and shall remain the property of the Employer unless
otherwise agreed on with the Engineer.
Fencing wire shall be neatly wound into reels and all such
wire, together with all fence posts and other usable material
from structures, etc, shall be stacked at sites indicated by
the Engineer.
(d)
Reclearing of vegetation
When portions of the road reserve, borrow or other areas

have been cleared in accordance with the Specifications, but
vegetation grows again in the course of time during
construction, the Engineer may, if he considers it necessary,
order that the area be recleared.
Such reclearing of areas previously cleared includes the
removal and disposal of grass, shrubs and other vegetation
in the same manner as for the first clearing operation.
Item
Unit
Unit
17.02 Removal and grubbing

of large trees and
tree stumps:
(a)
Girth exceeding 1.0 m up
to and including 2 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(b)
Girth exceeding 2 m up
to and including 3 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(c)
Etc, in steps of 1.0 m girth . . . . . . . . number (No)
The girth of trees or stumps shall be measured at the

narrowest point of the tree or stump in the first metre of its
height above ground level. Trees and stumps with a girth
exceeding 1.0 m shall be measured individually and
classified according to size in increments of 1.0 m as
indicated above.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for all
work necessary for the clearing and grubbing of trees and
stumps of all sizes, the backfilling of holes and the removal
and disposal of material, all as described in this Section.
Where construction is carried out through plantations or
where the number of trees with a girth exceeding 1.0 m
renders individual measurement impracticable, the Project
Specifications shall provide that the clearing and grubbing
of trees in such areas be measured in hectares. If this
method of measurement is used, the areas where it applies
will be shown on the Drawings, stated in the Project
Specifications, or indicated to tenderers during site
inspection.
Where the Project Specifications provide payment for the
clearing and grubbing of large trees per hectare in certain
specific cases, the tendered price shall include full
compensation for all work as described in connection with
individual trees above.
17.01 Clearing and grubbing . . . . . . . . . . . hectare (ha)

The unit of measurement for clearing and grubbing shall be
the hectare (to the nearest 0.1 ha) designated by the
Engineer and cleared and grubbed in accordance with these
Specifications.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all work
necessary for the clearing of the surface, the removal and
grubbing of trees and tree stumps (except large trees and
stumps as defined below), cutting of branches, backfilling of
cavities, demolishing and disposal of structures except
where otherwise provided in the Project Specifications, and
the removal, transporting and disposal of material, all as
specified in this Section.
1700-2
Item
Unit
17.03 Reclearing of surfaces

(on the written instructions
of the Engineer only) . . . . . . . . . . . hectare (ha)
The unit of measurement for reclearing areas which have
previously been cleared shall be the hectare. The quantity
shall be measured to the nearest 0.1 ha.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all
work necessary for the clearing of the surface, grubbing if
necessary, backfilling of holes and the removal and
disposal of material, all as described in this Section.
SERIES 2000
DRAINAGE
2100
2200
2300
2400
2500
2600
Drains
Prefabricated culverts
Concrete kerbing, concrete channeling, chutes and downpipes, and
concrete linings for open drains
Asphalt and concrete berms
Pitching, stonework and protection against erosion
Gabions
1700-3
1700-4
SERIES 2000 :
DRAINAGE
SECTION 2100 :
DRAINS
beyond the required grade shall be backfilled with suitable

material and compacted to at least 90% of modified
AASHTO density by the Contractor at his own expense.
Material resulting from the excavations for open drains shall
be used in the construction of fills, banks and dykes, or for
other purposes, or shall be disposed of to spoil, all as
directed by the Engineer.
CONTENTS
2101
2102
2103
2104
2105
2106
2107
SCOPE
OPEN DRAINS
BANKS AND DYKES
SUBSOIL DRAINAGE
CLASSIFICATION OF MATERIALS
MANHOLES, OUTLET STRUCTURES
CLEANING EYES
2101
SCOPE
AND
This Section covers all work in connection with the

excavation and construction of open drains, subsoil drainage
and banks and dykes at the locations and to the sizes,
shapes, grades and dimensions as shown on the Drawings
or as directed by the Engineer, and the test flushing of
subsoil drains.
It also covers the cleaning of open drains and the repairing
of subsoil drainage. In special circumstances this work may
be executed outside the road reserve.
It also covers the clearing of existing culverts, including
amongst others the removal of all undesirable materials that
have accumulated in and around inlet and outlet structures
and in the barrels of the culverts.
2102
OPEN DRAINS
Open-drain excavation shall involve the excavating of open

drains and channels, including channels to direct the course
of streams, all as shown on the Drawings or as directed by
the Engineer.
Open-drain excavation shall include all excavation required
for constructing a channel with a bottom width of less than
4 m or a V-shaped channel with side slopes steeper than
1:4, and total width at the top of less than 5 m. Any
excavation required for constructing a channel with a bottom
width of 4 m or more, or a V-shaped channel with side
slopes equal to or flatter than 1:4, or where the width at the
top exceeds 5 m, shall be classed as "cut" and shall be
measured and paid for under Section 3300.
Open drains within the road prism, such as median drains,
side drains and open drains on excavation-slope benches,
shall be classed as "cut" and shall be measured and paid for
under Section 3300, except where, on account of the shape
of such open drains, excavation by bulk excavating
equipment would not be feasible and either hand excavation
or special excavating equipment, such as backactors,
draglines or similar equipment, would be required, in which
case such excavation shall be paid for as open-drain
excavation.
Open drains shall be constructed true to line, grade and
cross-section and shall be so maintained for the duration of
the Contract.
In respect of material resulting from open-drain excavation

and not taken to spoil but used elsewhere in the
construction of the Works, payment will be made for opendrain excavation as well as for any item of permanent
construction built from such material. Material from opendrain excavation which is taken to spoil will be paid for as
open-drain excavation only.
If ordered by the Engineer, all existing open drains, but
excluding open drains constructed by the Contractor
himself, shall be cleared and, where necessary, shaped by
removing the sediment and trimming the floors and sides.
The specified requirements for constructing open drains
shall apply mutatis mutandis to cleaning and shaping the
open drains.
Measurement and payment in respect of the cleaning and
shaping of existing open drains not classified as cut in
accordance with the classification instructions in Subclause
2102(b), shall be made under Item 21.02, and those in
respect of existing open drains classified as cut under the
appropriate items in Section 3300.
Any pitching of open drains ordered by the Engineer shall be
done in accordance with the requirements of Section 2500.
The concrete lining of open drains shall be done as
specified in Section 2300.
All culverts indicated by the Engineer shall be cleared. The
Contractor shall remove all undesirable materials, such as
amongst others all silt, sediment, driftwood, debris and
rubble that have accumulated in and around the culvert inlet
and outlet structures and in the culvert barrels. All materials
resulting from the clearing operations shall be disposed of
at locations approved by the Engineer. The clearing shall
preferably be done by means of hand tools in order to
prevent damage to existing drainage and other structures.
The Contractor shall repair all structures damaged by him at
his own cost, and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
2103
BANKS AND DYKES
Mitre banks, catchwater banks and dykes shall be

constructed of approved soil or gravel obtained from opendrain excavation or, if no suitable material can be obtained
from that source, from suitable alternative sources, and be
placed in such a way that the water will flow on the natural
ground and against the bank.
The banks and dykes shall be properly compacted to 90%
of modified AASHTO density in layers not exceeding
150 mm in thickness, unless thicker layers have been
approved by the Engineer.
If so preferred by the Contractor and approved by the
Engineer, mitre banks may also be constructed of handpacked stone, provided that the interstices are filled with an
approved cohesive soil.
Care shall be taken to avoid excavation below the required

grades for the open drains and any excavation carried
2100-1
2104
SUBSOIL DRAINAGE
(a)
Materials
(i)
Pipes
The aggregate shall be evenly graded between these limits.

The stone shall have a 10% FACT of not less than 110 kN
when tested in accordance with TMH1 Method B2 or
equivalent.
(3)
Pipes for subsoil drainage shall have the specified internal

diameter, which shall be not less than 100 mm, and shall be
one of the following types:
(1)
Perforated pitch-fibre pipes complying with SABS
921 or equivalent;
(2)
Perforated or slotted unplasticised PVC pipes
complying with SABS 791 or equivalent;
(3)
Perforated high-density polyethylene pressure pipes
complying with the requirements of SABS 533, Part II or
equivalent.
General
When no suitable sand and/or crushed stone is available

from borrow pits, the Engineer may require that it be
procured from commercial sources outside the site.
The Engineer shall indicate the grades of sand and crushed
stone to be used in each case to comply with the
requirements.
In the case of any sand and/or crushed stone, not more than
5% of the material shall pass through the 0.075 mm sieve.
(iii)
Synthetic-fibre filter fabric
The size of perforations in perforated pipes shall in all cases

be 8 mm in diameter 1.5 mm and the number of
perforations per metre shall be not less than 26 for 100 mm
pipes and 52 for 150 mm pipes. Perforations shall be
spaced in two rows for 100 mm pipes and as shown on the
Drawings for 150 mm pipes.
Should the use of synthetic-fibre filter fabric in subsoil

drainage, or as filter blankets, or for any other purposes, be
specified, it shall comply with the requirements as specified
hereinafter.
Slotted pipes shall have a slot width of 8 mm 1.5 mm. The

arrangement of slots shall be subject to the Engineer's
approval, but the total slot area shall be not less than that
specified for perforations.
The make and class of fabric shown on the Drawings or

approved by the Engineer shall be used.
Pipes without slots or perforations required for conveying

ground water from the subsoil drainage proper to the point
of discharge, shall be unperforated pitch fibre, PVC or
polyethylene pipes of the types specified above, or concrete
pipes complying with the requirements of SABS 677 or
equivalent.
(ii)
Natural permeable material
Natural permeable filter materials for subsoil drainage shall

consist of sand and/or crushed stone of suitable gradings.
Natural permeable materials shall conform to the following
requirements:
(1)
Sand
Sand shall be clean, hard sand obtained from approved

borrow pits. The sand shall comply with the requirements of
SABS 1083 or equivalent and shall be either coarse,
medium or fine grade as specified. The nominal particle
size for the various grades shall be as shown in Table
2104/1.
Table 2104/1
Natural permeable materials: sand
(2)
Grade
Nominal max particle size

(mm)
Coarse
Medium
Fine
4.75
2.00
0.20
Crushed stone
Crushed stone shall comply with the requirements of SABS

1083 or equivalent and shall be either course (19.0 mm
nominal size) or fine (13.2 mm nominal size) as specified.
2100-2
(iv)
Composite in-plane draining fabric
(b)
Construction of subsoil drainage systems
(i)
With natural permeable material
Trenches for subsoil drainage systems shall be excavated

to the dimensions and gradients shown on the Drawings or
as directed by the Engineer.
A layer of natural permeable material of the grade and
thickness as shown on the Drawings shall be placed on the
bottom of the trench and be lightly tamped and finished to
the required gradient.
Pipes of the type and size required shall then be firmly
bedded on the natural material, true to level and grade, and
be coupled in accordance with the requirements. Thereafter
the trench shall be backfilled with natural permeable
material to such height above the pipes as shown on the
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The natural
permeable material shall be lightly compacted and trimmed
to the required level. Further layers of finer natural
permeable material shall then be placed, lightly compacted
and finished to an even surface, as directed by the
Engineer. The remainder of the trench, if any, shall be
backfilled with approved impermeable material and as
required by the Engineer, in layers not exceeding 100 mm,
and compacted to at least the same density as the
surrounding material. The trench shall be specially
protected against the ingress of water until the impermeable
layer has been completed. The width of the backfill that will
be measured for payment shall not exceed the specified
width of the trench.
Natural permeable material shall be placed in layers not
exceeding 300 mm in thickness at a time and be lightly
compacted. The total thickness of each type of natural
permeable material shall be carefully controlled, and when
the thinner layers are placed, suitable spacers shall be
used. When successive layers are placed, the lower layer
shall not be walked on and, as far as possible, shall not be
disturbed. Care shall be taken to prevent the contamination
of natural permeable material during construction of the
subsoil drainage system and all natural permeable material

contaminated by soil or silt shall be removed and replaced
by the Contractor at his own expense.
of the trench shall be backfilled with impermeable material

which shall be compacted to the density of the surrounding
material, in layers not exceeding 100 mm in thickness.
Perforated and slotted pipes shall be jointed by means of

couplings. Perforated pipes shall be laid with perforations
at the top or bottom as may be prescribed.
(c)
The higher end of each subsoil drainage pipe shall be

sealed off with a loose concrete cap of Class 20/19
concrete, as shown on the Drawings, and at the lower end
the pipe shall be built into a concrete head wall providing a
positive outlet or it shall be connected to stormwater pipes
or culverts. The complete system, together with head walls,
shall be constructed in one process starting at the lower
head wall.
Any section of a subsoil drainage system constructed of
pipes without perforations or slots shall be backfilled with
impermeable backfill material as described herein. Where
suitable, the excavated material may be used for backfilling.
(ii)
With polyethylene lining to trenches for subsoil

drainage systems
Where shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer,

trenches for subsoil drainage systems shall be lined with
approved polyethylene sheeting 0.15 mm thick. The
polyethylene sheet shall cover the bottom of the trench and
shall extend upwards on both sides for as far as may be
directed by the Engineer in each particular case, in order to
form a waterproof channel. At joints the polyethylene
sheeting shall be heat-welded together or lapped by a
minimum of 200 mm.
When backfilling the trench with natural permeable material,
care shall be taken not to displace or damage the
polyethylene lining in any way. The use of plastics other
than polyethylene will be considered, provided that the
material is of equal quality and is approved by the Engineer.
(iii)
Final acceptance of longitudinal subsoil drains will be

subject to satisfactory test flushing after completion and
installation of the rodding eye inlets. Flushing tests shall be
carried out in the presence of the Engineers representative
by flushing the drain and metering the outflow to ensure the
drain is clear of blockage. Should blockages be apparent
the Contractor shall locate and clear the obstruction and
repeat the test.
2105
CLASSIFICATION OF MATERIALS
All excavations for open drains and subsoil drainage

systems shall be classified as follows for payment purposes:
(a)
Hard material
Material which cannot be excavated except by drilling and

blasting, or with the use of pneumatic tools or mechanical
breakers, and boulders exceeding 0.10 m3 shall be
classified as hard material.
Where more than 40% of any material (by volume) consists
of boulders each exceeding 0.10 m3 in size, the material
shall be classified as hard material.
(b)
Soft material
All material not classified as hard material shall be classified

as soft material.
With synthetic-fibre filter fabric
Where specified that synthetic-fibre filter fabric shall be used

for lining in subsoil drainage systems, it shall be procured,
furnished and installed as specified and shown on the
Drawings. The lining shall not be displaced or damaged in
any way when the trench is being filled with natural
permeable material. The filter fabric shall be lapped both
longitudinally and transversely by at least 300 mm or as
instructed by the manufacturers. The transverse lap shall
be positioned on top of the box forming the drain and shall
be stitched together with plastic/galvanised wire or strong
synthetic thread at 1.0 m intervals. The longitudinal lap shall
be in the direction of flow.
Filter fabric shall be stored under suitable cover and shall
not be exposed to direct sunlight for prolonged periods and
shall be protected from mechanical damage during
installation and construction.
(iv)
Test flushing
With composite in-plane drainage fabric
Wherever specified, composite in-plane drainage systems

shall be constructed in accordance with the details shown
on the Drawings. The elements of the system shall be
assembled above ground in manageable lengths, and all
exposed surfaces shall be sealed with an approved geofibre
seal. The trench sides shall be vertical, and the composite
in-plane system shall be installed against the side through
which the subsoil flow is expected. The trench shall then be
backfilled with sand, which shall be saturated with water
after placement, up to the prescribed level. The upper part
2106
MANHOLES, OUTLET
CLEANING EYES
STRUCTURES
AND
Manholes, outlet structures and cleaning eyes for subsoil

drainage systems shall be constructed in accordance with
the details shown on the Drawings or in positions as
instructed by the Engineer.
2107
Item
Unit
21.01 Excavation for open drains:

(a)
Excavating soft material
situated within the following
depth ranges below the surface
level:
(i)
0 m up to 1.5 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(ii)
Exceeding 1.5 m and up
to 3.0 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(iii)
Etc, in increments of 1.5 m . . . . cubic metre (m3)
2100-3
(b)
Extra over Subitem 21.01(a)
for excavation in hard material,
irrespective of depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
of the material as directed, including a free haul of 1.0 km.

For payment purposes a distinction shall be made between
soft and hard material, as defined in Clause 2105.

material excavated in accordance with the authorised
dimensions, measured in place before excavation.
Excavation for open drains only as defined in Subclause
2102(b) shall be measured.
Where subsoil drainage systems are adjacent to structures

such as culverts, that part of the excavation for subsoil
drainage systems which can be made by widening the
excavation for the structure shall be measured and paid for
under excavation for such structure, and not under
excavation for the subsoil drainage systems.
Irrespective of the total depth of the excavation, the quantity

of material in each depth range shall be measured and paid
for separately.
Item
Unit

excavation of the material to the required lines, levels and
grades and the disposal of the material as directed,
including a free haul of 1.0 km.
21.04 Impermeable backfilling

to subsoil drainage
systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)

soft and hard material, as defined in Clause 2105.

completed backfill, measured in place in the subsoil
drainage systems and calculated in accordance with the
authorised dimensions.
Item
Unit
21.02 Clearing and shaping

existing open drains . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
sediment removed, measured in place before removal.
excavating the material, protecting the existing drainage
structures, trimming the floors and sides of the open drains
and disposing of material as prescribed, including free-haul
over a distance of 1.0 km.
The clearing of existing concrete side drains will be
measured and paid for under Item 21.18.
Item

procuring, furnishing, placing and compacting the backfilling
and a free haul of 1.0 km.
Item
21.05 Banks and dykes . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)

material, measured in place in the banks or dykes, and
calculated in accordance with the authorised dimensions.
procuring, furnishing, placing, watering, compacting,
shaping and trimming the material in the banks and dykes
and a free haul of 1.0 km.
Unit
Item
21.03 Excavation for subsoil

drainage systems:
0 m up to 1.5 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m )
(ii)
Exceeding 1.5 m and up
to 3.0 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(iii)
Etc, in increments of 1.5 m . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(b)
for excavation in hard material
material excavated in accordance with the authorised
dimensions, measured in place before excavation.
Irrespective of the total depth of excavation, the quantity of
the material in each depth range shall be measured and
paid for separately.
excavation of the material to the required lines, levels and
grades, all temporary shoring and strutting, and the disposal
2100-4
Unit
21.06 Natural permeable

material in subsoil
drainage systems
(crushed stone):
(a)
level:
(i)
Unit
(a)
Crushed stone obtained
from approved sources on the
site (state grade) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
approved crushed stone in place in the drains, calculated in
accordance with the authorised dimensions. The volume
occupied by the pipe shall be deducted when calculating the
volume of the permeable material.
procuring, furnishing and transporting from the borrow areas
and placing the material as specified.
the different grades of crushed stone.
(b)
Crushed stone obtained
from commercial sources
(state grade) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m)
crushed stone in place in the drains, calculated in

occupied by the pipes shall be deducted when calculating
the volume of the permeable material.
procuring, furnishing and transporting approved crushed
stone from commercial suppliers, including the cost of
transporting the material to the site, and placing the
materials as specified. For payment purposes a distinction
shall be made between the different grades of crushed
stone.
(d)
Concrete pipes (state
type and diameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
The unit of measurement for pipes shall be the metre of
pipe, measured in place along its centre line, including the
length of fittings.
procuring, furnishing, laying and jointing the pipes and
fittings as specified.
Item
Item
Unit
Unit
21.09 Polyethylene sheeting,
0.15 mm thick, or similar
approved material, for
lining subsoil drainage
systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.07 Natural permeable

material in subsoil
drainage systems (sand):
(a)
Sand obtained from
approved sources on the site
(state grade) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
approved sand in place in the drains, calculated in
occupied by the pipes shall be deducted when calculating
the volume of the permeable material.
square metre (m2)
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of

polyethylene sheeting installed, measured net from the
specified dimensions.
procuring, supplying, cutting, overlapping, jointing, placing
and protecting the sheeting as specified, as well as for
wastage.

procuring, furnishing, transporting from the borrow areas
and placing the sand as specified.
Item

the different grades of sand.
21.10 Synthetic-fibre filter

fabric (describe type,
grade, etc) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(b)
Sand from commercial
sources (state grade) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of filter

fabric supplied and installed as specified.
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of sand

in place in the drains, calculated in accordance with the
authorised dimensions. The volume occupied by the pipes
shall be deducted when calculating the volume of the
permeable material.

furnishing, procuring, cutting, overlapping, jointing, placing
and protecting the filter fabric as specified, as well as for
wastage.

procuring, furnishing, transporting from commercial
suppliers, including the cost of transporting the material to
the site, and placing the material as specified.
Item
Unit
Unit
Item
Unit
21.11 Composite in-plane

drainage systems
(state size, type,
grade, etc) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
21.08 Pipes in subsoil drainage

systems:
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of composite inplane drainage system measured in place along the centre
line of the system.
(a)
Pitch-fibre pipes and
fittings complete with couplings (state size and whether
or not perforated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)

procuring, furnishing, assembling, installing and jointing the
composite in-plane drainage system, including perforated or
other types of pipes, complete as specified.
(b)
Unplasticised PVC pipes
and fittings, normal duty, complete with couplings (state
size and whether or not perforated or slotted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(c)
High-density type polyethylene pressure pipes and fittings, complete with couplings
(state size, type and class and
whether or not perforated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
Item
Unit
21.12 Concrete outlet structures, manhole boxes,

junction boxes and
cleaning eyes for subsoil drainage systems
(a)
Outlet structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
2100-5
(b)
Manholes boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(c)
Junction boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(d)
Cleaning eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of outlet

structures, manhole boxes, junction boxes and cleaning
eyes for subsoil drainage systems constructed in
accordance with the details on the Drawings and the
Engineers instructions.
excavation, backfilling, compacting to 90% of modified
AASHTO density, disposing of surplus excavated material,
keeping the excavations safe, dealing with any surface or
subsurface water, procuring and furnishing all materials,
providing, erecting and removing formwork, mixing,
transporting, placing and curing the concrete, and all labour
and constructional plant required for constructing the
concrete outlet structures, manhole boxes, junction boxes
and cleaning eyes, complete as specified.
Item
Unit
21.13 Concrete caps for subsoil drain pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)

The unit of measurement shall be the number of caps
supplied, and the tendered rate shall include full
compensation for supplying and installing the caps.
Item
Unit
21.14 Repairing or replacing

existing drainage
systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . provisional sum
The provisional sum given for repairing or replacing existing
drainage systems shall be expended in terms of the General
Conditions of Contract.
Item
The measurement and payment for overhauling material

referred to in Items 21.01, 21.02, 21.03, 21.04, 21.05, 21.06,
21.07 and 21.16 shall be in accordance with Section 1600,
and the overhaul quantities shall be listed in Clause 2107.
Unit
21.16 Backfilling existing

eroded side drains . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m)
approved granular material placed and compacted to 93%
of modified AASHTO density, measured in place after
compaction, where instructed by the Engineer.
2100-6
Item
Unit
21.17 Test flushing of

pipe subsoil drains . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of tests
satisfactorily completed on unblocked sections of drain. No
payment will be made for tests which have to be repeated
due to blocked pipes or faulty workmanship.
provision of a water tanker, water, equipment and labour
necessary to carry out the tests, complete as specified.
Item
Unit
21.18 Excavation for the

clearing of existing
drainage systems:
(a)
Manholes and inlet and

outlet structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m)
(b)
Culvert barrels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m)
(c)
Concrete side drains . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m)

material excavated and removed, measured in place before
excavation.
excavating the material, protecting the existing drainage
structures, dealing with any surface or subsurface water,
and disposing of the excavated material, including shaping
and levelling-off piles of spoil material. The tendered rate
shall also include full compensation for transporting the
excavated material for a free-haul distance of 1.0 km.
Unit
21.15 Overhaul for material

hauled in excess of
1.0 km free-haul
(normal overhaul) . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metrekilometre (m3-km)
Item

trimming the side drains, disposing of the resulting material
and procuring, furnishing, transporting, placing and
compacting the granular material and a free-haul of 1.0 km.
Item
Unit
21.19 Selected backfill

material under
concrete-lined side
drains compacted to
93% of modified AASHTO
density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m)
compacted material and the quantity shall be calculated
from the authorised dimensions given on the Drawings.
procuring, as if from soft excavation or borrow pits, breaking
down, placing and compacting the material in 150 mm
layers, transporting for a free haul distance of 1.0 km, and
for shaping the top surface in accordance with the Drawings.
SERIES 2000 :
DRAINAGE
(a)
SECTION 2200 :
PREFABRICATED CULVERTS
Prefabricated concrete pipe culvert units shall comply with

the requirements of SABS 677 or equivalent. Pipes with
ogee joints shall be provided, unless otherwise specified.
Prefabricated concrete pipe culvert units
CONTENTS
(b)
2218
SCOPE
TYPES OF CULVERTS
MATERIALS
CONSTRUCTION METHODS
EXCAVATION FOR CONSTRUCTION BY THE
TRENCH METHOD
PREPARATION FOR CONSTRUCTION BY THE
EMBANKMENT METHOD
UNSUITABLE FOUNDING CONDITIONS
CLASSIFICATION OF EXCAVATION
DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL
LAYING AND BEDDING OF PREFABRICATED
CULVERTS
BACKFILLING OF PREFABRICATED CULVERTS
INLET AND OUTLET STRUCTURES, CATCHPITS
AND MANHOLES
REMOVAL OF EXISTING WORK
JOINING NEW WORK TO OLD
SERVICE DUCTS
CULVERTS ON STEEP GRADIENTS
STORMWATER DUCTS, TREMIES AND OTHER
CLOSED CONDUITS
2201
SCOPE
(ii)
Where concrete inlet and outlet structures are
required, the ends of the culvert units shall be cut to the
required plan skew angle (if any) and provided with anchor
bolts projecting radially around the edge as shown on the
Drawings for bonding the metal culvert into the concrete
inlet and outlet structures.
2201
2202
2203
2204
2205
2206
2207
2208
2209
2210
2211
2212
2213
2214
2215
2216
2217
This Section covers work in connection with the construction

from prefabricated units of culverts and other closed
conduits such as stormwater ducts, tremies and service
ducts, together with inlet and outlet structures, manholes
and other appurtenant structures.
2202
TYPES OF CULVERTS
For the purposes of this specification, the term

"prefabricated culverts" shall mean culverts constructed
from:
Portal and rectangular prefabricated concrete

culvert units
Portal and rectangular prefabricated concrete culvert units

shall comply with the requirements of SABS 986 or
equivalent.
(c)
Corrugated metal culvert units
Corrugated metal culvert units shall comply with the

requirements of CKS 176 or equivalent for rivetted and
nestable pipes and pipe arches, and CKS 437 or equivalent
for multiplate pipes and pipe arches.
Metal culverts shall be supplied with inlet and outlet ends
finished by one of the following two methods, whichever is
shown on the Drawings or has been prescribed by the
Engineer:
(i)
Where no concrete inlet and outlet structures but
bevelled pipe ends are required, inlet and outlet units shall
be bevelled to suit the skew angle of the culverts and the
side slope of the fill and pavement.
The Contractor shall not store any nestable culvert units on

the site in such a manner that moisture can accumulate
between the contact faces of the nested units, as this may
adversely affect the spelter coating and render the units
liable to rejection. Any units damaged by corrosion shall, if
not rejected, be repaired by cleaning all affected areas and
applying at least two coats of an approved zinc-rich epoxy
primer which complies with the requirements of SABS 926
or equivalent, in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions, or as directed by the Engineer.
(a)
prefabricated concrete pipes with circular sections,
hereinafter referred to as "concrete pipe culverts";
(d)
(b)
prefabricated concrete culverts other than pipe
culverts, hereinafter referred to as "portal culverts" or
"rectangular culverts";
(c)
prefabricated corrugated metal pipes and pipe
arches, hereinafter referred to as "metal culverts";
Other types of prefabricated culverts not mentioned above,
if required, will be specified in the Project Specifications or
Schedule of Quantities or on the Drawings.
2203
MATERIALS
The prefabricated culvert units shall be factory produced by

a reputable manufacturer of these articles and shall comply
with the following requirements:
Fine granular material
Wherever the use of fine granular material is specified in

this Section for the bedding of culverts, it shall mean sand
or other cohesionless material, all of which shall pass
through a 6.7 mm sieve and not more than 10% of which
shall pass through a 0.15 mm sieve.
(e)
Protective coating for metal culverts
Where soil or water conditions are likely to cause excessive

corrosion of metal culverts, the Engineer may order that
prefabricated units be protected by the application of a
mastic asphalt protective coating. The coating shall be
applied to either the inside, the outside or to both sides of
the metal culvert units as may be directed by the Engineer.
The mastic asphalt shall bear a registered trade mark, and
shall contain asbestos fibres and an approved filler and shall
2200-1
be supplied as a spray or brush-grade material as

prescribed.
The surfaces to be protected shall be cleaned to remove all
moisture, dirt, oil, paint, grease, alkalis, rust, mill scale or
other deleterious matter.
The material shall be mixed until all asbestos fibres and filler
are uniformly distributed.
Spray-grade mastic shall be applied by means of an airless
gun and shall be of a suitable consistency without the
addition of a harmful amount of thinners.
Brush-grade mastic shall be applied with an ordinary roofing
brush, with the second coat being applied at right angles to
the first coat.
The final film thickness measured on the crest of
corrugations shall be a minimum of 1.3 mm or such other
thickness as may be specified.
Care shall be taken not to damage the protective coating,
and all damage to the coating shall be repaired before the
culvert is put to use.
(f)
Portal and rectangular units shall be provided with square

ends and any portions that would otherwise be cut off, shall
project beyond the culvert head walls.
Where instructed by the Engineer, portal and rectangular
culverts shall be provided with skewed ends constructed
from cast in situ reinforced concrete in accordance with the
details shown on the Drawings.
Defects
All broken, bent, chipped, cracked, dented, corroded or

otherwise damaged units shall be repaired to the Engineer's
satisfaction or, where this is not possible, they shall be
removed and replaced with undamaged units.
Culvert units which are thinner than the specified thickness,
or the spelter coating of which has been bruised or broken,
or which may exhibit signs of faulty work, will be rejected.
The following defects will be regarded as poor work, and the
presence of any of or all such defects or any other defects
in any individual unit or in general shall constitute adequate
reason for rejection:
Uneven joints, distorted shapes, deviations from a straight
centre line, irregular or diagonally ruptured sides, loose
rivets, rivets not in line or irregularly spaced, poorly finished
rivet heads, illegible trade marks, or a lack of rigidity.
(h)
Material at joints
Joint filter and joint sealing material shall comply with the
requirements of Clause 6603.
2200-2
In situ concrete
All concrete work shall be carried out in accordance with the

requirements of Sections 6200, 6300 and 6400.
2204
CONSTRUCTION METHODS
Prefabricated culverts shall be installed by either:

(a)
the "trench method", where the units are laid in a
trench excavated below the existing ground level or in a
trench excavated in previously constructed subgrade and, if
necessary, subbase layers; or
(b)
the "embankment method", where the units are laid
approximately on the existing ground surface and the
subgrade is then constructed on either side and over the
culvert.
Culverts shall be constructed by the method shown on the
Drawings or specified in the Project Specifications.
The larger sizes of metal culverts and the larger portal or
rectangular culverts shall normally be constructed by the
embankment method.
Skewed ends
Where culverts are to be constructed at a skew angle, the

culvert units at the inlet and outlet of the culvert shall be
supplied with skew ends by the manufacturer, if required.
The cutting of skewed ends on site shall not be allowed.
(g)
(j)
Surface drainage shall be controlled by the construction of

temporary earth berms and drainage channels.
The Contractor shall comply strictly with all the appropriate
statutory provisions in regard to trench excavations.
2205
EXCAVATION FOR CONSTRUCTION BY THE

TRENCH METHOD
(a)
Depth of excavation
In the case of culverts to be constructed by the trench

method, the Contractor shall first construct the fill, subgrade
and, if necessary, the subbase to such level as will provide
a minimum cover, above the proposed level of the top of the
culvert, as described hereinafter for the various types of
culvert. The Contractor may then commence excavating the
trench for the culvert.
The amount by which the excavation is to exceed the
proposed level of the invert of the culvert shall be sufficient
to allow the type and thickness of bedding material to be
placed as specified or as shown on the Drawings.
The minimum cover above the top of the culvert and
minimum depth of excavation below the bottom side of the
culvert shall be as specified in Subclause 2205(a).
Notwithstanding the provisions of Subclause 2205(a), the
base shall not be constructed before the culvert and the
backfill have been completed.
(i)
Concrete pipe culverts
The minimum height of embankment construction over the

top of the proposed pipe culvert before excavation may be
commenced, shall be the minimum cover specified on the
Drawings for the type of pipe and bedding onto which it shall
be laid.
The minimum amount by which the excavation is to exceed
the proposed level of the bottom side of the pipe shall be
75 mm or such other amount as may be required for
accommodating the type of bedding required for the pipe in

each case.
(ii)
Portal and rectangular culverts

top of the proposed culvert before excavation may be
commenced, shall be 100 mm or such greater height as
may be shown on the Drawings, whichever is the greater.
The Contractor shall excavate the unsuitable material to the

depth indicated and shall replace it with gravel or other
approved material properly compacted to provide a firm
earth cushion.
The width of the excavation and earth cushion shall be as
prescribed by the Engineer, but in the case of culverts to be
constructed by the embankment method, the width shall be
at least one diameter or span, as the case may be, wider
than the culvert on each side.

the proposed level of the bottom of the culvert invert slab
shall be 75 mm in the case of culverts with precast invert
slabs. In the case of culverts with cast in situ invert slabs,
the excavation shall exactly accommodate the invert slab.
Other special construction methods may be shown on the

Drawings or specified in the Project Specifications in
specific cases.
(iii)
2208
Metal culverts

top of the proposed metal culvert before excavation may be
commenced, shall be the minimum cover specified on the
Drawings for the type of metal culvert, or 0.25 times the
diameter of pipes, with a minimum of 0.3 m, or 0.25 times
the span of pipe arches, whichever is the greatest.
the proposed level of the bottom of the pipe shall be 75 mm
or such other amount required for accommodating the type
of bedding required for the culvert in each case.
(b)
Width of excavation
The widths of excavations shall be sufficient to allow the

proper laying, bedding and backfilling of culverts. The
widths of the excavation for each type and size of culvert
shall be as shown on the Drawings or as may be prescribed
by the Engineer in writing.
If the width of an excavation is increased by the side of the
trench slipping or collapsing, the Contractor shall
immediately inform the Engineer and shall not proceed with
any further laying of culverts or backfilling until the Engineer
has reviewed the circumstances and has given instructions
as to the need for altering the class of culvert or type of
bedding.
2206
PREPARATION FOR CONSTRUCTION BY THE

EMBANKMENT METHOD
Where culverts are to be constructed by the embankment

method as defined in Clause 2204 above, the Contractor
shall level the existing ground by excavating, filling and
compacting as may be necessary so as to provide exactly
the required slope and a uniform density over the entire
length of the culvert.
The finished level of the ground for the bedding of the
culvert shall be the same depth below the proposed bottom
level of the culvert as specified above in Clause 2205 for the
various types of culverts.
2207
UNSUITABLE FOUNDING CONDITIONS
Where the bottom of the trench does not provide a suitably

firm foundation for the culvert on account of soft, mucky or
otherwise unsuitable material being encountered, the
unsuitable material shall be excavated to a depth below the
bottom of the culvert as may be indicated by the Engineer.
CLASSIFICATION OF EXCAVATION
All excavations for prefabricated culverts shall be classified

as provided in Clause 2105 for payment purposes.
2209
DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL
Where excavated material does not comply with the

requirements for backfilling material as specified hereinafter
or is surplus to backfilling requirements, such excavated
material shall be removed from the site and used for
rehabilitation of borrow pits or at other places as directed by
the Engineer.
Material suitable for use in the Works, however, shall be
used as prescribed by the Engineer.
Payment for such material will be made as for excavation
under Item 22.01, and also under the appropriate item for
such part of the Works as may be constructed from such
material.
All excavated material shall be subject to a free-haul
distance of 1.0 km.
2210
LAYING AND BEDDING OF PREFABRICATED

CULVERTS
(a)
Concrete pipe culverts
Concrete pipe culverts shall be laid on Class A, B, C or D

bedding as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer. The pipe ends shall be laid hard up against each
other so as to obtain tight joints. Ogee pipes shall be laid
with their spigot ends pointing downstream. The joints shall
be sealed on the outside with two layers of bitumenimpregnated burlap as specified in Subclause 2210(b).
The insides of the culverts shall be smooth and without any
displaced joints. All pipes shall be laid true to line and level.
(i)
Class A bedding
The pipe shall be laid with its bottom part on a 20 MPa

concrete bedding cradle of specified thickness below the
lower part of the pipe, which concrete shall extend upwards
on both sides of the pipe to a specified portion of its height.
Before concreting, the pipes shall be supported on suitably
shaped cradles at the correct level. No longitudinal
construction joints on the horizontal plane will be permitted.
2200-3
(ii)
Class B and Class C beddings
The pipe shall be laid on a bedding cradle of compacted

selected granular material as specified. The bedding shall
extend upwards on both sides of the pipe to a specified
portion of its height, as shown on the Drawings. Joint holes
shall be formed in the bedding cradle for pipe sockets and
couplings, to ensure that each pipe is fully supported
throughout the length of its barrel on the bedding cradle.
(iii)
Class D bedding
The pipes shall be laid on the in situ material in the

excavation bottom after the bottom has been hand trimmed
to support the pipe along the entire length of its barrel in
accordance with the details shown on the Drawings.
Wherever necessary, the in situ material shall first be
stabilised in accordance with the details shown on the
Drawings or as prescribed by the Engineer.
(iv)
Rock foundation
(iii)
Placing the portal portions of culverts
The portal portions of portal and rectangular culverts shall

be placed accurately and symmetrically on the floor slabs,
with a thin layer of mortar of one part of cement and six
parts of sand between the contact surfaces to ensure a firm
and uniform support.
The units shall be butted end to end with butt joints, which
joints shall be covered with two layers of burlap of 340 g/m2,
pre-impregnated with a bituminous emulsion, or a similar
approved material. The strip of burlap shall be at least
150 mm wide and placed symmetrically over the joint. The
units shall first be treated with a primer of 60% bitumen
emulsion over the width of the strip of burlap.
Where two or more culverts are placed side by side to form
a multi-barrel culvert, the space between the culverts shall
be filled with concrete up to the level of the top of the
culvert. Where prescribed, filter fabric shall be applied to
the vertical outer faces in accordance with the details shown
on the Drawings.
Where rock, shale or other hard material is encountered on

the bottom of excavations, the installation of pipes on Class
B bedding shall proceed as follows:
(c)
(1)
The material below the pipe shall be excavated and
replaced with a bed of sand or approved gravel or soil to a
depth as shown on the Drawings or prescribed by the
Engineer. Such material shall be classed as backfill for
purposes of payment.
The excavation shall be trimmed to the shape of the invert

of the culvert and a bed of fine granular material not less
than 75 mm thick shall be placed, watered, compacted and
shaped to enable the culverts to be bedded as shown on the
Drawings.
(2)
The backfill material shall be watered and
compacted to provide a firm earth cushion. Class B bedding
shall then be prepared as described in Subclause 2210(a).
Where rock is encountered, the depth of excavation shall

extend to a depth of at least 200 mm below the invert of the
culvert, and shall be filled with granular material as before.
(v)
The culverts shall be installed in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the
Engineer. Where these Specifications are inconsistent with
the manufacturer's recommendations, these Specifications
shall have preference. Anchor bolts shall be installed at the
ends of metal pipe culverts in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions to bond them into inlet and outlet
head walls, which head walls shall be constructed as soon
as possible after installation of the culverts.
Concrete casing
Where shown on the Drawings or ordered by the Engineer,

pipes shall be fully encased in concrete according to class
and dimensions as shown on the Drawings or as ordered by
the Engineer. Supports shall be provided close to the pipe
ends to support the pipes during the placing of concrete.
The concrete shall be so placed as to fill all spaces below
the pipe completely. Poker vibrators shall be used to ensure
the proper filling of all spaces below and around the pipes
with concrete. Concrete casing shall be cast in one
continuous operation until completed.
(b)
Portal and rectangular culverts
(i)
Cast in situ floor slabs
Cast in situ floor slabs shall be constructed to the

dimensions and at the locations as shown on the Drawings
or as may be prescribed by the Engineer. They shall be
reinforced with steel reinforcement as detailed on the
Drawings. Joints of the types detailed on the Drawings shall
be formed in the floor slabs, and between the floor slabs and
the inlet and outlet structures.
(ii)
Prefabricated floor slabs
A layer of fine-grained material at least 75 mm thick shall be

placed on the bottom of the excavation, levelled, compacted
and trimmed to line and grade, to form a bed to receive the
precast slabs.
The slabs shall be carefully placed on the prepared bed,
true to line and grade, and so bedded that they will be
uniformly supported over their whole area on the bedding.
2200-4
Metal culverts
No concrete bedding or casing shall be used in the

installation of metal culverts.
Where prescribed, the invert of metal culverts with
diameters or spans exceeding 1 500 mm which are laid on
steep grades shall be protected with a layer of concrete with
dimensions and class as shown on the Drawings.
(d)
Extension of existing culverts
Where an existing culvert requires extension or portal

replacement, the new section shall be placed at the same
grade and, where it joins the existing structure, at the same
level as the existing structure.
Any sections of existing wing walls, approach slabs and
head walls which may obstruct any new work shall be
demolished and removed. Existing culvert ends shall not be
damaged, but, should damage occur, the repair work shall
be done before the placement of any fresh concrete or new
culverts. Loose material shall be removed and joint faces
thoroughly cleaned to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Jointing shall be done in accordance with Clause 2214.
After completion of the extension or partial replacement of

a culvert, new approach slabs, head walls, wing walls,
catchpits, etc, shall be constructed in accordance with the
Drawings and Clause 2212.
(e)
Construction of culverts in half widths in

existing roads
If necessary for accomodating traffic or for any other

reasons, or if so instructed by the Engineer, culverts shall be
constructed in half widths.
Unless otherwise prescribed, the downstream section shall
be constructed first. The end of the excavation adjoining the
traffic lane shall be properly supported to prevent
displacement from occurring. The necessary warning signs
shall be erected in accordance with the requirements of
Section 1500.
Where the culvert is constructed in an existing road and it
has been so prescribed by the Engineer, the pavement
layers at least shall be benched and recompacted during
backfilling. The depth of benching shall equal the respective
layer thicknesses, and the width shall be at least 150 mm.
advance, ascertain from the Engineer as to which portions

will require selected-quality material for backfilling.
In the case of concrete pipe culverts on Class B bedding
and metal culverts, the backfilling material shall be
thoroughly tamped in under the flanks of the culverts to
provide a uniform bedding, all to the Engineer's satisfaction.
Metal culverts shall be temporarily ballasted during
backfilling to prevent them from lifting.
(b)
Backfilling alongside and over all culverts shall be
placed at optimum moisture content and compacted in
layers not exceeding 150 mm after compaction, to a density
of at least the density required for the material in adjoining
layers of fill, subgrade and subbase. The density of
backfilling in excavations made in natural ground shall be at
least 90% of modified AASHTO density.
(c)
Backfilling shall be carried out simultaneously and
equally on both sides of a culvert to prevent unequal lateral
forces from occurring.
The construction of culverts shall be commenced at one end

of the culvert, the position of which shall be fixed as shown
on the Drawings or as prescribed by the Engineer.
(d)
Where the Engineer so directs, metal culverts with
large diameters or spans or multi-barrel culverts shall be
constructed by the embankment method as defined in
Subclause 2204(b). In such cases the backfilling shall be
carried out to the same standard as described above,
simultaneously and equally on both sides of the culvert and
placed over the culvert until the minimum specified cover is
obtained. The width of backfill on each side of the culvert,
after completion, shall be at least equal to the diameter (or
span) of one of the openings of the culvert.
Units which have been deformed or cracked, or which are

not constructed to the required lines, levels and grades, or
which become displaced in the process of the work or during
the maintenance period, shall be removed and replaced by
the Contractor at his own expense.
Metal culverts shall be backfilled symmetrically to prevent

distortion of the units, and the Contractor shall also ensure
that the required cover as specified is in place to allow
construction equipment to pass over it without causing
damage.
Prefabricated units shall be lifted and handled by means of

approved lifting devices only. Lifting eyes shall be caulked
with a suitable mortar after the units have been installed.
(e)
Whenever specified or as may be instructed by the
Engineer, the backfilling shall consist of concrete placed
between the side of the culvert and the excavation up to the
top of the culvert.
(f)
General
The Contractor shall exercise due care not to damage,

overstress or displace any prefabricated culverts with his
own traffic or compaction equipment. Where loads
exceeding those prescribed in the appropriate statutory
provisions are likely to pass over completed culverts, the
Contractor shall provide additional cover over the culverts so
as to ensure that the design stresses on the culverts will not
be exceeded.
provisions of Series 6000.
When the Contractor is required to supply and install
culverts at a slope exceeding 1:4, the work shall be carried
out as specified in Clause 2216.
2211
BACKFILLING OF PREFABRICATED CULVERTS
After the culverts have been firmly laid on the required

bedding as described in Clause 2210, backfilling shall be
carried out as follows:
(a)
The material used for the backfilling of those portions
of culverts subject to traffic loads shall be selected material
of at least subbase quality or such other lower quality as
may be permitted by the Engineer. Where the excavated
material is not of adequate quality, selected material shall
be imported for this purpose. The Contractor shall, in
(f)
When specified or ordered by the Engineer, the
backfilling of culverts shall be done using a wet or a stiff
mixture of soil cement in lieu of a compacted gravel or lean
concrete. A wet mixture of soil cement shall consist of an
approved soil or gravel mixed with 5% of ordinary Portland
cement and only sufficient water to give a consistency that
will permit the soil cement to be placed with vibrators, so
that all voids between the pipes and the sides of excavations
and between culverts in the case of multi-barrel culverts will
be properly filled. A stiff mixture of soil cement shall contain
3% of ordinary Portland cement and just sufficient water for
it to be placed and compacted like ordinary backfill material.
The height to which the soil cement backfill shall be taken
shall be as prescribed by the Engineer or as shown on the
Drawings, and any remaining backfill shall be carried out as
described above with a granular material.
The aggregate used for soil cement shall preferably be a
sandy material but may contain larger particles up to
38 mm. It shall not have a plasticity index exceeding 10%.
Detrimental percentages of silt or clay shall be avoided, and
the aggregate shall be obtained from an approved source.
The soil cement shall be mixed on the site with suitable
concrete mixers, and the water and cement contents shall
be carefully controlled. The material shall be placed and
then thoroughly compacted so that all voids are filled as
described above. At culvert ends stones shall be packed to
2200-5
prevent the soil cement from flowing beyond the required

limits.
a steel trowel. Plaster shall consist of one part of cement to

four parts of approved fine sand.
Soil cement shall not be used for backfilling corrugated

metal culverts.
Plaster shall be cured for at least 48 hours.
(g)
A free-haul distance of 1.0 km shall apply in respect
of all imported materials used for backfilling the culverts but
no overhaul shall be paid on any cement, water or concrete
aggregates used.
(e)
2212
INLET AND OUTLET STRUCTURES, CATCHPITS

AND MANHOLES
Inlet and outlet structures for prefabricated culverts as well

as catchpits and manholes shall be constructed in
(a)
Manhole covers, grid inlets, etc
Manhole covers and frames, grid inlets and other metal

accessories shall be supplied and/or manufactured in
accordance with the details shown on the Drawings. Road
and pavement manhole covers and frames shall comply with
the requirements of SABS 558 or equivalent and shall be of
the size and type indicated.
Before fixing manhole covers and frames, they shall be
dipped in an approved preservative and gratings and frames
painted with two coats of bituminous paint. Manhole frames
shall be set firmly in a cement mortar to leave the covers
flush with the final surface.
Excavation and backfilling

(f)
The specifications given elsewhere in this Section for

excavating and backfilling the culverts shall apply mutatis
mutandis to inlet and outlet structures, catchpits and
manholes.
Prefabricated concrete chambers and shafts
No backfilling of a concrete structure may be done for a

period of at least seven days after the structure has been
completed, unless otherwise specified or directed by the
Engineer.
Prefabricated chambers and shafts shall be constructed

from non-pressure concrete pipes which comply with the
requirements of SABS 677 or equivalent. Pipes with ogee
joints shall be provided unless otherwise specified. The
pipes shall be to the diameters specified. All chambers and
shafts shall be installed with the spigot ends pointing
upwards and shall be bedded in mortar thoroughly caulked
to ensure watertight joints.
(b)
(g)
Concrete work
Concrete work shall be carried out in accordance with the

provisions of Series 6000 and the Drawings.
(c)
Benching
All benching shall be rendered in 20 mm granolithic plaster

and finished smooth and true with a steel trowel. Corners
shall be rounded to dimensions shown on the Drawings.
Brickwork
(h)
Bricks shall be engineering bricks conforming to the

requirements of SABS 227 or equivalent.
The limit for water absorption in the 24 hour immersion test
shall be 8%.
Brickwork shall be built in English bond in a mortar
consisting of one part of cement and six parts of sand, or in
stretcher bond where its thickness does not exceed
115 mm. It shall be well and regularly bonded without any
false headers. All bricks shall be unbroken, except where
required as closers. Bricks shall be well wetted before
laying and each brick shall be pressed into its bed so as to
leave a finished joint not exceeding 10 mm in thickness. All
joints shall be filled solid with mortar, and joints for exposed
faces shall be pointed as the work proceeds.
Prefabricated inlet and outlet structures
Where specified for use, prefabricated inlet and outlet

structures shall be manufactured in accordance with the
dimensions shown on the Drawings. The units shall be laid
and jointed generally as specified for prefabricated concrete
pipe culverts.
(i)
Prefabricated
structures
energy dissipaters
in
outlet
Where shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall supply

and install in the outlet structures, prefabricated reinforcedconcrete energy dissipaters of Class 25/19 concrete with
dimensions as shown on the Drawings. All concrete work
shall comply with the requirements of Series 6000.
Where pipes enter brickwork, they shall be thoroughly

caulked into the wall and rendered with mortar.
2213
(d)
Plaster
Where the plastering of brickwork is required, all joints shall

be well raked out and the brick face thoroughly wetted
before plaster is applied. Plaster shall not be less than
12 mm or more than 20 mm thick. Plaster finish shall be
smooth and even and shall not show any trowel marks.
Unless otherwise specified, all plaster shall be finished with
2200-6
REMOVAL OF EXISTING WORK
Where shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer,

existing inlets or outlets to pipe culverts shall be demolished
and debris or rubbish disposed of in an approved waste site
as directed by the Engineer. Existing pipes shall be
removed where necessary and saved for later use. All such
work shall be carried out so as to prevent damage being
done to former work which is to remain.
The Contractor's attention is directed to the provisions of

Section 1700 which specifies any structures which have to
be removed as part of the clearing and grubbing operations,
the removal of which will therefore not be measured and
paid for under this Section.
Pipes shall be carefully removed from existing culverts and
thoroughly checked.
Undamaged pipes shall be re-used in the Works where
indicated by the Engineer. Pipes which cannot be re-used
shall remain the property of the Employer and shall be
stacked within the road reserve or where directed by the
Engineer.
2214
JOINING NEW WORK TO OLD
Where partial demolition is required for extension work to

existing structures, the contact face shall be cut to
predetermined lines and levels, any loose and fragmented
material shall be removed, and projecting steel cleaned and
bent as directed by the Engineer. Where partial demolition
is not required but extension work only, the contact surface
shall be roughened and cleaned of all dirt and loose
particles.
If dowels are required, they shall be installed in holes drilled
into the existing structure, in accordance with the details
shown on the Drawings, and secured by means of an
approved type of epoxy resin grout.
Fresh concrete shall be bonded to the old concrete in
accordance with the requirements specified in Section 6400.
Reinforcement or plain concrete removed in the process of
partial demolition shall be measured and paid for under Item
22.12 and the installation of dowels and those surfaces
treated with an epoxy bonding compound will be paid for
separately, but no separate payment will be made for any
other work described above, the cost of which shall be
deemed to be included in the rates tendered for the concrete
supplied for the extensions to the existing structures.
at the grades shown on the Drawings to facilitate flushing

with water and shall, where required, be encased in concrete
or soil cement.
The width of excavation for service-duct trenches shall be
equal to the nominal inside diameter of the pipe, plus
150 mm on each side of the duct. Where ducts consist of
two or more units, the minimum spacing between the units
shall be 75 mm, and the 150 mm side clearance specified
above shall apply to the outside units of the group.
Below the carriageway the depth of excavation shall
accommodate a minimum cover of 1.0 m above the upper
side of the installed service duct.
All pipes shall be joined with watertight couplings made from
the same material as the pipe. Fibre-cement couplings shall
be of the rubber-ring type.
Split pipes shall normally be used only for providing ducting
for existing services which cannot be severed and threaded
through the ducts. The pipes shall be accurately cut
longitudinally in two halves and opposite halves shall be
matched as sawn. Split pipes shall be placed around the
service as required, firmly bound by steel straps and finally
encased in concrete if required.
Excavating, laying and bedding the pipes shall be in
accordance with the Specifications for prefabricated culverts
with any modifications as may be necessary or specified
here.
Duct ends shall be provided with suitable conical wooden
stoppers to prevent dirt from entering the ducts. Two
strands, 2.5 mm in diameter, of galvanised steel wire shall
be threaded through each unit and shall extend 2 m beyond
each end and firmly wedged into position with the wooden
stoppers.
The end of each duct shall be marked with a marker block
constructed to the details shown on the Drawings. Each
duct marker block shall be at least 50 mm proud of the
finished surface level.
2216
2215
CULVERTS ON STEEP GRADIENTS
SERVICE DUCTS
Where required, the Contractor shall construct service ducts

for the easy installation and maintenance of existing, new
and future cables and other services. Service ducts shall be
constructed from one or more of the following materials:
(i)
Normal-duty uPVC pipes in accordance with

SABS 791 or equivalent.
(ii)
Pitch-fibre pipes in accordance with SABS 921 or

equivalent.
(iii)
Fibre-cement pressure pipes in accordance with

SABS 1223 or equivalent. Class C pipes shall be
used unless other types are specified.
(iv)
Reinforced-concrete pipes in accordance with

Where required, the pipes shall be cut lengthwise and

accurately in two halves. The actual type of pipe required
shall be in accordance with the Specifications. The pipes
shall be installed in the required positions, and accurate
record shall be kept regarding the depth, position and
number of pipes installed in each duct. Pipes shall be laid
Where culverts are constructed on gradients exceeding 1:4,

they shall be referred to as inclined culverts. Inclined
culverts shall be constructed from the type of unit required,
normally either circular concrete pipe units or metal culvert
units as described in Clause 2203.
Particular care shall be taken to protect excavations against
stormwater damage. The trenches shall be excavated down
to firm ground, and backfilled with selected gravel or
concrete if it is necessary to over-excavate for obtaining a
firm floor.
After the outlet structure has first been completed, the
culvert units shall be laid in the normal manner by starting
from the lower end and placing successive units firmly
against each other to prevent subsequent movement. The
lower unit shall be securely cast into the outlet structure, and
metal culverts shall be provided with the necessary anchor
bolts at both inlet and outlet structures and also at all thrust
and anchor blocks.
Thrust and anchor blocks shall be constructed from
concrete as required in accordance with the Drawings and
details furnished by the Engineer. Anchor bolts, straps and
2200-7
other anchoring devices required at anchor and thrust

blocks shall be provided.
The backfilling of trenches shall be done in horizontal layers
starting at the lower end.
2217
STORMWATER DUCTS, TREMIES AND OTHER

CLOSED CONDUITS
The specifications given in this Section for culverts,

including the method of measurement and payment, shall
apply mutatis mutandis to the construction of stormwater
ducts, tremies or any other closed conduits constructed from
the prefabricated units described in Clause 2203, whether
intended for drainage or for any other purpose.
No distinction will be made in the Schedule of Quantities
between the construction of culverts as defined in Section
1100 and that of the other closed conduits described above,
all being classed as culverts.
excavation shall be the neat outside dimensions of the

structure, plus an allowance of 0.5 m of working space
around the structure.
excavation, temporary timbering, shoring and strutting, for
preparing the bottom of the excavation for the culvert beds,
the disposal of excavated material unsuitable for backfilling,
keeping excavations safe, dealing with any surface or
subsurface water, and for any other operations necessary
for completing the work as specified.
Payment shall distinguish between soft and hard material as
defined in Clause 2208.
transporting the excavated material for a free-haul distance
of 1.0 km.
Item
Unit
22.02 Backfilling:
Tremies constructed from prefabricated units shall be
classed as inclined culverts where laid to a grade steeper
than 1:4.
(a)
Using the excavated
material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
2218
(b)
Using imported selected
material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
22.01 Excavation:
(c)
Extra over Subitems
22.02(a) and (b) for soil
cement backfilling (percentage of cement indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(a)
level:

material in place after compaction. The quantity shall be
calculated from the leading dimensions of the backfilling as
specified or as authorised by the Engineer.
Item
(i)
Unit
0 m up to 1.5 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(ii)
Exceeding 1.5 m and
up to 3.0 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(iii)
Exceeding 3.0 m and
up to 4.5 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(iv)
Etc in increments of 1.5 m . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(b)
Extra over Subitem
22.01(a) for excavation in
hard material, irrespective
of depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
material excavated within the specified widths over the
lengths and depths authorised by the Engineer in each
case. Excavation in excess of the widths specified or
authorised by the Engineer shall not be measured for
payment.
of material in each depth range shall be measured and paid
for separately.
When measuring excavation for the removal of existing
culverts, the volume occupied by the culvert shall not be
subtracted from the calculated volume of excavation.
In the case of manholes, catchpits and inlet and outlet
structures, the dimensions for determining the volume of
2200-8
If excavations were carried out in excess of the dimensions

authorised by the Engineer, the quantity of backfilling will
nevertheless be based on the authorised dimensions. The
volume occupied by the culvert shall be subtracted when
calculating the volume of backfilling.
The tendered tariffs shall include full compensation for
backfilling under, alongside and over conduits, for watering,
and for compacting the backfill material to the specified
density. The tendered rate for Subitem 22.02(b) shall, in
addition, include full compensation for supplying selected
material of subbase quality from approved sources,
including a free haul of 1.0 km.
The tendered rate for Subitem 22.02(c) shall be additional
to the rates tendered for Subitems 22.02(a) and (b) and
shall include full compensation for all incidentals required for
the complete backfilling with soil cement as specified.
Item
Unit
22.03 Concrete pipe culverts:

(a)
On Class A bedding
(type and diameter indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(b)
On Class B bedding
(c)
On Class C bedding
(d)
On Class D bedding
(type and diameter indicated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
The unit of measurement for concrete pipe culverts shall be
the metre of culvert laid as shown on the Drawings or
ordered by the Engineer. The length shall be measured
along the soffit of the culvert.
providing, testing, loading, transporting and unloading the
culverts, for providing and placing the fine-grained material,
where required, and for the installation, laying and jointing of
the culverts, as specified.
Should it be inevitable for a section to be cut off from a
concrete pipe unit of standard length, the full standard
length of the unit shall be measured for payment. No
additional compensation for cutting and disposing of such
section will be paid.
Upon payment, differentiation shall be made between the
various types and sizes of culverts and between the culverts
placed on A, B, C and D classes of bedding.
Item
Unit
22.05 Portal and rectangular

culverts:
(a)
Complete with prefabricated floor slabs (size and type
indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(b)
Without prefabricated
floor slabs (size and type indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
The unit of measurement for prefabricated portal or
rectangular culverts shall be the metre of culvert laid as
shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
The length shall be measured along the soffit of the culvert.
supplying, testing, loading, transporting and off-loading all
culverts, providing and placing the fine-grained material
where required for installing the culverts, and installing,
laying and jointing the culverts as specified, including cutting
them on the site, and waste.
Payment will be made separately for floor slabs of cast in
situ concrete.
Item
Unit
22.04 Metal culverts:

(a)
Size, wall thickness and
type indicated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(b)
Cutting off bevelled and/
or skew ends (size and type indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(c)
Anchor bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of culvert laid,

the number of cuts made and the number of anchor bolts
installed as shown on the Drawings or ordered by the
Engineer.
In the case of a metal pipe, the culvert length shall be
measured along the pipe centre line. In the case of a metal
pipe arch, the culvert length shall be measured along the
bottom of the pipe arch. In both cases the length of
bevelled and/or skew ends shall be included.
providing, testing, loading, transporting and off-loading the
culverts, for providing and placing fine-grained material
where required for the installation of culverts, and for
installing, laying and jointing the culverts as specified. Upon
payment, a differentiation shall be made between the
various types and sizes of culverts and also between
culverts with differing wall thicknesses.
Payment shall be made separately for the cutting of bevelled
and/or skew ends, and the tendered rate shall include full
compensation for all work in connection with the cutting of
ends.
The tendered rate per anchor bolt shall include full
compensation for procuring, providing and installing the
bolts.
Payment shall distinguish between the different sizes and

types of culverts and between culverts installed with or
without prefabricated floor slabs.
Item
Unit
22.06 Extra over Items 22.03,

22.04 and 22.05 for
constructing inclined
culverts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
installed at a grade steeper than 1:4 as specified in
Clause 2216.
additional or more difficult work of any nature in regard to
laying, excavating and backfilling as may be required for
installing the culverts at a grade steeper than 1:4.
Item
Unit
22.07 Cast in situ concrete

and formwork:
(a)
In Class A bedding, screeds
and the encasing for pipes, including formwork, (class of
concrete indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(b)
In floor slabs for portal
or rectangular culverts, including
formwork and Class U2 surface
finish (class of concrete indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
2200-9
(c)
In inlet and outlet structures, catchpits, manholes, thrust
and anchor blocks, excluding
formwork but including Class
U2 surface finish (class of
(d)
Formwork of concrete
under Subitem 22.07(c) above
(type of finish indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(e)
In concrete linings for
the inverts of metal culverts,
including formwork and Class
U2 surface finish (class of
Measurement of formwork and cast in situ concrete shall be
as specified in Sections 6200 and 6400.
Payment for formwork and cast in situ concrete shall be
made as provided in Sections 6200 and 6400, except that
payment for the formwork for concreting in Subitems
22.07(a), (b) and (e) shall not be made separately, and the
Contractor's rates for concrete shall include full
compensation therefor.
No separate payment shall be made for the construction of
joints in culvert floor slabs or at inlet and outlet structures,
and the tendered rates for concrete shall include full
compensation for forming the joints complete in accordance
Item
Unit
22.08 Concrete backfill for

culverts (class indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
concrete backfill. The quantity shall be calculated from the
dimensions of the excavation as specified or as may be
authorised by the Engineer, minus the volume taken up by
the culverts, irrespective of whether the actual excavation to
be backfilled exceeds the specified or authorised
dimensions.
Payment shall be made as for concrete in Item 22.07(a)
above.
Item
Unit
22.09 Prefabricated concrete

inlets and outlets to
culverts (size and type
indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
Prefabricated concrete inlets and outlets for concrete pipe
culverts shall be measured per inlet or outlet, complete in
position.
procuring, providing, loading, transporting, off-loading and
installing the inlets or outlets as specified.
Item
Unit
22.10 Steel reinforcement:

(a)
Mild steel bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tonne (t)
(b)
High-tensile steel bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tonne (t)
(c)
Welded steel fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . kilogram (kg)
Measurement and payment for steel reinforcement shall be

made as specified in Section 6300.
Item
Unit
22.11 Dowels for joining old

and new concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . kilogram (kg)
The unit of measurement shall be the kilogram of steel
dowels installed.
supplying all materials, all cutting, drilling and grouting, and
any other operation or item necessary for the proper
execution of the work.
Item
Unit
22.12 Removing existing

concrete:
(a)
Plain concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(b)
Reinforced concrete . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of existing

concrete removed.
demolition and for loading, transporting and disposing of the
products of demolition, including a free haul of 1.0 km.
Payment shall distinguish between plain and reinforced
concrete. For the purposes of this item, reinforced concrete
shall be defined as concrete containing at least 0.2% of
steel reinforcement measured by volume.
The tendered rates shall also include full compensation for
cutting straight grooves of the specified depth at joint
positions where shown on the Drawings.
Item
Unit
22.13 Removing and re-laying

existing pipes (size and
type of bedding indicated) . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of existing pipe
removed and re-laid.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for lifting,
loading, transporting for a free-haul distance of 5 km, offloading, and laying pipes according to the Specifications.
Payment for any excavation and backfilling required for the
removal and relaying of existing pipes shall be made
separately under Items 22.01 and 22.02.
2200-10
Where existing pipes are loaded, transported and used in

diversions, they shall not be measured for payment under
this item, but payment therefor shall be made in terms of
Section 1500.
Item
Unit
22.14 Removing and stacking

existing prefabricated
culverts (all sizes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of existing
prefabricated culverts removed and stacked.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for lifting,
loading, transporting to stack, off-loading, and stacking the
prefabricated culverts.
Payment for any excavation and backfilling required for
removing and stacking the existing prefabricated culverts
shall be made separately under Items 22.01 and 22.02. The
free-haul distance shall be 5 km.
Item
Unit
22.15 Treating surfaces with

epoxy resin for joining
new to old concrete (type
of epoxy resin specified) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
The unit of measurement shall be the litre of epoxy-resin
compound used at the specified rate of application.
providing and applying the epoxy-resin compound.
Item
Unit
22.16 Protective mastic asphalt

coating for corrugated metal
culvert units (state whether
to be applied by brush or by
spray gun) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
protective coating applied as specified and as directed by
the Engineer. When both inside and outside surfaces are
treated, both surfaces shall be measured.
procuring and furnishing the mastic asphalt, applying the
material, and for all other additional work and incidentals
required for providing the protective coating as specified.
Item
Unit
22.17 Manholes, catchpits,

precast inlet and outlet
structures complete:
(a)
Manholes (type indicated) . . . . . . . . number (No)
(b)
Catchpits (type indicated) . . . . . . . . number (No)
(c)
Precast inlet and outlet
structures (type indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(d)
Extra over or less than
Subitem 22.17(a) for variations
in the depths of manholes from
the standard depth designated
for tendering purposes (standard depth and type of manhole
(e)
Extra over or less than
Subitem 22.17(b) for variations
in the depths of catchpits from
the standard depth designated
for tendering purposes (standard depth and type of catchpit indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
The unit of measurement, in the case of Subitems (a), (b)
and (c) above, shall be the complete unit as shown on the
Drawings, including all concrete, brickwork, covers, frames,
grids and other accessories.
procuring, furnishing and installing, and laying where
applicable, the complete units except for excavation and
backfilling, which shall be measured separately. The
tendered rate shall also include full compensation for
connecting up to and building any conduits into the walls of
the various structures.
The unit of measurement in the case of Subitems (d) and (e)
above shall be the metre of increased or decreased depth
of the manhole or catchpit measured in relation to the
standard depth furnished for tendering purposes.
The tendered rates per metre shall be an adjustment to the
compensation for the standard item, payable either as an
increased compensation to the Contractor in the case of an
increased depth, or as a decrease in compensation in the
case of a decreased depth in relation to the standard depth.
Where the above items of work cannot be conveniently
standardised for payment according to complete units, the
various types of work and items of material provided shall be
measured separately in accordance with Items 22.18 to
22.21 and such other items as may be necessary.
Concrete and formwork shall be measured and paid for
under Subitems 22.07(c) and (d) respectively, excavation
under Item 22.01, and backfilling under Item 22.02.
Item
Unit
22.18 Brickwork:
(a)
115 mm thick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(b)
(c)

brickwork built, calculated from the leading dimensions of
the brickwork. Areas in walls occupied by conduits, shall not
be included in the areas measured, and corners and
intersections common to more than one brickwall shall be
measured only once.
The tendered rates per square metre shall include full
compensation for the brickwork complete as specified,
including pointing and the building-in of conduits.
2200-11
Item
Unit
22.19 Plaster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)

plasterwork provided.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for raking
out joints in the brickwork and applying a 1:4 plaster, as
specified, to all surfaces where required.
The unit of measurement shall be a metre of service duct

laid.
procuring, providing and laying the pipes, including end
stoppers, draw wires and complete installation, but shall
exclude excavation, backfilling, and encasing with concrete,
which shall be measured for payment under the appropriate
items of payment of this Section.
Item
Item
Unit
22.20 Benching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)

benching, measured in plan, constructed in Class 20/19
concrete with granolithic rendering.
procuring and furnishing all materials, placing the concrete
benching, and rendering with the specified granolithic
rendering.
Item
Unit
22.21 Accessories:
(a)
Manhole covers including
frames (description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(b)
Inlet grids including
frames (description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(c)
Step irons (description) . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(d)
Etc for other accessories . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of each type

of accessory delivered and installed.
procuring, furnishing and installing the accessories.
Item
Unit
22.22 Anchors for pipes (description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)

anchors installed, including straps, bolts, etc, but excluding
any concrete work, which shall be measured under Subitem
22.07(c) and (d).
procuring, providing and installing the anchors.
Item
Unit
22.23 Service ducts:

(a)
Ordinary pipes (type
and diameter indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(b)
Split pipes (type and
diameter indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
2200-12
Unit
22.24 Duct marker blocks (type

The unit of measurement shall be the number of marker
blocks installed, and the tendered rate shall include full
compensation for manufacturing, delivering and installing
the marker blocks, complete as shown on the Drawings.
Item
Unit
22.25 Overhaul on excavated

material carted to spoil,
backfill material (but excluding Portland cement
in the case of soil cement),
existing structures
demolished and removed
to spoil, and removing and
relaying, and removing and
stacking existing prefabricated
culverts, for haul in excess of
the free-haul distance . . . . . . . . . . cubic metrekilometre (m3-km)
Measurement and payment for overhaul shall be made in
accordance with the provisions of Section 1600, except that
the free-haul distance shall be as specified in each item.
In the case of culverts, the outer volume of each pipe shall
be measured.
Item
Unit
22.26 Hand excavation to

determine the positions of existing
services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
material excavated within the lengths and widths authorised
by the Engineer and the depth required to expose the
service. Excavation in excess of the authorised dimensions
shall not be measured for payment.
excavation, backfilling, compacting to 90% of modified
AASHTO density, disposing of any surplus excavated
material, keeping the excavations safe, dealing with any
surface or subsurface water, taking special care to ensure
that services are not damaged in any way and any other
operation necessary for completing the work. The tendered
rate shall also include the transporting of surplus excavated
material for a free-haul distance of 1.0 km. Any damage to
a service caused by the Contractor shall be repaired at his
own cost, to the satisfaction of the Owner of the service and
the Engineer.
No distinction will be made between hard and soft material,

neither will distinction be made between the various types of
services to be exposed or the depths to which excavations
are taken.
Item
Unit
22.27 Reinstating trenches

crossing roads:
The appropriate Sections of the Specifications shall also be

applicable to the reinstatement of the trenches.
procuring, furnishing, placing, compacting and finishing all
materials, providing all labour and constructional plant,
cutting and preparing the edges of the existing surfacing,
and protecting and maintaining the completed reinstatement
as specified.
(a)
Selected layers . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
Item
(b)
Subbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(c)
Base (including prime

coat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(d)
Bituminous surfacing
(including tack coat) . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
22.28 Prefabricated reinforcedconcrete skew end units

for concrete culverts
constructed at a skew
angle (type and dimensions
of unit and class of bedding
(e)
Kerbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
The unit of measurement for Subitems (a) to (d) shall be the

square metre of the layer reinstated where instructed by the
Engineer.
The unit of measurement for Subitem (e) shall be the metre
of kerbing replaced due to trench excavations where
Unit

and size of prefabricated reinforced-concrete skew end unit
provided and installed, irrespective of the angle of skew.
providing, testing loading and unloading the units,
constructing the prescribed class of bedding, and for
installing, laying and joining the units, complete as specified
and in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings.
Any reinstatement required beyond the agreed or instructed

dimensions owing to damage caused by the Contractor will
not be measured for payment.
2200-13
2200-14
SERIES 2000 :
DRAINAGE
SECTION 2300 :
CONCRETE KERBING,
CONCRETE CHANNELLING, OPEN
CO N C R E TE CHUTE S AND
CONCRETE LININGS FOR OPEN
DRAINS
CONTENTS
2301
2302
2303
2304
2305
2307
SCOPE
MATERIALS
TYPES OF STRUCTURES
CONSTRUCTION
INLET AND OUTLET STRUCTURES AND
TRANSITION SECTIONS
CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES AND SURFACE
FINISH
2301
SCOPE
2306
This Section covers the construction of concrete kerbing

and channelling, open concrete chutes and concrete linings
for open drains at the locations and to the details as shown
on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
2302
MATERIALS
(a)
Concrete

requirements of Sections 6200, 6300 and 6400.
(b)
Kerbing and channelling
Prefabricated kerbing and channelling shall comply with the

requirements of SABS 927 or equivalent. Cast in situ
kerbing and channelling shall be of the class of concrete
indicated.
(c)
Joint sealant
(i)
Cold-applied joint sealant shall be a two-part
polysulphide sealing compound conforming to the
requirements of BS 4254.
(ii)
Polyurethane-based joint sealants shall comply with
the requirements of SABS 1077 or equivalent.
(iii)
Silicone-based joint sealants shall comply with the
requirements of the Project Specifications.
(d)
Bedding material
The material on which concrete kerbs and channels are to

be bedded shall consist of crushed stone, cinders, slag,
sand or other approved porous material with a maximum
particle size of 13.2 mm.
Concrete may also be prescribed as bedding material, in
which case it shall comply with the requirements of
Section 6400.
2303
TYPES OF STRUCTURES
Kerbing shall include barrier kerbs, mountable and semimountable types. All these elements may be prefabricated
units or constructed in a continuous operation using
slipforms. Channelling may be cast in situ, prefabricated
units or else of slipform construction. Chutes may be either
prefabricated units or cast in situ, and the concrete lining of
open channels shall be cast in situ only, except that side
slabs may be precast. Downpipes shall be prefabricated
units.
2304
CONSTRUCTION
(a)
Excavation, and preparation of bedding
(i)
Kerbs and channels
Trenches for kerbs and channels shall be excavated to the

required depth and all unsuitable material shall be removed
and replaced with a layer of approved bedding material at
least 75 mm thick. The bedding shall be compacted and
accurately shaped to the required grade. No concrete or
precast concrete units shall be placed on uncompacted or
disturbed material.
(ii)
Concrete linings
The excavation work for open drains shall be executed and

paid for in accordance with the provisions of Section 2100.
The excavations shall then be neatly trimmed to the lines
and levels specified so as to permit the accurate
construction of the concrete linings. All loose material shall
be compacted to a density of not less than 93% of modified
AASHTO density.
Where the in situ material is unsuitable, the Engineer may
order that it be removed to the required depth and replaced
with selected material compacted to a density of 93% of
modified AASHTO density.
Where excavations for open drains are in rock, overbreak
shall be backfilled as ordered, either with mass concrete or
with selected natural gravel or soil compacted to a modified
AASHTO density of at least 93%.
(iii)
Chutes
Excavations for chutes shall be neatly trimmed. All loose

material shall be thoroughly compacted, and where
overbreak occurs in hard material, the excavations shall be
backfilled with mass concrete. If required by the Engineer,
the excavations shall be taken deeper to accommodate a
concrete screed cast to act as a working platform for the
construction of the chutes.
(b)
Prefabricated concrete kerbing and channelling
Prefabricated concrete kerbing and channelling shall be laid

on the approved bedding with close joints filled with 3:1
sand:cement mortar not exceeding 10 mm in thickness and
neatly pointed with a pointing trowel. The exposed faces of
kerbs and edging shall be constructed true to line and
elevation. Kerbing around curves shall first be laid along the
full curve length before the joints are filled, unless otherwise
allowed by the Engineer. Kerbs shall be temporarily
propped during construction.
2300-1
Unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer, prefabricated

concrete kerb units shall be 1.0 m in length, except at
curves at road junctions, where they shall be 0.3 m in
length.
Prefabricated concrete kerbs shall be laid with a Class
1:4:8/25 cast in situ concrete support behind the kerbs in
(c)
Prefabricated concrete chutes on side slopes of

fills and cuts
Prefabricated concrete chutes shall be manufactured in

accordance with the dimensions shown on the Drawings,
and the units shall fit neatly into each other as shown.
(f)
Cast in situ chutes on cut slopes
Cast in situ concrete chutes on cut slopes, together with the

inlet and outlet structures, shall be constructed in
accordance with the Drawings. The class of concrete shall
be as indicated on the Drawings.
Where required by the Engineer, a concrete screed shall
first be cast on excavations that cannot be trimmed
accurately. The screed shall be accurately finished to the
level of the underside of the chute floor slab and allowed to
set before the floor slab is cast. Where the material being
excavated cannot be accurately trimmed or where the chute
sides have to extend above the surface of cut slopes, the
outer faces of the sides shall be cast against formwork.
The bottom unit shall rest against the outlet structure or

footing as shown on the Drawings.
(g)
The units shall be laid true to line and grade from the bottom
up so that each unit fits neatly into the previous one.
The exposed surfaces of the concrete linings of open drains

shall be given a Class U2 surface finish as defined in Clause
6209. Concrete shall be cured in accordance with the
A transition section shall be constructed at the inlet to lead

the water into the chute as shown on the Drawings.
(d)
Slip-form kerbing
Slip-form kerbs and channels shall be placed on an

approved bedding by a continuous process with an
approved machine. Contraction joints shall be sawn at
intervals shown on the Drawings or prescribed by the
Engineer in a manner so as not to cause the concrete to
spall at the joint. The concrete shall be cured in accordance
with the requirements of Clause 6409.
The kerbs and channels shall be constructed true to line and
elevation and shall have a neat appearance. Where
transverse cracks occur, the Contractor shall replace the
entire section between the contraction joints at his own cost.
(e)
Cast in situ kerbs and channels
Forms for kerbs and channels shall be accurately set to line

and elevation and shall be firmly held in position during the
placing of the concrete. Stops and jointing material at the
ends of sections shall be accurately placed so as to ensure
that joints between adjacent sections are truly perpendicular
to the surface of the concrete and at right angles to the edge
of the road.
After concrete has been placed in the forms, it shall be
tamped and worked until mortar entirely covers any exposed
faces. Exposed faces shall then be finished to smooth and
even surfaces and edges shall be rounded to the radii
shown on the Drawings.
Forms shall be removed from any concrete surfaces that will
be exposed, within a period of 24 hours of the concrete
having been placed. Minor defects shall be repaired with a
2:1 sand:cement mortar. Plastering shall not be permitted
on exposed faces and all rejected portions shall be removed
and replaced at the Contractor's expense.
When
completed, the sections shall be cured in accordance with
the requirements specified in Clause 6409.
The completed kerbs and channels shall be true to line and
elevation and shall have an even and neat appearance.
2300-2
Concrete-lined open drains
Sealed joints in concrete shall be in accordance with the

details indicated on the Drawings and the provisions of
Section 6600. Cold joints shall be painted with a coat of
approved bituminous emulsion containing 60% of pure
bitumen by mass, or with an approved anti-adhesive before
any adjoining slabs are cast.
Expansion joints shall be made in accordance with the
Drawings.
Where required, the surfaces on which concrete lining is to
be cast shall, after having been trimmed, be covered with
polyethylene sheeting 0.15 mm thick and all joints in the
sheeting shall be overlapped by at least 150 mm.
(h)
Backfilling
After completing the concrete work, the spaces at the backs

of kerbs shall be backfilled with approved material to
pavement or road shoulder level. Spaces adjoining chutes
shall be backfilled level with the side slope. Such backfill
shall be placed in layers not exceeding 150 mm and each
layer shall be compacted to 93% of modified AASHTO at
optimum moisture content before the succeeding layer is
placed thereon.
Where kerbs and channels are laid after construction of the
base, the spaces between the concrete and adjoining base
shall be backfilled with premixed bituminous material.
(i)
Construction sequence
(i)
Where kerbs and channelling are constructed before

the base.
In this case slip-form units or cast in situ units may be

constructed. During working and constructing the base,
precautionary measures shall be taken to prevent the
concrete work from being damaged or shifted.
(ii)
Where kerbs and channelling are constructed after

the base
The base shall be constructed wider than the specified

width, after which a neat trench shall be dug for the kerbing
or channelling. Any over-excavation shall be filled with
concrete cast
channelling.
(iii)
simultaneously
with
the
kerbs
and
Where kerbs and channelling are constructed after

the asphalt base and/or asphalt surfacing
The asphalt base and/or asphalt surfacing shall be

constructed wider than the specified width and shall then be
cut back accurately with a mechanical saw to a marked line
to give a neat joint line between the kerbs or channelling and
the asphalt layer. The base shall then be removed to the
required depth.
structures energy dissipaters consisting of prefabricated

reinforced-concrete blocks of Class 20/19 concrete of the
dimensions shown on the Drawings or listed in the Schedule
of Quantities. All concrete work shall comply with the
requirements of Series 6000.
Components such as grids, covers and frames shall be in
accordance with the details shown on the Drawings and the
requirements of Subclause 2212(e).
2306
Any concrete spilt onto the asphalt surface shall be

removed. Where so required by the Engineer, the
Contractor shall, without any additional compensation, paint
emulsion over the stained surface.
CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES AND SURFACE

FINISH
(a)
Concrete kerbing and channelling
(j)
(i)
Protection
Concrete kerbing and channelling shall be constructed to

within the following dimensional and alignment tolerances:
Horizontal alignment
During transporting and laying care shall be taken to protect

all precast units against chipping or breakage.
The maximum deviation of edges, centre line, or vertical

surfaces from the specified position shall be 25 mm.
Concrete kerbing and channelling as well as any other

structures adjacent to the road shall be protected against
staining by bitumen being sprayed or premix being placed.
Where bitumen is to be sprayed, all such work shall be
completely covered with polyethylene sheeting at least
0.25 mm thick, specially reinforced paper or other approved
material, properly secured to prevent the sheeting from
lifting during windy conditions. Any work stained by bitumen
shall be broken down and replaced, unless all such bitumen
is completely removed so as not to show any stains.
Painting over stained work is strictly prohibited.
The maximum deviation of edges, centre line, or vertical

surfaces from the specified alignment, shall be 1:500 when
taken over any section exceeding 10 m in length.
(k)
(iii)
Cutting existing bituminous surfacing and

pavement layers
Where the Engineer instructs kerbing, channelling or

concrete-lined drains to be constructed against existing
bituminous surfacing, the full depth of the bituminous
surfacing, and the base and subbase if necessary, shall be
accurately cut with a mechanical saw to the required line
before the kerbing, channelling or concrete-lined drain is
constructed. The edge shall be vertical for kerbing and
channelling. The concrete shall then be placed directly
against the cut edge without formwork. All material outside
the cut edge shall be removed to the required depth before
the concrete is placed. The debris shall be disposed of at
a dumping site to be provided by the Contractor subject to
the approval of the Engineer. The bituminous surfacing
shall be protected and kept clean to the Engineers
satisfaction.
(ii)
The inside edge of channelling shall nowhere be above the

finished road level nor more than 10 mm below the finished
road level. The invert level of channels and open drains and
the top of kerbing shall nowhere deviate by more than
10 mm from the required level and nowhere shall channels
or drains have any adverse grade.
INLET AND OUTLET

TRANSITION SECTIONS
STRUCTURES
AND
(iv)
Inlet and outlet structures may be either precast or partially

precast concrete units or of cast in situ concrete.
Cross-sectional dimensions
All cross-sectional dimensions shall be within 6 mm of the

specified dimensions except that the underside of
channelling may extend up to 25 mm below the level at
which it would have the required thickness.
(b)
Concrete-lined open drains and concrete chutes
Concrete-lined open drains and concrete chutes shall be

constructed to within the following tolerances:
Horizontal alignment
The maximum deviation from the true position of the edges

or centre line shall be 25 mm.
(ii)
Transition sections on kerbing, kerbing-channelling

combinations and concrete-lined open drains shall be
constructed to the same standards and by the same
methods as described for the uniform sections, but with the
required modifications. Sections may be either precast or
cast in situ units.
Trueness of exposed surfaces
When tested with a 3 m straight-edge, no surface

irregularities shall exceed 6 mm.
(i)
2305
Vertical alignment and level
Vertical alignment
The invert level of concrete-lined open channels shall

nowhere deviate by more than 25 mm from the required
level and nowhere shall the open drain inverts have an
adverse grade.
(iii)
Trueness of exposed surface
When tested with a 3 m straight-edge, no exposed surface

shall show surface irregularities exceeding 10 mm.
Where shown on the Drawings or instructed by the

Engineer, the Contractor shall supply and install in the outlet
2300-3
(iv)
Cross-sectional dimensions
All cross-sectional dimensions shall be within 10 mm of the

specified dimensions, and the average thickness of a floor
or side slab shall not be less than the specified thickness
when considering any complete slab or a slab section with
a surface area of 10 m2 or more, and disregarding a
thickness exceeding 10 mm of the specified thickness.
(c)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of completed

chute as constructed, including any overlap, measured
along the slope as laid but excluding transition sections and
inlet and outlet structures measured separately.
The tendered rate per metre shall include full compensation
for procuring, furnishing and installing the completed chutes
as specified and for all excavation and the preparation of
bedding, backfilling, formwork and finishing required.
Surface finish
Item
Unit
All unformed exposed concrete surfaces shall have a Class

U2 surface finish and all formed exposed concrete surfaces
shall have a Class F2 surface finish as defined in Clause
6209.

chutes (measured by
components):
2307
(a)
Concrete (class indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
Item
Unit
23.01 Concrete kerbing (class

of concrete indicated for
in situ concrete):
(a)
(Description of type with
reference to drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(b)
Etc for other types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
Item
Unit
23.02 Concrete kerbing-channelling combination (class

of concrete indicated for
cast in situ concrete):
Measurement and payment for formwork and concrete shall

be as specified in Sections 6200 and 6400, except that
payment for excavation and gravel or soil backfilling shall be
deemed to be included in the rates tendered for concrete
and shall not be measured and paid for separately.
Item
Unit
23.05 Inlet, outlet, transition and similar structures

(typical designs):
(a)
(Description of structure, type, etc, with reference to drawing and class
of concrete) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(a)
(Description of type with
reference to drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(b)
(b)
Formwork (surface
finish indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of concrete

kerbing or kerbing-channelling combination complete as
constructed, measured along the front face of the kerb.
The tendered rate for each metre of concrete kerbing and/or
kerbing-channelling combination shall include full
compensation for the necessary excavation and preparation
of bedding, backfilling, formwork, finishing, and for
procuring, furnishing and installing all materials, kerbing and
channelling, and protecting it against staining, supporting
the kerbs with in situ cast concrete, and filling and painting
all joints, all complete as specified.
(b)
Etc for other types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurement and payment shall be the number

of completed units of each type of structure constructed,
and payment shall include full compensation for all
formwork, concrete, excavation, trimming and backfilling,
including such accessories as grids, etc, as may be
specified on the Drawings.
Item
Unit
23.06 Inlet, outlet, transition and similar structures

(measured by components):
(a)
Concrete (class indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
Item
Unit
23.03 Concrete chutes (typical designs):
(b)
Formwork (surface finish indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(c)
(a)
(Description of type
with reference to drawing.
State whether prefabricated
or cast in situ and class of
concrete) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(b)
2300-4
Other components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The measurement and payment for formwork and concrete

shall be as specified in Sections 6200 and 6400, except that
excavation, trimming and backfilling shall not be measured
and paid for separately, the cost of which shall be deemed
to be included in the rates tendered for concrete.
The unit of measurement for other components such as

grids shall be the number of each type of component
installed.
The tendered rates shall include full
compensation for procuring, furnishing and installing the
components, including any painting or protective coating
specified in the Project Specifications or as shown on the
Drawings.
(a)
To sides with formwork
on the internal face only . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(b)
To sides with formwork
on both internal and external
faces (each face measured) . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(c)
Item
Unit
23.07 Trimming of excavations

for concrete-lined open
drains:
(a)
In soft material . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(b)
In hard material . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)

excavation trimmed to receive concrete lining.
labour, plant, materials and other additional work and
incidentals necessary for trimming the excavations for open
drains to the standard of finish required for the construction
of concrete linings. All excavation, including the removal of
unsuitable ground and backfilling with suitable material, shall
be measured and paid for under Section 2100. Payment
shall distinguish between trimming in soft material and
trimming in hard material as defined in Section 2200. No
extra payment shall be made in respect of any soil or gravel
backfilling, additional concrete or mass-concrete backfilling
required on account of overbreak or unavoidable
unevenness of the excavations in difficult ground, the cost
of which shall be deemed to be included in the tendered
rates for trimming in hard material.
Item
Unit
23.08 Concrete lining for

open drains:
(a)
Cast in situ concrete
lining (class of concrete and
type of open drain indicated) . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(b)
Class U2 surface finish
to cast in situ concrete (type
of open drain indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
Measurement of and payment for concrete shall be as
specified in Section 6400, but the tendered rate shall include
full compensation for painting open joint surfaces as
specified.
To ends of slabs . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
Measurement of and payment for formwork shall be as

specified in Section 6200. Formwork under Item 23.09(a)
shall be measured and paid for only when the side slope of
the slabs exceeds 1:2 and the slabs cannot be constructed
without formwork even when a stiff concrete mix is used.
When the Contractor elects to use precast side slabs,
payment will be made for formwork as if cast in situ concrete
had been used.
Item
Unit
23.10 Sealed joints in concrete linings of open

drains (description of
type with reference to
drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
joint of each size and type.
supply of all materials and for all labour, formwork and
incidentals necessary for sealing the joint as shown on the
Drawings or specified in the Project Specifications.
Item
Unit
23.11 Concrete screed or

backfill below chutes
(class of concrete indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
concrete screed or backfill as may be instructed by the
Engineer to be placed below chutes.
furnishing, procuring and placing the concrete in screed or
backfill.
Item
Unit
23.12 Steel reinforcement:

(a)
Mild steel bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tonne (t)
(b)
High-tensile steel bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tonne (t)
The tendered rate for surface finish shall include full

compensation for all labour, plant, material and other
additional work and incidentals required for trimming the
concrete lining as specified.
(c)
Item
Item
The unit of measurement for surface finish shall be the

square metre of finished surface.
23.09 Formwork to cast in situ

concrete lining for open
drains (Class F2 surface
finish):
Unit
Measurement and payment shall be in accordance with the

provisions of Section 6300.
Unit
23.13 Polyethylene sheeting

(0.15 mm thick) for
concrete-lined open
drains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
2300-5
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of area

covered with polyethylene sheeting.
procuring, furnishing and installing the polyethylene
sheeting, including wastage and overlap.

labour, constructional plant and materials required for
cutting the surfacing and pavement layers to the required
depth, removing and disposing of the debris, and protecting
and keeping the surfacing clean, all as specified.
Item
Item
23.14 Cutting bituminous

surfacing and pavement layers for concrete
kerbing, channelling or
concrete line drains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of bituminous
surfacing and pavement layers cut where instructed by the
Engineer, irrespective of the depth cut. The various layers
shall not be measured separately for payment.
2300-6
Unit
Unit
23.15 Precast concrete blocks
in outlet structures . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of precast
concrete blocks provided and installed as shown on the
Drawings or directed by the Engineer.
SERIES 2000 :
DRAINAGE
2403
COMPOUNDING, MIXING AND TRANSPORTING

ASPHALT MIXES
SECTION 2400 :
AS P H AL T AN D C O N C R E T E
BERMS
(a)
Compounding the mixture
CONTENTS
2401
2402
2403
2407
SCOPE
MATERIALS
COMPOUNDING, MIXING AND TRANSPORTING
ASPHALT MIXES
PREPARING THE BERM FOUNDATION
PLACING
TRANSITION SECTIONS FOR NEW JERSEY
TYPE OF RAILS
2401
SCOPE
2404
2405
2406
Asphalt containing penetration-grade bitumen shall contain,

by mass of the dry aggregate, 7% of net 60/70 or 80/100
penetration-grade bitumen and 1% of active filler.
Asphalt containing mix-grade bitumen emulsion shall
contain, by mass of the dry aggregate, 7% of net bitumen.
The asphalt mix shall be in accordance with the
requirements of the project specification.
The composition of the asphalt mix shall in all cases be
subject to the prior approval of the Engineer.
(b)
This Section covers the construction of asphalt or concrete

berms at the outer edge of paved shoulders. Berms shall
be cast in situ in moulds or by means of a suitable machine
to the dimensions shown on the Drawings or as directed by
the Engineer.
2402
MATERIALS
(a)
Bituminous binder
Bituminous binder shall be a penetration-grade bitumen or

a mix-grade bituminous emulsion as may be prescribed by
the Engineer. Spray-grade emulsion may be used as primer
and tack coat.
The various bituminous materials shall comply with the
following specifications:
(i)
(ii)
(b)
Penetration-grade bitumen: . . . . . . . . . SABS 307

or equivalent
Bituminous emulsions: . . . . . . SABS 309 and 548
or equivalent
Asphalt
Asphalt containing penetration-grade bitumen shall comply

with the requirements of Section 4200. The aggregate
grading shall lie between the limits indicated in Table 4202/3
for a fine continuously graded mix.
The material of asphalt which contains mix-grade bitumen
emulsion shall comply with the requirements of the project
specification.
The grading of the aggregate shall be subject to the prior
approval of the Engineer.
(c)
Concrete

details shown on the Drawings and the requirements of
Sections 6200 and 6400.
Mixing plant
The mixing plant shall be in accordance with the

(c)
Mixing, transporting and placing
Asphalt with penetration-grade bitumen shall be mixed,

transported and placed in accordance with the requirements
of Section 4200, and asphalt with mix-grade bitumenemulsion in accordance with the requirements of the project
specification.
2404
PREPARING THE BERM FOUNDATION
If shown on the Drawings, the prime coat sprayed onto the

base and shoulders shall extend over a wider area to allow
space for the berms to be placed.
Where the Engineer so instructs that berms shall be
constructed, the specified width of the base projecting
beyond the sides of the paved shoulder shall be thoroughly
cleaned. The shoulder material adjacent to the base shall be
compacted and trimmed to the upper level of the base and
all loose material removed.
A prime coat consisting of 30% bitumen-emulsion shall be
applied at a rate of 0.4 R/m2 onto that part of the berm
foundation falling outside the paved surface of the road. In
the case of asphalt berms, a tack coat of 30% bituminous
emulsion shall be applied at a rate of 0.4 R/m2 over the entire
berm foundation. The tack coat shall be left to break before
the berm is placed.
2405
PLACING
When the berms are placed, proper care shall be taken at

all times to ensure that the toe of the berm does not
encroach on the side of the carriageway or shoulder by
more than 25 mm.
(a)
Placing by hand
The mixture shall be placed and shaped in situ in a rigid

portable mould to form a trapezoidal kerb of the dimensions
indicated on the Drawings.
2400-1
In the case of asphalt berms the mixture shall be thoroughly

compacted to form a hard unyielding berm, true to level,
shape and line, within the specified tolerances. The moulds
may be removed as soon as the material has cooled to air
temperature, or, in the case of a cold asphalt mix, as soon
as it has hardened.
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of asphalt berm

placed as specified.
(b)
The prime and tack coats shall be paid for under Item 24.03.
Placing by machine
A machine of approved design may be used for placing the

berm. In general, machine-placed work will not require any
additional compaction. In areas where, in the opinion of the
Engineer, the compaction is inadequate, the machine shall
be weighted with additional mass, or other measures shall
be taken to ensure that adequate compaction is obtained.
(c)
Placing under guardrails
Should the berm be placed first, the holes for the guardrail
posts shall be excavated with care to prevent damage being
done to the berm. Where chutes are required against fills,
the berm shall be discontinued for the width of the top of the
chute and finished to form a proper inlet for the water into
the chute, as indicated on the Drawings.
(d)
General requirements
The berms shall be placed true to level, shape and line. All
berms deviating more than 10 mm from the specified line
when measured at the inner edge of either their crests or
their bases, or of which the height or width, measured at the
crest, varies by more than 5 mm from the specified height
or width, will be rejected and shall be removed and replaced
at the Contractor's own expense.
The surfaces of concrete berms placed by machine, and all
unformed surfaces, shall be given a Class U2 finish, and
formed surfaces a Class F2 finish. Joints shall be provided
at 3 m intervals in all concrete berms, either by casting in
alternate sections or by cutting machine-placed sections.
All such joints shall be neatly formed and finished so as not
to leave any irregularities or loose concrete at the joints.

procuring, furnishing, mixing and placing the material, and
all other work necessary for completing the asphalt berms
as specified.
Item
Unit
24.02 Concrete berms:

(a)
Placed where there are
no guardrails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(b)
Placed at existing guardrails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of concrete
berm placed as specified.
procuring, furnishing, mixing and placing the material, and
all other work necessary for completing the concrete berms
as specified. The prime coat shall be paid for under Item
24.03.
Item
Unit
24.03 Prime and tack coats:

(a)
Prime coat:
(i)
Under asphalt berms
(primer indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(ii)
Under concrete berms
(primer indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(b)
Tack coat (type indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
TRANSITION SECTIONS FOR NEW JERSEY

TYPE OF RAILS

completed prime coat or tack coat applied in accordance
with the Specifications.
Where transition sections for New Jersey type of bridge rails

are required to be constructed from asphalt, the instructions
for asphalt berms shall apply in regard to the asphalt
composition and the preparation of the foundation.

procuring and providing all material and for mixing and
applying the adhesive and primer complete as specified,
including cleaning, compacting and trimming the coat being
primed.
2406
2407
Payment shall be made under this item for the prime coat if,
as instructed by the Engineer, it is applied in a separate strip
independently from the prime coat of the road or shoulder
surface.
Item
Unit
24.01 Asphalt berms:

(a)
Placed where there are
no guardrails (types of asphalt
and binder indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(b)
Placed at existing guardrails (types of asphalt and binder indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
2400-2
If applied as an integral part of the prime coat of the road or

shoulder surface by the prime coat being sprayed over a
wider area to provide space for the berms, payment for the
prime coat will not be made under this item.
Item
Unit
24.04 Transition sections for

New Jersey type of rails . . . . . . . . number (No)

procuring, providing, mixing and placing all materials, and
for all labour, formwork and incidentals required for
constructing complete transition sections as specified.
The unit of measurement shall be the number of completed

asphalt transition sections constructed to the details shown
on the Drawings.
2400-3
2400-4
SERIES 2000 :
DRAINAGE
(c)
Sand
SECTION 2500 :
PITCHING, STONEW ORK AND

PROTECTION AGAINST EROSION
(i)
Sand for concrete
CONTENTS
2501
2502
2503
2504
2505
2506
2507
2508
SCOPE
MATERIALS
STONE PITCHING
RIPRAP
STONE MASONRY WALLS
SEGMENTAL BLOCK PAVING
CAST IN SITU CONCRETE PITCHING
2501
SCOPE
This Section covers the furnishing of materials and the

construction of a protective covering in stone pitching, cast
in situ concrete pitching, bricks or prefabricated concrete
blocks on exposed surfaces such as earth slopes, drains
and stream beds, as well as heavier protective layers in the
form of riprap and the construction of stone masonry for
walls, all as shown on the Drawings or ordered by the
Engineer.
2502
MATERIALS
(a)
Stone
(i)
Pitching
Stone for pitching shall be sound, tough and durable,

without any stones less than 200 mm in minimum
dimension, except that smaller pieces or spalls may be used
for filling spaces between the larger stones. The shapes of
the rocks or stones shall be so as to form a stable protective
layer of the required thickness. Rounded boulders shall not
be used on slopes steeper than 2:1 unless grouted.
All stone intended for use on a particular pitching job shall
be subject to the prior approval of the Engineer.
(ii)
Riprap
Stone for riprap shall be hard field or quarry stone not

susceptible to disintegration or excessive weathering on
exposure to the atmosphere or water. It shall be free from
soft material such as sand, clay, shale or organic material
and shall not contain an excessive quantity of elongated
stones.
The required size of the stone will depend on the "critical
mass" specified. At least 50% by mass of the material
comprising the riprap shall consist of stones with a mass
heavier than the critical mass, and not more than 10% by
mass of the material shall consist of stones with a mass of
less than 10% of the critical mass or more than 5 times the
critical mass.
(b)
Cement
Cement shall be ordinary Portland cement which complies

with the requirements of SABS 471 or equivalent.
Sand for concrete, cement slurry and cement mortar shall

comply with the requirements of SABS 1083 or equivalent.
(ii)
Sand for bedding
Sand for bedding used for paving blocks shall not contain
any deleterious impurities and shall comply with the grading
requirements in Table 2502/1
Table 2502/1
Grading requirements for bedding sand
Sieve size (mm)
% Passing
9.52
4.75
2.36
1.18
0.600
0.300
0.150
0.075
100
95-100
80-100
50-85
25-60
10-30
5-15
0-10
:
(iii)
Sand for joints
Sand used for being brushed into the joints between

pavement blocks shall all pass through a 1.18 mm sieve,
and between 10 and 15% of it shall pass through a
0.075 mm sieve.
(d)
Paving blocks
Paving blocks shall comply with the requirements of SABS

1058 or equivalent for Class 25 paving blocks where paving
blocks are made from concrete, and bricks used as paving
blocks shall be facebrick units which shall comply with the
requirements of SABS 227 or equivalent. Engineering units
may also be used instead of facebrick units.
The surface texture and colour of all units shall be uniform.
Paving blocks for sidewalks shall be square prefabricated
concrete blocks, 450 mm x 450 mm x 50 mm in size and
fabricated from Class 30 concrete. As to appearance, the
blocks shall comply with the requirements of Clause 3.3 of
SABS 927 or equivalent. The upper surface shall have an
approved pattern to provide proper skid resistance.
Concrete grass blocks shall consist of concrete slabs of the
dimensions shown on the Drawings, with openings through
the slab totalling at least 20% of the surface area.
(e)
Concrete

provisions of Sections 6200, 6300 and 6400.
(f)
Wire
Wire for pitching kept in position by wires shall consist of

4 mm diameter galvanised wire which complies with the
2500-1
(g)
Permeable material for filter layer
Permeable material for filter layers shall comply with the

requirements specified for permeable material for subsoil
drains in Subclause 2104(a)(ii).
(h)
Synthetic-fibre filter fabric shall be of the grade and type

specified in the Schedule of Quantities or Project
Specifications and shall comply with the requirements of
Subclause 2104(a)(iii).
2503
STONE PITCHING
(a)
Plain stone pitching
The area shall be prepared by excavating, shaping and

trimming necessary for pitching, and by thoroughly
compacting the area by hand-ramming to prevent
subsequent settlement. A trench shall be excavated as
directed by the Engineer along the toe of any slopes to be
pitched or along the unprotected edge of the pitching in the
beds of streams. Two pitching methods follow, and the
method to be adopted shall be decided on by the Engineer.
(i)
Method 1
Commencing at the bottom of the trench, the stone shall be

laid and firmly bedded into the slope and against adjoining
stones. The stones shall be laid with their longitudinal axes
at right angles to the slope and with staggered joints. The
stones shall be well rammed into the bank or surface to be
protected and the spaces between the larger stones shall be
filled with spalls of approved pitching stone securely
rammed into place.
cleaned of adhering dirt or clay, moistened and embedded

in freshly laid cement mortar composed of one part of
cement to six parts of sand. Any spaces between the
stones shall be filled with cement grout of the same
composition as the mortar. The mortar and grout shall be
placed in a continuous operation for any days run at any
one location. The grout shall be worked into the pitching so
as to ensure that all spaces or voids between the stones will
be completely filled with grout to the full depth of the stone
pitching. Grout spilt onto exposed surfaces of the stone
shall be removed while still soft, and the joints between
stones shall be neatly finished.
The grouted pitching shall be cured with wet sacking or
other approved wet cover for a period of not less than four
days after grouting, and shall not be subjected to loading
until adequate strength has been developed. Where
required, weep holes shall be formed in the pitching.
(c)
The pitching shall be held in position at the bottom and top

with wire nets with 150 mm mesh. The bottom net with wire
ties fastened to it at 600 mm distances and projecting
upwards, shall first be placed over the surface to be pitched.
The stone shall then be laid on this net in accordance with
the requirements specified for plain stone pitching in
Subclause 2503(a). After the stone has been laid, the top
wire net shall be drawn tightly over the stone course and
securely fastened to the wire ties passing from the bottom
net through the pitching. After having been tied, the ends of
the ties shall be turned down into the pitching. The entire
area of wired pitching shall then be grouted and finished off
with cement grout in accordance with all the requirements
specified for grouted pitching in subclause 2503(b).
(d)
Placing of rock by dumping shall not be allowed.
(ii)
Method 2
The technique and requirements laid down in Method 1 shall

also apply to Method 2, except in the following aspects:
(1)
No small stones or spalls shall be used to fill in
spaces between larger stones.
(2)
Simultaneously with the placing of stones, topsoil
shall be introduced between individual stones, and
sufficiently rammed so as to provide a firm bonded
structure. The topsoil shall be provided to the full depth of
the stone pitching at any point.
Wired and grouted stone pitching
Grouted stone pitching on a concrete bed
The area to be pitched shall be prepared as described in

Subclause 2503(a) and a concrete bed (Class 15 concrete)
with a thickness of at least 75 mm shall then be placed. The
stone pitching shall be of stones with a minimum dimension
of 200 mm, which shall be laid while the concrete is still
fresh. Openings between stones shall be filled with cement
grout as described in Subclause 2503(b), and care shall be
taken not to spill the grout onto the finally exposed surfaces
of the stones. Grout spilt onto the exposed surfaces of the
stones shall be removed while still soft, and the joints
between stones shall be neatly finished.
Curing shall be done as described for grouted stone pitching
in Subclause 2503(b).
(3)
Rooted grass or tufts of grass shall then be planted
in the topsoil between stones, and watered immediately and
copiously and thereafter at regular intervals until the grass
has been established.
The completed pitching shall have an even compacted

appearance, and nowhere may the surface deviate by more
than 25 mm from the specified lines and grades.
Whichever of the above two methods is adopted, the

finished surface of the pitching shall present an even, tight
and neat appearance with no stones varying by more than
25 mm from the specified surface grades or lines. The
thickness of the pitching, measured at right angles to the
surface, shall not be less than 200 mm.
2504
RIPRAP
(a)
General
(b)
Grouted stone pitching
The work shall be done in accordance with all the

requirements specified for plain pitching in Subclause
2503(a) above, except that the stones shall be thoroughly
2500-2
Riprap shall consist of a course or courses of large rock

placed on bank slopes and toes in stream and river beds
and at other localities where protection of this type may be
required.
Two types of riprap are specified here, viz one type where
the rocks are individually packed, which is designated as
packed riprap, and the other type where the rock is dumped
and then spread by machines, which is designated as

dumped riprap.
The surface of areas to receive riprap shall be neatly
trimmed to line and level and all loose material compacted.
The perimeters of riprap areas shall be protected by the
construction of either rock-filled trenches, walls or other
structures as may be required. Perimeter trenches shall
normally be backfilled with rock of the same size and quality
as that used in the construction of the adjoining riprap, but
any voids shall be filled with smaller stone and the entire
backfill shall be well compacted.
(b)
When the use of synthetic-fibre filter fabric is required, the

material shall be placed on the prepared surface or on the
filter bed, depending on the instructions. The overlap
between adjacent sheets shall be 150 mm unless otherwise
specified. Care shall be taken not to damage the filter fabric
when subsequent layers are being placed, nor to expose the
filter fabric to the sun for periods exceeding three days
before it is covered.
Packed riprap
Packed riprap shall be constructed from rocks placed

individually to stagger the joints and so as to be firmly
bedded in the prepared surface. The spaces between larger
stones shall be filled with spalls or smaller stones securely
rammed into place. On inclined surfaces the rock shall be
laid in long horizontal strips starting from the bottom, and
not in strips up the slope.
The completed riprap shall present a tight and even surface.
Local surface irregularities of the riprap shall not exceed
150 mm.
(d)
Plain packed stone walls
A foundation trench shall be excavated down to rock, or to

material with an adequate bearing capacity at a minimum
depth of 300 mm below ground level. Large selected stones
shall be used for the foundation layer. Flat and stratified
stones shall be laid with the largest dimension in the
horizontal plane. Stones shall be packed individually to
stagger the joints and to provide a minimum of voids, and
shall be firmly bedded against adjoining stones. The spaces
between the larger stones shall be filled with spalls securely
rammed into place. The larger stones shall not bear on the
spalls used for filling the voids. The top and ends of the wall
shall be neatly finished with selected coping stones.
Filter bed
The filter bed shall consist of a layer or layers of permeable

material placed on the prepared surface to the required
thickness and each layer shall be finished to an even
surface and thickness. Compaction of pervious material will
not be required. Care shall be taken not to mix various
grades of filter material nor to disturb material already
placed when subsequent layers or riprap are being placed.
(c)
(b)
The appearance of the completed wall shall present an

even, tight surface.
(c)
Cement-mortared stone walls
The walling shall be constructed as specified in (b) above,

with the exception that the stones shall be wetted and set in
a 6:1 sand:cement mortar. The exposed parts of the stones
on the wall faces shall be cleaned of all mortar by washing
or wire-brushing. The mortar shall be flush pointed to the
satisfaction of the Engineer, who may require a capping and
end treatment of the same mortar.
Weep holes shall be provided as prescribed and shall be
cleaned of mortar or any other clogging material that may
have entered during construction.
The walling shall be protected from the elements and kept
moist for a minimum period of four days after completion.
2506
SEGMENTAL BLOCK PAVING
(a)
General
The underlying layers for surfaces to be pitched shall be

constructed as specified or as indicated on the Drawings.
Where no specified requirements have been set in respect
of the underlying layers, the top layer shall be mechanically
compacted to at least 93% of modified AASHTO density
down to at least 150 mm from the top. During this process
the top layer shall be trimmed to the required grades and
levels.
Dumped riprap
Dumped riprap shall be constructed by dumping the stone

on the prepared surface, spreading it by bulldozer, or other
suitable earth-moving equipment, and trimming it to the
required lines and levels. The material shall be placed in a
manner that will prevent the segregation of the smaller and
larger stones and the top layer shall be tight with a minimum
of voids.
2505
STONE MASONRY WALLS
(a)
General
Stone masonry walls may be plain packed stone walls with

dry joints or otherwise mortared stone walls with stones
bedded in cement mortar as indicated on the Drawings, as
specified, or as may be ordered.
The minimum mass of each stone used shall be 10 kg and
its minimum dimension 75 mm.
Where specified or required by the Engineer the prepared

surface shall be treated with approved environmentally
compatible herbicide and ant poison before the layer of sand
for bedding is placed.
(b)
Sand for bedding
A layer of sand for bedding shall be placed on top of the

prepared surface, and, when still loose, accurately floated to
an uncompacted thickness of 30 mm ( 5 mm) so as to
afford the correct level to the pavement after compaction.
Sand for bedding shall be placed immediately before the
paving blocks are laid and shall not be compacted before
the blocks have been laid.
(c)
Laying the paving blocks
The pattern for laying the paving blocks shall be that as

shown on the Drawings or approved or prescribed by the
Engineer. Unbroken blocks shall first be laid and filler
2500-3
pieces afterwards. Filler pieces shall be neatly sawn or

hewn to fit exactly into the space to be filled. Spaces of less
than 25% of a full-sized block may be filled with 25 MPa
concrete. The joints between blocks shall be sized between
2 and 6 mm, and the top faces of blocks shall be flush.
After the paving blocks have been laid, the pavement shall
be compacted by two passes of a suitable vibrating-plate
compactor operating at a frequency of 65 -100 Hz and a low
amplitude. Its plate surface shall be 0.2 - 0.4 m2 and shall
develop a centrifugal force of 7 - 16 kN.
After compaction of the pavement as described above, joint
sand shall be spread and brushed into the joints until the
joints have been properly filled. Any surplus sand shall then
be broomed off and the pavement shall then be subjected to
two further passes by the plate vibrator.
(d)
Edge beams
Concrete edge-beams or any such other edge supports

shall be constructed onto the supporting layer in accordance
with the details shown on the Drawings, and shall be
constructed and left to cure before any paving blocks are
laid.
(e)
also be treated with an environmentally compatible

herbicide and ant poison if required. The concrete shall
comply with the requirements of Series 6000.
Prior to placing the concrete, the surface shall be watered
and kept damp until the concrete has been placed. The
type of concrete used shall, unless otherwise specified, be
Class 20 and the concrete shall be accurately laid in
alternate panels to the lines and levels indicated, after which
the remaining panels shall be similarly placed. Accurately
set-up guides shall be used to achieve the required line and
slope. The concrete shall be thoroughly compacted and
finished to a Class U2 surface finish.
Where indicated, the concrete pitching shall be contained by
concrete edge beams being constructed as described in
Clause 2506(d).
The concrete pitching shall be cured for at least seven days
and no traffic shall be allowed to move across the pitching
before the specified 28-day strength has been reached.
The final surface may nowhere deviate by more than 25 mm
from the specified levels and planes, and no irregularities
exceeding 10 mm may occur during testing with a 3 m
straight-edge.
Paving blocks for sidewalks

2508
Paving blocks for sidewalks shall be laid in the same way as

that described above for paving blocks, also on a bed of
sand, but on the proviso that, where so specified, joints shall
be filled with a 6:1 sand:cement mortar instead of with sand
only. In this case the width of the joints between the stones
shall be strictly in accordance with the dimensions shown on
the Drawings, and the pavement shall be fully compacted
before the joints are filled.
(f)
Concrete grass blocks
Concrete grass blocks of the size specified or shown on the

Drawings shall be placed on areas prepared for grassing as
specified in Section 5700. The holes in the blocks shall be
filled with topsoil, and grassed with grass cuttings or
hydroseeding as specified in Section 5700.
Item
Finishing requirements
(i)
Segmental block paving
The completed paving shall be even and neat, flush with the
kerb or edge-beam and may not lie below the side of the
kerbing. The final surface may nowhere deviate by more
than 15 mm from the specified levels and planes, and no
irregularities exceeding 10 mm may occur during testing
with a 3 m straight-edge.
(ii)
Grass-block pavement
The completed grass-block pavement shall have a neat and

even appearance. The final surface of the pavement may
nowhere deviate by more than 15 mm from the specified
levels and planes.
2507
CAST IN SITU CONCRETE PITCHING
The areas where cast in situ concrete pitching is to be

constructed shall be compacted, trimmed and prepared as
described in Clause 2506 for block paving. The areas shall
2500-4
Unit
25.01 Stone pitching:

(a)
Plain pitching:
(i)
Method 1
(ii)
Method 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(b)
Grouted stone pitching . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(c)
Wired and grouted
stone pitching (total thickness
indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(d)
(g)
Grouted stone pitching

on a concrete bed (total
thickness indicated) . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
The unit of measurement for pitching shall be the square

metre of each type of pitching in place.
The tendered rate for each type of stone pitching shall
include full compensation for furnishing all materials, making
all excavations excluding trench and bulk excavations,
compacting and trimming the excavated surfaces, forming
and cleaning the weepholes, placing stones and grouting, or
wiring and grouting where applicable, grassing and watering
(applicable to Method 2) and for all other work necessary for
completing the pitching as specified. The tendered rate for
grouted stone pitching on a concrete bed shall also include
full compensation for the concrete bed.
Excavations for foundation trenches and concrete edge
beams and the construction of the concrete edge beams will
be paid for separately.
Item
Unit
25.02 Riprap:
(a)
Packed riprap (critical
mass of stone indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(b)
Dumped riprap (critical
mass of stone indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
Crushed stone
. . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(ii)
Filter sand obtained
from borrow pits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(d)
Synthetic-fibre filter
fabric (type, class and grade
stated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
The unit of measurement for riprap and filter layer (Subitems
(a), (b) and (c) above) shall be the cubic metre of riprap or
filter layer in place and shall include rock used in trench
backfill. The unit of measurement for Subitem (d) shall be
the square metre of filter fabric laid as specified, including
overlaps.
The rates tendered for Subitems (a), (b) and (c) shall include
full compensation for preparing the surfaces, including
excavation (but excluding excavation for trenches and bulk
excavations) and for the furnishing, transporting, handling
and placing of riprap or filter layers. The rate tendered for
Subitem (d) shall include full compensation for procuring
and furnishing the filter fabric and for laying it as specified,
including wastage. Collectively the rates shall also include
full compensation for all other incidentals necessary for
completing the work as specified.
Item
Unit
25.03 Stone masonry walls:

(a)
(c)
Prefabricated concrete
grass blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(d)
Prefabricated concrete
paving blocks for sidewalk
pavement (thickness indicated) . . . . . . square metre (m2)
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of each
type constructed.
(c)
Filter backing (Subclauses 2104(a)(ii) and 2504(b))
consisting of:
(i)
(b)
Segmental block paving
(type and thickness indicated) . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
Plain packed stone walls . . . . . . cubic metre (m )
(b)
Cement-mortared stone
walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement for stone masonry walls shall be
the cubic metre of actual walling constructed and accepted.
The tendered rate for each type of stone wall shall include
full compensation for furnishing all materials, trimming the
areas, placing the stones and cement-mortared masonry
where necessary, and all other work necessary for
completing the walls in accordance with the Specifications.
Excavation of foundation trenches will be paid for
separately.

furnishing all materials, all excavation (but excluding bulk
excavation and excavation for foundation trenches and edge
beams), compacting and trimming all the excavated areas,
providing a sand bedding (Subitems (b) and (d)), laying and
compacting the paving blocks (Subitems (b) and (d)), laying
concrete grass blocks (Subitem (c)), topsoiling and
grassing, (Subitem (c)), constructing concrete pitching,
including normal formwork and the shaping of surfaces
(Subitem (a)), making and cleaning weepholes (Subitem (a))
and for all other work necessary for completing the work as
specified.
Item
25.05 Concrete edge beams

(class of concrete
indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
concrete in edge beams constructed as instructed.
furnishing all materials and labour, including formwork as
necessary, placing concrete and shaping all surfaces and all
excavations required (in all classes of material).
Item
Unit
25.04 Concrete pitching and

block paving:
(a)
Cast in situ concrete
pitching (class of concrete
and thickness of pitching
indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
Unit
25.06 Provision of herbicide

and ant poison:
(a)
Provision of materials . . . . . . . . . Prime cost sum
(b)
Contractor's charges and
profit added to the prime cost sum . . . . . . . per cent (%)
Payment under the prime cost sum for providing
environmentally compatible ant poison and herbicide and
the Contractor's costs and profit in this respect shall be
made in accordance with the provisions of the General
Conditions of Contract, but, in addition, the Contractor's
tendered rate for costs and profit shall include full
compensation for applying the chemicals as specified.
Item
Item
Unit
Unit
25.07 Foundation trenches . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)

material excavated for foundation trenches irrespective of
the class or depth of material. The quantity shall be
calculated according to the dimensions shown on the
Drawings or instructed by the Engineer.
2500-5

excavation of the foundation trenches irrespective of the
class or depth of material, complete as specified, or as
shown on the Drawings or as instructed by the Engineer.
2500-6
SERIES 2000 :
DRAINAGE
(e)
SECTION 2600 :
GABIONS
Wire mesh shall comply with the requirements of SABS

1580 or equivalent.
Wire mesh
CONTENTS
(f)
2601
2602
2603
2604
2605
2601
SCOPE
MATERIALS
CONSTRUCTING GABION CAGES
CONSTRUCTING GABIONS
Filter fabric shall comply with the requirements of Subclause

2104(a)(iii) for Grade 3 filter fabric.
SCOPE
This Section covers the construction of gabion walls and

aprons for constructing retaining walls, lining channels,
revetments and other anti-erosion structures.
Generally gabions shall be flexible galvanised steel-wiremesh cages packed with rock.
2602
MATERIALS
(a)
Rock
Rock used as filling for cages shall be clean, hard

unweathered boulders or rock fragments. No rock fragment
shall exceed the maximum size given in Table 2602/1, and
at least 85% of the rocks shall be of a size equal to or above
the average least dimension size given in Table 2602/1.
Rock size according to

the largest dimension of rock
Average least
dimension
(mm)
Maximum
(mm)
125
125
125
125
150
200
250
250
0.2
0.3
0.5
1.0
(b)
2603
CONSTRUCTING GABION CAGES
(a)
General
Gabion cages shall be made from wire mesh of the size and
type and selvedge as specified below. The cages shall be
subdivided into cells by wire mesh diaphragms and will be of
two types:
(i)
Boxes which are generally used for the construction
of gabion walls. These boxes are subdivided into cells by
diaphragms spaced at 1.0 m intervals. No diaphragms are
required for a box of which the length does not exceed
1.5 m.
(ii)
Mattresses which are generally used as single-layer
aprons only in revetments, channel linings, etc, and in which
the maximum width shall be 2 m, and the maximum depth
0.5 m. Mattresses shall be subdivided by diaphragms into
cells with a width of 600 mm or 1.0 m as specified in the
The standard sizes of boxes and mattresses are as follows:
(1)
Table 2602/1
Rock sizes
Depth of
cage (m)
Filter fabric below the gabions
Wire
Boxes
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 2, 3 and 4 m
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 m
Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.3 m, 0.5 m and 1.0 m
Diaphragm spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 m.
(2)
Mattresses
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 m
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 m
Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.2 m, 0.3 m and 0.5 m.
Diaphragm spacing . . . . . . 600 mm or 1.0 m as specified
Other gabions may be supplied, provided that the Engineer's
prior permission has been obtained.
(b)
Selvedges
All wire used for making the gabions and for tying during the
construction of the gabions shall comply with the
requirements of SABS 675 or equivalent for mild-steel wire.
The cut edges of all mesh used in the construction of

gabions, except the bottom edges of diaphragms and end
panels, shall be selvedged with wire with a diameter as
specified in SABS 1580 or equivalent.
(c)
Where the selvedge is not woven integrally with the mesh

but has to be tied to the cut ends of the mesh, it shall be
attached by tying the cut ends of the mesh to the selvedge,
so that a force of not less than 8.5 kN applied in the same
plane as the mesh at a point on the selvedge of a mesh
sample of 1.0 m in length will be required to separate it from
the mesh.
PVC-coated wire
The gabions of PVC-coated mesh shall be of an

acknowledged make which shall be subject to approval by
the Engineer.
(d)
Galvanising
All wire used in the making of gabions shall be galvanised in

accordance with the provisions of SABS 675 or equivalent
for Class A heavy galvanised mild-steel wire.
2600-1
(c)
Diaphragms and end-panels
The diaphragms and end-panels shall be selvedged on the

top and vertical sides only. The end-panels shall be
attached by the cut ends of the mesh wires at the bottom of
the panel being twisted around the selvedge on the base of
the gabion. Similarly, the diaphragms shall be attached by
the cut ends of the mesh being twisted to the twisted joints
of the mesh in the base of the gabion. In each case the
force required to separate the panels from the base shall be
not less than 6 kN/m.
(d)
(d)
Rock filling
(i)
Boxes in retaining walls
Particular care shall be taken in packing the visible faces of

gabion boxes, where only selected stone of the specified
size shall be used so as to obtain an even-faced finish. The
boxes shall be filled in layers to prevent deformation and
bulging. Boxes shall be filled to just below the level of the
wire braces, after which the braces shall be twisted to
provide tension. Care must be taken to ensure that
consecutive layers of cages are filled evenly to a level
surface ready to receive the next course.
Binding and connecting wire

(ii)
Sufficient binding and connecting wire for all the tying to be

done during construction of the gabions as specified in
Clause 2604 below, shall be supplied with the gabion cages.
The diameter of the wire shall be 2.2 mm.
(e)
The 0.2 m, 0.3 m and 0.5 m gabions forming aprons and

revetments shall be filled by random stones being packed in
the first layer and by selected stones being used for the top
layer so as to resemble normal stone pitching.
Tolerances
2605
The tolerance on the specified diameter of all wire shall be

2.5%. The length of the cages shall be subject to a
tolerance of 10% and the width of the cages shall be
subject to a tolerance of 5% and the depth of the cages
shall be subject to a tolerance of 5%.
2604
CONSTRUCTING GABIONS
(a)
Preparing the foundation and surface
The surface on which the gabion cages are to be laid prior

to their being filled with rock shall be levelled to the depth
shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer so as
to present an even surface. If necessary, cavities between
rock protrusions shall be filled with material similar to that
specified in Subclause 2602(a).
Where required, a
foundation trench along the toe of the revetment or wall shall
be excavated to the dimensions shown on the Drawings or
indicated by the Engineer.
(b)
Filter fabric
One layer of Grade 3 filter fabric shall be placed where

indicated on the Drawings or ordered by the Engineer. The
material shall be placed, in accordance with the instructions,
in strips with a minimum overlap of 300 mm at the joints, and
shall be properly fastened to prevent any movement or
slipping while the gabions are being placed.
(c)
Assembly
The methods of constructing, stretching, placing in position,

wiring and filling the gabions with rock shall generally be in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions which have
been approved by the Engineer, but nevertheless sufficient
connecting wires shall be tensioned between the vertical
sides of all the outer visible cells to prevent the deformation
of boxes as they are being filled with stone.
It is essential that the corners of gabion cages be securely
wired together to provide a uniform surface and ensure that
the structure does not resemble a series of blocks or panels.
The layout and the tolerances for the layout of the boxes
shall be as shown on the Drawings or as instructed by the
Engineer.
2600-2
Mattresses used in revetments and aprons
Item
Unit
26.01 Foundation trench

excavation and backfilling:
(a)
In solid rock (material
which requires blasting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(b)
In all other classes
of material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of each
class of excavation made in accordance with the authorised
dimensions.
excavating in each class of material, including unavoidable
overbreak, the trimming of trenches and compacting the
trench inverts, backfilling and compacting the backfill, and
the disposing of surplus excavated material, including a freehaul of 1.0 km.
Item
Unit
26.02 Surface preparation

for bedding the
gabions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
The unit of measurement for levelling and preparing surfaces
for receiving the gabions shall be the square metre to the
neat dimensions of revetments, aprons or wall foundations.
excavating, filling any cavities with rock, and levelling the
ground surface so as to be ready for receiving the gabion
cages for retaining walls, aprons and revetments.
Item
Unit
26.03 Gabions:
(a)
Galvanised gabion boxes

(dimensions of box and
mesh size indicated) . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(b)
PVC-coated gabion boxes

(dimensions of box and
mesh size indicated) . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(c)
Galvanised gabion mattresses

(dimensions of mattress,
mesh size and diaphragm
spacing indicated) . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(d)
PVC-coated gabion mattresses

(dimensions of mattress,
mesh size and diaphragm
spacing indicated) . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of the

rock-filled cages and the quantity shall be calculated from
the dimensions of the gabions indicated on the Drawings or
prescribed by the Engineer, irrespective of any deformation
or bulging of the completed gabions.

supplying all the materials, including rock fill, wire-mesh
cages, tying and connecting wires, loading, transporting and
off-loading, the assembling and filling of the cages, and any
other work necessary for constructing the gabions.
Item
Unit
26.04 Filter fabric (type

and grade indicated) . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of area
covered with filter fabric placed in position.
supplying the filter fabric, cutting, waste, placing, joining,
overlapping, and securing the material in position.
2600-3
SERIES 3000
EARTHWORKS AND PAVEMENT LAYERS
OF GRAVEL OR CRUSHED STONE
3100
3200
3300
3400
3500
3600
3700
3800
2600-4
Borrow material
Selection, stockpiling and breaking down the material from borrow pits
and cuttings, and placing and compacting the gravel layers
Mass earthworks
Pavement layers of gravel material
Stabilisation
Crushed stone base
Waterbound macadam base
Breaking up existing pavement layers
2600-5
SERIES 3000 :
SECTION 3100 :
EARTHWORKS AND PAVEMENT

LAYERS OF GRAVEL OR
CRUSHED STONE
3104
OBTAINING BORROW MATERIALS
(a)
General
BORROW MATERIALS
Borrow materials shall be obtained from approved sources

of supply listed and described on the borrow-pit plans, or
from such other sources as may from time to time be tested
and approved by the Engineer. Borrow-pit material
complying with the requirements of the Specifications for the
use for which the material is intended, shall be selected from
these approved sources.
CONTENTS
3101
3102
3109
SCOPE
NEGOTIATIONS
W ITH
OW NERS
AND
AUTHORITIES
USE OF BORROW PITS
OBTAINING BORROW MATERIALS
OPENING AND WORKING BORROW PITS
FINISHING-OFF BORROW AREAS AND HAUL
ROADS
DISPOSAL OF BORROW MATERIAL
CLASSIFICATION OF BORROW PITS FOR
GRAVEL MATERIALS FOR PAVEMENT LAYERS
3101
SCOPE
3103
3104
3105
3106
3107
3108
This Section covers the work involved in obtaining borrow

materials for work under this contract, including negotiations
with Owners of the land on which borrow areas are situated,
clearing the site, stripping and disposing of excess
overburden, excavating selected material for use in the
Works, and finishing-off the borrow areas.
3102
NEGOTIATIONS
AUTHORITIES
WITH
OWNERS
AND
With regard to borrow areas that are identified and

prescribed by the Employer for the execution of the Works,
the Contractor is exempted from all obligations and costs in
respect of negotiations with and compensation of the
Owners of the land on which the borrow areas are situated,
unless otherwise specified.
The attention of the Contractor is drawn to the provisions of
Clause 1214 as regards his activities on private land.
The Contractor shall observe all the legal provisions and the
provisions of the Project Specifications in respect of his
activities at borrow pits and when finishing off the borrow
pits.
3103
USE OF BORROW PITS
The Contractor shall satisfy himself that all necessary

negotiations have been made with the Owner of the ground
on which any borrow pit is situated, prior to the opening of
such borrow area.
The Contractor shall notify landowners both verbally and in
writing at least seven days before prospecting for materials
from alternative sources.
The Contractor shall give the Engineer at least thirty days
notice of his intention to enter a borrow area which had been
available for inspection at the time of the Tender and shall
not enter thereon until the approval of the Engineer has
been given.
(b)
Borrow-pit plans
Borrow-pit plans are included in the contract documents.

The information shown on the borrow-pit plans reflects the
results of site investigations and laboratory tests conducted
by or for the Employer and is supplied in good faith as to the
sufficiency in quantity and quality of the material for the due
and proper completion of the Works. The provision of these
borrow-pit plans shall not in any way be construed as
limiting the obtaining of borrow material to the borrow areas
and/or to the depth of working specified pits shown on the
plans or as necessarily limiting the use of the material to
that described on the plans.
If, at any time during construction, it appears that the quality
or quantity of material available in a borrow pit is inadequate
or insufficient, the Contractor shall make use of other borrow
areas approved by the Engineer, irrespective of whether or
not such other borrow areas are shown on the borrow-pit
plans. The Contractor shall provide all assistance in the form
of plant, trained personnel, labour and fencing material as
may be required by the Engineer for prospecting for and
testing further borrow pits. The cost of such assistance will
be for the Employer's account.
(c)
Use of borrow materials
The decision as to which source of supply the Contractor

shall use at any time shall rest with the Engineer, and the
Contractor shall at any stage of the work use that approved
source of supply which in the opinion of the Engineer is the
most suitable in regard to the quality and quantities of the
various types of available materials and the ultimate cost of
the work to the Employer. Unless otherwise determined
elsewhere, payment will not be made for moving the
Contractor's plant from one location to another at any of the
individual sources shown on the plans or subsequently
Should the Contractor elect to obtain material from sources
other than those shown on the borrow-pit plans, he shall
excavate the necessary trial holes, take such samples and
conduct or have conducted such tests as are deemed to be
necessary by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit the
results and sufficient details to the Engineer to satisfy him
that the quality and quantity of the material available in the
proposed borrow area are acceptable for the intended use,
all at the Contractor's own expense. Compensation to
Owners and arrangements for taking any material shall be
in terms of the Project Specifications.
Approval of borrow pits or borrow areas shall apply only to
those portions of the pit or area from which acceptable
material can be obtained or produced. The Contractor shall
organise his operations in any approved pit or borrow area
or portions thereof with a view to using the material for the
purpose envisaged.
3100-1
The Contractor shall plan his exploitation of the borrow pits

in such a manner that the various types of materials
excavated can be selected and loaded directly for use.
When this is unfeasible for reasons beyond the Contractor's
control, material to be stockpiled for later use shall be
loaded, transported and temporarily stockpiled as ordered
by the Engineer and as determined in Clause 3203. No
material reserved for a specific purpose shall be used for
any other purpose without the written approval of the
Engineer.
between the Engineer and the Contractor in regard to the

quantity of such overburden.
Unless, under exceptional circumstances, the clearing and
grubbing of the borrow area is required to be done first, the
excess overburden shall be measured only after this work
has been completed.
Borrow materials obtainable in the road prism or

within the road reserve boundaries
As instructed by the Engineer, excess overburden shall be

moved to the outer limits of the proposed borrow area, and,
if this area is enlarged later on, the excess overburden shall
be moved further to the new outer limits, or, where possible
at that stage, replaced into the borrow pits as described in
Clause 3105.
Where suitable sources of materials are available in existing

cuttings and side drains, or anywhere else in the road prism
or within the road reserve boundaries, such materials may
be used for the construction of fills, pavement layers and
shoulders, if approved by the Engineer.
Excess overburden will also be measured for payment

where the borrow material shall be stone or sand used for
stone pitching, concrete work, crushed-stone subbase and
base, permeable material in subsurface drainage systems,
and asphalt pavements and seals.
3105
OPENING AND WORKING BORROW PITS AND

HAUL ROADS
(d)
(a)
Removing topsoil
(d)
Prior to opening a borrow pit, the Contractor shall ascertain

from the Engineer whether the removal of topsoil is required
and shall then remove and stockpile such topsoil as
This work shall be carried out, measured and paid for in
accordance with the provisions of Section 5700.
(b)
Clearing and grubbing
Clearing and grubbing of borrow areas will be measured for

payment in accordance with the provisions of Section 1700
before excavation is commenced, but only in the following
cases, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer:
(i)
In borrow areas located in plantations.
(ii)
In borrow areas where large trees with trunks
exceeding 1.0 m in circumference as defined in Section
1700 are found.
(iii)
In borrow areas without any excess overburden but
where the removal of grass, shrubs and roots is required.
Unless the clearing and grubbing of a borrow area have
been prescribed by the Engineer in writing, no payment will
be made for clearing and grubbing such borrow area. This
applies particularly to borrow areas opened for obtaining
rock or sand used in the construction of stone-pitching,
concrete work, crushed-stone base or subbase, permeable
subsurface drain material or bituminous asphalt or surfacing.
(c)
Excess overburden
The Contractor shall advise the Engineer in good time,

before any excavation at such borrow area is commenced,
of his intention of starting to use a borrow area in order that
a survey of the site can be made for the purpose of
computing the quantity of excess overburden, if any, to be
removed.
No removal of overburden or other quarrying operations
shall be proceeded with until agreement has been reached
3100-2
Excavating borrow material
Borrow material shall be excavated within the limits of depth

and area shown on the borrow-pit plans or as directed by the
Engineer, and in a manner that will not prejudice the use of
the material for the intended purpose.
Where any borrow pit contains different types of materials in
separate layers which require to be mixed to produce a
suitable product, the materials shall be excavated over the
full depth of the approved working face in one operation
without the different types of materials being separated.
The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautionary
measures so as to avoid contamination of the suitable
borrow material by the inclusion of clayey or otherwise
unsuitable material from the floor of the borrow pit, the
overburden, any unsuitable layers, or areas beyond the
approved limits of the borrow area. During loading, any hard
oversize material which will not break down during
processing on the road shall be excluded as far as is
practicable.
During borrow operations, and especially when excavating
material near the floor and outer boundaries of the borrow
areas, the Contractor shall plan his operations so as to
reduce, in so far as is possible, the amount of earth moving
work that will be necessary for finishing-off the borrow pits.
Indiscriminate excavation without due regard being had to
the desired final shape of the borrow pit will not be
permitted.
The material in borrow pits shall be blasted or ripped and
excavated in a manner that will ensure the effective
breaking-down of the material in the borrow pit before it is
loaded. Rippable material which tends to break into large
blocks shall be cross-ripped.
(e)
Control at borrow pit
The Contractor shall be responsible for controlling his

operations at every borrow pit where material is being
excavated to ensure compliance with all the requirements of
Subclause 3105(d).
He shall carry out sufficient tests on the material being
excavated from the borrow pit to satisfy himself that the
quality of the material will comply with the specified
requirements for the particular layer for which it will be used.
If there is any doubt concerning the quality of the borrow

material being excavated at any time, the Contractor shall
notify the Engineer immediately, and in any case before
such material is brought onto the road. The results of all the
tests carried out by the Contractor shall be submitted to the
Engineer on request. The Engineer will, after further testing
or inspection if necessary, instruct the Contractor regarding
the use of the material in the borrow area, or he may order
the borrow pit to be finished off and abandoned.
(f)
Protecting borrow pits
Borrow pits shall be continuously protected against the

ingress of surface water, and the Contractor shall construct
such temporary banks as may be required for diverting
surface water, and, in so far as is possible, his operations
shall be planned in such a way that the borrow pit will be
self-draining. Where this is not possible, borrow pits shall
be dewatered by pumping. The Contractor shall be solely
responsible for keeping borrow areas dry and ensuring that
borrow material is sufficiently dry when required for use.
(g)
The shaping and finishing-off of the borrow pit shall be done

in such a manner that the borrow pit will be properly drained
wherever practicable, and, where required, the Contractor
shall place earth banks to divert surface water from the
borrow area.
If so directed, the borrow area shall be fenced off and
provided with gates as specified in Section 5300, and
topsoiled and/or hydro-seeded as specified in Section 5700.
The finishing-off of the borrow areas shall be to the entire
satisfaction of the Engineer and the Contractor shall submit
to the Engineer a signed certificate from the landowner or
relevant Government Agency stating that the finishing-off
complies with all necessary legal provisions.
The
Contractor's attention is drawn to the provisions of Clause
1214 in this respect.
Access roads
The Contractor shall construct and surface appropriately

such access roads as are required and shall provide
temporary ditches and culverts of sufficient size to ensure
that the existing drainage of the area is not restricted. The
Contractor shall obtain the Engineers prior approval to the
siting of junctions of access roads with existing roads and
shall comply with the Engineers conditions of access
particularly regarding clearance of obstructions to provide
adequate sight lines, temporary drainage or culverts and the
provision of signs and traffic control.
The provision of access roads shall not be measured for
payment.
(h)
shall subsequently be covered with soft material. All

available soft material shall be spread evenly to the
prescribed thickness, and where sufficient material is not
available for so covering the entire area, the remaining
portions shall be scarified along the contours so as to avoid
undue erosion.
Private access roads
Where materials from a borrow pit are hauled on private

access roads, such roads shall be maintained properly to
the satisfaction of the Engineer during borrow operations at
the borrow pit. No additional payment will be made for this
work, and full compensation for maintaining private access
roads used as haul roads will be regarded as being included
in the rates tendered and paid for in the various items of
work where the materials are used.
3106
FINISHING-OFF BORROW AREAS AND HAUL

ROADS
(a)
Borrow areas
On completion of his operations in a borrow area, the

Contractor shall reinstate the entire area so as to blend it
with the surrounding area and to permit the re-establishment
of vegetation. For this purpose the borrow area shall be
shaped to even contours without any slopes being steeper
than 1:3, except where the Engineer so permits in specified
cases. All material in and around the borrow area, whether
spoil from road-building operations, excess stockpiled
material, oversize material left in the borrow pit, material
resulting from clearing and grubbing operations or excess
overburden, shall be used or disposed of as directed by the
Engineer. Solid waste and rubbish may not be dumped into
the borrow area. Material incapable of supporting vegetation
shall be buried and used for shaping the borrow area and
(b)
Haul roads
All haul roads shall be obliterated and their surfaces

scarified, earth banks shall be constructed to prevent
erosion, and all damaged fences and other structures shall
be reinstated, unless otherwise specified.
Where materials from a borrow pit are hauled on private
access roads, such roads shall be restored to their original
condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer when borrow
operations at the borrow pit are completed, unless otherwise
specified. No additional payment will be made for this work,
and full compensation for restoring private access roads
used as haul roads will be regarded as being included in the
rates tendered and paid for in the various items of work
where the materials are used.
The restoration of proclaimed roads shall be done in
accordance with the instructions of the Engineer and
payment will be made in accordance with applicable unit
rates.
3107
DISPOSAL OF BORROW MATERIAL
The Contractor shall not have the right to use material

obtained from borrow pits for any purpose other than for the
execution of this contract. He shall not dispose of any
borrow material whether processed or not either by sale or
donation to any person without the written authorisation of
the Employer.
3108
CLASSIFICATION OF BORROW PITS FOR

GRAVEL MATERIALS FOR PAVEMENT LAYERS
In the case of gravel materials used in the construction of

the pavement layers, the Contractor is afforded an
opportunity to tender rates for each borrow pit provided by
the Engineer, based on his own assessment of the material
in each borrow pit.
Except for crushing and screening of material, no additional
payment will be made for excavating or processing material
from borrow pits, regardless of the hardness of the material.
3100-3
A schedule of borrow pits is provided as a supplement to the

Schedule of Quantities. This schedule shows the estimated
quantity of gravel material for base, subbase selected
subgrade and shoulder to be used from each borrow pit. It
affords the Contractor the opportunity to tender a rate for
each type of material approved along the route for use in the
construction of the relevant layers and to calculate the
average contract rates to be entered in the Schedule of
Quantities for the construction of these layers.
The Engineer shall have the right to decide which borrow pit
the Contractor shall operate from at any particular stage of
the work, to approve new borrow pits during the construction
period, to deviate from the estimated quantities shown in the
Schedule of Quantities and in the supplement, and to adjust
compensation payable in accordance with the actual
quantity of material used from each borrow pit and the rate
tendered in the supplement to the Schedule of Quantities for
material from each borrow pit or for similar material from
new borrow pits, Neglect or failure on the part of the
Contractor waives all rights to distinguish between different
types of material and that he waives all claims to adjustment
in compensation in this respect.
In the case of new borrow pits for which no rates have been
tendered, the Engineer shall determine the new rates
applicable having regard to the nature of the material
encountered in relation to the nature of the material for
which rates have been tendered in the schedule of borrow
pits.
3109
Item
Unit
Item
Unit
31.02 Excess overburden in borrow

pits for obtaining crushed
stone for pavement layers:
(a)
Overburden in soft or
intermediate excavation . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(b)
Overburden in hard
excavation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of excess
overburden measured in place before stripping. The
quantity shall be based on the depth of the overburden as
measured in test pits. Distinction shall be made between
soft and intermediate material on the one hand and hard
material on the other, in accordance with the classification
as described in Clause 3303 for excavations.
stripping, removing and stockpiling excess overburden prior
to the borrow material being excavated, replacing the excess
overburden in the borrow pit after excavation of the borrow
material has been completed, and levelling-off the excess
overburden in the borrow area.
Where the stockpiled excess overburden has to be moved
to beyond the limits originally indicated by the Engineer, it
shall be measured once more for payment, but only under
Item 31.01.
Where overburden material is used for filling or for other
purposes, payment will not be made for removing such
overburden material, but will be made in accordance with
the purpose for which such material will be used.
31.01 Excess overburden . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)

Item
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of excess
overburden measured in place before stripping. Such
measurement shall be based on the depth of overburden as
measured in trial pits excavated by the Contractor in a
square pattern at intervals of 10 m over the whole area
concerned.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for digging
the trial pits, stripping, removing and stockpiling the excess
overburden prior to the borrow material being excavated, for
replacing the excess overburden in the borrow pit after
completing the excavation of borrow material, and for
levelling-off the excess overburden in the borrow area.
Where the stockpiled excess overburden has to be moved
to beyond the limits originally instructed by the Engineer, it
shall be measured once more for payment.
Where overburden material is used for filling or for other
purposes, payment will not be made for removing such
overburden material, but will be made in accordance with
the purpose for which such material will be used.
No distinction will be made for purposes of payment, in
accordance with the classification set out in Clause 3303,
between the various types of material, which have been
removed as overburden, except only in regard to borrow pits
for obtaining crushed stone for the subbase and base, as
determined in Item 31.02 below.
3100-4
Unit
31.03 Finishing-off borrow areas in:

(a)
Hard material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hectare (ha)
(b)
Intermediate material . . . . . . . . . . . . . hectare (ha)
(c)
Soft material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hectare (ha)
The unit of measurement for finishing borrow areas shall be

the hectare measured in accordance with the finally
excavated area of the borrow pit before it is finished off.
finishing-off the borrow pits as specified, including any
further earth moving necessary for finishing, but excluding
the establishment of grass. Borrow pits shall be classified
in accordance with the classification of the material removed
therefrom and, where more than one class of material is
taken from a borrow area, the area shall be apportioned pro
rata for classification purposes, in accordance with the
volumes of each type of material removed.
Notes:
(a)
Borrow material
Apart from the existing payment items, no direct payment

will be made for procuring and providing borrow material, but
it will be regarded as an additional obligation on the part of
the Contractor to be covered by the contract prices paid for
the various items of work for which the material is used as
prescribed in these Specifications. Payment shall, however,

be made separately for certain items of work where so
specified.
The tendered rates for procuring and providing borrow
material, shall also include full compensation for all
obligations, costs, activities and work as prescribed in
Section 1200, as well as for all supervision, labour, plant,
tools and incidentals required therefor, including all costs as
may be necessary for conducting control tests on all
materials, draining and protecting all borrow areas, and
concluding all negotiations with landowners (except
negotiations that are entered into by the Employer himself)
as specified, also for finally shaping and finishing the borrow
pits.
(b)
Prospecting for materials
Payment will be made for excavating trial pits according to

a grid pattern as ordered by the Engineer over the entire
borrow area, and for assistance rendered by the Contractor,
as may be directed by the Engineer, in prospecting for
additional material as "extra work" in accordance with the
provisions of the General Conditions of Contract.
3100-5
3100-6
SERIES 3000 :

LAYERS OF GRAVEL OR
CRUSHED STONE
SECTION 3200 :
SELECTION, STOCKPILING AND

BREAKING-DOWN THE MATERIAL
FROM BORROW PITS AND
CUTTINGS, AND PLACING AND
COMPACTING THE GRAVEL
LAYERS
CONTENTS
3201
3202
3203
3204
3210
3211
3212
SCOPE
SELECTING THE MATERIAL
STOCKPILING THE MATERIAL
BREAKING-DOWN THE MATERIAL FROM CUT
AND BORROW
CRUSHING AND SCREENING
CONTROLLING THE MOISTURE CONTENT OF
MATERIALS
LAYER THICKNESSES AND SPREADING THE
MATERIALS
PLACING AND COMPACTING THE MATERIALS IN
LAYER THICKNESSES OF 200 mm AND LESS
AFTER COMPACTION
PLACING AND COMPACTING THE MATERIALS IN
LAYER THICKNESSES IN EXCESS OF 200 mm
AFTER COMPACTION
DISPOSING OF OVERSIZE MATERIAL
DRAINAGE AND PROTECTION
3201
SCOPE
3205
3206
3207
3208
3209
This Section describes the selection of materials from

borrow pits and cuttings for the various purposes for which
they are required, stockpiling the materials excavated but
which cannot be dumped direct where required, breaking
down the material during the excavation process, when it is
processed on the road, or when special processing for
breaking-down by crusher is required, controlling the
moisture content, placing and compacting the soil and
gravel layers and constructing the rock fills.
In addition, this Section describes the treatment of material
recovered from existing pavements, and construction in
restricted areas during rehabilitation work.
Unless inconsistent with the context, the provisions of
Section 3200 relating to borrow pits or to material obtained
from borrow pits shall apply mutatis mutandis to such places
where material is recovered from an existing road, and to
the material recovered from an existing road respectively.
3202
The Contractor shall use materials strictly in accordance

with the purpose for which they have been approved and in
accordance with the details as indicated on the Drawings or
as directed by the Engineer. During his activities in borrow
pits or cuttings, he shall ensure that approved materials are
not unnecessarily polluted with unsuitable material or that
approved materials are not unnecessarily wasted.
The Contractor should note the provisions of Subclauses
3104(c) and 3105(d) and (e) in regard to activities at borrow
pits, and of Subclause 3306(d) in regard to activities in

cuttings.
Where the Contractor has unnecessarily polluted or wasted
suitable material, he shall supply other suitable material at
his own cost.
3203
STOCKPILING THE MATERIAL
The Contractor shall so plan his activities that materials

excavated from borrow pits and cuttings, in so far as is
possible, can be transported direct to and placed at the point
where it is to be used. However, where utilising materials in
this manner is impracticable, and, if so instructed by the
Engineer in writing, it shall be temporarily stockpiled for later
loading and transportation to where it will be used.
Compensation for stockpiling materials will be payable only
in regard to material stockpiled in accordance with the
Engineer's written instructions.
The temporary stockpiling of material within the borrow area
in heaps with a view to loading, or any other stockpiling
method used in connection with the loading method adopted
by the Contractor in the cutting or borrow pit, will not be
classified as temporary stockpiling. The costs for these
processes will be deemed to be covered by the rates for the
various items of work for which material so stockpiled is
used.
Stockpiling areas and maximum heights of stockpiles shall
be indicated or approved by the Engineer. Before any
stockpiling of material may be done, the site shall be
cleaned, and all loose stones or any vegetation or other
material which may cause pollution shall be removed.
During use, the lower 100 mm of stockpiled material shall
not be utilised for construction. After the stockpiled material
has been removed, the site shall be reinstated as closely as
possible to its original condition, and the surface shall be
lightly scarified to promote vegetation growth.
Payment will be made for stockpiling the material from
existing pavements only if the material is intended for re-use
and if its stockpiling has been approved or directed by the
Engineer.
3204
BREAKING-DOWN THE MATERIAL FROM CUT

AND BORROW
(a)
Breaking-down the material in cuttings and

borrow pits
The material from cuttings and borrow pits shall be broken

down in the cuttings or borrow pits to the maximum sizes as
set out below, depending on the use envisaged for the
material, before it is loaded and hauled to the road.
Rock fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750 mm maximum dimension
Normal fills . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 mm maximum dimension
Pavement layers . . . . . . . . 300 mm maximum dimension
Spoil material need be broken down only sufficiently for
convenient loading and transporting, but the Engineer may
require sufficient material to be broken down to a maximum
size of 500 mm with a view to effectively trimming the spoil
areas.
Material intended for crushing need only be broken down
sufficiently to permit acceptance by the crusher.
3200-1
In order that the material can be broken down to the abovementioned sizes, the Contractor shall adjust and control his
blasting, ripping, excavating and other operations so that the
desired result can be achieved as effectively as possible. In
so far as may be practicable, drilling and blasting patterns
shall be such as to break down the material to the desired
sizes, and, where this is impracticable, secondary blasting
or other methods shall be used for breaking down oversize
materials.
If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the working methods of the
Contractor are such that unnecessarily large quantities of
oversize material are produced, he may instruct the
Contractor to change his methods in order to produce less
oversize material, and the Contractor shall not be entitled to
any additional compensation for carrying out such
instructions.
Care shall be taken not to load oversize material and to
bring it onto the road. However, where this is nevertheless
done, the Contractor shall, at his own cost, remove such
oversize material from the road or break it down further to
the required size on the road.
Where surplus material is available and the Engineer so
agrees, the Contractor, instead of breaking down any
oversize materials, may work it out or leave it in the borrow
pits, or in the case of materials from cuttings, spoil it, but in
the latter case not without the written approval of the
Engineer.
The Engineer may also require oversize
materials to be used for other purposes, such as for rock fills
instead of breaking it down.
(vi)
Repeat steps (ii) to (v), but place the second windrow
next to the first.
(vii)
To mix the material, the two windrows formed in
steps (ii) to (vi) shall then be bladed into a single windrow to
the side of the road.
(viii) If so ordered by the Engineer steps (ii) to (vii) shall
be repeated until all the material that needs to be brokendown has been treated.
However, should too much oversize material remain after
normal grid-rolling, the Engineer may instruct that any one
of the following be done:
(i)
That additional normal grid-rolling or its equivalent be
done;
(ii)
That, instead of attempting to break down the
material on the road, it be crushed as described in Clause
3205; or
(iii)
That the Contractor and Engineer agree on the use
of any other methods and equipment which may be more
suitable, and determine compensation for such work in
terms of the General Conditions of Contract.
Any oversize material still remaining after processing in
accordance with any of the processes described above shall
be removed from the road as provided in Clause 3210.
(c)
(b)
Further breaking-down of pavement material

brought onto the road
Pavement material brought onto the road shall be further

broken down to the sizes as specified for each layer by
using equipment suited to this purpose. The Contractor
shall be at liberty to employ any methods and equipment he
may prefer, but, where any difference of opinion may arise
in regard to the practicability of the breaking-down process
or the suitability of the methods and equipment employed by
the Contractor, the Engineer may require normal grid-rolling
to be done as described below. The results so obtained will
then serve as the norm of the degree to which the breakingdown shall be attained by any alternative methods.
For the purposes of this specification, normal grid-rolling
shall mean the following:
(i)
The material shall be placed or bladed to the one
side of the road to provide working space for breaking-down
the material.
(ii)
Subject to the approval of the Engineer a portion of
the material shall be spread in a thin layer on a compacted
surface to promote effective breaking-down of the material,
and to a width which the grid roller shall be able to cover in
a single pass.
(iii)
The grid roller, which shall proceed at a speed of at
least 12 km/h and which shall have a minimum mass of
13.5 tonnes, shall do four complete roller passes over the
material.
(iv)
Any oversized material shall be removed by hand,
and/or constructional plant as provided in Clause 3210.
(v)
The broken-down material shall be placed in a
windrow to the opposite side of the material still to be
broken-down.
3200-2
Further breaking-down of fill brought onto the

road
After fill material in borrow pits and cuttings has been broken
down to the maximum size specified in Subclause 3204(a)
and then spread on the road, it shall be further broken down
by means of suitable equipment such as grid rollers, subject
to the approval of the Engineer.
In many cases breaking down by the normal compaction
process should be adequate, and no special effort should be
necessary for breaking down the material, but, in the case
of hard and coarse material, the Engineer may require that
the material receive at least a light grid-rolling, and the
degree to which breaking-down will occur by means of the
light grid-rolling process will then serve as the norm of what
may be required in regard to alternative methods the
Contractor is permitted to employ. For the purposes of
these Specifications light grid-rolling is defined as follows:
(i)
The material shall be spread in a layer, the
uncompacted thickness of which shall be more or less equal
to the average maximum fragment size, but with a minimum
of 200 mm. It shall then be rolled by means of at least two
complete passes per 200 mm of uncompacted layer
thickness by a grid roller with a mass of not less than
13.5 tonnes, moving at a speed of at least 12 km/h. Should
the uncompacted layer thickness be in excess of 200 mm,
the number of roller passes shall be increased pro rata. The
material should then be thoroughly mixed with a motor
grader to disperse the broken fragments of oversize
homogeneously through the layer.
(ii)
Compensation for light grid-rolling and processing as
part of the compaction process will be regarded as being
included in the price paid for providing and compacting the
material. This grid rolling will not be included in the number
of roller passes which may be paid for compacting the
material.
(d)
Milled material
3206
CONTROLLING THE MOISTURE CONTENT OF

MATERIALS
Milled material need not normally be broken down further

unless so specified or instructed by the Engineer.
(e)
Existing cemented layers
Existing cemented layers to be broken down and

reprocessed may be reprocessed either where it is to be
placed, or it may be hauled to a crusher for processing,
whichever may have been specified or instructed by the
Engineer.
3205
CRUSHING AND SCREENING
Where the material intended for use in the pavement layers

can not be suitably broken down by the methods set out in
Subclause 3204(b), the Engineer may direct that the
material be crushed, screened, or crushed and screened, or
be modified by screening out certain fractions.
A single-stage crushing plant implies the utilisation of a
primary crushing unit in which only one size reduction stage
occurs, irrespective of the magnitude of the reduction ratio
possible by nature of its construction. The single stage
crushing plant, shall be capable of breaking down oversize
material to the maximum size specified for the layer
concerned.
A second crushing stage, while not always necessary to
achieve the required reduction ratio, is required by utilising
a secondary crushing plant in addition to the primary
crushing unit, to control the grading of the product to fall
within the broader specified envelope for gravel base
materials and lower quality selected materials, as well as
yielding specified shape characteristics as appropriate. This
shall be termed a two-stage crushing plant.
A third, and where appropriate a fourth crushing stage
utilising in addition to the earlier stage crushing plant,
tertiary and quaternary crushing plants as appropriate to
control the grading and shape of the higher quality crushed
stone materials, as well as surfacing and concrete
aggregates, shall be termed a multi-stage crushing plant.
For the single-stage and two-stage crushing plant, selective
screening may be ordered by the Engineer.
Screening only of material involves screening the material
into various fractions through a series of screens, the
smallest of which need not be smaller than 6.7 mm.
For the multi-stage plant, all screening and or any other
required activity and concomitant equipment required to
produce the specified end product, shall be considered to be
included.
For all stages of crushing plant, precautionary measures
required in terms of the Local by-laws regarding
Occupational Health and Safety and any other relevant Acts,
and the latest amendments thereof shall be deemed
included in the rates tendered for the relevant products.
The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions to

prevent material in borrow pits, excavations, stockpiles and
on the road from becoming excessively wet as a result of
rain or groundwater or stormwater. In view hereof, the
excavation of borrow pits and cuttings shall, as far as
possible, be so planned and executed as to prevent the
damming-up of water in the borrow pits or cuttings, and the
Contractor shall also provide the necessary temporary
drainage for this purpose. During the rainy season, material
spread over the road shall be spread with a proper cross
slope, and, if not directly compacted, it shall be rolled
several times with a flat-wheeled roller in order to let the
water run off and not penetrate the material unduly. Care
shall also be taken not to allow the water to dam up against
material heaps, windrows, or any spread material.
Where material, despite proper precautionary measures, on
account of its in situ moisture content, is nevertheless too
wet to comply with the requirements in regard to moisture
content during compaction, the Contractor shall dry out the
material until it is adequately dry for compaction, but, in the
first instance, he shall, in so far as is practicable, so plan his
construction programme that material with a high natural
moisture content will be used in the dry season and not in
the wet.
No prescriptions apply in regard to drying out the material,
and the Contractor himself shall decide on the best
methods. No additional payment will be made for keeping
dry and drying out the material, but the cost of such work
shall be included in his tender rates for the various items of
work for which the material is to be used, unless provision
for additional compensation of this nature has been made in
However, where the Contractor has taken all reasonable
precautions to keep the material dry and to dry it out where
necessary and it is nevertheless impracticable to dry out the
material as required, the Engineer shall:
(i)
permit the material to be compacted at a higher
moisture content, subject to the required dry density being
achieved; or
(ii)
declare the material to be unsuitable and instruct that
it be not used, and, if already on the road, be removed at the
appropriate compensation and replaced with suitable
material; or
(iii)
further instruct the Contractor as he may deem
necessary under the circumstances and compensate him for
any additional expenses brought about thereby, but only to
the degree to which the additional costs have not arisen
through the failure of the Contractor to comply with the
provisions of this Clause.
3207
LAYER THICKNESSES AND SPREADING THE

MATERIALS
(a)
Fills
The layer thickness of fills will generally be determined by

the maximum size to which the material can be broken down
in the borrow pits and cuttings, and thereafter when it can be
processed on the road itself. The layer thickness will
therefore normally be based on the pre-estimation of what
the maximum size will be to which the material can be
broken down, and shall be such that the maximum size of
3200-3
the fragments will be more or less equal to the layer

thickness after compaction. The maximum layer thickness
(after compaction) required from the Contractor shall be
200 mm, but layer thicknesses as little as 100 mm will be
permitted.
In order to prevent the layer thicknesses from being
determined by the presence of isolated large fragments, the
Engineer may require such isolated fragments to be
removed from the road, as determined in Clause 3210. The
Engineer may also agree to the material being compacted
in layers in excess of 200 mm or the maximum fragment
size, provided that he is satisfied that the material will be
properly compacted. Layer thicknesses shall be agreed on
in advance between the Engineer and the Contractor.
Where a new layer is constructed on an existing or already
constructed fill and the new layer will be less than 100 mm
in compacted thickness, the existing fill shall be scarified to
such a depth as will give a layer thickness after compaction
of not less than 100 mm of the new plus the scarified
material together. No additional payment will be made for
this.
Where coarse material is to be processed in layer
thicknesses which make mixing by road grader
impracticable, the material shall be so excavated,
transported and dumped that it will be properly mixed after
dumping and exhibit a minimum segregation of fine and
coarse material. Such material shall be placed to the
correct thickness by end tipping, and the surface levelled by
bulldozer, after which some fine material shall be spread on
top of the layer and worked into the depressions on the
surface.
(b)
Pavement layers
All material placed in position before compaction shall be

spread evenly over the entire surface of the layer
concerned, and the quantity of material spread shall be such
than every layer will comply with the specified requirements
for thickness when measured after compaction.
The layer thickness shall comply with the requirements as
indicated on the Drawings and in the Project Specifications.
Spreading material in restricted areas may be done in any
manner approved by the Engineer, on condition that the
required level and grading standards can be attained.
Where the compaction apparatus used is of such a nature
that the material in thicker layers can not be properly
compacted, the Engineer may instruct that material be
placed and compacted in layers as thin as 75 mm.
Where the thickness of any existing pavement layer requires
to be supplemented and the thickness of the added material
after compaction will be less than 100 mm, the existing layer
shall be scarified to a depth that will give a layer thickness
of at least 100 mm after compacting together the loosened
existing and added material. In the case of gravel or
crushed-stone bases and subbases, the Engineer may
direct the existing layer to be broken down to its full depth.
The composite layer shall be watered, mixed and
compacted as determined in Clause 3208.
Payment for adding the material will be made as determined
for the respective pavement layers.
3200-4
3208
PLACING AND COMPACTING THE MATERIALS

IN LAYER THICKNESSES OF 200 mm AND LESS
AFTER COMPACTION
When the layer thickness after compaction is 200 mm or

less, any oversize material which cannot be broken down to
the required size shall first be removed from the road and
then disposed of or used as may be prescribed by the
Engineer. The material shall then be sprayed with water,
mixed, and compacted as described hereafter.
(a)
Spraying and mixing
(i)
Before the material is compacted, it shall first be thoroughly

mixed by grader or other suitable plant so as to obtain an
even mix of the various types of materials and to spread the
fine and coarse material evenly throughout the mixture. If
necessary during the mixing process, water shall also be
sprayed evenly over and mixed into the material to bring it
to the correct uniform moisture content.
The moisture added shall be just sufficient to bring the
material to the optimum moisture content for the compacting
equipment being used and the compaction required,
provided that, should the moisture content of the material be
in excess of 2% above the optimum moisture content for
modified AASHTO density, it shall be compacted only when
so approved by the Engineer.
(ii)
Additional requirements in respect of work in

restricted areas
The Engineer may, in restricted areas, permit the Contractor

to spread, water and mix the gravel or crushed stone in a
windrow next to the pavement excavation. Care shall be
taken not to damage existing surfacing and not to pollute the
mixed material with other deleterious material. Where this
method of mixing is impracticable or impossible, the
Contractor shall make use of concrete mixers or any other
equipment or method acceptable to the Engineer.
Irrespective of the layer concerned, the mixing shall be of
such quality that a uniform mix will be obtained at all times
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(b)
Compaction
(i)
Compaction shall be carried out in a series of continuous

operations covering the full width of the layer concerned,
and the length of any section of a layer being compacted
shall, wherever possible, be not less than 150 m nor more
than can be properly compacted with the available
equipment.
The Engineer reserves the right to order the Contractor to
reduce the length of any layer compacted in any single
operation if the proper compaction of such layer is not being
achieved.
The types of compaction equipment to be used and the
amount of rolling to be done shall be such as to ensure that
specified densities are obtained without damage being done
to lower layers or structures. During compaction the layer
shall be maintained to the required shape and cross-section,
and all holes, ruts and laminations shall be removed.
(ii)
Additional requirements in respect of work in

restricted areas
Suitable equipment and methods acceptable to the Engineer

shall be used in restricted areas so that the required
densities will be obtained throughout the thickness of the
layer.
If necessary, the layers shall be placed in
thicknesses which are less than the specified layer
thickness, as determined in Subclause 3207(b).
Work in restricted areas consequent upon the actions of the
Contractor himself and not upon specified work, will not be
regarded as work in restricted areas for purposes of
payment.
(c)
In place reworking of pavement layers
Where so specified in the Project Specifications and/or

instructed by the Engineer, and the material in any existing
layer complies with the requirements for the new layer, the
Contractor shall scarify the layer to the specified depth, add
extra material if necessary, and reprocess the layer in place.
Reprocessing includes watering by spraying, mixing, and
compacting the layer to the density specified for the layer
concerned. Payment will be made as determined for the
respective pavement layers.
3209
PLACING AND COMPACTING THE MATERIALS

IN LAYER THICKNESSES IN EXCESS OF 200 mm
AFTER COMPACTION (only applicable in the case
of fills)
(a)
Soft-material fills
Materials which readily break down to a maximum size of

200 mm shall be compacted in layers not in excess of
200 mm after compaction, and spraying, mixing and
compacting the material shall be executed as described in
Clause 3208 for pavement layers.
In the case of cohesionless sand, the layer thicknesses
may, however, be increased to as much as 400 mm, and
spraying and mixing the material may be omitted or limited
in so far as is practicable, all, however, subject to the
required density being achieved over the full depth of the
layer. In this case efficient vibratory rollers shall be used for
compacting the sand.
(b)
(c)
Rock fill
Rock-fill processing and compaction shall apply to material

consisting predominantly of stone and boulders, with some
fine material, and which, due to the mechanical interlocking
of the rock, cannot be compacted effectively by construction
methods normally used for soils and gravels.
When the layer thickness after compaction is 500 mm or
less as instructed by the Engineer, the processing and
compaction of such material shall not be classified as rockfill processing and compaction, and the Engineer may
prescribe that the material be compacted as described in
Subclause (b) above.
The maximum size of rock which may be used in rock fill is
750 mm, and the layer thickness before compaction shall
not be in excess of one and a half times the average actual
size of the rock. The Engineer may prescribe that 5% of the
oversize material shall be bladed off the road after the
material has been dumped onto the road, and it shall be
disposed of as described in Clause 3210, so that the layer
thickness will not be determined by the presence of isolated
large rock fragments.
The compacted layer shall contain no rock fragments with
a maximum dimension greater than the compacted layer
thickness.
The material to be compacted shall be off-loaded by the
end-tipping method. The material shall then be spread by
bulldozer or other suitable plant in such a manner that the
fine material is well mixed with the rock. The routes to be
followed by hauling, spreading and compaction equipment
shall be uniformly distributed over the entire width of the
layer to be compacted.
The material shall be broken down and compacted during
the spreading and compacting process by grid or other
suitable rollers and finally compacted with vibratory rollers
in accordance with the following formula, to achieve a good
mechanical interlock of the rock and the maximum
compaction of the finer material in the spaces between the
rock.
The type of vibratory roller used, the operating speed, the
number of passes and the layer thicknesses are determined
by means of the following formula:
Pe x n
1 500 (minimum)
h x v
Hard-material fills
Should the material used for fills be of such a nature that,

during the breaking-down effort as described in Subclause
3204(b), it does not readily break down to a maximum size
of 200 mm or less, the material shall be spread as described
in Subclause 3207(a) and processed as follows:
where
Pe
The material shall be sprayed and mixed as described in

Subclause 3208(a), but, should this be impracticable on
account of the thickness of the layer, these processes may
be omitted on condition that the material be thoroughly
mixed and placed as described in Subclause 3207(a) (last
paragraph).
n
h
v
=
=
=
The material shall subsequently be compacted in

accordance with one of the methods described in Section
3300, depending on the method directed by the Engineer.
total static and dynamic force per metre width

generated by the vibratory roller at the
operating frequency given by the
manufacturer (kN/m)
number of passes required
thickness of the compacted layer in metres
roller speed in metres per second.
Operating frequencies shall be between 18 Hz and 30 Hz

and Pe shall be at least 120 kN/m.
3210
DISPOSING OF OVERSIZE MATERIAL
All oversize materials removed from the road in terms of

Subclause 3204(a) and all excess fill removed from the road
3200-5
in terms of Subclause 3207(a) shall be disposed of at the

Contractor's cost or, with the approval of the Engineer, may
be used for other suitable purposes.
(b)
Two-stage crusher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(c)
Screening plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
Oversize pavement material left over after application of the

provisions of Subclause 3204(b) and removed from the road
in terms of Clause 3208, shall be loaded and disposed of as
determined by the Engineer and will be paid for subject to
the provisions of payment Item 32.04. Where, however,
such material is used direct for any construction work, the
Contractor will be entitled only to compensation at the rate
in respect of the construction item in question.
(d)
Multiple-stage crusher and
screening plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
Notwithstanding the methods of payment described above,

the tender rates for constructing all pavement layers shall
include full compensation for the removal of up to 5% by
volume of oversize material without any additional payment
being made to the Contractor. The limit of 5% will apply to
individual layers and not to all the layers together.
The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions not to
place on the road any material which cannot be broken
down to the required size by processing on the road. This
shall be avoided by proper selection during excavation in the
cuttings or borrow pits. If such material is encountered in
cuttings, it shall be spoiled directly or used as prescribed by
the Engineer.
3211
DRAINAGE AND PROTECTION

plants supplied as ordered by the Engineer.
providing the plant, transporting it to the site, erecting,
commissioning and finally dismantling it, and loading and
transporting it away from the site or to the point where it is
to be re-erected, regardless of the number of types of
material treated.
Item
Unit
32.02 Re-erecting the crushing and/or

screening plant:
(a)
Single-stage crusher . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(b)
Two-stage crusher . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(c)
Screening plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(d)
Multiple-stage crusher and
screening plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The compacted layers shall be adequately drained and

shaped to prevent water from standing on or along or
scouring the completed work. Windrows shall be removed
to facilitate the drainage of water from the surface.
The unit of measurement shall be the number of times each

plant is dismantled, transported and re-erected as ordered
by the Engineer, regardless of the number of types of
material treated.
No material for a subsequent layer may be placed if the

underlying layer has been softened by excessive moisture.

dismantling the plant, loading, transporting, off-loading and
re-erecting it at new positions as ordered by the Engineer,
and recommissioning it.
In cases where pavement layers are replaced over a section

of the road width, or where pavement layers are widened
and the new layer is more or less permeable than the
adjacent existing layer, for example in the case of a
stabilised or bitumen-treated layer next to an untreated
layer, it may be specified, or the Engineer may instruct that
pavement subsoil drainage be installed in accordance with
the details indicated on the Drawings or determined by him.
The installation of subsoil drainage will be measured and
paid for under the pay items of Section 2100.
3212
Unit
32.01 Providing a crushing

and/or screening plant:
(a)
3200-6
Unit
32.03 Crushing and screening:

(a)
Single-stage crushing . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(b)
Two-stage crushing
(c)
Screening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
. . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(d)
Multiple-stage crushing and
screening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
Where provided in the various Sections of these

Specifications that a payment item shall include
compensation for placing or for placing and compacting the
materials, the terms placing or placing and compacting shall
include compensation for all work described and costs given
in this Section, excepting work covered by the payment
items below, for which separate payment will be made, as
follows:
Item
Item
Single-stage crusher . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)

material crushed or screened or crushed and screened and
finally used in construction, measured in place after
compaction. No allowance will be made for waste, except
in the case of Subitems (c) and (d), where the quantity
measured as above for payment shall be increased by
including 70% of the loose volume, measured in stockpile,
of the material screened out and discarded.
crushing in the case of Subitems (a) and (b), or screening in
the case of Subitem (c), or crushing and screening the
material in the case of Subitem (d), including all labour,
plant, fuel, handling, processing, stockpiling if necessary,
loading for transportation to the point of final use, and for
disposing of any material screened out and discarded.
Item
Unit
32.04 Removal of oversize

pavement material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
oversize pavement material from cut and borrow, which
cannot be broken down as specified, and is removed. The
volume shall be determined as prescribed by the Engineer
and shall be the loose volume in stockpiles or its equivalent
measured in hauling vehicles. Only that volume of oversize
pavement material in excess of 5% of the compacted
volume of pavement layers will be measured for payment,
all as specified in Clause 3210.
excavation of material in all classes of excavation, loading
and transporting it to the road, placing, and any breakingdown treatment given or attempted, blading all oversize
pavement material off the road, loading, transporting it to the
point of disposal or subsequent re-use, including a free-haul
of 1.0 km, and off-loading and spreading of the material.
Item

performing one additional normal grid-rolling operation in
addition to the initial normal grid-rolling operation, the cost
of which has been included in the tender rates for pavement
layers.
Item
Unit
32.06 Stockpiling of material . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)

material temporarily stockpiled on the instruction of the
Engineer.
cleaning and preparing the stockpiling sites and also for
levelling and reinstating the site after completion of the work,
for off-loading and spreading the material if necessary, and
for loading when required for use.
Unit
32.05 Additional normal

grid rolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
compacted material upon which an additional "normal gridrolling operation" as described in Subclause 3204(b) is
performed in accordance with the instructions of the
Engineer.
3200-7
3200-8
SERIES 3000 :

LAYERS OF GRAVEL OR
CRUSHED STONE
SECTION 3300 :
MASS EARTHWORKS
CONTENTS
3301
3302
3303
3310
3311
3312
SCOPE
MATERIALS
CLASSIFICATION OF CUT AND BORROW
EXCAVATION
CLASSIFICATION OF COMPACTION
TREATING THE ROADBED
CUT AND BORROW
FILLS
FINISHING THE SLOPES
PROTECTING THE ROAD PRISM AND
STRUCTURES
CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
ROUTINE INSPECTION AND TESTS
3301
SCOPE
3304
3305
3306
3307
3308
3309
This Section covers all work in connection with the

construction of cuts and fills, the removal to spoil of material
unsuitable for use, the construction and compaction of fills
with cut material from the road prism or borrow material
from approved borrow pits, the compaction of the roadbed
and finishing of cuts and fills, up to the stage where fills are
ready for the placing of the pavement layers.
3302
MATERIALS
(a)
Roadbed and cut
Roadbed and cut materials which occur along the route of

the roadway have been tested and the results of the tests
are shown on the Drawings. The test results, read in
conjunction with these Specifications, give a preliminary
indication as to the purpose for which the cut material may
be used as well as the treatment, if any, which the roadbed
shall receive. The Engineer shall give final instructions
during construction regarding the use of cut material and the
treatment of the roadbed.
Should the depth below the final road surface exceed 9 m,

or should the material be not in accordance with the said
requirements, the material shall conform to the requirements
as set out in the Project Specifications or as prescribed by
the Engineer.
The Engineer may allow or order the use of material not
meeting these requirements by an order in writing, provided
that he has satisfied himself regarding the stability of the
embankments to be constructed from such material.
(iii)
Compaction requirements, minimum in situ dry

density
When the material is compacted

to a percentage of modified
AASHTO density . . . . . . . . . . 90% or 93% (as required).
When the material is compacted
by proof rolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 % of proof density
Rockfill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . no density specified
Sand which for the purposes of this requirement is specified
as non-plastic sand with not less than 95% passing through
the 4.75 mm sieve, but with not more than 20% passing
through the 0.075 mm sieve, shall be compacted to 100%
of modified AASHTO density. Should more than 20% pass
through the 0.075 mm sieve, the sand shall be compacted
to 95% of modified AASHTO density.
3303
CLASSIFICATION
EXCAVATION
OF
(a)
Classes of excavation
CUT
AND
BORROW
The excavation of material from cut or borrow for fills shall

be classified as follows for purposes of measurement and
payment:
(i)
Soft excavation
Soft excavation shall be excavation in material which can be

efficiently removed or loaded without prior ripping by any of
the following plant:
A bulldozer with a mass of approximately 22 tons, (which
includes the mass of a ripper if fitted) and an engine
developing approximately 145 kW at the flywheel.
or
(b)
Fill
Unless otherwise specified in the Project Specifications, fill

material shall conform to the requirements specified below:
A tractor-scraper unit with a mass of approximately 28 tons

and an engine developing approximately 245 kW at the
flywheel, pushed during loading by a bulldozer as specified
in Subclause 3303(a).
(i)
The material shall not contain any rock fragments
with a maximum dimension exceeding 500 mm, except in
the case of rock fills, when it may be 750 mm.
or
(ii)
Where it is possible by virtue of the quality of the
available material, the minimum soaked CBR at the
specified compaction shall be as follows:
Depth below final
road surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimum soaked CBR
0 m - 1.2 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3% at 90% of
modified AASHTO density
1.2 m - 9 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3% at 100% of
A track-type front-end loader with a mass of approximately

22 tons and an engine developing approximately 140 kW at
the flywheel.
(ii)
Intermediate excavation
Intermediate excavation shall be excavation (excluding soft

excavation) in material which can be efficiently ripped by a
bulldozer with a mass of approximately 35 tons when fitted
with a single tine ripper and an engine developing
approximately 220 kW at the flywheel.
3300-1
(iii)
Hard excavation
Hard excavation shall be excavation (excluding boulder

excavation) in material which cannot be efficiently ripped by
a bulldozer equivalent to properties as those described in
Subclause 3303(a).
This type of excavation generally includes excavation in
material such as formations of unweathered rock, which can
be removed only after blasting.
(iv)
classification shall thereafter be final and binding, subject to

the provisions of the General Conditions of Contract.
The Contractor shall immediately inform the Engineer if and
when the nature of the material being excavated changes to
the extent that a new classification for further excavation is
warranted. Failure on the part of the Contractor to advise
the Engineer thereof in good time shall entitle the Engineer
to classify, at his discretion, such excavation as may have
been executed in material of a different nature.
Boulder excavation Class A

3304
Boulder excavation Class A shall be excavation in material

containing in excess of 40% by volume of boulders between
0.03 m3 and 20 m3 in size, in a matrix of softer material or
smaller boulders.
Excavation in dolomite formations other than solid dolomite
shall also be classed as Class A excavation if the formations
contain in excess of 40% by volume of lumps of hard
dolomite between 0.03 m3 and 20 m3 in size, in a matrix of
softer material or smaller lumps of hard dolomite.
Excavation of solid boulders or lumps of hard dolomite each
in excess of 20 m3 in size shall be classed as hard
excavation. Excavation of fissured or fractured rock shall
not be classed as boulder excavation but as hard or
intermediate excavation according to the nature of the
material.
(v)
Boulder excavation Class B
Where material contains 40% or less by volume of boulders

or lumps of hard dolomite ranging from 0.03 m3 to 20 m3 in
size, in a matrix of soft material or smaller boulders or lumps
of hard dolomite, then those boulders or lumps of hard
dolomite between 0.03 m3 and 20 m 3 in size shall be
classed as Class B boulder excavation.
The excavation of the rest of the material shall be classed
as soft or intermediate excavation according to the nature of
the material.
All the equipment specified in Subclauses (i) and (ii) above
shall be in a good mechanical condition. The expressions
"efficiently ripped", "efficiently removed" or "efficiently
loaded" as used in this Subclause shall in this context mean
ripped, removed or loaded (as the case may be) in a
manner which can reasonably be expected from the
equipment in question, with regard to the production
achieved.
(b)
Method of classification
The Contractor shall be at liberty to use any method he

wishes to use for excavating any class of material, but the
method of excavating the material shall not dictate the
classification of the excavation.
The Engineer shall decide under which one of the above
classes any excavation shall be classified for purposes of
payment. In the first instance the classification shall be
based on an inspection of the material to be excavated,
which classification shall be agreed on before excavation
may be started. In the event of a disagreement between the
Contractor and the Engineer, the Contractor shall, if
required, make available such mechanical plant as specified
in Subclauses 3303(a)(i) and (ii) at his own cost, in order to
determine whether or not the material can reasonably be
removed. The decision of the Engineer as to the
3300-2
CLASSIFICATION OF COMPACTION
For purposes of measurement and payment the method of

processing and the compaction of fill material shall be
classified as described below. The Engineer will decide in
advance as to which classification of compaction shall be
employed and the classification of material for purposes of
excavation shall not in any way be taken into consideration
in respect of the classification of the compaction of material.
(a)
Compaction to a minimum percentage of

Wherever a density requirement in respect of a fill or

pavement layer is specified in these Specifications, on the
Drawings or in the Project Specifications or is prescribed by
the Engineer in terms of a percentage of modified AASHTO
density, the Contractor shall be at liberty to employ any type
of compaction equipment he may choose so as to achieve
such density over the full specified depth of the layer,
provided always that he complies in all respects with the
general requirements of these Specifications and that the
equipment employed is adequate and suitable for the
purpose and will not in any way be detrimental to any part of
the already completed Works.
(b)
Compaction to a minimum percentage of proof

density
(i)
Materials
For materials compacted to a percentage of proof density

the requirements of Subclause 3304(a) shall apply, save
that the required density shall be expressed as a percentage
of a proof density as described below, instead of as a
percentage of modified AASHTO density.
For each type of material encountered, a trial section shall
be built from material that is representative of the material
from which a proof density is to be determined. The
materials shall be placed and compacted as described in
Section 3200 and such compaction shall comprise a total of
twelve passes for every 150 mm of compacted layer
thickness, over every section of the layer to be compacted
by various items of compaction equipment giving the most
efficient combination for the material in question. The
Contractor shall use a combination of all or any of the
following equipment: heavy grid rollers, sheep's-foot rollers,
tamping rollers, heavy pneumatic rollers, flatwheel rollers
and vibratory rollers or any other item of plant deemed by
the Engineer to be suitable. The Contractor shall base his
tendered rates on the inclusion of four passes by a vibratory
roller per twelve pass roller combination.
On completion of the compaction of the trial section at least
10 dry-density measurements shall be made in the top
150 mm of the layer, or in the case of non-plastic sand in
the layer 100 mm to 250 mm below the surface, and the

proof density shall be the average of these dry densities.
The specified dry density to which the material shall be
compacted shall be 98% of the proof density, and shall be
measured in the top 150 mm of the layer in the case of soils
and gravels and in the layer 100 mm to 250 mm below the
surface in the case of non-plastic sands.
The Engineer shall have the authority to decide when the
characteristics of new materials vary sufficiently to warrant
the determination of a new proof density.
Compaction to a proof density shall only be used as an
alternative to compaction to a percentage of modified
AASHTO density in cases where the latter has been
specified and serious difficulties are encountered in
obtaining specified densities.
(ii)
Equipment
The plant shall be of any size and type as may be deemed

to be suitable by the Engineer, except that the following
items of plant shall comply with the requirements stated
below:
(1)
Pneumatic-tyred roller
The pneumatic tyred roller shall consist of pneumatic tyred

wheels mounted on a rigid frame with loading platform or
body suitable for ballast loading to produce a load of not
less than 70 kN on each wheel and arranged in a manner
that will allow all wheels to bear equally while operating on
uneven surfaces.
The total load on any axle line shall not exceed 300 kN.
Under operating conditions tyres shall be uniformly inflated
to a pressure within the range of 500 to 800 kPa. The roller
shall be ballasted in accordance with the requirements of
the Engineer.
(2)
Vibratory roller
The vibratory roller shall be capable of exerting a combined

static and dynamic force of not less than 120 kN/m width for
every metre of loose-layer thickness at an operating
frequency not exceeding 25 Hz and shall move at a speed
not exceeding 4 km/h.
(3)
Grid roller
The grid roller shall have a mass of not less than 13.5 tons
when ballasted, shall be loaded to this mass, and shall
move at a speed of not less than 12 km/h.
(4)
Tamping roller
The tamping roller shall consist of a cylindrical drum fitted

with specially designed tamping feet, and shall have a total
mass of not less than 13.5 tons, and shall move at a speed
of not less than 12 km/h. The feet shall be rectangular in
shape and shall have two or three consecutive rolling faces,
and shall be designed so as not to loosen any material
during the process of rolling.
(5)
Oscillatory roller
The oscillatory roller shall be capable of exerting a

combined static and dynamic force of not less than
120 kn/metre width for every metre of loose-layer thickness
at an operating frequency not exceeding 50 Hz and shall
move at a speed not exceeding 4 km/h.
(c)
Rock fill
When so directed by the Engineer, the rock fill shall be

constructed as determined in Subclause 3209(c).
(d)
Twelve-roller -passes compaction
Where the degree of compaction cannot be satisfactorily

controlled by way of testing the in situ density on account of
the nature of the material, the Engineer may instruct that the
material be placed and compacted as described in
Subclause 3304(b) by twelve passes or coverages (for every
150 mm of compacted layer thickness) by a combination of
various items of compaction equipment. The Engineer may
also instruct that the required number of passes be
increased or decreased and that the payment be adapted
accordingly.
The provisions of Subclause 3304(b) shall apply mutatis
mutandis to this method of compaction with the proviso that
compaction to a specified density will not be required but
that the full number of roller passes ordered and paid for
shall be applied.
3305
TREATING THE ROADBED
(a)
Removing unsuitable material
Any roadbed material which is considered by the Engineer

to be of a quality that would be detrimental to the
performance of the completed road shall be removed to
such widths and depths as may be instructed by the
Engineer and shall be disposed of as prescribed. The
excavated spaces shall then be backfilled with approved
imported material compacted to the required density.
The Engineer may also order that material which is too wet
to provide a stable platform for the construction of the fill be
removed and replaced with suitable dry material. The
Contractor shall be paid for this work, provided that the
Engineer is satisfied that, despite adequate temporary
drainage installed by the Contractor and permanent
drainage that the Contractor may have installed on the
Engineer's instructions, the wet condition is unlikely to be
remedied within a reasonable time and could not have been
reasonably foreseen and avoided by proper advance
planning for construction being done during a dry period.
The removal of unsuitable material shall be paid for under
Item 33.07. For payment, a distinction shall first be made in
respect of the depth of the material removed and secondly
in respect of the stability of the material and the construction
plant to be used. For removing any stable material,
payment will be made only under this item should the
instruction to remove be given after completion of the
excavations in accordance with the original instructions or
should the thickness of the layer to be removed be less than
200 mm. If not, payment will be made therefore under Item
33.04 as for ordinary excavated material which is taken to
spoil.
For the purposes of this Clause and of payment Item 33.07,
stable material shall be defined as material which can be
removed effectively by means of normal road-construction
equipment such as bulldozers or road graders or scrapers,
whereas unstable material shall be material which can be
removed effectively only by means of mechanical shovels,
dragline scrapers, or similar equipment.
3300-3
(b)
Three-roller-passes compaction
Any portion of the roadbed which, by reason of its

inadequate in situ density is shown on the Drawings or is
specified or is prescribed by the Engineer to be given threepass roller compaction, shall be prepared by shaping if
necessary and then compacting with a heavy pneumatictyred roller or a vibratory roller which complies with the
requirements specified in Subclause 3304(b), or with an
impact roller.
The impact roller shall be a single multi-faced roller with a
maximum of five flat or nearly flat faces and a roller mass of
between 8 and 10 tonnes.
The roller and towing
mechanism, which shall be of the free-fall type, shall be so
designed that all the energy applied in lifting the roller, when
the roller is supported on the ridge between adjacent faces,
will be available for application on impact when the roller
drops down again. The roller shall be towed at a speed
between 8 km/h and 24 km/h.
Except where otherwise authorised by the Engineer,
compaction shall comprise not less than three complete
coverages by the wheels of the roller, specified or ordered,
over every portion of the area being compacted. Although
it is not the intention that water be applied to the roadbed by
the Contractor under this class of compaction and no rigid
control of the moisture content will be exercised during
compaction, the Contractor shall nevertheless satisfy the
Engineer that every possible endeavour is being made to
take advantage of favourable soil-moisture conditions and
to carry out such compaction in so far as is possible during
periods when the roadbed is neither excessively dry nor
excessively wet.
The Engineer shall be fully authorised to decide as to when
conditions are favourable for compaction and where such
compaction shall be done at any particular time and he is
authorised to instruct the Contractor to water the roadbed at
the Contractor's expense where, in the opinion of the
Engineer, the Contractor has failed to comply with these
requirements. Where required, three-pass roller compaction
shall be followed up by the process described in (c) below.
(c)
Preparing and compacting the roadbed
Any part of the roadbed which is classified as being suitable

for use in situ, save that it fails to meet density
requirements, shall be scarified, watered and compacted to
a percentage of modified AASHTO density. The type of
compaction and the depth of compaction shall be as
directed by the Engineer. If necessary, roadbed material
may have to be temporarily bladed off to windrow in order to
achieve the necessary depth of compaction.
Where any additional material has to be imported to obtain
the required level and layer thickness, and where the
thickness of the layer of imported material would be less
than the specified layer thickness after compaction, then the
roadbed material shall be scarified, the necessary imported
material placed, and this combined material mixed and
compacted to the full specified depth of the layer. The
imported material shall be measured and paid for under
Item 33.01, Cut and borrow to fill, and the roadbed material
shall be measured and paid for under Item 33.10, Roadbed
preparation and compaction of material.
(d)
In situ treatment of roadbed
Wherever shown on the Drawings or as may be directed by

the Engineer, the roadbed shall be treated in situ by
3300-4
undesirable formations of hard or rocky materials being

broken up in order to achieve a uniform standard of
compaction or to improve drainage.
Treatment in situ shall consist of ripping or blasting the
roadbed to depths which, on normally cambered sections,
shall increase from the centre of the roadbed to the edges.
Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or directed by
the Engineer, the depth of ripping in the centre of the
roadbed shall be not less than 300 mm and at the edges of
the roadbed not less than 500 mm. Similarly the depth of
drilling and blasting shall be not less than 700 mm at the
centre of the roadbed, and shall slope outwards to not less
than 1 000 mm at the edges of the roadbed. On
superelevated sections the treatment shall, if so directed by
the Engineer or shown on the Drawings, have a uniform
cross fall and a minimum depth of 400 mm in the case of
ripping and 850 mm in the case of blasting.
After ripping or blasting the material shall be processed as
follows:
(i)
Where the Engineer instructs the Contractor to rip
the in situ material, all the material shall be sized by rolling
or knapping until the maximum dimensions of any clod or
spall do not exceed two-thirds of the thickness of the layer
after compaction.
(ii)
The material shall then be compacted as described
in Section 3200 and in Subclause 3304(b) by means of
twelve passes of an approved combination of various rollers.
Where instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall blast
the in situ material, and all the material shall be processed
and compacted as described in Subclause 3209(c).
In both cases surplus material resulting from bulking after
treatment in situ shall be removed and disposed of or
utilised elsewhere as directed by the Engineer.
(e)
Draining of roadbed
Any drainable waterlogged roadbed, such as saturated

material overlying less pervious strata, shall first be drained
by the installation of all permanent surface or subsoil
drainage shown on the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer, before any other construction may be started on
these sections.
Such drains shall be constructed, measured and paid for in
accordance with the requirements of Section 2100.
(f)
Method specification for collapsible soils
The Engineer may order field trials to establish the type of

equipment to be used for compaction of the road bed and
the number of roller passes to be applied to areas of
collapsible materials.
The Engineer may instruct that preparation of the road bed
be undertaken by applying a specified number of roller
passes using one or more of the roller types detailed in
Subclause 3304(b) or 3305(b).
The field trials will be paid for as dayworks in accordance
with the General Conditions of Contract. Each square metre
roller pass shall be paid for under Item 33.06 for the relevant
roller used in the trials.
3306
CUT AND BORROW
(a)
Dimensions of cuts
The dimensions of cuts shall be generally in accordance

with the details of the typical cross-sections, and of the
interchange and intersection as shown on the Drawings and
shall further be defined or amended during the course of
construction by instructions from the Engineer. The
Contractor shall obtain instructions beforehand from the
Engineer regarding the slope of the sides of cuttings and the
depth to which cuttings are to be taken, including the
dimensions of any in situ treatment of cuts that may be
required below the level of the top of subgrade. In rock cuts
the rock shall be removed to the level that will permit the
construction of the subbase layer, unless otherwise
instructed.
All cuts carried below the specified levels shall be backfilled
with suitable material and compacted to the satisfaction of
the Engineer at the Contractor's own expense. In the case
of cuttings made in hard or boulder material, where a certain
amount of overbreak would be inevitable, the Contractor is,
however, afforded the opportunity of pricing an item to cover
his costs in respect of unavoidable overbreak on the floor
and backfilling in such sections.
Where sufficient quantities of suitable cut material are not

available, additional material shall be excavated from borrow
areas shown on the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer. In lieu of borrow, cuts may be widened or their
slopes flattened, provided that the Engineer determines the
need for such action before the Contractor starts work on
any particular cut. If the Engineer requires existing cuts or
completed or partly completed cuts to be widened, such
widening shall be measured and paid for separately as
provided in Subclause 3306(a).
Additional material required for the construction of the work
shall, wherever possible, be obtained by the shortest haul
distance from approved borrow areas being used.
The Engineer shall have the right to decide which sources
of supply of approved material shall be used by the
Contractor at any particular time.
Where satisfactory material is obtainable at shorter haul
distances and the Contractor elects to use material which
will require longer hauls, the Contractor will be paid at the
rate for the shorter haul.
(d)
Selection
The Engineer may, when he considers it necessary, instruct

the Contractor to widen existing, completed or partly
completed cuttings either uniformly or by altering the slope
of the sides of the cutting, or by cutting benches, or in any
other way. Those parts of cut slopes exceeding 2.5 m in
depth and widened by less than 4 m measured horizontally
shall be measured and paid for as specified in Clause 3312,
Item 33.08. Those parts of widened cut slopes which are
less than 2.5 m in depth, and parts widened by more than
4 m measured horizontally, shall be measured and paid for
as cut to fill or cut to spoil as the case may be.
The Engineer may order that particular materials in borrow

pits or in cuts be selected for a specific purpose. Where
selection is ordered, the method of excavation and the
programme of work shall be so arranged as to avoid, in so
far as is possible, double handling and to meet the
requirements of the Engineer. If selected materials
designated by the Engineer are contaminated, used
incorrectly or become unavailable through injudicious
planning of borrow pit or excavating operations, the
Contractor will be required to replace the shortfall with
material of at least equal quality, excavated and transported
from borrow pits at his own expense.
(b)
In general the excavated materials shall be placed direct in

their final positions in the fill.
The use of cut material
All suitable and approved materials excavated from the road

prism shall, in so far as is practicable, be used for the
construction of fill, side fill, shoulders, pavement layers and
mitre banks and for such other purposes as shown on the
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
When the stability of a fill may be materially improved by the

controlled placing of earth and rock-fill in successive layers,
a concurrent supply of both types of material shall be
arranged.
Coarse rock encountered in cuttings shall be utilised for the

construction of the lower layers of fills high enough to
accommodate thick layers, or, where so required, shall be
conserved and used as directed for constructing the sides
of embankments or for serving as protection against
embankment or channel erosion.
When ordered by the Engineer, the better class fill material

shall be selected for use in the top layer of the fills and in
the lower layers of high fills.
The Engineer shall have full control of the use of all material
obtained from cut excavations, but the Contractor shall plan
his operations and particularly his cut-to-fill operations in
such a manner that all cut material may be used to the best
advantage of the Employer. This would mean that no
material shall be unnecessarily spoiled, borrowed or hauled.
The Contractor shall neither borrow nor spoil any material
without the Engineer's approval and without satisfying the
Engineer that this is necessary and the most economical
method of constructing the Works.
Where the earthworks pattern is such that selected

materials cannot be placed directly in their appropriate
positions, the Engineer may authorise their removal to
temporary stockpiles as described in Clause 3203.
Temporary stockpile sites selected by the Engineer shall be
prepared by clearing and light grading.
(c)
(e)
Temporary stockpiling of materials
The selected material shall be stockpiled in successive

layers over the full stockpile area to the approximate
dimensions required by the Engineer and shall subsequently
be reloaded and placed.
Borrow
(f)
No material other than that originating from the excavation

of cuttings, culverts, foundations, drains and the shaping of
the roadbed may be excavated from within the road reserve
unless so authorised by the Engineer.
The disposal of surplus material
Any surplus material resulting from excavations, including

any waste or oversize material bladed off the road, shall be
disposed of as directed by the Engineer. However, no
3300-5
material shall be disposed of without the written instructions

of the Engineer. Spoil material shall not require compaction
but shall, if required, be spread, shaped and given a smooth
surface as may normally be obtained by careful bulldozer
operations.
(g)
General
The Contractor shall take proper care when excavating cuts

not to loosen, where it can be avoided, any material outside
the specified cut line, whether by ripping, blasting or by
other means, which would endanger the stability of the
slopes or which would subsequently cause undue erosion or
disintegration of the batters. This would normally entail
modifying the methods of excavating when work is done in
the vicinity of the final cut surface.
Care shall also be taken not to undercut any slopes, and
proper control shall at all times be exercised by regular
survey checking and by using batter poles at close intervals.
Where the batters are nevertheless undercut, backfilling and
compacting with imported material will not normally be
considered to be a suitable remedy, and the Engineer may
order such remedial measures as he may consider to be
necessary to be implemented at the Contractor's expense,
which, in serious cases, may include cutting back the entire
or large sections of the batter to a uniform slope.
3307
FILLS
(a)
General
Subclause 3302(b) unless otherwise authorised by the

Engineer, as in the case of the bottom layer of a fill on
marshy ground or in rock fill.
The layer thickness used for the construction of the fills will
depend on the type and maximum size of material used.
The Engineer shall first determine the layer thicknesses with
reference to the provisions of Clauses 3207, 3208 and 3209,
and shall also determine the type of compaction to be
employed.
Wherever practicable, fill shall be placed in successive
layers parallel to the final road surface, and the construction
of wedge-shaped layers shall be restricted to the bottom
layers of fill where this may be unavoidable on account of
cross fall, the tapering out of fills, or the superelevation of
the final road surface.
(b)
Rock material containing particles in excess of 300 mm in

size shall not be used at a depth of less than 150 mm below
the top of the fill unless otherwise authorised by the
Engineer.
The Contractor shall, by the judicious planning of layer
thicknesses and by selecting the smaller sized material for
placing in the thinner fill layers, avoid unnecessary spoiling
of the larger sized rock material and shall ensure its fullest
practicable utilisation in fills.
(c)
The dimensions of fills shall be in accordance with the
typical cross-sections and the interchange or intersection
details shown on the Drawings, as further defined or
amended by the Engineer during the course of construction.
Before starting construction, the Contractor shall obtain
instructions regarding the required slope of each fill, any
roadbed preparation or subsoil drainage required, details of
earthworks at interchanges and intersections, the selection
of materials, the method and classification of compaction,
and any other matter that may affect the construction of the
fill or sequence of operations.
Where, for one of the following reasons, material is oversize
or otherwise unsuitable for use:
(i)
because it was not properly broken down, during the
excavation process, to the maximum size as described in
Clause 3204;
(ii)
because it was not properly selected or was
contaminated as described in Subclause 3202;
(iii)
because it was excavated in a manner detrimental to
its intended use as described in Subclause 3104(d);
Placing of rock
Constructing on unstable ground (pioneer layer)
Where fill is to be constructed across water-logged or soft

clayey ground exhibiting excessive movement under normal
compaction equipment and haulage trucks, and such
conditions preclude the effective compaction of the bottom
fill layers, the Engineer may direct that a pioneer layer be
constructed on the unstable ground. This layer shall be
constructed by successive loads of suitable coarse material
being dumped and spread in a uniform layer with a
thickness just sufficient to provide a stable working platform
for constructing the further fill layers which are to be
compacted to a controlled density. Light hauling equipment
shall be used, and, where necessary, end tipping for placing
the material. The layer shall be compacted by light
compaction equipment which will give the most effective
compaction without the roadbed being overstressed.
Pioneer layers will not require compaction to a controlled
density. The distinction between the construction of a
pioneer layer and a rock fill as described in Clause 3209 will
be determined by the purpose for which it is constructed.
The compacted volume of material used may be determined
by 70% of the loose volume in trucks being taken as an
alternative to taking cross-sections before and after
construction.
such material shall be removed from the road and disposed

of, and its removal and disposal shall not be paid for.
(d)
Where a local surplus of cut material or material which, for
the above reasons, is unsuitable or oversize, occurs,
payment will nevertheless be made for the removed material
as for the disposing of cut material to the extent in which
such material or an equal volume of other material would in
any case have to be spoiled.
All material used for the construction of fills shall, during
excavating, placing and compacting, be broken down,
placed and compacted as described in Section 3200. The
density of fill shall comply with the requirements of
3300-6
Benching
Where the natural cross fall of the roadbed exceeds 1:6, the
fills shall be bonded to the roadbed by means of benches
excavated in the roadbed.
The height of the benches shall be determined by the
Engineer. Benches in hard material may normally be
smaller than those in soft material. Where benches are cut
into rock, the toe of the fill shall preferably also be
constructed from rock material, and the benches shall be at
least as high as the largest boulders in the fill material. The
floor of the first bench in rock material shall also be serrated

in order to resist horizontal forces effectively. Benches in
rock material shall also be excavated to slope slightly
inwards so as to obtain a better bond.
The Engineer may require the layers immediately below and

above the filter blanket to be constructed from selected soil
or gravel. Sand filter blankets will be measured and paid for
separately.
The benches may be constructed in either one of the

following two ways:
(g)
(i)
Method A
This method requires the cut of the first bench in the existing
roadbed to be of adequate width for accommodating normalwidth self-propelled construction equipment. The widths of
successive benches shall be determined by the width of the
fill at the relevant height.
The width of benches shall decrease gradually up to the
stage where the fills in any case are wide enough for
accommodating normal-width self-propelled construction
equipment.
(ii)
Method B
This method does not require the benching in the toe of the
fill to be cut back adequately for accommodating normal
construction equipment, but requires the fills to be so much
wider as may be necessary for accommodating such
equipment up to the height where the fills are sufficiently
wide in any case. In this case the Engineer shall determine
the width of the lowest bench to be cut in the fill.
The position of the first bench at the toe of the fill shall be
properly measured and clearly set out. All suitable material
obtained from the excavations for benching shall, in so far
as is possible, be re-used for constructing the fills.
Measurement of and payment for constructing the benches
shall be treated as "cut to fill" or "cut to spoil" as the case
may be, unless otherwise determined in the Project
Specifications. In the case of Method B construction, the
Engineer may require excess width at the toe of the fill to be
removed later on, in which case it shall be classified as soft
excavation material.
(e)
Construction of high fills
The construction of high fills may require special techniques

to prevent the development of excessive pore pressure and
to ensure the stability of such fills during and after
construction. These may include, inter alia, the selection of
better class material for use in the bottom layers of the fill,
the construction of sand filter blankets and the strict control
of moisture content during compaction. Where these
measures are required, such fills shall be designated as
high fills, which shall be constructed in accordance with the
(f)
Sand filter blankets
At the bottom of fills, and sometimes at intermediate levels,

the construction of sand filter blankets may be required to
facilitate the drainage of fills. Sand filter blankets shall be
constructed in accordance with the details on the Drawings
and shall normally consist of a layer of selected sand with a
suitable grading to provide effective drainage and to prevent
the infiltration of fill or roadbed material into the sand filter
blanket. The surface on which the sand filter blanket is to
be constructed, shall be smooth and even and the sand
shall be spread evenly to the required thickness and be
given a light compaction with suitable rollers. The final
surface of the sand filter blanket shall be finished off true to
line and level.
Construction of fills near structures
At all fills adjoining uncompleted structures such as bridges

and large culverts, where the construction of the fill and the
backfilling behind the structure cannot be done
simultaneously, the fills shall be so constructed that the
longitudinal slope of the surface of the fill at all stages will
form a continuous plane sloping towards ground level at the
structure at a gradient not exceeding 10%. When the
structure is completed, the remaining portion of the fill shall
be similarly completed simultaneously with the backfilling
behind the structure, while the backfill behind the structure
is being maintained at the same elevation as the adjoining
fill. No additional payment will be made for constructing fills
in this manner outside the restricted areas as defined in
Clause 6108.
(h)
Constructing rock protection at the toes of fills
Where required, the toes of fills shall be protected against

erosion by special rock protection, which shall be installed
as shown on the Drawings and as further explained by the
Engineer, by the outer part of the toes of fills being
constructed from assorted boulders and/or blasted rock, as
described below.
The rock protection shall be constructed simultaneously with
the rest of the fill and shall consist of selected durable rock
material varying in size between 150 mm and 750 mm. If
required, a layer of synthetic-fibre filter material shall be
installed at the interface between the normal fills and the
rock protection. Care shall be taken not to damage or tear
such material.
The rock protection shall be constructed and compacted as
described in Clause 3209 for rock fill, but the following
additional requirements shall be taken into consideration:
The outer part of the rock protection shall consist of larger
boulders properly bedded by means of smaller fragments so
as to form a stable interlocking rip-rap surface.
If placing with mechanical construction equipment does not
achieve the required result, the equipment shall be
supplemented by manual labour to select, bar and place
keystones in between the larger boulders until the correct
placing is achieved and the rocks are firmly interlocked.
(i)
Widening fills
Where existing fills are required to be widened or where

already constructed fills are required to be widened or
flattened, it shall be done by way of bench construction as
described in Subclause 3307(d) for forming a firm bond
between the existing and new construction.
Where the existing filling is loose on the outside and shows
inadequate compaction, benches shall, if necessary, be cut
back further than may be necessary to accommodate
construction equipment until adequately compacted material
is found. As the work proceeds, the Contractor shall liaise
constantly with the Engineer in view of receiving continuous
instructions regarding the extent to which existing fills have
to be cut back and the material so excavated has to be reused in the fills.
3300-7
Unless otherwise determined in the Project Specifications,

no additional payments will be made for widening the fills,
and payment will be made under the normal payment items
for fills.
Cut and fill slopes shall be finished to a uniform appearance

without any noticeable break which can be readily discerned
from the road. The degree of finish required for all fill slopes
and for cut slopes flatter than 1:4 shall be that normally
obtainable by motor grader or hand-shovel operations.
3308
FINISHING THE SLOPES
(a)
Cut slopes
The slopes of cuts and fills which are designated for

grassing shall, after finishing, be prepared for grass planting
and/or for topsoil for grass planting as specified in Section
5700.
The slopes of cuttings shall be trimmed to neat lines and to

a standard that is generally attainable with proper care and
workmanship in the type of material concerned. All loose
rocks, stones and nests of loose material shall be removed,
especially in solid-rock cuts, which must be completely free
from such material. The final surface of batters must not be
absolutely smooth but shall have a slightly rough finish
which will be suitable for subsequent grassing or for the
establishment of natural vegetation.
(b)
Fill slopes
Fill slopes shall be finished to neat lines with all loose rocks
and uncompacted material removed. The degree of finish
required shall depend on the nature of the material used for
the fill slope but shall be as smooth as is consistent with the
material involved and good workmanship.
No individual boulders occurring in otherwise smaller sized
material shall be allowed to project beyond the surface. All
excess fill shall be removed immediately.
In the case of rock fill, soft material shall be dumped over
the sides of fills and worked into the interstices between the
rock on the surface of the slope. Any soft material ordered
by the Engineer to be dumped over the sides of rock fills
without any further shaping or trimming shall be classified as
"cut to spoil", but if shaping and finishing have been
ordered, the material shall be classified as "cut to fill", and
all such material shall be measured for payment additional
to fill, which is measured in accordance with the net
specified dimensions of the road prism. The volume of such
material shall be taken to be equal to 70% of the loose
volume measured in the trucks.
(c)
All trimming of cut slopes shall be completed before any

work on the subbase is commenced inside such cuttings.
3309
PROTECTING
STRUCTURES
THE
ROAD
PRISM
AND
During construction, the road prism shall be kept welldrained and protected at all times as specified in Clause
1217. All windrows shall be cut away after construction to
prevent the concentrated flow of water on completed fill
layers, but, where necessary, flat berms shall be
constructed to prevent the undue erosion of fill slopes. All
permanent drains shall be constructed as soon as possible,
together with sufficient additional temporary drains as may
be necessary to protect the road prism, and shall be
maintained in a good working order. Ruts and potholes
developing in the subgrade after completion shall be
repaired, and damaged portions of the subgrade shall be
reshaped and recompacted at the Contractor's own cost.
All cut and fill slopes shall be maintained by the Contractor
until the road has been certified as being finally completed.
All erosion and flood damage to slopes shall be promptly
repaired as specified in Clauses 1217 and 1218.
Side drains discharging water from cuts and all other drains
shall be so constructed in such a way that damage to the
fills by erosion is avoided.
Proper precautions and temporary measures shall be taken
in all cases to ensure that the method or procedure by which
the fills are constructed will not impose loads on structures,
especially on uncompleted structures, which may damage
or overstress such structures.
Median slopes and interchange areas
Median slopes shall be finished to the same level tolerances

as specified in Subclause 3310(a) for the top layers of fills.
This tolerance shall apply to both the top layer of the fill and
the final surface of the topsoil.
The area between interchange ramps shall be finished to
the same tolerance as that specified for median slopes. For
the sides of fills steeper than 1:4, the provisions of
Subclauses 3308(b) and (d) will apply.
3310
The work described in this Section shall be constructed to

the dimensional tolerances given below.
(a)
Level
The level tolerances referred to in Clause 7205 shall be as

follows for fill, but shall apply only to the top layer of the fill:
(d)
General
Except in solid rock, the tops and bottoms of all slopes,

including the slopes of drainage ditches, shall be rounded as
indicated on the Drawings or as ordered by the Engineer.
Slopes at the junctions of cuts and fills shall be adjusted and
warped to flow into one another or into the natural ground
surfaces without any noticeable break. When so directed by
the Engineer, adjustment to the slopes shall be made in
order to avoid damage being done to standing trees and to
harmonise with existing landscape features. The transition
to such adjusted slopes shall be gradual.
3300-8
H90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 mm
Hmax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 mm.
(b)
Width
(i)
Common fill
The horizontal measurement taken from the centre line of

the road to the side of the fill, shall nowhere be more than
125 mm less or 250 mm more than the specified dimension

when measured at any level.
Item
(ii)
33.01 Cut and borrow to fill,

including free-haul up to 0.5 km:
Rock fill
Unit
The horizontal measurement taken from the centre line of

the road to the side of the fill, shall nowhere be more than
250 mm less or 500 mm more than the specified dimension
when measured at any level.
(a)
Gravel material in
compacted layer thicknesses
of 200 mm and less:
(iii)
(i)
Compacted to 90% of
modified AASHTO density . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
Cut slopes
No specific tolerances are given, but the cut slopes shall be

finished to a standard generally attainable with proper care
and workmanship, where the nature of the excavated
material is borne in mind. Care shall also be taken not to
undercut any slopes which would cause sections to have a
steeper slope than specified. All loose material shall be
removed.
3311
(iii)
Twelve roller passes
compaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(b)
Gravel material in
compacted layer thicknesses
from 200 mm to 500 mm:
Routine inspection and tests will be made by the Engineer

to determine whether the quality of materials and the
workmanship comply with the requirements of this Section.
Fills comply with the requirements of Clause 3302 in cases
where the results of at least 75% of in situ density tests on
any lot are equal to or exceed the specified values and no
single density is more than 5 percentage points below the
specified value.
3312
(ii)
Compacted to 93% of
Note: Determining the quantities

Upon completion of all work in connection with clearing and
grubbing and working the roadbed, and where the
classification of the excavations change, the Contractor, at
his own cost, shall take cross-sections at 20 m intervals so
as to determine quantities, and shall submit the results so
obtained to the Engineer for approval. The Engineer will
take control measurements to determine the accuracy and
adequacy of the cross-sections, and may instruct the
Contractor to correct any faulty work and to take such
additional measurements and cross-sections as may be
deemed necessary by him. Such cross-sections shall be
taken before any cut or fill work is done. Where the
Contractor proceeds with such work before final approval of
the cross-sections and before the Contractor and the
Engineer have agreed on the cross-sections, the Engineer's
decision regarding the cross-sections to be used shall be
final and binding on the Contractor.
Where there are valid reasons for believing that the roadbed
is subsiding as fills are being constructed, and after the
roadbed work has been completed and cross-sections have
been agreed on, the Contractor may request that the fill
quantities shall be adjusted accordingly. Such request shall
be lodged without delay, and the Contractor shall submit the
required supporting evidence to the Engineer. Where the
Engineer is satisfied that significant subsidence is occurring,
he, together with the Contractor, shall decide as to how the
extent of the subsidence is to be determined, and, where no
agreement can be reached, the decision of the Engineer
shall be final. Any adjustments of this nature shall be made
only where the average subsidence exceeds 50 mm.
(i)
Compacted to 90% of
(ii)
Compacted to 93% of
(iii)
Twelve roller passes
compaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(c)
Rock fill (as specified
in Subclause 3209(c)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(d)
Rock protection at the
toes of fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(e)
Pioneer layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(f)
Sand filter blanket . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)

material measured in the compacted fill. The quantity
measured shall be computed by the method of average end
areas from levelled cross-sections prepared from the ground
line after clearing and grubbing and the removal of topsoil
and the completion of any preparatory roadbed treatment
which may have been ordered by the Engineer, but prior to
the construction of the fill, and the final specified or
authorised fill cross-section superimposed thereon at 20 m
intervals along the centre line of the road. All measurement
shall be neat, and that part of the fill placed in excess of the
authorised cross-section shown on the Drawings or directed
by the Engineer, will not be paid for irrespective of the
tolerances in workmanship allowed under the Contract.
Where the roadbed has subsided under the fills, the
quantities shall be adjusted to make allowance for such
subsidence, as set out in the note at the commencement of
this Clause. Measurement of fill shall distinguish between
the alternative methods of processing and compacting.
Material excavated for the construction of open drains,
subsoil drains, culverts, bridge foundations and other
structures, shall, if suitable and if so directed by the
Engineer, be used for the construction of fills, and payment
shall be made under Item 33.01 irrespective of any payment
made previously for the excavation of such material. All
such material shall be classified as soft excavation.
procuring, furnishing and placing the material, including
excavating as if in soft excavation, for transporting the
material for a free-haul distance of 0.5 km; for preparing,
3300-9
processing, shaping, watering, mixing, and compacting the

materials to the densities or in the manner specified herein
and for removing and disposing of up to 5% oversize
material from the road after processing, including transport
for a free-haul distance of 1.0 km.
Payment shall distinguish between the various methods of
processing and compacting specified, as itemised above.
Item
Unit
33.02 Sand fills (as described

in Clause 3302, including
free-haul up to 0.5 km):
(a)
Non-plastic sand
with up to 20% passing
through the 0.075 mm
sieve, compacted to 100%
of modified AASHTO
density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(b)
Non-plastic sand
with more than 20%
passing through the
0.075 mm sieve, compacted
to 95% of modified AASHTO
density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
measured in fills as determined in Item 33.01, but with the
difference that no distinction will be made between different
layer thicknesses in which the material is placed and
compacted.
procuring, placing and compacting the sand fills, as well as
0.5 km free-haul.
Item
Unit
33.03 Extra over Item 33.01

for excavating and breaking
down material in:
(a)
Intermediate excavation . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(b)
Hard excavation . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(c)
Boulder excavation
Class A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(d)
Boulder excavation
Class B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
material removed as specified.
Measurement of Items (a), (b) and (c) shall be in the original
position in the cut or borrow pit, and the quantity shall be
computed by the method of average end areas from levelled
cross-sections at intervals not exceeding 20 m measured
along the centre line of the road in the case of cuts and at
intervals not exceeding 10 m and parallel to one another in
the case of borrow pits, before and after the removal of the
material. Measurement of boulder excavation Class B shall
be by the volume of individual boulders being measured
after removal, or, where this is considered to be
impracticable, by taking the in situ volume of boulder
3300-10
excavation to be equivalent to 50% of the loose volume in

the hauling vehicles.
Except as provided under Item 33.05, no material excavated
in excess of the authorised cross-section shall be paid for,
notwithstanding any tolerances in workmanship allowed.
The tendered rates shall be paid as extra over the rates
applying to soft excavation in Item 33.01 and shall include
full compensation for additional costs to excavate and break
down the various classes of material, including the cost of
all the necessary additional effort, plant, tools, materials,
labour and supervision.
The extra over payment shall distinguish between
intermediate, hard, boulder Class A and boulder Class B
excavation.
Item
Unit
33.04 Cut to spoil, including

free-haul up to 0.5 km.
Material obtained from:
(a)
Soft excavation . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Boulder excavation
Class A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(e)
Boulder excavation
Class B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
material measured in its original position in cut and
computed by the method of average end areas from levelled
cross-sections taken along the ground line after clearing and
grubbing and the removal of topsoil, if any, but prior to
excavating the cut, with the final specified or authorised
cross-section of the cut super-imposed thereon at intervals
not exceeding 20 m along the centre line of the road.
Measurement of boulder excavation class B shall be by the
volume of individual boulders being measured after removal,
or, where this is considered to be impracticable, by taking
the in situ volume of boulder excavation to be equivalent to
50% of the loose volume in the hauling vehicles.
Where measurement by cross-sections is considered by the
Engineer to be impracticable, cut to spoil may be measured
in the hauling vehicles, by taking the in situ volume of the
material in the case of soils and gravel to be the equivalent
of 70% of the loose volume in the haul vehicles, and, in the
case of boulder material, as equal to 50% of the loose
volume in the haul vehicles.
Except as provided under Item 33.05, no excavation in
excess of the authorised cross-section shall be paid for,
notwithstanding any tolerances in workmanship allowed.
The tendered rates for cut to spoil shall include full
compensation for excavating from the road prism and
roadbed in the various classes of excavation, for loading,
transporting the material for a free-haul distance of 0.5 km,
off-loading and disposing of the material as specified,
including shaping and levelling-off any piles of spoil material.
This payment item will also apply to the removal of
unsuitable roadbed material, provided that it is stable
material, and that instruction in respect of its removal be

given before the excavations reach the level of the roadbed
material to be removed, all as described in Subclause
3305(a).
Item
Item
(a)
In layer thicknesses of
200 mm and less:
Unit
Unit
33.07 Removal of unsuitable

material (including free-haul
of 0.5 km):
33.05 Overbreak in hard

and boulder Class A
excavation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(i)
Stable material . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(ii)
Unstable material . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)

exposed roadbed in completed hard and boulder Class A
cuts.
(b)
In layer thicknesses
exceeding 200 mm:
The tendered rate for overbreak in hard and boulder Class

A cuttings shall include full compensation for unavoidable
overbreak which may occur during excavation and for the
cost of backfilling with suitable rock material and compacting
it to the lines and levels specified for the excavation. This
item shall not apply when Item 33.12 is applied in respect of
the same area.
Item
Unit
33.06 Variations in the number

of roller passes (applicable
to Subitems 33.01(a)(iii) and
33.01(b)(iii) and Item 33.11):
(a)
Pneumatic tyred
rollers . . . . . . . . . . square-metre-pass (m2-pass)
(b)
Vibratory rollers . . . square-metre-pass (m2-pass)
(c)
Heavy grid rollers . . square-metre-pass (m2-pass)
(d)
Tamping rollers . . . square-metre-pass (m2-pass)
(e)
Oscillatory rollers . . square-metre-pass (m2-pass)
(f)
Impact rollers . . . . . square-metre-pass (m2-pass)
(i)
Stable material . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(ii)
Unstable material . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)

unsuitable material removed by the Contractor in
accordance with the Engineer's instructions, and it shall be
the in situ volume of the material calculated in accordance
with its authorised dimensions.
Subitems 33.07(a)(i) and (b)(i) shall apply only in
circumstances as specified in Subclause 3305(a) and Item
33.04.
For the purposes of this Clause the definitions of stable and
unstable material shall be as set out in Subclause 3305(a).
removal of all classes of unsuitable material and shall
distinguish only between stable and unstable material and
layer thicknesses of less than and exceeding 200 mm. It
will also include compensation for free-haul of 0.5 km.
Item
The unit of measurement for the increased or decreased

number of roller passes used for roadbed compaction shall
be the square-metre coverage, and shall be computed by
multiplying the number of square metres to which the
changed pass efforts apply by the increased or decreased
number of roller passes. In the case of Item 33.01, it will be
computed on the basis of a 200 mm layer thickness.
Where a change in the compaction effort is requested, the
Contractor will be compensated at the tendered rates for the
above items in respect of the increased number of squaremetre roller passes of each type of roller required over and
above that specified in the relevant standard effort. His
compensation will be decreased simultaneously, at the
applicable rates, by the number of square-metre roller
passes of each type of roller which is either decreased or
completely left out.
The tendered rate for each additional square metre-pass
ordered by the Engineer over and above the specified
number of passes, shall include full compensation for all
supervision, labour, plant, equipment, fuel, materials, work
and incidentals necessary for completing and control testing
the work. The same rates shall be accepted by the
Contractor during computation of a decrease in his
compensation where the number of roller passes for each
specific type of roller is decreased.
Unit
33.08 Widening of cuts (extra

over Items 33.01,
33.02 and 33.04):
(a)
In hard material . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(b)
In boulder material
Class A or Class B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(c)
In all other materials . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)

material excavated during the widening of cuts where they
are more than 2.5 m deep, measured vertically from the top
of the cut to the shoulder breakpoint and where the side
slope is widened by 4 m or less.
Measurement of the material shall be in the original position
in the cut, and the quantity shall be computed by the method
of average end areas from levelled cross-sections at
intervals not exceeding 20 m measured along the centre line
of the road before and after removal of the material.
The tendered rates for widening the cuts shall be paid extra
over the rates tendered for Items 33.01, 33.02 and 33.04
and shall include full compensation for the additional costs
involved (over and above those for excavating new cuttings)
for excavating material by widening the cuts where they
exceed 2.5 m in depth and are widened by less than 4 m.
3300-11
Item
Unit
33.09 Material bladed to

windrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)

shaping, providing the rollers, keeping the rollers ready for
use when soil-moisture conditions are favourable as
specified, and compacting the roadbed by three roller
passes.
The unit of measurement in respect of material temporarily

bladed to windrow as specified in Subclause 3305(c) shall
be the cubic metre of material to be bladed off, measured in
the original position before blading off, in accordance with
the method of average end areas.
Item

temporary removal of such material and its later
replacement, and for all clearing work which may be
necessary after replacement of the material.
(a)
In situ treatment by
ripping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
Only material bladed to windrow on the instructions of the

Engineer for exposing the underlying roadbed material for
treatment will be measured and paid for as described above.
Item
Unit
33.10 Roadbed preparation and

the compaction of material:
(a)
Compaction to 90% of
(b)
Compaction to 93% of
Unit
33.12 In situ treatment

of roadbed:
(b)
In situ treatment by
blasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of in situ
material treated in situ as specified in Subclause 3305(d).
The quantity shall be calculated from the authorised
dimensions of the in situ treatment.
ripping or blasting, shaping, scarifying, sizing, knapping,
rolling, mixing of in situ and imported material if required,
and preparing and compacting the material as specified.
Payment shall distinguish between in situ treatment by
ripping and in situ treatment by blasting. Surplus material
shall be measured and paid for as in Item 33.01 if placed in
fill and Item 33.04(a) if taken to spoil, and no payment shall
apply under Item 33.03.
(c)
Compaction to 98%
of proof density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
Item
roadbed material prepared and compacted as specified in
Subclause 3305(c). The quantity shall be computed in
accordance with the authorised dimensions of the
completed layers.
shaping, scarifying, mixing of in situ and imported material
if required, and preparing and compacting the material as
specified. For payment purposes a distinction will be made
between compaction to a percentage of modified AASHTO
density and that to 98% proof density.
Item
Unit
33.11 Three roller passes

compaction:
(a)
Heavy pneumatic-tyred
roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(b)
Vibratory roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(c)
Impact roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(d)
Grid roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(e)
Tamping roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(f)
Oscillatory roller . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)

roadbed compacted in accordance with the provisions of
Subclause 3305(b). The quantity will be computed in
accordance with the authorised dimensions of the area to be
treated.
3300-12
Unit
33.13 Finishing-off cut and

fill slopes, medians and
interchange areas:
(a)
Cut slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(b)
Fill slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(c)
Medians and interchange
areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of cut or
fill slopes or medians and interchange areas finished off as
specified. The areas shall be measured from levelled crosssections taken at 20 m intervals measured along the centre
line of the road and shall be the sloping area between the
shoulder breakpoint and the toe of the fill in the case of fill
slopes, and the sloping area between the top of the cut
slope and the toe in the case of cut slopes. The medians
shall include the full width of the median between the inner
edges of the shoulders. The area occupied by side drains or
any other drains shall not be included. The area of median
areas which are to be finished off shall be determined in
accordance with the Drawings.
The tendered rates for finishing cut or fill slopes, medians
and interchange areas shall include full compensation for all
labour, plant, materials and other incidentals and work
required for finishing as specified, including the loading,
transporting and disposal of any material brought down
during the finishing operations.
Note: The following payment items, where they relate to

work under this Section, will be listed in the Schedule of
Quantities.
Item 16.01
&
16.02
Overhaul (extra over Items 33.01, 33.02,

33.04 and 33.07)
Item 31.01
Item 32.04
Item 32.06
Excess overburden at borrow pits

Removal of oversize material
The temporary stockpiling of material.
Item
Item
Item
Item
Chemical stabilisation
Chemical stabilising agent
Mechanical modification
Curing by covering with the subsequent
layer
Curing with a bituminous membrane
35.01
35.02
35.03
35.04
Item 35.05
3300-13
3300-14
SERIES 3000 :

LAYERS OF GRAVEL OR
CRUSHED STONE
The maximum plasticity index of material to be chemically

stabilised shall be as directed by the Engineer for each
source and type of material used.
SECTION 3400 :
PAVEMENT LAYERS OF GRAVEL

MATERIAL
(c)
CONTENTS
3401
3402
3403
3404
3405
3406
3407
SCOPE
MATERIALS
CONSTRUCTION
PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE
3401
SCOPE
Subbase
Subbase materials shall be obtained from approved sources

in borrow or cut or such other sources as may be specified
or approved from time to time.
The completed subbase shall contain no material having a
maximum dimension larger than 63 mm or larger than twothirds of the compacted layer thickness when approved by
the Engineer.
Subbase material shall, unless otherwise authorised,
conform with the following requirements when finally placed:
(i)
Grading modulus
This Section covers the construction of selected layers,

subbases, bases and shoulders, and also gravel wearing
courses from approved natural gravel or partially crushed
gravels.
The minimum grading modulus shall be 1.5 unless

authorised by the Engineer, in which case a minimum of 1.2
may be permitted. The grading modulus may be relaxed to
below 1.2 at the discretion of the Engineer when no
alternative subbase material exists provided that the
specified CBR strength is obtained.
3402
(ii)
(a)
MATERIALS
General
Gravel material shall be obtained from approved sources in

borrow areas or cuts. Tests will have been made on
potential borrow pits, cuts and on the roadbed along the
centre line of the route envisaged, and the results will be
reflected on the Drawings, which also show the use for
which the material could possibly be suitable.
The requirements to be complied with by the material are
set out either on the Drawings or in the Project
Specifications for each of the pavement layers and, despite
the indications on the Drawings regarding the possible use
of the sources of natural material tested, it shall be
incumbent on the Contractor to use only material which
complies with the prescribed requirements for use in the
relevant pavement layers.
Where natural gravel does not fully comply with the
requirements in respect of maximum size after having been
broken down as determined in Clause 3204 or after light
crushing, oversize material shall be removed as specified in
Clause 3210.
(b)
Plasticity index
The maximum plasticity index of the natural material shall be

10% and that for material to be stabilised shall not exceed
6% after treatment with the selected stabilising agent.
(iii)
California Bearing Ratio
The minimum soaked CBR of the natural material shall be

30% at the specified in situ density (not less than 95%
Modified AASHTO).
(d)
Base
Gravel base material shall be obtained only from approved

borrow areas or such other sources of supply as may be
specified or approved for use from time to time.
The completed base shall contain no material having a
maximum dimension exceeding 53 mm.
Gravel base material shall, unless otherwise authorised,
conform with the requirements in Table 3402/1 and below
when finally placed.
Table 3402/1
Grading for gravel base
Selected layers
In situ material falling within the selected subgrade horizon

shall, when not conforming with the requirements for
selected subgrade material, shall be excavated and
replaced or stabilised as ordered by the Engineer. Selected
subgrade shall contain no material greater than two-thirds of
the layer thickness in the case of both unstabilised and
stabilised materials. The material will conform with the
following requirements when unstabilised unless otherwise
specified in the Project Specifications:
Minimum soaked CBR at specified density:
Upper selected layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 %
Lower selected layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 %
Maximum plasticity index . . . . 3 x grading modulus + 10
Sieve size
(mm)
37.5
19.0
4.75
2.00
0.425
0.075
Percentage passing by mass

Natural base
Chemically
stabilised base
80 - 100
60 - 90
30 - 65
20 - 50
10 - 30
5 - 15
80 - 100
60 - 100
30 - 80
20 - 63
10 - 41
5 - 20
3400-1
(i)
Grading modulus
Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98% or 100%, as required for

material not chemically stabilised.
The minimum grading modulus shall be 2.0 if unstabilised or

1.7 if the material is to be chemically stabilised.
(ii)
97% or 98% as required for

material chemically stabilised.
Plasticity index
Shoulder & wearing course . . . . 93% or 95% as required.
The maximum plasticity index of the natural material shall

be 6% and that for material to be stabilised shall not exceed
6% after treatment with the selected stabilising agent.
(iii)
California Bearing Ratio
The minimum soaked CBR of the natural material shall be

80% at 98% Mod AASHTO density.
(g)
When specified in the Project Specifications,

requirements of Subclause 3602(d) shall apply.
3403
(iv) Quality/durability
The quality of the natural base course material shall comply
Electrical conductivity
(a)
the
CONSTRUCTION
Requirements applying prior to the construction of
the layer
* This may be relaxed to 420 for acid crystalline, high silica

and pedogenic materials.
Pavement layers shall be constructed only where the

underlying layer meets all the specified requirements and
has been approved by the Engineer.
Before the
construction of any pavement layer, and also before any
material for a pavement layer is dumped on the road, the
Contractor shall check the underlying layer to establish
whether there is any damage, wet spots or other defects,
which shall be rectified in accordance with the instructions
of the Engineer before the next layer is constructed.
(e)
(b)
Durability Mill Index (DMI)

(See Subclause 7107(d)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125*
Maximum percentage passing 0.425 mm
sieve after any DMI treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Flakiness index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30%
Shoulder and wearing course
Placing and compacting
Shoulders will either be constructed from the same material

as the base course or imported gravel. Imported gravel for
shoulders shall conform with the requirements for wearing
course gravels as follows:
The material for a pavement layer shall be placed, spread,

broken down, watered if necessary and mixed, and oversize
material shall be removed and the layer compacted, all in
accordance with the requirements of Section 3200.
Maximum size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37.5 mm

Maximum percentage retained on 37.5 mm sieve . . . . . 5
Shrinkage product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 - 365
Grading coefficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 34
Minimum soaked CBR at 95% mod AASHTO . . . . . . . 15
The following additional requirements in regard to placement

and compaction shall apply to specific pavement layers:
(Shrinkage product = Bar linear shrinkage x per cent

passing 0.425 mm)
Grading coefficient = (per cent passing 26.5 mm - per cent
passing 2.0 mm) x per cent passing 4.75 mm/100
Note : all grading parameters must be normalised for 100%
passing 37.5 mm.
(f)
Compaction requirements
The minimum in situ compaction of gravel material shall be

as specified hereinafter for the respective layers in terms of
a percentage of modified AASHTO density.
Lower selected layer . . . . . . . . 90% or 93%, as required.
Sand : 100%
Upper selected layer . . . . . . . . . 93% or 95%, as required
Sand : 100%
Subbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95% or 97%, as required for
material not chemically stabilised.
95% or 97%, as required for
material chemically stabilised
3400-2
(i)
Gravel base
Coarse gravel containing non-plastic or slightly plastic soil

fines and used in the construction of the gravel base will
usually require slushing and rolling in addition to the
compaction specified in Clause 3208, in order to obtain a
firm, well-knit surface. If so directed by the Engineer, the
base, after being processed and compacted as specified
above, shall be well watered by the Contractor over short
sections at a time, slushed and rolled with compactors
and/or heavy flatwheel rollers of a mass of not less than
10 tonnes each. Watering and rolling shall continue over a
section until all excess fines have been brought to the
surface of the layer. Such excess fines shall be uniformly
spread over the entire surface of the layer by means of stiff
brooms, and watering, rolling and brooming shall continue
until all areas deficient in fines have been suitably corrected.
All excess fines shall finally be removed from the surface of
the layer.
(ii)
Shoulders
Where the shoulders are to be constructed from the same

material as the base, they shall be constructed
simultaneously with the base.
Where a base is to be constructed from crushed stone, the
shoulders shall first be constructed and then neatly cut to
the required line to provide lateral support for the crushed
stone. Care shall be taken not to pollute the base material
with the shoulder material. In the case of asphalt bases, the
shoulders may be constructed after completion of the base.
Shoulder material shall be spread, broken down, watered,

processed and compacted in accordance with the provisions
of Section 3200, and shall be compacted to a density of not
less than 93% of modified AASHTO density or 95%
modified AASHTO density if specified in the Drawings or by
the Engineer.
Work shall be so constructed that the road will be
adequately drained at all times by means of temporary
drainage pipes passing through the shoulders. The
Contractor shall not start constructing the final bituminous
surfacing of any part of the road before he has completed
the shoulders of such section and the Engineer has
approved it.
any damage or defects that may occur, excluding the normal

wear and tear of bases and wearing courses, and shall be
repeated until the end of the maintenance period.
3405
The completed pavement layers shall comply with the

construction tolerances given below:
(a)
Level

follows:
(c)
Crushing and screening

Selected layer...................................... 25 mm
Subbase.............................................. 20 mm
Base.................................................... 15 mm
Shoulders and wearing course............. -
(d)
(b)
Stabilisation
When specified or required by the Engineer, pavement

layers shall be stabilised as specified in Section 3500.
33 mm
25 mm
20 mm
25 mm
Layer thicknesses
The thickness tolerances referred to in Clause 7205 shall be

as follows:
D90
(e)
Hmax
H90
Where pavement material cannot be suitably broken down

to the required size in excavation and during processing on
the road, the Engineer may prescribe that the material be
crushed and screened or crushed only, all as specified in
Section 3200.
Dmax
Daverage
40 mm
27 mm
27 mm
30 mm
30 mm
10 mm
5 mm
5 mm
0 mm
0 mm
Upgrading of existing base
Where an existing gravel layer is to be improved by the

addition of a layer of material less than 100 mm thick, the
existing surface shall be scarified to the depth instructed by
the Engineer, mixed with the imported material to form a
homogeneous layer of a minimum 100 mm depth,
recompacted to the dry density specified in Subclause
3402(f) and formed to the lines and levels shown on the
Drawings or as ordered by the Engineer.
Any surplus existing material shall be bladed off and
removed to spoil or incorporated elsewhere in the base as
Selected layer.......................... 30 mm
Subbase.................................. 21 mm
Base........................................ 21 mm
Wearing course.......................
Shoulders................................
-
(c)
Grade
Deviations from the specified longitudinal grade shall not

exceed that listed in Table 3404/1 in respect of the specified
grades on the completed base.
Table 3404/1
Deviations from specified longitudinal grade
(f)
Classification of layers for payment purposes
Payment for pavement layers constructed from gravel

material shall distinguish between layers constructed with
material from borrow pits, cuts or existing pavement layers,
and in situ recompacted layers with or without the use of
additional materials.
Length (L) of section

under review (m)
Maximum deviation (g) of

specified slope (%)
2
5
10
20
30
0.354
0.224
0.158
0.112
0.091
Layers constructed from crushed-stone material recovered

from existing crushed-stone pavement layers shall be
placed and paid for as gravel material, unless otherwise
determined by the Engineer.
Where the Engineer
determines in writing, that the material shall be processed
and placed as crushed stone, Section 3600 shall apply in
respect of the placing of and payment for the material.
Note: Use the following formula for other lengths
3404
(d)
The Contractor shall protect and maintain the completed

pavement layers. Protection includes protection against rain
and flood water and against any undue wear and tear of or
damage to unsealed layers by construction or other traffic.
Maintenance shall include, inter alia, the immediate repair of
g(%)
0.5
/L
Width
The average width of the layer shall not be less than the
specified width, and nowhere shall the outer edge deviate by
more than the following from the edge lines shown on the
Drawings:
3400-3
Selected layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Subbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shoulders and wearing course . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
80 mm
75 mm
50 mm
75 mm
(i)

density (specify compacted
layer thickness) . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(ii)

When tested with a 3 m straight-edge laid at right angles to

the road centre line, the surface shall not deviate from the
bottom of the straight-edge by more than 6 mm.
(iii)

At any cross-section the difference in level between any two

points shall not vary from their difference in level computed
from the cross-sections shown on the Drawings by more
than 15 mm.
(b)
Sand selected layer

compacted to 100% of modified
AASHTO density (fraction sand
< 0.075 mm less than 20%)
(specify compacted layer
thickness) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(e)
(f)
Cross-section
Surface regularity
(c)
Gravel subbase (unstabilised gravel) compacted to:
When testing the base with a rolling straight-edge as

described in Subclause 7110(c), the number of surface
irregularities shall not exceed those given below:
(i)

(i)
Average number of irregularities
per 100 m equal to or exceeding 6 mm when
taken over 300 m - 600 m lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
(ii)

layer thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(ii)
Number of irregularities equal to or
exceeding 6 mm when taken over 100 m sections . . . . 6
(d)
Gravel subbase (chemically

stabilised material) compacted to:
The maximum value of any individual irregularity measured

with the rolling straight-edge or a 3 m straight-edge laid
parallel to the road centre line shall not exceed 10 mm.
(i)

(g)
(ii)

(e)
Gravel base (unstabilised

gravel) compacted to:
(i)

(ii)

(f)
Gravel base (chemically

stabilised material) compacted to:
The test results and measurements will be assessed in

(i)

3407
(ii)

(g)
Gravel shoulders compacted to :
(i)

(ii)

Construction tolerances for rehabilitation work
The construction tolerances of Clause 3405 shall be

applicable to rehabilitation work, except where a gravel layer
is placed on top of an existing layer without it being required
that the existing layer be trimmed first to prescribed levels,
the thickness tolerances of Subclause 3405(b) shall not
apply.
3406
The Engineer will do routine inspections and conduct routine

tests to determine whether the quality of material and
workmanship provided comply with the requirements of this
Section.
Item
Unit
34.01 Pavement layers constructed from gravel taken

from cut or borrow, including
free-haul up to 1.0 km:
(a)
3400-4
Gravel selected layer

compacted to :
(h)
Gravel wearing course compacted to :
(ii)
(i)

cemented material
(c)
Sand selected layer compacted

density (specify compacted layer
(d)
Gravel subbase compacted

density, using:
(i)
non-cemented material
(ii)
cemented material
(e)

density, using:
(i)
(ii)
cemented material
(f)
Gravel base compacted

density, using:
(i)
(ii)
cemented material
(g)

density, using:
(i)
(ii)
cemented material
(h)
Gravel shoulder compacted

density, using:
(i)
(ii)
cemented material
(i)

density, using:
(ii)


compacted pavement layer, and the quantity shall be
calculated from the authorised dimensions of the completed
layer.
procuring, as if from soft excavation or pits, breaking down,
placing and compacting the material, including transporting
the material for a distance of 1.0 km and its removal,
disposal and transporting for a distance of 1.0 km, of up to
5% by volume of oversize material, and the protection and
maintenance of the layer and the conducting of control tests,
all as specified.
Item
Unit
34.02 Extra over Item 34.01 for

excavation of material in:
(a)
(b)

material obtained from intermediate or hard excavation.
additional costs involved for taking material from classes of
material harder than soft excavation and for the additional
costs, if any, for processing such material in the pavement
layers.
Item
Unit
34.03 Pavement layers

constructed from gravel
obtained from existing layers:
(a)
Gravel selected layer compacted

density, using:
(i)
(ii)
cemented material
(b)

density, using:
(i)
3400-5
(i)
(i)
(ii)
cemented material
(ii)
cemented material
(j)
Gravel wearing course compacted

density, using:
(b)

density, using:
(i)
non cemented material (specify

compacted layer thickness) . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(i)
(ii)
cemented material (specify

(ii)

density, using:
cemented material
(c)

density, using:
(i)
(ii)
cemented material
(d)

density, using:
(i)
(ii)
cemented material
(e)

density, using:
(i)
(ii)
cemented material
(f)

density, using:
(i)
34.04 In situ reconstruction

of existing pavement
layers as:
(ii)
cemented material
(a)
(g)

density, using:
(k)
(i)
non cemented material (specify

(ii)
cemented material (specify


compacted pavement layer, the quantity of which shall be
layer if the underlying layer has also been reconstructed or
reworked. Where the underlying layer has not been
reconstructed or reworked but only rolled, or where no work
has been done on it, quantities shall be calculated with the
aid of cross-sections taken of the layer before and after
construction, subject to the provisions of Clause 1220.
Where the material consists of recovered pavement material
in part and imported material in part, the quantity of
imported material obtained from cut or borrow shall be paid
for under Item 34.01, calculated in accordance with the
volume relation of the respective materials.
breaking up the existing pavement layer, excavating the
material in the existing pavement, procuring, breaking down,
placing and compacting the material, including haul for a
free-haul distance of 1.0 km and for the protection and
maintenance of the layer as well as for the performance of
control tests, all as specified.
Where excavation is executed over sections of the road,
payment will also include compensation for the proper
measuring and marking-off of the excavation, and the
protection of the adjacent existing pavement and its repair
should it be damaged.
The tendered rate for cemented material shall include full
compensation for breaking down the material to comply with
the specified grading requirements.
Item
3400-6
Unit

density, using:
(i)
(ii)
cemented material
(h)

density, using:
(i)
(ii)
cemented material
(i)

to :
(i)

(ii)
95% of Modified AASHTO


compacted pavement layer, the quantity of which shall be
layer if the underlying layer has also been reconstructed or
reworked. Where the underlying layer has not been
reconstructed or reworked but only rolled, or where no work
has been done on it, quantities shall be calculated with the
aid of cross-sections taken of the layer before and after
construction, subject to the provisions of Clause 1220.
Where the material consists of recovered pavement material
in part and imported material in part, the quantity of
imported material obtained from cut or borrow shall be paid
for under Item 34.01, calculated in accordance with the
volume relation of the respective materials.

breaking up the existing pavement layer, excavating the
material in the existing pavement, procuring, breaking
down, placing and compacting the material, including haul
for a free-haul distance of 1.0 km and for the protection and
maintenance of the layer as well as for the performance of
control tests, all as specified.
Where excavation is executed over sections of the road,
payment will also include compensation for the proper
measuring and marking-off of the excavation, and the
protection of the adjacent existing pavement and its repair
should it be damaged.
The tendered rate for cemented material shall include full
compensation for breaking down the material to comply with
the specified grading requirements.
Note: Where the following items of work are required in
connection with constructing the pavement layers, the
appropriate payment items shall appear in Section 3400 of
the Schedule of Quantities.
Item 16.02
Item 31.01
Item 31.03
Item 32.01
Item 32.02
Item 32.03
Item 32.04
Item 35.01
Item 35.02
Item 35.03
Item 35.04
Item 35.05
Overhaul of material for a distance

exceeding 1.0 km
Excess overburden
Finishing-off borrow pits
Provision of crushing and/or screening plant
Re-erection of crushing and/or screening
plant
Crushing and screening
Removal of oversize material
Chemical stabilisation
Chemical stabilising agent
Mechanical modification
Provision and application of water for curing
Curing by covering with the subsequent
layer
3400-7
3400-8
SERIES 3000 :

LAYERS OF GRAVEL OR
CRUSHED STONE
SECTION 3500 :
STABILISATION
CONTENTS
3501
3502
3503
3504
3505
3506
3507
SCOPE
MATERIALS
CHEMICAL STABILISATION
MECHANICAL MODIFICATION
TOLERANCES
QUALITY OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
3501
SCOPE
This Section covers the stabilisation of materials used in the

construction of the roadbed, fill or pavement layers by the
addition of a chemical stabilising agent or by the mechanical
modification of the material by mixing various materials or
by treating the material with a bituminous stabilising agent.
It includes the furnishing, spreading and mixing-in of the
stabilising agent or soil binder. In the case of chemically
stabilised material the layer is given a curing treatment.
3502
MATERIALS
(a)
Chemical stabilising agents
The stabilising agent shall be either one or more of the

following agents specified on the Drawings, in the Schedule
of Quantities or in the Project Specifications or ordered by
the Engineer.
(i)
Road lime
Road lime shall comply with the requirements of the national

specification for lime or AASHTO M 216 or SABS 824 where
no local standard exists.
(ii)
Ordinary Portland cement
Ordinary Portland cement shall comply with the

requirements of the national specification or AASHTO M 85
or SABS 471 where no local standard exists. The use of
rapid-hardening Portland cement shall not be permitted.
(iii)
Portland blast-furnace cement
Portland blast-furnace cement shall comply with the

requirements of the national specification or AASHTO M 240
or SABS 626.
(iv)
Milled blast-furnace slag
Milled blast-furnace slag shall comply with the requirements

of AASHTO M 240 or national specifications as specified
and have a specific surface of not less than 0.35 m2/g and
the residue on a sieve with 75 micron openings shall not
exceed 10% by mass.
Milled blast-furnace slag shall not be used on its own as a
stabilising agent but shall be mixed either with Ordinary
Portland cement to form a cement-slag mixture, or with lime
to form a lime-slag mixture. The ratio by mass of the
ingredients of each mixture shall be indicated by the

Engineer.
Cement-slag and lime-slag mixtures shall be intimately
mixed by means of approved mixers and/or spreaders prior
to their application onto any layers to be stabilised, or they
may be mixed on the road, at the discretion of the Engineer.
(v)
Other chemical stabilising agents
Other chemical stabilising agents such as fly-ash may be

used if specified in the Special Specifications or if approved
or so instructed by the Engineer.
(b)
General
From the time of purchase to the time of use, all stabilising

agents shall be kept under proper cover and be protected
from moisture.
Consignments of these materials shall be used in the same
sequence as that in which they are delivered at the Works.
Stocks which have been stored on the site for periods longer
than three months shall not be used in the work, unless
authorised by the Engineer.
(c)
Soil binder
Soil binder for mechanical modification shall be taken from

within the limits of an approved source and shall be subject
to such requirements regarding grading, plasticity index or
other properties as may be indicated on the borrow-pit
plans, or prescribed by the Engineer.
(d)
Material properties
The properties of the material after stabilisation will be

specified in the Drawings and design. In order to ensure
that a durable stabilisation reaction occurs, the amount of
stabiliser added should not be less than the initial
consumption of lime (ICL) as determined using the method
described in Subclause 7109(d) plus 1%. A stabiliser
content in excess of 5% is not normally specified in order to
avoid excessive shrinkage cracking.
3503
CHEMICAL STABILISATION
(a)
Preparing the layer
The material to be stabilised shall be prepared and placed

as specified in Section 3200, and given at least one pass
with a flatwheel roller. The material shall be damp.
(b)
Applying the stabilising agent
After the layer of soil or gravel has been prepared, the

stabilising agent shall be spread uniformly over the full area
of the layer at the prescribed rate of application by means of
an approved type of mechanical spreader in a continuous
process, or it may be spread by hand.
When spreading is done by hand, pockets or bags of
stabilising agent shall be accurately spaced at equal
intervals along the section to be stabilised so that the
specified rate of application can be achieved. The
stabilising agent shall be spread as evenly as possible, and
shall then be uniformly distributed over the entire surface to
3500-1
be treated by levelling off the stabilising agent by means of

hand rakes and/or screeds.
The Engineer may permit spreading of the hand-spaced
stabilising agent by motor grader, provided that he is
satisfied that an even distribution of the stabilising agent is
obtained.
(c)
Mixing in the stabilising agent
Immediately after the stabilising agent has been spread, it

shall be mixed with the loose gravel for the full depth of
treatment. Care shall be taken not to disturb the compacted
layer underneath, nor to mix the stabilising agent in below
the desired depth. Mixing shall be continued for as long as
necessary and repeated as often as required to ensure a
thorough, uniform and intimate mix of the soil or gravel and
the stabilising agent over the full area and depth of the
material to be treated and until the resulting mixture is
homogeneous and of uniform appearance throughout.
so required by the Engineer, in order to prevent the

formation of laminations near the surface of the layer. Final
rolling shall be done with equipment that will give a smooth
surface finish which conforms to the surface tolerances
specified. Low patches on the surface may not be filled
after compaction. The minimum compaction requirements
shall be as specified for the particular layer in the various
Sections of these Specifications.
A sufficient number of compacting units shall be employed
on the work to ensure that, from the time the stabilising
agent is first applied to the layer, the mixing process,
watering, compacting, shaping and final finishing will be
completed within the periods specified in Subclause 3503(h)
below.
(f)
Finishing at junctions
Mixing may also be done in central batch-mixing plants, but

the Contractor will not be entitled to payment for additional
overhaul or incidentals resulting from such procedure,
unless such mode of operation has been prescribed.
Any finished portion of the stabilised layer adjacent to new

work, which is used as a turn-round area by equipment in
constructing the adjoining section, shall be provided with a
protective cover of soil or gravel of at least 100 mm thick
over a sufficient length to prevent damage to work already
completed. When the adjoining section is being finally
finished, such cover shall be removed to permit the making
of a smooth vertical joint at the junction of the different
sections. Material in the vicinity of the joint which cannot be
processed satisfactorily with normal construction equipment
shall be mixed and compacted by hand or with suitable
hand-operated machines.
(d)
(g)
Mixing shall be done by grader, disc harrow, rotary mixer or

equivalent plant, working over the full area and depth of the
layer to be stabilised by means of successive passes of the
equipment.
Watering
Immediately after the stabilising agent has been properly

mixed with the soil or gravel, the moisture content of the
mixture shall be determined, and the required amount of
water as specified in Section 3200 shall be added.
Each application or addition of water shall be well mixed with
the gravel or soil so as to avoid the concentration of water
near the surface or the flow of water over the surface of the
layer.
Particular care shall be taken to ensure satisfactory
moisture distribution over the full depth, width and length of
the section being stabilised and to prevent any portion of the
work from getting excessively wet after the stabilising agent
has been added. Any portion of the work that becomes too
wet after the stabilising agent has been added and before
the mixture has been compacted, will be rejected, and such
portions shall be allowed to dry out to the required moisture
content and shall then be scarified, restabilised,
recompacted and again finished off in accordance with the
requirements specified herein, all at the expense of the
Contractor. The water supply and watering equipment shall
be adequate to ensure that all the water required will be
added and mixed with the material being treated within a
short enough period to enable compaction and finishing to
be completed within the period specified in Subclause
3503(h).
(e)
The stabilised layer shall be protected against rapid dryingout for at least seven days following completion of the layer.
The methods of protection may be any one or more of the
following:
(i)
The stabilised layer shall be kept continuously wet or
damp by watering at frequent intervals. This method will be
permitted for up to a maximum period of 24 hours, but one
of Methods (ii), (iii), or (iv) shall be applied as soon as the
moisture content of the stabilised layer so permits. Work
which is not kept continuously wet or damp but is subjected
to consecutive wet-dry cycles, may be rejected by the
Engineer should he consider the layer to have been
adversely affected.
(ii)
The stabilised layer shall be covered with the
material required for the following layer while the stabilised
layer is still in a wet or damp condition. The material
forming the protective layer shall be watered at such
intervals as may be required to keep the stabilised layer
continuously wet or damp, and in dry weather this shall be
done at least once in every 24 hours.
(iii)
The stabilised layer shall be covered with a curing
membrane consisting of a spray-grade emulsion or cutback
bitumen applied at the rate instructed by the Engineer. The
provisions of Section 4100 shall apply mutatis mutandis to
the application of a curing membrane.
Compaction
The provisions of Section 3200 shall apply. During

compaction the layer shall be continuously bladed by motor
grader, and loss of moisture by evaporation shall be
corrected by further light applications of water.
During compaction of the stabilised layers, the Contractor
shall lightly harrow or scarify the crust before final rolling, if
3500-2
Curing the stabilised work
(iv)
Where a prime coat is specified on top of the
stabilised base or subbase, the prime coat may be utilised
as a curing membrane and shall be applied as specified in
Section 4100.
No additional payment will be made for curing as described
above, except that the application of a curing membrane
when ordered by the Engineer shall be paid for separately
and the application of a prime coat shall be paid for under

Section 4100.
(a)
(h)
This process involves the addition and mixing of an

approved soil binder, which shall not exceed 20% by mass
of the total mixture, to the material to be improved.
Construction limitations
For cemented layers, the stabilising agent shall be applied

only to an area of such size that all processing, watering,
compacting and finishing can be completed within the period
given in Table 3503/1.
Table 3503/1
Construction limitations
Stabilising
agent
Maximum time for completion

after stabilising agent comes
into contact with the material to
be stabilised
Ordinary Portland
cement, or Portland
cement mixed with
milled slag or flyash
8 hours
Slaked lime
10 hours
For modification, the maximum period allowed from the time

the binder comes into contact with the layer being modified
until the completion of compaction shall be 48 hours in the
case of lime. The starting time shall be the median time
taken to complete the spreading of the lime. Modification of
materials should only be carried out to improve the
properties of the material prior to chemical stabilisation.
Modification alone will usually be lost rapidly through
carbonation.
No stabilisation shall be applied when the moisture content
of the material to be stabilised exceeds the optimum
moisture content by more than 2% of the dry mass of
material. No stabilisation shall be done during wet weather
or when, in the opinion of the Engineer, windy conditions
may adversely affect the stabilising operations. Any rain
falling on the working area during the process of stabilisation
may be sufficient cause for the Engineer to order any
affected areas to be reconstructed at the Contractor's own
cost.
No traffic nor any equipment not actually used for
processing the layer may be allowed to pass over the freshly
spread stabilising agent. Only equipment required for curing
or priming may be allowed over the treated layers during the
specified curing period. Where water spraying equipment
causes damage to the layer, the Engineer may direct that
watering shall be done by side-spraying tankers travelling off
the stabilised layer.
3504
MECHANICAL MODIFICATION
Mechanical modification shall consist of the addition of an

approved soil binder to material to improve its properties, or
the mixing of material originating from various sources, as
described hereafter.
Modifying soil and gravel by the addition of a soil

binder
The material to be treated shall be prepared, broken down

and spread to the required loose thickness, all as specified
in Section 3200. An approved binder material shall then be
spread over the prepared material at the required rate, and
the materials shall be mixed by a suitable method by motor
grader, harrow and/or other suitable plant until the binder
material is uniformly and intimately mixed with the material
being treated. The mixed materials shall then be watered,
mixed and compacted as described in Section 3200.
(b)
Mixing materials from various sources
The mixing of materials from various sources requires the

material from the first source to be dumped onto the road,
prepared, broken down and spread in a layer of uniform
thickness, after which it is lightly rolled with a steel-wheeled
roller. The material from the second source shall then be
dumped onto the road, prepared, broken down and evenly
spread, after which the two materials shall be thoroughly
mixed as described in Subclause 3208(a): Spraying and
mixing.
The mixing of materials from different sources will apply only
when the smallest component of the mixture exceeds 20%
of the total mass of the mixture. If not, the process will be
regarded as the addition of a soil binder as described above
in Subclause 3504(a).
3505
TOLERANCES
(a)
Rate of application
The average rate of application of a chemical stabilising

agent, when applied by mechanical bulk-spreading
equipment and measured by the canvas-patch method, shall
be equal to the specified rate of application 5% of the rate
of application measured over any section not exceeding
1.0 km in length. No single measurement shall show a
value deviating by more than 20% from the specified rate.
When hand spotted, stabilising agents shall be spread
exactly to the specified rate of application.
(b)
Uniformity of mix
The cementitious binder content of the mixed material as

determined from 50 samples per lot, when sampled and
tested as specified in Subclause 7109(a), shall be within the
following limits.
(i)
The average cementitious binder content of all 50
samples shall not be less than 93% of the specified binder
content.
(ii)
Not more than nine samples out of the 50 shall show
a cementitious binder content lower than 70% of the
specified binder content.
As described in Subclause 7109(a), test results shall be
adjusted to make allowance for the presence in the material
to be stabilised, of minerals which affect the test results.
The above requirements for uniformity of mix shall be
3500-3
applied only on condition that the variation in these

adjustments falls within the limits specified in Clause 7109.
3507
Item
3506
(a)
Process control
(i)
Stabilising agent
The Contractor shall keep detailed records of the quantities

of stabilising agent applied to the road and the volume of
material stabilised, and shall make these records available
to the Engineer. He shall also monitor the rate of
application when using bulk spreading equipment, by taking
a canvas patch or tray test every 200 metres, unless the
Engineer has permitted that the number of tests may be
reduced. When using a bulk spreader on Site for the first
time or after it has been adjusted or repaired, the spread
rate shall be checked by at least five tests over as short a
distance as is practicable, with the equipment running at
normal speed without stops. Spreading shall not continue
on a large scale until the spread rate is within permissible
tolerances.
(ii)
Compaction
The requirements for process control in respect of

compaction shall be the same as those stated for the
unstabilised layers in each section. Modified AASHTO
densities shall be determined.
(b)
Routine inspection and testing
Routine inspection and testing will be made by the Engineer

to determine the quality of materials and workmanship for
compliance with the requirements of this Section.
Unit
35.01 Chemical stabilisation

(layer thickness indicated)
extra over unstabilised compacted layers (layer to be
stabilised indicated) . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
stabilised material, the quantity of which shall be determined
in accordance with the authorised dimensions of the layers
treated as instructed by the Engineer.
The tendered rates for chemical stabilisation shall be paid
as extra over the rates tendered for constructing the
unstabilised layers. The tendered rates for chemical
stabilisation shall therefore include full compensation for
spreading and mixing the stabilising agent, curing the
stabilised sections, any extra water required, and all
materials, supervision, labour, plant, equipment, tools and
incidentals (extra over those provided for in the rates
tendered for constructing the unstabilised layer) necessary
for completing the specified work, but excluding the cost of
supplying the stabilising agent. No distinction shall be made
in respect of the type of stabilising agent used, the time for
completion or the specific layer being stabilised, and the
extra over rate tendered shall apply to any combination of
these. The Engineer reserves the right to vary the thickness
of the layer to be stabilised by up to 20 mm, and the
contract rate for this work shall not be amended by such
change. The Contractor will, however, not be called upon to
stabilise any layer less than 100 mm nor more than 200 mm
in thickness.
Item
Unit
The test results and measurements will be judged in

35.02 Chemical stabilising

agent:
Only the lower limits and not any upper limits for
cementitious binder content have been laid down in Clauses
7205 and 7207. Nevertheless, the binder content as
determined by the sample mean of a lot shall be not more
than 0.5% above the value specified or ordered by the
Engineer.
(a)
Compliance with the requirements for the compaction of

stabilised materials shall be as specified in the relevant
section for each layer, or in the Project Specifications.
Ordinary Portland cement . . . . . . . . . . . . tonne(t)
(b)
Portland blast-furnace
cement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tonne(t)
(c)
Slaked road lime
(type indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tonne(t)
(d)
Milled granulated
blast-furnace slag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tonne(t)
The requirements for uniformity of mix and rate of

application shall be deemed to have been complied with if
the mixture meets the requirements of Clause 3505.
(e)
Other stabilising
agents (specify type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tonne(t)
When the tests for uniformity of mix are not applicable as

stated in Subclause 3505(b), the material shall be visually
appraised for uniformity of mix.
The unit of measurement shall be the tonne of stabilising

agent. Measurement shall distinguish between the various
stabilising agents used. When mixtures of slag and cement
or lime are used, the quantity of each constituent shall be
measured separately and not the mixture as a whole.
(c)
Defective work or materials
Any material or work which does not comply with the

requirements specified shall be removed and replaced with
new materials or work complying with the specified
requirements or, if the Engineer permits, be repaired as
specified in Clause 1220, so that it will comply with the
specified requirements after having been repaired.
3500-4
Subject to the provisions of Clause 1220, the quantity will be

determined in accordance with the authorised rate of
application or actually provided within the layer concerned,
whichever is the lesser quantity, provided, however, that any
tests for stabiliser content which indicate an average
stabiliser content below that specified, but within the
tolerance allowed, shall not be construed as an indication of
insufficient stabiliser quantity.
The right of the Engineer to accept work not containing the

full quantity of stabiliser specified or ordered, subject to
payment of only the actual amount of stabiliser provided,
shall not mean that he waives the right to condemn such
work.
Item

providing the stabilising agent at the Works, irrespective of
the rate of application specified or ordered by the Engineer,
but shall make allowance for the differences in mixing and
compaction times specified for various stabilising agents.
The rate for milled granulated blast-furnace slag shall
include full compensation for premixing the blast-furnace
granulated slag with other stabilising agents in the required
proportion.

stabilised pavement layer being cured by covering it with the
subsequent layer as specified in Subclause 3503(g)(ii). The
quantity will be determined by the authorised dimensions of
the layer to be treated.
Item
35.04 Curing by covering

with the subsequent
layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)

incidentals in respect of applying the subsequent layer for
curing as specified, including the cost of regularly supplying
and applying water.
Unit
35.03 Mechanical modification

(extra over untreated layer):
(a)
Unit
By adding a soil binder . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(b)
By mixing materials
from different sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
compacted material that has been mechanically modified as
specified in Clause 3504, and the quantity shall be
calculated in accordance with the authorised dimensions of
the mechanically modified layer.
The tendered rates for mechanical modification shall be paid
as extra over the rate for the construction of an untreated
layer and shall include full compensation for all the work,
plant and other incidentals necessary for supplying and
hauling the material for a distance of 1.0 km, and for
spreading the soil binder and mixing it with the material to
be treated or for mixing materials from different sources as
specified.
The addition of material during a crushing or screening
process, whether it is specially imported material which is
not the product of the crushing process or whether it is
crushed material screened out and then replaced in part or
as a whole, will not be regarded as treatment with soil binder
for measurement and payment purposes, but will be
regarded as part of the process of producing crushed stone
for subbase, base or other construction work, the cost of
which shall be included in the tendered rates for those items
of work.
Item
Unit
35.05 Application of a curing

membrane consisting of
(a)
MC 30 cut-back bitumen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
(b)
MC 70 cut-back bitumen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
(c)
Invert bitumen emulsion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
(d)
60 % spray grade anionic bitumen emulsion litre (R)
(e)
60 % spray grade cationic bitumen emulsionlitre (R)
The unit of measurement for payment for applying a curing

membrane shall be the litre of bituminous material
conforming to the relevant standards measured at spraying
temperature and sprayed as required in Section 4100.
supplying the material, preparation of the surface before
applying the bituminous membrane, applying the material
and maintaining the surface as specified.
3500-5
3500-6
SERIES 3000 :

LAYERS OF GRAVEL OR
CRUSHED STONE
SECTION 3600 :
C R U S H E D - S T O N E B AS E O R
SUBBASE
CONTENTS
3601
3602
3603
3604
3605
3606
3607
3608
SCOPE
MATERIALS
REQUIREMENTS BEFORE THE CRUSHEDSTONE LAYER MAY BE CONSTRUCTED
CONSTRUCTION
3601
SCOPE
(c)
The weighted average flakiness index determined for the

minus 26.5 mm, plus 19.0 mm and minus 19.0 mm plus
13.2 mm fractions shall not exceed 35%.
(d)
(i)
Unstabilised material
The maximum electrical conductivity of the minus 6.7 mm

fraction of the aggregate when dumped on the road in the
case of untreated aggregate or before adding cement in the
case of cement-treated aggregate, shall not exceed
0.15 Sm-1 at 25C when tested in accordance with TMH 1
Method A-21T. If the conductivity of the material exceeds
0.15 Sm-1 and the pH is less than 6 the Contractor shall add
lime at his own expense, under controlled conditions,
preferably during crushing and screening to raise the pH to
at least 10 (any later decrease which will occur later on,
shall be ignored).
(ii)
This Section covers the procuring, furnishing and placing of

approved crushed stone on top of the completed selected
layer or subbase, and constructing a crushed-stone subbase
or base, as the case may be, in accordance with the
requirements of these Specifications.
3602
MATERIALS
The aggregate used for crushed-stone base or subbase

shall be derived from hard, sound, durable and unweathered
parent rock. It shall contain no deleterious material such as
decomposed rock, clay or shale. The crushed aggregate
shall comply with the following requirements:
(a)
Crushing strength (10% FACT)
Flakiness index
Material being stabilised (for example with lime or

cement)
Where the pH $ 6 and the electrical conductivity < 0.15 Sm-1

and the qualitative test shows that sulphates do not pose a
problem, the material may be used. If not, the material shall
be further analysed by the Engineer in accordance with the
Employer's instructions, and the proposals for its use shall
be submitted to the Employer for approval.
The tests conducted for evaluating whether sulphates pose
a problem shall be the following:
Acid-soluble
sulphate content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BS 1377, Test No 9,
made on a full sample
crushed to < 2.00 mm
Water-soluble
sulphate content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BS 1377, Test No 10
The aggregate crushing strength (10%FACT), determined

in accordance with TMH 1 Method B2, shall not be less than
110 kN. The materials when tested after 24 hours
immersion, followed by draining, shall have a wet crushing
strength of not less than 75% of the value obtained in the
dry test.
Where the salinity of the water used for compaction

purposes is so high as to cause a considerable increase in
the salinity of the material, the Engineer shall be entitled to
determine the soluble salinity from samples taken from the
compacted layer within 24 hours, and before the prime coat
is applied.
(b)
(e)
Atterberg limits
Grading requirements
The material shall comply with the requirements of Table

3602/1 and Clause 7102 in regard to Atterberg limits.
The grading of the crushed aggregate shall conform to the

grading limits given in Table 3602/2.
Table 3602/1
Atterberg Limits
Where, due to factors beyond the control of the Contractor,

the grading of the material available from commercial
sources or obtainable by normal crushing methods is
consistently above or below the average of the grading limits
given above, the Engineer may fix a target grading to suit
the average grading of the available material, provided that
the target grading shall fall within the grading limits in the
above table, shall follow a smooth curve without any marked
gaps or excessive quantities at any particular size, and shall
preferably not be near the finer limits of the above grading
limits. The material shall then conform to the target grading
within the tolerances given in Table 3602/3.
Property
Limit
Liquid limit (maximum)

Plasticity index (maximum)(%)
Bar linear shrinkage (maximum)(%)
25
6
3
In addition the arithmetic mean of the PIs for a lot (min 6

tests) shall not exceed 4.5.
3600-1
Table 3602/2
Grading limits for crushed stone
Sieve
size
(mm)
37.5
26.5
19.0
13.2
4.75
2.00
0.425
0.075
Percentage passing
(by mass)
Nominal maximum
size 37.5 mm
Nominal maximum
size 26.5 mm
100
84 - 94
71 - 84
59 - 75
36 - 53
23 - 40
11 - 24
4 - 12
100
100
85 - 95
71 - 84
42 - 60
27 - 45
13 - 27
5 - 12
26.5
19.0
13.2
4.75
2.00
0.425
0.075
Permissible deviations for individual values

(% by mass)
Nominal maximum
size 37.5 mm
Nominal maximum
size 26.5 mm
5
7
7
7
5
5
3
7
7
7
5
5
3
Tests to determine whether the crushed stone material

complies with the specified grading requirements shall be
conducted after the material has been mixed on the road
and spread out.
The aggregate shall be produced entirely by the crushing of
rock. Single stage crushing will not be allowed and the
crusher installation shall be capable of producing material
complying with the specified requirements. If, however, the
nature of the parent rock is such that despite every effort
made, the material remains deficient in the finer fractions,
the Engineer may allow the addition of fines obtained from
crushing of the same parent rock. Where the grading is
such that the specified density cannot be achieved, the
Engineer may allow the addition of a non-plastic sand, on
condition that it shall not exceed 10% by mass.
(f)
Quality/durability
The quality of the natural base course material shall comply

Durability Mill Index (DMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125*
Maximum percentage passing 0.425 mm sieve
after any DMI treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Flakiness index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30%
* This may be relaxed to 420 for acid crystalline and high
silica materials.
3600-2
The minimum dry density to which the material shall be

compacted shall be 102% of modified AASHTO density or
as may be specified or instructed. Field dry density shall be
determined by nuclear methods (direct radiation) with the
moisture content being confirmed gravimetrically.
Where it is required that the material be compacted to the
higher density and the Contractor is unable to achieve the
required compaction, the Engineer may, in his discretion,
accept such sections at the rate tendered for compaction to
the lower value, provided that this density at least is
obtained.
3603
REQUIREMENTS BEFORE THE CRUSHEDSTONE LAYER MAY BE CONSTRUCTED
Before any crushed-stone layer is constructed, the following

requirements shall be met:
Table 3602/3
Tolerances for target grading
Sieve
size
(mm)
(g)
The underlying layer shall comply with the requirements for

the layer concerned.
The crushed-stone base shall, where possible, be supported
along the outer edge during construction by placing,
compacting and trimming the adjacent shoulder before the
base is constructed. Excess material resulting from the
trimming of the shoulders shall be removed from the area
where the base is placed, to beyond the shoulders.
No crushed-stone layer shall be rolled if the underlying layer,
either on account of rain or by any other cause, is so wet as
to constitute a danger of the underlying layers being
damaged.
3604
CONSTRUCTION
(a)
Spreading and mixing
Crushed-stone material complying with the requirements

specified above shall be dumped in quantities sufficient to
ensure that the completed layer will comply with all the
requirements in regard to layer thickness, level, crosssection and density. Allowance shall also be made for
sufficient extra material to enable the layer to be properly
trimmed.
The maximum compacted thickness of any layer of crushedstone base or subbase compacted in one process shall be
150 mm, unless otherwise specified or permitted by the
Engineer.
The dumps of material shall be spread out to a flat-surfaced
layer with a thickness which will be suitable for mixing. The
required quantity of water shall then be added and the
material mixed until a homogeneous mixture is obtained.
(b)
Compaction
After mixing, the crushed-stone material shall be placed to

the correct thickness and level and thoroughly compacted
by suitable equipment so that the specified density is
obtained throughout the entire layer after slushing.
The finally compacted layer shall be free from surface
laminations, portions exhibiting segregation of the fine and
coarse aggregate, corrugations, or other defects that may

adversely affect the performance of the layer.
(c)
Watering and slushing
Where specified, after completion of the compaction

described above, short sections of the surface shall be
thoroughly watered, rolled and slushed by means of steelwheeled rollers with a mass of not less than 12 tonnes each,
and/or with pneumatic-tyred rollers. The process shall
continue until all excess fines are brought to the surface.
The grout thus formed shall be uniformly broomed over the
surface with stiff brooms to correct any areas still deficient
in fines, whereupon the excess fines shall be broomed from
the surface of the layer. This process shall continue until all
excess fines in the mixture have been brought to the surface
of the layer and its specified density has been reached.
Excess fines and loose aggregate shall then be swept from
the surface while the surface is still damp, and the layer
shall then be allowed to dry out.
During slushing operations, care shall be taken not to roll
the surface out of shape.
The slushing process shall be carried out on each section in
one continuous process, and each section shall be
completed before the next is proceeded with.
The completed layer shall be firm and stable with a closelyknit surface of aggregate exposed in mosaic and free from
nests of segregated material, laminations or corrugations.
The Engineer may permit omission of the slushing process
in the lower layer of a two-layer base or subbase, provided
that the specified density is obtained in each of the layers.
(d)
General
(i)
Kerbs and gutters
layer and shall be repeated as often as is necessary.

Repairs shall be so made as to ensure an even and uniform
surface to be restored after completion of the repair work.
Traffic shall not be allowed direct on any unprimed crushedstone layer unless so authorised or directed by the
Engineer.
The crushed-stone base shall be primed as soon as
possible and, where so ordered by the Engineer, traffic may
have to be routed across completed and primed layers as
3606
The completed crushed-stone layer shall comply with

construction tolerances specified in Clause 3405.
Where a base is to be constructed in two layers, the
requirements for grade, thickness, cross-section and
smoothness shall not apply to the lower layer, but the lower
layer shall be constructed with sufficient accuracy to enable
the construction of the combined layer to be carried out to
the tolerances specified.
3607
(ii)
Excess crushed-stone material
Excess crushed-stone material shall not be spread over the

shoulders or side fills, but shall be loaded and removed from
the road. It shall not be re-used unless it has been rescreened, retested and again approved for use. It shall not
be mixed with approved material unless screened, tested
and again approved for use on its own.
(iii)
Junctions with existing bituminous surfaces
At junctions with existing bituminous surfaces, the new base

shall not be feathered-off to obtain continuity of grade, but
the existing work in the vicinity of the joint shall be cut back
so as to ensure an overall compacted thickness of new base
and surfacing of not less than 100 mm.
3605

crushed-stone layer at his own expense until the next layer
or the seal or surfacing is applied. Maintenance shall include
the immediate repair of any damage to or defects in the
Routine inspections and tests will be made by the Engineer

to determine whether the quality of material and
workmanship complies with the requirements of this
Section.
Test results and measurements shall be assessed in
3608
Care shall be taken during rolling to ensure that concrete
edging, kerbs and gutters already laid are not displaced or
damaged. Any concrete edging, kerbs or gutters damaged
during construction shall immediately be replaced or
repaired by the Contractor at his own expense.
Item
Unit
36.01 Crushed-stone base:

(a)
Constructed from crushed stone
obtained from commercial sources and
compacted to 102 % of modified AASHTO
density (nominal maximum size
of stone indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(b)
obtained from approved borrow pits,
crushed by the Contractor, and compacted
to 102 % of modified AASHTO density by
the Contractor (nominal maximum size of
stone indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
Item
Unit
36.02 Crushed-stone subbase:

(a)
obtained from commercial sources and
compacted to 102 % of modified AASHTO
density (nominal maximum size
of stone indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
3600-3
(b)
obtained from approved borrow pits,
crushed by the Contractor, and compacted
to 102 % of modified AASHTO density
(nominal maximum size
of stone indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
completed crushed-stone base or subbase in place as the
case may be, and compacted to the specified density. The
quantity shall be calculated from the authorised dimensions
of the layer as shown on the Drawings or prescribed by the
Engineer.
procuring, furnishing and placing all materials, including the
crusher fines or sand (if approved) necessary for correcting
the grading of the crushed stone, for hauling the material
over an unlimited free-haul distance where material is
obtained from commercial sources, and over a 1.0 km freehaul distance where material is obtained from approved
borrow pits, for rolling, slushing and correcting the layers,
and for testing, protecting and maintaining the work as
specified.

provision and erection of the crusher ready for crushing, its
later dismantling and removal after completion of the
crushing operations, and the work involved in opening the
borrow pits, including clearing, establishing a working face,
and finishing-off the borrow pit upon completion of the
operations.
Where Item 36.03 applies in circumstances as described
above, and only where such circumstances shall apply,
payment shall also be made for removing excess
overburden and for overhaul in excess of 1.0 km as
indicated below.
Crushed stone stockpiled on the site will only qualify for
payment as "material on the site" where the Engineer is
satisfied that the material complies with all the specified
requirements. Where the Contractor himself produces the
crushed stone, its value per cubic metre, measured loose in
stockpile, will be taken as not exceeding 45% of the
tendered rate per cubic metre of compacted material.
Item
Unit
36.04 Additional compaction:

Item
Unit
36.03 Establishing the

crushing plant and
opening borrow pits
where stone is
obtained from approved
borrow pits and
crushed by the Contractor . . . . . . number (No)
Where the material for crushed-stone base or subbase is
obtained by the Contractor from approved borrow pits,
whether indicated on the borrow-pit plans or approved after
construction has started, the Contractor shall be entitled to
the compensation provided by this Item (36.03), provided
that prior instructions have been obtained from the Engineer
to crush such material.
No payment shall be made under this item if the crushedstone material is supplied from commercial sources or from
a crusher that had been erected or was in operation prior to
the award of the Contract, or from a crusher that is not
completely or directly under the control of the Contractor. In
such cases payment under Subitems 36.01(a) and 36.02(a)
shall be in full compensation for the work performed in
accordance with this Section.
The unit of measurement for establishing the crushing plant
and opening the borrow pits shall be the number of times
when the plant is set up and dismantled, with the approval,
in writing, of the Engineer, at approved sources of supply,
for the purpose of supplying crushed-stone material for base
and subbase.
3600-4
(a)
Extra over Subitems
36.01(a) and (b) and 36.02(a)
and (b) for compaction greater
than 102% of modified AASHTO
density as specified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
additional costs for compacting the material to the higher
density.
Note: Where material has been obtained from approved
borrow pits on the site, whether indicated on the plans or
approved after work has started and the Engineer has
instructed that the borrow pits be used, the following
payment items from other sections shall apply to crushed
stone, but shall be listed under this Section in the Schedule
of Quantities.
Item 16.02
Item 31.02
Item 31.03
Item 32.06
Overhaul for material hauled in excess of

1.0 km.
Excess overburden in borrow pits for
obtaining crushed stone for pavement
layers.
Stockpiling of material.
SERIES 3000 :

LAYERS OF GRAVEL OR
CRUSHED STONE
the road shall not exceed 0.15 Sm-1 at 25C when tested in
accordance with TMH 1 Method A-21T.
SECTION 3700:
WATERBOUND MACADAM BASE
(e)
CONTENTS
3701
3702
3703
3704
3705
3706
3706
3708
3709
3710
SCOPE
COARSE MATERIALS
FINE MATERIALS
REQUIREMENTS BEFORE THE WATERBOUND
MACADAM LAYER MAY BE CONSTRUCTED
PLACING OF COARSE AGGREGATE
PLACING OF FINE AGGREGATE
3701
SCOPE
This Section covers the procuring, furnishing and placing of

a waterbound macadam (a combination of approved
crushed stone (coarse material) and crusher fines or soil
filler (fine material)) base on top of the completed subbase,
constructed in accordance with the requirements of these
specifications.
3702

Table 3702/1
Grading of coarse aggregate for
waterbound macadam
Percentage passing
(by mass)
Sieve size
(mm)
75.0
53.0
37.5
26.5
19.0
(a)
(b)
100
85 - 100
35 - 70
0 - 15
0-5
100
85 - 100
0 - 30
0-5
-
Grading (a) is recommended but grading (b) has been found

to be give satisfactory performance.
Tests to determine whether the coarse aggregate complies
with the specified grading requirements shall be conducted
after the material has been placed, spread out and
compacted on the road.
COARSE MATERIALS
(f)
The coarse aggregate used for waterbound macadam base

shall be derived entirely by the crushing of hard, sound,
durable and unweathered parent rock. It shall contain no
deleterious material such as decomposed rock, clay or
shale. The crushed aggregate shall comply with the
following requirements:
(a)
Crushing strength (10% FACT)
The aggregate crushing strength (10%FACT), determined

in accordance with TMH 1 Method B1, shall not be less than
110 kN. The materials when tested after 24 hours
immersion, followed by draining, shall have a wet crushing
strength of not less than 75 per cent of the value obtained in
the dry test.
As density measurement on the fine material is very difficult,

no compaction requirement is specified. Compaction should,
however, achieve a good particle interlock.
3703
FINE MATERIALS
(a)
Atterberg limits
The fine material shall comply with the requirements of

Table 3703/1 in regard to the Atterberg limits.
Table 3703/1
Atterberg limits
Property
(b)
Atterberg limits
No Atterberg limits requirements are specified as there are

no fines in the coarse aggregate and the source shall be as
defined in 3702 above.
Liquid limit (maximum)

Plasticity index (maximum)
Bar linear shrinkage (maximum)
(b)
(c)
Flakiness index
The average flakiness index determined on the material

crushed to minus 26.5 mm plus 19.0 mm fractions shall not
exceed 35%.
(d)
The maximum electrical conductivity of material crushed to

pass the 6.7 mm sieve of the aggregate when dumped on
Limit
25
6
3
The maximum electrical conductivity of the -6.7 mm fraction

of the aggregate when dumped on the road shall not exceed
0.15 Sm-1 at 25C when tested in accordance with TMH 1
Method A-21T.
Where the salinity of the water used for compaction
purposes is so high as to cause a considerable increase in
the salinity of the material, the Engineer shall be entitled to
determine the soluble salinity from samples taken from the
compacted layer within 24 hours, and before the prime coat
is applied.
3700-1
(c)

Table 3703/2
Grading of fine aggregate for
waterbound macadam
Sieve size
(mm)
Percentage passing
(by mass)
9.5
4.75
0.075
100
85 - 100
10 - 25
3704
REQUIREMENTS BEFORE THE WATERBOUND

MACADAM LAYER MAY BE CONSTRUCTED
Before any waterbound macadam layer is constructed, the

following requirements shall be met:
(a)
The underlying layer shall comply with the
requirements for the layer concerned. It is recommended
that a stabilised subbase be used for waterbound macadam
to avoid deformation of the lower layers during rolling and
slushing.
(b)
The coarse aggregate component of the waterbound
macadam base shall be supported along the outer edge
during construction by placing, compacting and trimming the
adjacent shoulder or by placing edging before the base is
constructed. Excess material resulting from the trimming of
the shoulders shall be removed from the area where the
base is placed, to beyond the shoulders.
(c)
No waterbound macadam layer shall be rolled if the
underlying layer, either on account of rain or by any other
cause, is so wet as to constitute a danger of the underlying
layers being damaged.
(d)
Where labour-based construction of waterbound
macadam is planned, it is recommended that a 25 mm thick
layer of sand is placed in order to provide an even layer and
also to assist with drainage of water in the waterbound
macadam layer.
3705
PLACING OF COARSE AGGREGATE
(a)
Spreading
The maximum compacted thickness of any layer of coarse

material for waterbound macadam base compacted in one
process shall be 150 mm, unless otherwise specified or
permitted by the Engineer. Trial rolling to determine the
bulking factor is necessary. The coarse aggregate shall be
laid at a thickness of 1.3 times the compacted layer
thickness and compacted. Levels shall be established
accordingly for laying of the loose aggregate.
(ii)
The coarse crushed stone shall be dumped in heaps on the

subbase as for conventional crushed stone construction.
The heaps are then spread using a large, heavy grader such
that an even finish will be obtained after levelling of the
heaps of gravel. The material is then spread to the specified
depth (making allowance for bulking).
The use of manual labour with ballastforks and rakes is still
necessary to correct high and low areas in the spread
material.
It is recommended that the coarse aggregate is placed
using pavers in the mechanised construction process. As
various types of paver exist, each with different
characteristics, the process to be used with these should be
(b)
(i)
Rolling shall commence at the edges of the layer until the

edges are well compacted before gradually compacting
towards the centre of the road. This shall be continued until
the material is both compacted and keyed. Once the
material is keyed so that no further movement occurs and
no roller marks are evident in the finished surface, the
rolling is sufficient.
The final compacted layer shall be free from surface
laminations, portions exhibiting segregation of the fine and
coarse aggregate, corrugations, or other defects that may
adversely affect the performance of the layer.
PLACING OF FINE AGGREGATE
Placing of the fine aggregate shall be carried out

simultaneously with compaction, watering and slushing as
follows.
Labour-based construction
Crushed stone complying with the requirements specified

above shall be dumped in quantities sufficient to ensure that
the completed layer will comply with all the requirements in
regard to layer thickness, level, cross-section and density
adjacent to the road to avoid segregation. This is then
moved onto the road by barrow and placed between
shuttering to give the correct uncompacted depth. Before
any further processing is carried out the layer shall be
carefully examined and high and low points shall be
corrected manually using ballast-forks.
3700-2
Compaction
Static or vibrating, flat or steel-wheel rollers or pedestrian

vibrating rollers should be used for compaction. Ten to 15
tonne static three-wheel rollers should, however, be used for
the final rolling action. Labour based projects should make
use of a Bomag 76 or equivalent roller. Plate vibration is not
recommended.
3706
There are differences in the placement process for coarse
aggregate between labour-based and mechanised
construction.
Mechanised construction
(a)
Spreading, watering and rolling
(i)
Labour-based construction
Fine aggregate complying with the requirements specified

above shall be placed directly from heaps alongside the
road onto the road using spades. The fine material shall be
dry and shall be spread evenly in thin, successive layers and
distributed using brooms. The flat-wheeled roller shall be
used after each layer to ensure that the fine material
penetrates voids within the coarse aggregate.
When it becomes apparent that the voids are filling, water

can be sprayed onto the surface and the brooming and
rolling action continued. Once the voids appear to have
been filled, the surface shall be sprayed with a heavy
application of water and brooming and rolling shall be
continued as described for the slushing process in
Subclause 3604(c).
Slushing shall continue until a smooth mosaic is obtained.
All excess fines shall be broomed off. Just before the layer
is completely dry, it shall be broomed again to remove all
loose fines.
(ii)
Mechanised construction
The fine aggregate shall comply with the requirements

specified above and shall be dry. This material shall be
spread using chip-spreaders in thin layers. After each layer
is spread one or two passes with a vibrating roller shall be
applied. Once this is completed the final layer shall be
broomed, usually manually but towed brooms can be used,
to ensure that all voids are filled.
The layer shall then be slushed as described for labourbased construction above using static rolling, and brooms.
Pneumatic tyred rollers can also be used for the slushing.
3708
The completed waterbound macadam layer shall comply

with the following construction tolerances.
(i)
Longitudinal profile
Maximum deviation under a

3 metre straight edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 mm
(ii)
Transverse profile
Maximum deviation under a

3 metre straight edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 mm
3709
Routine inspections and tests shall be made by the

Engineer to determine whether the quality of material and
workmanship complies with the requirements of this
Section.
3710
(b)
General
Item
(i)
Kerbs and gutters
37.01 Waterbound macadam base:
Care shall be taken during rolling to ensure that concrete

edging, kerbs and gutters already laid are not displaced or
damaged. Any concrete edging, kerbs or gutters damaged
during construction shall immediately be replaced or
repaired by the Contractor at his own expense.
(ii)
Excess material
Excess crushed-stone material shall not be spread over the

shoulders or side fills, but shall be loaded and removed from
the road. It shall not be re-used unless it has been rescreened, retested and again approved for use. It shall not
be mixed with approved material unless screened, tested
and again approved for use on its own.
(iii)
Junctions with existing bituminous surfaces
At junctions with existing bituminous surfaces, the new base

shall not be feathered-off to obtain continuity of grade, but
the existing work in the vicinity of the joint shall be cut back
so as to ensure an overall compacted thickness of new base
and surfacing of not less than 100 mm.
3707
Unit
(a)
Constructed from
crushed stone obtained
from commercial sources
and compacted to the
specified density (nominal
maximum size of stone
indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(b)
Constructed from
crushed stone obtained
from approved borrow pits,
crushed by the Contractor,
and compacted to the
specified density by the
Contractor (nominal
maximum size of stone
completed waterbound macadam base in place and
compacted to the specified density. The quantity shall be
calculated from the authorised dimensions of the layer as
shown on the Drawings or prescribed by the Engineer.

waterbound macadam layer at his own expense until the
seal or surfacing is applied. Maintenance shall include the
immediate repair of any damage to or defects in the layer
and shall be repeated as often as is necessary. Repairs
shall be so made as to ensure an even and uniform surface
to be restored after completion of the repair work. Traffic
shall not be allowed on any unprimed waterbound macadam
layer unless so authorised or directed by the Engineer.

procuring, furnishing and placing all materials, including the
fine material, for hauling the material over an unlimited freehaul distance where material is obtained from commercial
sources, and over a 1.0 km free-haul distance where
material is obtained from approved borrow pits, for rolling,
slushing and correcting the layers, and for testing, protecting
and maintaining the work as specified.
The waterbound macadam base shall be primed as soon as

possible and, where so ordered by the Engineer, traffic may
have to be routed across completed and primed layers as
3700-3
Item
Unit
37.02 Sand layer:

(a)
Provision and placement of sand layer, obtained
from commercial sources,
on prepared subbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(b)
Provision and placement of sand layer, obtained
from approved borrow pits,
crushed by the Contractor,
on prepared subbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement for establishing the crushing plant

and opening the borrow pits shall be the number of times
when the plant is set up and dismantled, with the approval,
in writing, of the Engineer, at approved sources of supply,
for the purpose of supplying crushed-stone material for
waterbound macadam base.
provision and erection of the crusher ready for crushing, its
later dismantling and removal after completion of the
crushing operations, and the work involved in opening the
borrow pits, including clearing, establishing a working face,
and finishing-off the borrow pit upon completion of the
operations.

in place. The quantity shall be calculated from the
authorised dimensions of the layer as shown on the
Drawings or prescribed by the Engineer.
Where Item 37.03 applies in circumstances as described

above, and only where such circumstances shall apply,
payment shall also be made for removing excess
overburden and for overhaul in excess of 1.0 km as
indicated below.
Item
Coarse and fine aggregate stockpiled on the site will only

qualify for payment as "material on the site" where the
Engineer is satisfied that the material complies with all the
specified requirements. Where the Contractor himself
produces the crushed stone, its value per cubic metre,
measured loose in stockpile, will be taken as not exceeding
45% of the tendered rate per cubic metre of compacted
material.
Unit
37.03 Establishing the

crushing plant and
opening borrow pits
where stone is obtained
from approved borrow
pits and crushed by the
Contractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
Where the material for waterbound macadam base is
obtained by the Contractor from approved borrow pits,
whether indicated on the borrow-pit plans or approved after
construction has started, the Contractor shall be entitled to
the compensation provided by this Item (37.03), provided
that prior instructions have been obtained from the Engineer
to crush such material.
Note: Where material has been obtained from approved

borrow pits on the site, whether indicated on the plans or
approved after work has started and the Engineer has
instructed that the borrow pits be used, the following
payment items from other sections shall apply to coarse and
fine aggregate, but shall be listed under this Section in the
No payment shall be made under this item if the crushedstone material is supplied from commercial sources or from
a crusher that had been erected or was in operation prior to
the award of the contract, or from a crusher that is not
completely or directly under the control of the Contractor. In
such cases payment under Subitems 37.01(a) shall be in full
compensation for the work performed in accordance with
this Section.
Item 16.02
3700-4
Item 31.02
Item 31.03
Overhaul for material hauled in excess of

1.0 km.
Excess overburden in borrow pits for
obtaining crushed stone for pavement
layers.
SERIES 3000 :
SECTION 3800 :

LAYERS OF GRAVEL OR
CRUSHED STONE
BRE AK I N G U P E X I S TI NG
PAVEMENT LAYERS
(d)
Cemented crushed stone
Cemented crushed stone shall be existing cemented

material consisting of crushed stone. Unless specified as
such in the Project Specifications, cemented crushed stone
will not be classified as concrete.
CONTENTS
(e)
3801
3802
3803
3804
3805
3806
3807
SCOPE
CLASSIFYING THE MATERIAL
PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
CONSTRUCTION
STORING RECOVERED PAVEMENT MATERIAL
Milled material shall be bituminous material and/or

cemented crushed stone excavated with an approved milling
machine. Milled material will be classified as such only
when milling is specified or ordered by the Engineer, in
writing. Payment will normally distinguish between milling
of asphalt and of cemented crushed stone.
3801
SCOPE
This Section covers the breaking up and excavation of

existing pavement layers by conventional means or by
milling, selecting the material, and the removal thereof to
spoil dumps or to stockpiles for later reprocessing or
recycling.
3802
Material from existing pavements may only be used for

purposes approved by the Engineer. The material shall be
so excavated that material from the various pavement layers
will not be mixed unless so permitted by the Engineer, in
writing.
3803
3804
PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
(a)
Milling equipment
Only approved milling plant may be used. The plant shall be

so equipped that it will be able to mill out asphalt and/or
cemented material to the prescribed depth in one operation
over the width specified in the Project Specifications. The
milling depth shall be controlled electronically.
The direction and speed of the milling machine and the
speed of rotation of the milling drum shall be adjustable so
as to obtain the required grading of the milled material. The
machine shall be capable of making a neat vertical cut at
the outer edges when milling the layer and to leave the floor
of the cut level and with a uniform texture.
Unless otherwise specified in the Project Specifications, the
milling machine shall be equipped with a self-loading
conveyor belt which can be easily removed and installed
and adjusted for slope and direction.
CLASSIFYING THE MATERIAL

(b)
Material from existing pavements shall be classified as

follows for excavation and processing purposes:
(a)
Milled material
Existing bituminous material
General
The equipment to be used for the conventional breaking-up

and excavation of existing pavement layers will be
determined by the size and depth of the pavement section
to be processed or excavated, taking consideration of the
fact that work may have to be carried out in restricted areas.
Existing bituminous material shall be asphalt or other

bituminous seal or base material removed separately from
the existing layers on the instruction of the Engineer. Where
underlying material is broken down or excavated together
with bituminous materials, the mixture will not be classified
as bituminous material for payment purposes.
Only approved cutting or sawing equipment may be used for

cutting or sawing the asphalt layers. The equipment shall
be capable of cutting the asphalt layers to the specified
depth in one operation without fragmenting the material, and
in straight lines within the required tolerances.
(b)
3805
CONSTRUCTION
(a)
General
Non-cemented material
Non-cemented material shall be existing pavement material

which can be ripped with the teeth of a 140G Caterpillar or
similar grader.
(c)
Cemented material
Cemented material shall be existing pavement material

which cannot be ripped with a Type 140G Caterpillar or
similar grader.
Existing stabilised material will not
necessarily be classified as cemented material.
Where all or a part of the existing surfacing material is to be

reprocessed together with the underlying layer, the surfacing
shall be properly broken down and mixed through the full
depth of the existing base material to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. Fragments of bituminous material shall be broken
down to sizes not exceeding 37.5 mm.
Where specified in the Project Specifications or ordered by
the Engineer, the existing bituminous material shall first be
removed before the underlying layers are broken up.
3800-1
Bituminous material may be milled out or otherwise broken

up and removed to approved stockpile sites for recycling or
to spoil sites, whichever is required. The exposed surface
shall be cleaned to the satisfaction of the Engineer after
removal of the bituminous material. Not more than 5% of
the surface may be covered with bituminous material.
The existing pavement material shall be broken down to the
specified depth and removed, or reprocessed in place,
whichever may be required. The underlying layers may not
be damaged, and material from one layer may not be mixed
with that of another layer. Where such mixing occurs or
where the material is contaminated in any other way by the
actions of the Contractor, he shall remove such material and
replace it with other approved material, all at his own cost.
Where a layer or layers require to be broken down over part
of the pavement width only, the limit of the work shall be
clearly demarcated, which limit shall not be exceeded by the
Contractor by more than 100 mm. Pavement layers broken
down outside the specified limits shall be repaired by the
Contractor at his own cost, to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
order to obtain milled material of the required grade. No

payment will be made for trial milling.
(iii)
Where the asphalt and/or the cemented base must be reused, the asphalt shall be removed separately. Where the
asphalt consists of layers of various mixes or grades, the
Engineer may instruct the separate removal of the layers to
different stockpiles. Where the milled material is not
conveyed directly by conveyor belt and then loaded, and the
Engineer so approves, the material shall first be cut to
windrow and then loaded. During loading, the floor of the
excavation or the underlying material shall not be damaged.
The milled material shall be inspected and classified in
accordance with the various types of asphalt and its
suitability for recycling. Different stockpiles shall be used for
the different types of material as ordered by the Engineer.
Contamination of the asphalt with underlying material will not
be permitted, and the Contractor shall adjust the depths of
milling in accordance with the thickness of the layer.
(iv)
Where so ordered by the Engineer, asphalt and cemented

layers shall be cut or sawn through to the specified depth
along the measured limit with approved equipment.
Payment will be made for sawing only where specified on
the Drawings or ordered, in writing, by the Engineer.
Payment will not be made for sawing or cutting work where
the existing layer requires removal by milling.
Where existing roads have to be widened, the existing
pavement layers shall be cut back to a firm, well-compacted
or cemented material. Material so broken up, if acceptable,
may be used together with imported material in the widening
process, except in the case of crushed-stone base.
Where pavement layers are broken down over a section of
the road width or where pavement layers are widened, the
Engineer may order, in writing, that the various pavement
layers be excavated in benches in accordance with his
instructions. No additional payment will be made for
excavating benches.
Where underlying layers are still structurally sound and are
included as structural layers in the new design drawings,
care must be taken not to break them up during removal of
the surfacing or underlying layers.
(b)
Milling
(i)
Preparing the pavement surface
Before milling may be commenced, the pavement surface

shall be clean and free from soil or other deleterious
material. Where only part of the pavement is to be milled
out, the milling area shall be properly demarcated. Milling
may not exceed the required width by more than 50 mm.
Payment will not be made for milling beyond the required
width, which shall be backfilled with approved material in
accordance with the provisions for the specified pavement
material at the cost of the Contractor.
(ii)
Trial milling
Where ordered by the Engineer, the Contractor shall

execute trial milling on the various materials to be milled.
During the trial work, the Contractor will be expected to vary
the direction and speed of the milling machine, the speed of
rotation of the milling drum, and also the milling depth, in
3800-2
Asphalt
Milling in restricted areas
Extra over payment shall only apply to milling widths of less

than 1.0 m.
(v)
Cemented material
Unless otherwise specified milled cemented material to be

reprocessed on the road shall first be windrowed with a view
to inspecting the underlying surface for any patches of poor
or unsuitable material. Where unsuitable material is
encountered in the floor of the excavation, such material
shall first be removed by further milling (where the
underlying layer also consists of the cemented material), or
by other approved methods, all to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. The unsuitable material shall be replaced with
approved material of the required type, which shall be
placed in accordance with the specifications for the relevant
underlying layer.
Where in the opinion of the Engineer it may be necessary,
he may instruct the Contractor to taper the ends or edges of
a milled excavation for which payment will be made,
provided that the tapering is not the result of defective work.
Payment for the milling-out of cemented crushed stone will
distinguish between the various strengths of the cemented
layer. Where the Engineer is of the opinion that the existing
cemented layer has a compressive strength exceeding
10 MPa, he may instruct the Contractor to drill cores from
the layer and have them tested for compressive strength in
accordance with the provisions of SABS Method 865 or
equivalent. The number of cores to be drilled out and the
drilling locations will be determined on site by the Engineer.
(vi)
General
The floor of the milled excavation shall be level and with an

even texture. Any loose patches or patches of unsuitable
material shall be remedied in accordance with the
instructions of the Engineer. Payment for removing and
replacing unsuitable material and remedying loose patches
shall be as specified elsewhere in these Specifications.
Where such remedial work is done in restricted areas, the
extra over payment concerned shall be in accordance with
the provisions of the appropriate clauses.
Where the floor of an excavation is tested in the longitudinal
direction with a 3 m straight-edge, and in other directions
with a 3 m straight-edge or a straight-edge of such shorter
length as fits in between the longitudinal sides of the
excavation, the surface shall not deviate by more than 7 mm

from the bottom edge of the straight-edge.
Payment for milling will distinguish between various types of
milled material and between various milling depths.
(c)
Treatment of pavement excavation floor
The floor of any pavement excavation where material is not

milled out, shall be treated and paid for as specified in the
relevant clauses of Sections 3400 and 3600. Milled
surfaces shall be treated and paid for as specified in the
3806
STORING RECOVERED PAVEMENT MATERIAL
Excavated pavement material intended for reprocessing but

which cannot be reprocessed in place or, in the opinion of
the Engineer, cannot be windrowed next to the excavation,
nor placed in position directly at any other place, and
material intended for recycling or reprocessing in a plant,
shall be transported to approved stockpiles with the written
permission of the Engineer.
Stockpile sites for material intended for recycling or
reprocessing in a plant shall be set out at the corresponding
mixing or crushing plant or at such other locations as
The stockpile site shall be cleaned, and all loose stones,
vegetation and other materials which may cause
contamination shall be removed. The site shall be graded
smooth with an adequate slope to ensure proper drainage
of water. Where so instructed by the Engineer, the surface
shall be watered and compacted to a depth of at least
150 mm to a density of 90% of modified AASHTO density.
The compacted surface shall be firm without any loose
patches. Where asphalt is recovered for recycling, the
Engineer may order the surface to be chemically stabilised
to a depth of 150 mm. Upon completion, this surface shall
be swept clean.
Stockpile sites shall be sufficiently large to allow the placing
of stockpiles of different types of material or types of
recovered asphalt without the stockpiles overlapping or the
limits of the prepared site being exceeded.
The
enlargement of the stockpile site after the stockpiles have
already been placed will not be permitted without the
Stockpiles of milled material shall be shaped in a manner
which will limit segregation to a minimum. The stockpiling
of asphalt shall be done in a manner that will limit
consolidation to a minimum. Adequate approved covers
shall be provided for recovered asphalt stockpiles to prevent
them from becoming wet, or being contaminated by dust.
Upon completion of the work, the stockpile sites shall be
broken up in accordance with the instructions of the
Engineer.
3807
(a)
General
(i)
Material to be reprocessed
Direct payment will not be made for breaking up and

excavating existing payment material that is reprocessed
and re-used, except when:
(1)
The material is milled out in accordance with the
provisions of the Project Specifications or upon the written
instruction of the Engineer.
(2)
Bituminous surfacing or other bituminous pavement
layers are removed separately from the underlying material
in accordance with the Project Specifications or the written
instructions of the Engineer.
Full compensation for excavating existing pavement
material, where the excavation thereof is not payable
separately, shall be included in the rates tendered for the
various pavement layers and items or work in which the
material is used, as provided in the relevant specifications.
(ii)
Separate payment will be made for removing existing

bituminous material separately from the underlying layer,
when it is not milled out in accordance with the Project
Specifications or the instructions of the Engineer,
irrespective of whether or not it requires recycling.
(iii)
Material from an existing pavement which is not

reprocessed
Existing gravel pavement material, or existing bituminous

material not intended for reprocessing, shall be used for
other specified purposes or taken to spoil. Dumping shall
only occur in an approved waste site. Payment for the
excavation of such material will be made directly under Item
38.04 unless it is used for other purposes.
(iv)
Milling
Milling will be paid for directly irrespective of whether or not

the material will be re-used.
(v)
Measurement for excavating existing pavement

material and underlying fill
Where payment is made separately for the excavation of

existing pavement material and underlying fill, the quantity
will be calculated in accordance with the authorised
horizontal dimensions of the excavated layer and the
average depth of excavation. The average depth of
excavation will be determined in accordance with the test
holes made or cores drilled at intervals not exceeding 10 m,
and which are so distributed over the surface that a realistic
estimate of the depth can be obtained.
(b)
The stockpiling of excavated material will not be paid for
directly, but full compensation therefore shall be included in
the rates for the various items of work in which the
stockpiled material will be used. Separate payment will be
made for the preparation of storage sites.
Removal of bituminous layers (except milled

material)
Overhaul
The distance for calculating overhaul on material intended

for recycling or reworking in a plant will be measured from
the point of excavation on the road up to the plant. Where
the plant is situated outside the site of the Works, the
distance will be measured to a suitable location for setting
up a plant closest to the centre of the site.
3800-3
(c)
General
Item 38.05 is applicable solely to rehabilitation work that has

to be executed in a restricted area of which the width is less
than 3 m or length is less than 150 m.
Item
Unit
38.01 Excavating and removing

existing bituminous
material (except milled
material):
(a)
Material intended for recycling

with the average depth of excavation:
(i)
Not exceeding 30 mm . . . . . .
(ii)
Exceeding 30 mm but not

exceeding 60 mm . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
Exceeding 60 mm . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(iii)
square metre (m2)

providing milling equipment and milling out the material to
the specified depth and in accordance with the requirements
for evenness and for all measurements, labour, supervision
and incidentals for executing the work and obtaining milled
material which will comply with the specified requirements.
loading and transporting the material to approved stockpiles
for a free-haul distance of 1.0 km irrespective of the method
of loading, and for unloading the material and placing it in a
stockpile, also for screening out the oversize material if
necessary. Separate payment will be made for preparing
the stockpile site.
Payment for milling the material will distinguish between the
various average depths of excavation, irrespective of the
required number of passes by the plant for milling out the
material.
Item
Unit
38.03 Milling out cemented crushed stone:

(b)
Material to be disposed of with the average depth of

excavation:
(i)
(ii)

exceeding 60 mm . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(iii)
Exceeding 60 mm . . . . . . . . .
square metre (m2)

determining the average thickness of the layer of bituminous
material to be excavated, including the excavation of holes
or the drilling of cores, if so instructed, for breaking down,
excavating, loading and transporting the material to
approved stockpile or spoil sites for a free-haul distance of
1.0 km and for loading and properly placing the material in
stockpile or spoil dumps.
The volume used for calculating overhaul shall be taken as
70% of the loose volume of the material measured in the
hauling vehicles.
Unit
38.02 Milling out existing

bituminous material
with an average
milling depth:
(a)
Not exceeding 30 mm . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(b)

exceeding 60 mm . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(c)
Exceeding 60 mm . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of asphalt

milled out and removed to approved stockpiles.
3800-4
Average milling depth not

exceeding 50 mm:
(i)
Compressive strength of
10 MPa and less . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(ii)
Compressive strength
exceeding 10 MPa up to
and including 20 MPa . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(iii)
exceeding 20 MPa . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(b)
Average milling depth

exceeding 50 mm and
less than 100 mm . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(i)
Compressive strength of
10 MPa and less . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(ii)
(iii)
exceeding 20 MPa . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(c)
Average milling depth exceeding

100 mm:
(i)
Compressive strength of 10 MPa

and less . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(ii)
(iii)
Compressive strength exceeding

20 MPa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
square metre (m2)
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre layer of

bituminous material excavated from existing pavements
separately from the underlying material on the instruction of
the Engineer, and removed to approved stockpile or spoil
sites.
Item
(a)
The provisions of Item 38.02 shall apply mutatis mutandis.

No payment will be made under the subitems in regard to
material with compressive strengths exceeding 10 MPa
unless the higher strength has been proven by tests.
Item
Unit
38.04 Excavating and spoiling

material from an existing
pavement and/or the
underlying fill:
Payment will not distinguish between the various depths of

milling or the various types of material.
. . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(a)
(b)
Cemented material . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(c)
Cemented crushed stone . . . . . cubic metre (m3)

material, with or without existing bituminous material,
excavated from the existing pavement and/or fill and
removed to spoil dumps.
excavating the material from the existing pavement and/or
fill, irrespective of layer thickness, for loading, transporting
for a free-haul distance of 1.0 km, off-loading, and placing
the material in approved spoil dumps.
Payment will not distinguish between material with or without
existing bituminous material.
Item
Item
Unit
38.07 Extra over Items 38.02

and 38.03 for tapering
the milled excavation
edges or ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
material milled out in a tapered area, the quantity of which
shall be calculated in accordance with the authorised
dimensions of the taper.
additional measurements, adjustments and costs for milling
out the taper to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Payment
will not distinguish between the taper at the ends or along
the edge of the milled excavation. No payment will be made
for tapering resulting from the normal routine level
adjustments of the machine neither for the taper
necessitated by defective work by the Contractor.
Unit
Payment will not distinguish between various depths of
milling or various types of material milled.
38.05 Excavating material

from an existing
pavement and/or
underlying fill in
restricted areas:
Item
(a)
Extra over Item 38.01 for

bituminous material excavated
separately . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(b)
Extra over Item 38.04 for

other existing pavement and/or
fill material:
(i)
. . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
Unit
38.08 Sawing or cutting

asphalt or cemented
pavement layers:
(a)
Sawing asphalt . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(b)
Cutting asphalt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(c)
Sawing cemented layers:
(i)
Cemented material . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(ii)
Cemented crushed stone . . . . square metre (m2)
(ii)
Cemented material . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m )
(iii)
Cemented crushed stone . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
Upon payment being made under Subitem (a) no distinction

will be made between various thicknesses of bituminous
material.
incidentals for excavating material in restricted areas.
Item

additional costs for executing the milling in the restricted
width.
Unit
38.06 Extra over Items 38.02

and 38.03 for milling in
restricted widths of
less than 1.0 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
material milled out in a width of less than 1.0 m, the quantity
of which will be calculated in accordance with the authorised
dimensions of the area and the average depth milled.
The unit of measurement for Subitems (a) and (c) shall be

the square metre of sawcut area calculated in accordance
with the authorised length of sawcut and the average saw
depth measured after excavation of the material. The unit
of measurement for Subitem (b) shall be the metre of cut
measured in accordance with the authorised saw length.
material and sawing or cutting costs and for all incidentals
for cutting or sawing the pavement in accordance with
instructions of the Engineer.
Payment will not distinguish between the various depths of
sawing or cutting work, irrespective of the number of
separate cuts which may be required for sawing or cutting
the layer to the required depth. Where surfacing of less
than 30 mm thickness is sawn together with a cemented
pavement, the surfacing section shall be deemed to be
cemented material for payment purposes.
3800-5
Item
Unit
Item
Unit
38.09 Removing the remaining

asphalt from the
underlying layer . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
38.13 Drilling cores:

(a)
In asphalt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)

excavation floor cleaned on the instruction of the Engineer.
(b)
In cemented material . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The quantity will be calculated in accordance with the

authorised dimensions of the surface from which the
remaining bituminous material will have to be removed after
the existing bituminous layer has been taken off. Only
surfaces of existing layers to be reprocessed as base will be
paid for and only if so instructed by the Engineer.
The unit of measurement shall be the number of cores

drilled on the instructions of the Engineer.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for setting
out the core locations, and for drilling the cores.
Item
removal of any remaining bituminous material from the
excavation floor as specified and the disposal thereof, all to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Item
Unit
38.10 Preparing stockpile

sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
stockpile site prepared on the instruction of the Engineer.
demarcating, clearing, levelling and draining the stockpile
site as specified.
Payment will not be made for preparing the sites for spoil
dumps unless such preparation has been instructed, in
writing, by the Engineer.
Item
Unit

watering and
compacting stockpile
sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
material watered and compacted on the instruction of the
Engineer on the prepared storage site.
procuring all material, scarifying, mixing, and compacting
the site as specified.
Item
Unit
38.12 Chemical stabilisation

of stockpile site:
(a)
Chemical stabilisation . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(b)
Chemical stabilising agent . . . . . . . . . . tonne (t)
The provisions of Items 35.01 and 35.02 shall apply mutatis

mutandis.
3800-6
Unit
38.14 Providing the milling

machine on the site
(size indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of milling
machines provided on the site, or the number of times a
milling machine is brought onto the site where it had to be
removed temporarily with the approval of the Engineer.
Payment for returning the machine to the site after removal
shall be made only where the removal was in accordance
with the Contractors approved programme of work and not
for any other reason. Payment will not be made for
replacing any defective plant. Additional machines will be
paid for only where their provision is in accordance with the
Contractors approved programme of work and if all the
milling machines are in use on the site simultaneously.
Item
Unit
38.15 Moving the milling

machine on the site for
a distance exceeding
1.0 km (size indicated) . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of times the
machine is moved for more than 1.0 km, as may be
approved or instructed by the Engineer, in writing.
costs involved in such moving (irrespective of whether the
machine is moved to a new section of the site or returned to
a previous position for further work), as well as for all delays
and production losses. Payment will not be made for
moving for the purpose of maintenance and repairs or for
replacement with another machine.
SERIES 4000
ASPHALT PAVEMENTS AND SEALS
4100
4200
4300
4400
4500
4600
4700
4800
4900
Prime coat
Asphalt base and surfacing
Materials and general requirements for seals
Single seals
Double seals
Single seal with slurry (Cape seal)
Sand seals
Surfacing of bridge decks
Treatment of surface defects, patching, repairing edge breaks and crack
sealing
3800-7
3800-8
SERIES 4000 :
AS P H AL T P AV E M E N T S AN D
SEALS
(iii)
have a straight and clean spraybar, all the spray
heads of which shall be of the same type which open
simultaneously and shall not leak when closed;
SECTION 4100 :
PRIME COAT
(iv)
have its spray heads all spraying at the same angle
to the spraybar and adjusted to the correct level so as to
obtain the required overlapping;
CONTENTS
4101
4102
4103
4104
4105
4106
4107
4108
4109
4110
SCOPE
MATERIALS
EQUIPMENT
WEATHER AND OTHER LIMITATIONS
PREPARATION OF THE LAYER TO BE PRIMED
APPLICATION OF THE PRIME COAT
MAINTENANCE AND OPENING TO TRAFFIC
TOLERANCES
TESTING
4101
SCOPE
(v)
have its fans not interfering with one another;
(vi)
have its sieve undamaged and clean;
(vii)
be under the direct control of an operator approved
by the Engineer on the grounds of a reference, in writing, or
a certificate of competence signed by a representative of a
Road Authority.
(b)
Water sprinkler
The water sprinkler shall have efficient spray equipment,

capable of spraying a uniform film of water over the whole
area to be primed.
This Section covers the application of a tar or bitumen prime

to a prepared pavement layer.
(c)
4102
MATERIALS
The rotary broom shall be self-propelled or supplied together

with a suitable pneumatic-tyred towing vehicle.
(a)
Priming material
The priming material shall be one of the following as may be

specified or directed by the Engineer:
(i)
(v)
MC-30 cut-back bitumen complying with AASHTO

M 140 (SABS 308);
MC-70 cut-back bitumen complying with AASHTO
M 140 (SABS 308);
RTH 3/12P tar prime complying with SABS 748 or
RTL 3/12P tar prime complying with SABS 749.
RTH 1/4P quick drying tar prime complying with
SABS 748.
Invert bitumen emulsion complying with SABS 1260.
(b)
Aggregate for blinding
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
The aggregate used for blinding the primed surface shall

consist of crushed rock or river sand, with 100% passing the
6.7 mm sieve and not more than 10% passing the 2.00 mm
sieve. The aggregate shall be clean, hard and free from
excessive dust. It shall contain no clay, loam or other
deleterious matter.
4103
EQUIPMENT
The following equipment shall be available and in good

working order:
(a)
Binder distributor
The binder distributor used for distributing the bituminous

binders shall:
(d)
Rotary broom
Other equipment
Other equipment shall include hand brooms, reinforced

paper for joints, string, nails and all other ancillary equipment
required to carry out the operation efficiently and neatly.
4104
WEATHER AND OTHER LIMITATIONS
No prime shall be applied under the following adverse

conditions;
(a)
during foggy or wet conditions;
(b)
when rain is imminent;
(c)
when wind is blowing sufficiently hard to cause
uneven spraying;
(d)
when the surface of the layer is visibly wet, ie more
than damp;
(e)
when the temperature of the surface immediately
prior to commencing with the application of the prime is
below or in the opinion of the Engineer likely to fall below
10EC;
(f)
after sundown;
(g)
when at any position the moisture content of the base
layer is more than 50% of the optimum moisture content as
determined by the Engineer.
The Engineer's decision on whether or not to apply the prime
coat under specific conditions shall be final.
(i)
be in sound working condition and shall comply with
the test described in Clause 7108;
(ii)
not have any fuel or binder leaks;

4100-1
4105
PREPARATION OF THE LAYER TO BE PRIMED
Not longer than 24 hours before spraying, the layer to be

primed shall be broomed and cleaned of all loose or
deleterious material by means of a rotary broom and hand
brooms. Sweeping shall be done carefully so as not to cause
any damage to the layer. A light spray of water, sufficient to
dampen the surface, shall be uniformly applied to the layer
immediately before the application of the prime. If the water
is over applied the layer shall be allowed to dry until a
uniform damp surface is obtained.
Before any priming material is sprayed the layer to be
primed shall be checked for compliance with the surface and
other requirements specified. Any sections not complying
with the specified requirements shall be corrected as
specified in Clause 1218.
4106
A minimum of 1.0 m of reinforced paper or other suitable

approved material shall be used at all joints at the beginning
and end of all sprays in order to obtain a neat start and cutoff.
The temperatures for storage and spraying shall be in
accordance with Table 4106/1.
Cut-back bitumens
MC-30
MC-70
Tar prime
RTH/RTL 3/12P
Tar + 10% creosote
Tar + 20% creosote
Tar + 30% creosote
Quick drying tar prime
RTH 1/4P
Invert bitumen
emulsion
Spraying
temperature
range
EC
Care shall be taken to protect all kerbing and guttering,

guard rails and channelling from the prime by covering them
with a suitable protective material when spraying. The
Contractor shall, at his own cost, replace all soiled items
which cannot be properly cleaned. Painting the soiled
surfaces will not be accepted as a suitable remedial
measure.
4107
MAINTENANCE AND OPENING TO TRAFFIC
Where a blinding layer has been applied to the primed

surface, the Contractor shall maintain the blinding layer and
the primed surface during the period when the surface is
opened to traffic, and shall repair all damage caused to the
blinding layer or the primed surface by such traffic, as
directed by the Engineer, at no additional payment to the
Contractor.
Up to
24
hrs
Over
24
hrs
65
80
30
50
45 - 60
60 - 80
60
60
60
60
40
40
40
40
54 - 68
45 - 55
40 - 50
35 - 45
The actual spray rates measured at spraying temperature

shall not deviate from the required spray rate as specified or
ordered by the Engineer by more than 0.06 R/m2.
60
40
45 - 55
The edges of the primed surface shall be true to line with a

maximum deviation of 25 mm from the specified edge line.
10 - air
temperature
All prime materials stored in a heated condition shall be

stored in a container with a properly functioning circulation
system and having a securely fitting lid.
The rate of application shall be as directed by the Engineer
after trial applications to short sections if necessary.
Wherever feasible, the prime shall be applied in one or more
lanes evenly over the full width of the road and allowed to
penetrate and cure until traffic can pass over the surface
4100-2
Where it is not feasible for traffic to use diversions, the prime

shall be applied and allowed to penetrate for as long as is
practicable before a blinding layer of aggregate is applied at
a rate of approximately 0.0035 m3/m2. Care shall be
exercised in this operation to avoid the aggregate being
applied too soon after spraying the prime.
Where
practicable two to four hours shall elapse as directed by the
Engineer. Any "caking" of aggregate which may take place
and cause problems during the surfacing process and all
loose aggregate shall be removed before the final surfacing
is commenced.
The provisions of Clause 4309 apply to the application of the

prime in areas inaccessible to mechanical equipment.
Table 4106/1
Temperatures for storing and
spraying prime
Type of prime
The total width of the primed surface shall be as shown on

the Drawings or as prescribed by the Engineer, and the
edges of the primed surface shall be parallel to the
centreline of the road.
If the prime is applied in more than one strip, allowance

shall be made for overlapping of strips by 100 mm.
APPLICATION OF THE PRIME COAT
Maximum
storage
temperature
EC
without the wheels picking up the prime. All traffic shall be

kept off the surface until this condition is obtained.
4108
4109
TOLERANCES
TESTING
The Contractor shall give the Engineer at least 24 hours

notice of his intention to spray prime material so that the
actual spray rates can be prescribed and/or verified by the
Engineer.
Unless otherwise agreed in advance the
Contractor shall only spray when the Resident Engineer or
his representative is present and the section to be sprayed
has been approved in writing.
4110
Item
Unit
41.02 Aggregate for blinding . . . . . square metre (m2)

Item
Unit
41.01 Prime coat:

(a)
RTH 3/12P or RTL 3/12P
tar prime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
(b)
Quick drying RTH 1/4P
tar prime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
(c)
MC-30 cut-back bitumen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
(d)
MC-70 cut-back bitumen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
(e)
Invert bituminous emulsion . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of prime

coat blinded with aggregate on the instructions of the
Engineer.
procuring, furnishing and applying the aggregate for blinding
where directed by the Engineer, and for maintenance of the
blinding layer, as specified.
Item
The unit of measurement shall be the litre of priming

material measured at spraying temperature and sprayed as
required.
supplying the priming material, cleaning and watering the
layer to be primed, applying the priming material and
maintaining the primed surface as specified.
Unit
41.03 Extra over Item 41.01 for applying

the prime coat in areas accessible
only to hand held equipment . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
The unit of measurement shall be a litre of priming material
(measured at spraying temperature) sprayed in accordance
with the requirements for areas accessible only to hand held
equipment.
additional costs for executing the work in areas accessible
only to hand held equipment.
4100-3
4100-4
SERIES 4000 :
SEALS
SECTION 4200 :
ASPHALT BASE AND SURFACING
CONTENTS
4201
4202
4203
4213
4214
SCOPE
MATERIALS
COMPOSITION OF ASPHALT BASE AND
SURFACING MIXTURES
PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
GENERAL LIMITATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
AND THE STOCKPILING OF MIXED MATERIAL
PRODUCING AND TRANSPORTING THE
MIXTURE
SPREADING THE MIXTURE
JOINTS
COMPACTION
LAYING TRIAL SECTIONS
CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES AND FINISH
REQUIREMENTS
TESTING
4201
SCOPE
4204
4205
4206
4207
4208
4209
4210
4211
4212
deleterious substances and shall meet the requirements of

Sections 3600 and 4300, unless otherwise provided in this
Section.
(i)
The 10% FACT of the coarse aggregate used in asphalt

base and surfacing, when determined in accordance with
TMH1 Method B2, shall not be less than 180. The wet/dry
ratio shall not be less than 75%.
(ii)
Shape of the aggregate
(1)
Base
The flakiness index when determined in accordance with

TMH1 Method B3 shall not exceed 35% for the minus
26.5 mm sieve plus 19.0 mm sieve and minus 19.0 mm plus
13.2 mm sieve fractions respectively.
In addition, at least 50% by mass of the individual fractions
retained on each of the standard sieves with a square mesh
size of 4.75 mm and larger shall have at least one fractured
face.
(2)
Surfacing
The flakiness index for surfacing asphalt shall not exceed

the values given in Table 4202/1. The grades refer to the
single-sized crushed stone grades as defined in Subclause
4302(b).
This Section covers all the work in connection with the

construction of asphalt bases and surfacing. It includes the
procuring and furnishing of aggregate and bituminous
binder, mixing at a central mixing plant, spreading and
compaction of the mixture, all as specified for the
construction of:
(a)
(b)
Resistance to crushing
Table 4202/1
Flakiness index values
Nominal size of
aggregate
(mm)
Continuously graded asphalt base;

Continuously graded asphalt surfacing;
This Section also covers the widening of asphalt bases and

surfacing, placing asphalt in restricted areas and placing
asphalt reinforcing where specified.
19.0
13.2
9.5
6.7
Maximum flakiness index %

Surfacing aggregate
Grade 1
Grade 2
25
25
30
30
30
30
35
35
This Section also covers the recycling of asphalt by

reprocessing recovered materials, adding fresh aggregate,
bituminous binders and other agents for obtaining an
asphalt mix which will comply with the specified
requirements, and placing the recycled material. The
provisions of Section 4200 shall apply throughout to
recycled asphalt, except where explicitly specified otherwise.
In addition, at least 95% of all particles shall have at least

three fractured faces.
4202
MATERIALS
(a)
Bituminous binders
The Polished Stone Value (PSV) of aggregate used in

continuously graded asphalt surfacing, when determined in
accordance with SABS Method 848 or equivalent, shall not
be less than 50.
(i)
Conventional binders
The various bituminous binders specified shall comply with

the relevant SABS Specifications stated below:
Road-grade bitumens . . . . . . . . SABS 307 or equivalent
Bitumen emulsions . . . SABS 309 (anionic) or equivalent
SABS 548 (cationic) or equivalent
(b)
Aggregates
(iii)
Polishing
Aggregates with polishing values below those stated above

may be approved for use by the Engineer.
(iv)
Adhesion
(1)
Asphalt
When tested in accordance with TMH1 Method C5, the

immersion index of a mixture of the binder and aggregate
proposed for use shall not be less than 75%. The aggregate
used for the test mixture shall have a grading within the
actual limits for the mix concerned.
Coarse and fine aggregate shall be clean and free from

decomposed materials, vegetable matter and other
4200-1
(2)
Seals
and active mineral filler to be used for tender purposes, shall

be as specified in the Project Specifications.
The Reidel and Weber test (TMH1 Method B11) on the

aggregate must >1.0. Precoating of the aggregate will be
required if values of <1.0 are recorded.
(v)
Table 4202/3
Grading limits for combined aggregate and mix
proportions for asphalt surfacing
Absorption
When tested in accordance with TMH1 Methods B14 and

B15, the water absorption of the coarse aggregate shall not
exceed 1% by mass, and that of the fine aggregate shall not
exceed 1.5% by mass, unless otherwise permitted.
(vi)
Sieve Size
(mm)
26.5
19.0
13.2
9.5
4.75
2.36
1.18
0.600
0.300
0.150
0.075
Sand equivalent
The total fine aggregate used in all asphalt mixes shall have
a sand equivalent of at least 35, when tested in accordance
with TMH1 Method B19, and the sand to be mixed with the
aggregate shall have a sand equivalent of at least 30.
(vii)
Design requirements
The Contractor shall, by conducting the necessary tests,

satisfy himself that he will be able to produce a mixture
meeting the design requirements specified hereinafter, using
the aggregate he proposes to supply, within the grading
limits specified.
(viii)
Grading
Aggregate
Bitumen*
Active Filler
Continuously
Graded
Coarse
Medium
Fine
100
85 - 100
71 - 84
62 - 76
42 - 60
30 - 48
22 - 38
16 - 28
12 - 20
8 - 15
4 - 10
100
82 - 100
54 - 75
35 - 50
27 - 42
18 - 32
11 - 23
7 - 16
4 - 10
100
64 - 88
45 - 60
35 - 54
24 - 40
16 - 28
10 - 20
4 - 12
93.5%
5.5%
1.0%
93.5%
5.5%
1.0%
93.0%
6.0%
1.0%
* Grade according to Project Specifications
The grading of the combined aggregate including any filler

added in an approved working mix as described in
Subclause 4202(c) shall be within the limits stated in Tables
4202/2 and 4202/3 for the various mixes. The approved
grading shall be designated as the target grading. The
mean grading of each lot of the working mix (minimum of 6
tests per lot) determined from samples obtained in a
stratified random sampling procedure, shall conform to the
approved target grading within the tolerances specified in
Subclause 4212(b).
Table 4202/2
Grading limits for combined aggregate and mix
proportions for asphalt base
Note: For recycled asphalt the nominal mix ratios of

recovered asphalt, new aggregate, new bituminous binders,
and active mineral filler to be used for tender purposes, shall
be as specified in the Project Specifications.
The target grading requirements for crushed-stone base as
specified under Subclause 3602(e) shall apply to all
continuously graded asphalt bases. In addition, and for
tender purposes and preliminary mix design, the target
grading for 37.5 mm maximum aggregate size asphalt base
shall be within the range derived from the formula:
P = (100 - F)(dn - 0.075n)/(Dn - 0.075n) + F
where:
Sieve Size
(mm)
37.5
26.5
19.0
13.2
9.5
6.7
4.75
2.36
1.18
0.600
0.300
0.150
0.075
Aggregate
Bitumen*
Active filler**
Continuously Graded
37.5 mm Max
26.5 mm Max
100
84 - 94
71 - 84
59 - 75
36 - 53
25 - 42
18 - 33
9 - 21
6 - 17
4 - 12
100
85 - 95
71 - 84
42 - 60
30 - 47
21 - 37
15 - 30
11 - 24
8 - 19
5 - 12
95%
4%
1.0%
94,5%
4.5%
1.0%
* Grade according to Project Specifications

** Active filler for tender purposes to be hydrated lime.
Note: For recycled asphalt the nominal mix ratios of
recovered asphalt, new aggregate, new bituminous binders,
4200-2
P=
d=
n=
D=
F=
percentage passing a particular sieve, %

sieve size, mm
exponent which determines the shape of the
grading curve
maximum aggregate size, mm
filler content, %
using values of F = 7% with n = 0.45 and F = 8% with n =

0.4 (1% being active filler).
The approved target grading shall be determined after laying
a trial section on site.
Where mixes with coarser and/or other grading
compositions are required for asphalt bases, it will be
specified in the Project Specifications.
(ix)
Additional requirements for asphalt bases
Crushed stone materials shall be used for 37.5 mm and

26.5 mm maximum aggregate size asphalt bases and may
be produced by the crushing of stone from approved borrow
pits, loose rock and/or coarse gravel, as directed by the
Engineer.
If approved by the Engineer and if the specified

requirements are met, it may contain natural fines not
obtained from the parent rock being crushed, on condition
that such added material does not exceed 10% by mass,
unless otherwise specified in the Project Specifications.
The added fines shall have a liquid limit not more than 25%
(see Clause 7102) and a PI not more than 6% and be free
of any unsound material. The Contractor shall submit full
details regarding the exact quantity and nature of such fine
aggregate, before such permission will be considered. In
the event of such added material being natural sand, its
impact on dynamic creep properties should be assessed
from laboratory briquettes and cores obtained in a trial
section planned well ahead of any production runs.
(e)
Asphalt for recycling
(i)
Recovered asphalt
The Contractor shall make provision for separate cold feed

bins.
Asphalt milled out shall be of a maximum size of 26.5 mm,

unless another maximum size has been approved by the
Engineer.
(c)
Asphalt not milled out shall be broken down in an approved

manner so that it can be properly remixed in a plant to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. Mixes of recycled asphalt
containing fragments of recovered asphalt exceeding
26.5 mm in size, will not be accepted.
Fillers
If the grading of the combined aggregates for asphalt

surfacing mixes show a deficiency in fines, an approved filler
may be used to improve the grading. Filler may consist of
active filler as defined hereinafter or of inert material such as
rock dust having the required grading necessary to improve
the grading of the combined aggregates. In no instance
shall more than 2% by mass of active filler be used in
asphalt mixes. Inert filler such as rock dust used to improve
grading shall not be subject to this limitation.
The Engineer may order the use of any active filler to
improve the adhesion properties of the aggregate. Active
filler shall consist of milled blast furnace slag, hydrated lime,
ordinary Portland cement, Portland blast furnace cement,
fly-ash, or a mixture of any of the above materials. Individual
materials shall comply with the requirements of the relevant
Specifications for such material. Active filler shall have at
least 70% by mass passing the 0.075 mm sieve and a bulk
density in toluene falling between 0.5 and 0.9 g/mR. The
voids in dry compacted filler shall be between 0.3% and
0.5%, when tested in accordance with British Standard
BS812.
Active fillers for use in asphalt bases shall be introduced to
the mix prior to wetting with the binder.
Only active filler added on the instructions of the Engineer,
for the purpose of improving adhesion, will be paid for. No
payment will be made for filler added to improve the grading.
(d)
Asphalt reinforcing
Asphalt reinforcing shall be of the type specified in the

Project Specifications and shall be obtained from an
approved manufacturer.
Where the use of reinforcing for asphalt has been specified,
the Contractor shall, at least three months before the
material is to be used, submit samples of the type he
intends to use, together with complete specifications of the
material, as well as the manufacturer's instructions for use,
to the Engineer for approval. Where the material does not
carry the mark of an acknowledged standards authority, the
Engineer may instruct the Contractor to have the material
tested by an approved laboratory and to submit the results.
The Engineer will test the existing asphalt in any part of the
road and determine its suitability for recycling before
removal. He may instruct the Contractor to drill additional
cores at specified points. Recovered asphalt intended for
recycling shall be stored separately from other asphalt, and
the Engineer may also direct different types of asphalt to be
stored separately.
The recovered asphalt shall be free from any underlying
base material and other foreign matter.
Payment for recovered asphalt will distinguish between

milled out and non-milled out material.
Samples shall be taken from the recovered asphalt intended
for recycled mixes in the stockpile and shall be tested for
grading and quality of the aggregate, binder content, and
properties of the binder.
(ii)
Bituminous binders
The provisions of Subclause 4202(a) shall apply.

The grade of new binder used in the recycled asphalt mix
shall be such that the mix of new and residual binder will
comply with the requirements of the Project Specifications.
Recycling agents such as blended oils and other additives
may not be used without prior approval by the Engineer.
(iii)
New aggregate
New aggregate required for use in recycled asphalt mixtures

shall comply with the requirements of Subclause 4202(b).
(iv)
Combined aggregate
The aggregate mix obtained from new aggregate and the

aggregate in the recovered asphalt, including any mineral
filler, an approved quantity of which may be added in
accordance with Subclause 4202(c), shall comply with the
requirements specified in the Project Specifications for the
relevant recycled asphalt layer.
(v)
Stockpiling material for recycling
The provisions of Clause 3806 shall apply.
(f)
Hot in-situ surface recycling
With regard to new binder, recycling additives, new asphalt,

new aggregate or combinations of these materials, hot insitu surface recycling shall comply with the requirements in
4200-3
(g)
Table 4203/1
Requirements for asphalt mixes
General
All materials shall be handled and stockpiled in a manner

that will prevent contamination, segregation or damage.
Cement and lime shall be used in the order in which it has
been received.
The Contractor shall, as often as necessary, test and control
the materials produced by himself or the materials received
by him from suppliers to ensure that the materials always
comply with the specified requirements.
The Contractor will not be expected to construct layers of
which the compacted layer thickness is less than one and a
half times the maximum aggregate size.
4203
COMPOSITION OF ASPHALT
SURFACING MIXTURES
BASE
AND
The rates of application and mix proportions of bituminous

binder, aggregates and fillers which are given in Tables
4202/2 and 4202/3, are nominal rates and proportions and
shall only be used for tendering purposes. The rates and
proportions actually used shall be determined to suit the
materials used and conditions prevailing during construction
and any approved variation on a nominal mix in the bitumen
content or active filler content shall be the subject of an
adjustment in payment for binder or active filler variations as
described in Clause 4214.
Before production or delivery of the asphalt the Contractor
shall submit samples of the materials he proposes to use in
the mix, together with his proposed mix design as
determined by an approved laboratory, to the Engineer in
accordance with Table 7104/1, so that the Engineer may
test the materials and confirm the use of the proposed mix
if he is satisfied that it meets the specified requirements.
As soon as the materials become available the Contractor
shall produce a working mix in the plant in accordance with
the design mix. The working mix shall again be tested by
him for compliance with the design requirements. Samples
of the working mix shall also be made available to the
Engineer, who will authorise the use of the working mix
proportions finally approved for use. The composition of the
approved working mix shall be maintained within the
tolerances given in Table 4212/2.
The nominal mix proportions (by mass) of the various
asphalt mixes are set out in Tables 4202/2 and 4202/3.
The design of the asphalt mixes shall be in accordance with
the relevant design guidelines and the mix properties and
requirements shall be as specified in the Project
Specifications. The asphalt mixes shall also comply with the
requirements in Table 4203/1 unless otherwise stated in the
4204
PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
(a)
General
All plant shall be so designed and operated to produce a

mixture complying with the requirements of this
Specification. The plant and equipment used shall be of
adequate rated capacity, in good working order and subject
to the approval of the Engineer. Obsolete or worn-out plant
will not be allowed on site.
4200-4
Property
Requirements
Base
(37.5 mm
aggregate)
Continuouslygraded wearing
courses
Marshall stability (kN)

Marshall flow (mm)
Voids in mix (%)
Stability/flow (kN/mm)
Filler/bitumen ratio
Film thickness (mm)
6 - 12
2-4
3-6
2.5 min
-
3.5 - 12.5
2-4
3-6
2 - 3.5
1.0 - 1.5
6 min
Cores from trial

sections and road
during construction
10 min
10 min
Prior to the start of the work the Contractor shall supply the
Engineer with copies of the manufacturer's handbooks and
copies of check lists prepared in terms of ISO 9002 where
applicable pertaining to the mixing, remixing and paving
plants, containing details of the correct settings and
adjustments of the plant.
Any alteration which has been or is being effected to any
constructional plant, and which does not comply with the
specifications of the manufacturer, shall be brought to the
notice of the Engineer.
(b)
Mixing plant
(i)
Asphalt shall be mixed by means of an approved type mixer

of proven suitability for producing a mixture complying with
all the requirements of the Specifications.
The mixing plant may be either automatically or manually
controlled but in the latter case, two control operators shall
be provided.
The heating system of the tanks storing the binder shall be
so designed that the binder will not be degraded during
heating. A circulating system for the binder shall be provided
which shall be of adequate size to ensure the proper and
continuous circulation between storage tanks and mixer
during the entire operating period.
Binder storage tanks shall be fitted with thermometers
designed to provide a continuous record of the temperature
of the binder in the tank. Copies of these records shall be
supplied to the Engineer on a daily basis.
Satisfactory means shall be provided to obtain the proper
amount of binder in the mix within the tolerances specified,
either by weighing or volumetric measurements. Suitable
means shall be provided for maintaining the specified
temperatures of the binder in the pipelines, weigh buckets,
spray bars and other containers or flowlines.
In the case of a drum type mixer, the system shall control
the cold feeding of each aggregate fraction and of the filler
by mass, by means of a load cell or another device
regulating the feed automatically, and by immediately
correcting any variation in mass which results from moisture
or from any other cause. The cold feed shall be regulated
automatically in regard to the binder feed so as to maintain
the required mix proportion.
Suitable dust collecting equipment shall be fitted to prevent

pollution of the atmosphere in accordance with the
provisions of any local Act governing pollution.
The fuel chosen and control of the burner shall be such as
to ensure the complete combustion of the fuel in order to
prevent pollution of the atmosphere and the aggregate.
(iv)
Recycling
In addition to the requirements set out in Subclause 4204(b)

the mixing equipment shall be specially adapted to deal with
recycling and any such adjustments shall be in accordance
with the instructions of the manufacturer of the mixing plant.
The recovered asphalt portion of the mix shall not be
exposed directly to the heating source whilst the feeding rate
and proportioning shall be accurately controlled. Before
work is commenced, the Contractor shall submit full details
of his mixing equipment to the Engineer for his approval.
(f)
The asphalt shall be transported from the mixing plant to the

spreader in trucks having tight, clean, smooth beds and
sides which have been treated to prevent adhesion of the
mixture to the truck bodies. A thin film of soapy water or
vegetable oil may be used to prevent adhesion but
petroleum products shall not be used for this purpose.
All vehicles used for transporting hot asphalt shall be fitted
with canvas (transport in excess of 10 km or cold windy
conditions prevailing) or other suitable approved covers
(less than 10 km and moderate climatic conditions
prevailing) to minimise temperature loss. Such covers shall
be securely fixed over the hot asphalt from time of departure
at the mixing plant until immediately prior to discharge of the
asphalt into the paver.
(g)
(c)
Spreading equipment
(i)
Paver
The mixture shall be laid by an approved type of

selfpropelled mechanical spreader and finisher capable of
laying to the required widths, thicknesses, profile, camber or
cross-fall, without causing segregation, dragging or other
surface defects.
Vehicles
Mass-measuring device for asphalt mixes
Where payment per tonne is specified, the Contractor shall

keep available at the mixing plant or on the site a suitable
gauged mass-measuring device for measuring the asphalt
mixes. The device shall be provided with a printer for
printing the type of mix, the mass, the time and the date.
The printed data shall be submitted to the Engineer.
(h)
Plant and equipment for recycled asphalt
All pavers shall be fitted with automatic electronic screed

controls to maintain the required levels, cambers and crossfalls. Where skids are used they shall be at least 9 m long
or as specified by the Engineer.
Plant and equipment for producing, hauling and placing the

recycled asphalt shall comply with the provisions of
Subclauses 4204(a) to 4204(g), as applicable, and subject
to the following additional requirements:
Where levelling beams on multiple skids or sliding beams

are used they shall be at least 9 m long.
The mixing equipment shall be capable of producing asphalt

mixes with or without recovered material. Where necessary,
the mixing equipment shall be specially adapted to deal with
recycling, and any such adjustments shall be made in
accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer. The
equipment, with any necessary adjustments, shall be so
designed, equipped and used that the measuring, heating
and mixing of the material will give a uniform asphalt mix
which complies with all the specified requirements in regard
to temperatures within the limits necessary for properly
placing and compacting the asphalt in accordance with the
specified requirements. Before work is commenced, the
Contractor shall submit full particulars of his mixing
equipment to the Engineer.
(d)
Rollers
(i)
Compaction shall be done by means of approved flat

steelwheel, vibratory or pneumatic-tyred rollers. The
frequency as well as the amplitude of vibratory rollers shall
be adjustable. Vibratory rollers shall be used only where
there is no danger of damage being done to the asphalt,
structures of bridge decks, or other layers. It will be
indicated in the Project Specifications whether vibratory
compaction equipment may be used on bridge decks and
what the constraining parameters will be. The rollers shall
be self-propelled and in good working condition, free from
back lash, faulty steering mechanism and worn parts.
Rollers shall be equipped with adjustable scrapers to keep
the drums clean and with efficient means of keeping the
wheels wet to prevent mixes from sticking to the rollers.
No leakages of any nature may occur in the rollers.
The mass and/or tyre pressures shall be such so as to
ensure proper compaction to comply with the specifications
of surface finish and density.
4205

AND THE STOCKPILING OF MIXED MATERIAL
(a)
Weather conditions
Asphalt may be mixed and placed only under favourable

weather conditions, and shall not be mixed or placed when
rain is imminent or during misty or wet conditions.
The following wind and temperature conditions are regarded
as being suitable for paving work:
(i)
While the air temperature is rising, work may be
performed at temperatures of:
(e)
Binder distributors
Where bituminous binders are to be sprayed onto areas

before laying the asphalt is done, the binder distributors
shall comply with Clause 4103.
(1)
6EC with an allowable wind velocity of less than
25 km/h
(2)
10EC with an allowable wind velocity of less than
55 km/h, or for asphalt with a compacted thickness of less
4200-5
than 30 mm with an allowable wind velocity of less than

25 km/h.
(ii)
With falling air temperatures, work must be stopped
when the temperature reaches 6EC regardless of the wind
velocity and may not be restarted before the temperature is
definitely rising.
(b)
Moisture content
The mixing and placing of asphalt will not be allowed if the

moisture content of the aggregate affects the uniformity of
temperature or if free water is present on the working
surface, or when the moisture content of the underlying
layer, in the opinion of the Engineer, is too high.
No surfacing shall be placed unless the moisture content of
the upper 50 mm of the base is less than 50% of the
optimum moisture content as determined by the Engineer.
No overlay shall be placed immediately after a rainy spell on
an existing partly cracked and/or highly permeable surfacing
resulting in the trapping of moisture in the pavement
structure. A minimum delay of 24 hours or such extended
period as ordered by the Engineer shall apply.
(c)
Surface requirements
(i)
Correction of base or subbase in the case of asphalt

base
The base (after the prime coat has been applied) or the
subbase, as the case may be, shall be checked for
smoothness and accuracy of grade, elevation and cross
section. Any portion of the base or subbase, as the case
may be, not complying with the specified requirements, shall
be corrected with asphalt at the Contractor's own expense,
until the specified requirements are met. The Engineer may,
however, in his sole discretion, allow minor surface
irregularities to remain, provided they can be taken up in the
following asphalt layer without adversely affecting that layer.
The asphalt used for the correction of the base or subbase,
shall be the same mixture as specified for the surfacing or
as directed by the Engineer, and the maximum size of
aggregate used shall be dictated by the required thickness
of the correction in each case.
Notwithstanding these provisions for the correction of the
base or subbase, the Engineer reserves the right to order
the removal and reconstruction of the layer or of portions of
the base and subbase layers not complying with the
specified requirements, instead of allowing the correction of
substandard work with asphalt material.
(ii)
Where the prime coat (if any) has been damaged, it shall be
repaired by handbrushing or spraying priming material over
the damaged portions.
The prime coat shall be sufficiently dry before the tack coat
and/or the asphalt may be applied. The Contractor's
programme shall allow for delays that are a function of the
type of prime, rate of application, base porosity and
moisture content, and climatic conditions.
Tack coat
Where required in these Specifications or the Project

Specifications, or where indicated by the Engineer, a tack
coat shall be applied to the surface to be paved.
The tack coat shall consist of a stable-grade bituminous
emulsion diluted to have a 30% bitumen content and shall
be applied at a rate of 0.55 R/m2 or as directed by the
Engineer.
The use of hand operated equipment for the application of
tack costs shall be at the sole discretion of the Engineer and
his approval shall be timeously obtained.
Portions of kerbing and guttering, bridge kerb and railing
which will be exposed, shall be protected in terms of Section
2300 when the tack coat is applied.
The tack coat shall not be applied more than 24 hours
before the paving is done.
(iv)
Preparation for placing the overlays
The provisions of Section 4900 shall apply to any surface to

be covered with overlays. The type of treatment to be
applied, if any, will be specified in the Project Specifications
or instructed in writing by the Engineer.
(v)
Preparation where asphalt layers are to be widened
or where surfacing over a section of the road width requires
replacement
The existing asphalt shall be removed as described in
Section 3800, where applicable, or as instructed by the
Engineer.
Where a road has to be widened, the overlay shall be cut
back not less than 100 mm from the existing edge. Unless
otherwise indicated on the Drawings or instructed by the
Engineer, asphalt joints may not fall within a wheel track.
(d)
Storage
Mixing shall not be allowed to take place more than four

hours before paving begins unless provision has been made
for storage. Storage of mixed material will only be permitted
in approved hoppers, which are capable of maintaining the
temperature of the mix uniform throughout. In any case
storage will not be permitted for a period longer than 12
hours after mixing, unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
4206
PRODUCING
MIXTURE
(a)
Mixing and storage temperatures of binder
Cleaning of the surface
Immediately before applying the tack coat, or where there is

no tack coat, before the application of the asphalt, the
surface shall be broomed and cleaned of all loose or
deleterious material.
4200-6
(iii)
AND
TRANSPORTING
THE
Bituminous binders shall be stored at temperatures not

exceeding those given in Table 4206/1 or as specified in the
Project Specifications, and the aggregate and bituminous
binders shall be heated at the mixing plant to such
temperatures that the mixed product shall have a
temperature within the range given in Table 4206/1.
Table 4206/1
Temperature ranges for bitumen binders
Material
Bitumens
40/50 pen.
60/70 pen.
80/100 pen.
150/200 pen.
Max storage
temp of
binder
EC
Temp range
of mix
EC
(d)
Over
24 hrs
Under
24 hrs
Cont
graded
mixes
145
135
125
115
175
175
175
165
140-165
135-160
130-155
125-150
(b)
Production of the mixture
(i)
Using batch plants
(1)
Heating the aggregate
The aggregate shall be dried and heated so that, when

delivered to the mixer, its temperature shall be between 0EC
and 20EC lower than the maximum temperature indicated in
Table 4206/1 for the mixture. The moisture content of the
mix shall not exceed 0.5%.
(2)
Batching
Each fraction of the aggregate and binder shall be

measured separately and accurately in the proportions by
mass in which they are to be mixed. If filler is used, it shall
be measured separately on a scale of suitable capacity and
sensitivity. The error in the weighing apparatus used shall
not exceed 2% for each batch.
(3)
Mixing
The aggregate, filler and binder shall be mixed until a

homogeneous mixture is obtained in which all particles are
uniformly coated. Care shall be taken to avoid excessively
long mixing times which can cause hardening of the binder.
(ii)
Using drum-type mixer plants
The aggregate and filler shall be accurately proportioned

and conveyed into the drum-mixing unit. The calibrated
amount of binder shall be sprayed onto the aggregates at
the correct position so that no hardening of the binder shall
take place. A homogeneous mixture and uniform coating of
binder must be achieved and the moisture content of the
asphalt mixture shall not exceed 0.5%. Once the final mix
temperature has been agreed upon it may not be altered
without the prior consent of the Engineer.
The moisture content of the asphalt mixture shall be tested
according to Method C11 of TMH1 or equivalent.
(c)
run, can be completed during daylight, unless artificial

lighting, as approved by the Engineer, is provided. Any
asphalt which has become wet due to rain or any other
cause will be rejected. Hauling over freshly laid material is
not permitted.
Transporting the mixture
The mixture shall be transported from the mixing plant to the

Works in trucks complying with the requirements of
Subclause 4204(f). Loads shall be covered by waterproof
canvas or metal sheets when the haul exceeds 10 km or
during rainy weather. Deliveries shall be made so that
spreading and rolling of all the mixtures prepared for a days
Small quantities of asphalt
A small quantity of asphalt shall be a quantity of less than

10 tonnes of a specified composition to be specially
produced on occasion. For a small quantity of asphalt of
less than 10 tonnes extra payment will be made if its use
has been instructed by the Engineer, in writing, and where,
in the opinion of the Engineer it is necessary:
(i)
in accordance with the approved working programme
of the Contractor, and/or
(ii)
for the safety of the work or the travelling public on
account of weather conditions or abnormal traffic conditions.
No extra payment will be made where small quantities of
asphalt are required in consequence of the negligence of the
Contractor, or of poor work or bad planning done by the
Contractor, or because he did not execute the Works in
accordance with his approved programme.
(e)
Recycled asphalt
The provisions of Subclauses 4206(a) to 4206(d) shall apply

mutatis mutandis.
At least four weeks before paving with recycled material will
commence, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer full
particulars regarding the recycling methods he intends to
use.
Where recovered asphalt material is taken from a stockpile,
it shall be done by excavating from the pile over its full
depth. Where segregated material is fed into the mixing
plant, the Engineer will have the right to order the work to
cease and to instruct the Contractor to remix the stockpile,
retest the mixed material and redesign the asphalt mixture
all at his own cost.
4207
SPREADING THE MIXTURE
(a)
General
The mixture shall be delivered to the paver in such a manner

that the paver will never be forced to stop for lack of asphalt.
The temperature of the mixture shall be controlled by
measuring in a random pattern in the truck immediately
before emptying, and shall not be more than 10EC below the
minimum temperature specified for mixing in Table 4206/1.
The adjustment of the screed tamping bars, feed screws,
hopper feed, etc, shall be checked frequently to ensure
uniform spreading of the mix. If segregation occurs, the
spreading operations shall immediately be suspended until
the cause is determined and corrected.
The addition and removal of material behind the paver shall
normally not be allowed and the paver shall be capable of
spreading the mixture to the correct amounts that will
provide the required compacted thickness without resorting
to spotting, picking-up or otherwise shifting or disturbing the
mixture.
Operators shall not be permitted to walk on uncompacted
asphalt.
4200-7
Paving shall, if possible, commence at the bottom of the

grades and the lower edges of superelevated curves. Paving
shall be done upgrade on grades steeper than 5%.
to be placed. All loose and incompletely compacted

material shall be removed. A cutting wheel shall be used for
cutting longitudinal joints.
Spreading shall be so arranged that longitudinal joints do

not coincide with joints in lower layers of asphalt base or
surfacing.
Joints shall be either at right angles or parallel to the centre

line, and joints in the final layer of the surfacing shall, where
possible, correspond with the lane markings. Joints in lower
layers shall be offset not less than 150 mm on either side of
the edges of the traffic lanes.
Unless otherwise specified in the Project Specifications the

paver shall be equipped to provide automatic control of
levels and cross section. In the case of asphalt base
construction, automatic control shall be run off guidewires
and in the case of surfacing and overlays skids or
guidewires shall be used.
On restricted areas, inaccessible to the paving equipment
used, the mixture may be placed by hand or other means to
obtain the specified results. Paving shall be carried out in a
manner which will avoid segregation and which will allow
control of levels.
The mixer capacity and the operating speed of the paver are
to be so co-ordinated as to ensure continuous laying and to
avoid intermittent stopping of the paver.
Paving shall cease when rain starts falling or when the
surfaces to be paved are visibly wet.
(b)
Overlays
In the case of overlays, guide wires will normally not be

required during the placing of the mix unless specified in the
Project Specifications. In all cases, including levelling
courses, the paver shall be provided with skid beams with
electronically controlled equipment which can ensure a
constant crossfall and can even out local irregularities.
Before a new layer is placed next to an existing layer, the

cut edge of the existing layer shall be painted with a thin
coat of bituminous emulsion of the same type used for the
tack coat, if so directed by the Engineer, or the paver must
be fitted with a gas burner to heat the cut edge of the
existing layer.
Joints shall be neat and shall have the same texture and
density as the remainder of the asphalt course. All joints
shall be marked out with chalk lines prior to cutting.
The outside edges of the completed asphalt course shall be
trimmed along the shoulder, and parallel to the centre line,
to give a finished width, as shown on the Drawings, within
the tolerances specified.
Any fresh mixture spread accidentally onto existing work at
a joint shall be carefully removed by brooming it back with
stiff brooms onto the uncompacted work, so as to avoid the
formation of irregularities at the joint. Whenever the paving
operation is stopped due to lack of mixture, the Contractor
shall form a proper joint as specified above, if so directed by
the Engineer.
The requirements of Clause 4208 shall apply mutatis
mutandis to joints in recycled asphalt layers.
4209
(c)
Asphalt shall be placed in restricted areas with the aid of

smaller specially equipped pavers, hand tools, or other
approved equipment. The space concerned shall be
properly filled with asphalt, without leaving any gaps
between the fresh asphalt and the existing pavement layers.
All the provisions in regard to temperature, mix composition,
uniformity, etc, shall remain applicable, but layer thickness
and control shall be such that the requirements for
compaction and surface tolerances can still be attained.
(d)
Recycled asphalt
The provisions of Subclauses 4207(a) to 4207(c) shall apply

mutatis mutandis to recycled asphalt.
Where the average thickness of a completed asphalt layer
exceeds the specified thickness, and/or recovered asphalt
has been wasted indiscriminately, and, if in the opinion of
the Engineer it has resulted in a deficiency of recovered
material, the Contractor shall supplement such deficiency at
his own cost with a quantity of similar or better material
equal to the quantity wasted, as determined by the
Engineer.
4208
JOINTS
All joints between adjacent sections of the work shall be

made by cutting back the layer against which the material is
4200-8
COMPACTION
Asphalt
The mix shall be rolled as soon as possible after it has been
laid by vibratory, steelwheel and pneumatic-tyred rollers in
a sequence predetermined and approved during the laying
of trial sections. Such rolling shall commence and be
continued only for so long as it is effective and does not
have any detrimental effect. The use of pneumatic-tyred
rollers for continuously-graded non-homogeneous modified
binders shall be assessed in the trial section.
As many rollers shall be used as is necessary to provide the
specified pavement density and the required surface texture.
During rolling of surfacing only, the roller wheels shall be
kept moist with only sufficient water to avoid picking up the
material.
After longitudinal joints and edges have been compacted,
rolling shall start longitudinally at the sides and gradually
progress towards the centre of the pavement, except on
superelevated curves, or where the area to be paved has a
straight cross-fall, when rolling shall begin on the low side
and progress to the higher side, uniformly lapping each
preceding track, covering the entire surface. During
breakdown rolling, the rollers shall move at a slow but
uniform speed (not to exceed 5 km/h) with the drive roller
nearest the paver, unless otherwise specified on account of
steep gradients.
No movement of the asphalt layer shall occur under steelwheel rollers once the asphalt temperature has dropped to
below 100EC. Three-wheeled steel rollers, with large
diameter rear wheels are preferable to tandem rollers and
may be used in conjunction with pneumatic tyred rollers,
provided pick-up of the asphalt on the wheels does not

occur.
For non-homogeneous binder mixes it is recommended that
a commercial detergent at a concentration of 1 to 3 000, be
added to the water used to wet the tyres of pneumatic tyred
rollers, to limit pick up.
The sequence of rollers used in compaction is at the
discretion of the Contractor provided the completed
pavement shall have a density as measured on recovered
core equal to or greater than 97%, minus the percentage
voids in the approved production mix, of the theoretical
maximum density, determined as described in TMH1
Method C4 or equivalent.
For thin layer asphalt (less than 20 mm) the compaction
requirements shall be specified in the Project Specifications.
The Contractor shall utilise a calibrated nuclear gauge for
process control during compaction operations.
Notwithstanding this requirement, the acceptance control
carried out for compaction by the Engineer, shall still be
based on cores taken from the compacted layer.
The nuclear device shall:
(a)
(b)
The Engineer may require that up to three different binder

contents be incorporated in one such trial section to verify
the laboratory design phase.
The specified requirements shall include dynamic test
results obtained from briquettes prepared from material
obtained in a stratified randomly sampled manner at the
manufacturing plant or behind the paver as directed by the
Engineer and/or cores extracted from the completed trial
section and in locations determined in a stratified randomly
sampled manner.
A maximum period of 10 days shall be allowed to verify
dynamic test results unless otherwise specified in the
Only when such a trial section has been satisfactorily laid
and finished, and complies with the specified requirements,
will the Contractor be allowed to commence with
construction of the permanent work.
If the Contractor should make any alterations in the
methods, processes, equipment or materials used, or if he
is unable to comply consistently with the Specifications, the
Engineer may require that further trial sections be laid
before allowing the Contractor to continue with the
permanent work.
Be operated by a suitably trained technician.

Comply with all the safety regulations of the
Regulatory Authority (Radiation Control).
Be certified to be suitably calibrated.
The intention of this Clause is to avoid any experimentation

by the Contractor on the permanent work.
The portion of trial section having the desired surface

texture shall be designated as a reference for what is
required in the permanent work.
The trial sections shall be laid where indicated by the

Engineer. The Contractor shall prepare the surface on which
to lay the trial section and shall also, if required, remove the
trial section after completion and restore the surfaces on
which it was constructed.
(c)
The following requirements shall apply to rolling and

compacting generally:
(b)
No cracks or hair cracks shall be formed and the
bond with the underlying layer shall not be broken.
Provision is made for payment of the first trial section of any

particular mix type, but subsequent trial sections with the
same mix shall be at the Contractor's own cost. Payment
will be made for 300 m2 of each trial section and should the
Contractor fail to produce a satisfactory product for at least
a continuous 100 m2 he shall lay additional areas, at his own
cost and no additional payment, until a satisfactory product
is obtained for a continuous 100 m2.
(c)
The density shall be uniform over the whole area of
the layer and extend over the full depth of the layer.
4211
(a)
The material shall not be excessively displaced in a
longitudinal or transverse direction especially when
changing gears, stopping or starting rollers.
(d)
Rollers shall not be left standing on the asphalt layer
before it has been fully compacted.
(e)
In restricted areas where the specified rollers cannot
be used, compaction shall be carried out with hand-operated
mechanical compaction equipment or approved smaller
vibratory rollers. The prescribed density requirements
remain applicable throughout, over the full layer thickness,
irrespective of the method of compaction.
The Contractor shall protect the asphalt base and asphalt

surfacing from all damage until the work is finally accepted
by the Employer and he shall maintain the surfacing work
until the issue of the maintenance certificate. Any damage
occurring to the completed base or surfacing, excepting fair
wear and tear on surfacing during the maintenance period,
or any defects which may develop due to faulty
workmanship, shall be made good by the Contractor at his
own expense and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The provisions of Clause 4209 shall apply mutatis mutandis

to recycled asphalt.
4210
4212
CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES AND FINISH

REQUIREMENTS
(a)
Construction tolerances (The application to

overlays is specified in Subclause 4212(d))
LAYING TRIAL SECTIONS
Before the Contractor commences with the construction of

any asphalt base or surfacing, he shall demonstrate, by
laying a trial section 300 m2 in area, that the equipment and
processes that he proposes to use, will enable him to
construct the particular asphalt course in accordance with
the specified requirements.
The completed sections of asphalt base and surfacing shall

comply with the requirements for grade, width, thickness,
cross section and smoothness stated below.
4200-9
(i)
Level and grade
(2)
Number of irregularities equal to or exceeding the
specified value when taken over 100 m sections:

follows:
H90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 mm
Hmax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 mm
Deviation from the specified longitudinal grade due to
deviations from the specified levels shall not exceed the
values given in Table 4212/1.
Table 4212/1
Deviations from specified longitudinal grade
Length of section under
review (m)
Maximum deviation (g) of

specified slope (%)
2
5
10
20
30
0.354
0.224
0.158
0.112
0.091
Freeways (4 mm irregularities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Other roads (6 mm irregularities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
(3)
The maximum value of any individual irregularity
when measured with the rolling straight-edge or a 3 m
straight-edge laid parallel to the road centre line:
Freeways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 mm
Other roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 mm
(vi)
Where the base is constructed from more than one layer,

the requirements specified shall apply to the combined
layers in respect of width and thickness. The requirements
for cross section, smoothness and grade shall apply to the
final layer only, but the lower layers shall be constructed so
as to ensure that these requirements in the final layer can
be met.
(b)
(ii)
Width
The average width of both asphalt base and surfacing shall

be at least equal to that shown on the Drawings and
nowhere shall the outer edge of the layer be inside the lines
shown on the Drawings by more than 20 mm in the case of
asphalt base or more than 15 mm in the case of asphalt
surfacing.
(iii)
Table 4212/2
Aggregate and filler gradings
Size of aggregate:
Material passing
through the following
sieves
(mm)
Thickness
37.5
26.5
19.0
13.2
9.5
6.7
4.75
2.36
1.18
0.600
0.300
0.150
0.075
D90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . base = 15 mm/surfacing = 5 mm

Dmax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . base = 20 mm/surfacing = 8 mm
Dave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . base = 5 mm/surfacing = 2 mm
Thickness shall be determined from carefully controlled
levels taken before and after construction in exactly the
same position and/or from cores drilled from the completed
layer.
Cross section
When tested with a 3 m straight-edge laid at right angles to

the road centre line the surface shall not deviate from the
bottom of the straight-edge by more than 6 mm for freeways
and more than 10 mm for other roads.
(c)
At any transverse section the difference in level between
any two points shall not vary from their difference in level
computed from the cross section shown on the Drawings by
more than 15 mm for freeways and 20 mm for other roads.
(v)
Gradings
The combined aggregate and filler grading shall not deviate

from the approved target grading for the working mix by
more than that given in Table 4212/2.
The thickness tolerances referred to in Clause 7205 shall be

as follows:
(iv)
Multiple-layer base
Permissible deviation
from the approved
target grading
(%)
0
4.0
4.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
3.0
1.5
Binder content
The binder content shall be controlled to within the limits

given in the statistical judgement scheme specified in
Clause 7206.
Surface regularity
When tested with a rolling straight-edge as described in

Clause 7110 the number of surface irregularities shall not
exceed those given below (applied to base and surfacing).
(1)
Average number of irregularities per 100 m equal to
or exceeding the specified value when taken over 300 m 600 m lengths of asphalt surfacing:
Freeways (4 mm irregularities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Other roads (6 mm irregularities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
4200-10
(d)
Construction tolerances for overlays
When overlay construction is carried out to specified levels,

the tolerance requirements of Subclause 4212(a) shall be
applicable. In all other cases the relevant tolerance
requirements of Clause 7205 shall be applicable.
4213
TESTING
Item
(a)
Sampling
42.02 Asphalt surfacing (state

specified thickness and
type of bitumen):
Sampling of asphalt mixes shall be carried out according to

Method MB7 of TMH5 or equivalent, or as prescribed by the
Engineer.
(b)
Coring of asphalt layers
The Contractor shall provide suitable coring machines

capable of cutting 100 mm diameter cores from the
completed asphalt layers. The Contractor will be paid in
accordance with the relevant pay item for cutting cores
ordered by the Engineer. The cost of extracting cores for
process control shall be included in the Contractor's prices
for the construction of asphalt pavement layers and will not
be paid for separately.
All core holes shall be neatly repaired with asphalt and
compacted to the specified density. The cores shall be filled
with the same mix as used for the layer tested.
4214
Item
Unit
(a)
Continuously graded
(grade stated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

asphalt surfacing constructed to the thickness specified.
When specified in the Project Specifications and/or
indicated in the Schedule of Quantities, the unit of
measurement shall be the tonne of asphalt constructed as
specified and measured according to certified weighbridge
tickets issued in respect of mixture used. In the case of
asphalt resurfacing, measurement by tonne shall be
obligatory. No payment will be made for material wasted.
procuring, furnishing, heating, mixing, placing and
compaction of all materials as specified as well as process
control testing, protecting and maintaining the work as
specified. When the unit of measurement is a tonne of
asphalt, the tendered rate shall also include full
compensation for supplying and installing a weighbridge,
and for weighing the material.
Unit
Item
42.01 Asphalt base (specified

thickness indicated):
Continuously graded . . . . . . .
The unit of measurement shall be the litre of 30% stablegrade emulsion applied as specified.
square metre (m2)
(b)
Using tar (state type
of tar and maximum size of
aggregate):
(i)
(c)
The tendered rate shall include for the procuring, furnishing

and application of the material as specified.
Item
Continuously graded . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)

Dense gravel asphalt . . . . . . .
Unit
42.03 Tack coat of 30%

stable-grade emulsion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
(a)
Using bitumen (state type
of bitumen and maximum size of
aggregate):
(i)
square metre (m2)
square metre (m2)

asphalt base constructed to the thickness specified. When
specified in the Project Specifications and/or indicated in the
Schedule of Quantities, the unit of measurement shall be
the tonne of asphalt constructed as specified and measured
according to certified weighbridge tickets issued in respect
of mixture used. No payment will be made for material
wasted.
procuring, furnishing, heating, mixing, placing and
compaction of all materials as well as process control
testing, protecting and maintaining the work as specified.
When the unit of measurement is a tonne of asphalt, the
tendered rate shall also include full compensation for
supplying and installing a weighbridge, and for weighing the
material.
Unit
42.04 Binder variations:

(a)
Penetration-grade bitumens . . . . . . . . . . tonne (t)
(b)
RTH/RTL road tars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tonne (t)
The unit of measurement in respect of increases or

decreases in the bituminous binder from that specified in the
nominal mix shall be the tonne.
Payment for variations shall be made as specified in Clause
1213.
Item
Unit
42.05 Variation in active

filler content:
(a)
Cement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tonne (t)
(b)
Lime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tonne (t)
(c)
Milled granulated
blast-furnace slag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tonne (t)
(d)
Fly-ash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tonne (t)
4200-11
The unit of measurement in respect of increases or

decreases in the active filler content for base and surfacing
mixtures from that specified in the nominal mix shall be the
tonne. No payment shall be made for "inert" filler added by
the Contractor.
1213.
Item
Unit
42.06 Trial sections (nominal

asphalt trial section constructed as ordered.
construction of the trial section of asphalt base or surfacing
complete as specified, for the application of a prime coat
as in Item 41.01
4200-12
Item
Unit
42.07 100 mm diameter cores

in asphalt paving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of 100 mm
diameter cores drilled and recovered as instructed by the
Engineer for his own testing. No separate payment shall be
made for cores drilled as part of the Contractor's obligations
under process control, the cost of which shall be included in
the prices tendered for the various items of asphalt paving.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for drilling
the cores as directed, for all plant, fuel, labour and other
incidentals necessary and for repairing.
SERIES 4000 :
SEALS
SECTION 4300 :
M AT E R I AL S AN D G E N E R AL
REQUIREMENTS FOR SEALS
CONTENTS
4301
4302
4303
4304
4305
4310
4311
4312
4313
4314
4315
SCOPE
MATERIALS
PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
HEATING AND STORAGE OF BITUMINOUS
BINDERS
STOCKPILING OF AGGREGATE
CONSTRUCTION OF SEAL
RATES OF APPLICATION
AREAS INACCESSIBLE TO MECHANICAL
EQUIPMENT
DUST CONTROL
OPENING TO TRAFFIC
DEFECTS
MAINTENANCE
TOLERANCES AND FINISH REQUIREMENTS
4301
SCOPE
4306
4307
4308
4309
The type and grade of bituminous binder to be used shall be

as specified under the appropriate Section of these
Specifications for each type of bituminous seal, or in the
(ii)
Non-homogeneous (heterogeneous)
binders (summer grade)
The bitumen-rubber binder shall comply with the following

requirements:
(1)
Base bitumen
The bituminous binder used in the production of the

bitumen-rubber shall be a 60/70, 80/100 or 150/200
penetration-grade bitumen respectively that complies with
the requirements of SABS 307 or equivalent, or a blend of
any two or all three grades to provide a product with the
required viscosity properties.
(2)
Rubber
The rubber shall be obtained by processing and recycling

pneumatic tyres. It shall be pulverised, free from fabric,
steel cord and other contaminants. A maximum of 4% by
mass of fine particle size calcium carbonate, or talc, may be
added to the rubber crumbs to prevent the rubber particles
from sticking together. At the time of use the crumbs shall
be free flowing and dry and comply with the requirements of
Table 4302/1.
Table 4302/1
Rubber crumbs
This Section covers the materials, construction plant,

construction and requirements common to the construction
of all seals detailed in these Specifications.
Sieve analysis
4302
MATERIALS
(a)
Bituminous binders
(i)
Conventional bituminous binders
Sieve size (mm)
Percentage
passing by mass
1.18
0.60
0.075
100
40 - 70
0-5
Bituminous binders shall comply with the following

specifications or suitable equivalent:
(1)
(2)
SABS 748
SABS 749
Fibre length
6 mm (maximum)
Relative density
(t/m3)
1.10 - 1.25
BR9T
(Sabita)*
SABS 307
SABS 308
* Refer to Subclause 7102(f)

(3)
SABS 309
SABS 548
Extender oils
The extender oil shall be a petroleum-derived material of

high aromaticity and shall comply with the requirements of
Table 4302/2.
Table 4302/2
Extender oils
Anionic spray-grade (60%) emulsion
Minimum 12 degrees Engler at 20EC.

(2)
Test Method
BS 903
Parts B11
and B12
The bitumen emulsions shall also be subject to viscosity

requirements for spray-grade emulsions as follows:
(1)
BR6T
(Sabita)*
30% (minimum)
Bitumen emulsions
Anionic emulsions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cationic emulsions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Method
Natural rubber
hydro-carbon
content
Bitumens
Road-grade bitumens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cut-back bitumens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(3)
Other requirements
Road tars
High-temperature coke-oven tars . . . . . . . . .

Low-temperature tars and tars
manufactured from gas works crude . . . . . . .
modified
Cationic spray-grade (65% and 70%) emulsion
Minimum 80 seconds Saybolt Furol at 50EC.
Property
Requirements
Flash point
% by mass of saturated hydrocarbons
% by mass of aromaticunsaturated hydrocarbons
180 C (min)
25% (max)
50% (min)
4300-1
(4)
Diluent
150EC, after which time it shall comply with the above

Specifications.
The diluent shall be a distillate of hydrocarbon.

(5)
Bitumen-rubber blend
The bitumen-rubber blend, including extender oil and/or

diluent, if necessary, shall comply with the requirements of
Table 4302/3.
Table 4302/3
Bitumen-rubber blend
Property
(iii)
Requirements
% rubber by mass of total blend

% extender oil by mass of total blend
% of diluent by mass of total blend
Blending/Reaction temperature
Reaction time
20% - 24%
6% (max)
7% (max)
170C - 210C
0.5 - 2 hours
Prior to commencement of the work, the supplier shall state

in writing the percentage of rubber and the blending/reaction
temperature he intends to use for his specific product. The
actual percentage of rubber shall not deviate by more than
1.0% from the stated value and the actual reaction
temperature shall not deviate by more than 10% from the
stated value.
A continuous record of both percentage rubber added and
reaction temperatures shall be kept on site by the
Contractor.
The bitumen-rubber binder shall
requirements of Table 4302/4.
comply
with
the
Table 4302/4
Bitumen-rubber binder
Property
Requirements
Compression
recovery:
after 5 minutes
after 1 hour
after 4 hours
70% (minimum)
70% (minimum)
48 - 55% (minimum)
Ring-and-ball
softening point
55C (minimum)
Resilience
Dynamic viscosity
(Haake at 190EC)
Flow
Test Method
20 - 35 dPa.s
20 mm - 75 mm
TMH1
Method E5
BR2T
(Sabita)
BR5T
(Sabita)
BR4T
(Sabita)
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with timetemperature ratios in regard to the above properties of his
specific product before work may start in order to determine
the final process and the acceptance limits.
The methods of testing bitumen-rubber material have been
published in Manual 3 of the Southern African Bitumen and
Tar Association (SABITA).
If a supplier uses a diluent, an ageing test may be required
in which the binder is placed in an oven for 5 hours at
4300-2
Non-homogeneous modified binders (winter grade)
If non-homogeneous modified binders (winter grade) are

required, they shall comply with the requirements in the
(iv)
Homogeneous cold applied modified binders
If any polymer other than the elastomer polymers styrenebutadiene rubber (SBR) or styrene-butadiene-styrene (SBS)
is required for the manufacture of cationic modified bitumen
emulsions it shall comply with the requirements in the
Where applicable the following details will be indicated in the
Project Specifications:
(1)
Type elastomer polymer
SBR or SBS. Unless otherwise specified SBR shall be used

for tender purposes.
(2)
Grade base bitumen
80/100 penetration grade or 150/200 penetration grade.

Unless otherwise specified 80/100 penetration grade shall
be used for tender purposes.
(3)
BR3T
(Sabita)
13% - 35%
The Contractor shall provide the performance record for

three recent projects of the materials he intends to use in
order to assess the successful use of the materials. The
information shall include mean values obtained for the
prescribed tests as well as any relevant comments. This
information shall be submitted at tender stage.
Modified binder content
65% or 70%. Unless otherwise specified 65% shall be used

for tender purposes.
The aforementioned components together with polymer
content will dictate the attributes attainable.
Unless otherwise specified, the properties of cationic
modified bitumen emulsion containing SBR or SBS solids
shall comply with the requirements in Table 4302/5
(following page).
A volatile solvent flux content of up to 3% mass by mass of
the bitumen may be added to enhance emulsion
performance with regard to prevailing climatic conditions.
Any expected change to specified values shall first be
discussed with the Engineer prior to the addition of any such
enhancer.
The properties of the recovered modified bitumen using a
rotary vacuum evaporation method or simple evaporation
method as described in Clause 7108 shall be required to
comply with the requirements of Table 4302/6 (following
page).
If there is any discrepancy in the test results on recovered
modified binder, then the results on recovered binder
obtained from the rotary vacuum evaporation method shall
be binding.
(v)
Homogeneous hot-applied
(summer grades)
modified
binders
The requirements for any polymer other than the generic

types listed in Table 4302/7 used for the manufacture of
homogeneous hot-applied modified binders will be indicated
in the Project Specifications.
Table 4302/10
Flakiness index
Nominal size of
aggregate
(mm)
19.0
13.2
9.5
6.7
Where applicable the following details will be indicated in the

Project Specifications:
(1)
(2)
Generic type (plastomer or elastomer) and type

polymer.
Grade base bitumen (80/100 or 150/200) required.
Maximum flakiness index %

Grade 1
Grade 2 and 3
25
25
30
30
30
30
35
35
The aforementioned components together with polymer

content will dictate the attributes attainable.
If so required for special purposes, the average least

dimension (ALD) shall be as indicated in the Project
Specifications.
(vi)
(ii)
Homogeneous hot-applied modified binders (winter

grade)
Where applicable the requirements for homogeneous

modified binders (winter grade) will be specified in the
(b)
Aggregates
(i)
Aggregates for seals
The aggregate shall consist of approved crushed stone

complying with the requirements of SABS 1083 or
equivalent and the grading, flakiness index and hardness
shall be as follows for each nominal size of stone:
(1)
Grading
The grading shall comply with the requirements set out in

Table 4302/8 (following page) for Grades 1, 2 and 3 and in
Table 4302/9 for sand. The grade or grades of aggregate
specified in the Project Specifications and in the Schedule
of Quantities shall be used.
Table 4302/9
Sand
Sieve size (mm)
Percentage by mass
passing
4.75
0.425
0.075
95 (minimum)
50 (minimum)
20 (maximum)
Aggregate for slurry seals
The aggregate for slurry seals shall be an approved crusher

sand obtained from a parent rock having a 10% FACT of not
less than 110 kN or a mixture of such crusher sand and an
approved clean natural sand, where the mixture does not
contain more than 25% of natural sand. The aggregate
shall be clean, tough, durable, angular in shape, and shall
comply with the grading requirements given in Tables
4302/11 and 4302/12 for the slurry and the grade or type of
aggregate specified.
Table 4302/11
Grading limits of aggregate for slurry seals
Sieve
size
(mm)
Percentage passing sieve, by mass

Fine slurry
Fine
grade
13.2
9.5
6.7
4.75
2.36
1.18
0.60
0.30
0.15
0.075
Medium
grade
100
100
82 - 100
90 - 100 56 - 95
65 - 95
37 - 75
42 - 72
22 - 50
23 - 48
15 - 37
10 - 27
7 - 20
4 - 12
4 - 12
Coarse slurry
Coarse
grade
100
70 - 90
45 - 70
28 - 50
19 - 34
12 - 25
7 - 18
2-8
Type 1
Type 2
100
85 - 100
70 - 90
45 - 70
25 - 45
15 - 30
10 - 20
6 - 15
4 - 10
100
85-100
70 - 90
60 - 80
40 - 60
25 - 45
15 - 30
10 - 20
6 - 15
4 - 10
Plasticity Index : Non-Plastic

(2)
Hardness
When tested in accordance with TMH1 Method B2 the 10%

FACT value (dry) shall be at least 210 kN and the wet to dry
ratio shall be at least 75%.
The polished stone value (PSV) when tested in accordance
with SABS Method 848 or equivalent shall be at least 50
unless otherwise specified or approved by the Engineer.
(3)
Shape
The maximum flakiness index, when tested in accordance

with TMH1 Method B3, shall comply with the requirements
in Table 4302/10.
4300-3
Table 4302/5
Cationic modified bitumen emulsion
Polymer
modifier
Required properties
Grade of
base
bitumen
Minimum
modified binder
content
(%)
Minimum
viscosity at
50C Saybolt
Furol (seconds)
Maximum
residue on
sieving
(g/100 mR)
Particle
charge
Sedimentation
after 60
rotations
SBR
80/100
150/200
70
65
80
70
0.25
0.25
Positive
Positive
Nil
Nil
SBS
80/100
150/200
70
65
80
50
0.25
0.25
Positive
Positive
Nil
Nil
Test Method
ASTM D244
ASTM D244
SABS 548
SABS 548
SABS 548
Note 1: Modified binder is bitumen plus polymer.
Table 4302/6
Recovered modified bitumen
Polymer
modifier
Required properties
Grade of
base
bitumen
Minimum
softening point
(EC)
Minimum
dynamic viscosity
at 135C (Pa.S)
Minimum
ductility at
10C (mm)
Elastic
recovery
(%)
SBR
80/100
150/200
55
45
1.3
1.0
1000
1000
SBS
80/100
150/200
60
47
1.2
1.0
Test Method
ASTM D36
ASTM D4402
Note (1):
4300-4
Minimum adhesion
at 5C
(%)
at 50C
(%)
52
55
90
90
100
100
500
500
55
60
90
90
100
100
DIN 52013
DIN 52013
TMH Method B11
The dust content criteria shall be according to Table 4302/8 Grade 2 stone for the adhesion test.
Table 4302/7
Hot-applied modified binders
Generic type of
modified binder
Test
Method
Grade of
base
bitumen
Minimum
softening
point
(C)
Minimum
dynamic
viscosity
at 135C
(Pa.S)
Minimum
ductility
at 10C
(mm)
Minimum
elastic
recovery
(ductilometer)
at 10C
(%)
Maximum
stability
difference
(C)
150/200
48
0.5
300
45
90
SBR
SBS
SBR
SBS
80/100
80/100
150/200
150/200
47
49
45
47
1.0
1.0
0.5
0.5
1000
500
1000
500
55
60
55
60
2
2
2
2
90
90
90
90
ASTM
D36
ASTM
D4402
DIN
52013
DIN
52013
Plastomerpolymer
(EVA)
Elastomer
polymer
Required properties
Minimum adhesion
at 5C
(%)
at 50C
(%)
100
100
TMH1 Method B11
Table 4302/8
Single-sized crushed aggregate Grades 1, 2 and 3
Sieve size (mm)
37.5
26.5
19.0
13.2
9.5
6.7
4.75
2.36
Grade
Grades
1&2
Grade 3
Percentage by mass passing

26.5 mm
nominal size
19.0 mm
nominal size
13.2 mm
nominal size
9.5 mm
nominal size
6.7 mm
nominal size
2.36 mm
nominal size
100
85 - 100
0 - 30
0-5
-
100
85 - 100
0 - 30
0-5
-
100
85 - 100
0 - 30*
0 - 5**
-
100
85 - 100
0 - 30*
0 - 5**
-
100
85 - 100
0 - 30*
0 - 5**
100
0 - 100
Grading shall comply with the requirements for Grades 1 and 2 with the following
exceptions: * 0 - 50
** 0 - 10
Fines content:
Material passing
a 0.425 mm
sieve (max)
Grade 1
Grade 2
Grade 3
0.5
1.5
N/A
0.5
1.5
N/A
0.5
1.5
2.0
0.5
1.5
2.0
0.5
2.0
3.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
Dust content:
Material passing
a 0.075 mm
sieve (max)
Grade 1
Grade 2
Grade 3
N/A
0.5
N/A
N/A
0.5
N/A
N/A
0.5
1.5
N/A
0.5
1.5
N/A
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
4300-5
Table 4302/12
Grading limits of aggregate for slurry used
for texture improvement only
Sieve size (mm)
Percentage passing sieve

by mass
1.18
0.600
0.300
0.150
0.075
100
82 - 100
50 - 70
20 - 35
7 - 15
The sand equivalent determined in accordance with TMH1

Method B19 (SABS 838) shall be at least 35.
The immersion index of briquettes made with slurry
aggregate and 80/100 penetration-grade bitumen at the
specified net bitumen content for the slurry shall be not less
than 75 when tested in accordance with Method C5 of
TMH1.
(c)
Filler for slurry
Ordinary Portland cement shall comply with AASHTO M85,

SABS 471 or equivalent and Portland blast-furnace cement
(PBFC) with the requirements of AASHTO M240, SABS 626
or equivalent.
The time between the precoating and the placing of the

aggregate shall not exceed the time specified in the Project
Specifications or agreed on by the Engineer and the
Contractor.
All aggregates used with hot-applied homogeneous and nonhomogeneous modified binders, shall be precoated.
(ii)
Precoating constraints
No precoating shall be applied where conventional and

modified emulsion binders are used unless specifically
specified or ordered by the Engineer.
4303
PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
(a)
General
All plant and equipment used on the Works shall be of an

adequate rated capacity and in a good working condition.
All plant and equipment that will be operated on the road
during construction of the seal shall be free from any binder,
fuel or oil leaks, and no refuelling or servicing of any
equipment will be allowed to take place while such
equipment is on the road.
(b)
Binder distributor
Road lime shall comply with the requirements of AASHTO

M216, SABS 824 or equivalent (Lime for Soil Stabilisation).
The binder distributor shall comply with all the provisions of

Subclause 4103(a).
Only one of the above materials shall be used throughout, in

order to prevent undesirable colour differences in the
surface.
The binder distributor used for non-homogeneous modified

binder shall be adapted to spray the rubber modified binder
satisfactorily. The Contractor shall provide proof by way of
a test on the site that the binder distributor has sufficient
reserve power to maintain the required constant speed up
the steepest incline to which spray has to be applied, and to
obtain a uniform distribution of the mix. The optimal spraybar level shall be determined during testing, and the spraybar level shall be adjusted accordingly before each spray.
The uneven application of binder will be unacceptable.
(d)
Hydrophilic aggregates
Where hydrophilic or other aggregates which may cause

problems are encountered, the Engineer may order that the
stone chips be precoated, as described below, or that a fog
spray be applied, as specified in Subclause 4403(d).
(i)
Precoating of aggregate for stockpiling or for

immediate use
This method may be used for aggregate intended for

immediate use or for stockpiling.
The untreated stockpile of aggregate shall be thoroughly
sprayed with water, which shall be allowed to drain off. The
damp aggregate shall then be loaded into the bucket of a
front-end loader and 10 to 12 R of an approved precoating
fluid shall be sprayed evenly over the aggregate by means
of a watering can.
The wetting agent approved by the Engineer shall be added
to the precoating fluid at a rate of 0.5% of the volume of
precoating fluid.
The mixture of aggregate and precoating fluid shall then be
dumped on a site prepared as specified in Clause 4306. This
process shall be repeated until a stockpile of approximately
15 m3 to 20 m3 has been built up.
This stockpile shall then be turned over with the front-end
loader until the aggregate is uniformly coated with the
precoating fluid. Three complete turnings of the stockpile
will probably be required.
4300-6
(c)
Chip spreaders
The chip spreaders shall be capable of spreading stone of

the specified size uniformly over widths varying between
2.4 m and 4 m and shall be capable of adjustment to permit
variation of the rate of application within the specified
tolerances, and uniform spreading in both the transverse and
longitudinal directions.
At least two chip spreaders shall be provided, one of which
shall be self-propelled.
Spreaders which are not self-propelled, shall be of a type
that can be attached quickly to the rear of trucks, and
operated while backed over the stone chippings being
spread.
(d)
Rollers
Sufficient operational rollers of each of the following types

shall be available on the Works to maintain the required
tempo of work:
(i)
Pneumatic-tyred rollers
Pneumatic-tyred rollers shall be of a self-propelled type

equipped with smooth flat profile pneumatic tyres of uniform
size and diameter. The mass of the roller shall not be less
than 20 tonnes (unloaded).
The rollers shall be equipped with suitable devices for
keeping the wheels wet and clean during operation.
The wheels of the roller shall be so spaced that one pass of
the roller will provide one complete coverage equal to the
rolling width of the machine. The total operating mass and
tyre pressure may be varied by the Engineer at his
discretion. Individual tyre pressures shall not differ by more
than 35 kPa from one another.
(ii)
Rubber-soled steel-wheeled rollers
Rubber-soled steel-wheeled rollers shall be self-propelled,

and have a mass of between 6 and 8 tonnes. It shall be
equipped with suitable devices for cleaning and moistening
the wheels. The wheels of the roller shall be so arranged as
to give one complete coverage, by one passage of the roller,
over a width equal to the rolling width of the roller.
(iii)
Steel-wheeled rollers
Steel-wheeled rollers shall be self-propelled three-wheel or

tandem rollers of between 6 and 8 tonnes mass and shall be
equipped with suitable devices for cleaning and moistening
the wheels. The mass of the roller required shall be
determined by the Engineer. No steel-wheeled rollers shall
be used without the consent of the Engineer.
(iv)
Additional requirements
The type and number of rollers shall be subject to the

approval of the Engineer for each type of seal and the
proposed programme.
hardening. The mixer shall be capable of continuous mixing

and application.
The purpose designed mixer for continuous type mixing of
either conventional or rapid setting slurries, shall be
equipped with precise metering systems to enable the
various constituents to be combined continuously to the
prescribed formulation.
No central mixing plant will be allowed. Details of the type
of mixer shall be submitted in advance of actual
construction, for approval by the Engineer.
(g)
Loader for slurry
A loader, or equivalent capacity labour force where so

required in the Project Specifications, compatible with the
needs and capacity of the mixer unit shall be available at the
stockpiling site.
(h)
Spreader box for slurry
The type of spreader box used for spreading the slurry shall
be submitted to the Engineer, in advance, for approval. The
spreader box for rapid setting slurry shall be of a proven and
approved type, fitted with a proven and approved device to
ensure sufficient agitation within the spreader system.
The spreader box shall be so constructed as to distribute the
weight onto metal skids in such a way that no damage shall
be done to the surface when the box is in operation.
Soft rubber belting shall be attached to the framework in
such a manner as to prevent slurry from being spilt past the
sides of the spreader box when the box is in operation.
No seal work shall continue if the required rollers are not on

site or in an operational condition.
The spreader box shall be capable of spreading a uniform

application of the slurry in adjustable widths from 1.5 m to
4 m, at specified rates, and it shall have efficient mechanical
means of adjusting the rates and widths of application
specified.
(e)
Brooms
(i)
(i)
Drag broom
The precoating of chips may be done in any suitable plant

capable of uniformly coating the chips.
The drag broom shall be of a size, type and mass which will
enable the chips to be distributed evenly over the surface
without dislodging any chips from the binder.
(ii)
Rotary broom
An approved rotary broom, complete with towing vehicle

fitted with smooth pneumatic tyres, shall be available at all
times on the Works.
(f)
(j)
Precoating plant
Mass-measuring device
Where payment per tonne is specified, the Contractor shall

keep available on the site as directed by the Engineer, a
suitable gauged mass-measuring device. The device shall
be provided with a printer for printing the mass, the time and
date. The printed data shall be submitted to the Engineer on
a daily basis.
Mixer for slurry
A mobile mixer of a type approved by the Engineer shall be

provided. It may be either a batch mixer or a continuous
type mixer. The paddles of the mixer shall be so designed
as to ensure a complete blending of the constituents of the
slurry.
For the rapid setting slurry types, the mixing and application
of the slurry shall be done by a mixer designed to provide a
rapid mixing time, and sufficient agitation within the
spreading system to prevent segregation or premature
(k)
Miscellaneous equipment
Sufficient equipment for handling and hauling aggregate,

binder and slurry, and blending units for non-homogeneous
modified binders, shall be provided to ensure prompt and
continuous placing and application of bituminous materials
as specified. The Contractor shall have available all the
necessary ancillary equipment and hand tools to carry out
the work efficiently.
Suitable fire-fighting equipment for dealing with bitumen fires
shall be available on site, together with suitable first aid
4300-7
equipment for dealing with bitumen burns. (Refer to Sabita

Manual 8 : Bitumen Safety Handbook.)
The Engineer shall be entitled to request reserve plant,
should there be any doubt as to the efficiency or capability
of the equipment provided.
4304
(a)
Weather limitations
The minimum road-surface temperatures at which the

spraying of the different types and grades of binder may be
done are:
(i)
(1)
Road tars
Bitumens
150/200 penetration-grade bitumen . . . . . . . . . . . . .

80/100 penetration-grade bitumen . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MC-800 cut-back bitumen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MC-3000 cut-back bitumen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(3)
During hot weather slurry operations shall be suspended

when aggregate is being displaced by the spreader box or
squeegees.
When the breaking process accelerates to such an extent
that it renders the product unworkable to attain the required
end result, for instance when the surface temperature is in
excess of 60C, or as otherwise prescribed by the Engineer,
no sealing shall be done.
When strong winds are blowing which are likely to interfere
with the proper execution of the work, no sealing, especially
spraying of binder, shall be done.
40/45 EVT tar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10EC

45/50 EVT tar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16EC
50/55 EVT tar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21EC
(2)
Conventional slurry shall not be applied at an air

temperature of less than 7C when temperatures are rising,
or less than 13C when temperatures are dropping. Rapid
setting slurry shall be sufficiently versatile to be laid in air
temperatures of 4C to 40C, as well as capable of being
laid under damp conditions.
21EC
25EC
10EC
10EC
Bitumen emulsions
(b)
Moisture content
No seal shall be placed unless the moisture content of the

upper 50 mm of the base is less than 50% of the optimum
moisture content as determined by the Engineer. No reseal
shall be placed immediately after a rainy spell on an existing
partly cracked and/or highly permeable surfacing resulting in
the trapping of moisture in the pavement structure. A
minimum delay of 24 hours or such extended period as
ordered by the Engineer shall apply.
Bitumen emulsion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10EC

(c)
(ii)
Bitumen-rubber (spray application) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20EC

(iii)
Texturing using fine slurries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 weeks

Rapid setting slurry (rut filling, etc) . . . . . . . . . 12 weeks
Crack sealing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 weeks
Repair of distressed patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 weeks
SBR modified cationic emulsion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10EC

SBS modified cationic emulsion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10EC
(v)
Homogeneous hot-applied
(summer grade)
modified
Homogeneous hot-applied modified binders (winter

grade)
As specified in the Project Specifications.

Whenever the temperature of the road surface falls below
the aforesaid temperature for the binder in question, or, in
the opinion of the Engineer, will probably fall below the
required temperature before spraying the binder, no binder
shall be sprayed.
No bituminous work shall be done during foggy or rainy
weather, and, when a cold wind is blowing, the above
temperatures shall be increased by 3C to 6C as directed
by the Engineer.
4300-8
(ii)
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, and
subject to the outcome of a trial section, the Contractor shall
programme all spraying to cease each working day at 15:00
hours.
binders
Modified binder 150/200 penetration grade

base bitumen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20EC
Modified binder 80/100 penetration grade
base bitumen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25EC
(vi)
(i)
The following curing periods shall apply to the various
treatments listed, prior to applying a seal/reseal unless
otherwise specified in Project Specifications:
Non-homogeneous modified binders (winter grade)
As specified in the Project Specifications.
(iv)
Other constraints
Non-homogeneous modified binders (summer grade)
(d)
Preparation of areas to be sealed
(i)
General
The areas to be sealed shall be cleaned of all dust, dirt,

dung, oil or any other foreign matter that may be deleterious
to the seal.
(ii)
Newly constructed seals
Where newly constructed base or shoulder areas are to be

sealed, the surfaces shall be checked for compliance with
the surface tolerances and all other requirements specified.
Any portions that do not meet these requirements shall first
be either corrected or removed and reconstructed before
they are sealed.
(iii)
Existing surfaces to be resealed
Existing roads that require resealing shall, if so specified or

ordered by the Engineer, be given a pretreatment in
accordance with one or more of the methods described in

Section 4900.
Table 4305/2
Heating and spraying temperatures
Any failures shall be repaired as specified in the Project

Specifications.
(e)
Demarcation of working area
(i)
New work
The Contractor shall demarcate the area of the primed base

to be sealed by means of setting out wire lines down each
edge of the specified seal width.
(ii)
Reseal work
Immediately before the tack coat or bituminous binder is

sprayed, the centre line of the road shall be marked by a
3 mm thick sisal or hemp twine, secured by nails driven, at
15 m intervals on straights and 5 m intervals on curves, into
the existing surface. This twine shall be left in position
during all subsequent operations.
4305
HEATING AND STORAGE OF BITUMINOUS

BINDERS
(a)
The temperature ranges between which bituminous binders

are to be heated shall be as given in Tables 4305/1 and
4305/2.
Table 4305/1
Maximum storage temperatures
Materials
Maximum storage
temperature (C)
Over
24 hours
Up to
24 hours
Road tars
40/45 EVT
45/50 EVT
50/55 EVT
80
90
100
90
100
105
Road grade
bitumens
150/200 pen grade
80/100 pen grade
115
125
165
175
Cut-back bitumens
RC-250
MC-800
MC-3000
60
75
100
90
125
155
Air temp.
Air temp.
Air temp.
60
60
60
Bituminous
emulsions
60%
65%
70%
Materials
Heating and spraying

temperatures (C)
Min
Max
Recommend
Road tars
40/45 EVT
45/50 EVT
50/55 EVT
100
105
110
115
120
125
110
115
120
Road grade
bitumens
150/200 pen grade
80/100 pen grade
150
165
175
190
165
175
Cut-back bitumens
RC-250
MC-800
MC-3000
90
110
135
115
135
155
100
125
145
Bituminous
emulsions
60%
65%
70%
Air
Air
Air
60
60
60
60
60
60
Binders stored in a heated condition shall be kept in a

container with a securely fitting lid, the circulatory system of
which is functioning properly. The container shall be
provided with a built-in thermometer.
Binders which have been heated above the maximum
temperatures indicated in this table shall not be used and
shall be removed from the site. Every effort shall be made to
maintain the binder temperature for spraying to within 5C of
the recommended temperature.
For single seals the temperature limits for 150/200
penetration-grade bitumen, cut back with the indicated
amounts of power paraffin in parts per 100 parts of bitumen
by volume as described in Section 4400, shall be as set out
in Table 4305/3 to prevent degradation of the bitumen.
Table 4305/3
Temperature limits for single seals
Quantity of power paraffin
added (parts per 100 parts
of bitumen by volume)
0
2.5
5.0
7.5
12.5
15.0
17.5
22.5
(b)
Temperature limits
Lower
limit
C
Upper
limit
C
150
146
138
132
121
115
107
100
175
163
154
149
138
135
127
118
Non-homogeneous (heterogeneous) modified

binders (summer grade)
After completion of the bitumen-rubber reaction, the binder

shall be cooled to below 160C. The binder mixture may not
be kept for more than 2 days. The mix may only be stored
in tanks with circulation systems.
4300-9
The spray and storing temperatures of the bitumen-rubber

binder shall comply with the following requirements:
(f)
Spray temperature (C) . . . . . . . . . Provided by supplier

Max storing time at spray
temperature (hours) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Max storing temperature
(up to 2 days), (C) . . . . . . . 35 below spray temperature
but not more than 160
The Contractor shall comply with the requirements specified

in the Project Specifications with regard to the storage,
heating and spraying temperatures, and with regard to the
information to be provided in the tender stage, unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Stored binder heated to a temperature above 160C shall

not be used and shall be removed from the site.
4306
STOCKPILING OF AGGREGATE
(a)
General
(c)
Non-homogeneous modified binders (winter

grade)
The Contractor shall comply with the requirements specified

in the Project Specifications with regard to the storage,
heating and spraying temperatures, and with regard to the
information to be provided in the tender stage, unless
(d)
Modified bitumen emulsions may be stored at ambient

temperature for long periods, provided that some
circulation/mixing takes place from time to time. The
spraying temperatures of these emulsions are the same as
for conventional bitumen emulsions.
Sites for the stockpiling of aggregates shall be prepared in

such a manner that no grass, mud, dirt or other deleterious
material will be included when the aggregates are loaded for
use.
Access roads to stockpile sites shall be prepared and
maintained in such a way that no dirt is conveyed by vehicle
wheels onto the areas to be sealed or resealed whilst
aggregate is being transported to or from the stockpiles.
Stockpiles shall be so sited that they will not be exposed to
excessive contamination with dust arising from traffic on the
road or access roads. Aggregates contaminated to the
extent that it contains more than the allowable percentage of
material passing through the 0.425 mm sieve and 0.075 mm
sieve shall not be used for sealing.
(b)
(e)
Homogeneous hot-applied modified binders

(summer grade)
The heat stability of modern modified bitumens is

remarkably good. However, excessive temperature over
extended periods will degrade all modified bitumens and
negatively affect the enhanced properties of these binders.
The temperature limits for the storage and spraying of
modified hot-applied binders shall be as set out in Table
4305/4 unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Table 4305/4
Temperature limits for storage and spraying
Bitumen grade Polymer
Maximum
used in
type
storage temp
manufacture
C
80/100 pen
150/200 pen
80/100 pen
150/200 pen
80/100 pen
150/200 pen
EVA
EVA
SBR
SBR
SBS
SBS
Spraying temp
C
Up to
24
hours
24 to
48
hours
Max
Min
175
175
175
175
175
175
150
150
150
150
150
150
180
180
210
200
180
180
170
170
190
180
165
165
Modified binders stored in a heated condition shall be kept

in a container having a properly functioning circulation
system and a securely fitting lid.
Note: Many long chain polymers have low shear stability
and can be degraded by the action of a high shear rate
pump such as a close tolerance gear pump.
4300-10
Homogeneous hot-applied modified binders

(winter grade)
Precautions
Areas used for stockpiling precoated aggregate shall be so

sited that dust deposited on the chips is reduced to a
minimum. Where necessary, temporary diversions and
access roads in the immediate proximity shall be watered,
sprayed with a suitable chemical dust suppressant, or
sealed.
During the wet season when there is danger of the
precoating fluid being washed off the aggregate, the
stockpiles shall be covered with tarpaulins or similar
protective coverings.
During cooler periods the Engineer may order that stockpiles
be covered with tarpaulins to ensure that the aggregate
temperature remains compatible with the limiting
temperature applicable to the specified binder type.
4307
CONSTRUCTION OF SEAL
(a)
General
Adequate advance notice shall be given to the Engineer

before the Contractor proceeds with any seal work.
(b)
Single and double aggregate seals
(i)
Application of tack coat and aggregate
A bituminous tack coat consisting of the type and grade of

binder specified in these Specifications under each of the
appropriate Sections for each type of bituminous seal, or in
the Project Specifications, shall be sprayed on the properly
cleaned and prepared base or existing surface over the full
specified width of the seal.
Where the tank of the binder distributor could become empty

during spraying against inclines, the spraying shall be done
while the binder distributor is moving uphill. Should the
Engineer be of the opinion that the Contractor is unable to
place the sealant over the full specified width in one
movement, the Contractor shall execute the spraying and
the distribution of the chips in strips. The spraying of
adjacent strips shall overlap by 100 mm. Chips may not be
placed on the 100 mm overlap before the adjacent strip has
been sprayed. The adjacent strip may not be sprayed
before the preceding strip, excluding the 100 mm overlap,
has been covered satisfactorily with chips in compliance with
the Specifications. In so far as is practicable, the Contractor
shall so place the strips that the joint between two adjacent
chip applications shall fall on the centre line of the road.
Immediately after the binder has been sprayed, it shall be
covered with clean, dry aggregate of the size specified in
these Specifications under each of the appropriate Sections
for each type of seal.
The actual rates of application of binder and aggregate to be
used in the construction will be determined by the Engineer,
after he has tested the aggregates the Contractor proposes
to use for the seal and prior to any sealing being carried out.
The aggregate shall be applied uniformly by means of self
propelled chip spreaders, unless otherwise specified. In the
case of single seals, the use of a self-propelled chip
spreader shall be obligatory. The immediate application of
the chips is of prime importance. The chip spreader shall be
so operated that the tack coat shall be covered with
aggregate before the wheels of the chip spreader or truck
pass over the uncovered tack coat.
The quantity of bitumen sprayed in any single spray
operation shall be governed by the quantity of aggregate,
and the number of trucks available shall be sufficient to
ensure the continuous application of stone behind the
distributor. In addition the available roller capacity at normal
operating speed shall also govern the extent of the tack coat
and aggregate that may be applied.
three to four coverages. Except in the case of single seals

final rolling shall then be done with a steel-wheeled roller
with a mass of 6 to 8 tonnes working parallel to the centre
line of the road from the shoulders towards the crown of the
road, until every portion of the surface concerned has been
covered by at least two to four passes of the roller, provided
that only a limited degree of crushing of the aggregate will
take place, but if, in the opinion of the Engineer, general
crushing occurs under the rollers, such rolling shall be
stopped regardless of the number of passes completed by
the roller.
The surface shall be well knit and have a uniform
appearance, free of roller-tyre marks; all aggregate
contaminated by fuel, oil or grease shall be removed and
replaced with clean aggregate.
(iv)
In order to prevent overlapping at junctions of separate

binder applications the previous work along the joint shall be
covered with twine-reinforced building paper for a sufficient
distance back from the joint to ensure that the sprayer is
operating at the required rate before the untreated surface
is reached, and also to prevent additional binder application
onto the previously treated section. The same method shall
be used to ensure a neat joint at the end of the run.
(v)
The Contractor shall replace at his own cost any items that
have been soiled and cannot be cleaned entirely. The
painting of soiled surfaces will not be accepted as a suitable
remedy.
Slurry seals
Initial rolling of aggregate
Immediately after the aggregate has been applied, rolling

shall be commenced. A self-propelled 15 tonne pneumatictyred roller only shall be used in the case of single seals,
and a steel-wheeled roller may also be used in the case of
double seals, on condition that excessive crushing of the
aggregate shall not take place. Rollers shall operate parallel
to the centre line of the road, from the shoulders inwards
towards the crown of the road, until the entire surface has
been covered at least three times with the wheels of the
roller.
(iii)
Protection of kerbs, channels, etc
Kerbs, channels, guttering, manholes, guard rails, bridge

railings and any other structures which may be soiled by
bituminous binders during spraying operations shall be
protected in terms of Section 2300 during spraying
operations.
(c)
(ii)
Joints between binder sprays
Broom drag and final rolling of aggregate
After the bituminous binder has set-up sufficiently to prevent

any aggregate from being dislodged, the surface shall be
slowly dragged with a broom drag to ensure even distribution
of the aggregate. If there are areas which are deficient in
stone chips, additional material shall be added by hand so
as to leave a single layer of chips lying shoulder to shoulder.
If there are areas with an excess of stone chips, such
excess shall be removed by hand so as to leave a single
layer of chips lying shoulder to shoulder. The importance of
applying only a single layer of chips is stressed. Every care
shall be taken to avoid an over-application of stone.
After completing the spreading of the aggregate, the surface
shall be rolled with a 15 tonne pneumatic-tyred roller for
Slurry seals shall be applied as specified in Clauses 4603

and 4604.
4308
RATES OF APPLICATION
Whenever the terms "net bitumen" or "net quantity of

bitumen" are used in these Specifications to specify the rate
of application of the binder for conventional or homogeneous
modified binder (hot and cold), they shall mean viscosity
grade (penetration-grade) bitumen net cold.
Nonhomogeneous modified binders, however, shall be specified
at spraying temperature.
All binders, aggregates and slurry used in the various types
of seals shall be applied at the rates of application as
determined by the Engineer after tests on the materials
proposed for use.
No payment will be made for bituminous binder applied in
excess of the rate ordered plus the permitted tolerance or at
a rate lower than the specified rate, minus the permitted
tolerance, unless, in the opinion of the Engineer, such
overspray or any shortages can be satisfactorily corrected in
the case of a first application by the adjustment of the
application rate of the second spray, and if such correction
is effected.
4300-11
Unless otherwise specified, the nominal rates of application

of bituminous binders given in further sections, and also the
variations in application rate, shall be measured at spraying
temperature.
The nominal rates of application are for tendering purposes
only and will not necessarily be used in construction. The
actual rates of application to be used on the site shall in all
cases be as instructed by the Engineer.
The appropriate conversion factors given in Table 4308/1 or
specified in the Project Specifications shall be used for
calculating net bitumen (cold) from conventional and
homogeneous modified binders at spraying temperature.
4309
AREAS INACCESSIBLE
EQUIPMENT
TO
Net quantity of bitumen between 75 and 90 R/m3 aggregate

mix.
The ingredients shall be mixed in a suitable concrete or
other type of mixer. It should be possible to heat the
aggregate in the mixer, while it is rotating, by a gas flame or
other means.
The aggregate shall be placed in the mixer and heated to
100C while mixing, after which the bituminous emulsion
shall be added. Mixing shall continue until the aggregate is
uniformly coated with bitumen.
Before spreading the mixture, the surface shall be prepared
by painting it with one layer of bituminous emulsion, which
must be allowed to dry.
MECHANICAL
The mixture shall then be placed on the areas to be sealed,
and screeded off in a layer of uniform thickness.
Areas inaccessible to mechanical equipment shall be

constructed as follows:
After the emulsion has broken and the layer has attained
sufficient stability, it shall be rolled with a small steelwheeled roller to obtain compaction.
(a)
The surface shall comply with the requirements specified in

Clause 4314. The thickness of the layer shall be the same
as that of the adjacent seal.
Prime
Prime shall be applied to the base by hand-spraying under

the supervision of an experienced person. The total
application of prime shall be controlled in order to determine
whether the application rate specified is being obtained.
Table 4308/1
Calculating net bitumen
Binder
Road tar
35/40 RTH/RTL
40/45 RTH/RTL
45/50 RTH/RTL
50/55 RTH/RTL
35/40 RTH with 1.5% PVC
Bitumen
150/200 pen bitumen
80/100 pen bitumen
MC 800
MC 3000
Bitumen emulsion (60%
bitumen content)
Bitumen emulsion (65%
bitumen content)
(b)
Conversion
factor
Average
spray
temp
(C)
1.24
1.21
1.18
1.15
1.24
1.21
1.18
100
106
111
117
100
106
111
1.10
1.11
1.33
1.23
165
180
114
138
1.67
53
1.56
60
Bituminous mixture
A premixed bituminous mixture shall be prepared, consisting

of 9.5 mm nominal sized aggregate, 6.7 mm nominal sized
aggregate, and crusher sand which complies with the
requirements of Subclause 4302(b), together with a 60%
stable mix-grade emulsion prepared from 80/100
penetration-grade bitumen, in the following proportions by
volume:
9.5 mm nominal sized aggregate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 part
6.7 mm nominal sized aggregate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 part
Crusher sand (fine grade) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 part
4300-12
(c)
Slurry
Where the sealing layer consists of an application of

aggregate with slurry, the slurry shall be applied to the
surface of the layer constructed as described above, at a
rate of between 0.003 and 0.004 m3/m2, or as the Engineer
may direct. This shall be done simultaneously with the final
slurry application on the other portions of the work to obtain
a uniform appearance.
(d)
Binders for seals
Binder for seals, and particularly bitumen-rubber binder,

shall be sprayed with mechanical equipment, which, where
necessary, has been specially adjusted for accurately
applying the binder in restricted areas in accordance with the
specified requirements. Hand-spray equipment may be
used only with the written approval of the Engineer, and then
only in accordance with approved methods under the strict
supervision of experienced personnel and with equipment
suitable for performing the work in accordance with specified
requirements.
4310
DUST CONTROL
Any temporary diversions and construction roads shall be

kept watered and damp, or sprayed with a suitable chemical
dust suppressant, during all sealing operations and all dust
shall be removed from surfaces before any binder,
aggregate or slurry is applied.
The supply and application of water or chemical dust
suppressants on temporary diversions will be paid for
separately as specified in Section 1500, but payment for
dust control on the haul and construction roads shall be
included in the unit rates tendered for the various types of
seals used.
4311
OPENING TO TRAFFIC
The Engineer shall be responsible for determining when any

sealing layer is to be opened to public traffic.
The road shall not be opened to traffic until the binder has
set sufficiently to retain the aggregate, or in the case of
slurry seals, the slurry has set sufficiently so as not to be
picked up by the wheels of passing traffic.
The Contractor shall not allow any construction equipment,
which is likely to cause damage, over the completed seal.
The Contractor shall display speed restriction signs in
accordance with Section 1500 and the instructions of the
Engineer.
4312
DEFECTS
Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, any unacceptable

loss of stone from or bleeding of the road surface that may
occur during the course of the Contract or during the
maintenance period can be attributed to the Contractor not
observing any of the requirements of the Specifications, not
using the correct rates of application, or to any other
omission or fault on the part of the Contractor, any corrective
work ordered by the Engineer shall be at the Contractor's
cost, including the supply, precoating, stockpiling at selected
sites and later removal if not used, of any aggregate
reserved for corrective work during the period of
maintenance or thereafter.
Where the reason for bleeding or loss of stone, in the
opinion of the Engineer, cannot be attributed to any fault or
neglect on the part of the Contractor, the Employer shall pay
at the tendered rates for the cost of any remedial measures
taken on the instructions of the Engineer.
(a)
Bleeding
Bleeding shall be corrected by one or more of the methods

described below, as may be ordered by the Engineer:
(i)
Method 1: Single seal with slurry: Light bleeding
Nominal 6.7 mm aggregate conforming to the requirements

of Clause 4302 shall be used. The aggregate shall be
coated as described in Subclause 4302(d) with an approved
precoating fluid by using 10 to 12 R/m3.
If the binder of the existing surface has an oxidised film or if
the road has been used by traffic for some time, it shall be
treated either by brushing in power paraffin to soften the
surface of the binder, or the surface shall be softened up
with gas burners. This work shall only be done on hot days.
The aggregate shall be applied to the surface immediately
at the rate of 0.004 m3/m2 and rolled with a heavy
pneumatic-tyred roller until the aggregate is firmly
embedded. All loose aggregate not embedded shall be
broomed off the road before it is opened to traffic. When
opening the road to traffic, the affected areas shall be
demarcated with traffic cones and speed limit signs for the
first two days, care being taken to remove all loose
aggregate daily.
(ii)
Method 2: Single seal with slurry: Severe bleeding
The method to be used shall be the same as Method 1,

except that the aggregate shall be nominal sized 9.5 mm or
13.2 mm and they shall be spread at the rate of 0.007 m3/m2
and 0.010 m3/m2 respectively. If only half the road width is
to be treated, the application of aggregate shall be finished
in a neat line on the centre line of the road.
(iii)
Method 3: Bleeding single or multiple seals
If the surface is non-uniform, ie partly bleeding and partly

coarse-textured, the surface shall be rectified by pretreating
the coarse areas in accordance with Clause 4904 (Type 2
treatment) to obtain a uniform surface, which shall then be
covered with a single seal in accordance with the standard
Specifications. The type of aggregate to be used shall be
determined by the Engineer. The pretreated surface shall be
inspected and the size of aggregate and the rates of
application of the tack coat and aggregate, which the surface
can accommodate, shall be established. Methods 1 or 2
shall be used if so ordered by the Engineer.
(iv)
General
All operations to correct bleeding shall be carried out only

when the surface temperature is high enough to promote
adherence.
This work shall be effected as soon as possible after
bleeding occurs.
Before opening any rectified work to traffic, all the loose
aggregate shall be swept off the surface.
It is essential to use a heavy pneumatic-tyred roller on all
work. Rolling shall continue until the Engineer is satisfied
that all the aggregate has been properly embedded. No
rolling shall be done in wet weather, cold weather or early in
the morning when the surface is cold.
Notwithstanding the above methods of treatment, the
Engineer may order any seal which has not been properly
constructed to be removed and replaced. The removal of
the seal shall be done so as not to damage the existing
base. All aggregate and binder shall be removed either by
grader or by hand tools and any damage done to the surface
shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(b)
Loss of stone
Loss of stone shall be corrected in accordance with the

requirements of the Engineer, with the aid of a fog spray.
The surface to be repaired shall be clean and dry, and a
30% anionic or cationic spray-grade emulsion shall be
applied at a rate of 0.6 R/m 2 or such other rate as may be
4313
MAINTENANCE
The Contractor shall maintain the bituminous surface until

the work is finally accepted by the Employer. Any damage
done to the surface or any defects which may develop
before the issue of the maintenance certificate, fair wear and
tear excepted, shall be corrected by the Contractor at his
own cost and to the requirements of the Engineer.
Areas where whip-off is excessive after the above treatment

has been carried out, shall be retreated in accordance with
the Engineer's instructions.
4300-13
4314
TOLERANCES AND FINISH REQUIREMENTS
Whenever the terms "net bitumen" or "net quantity of

bitumen" are used in these Specifications to specify the rate
of application of the binder for conventional or homogeneous
modified binder (hot or cold), they shall mean viscosity grade
(penetration-grade) bitumen net cold. Non-homogeneous
modified binders, however, shall be specified at spraying
temperature.
The completed bituminous work shall comply with the
following requirements regarding surface tolerances and
finish:
(a)
New work
(i)
Level and grade
The edges of the completed seal shall be continuously true

to line with a maximum allowable deviation from the
specified edge line of 15 mm.
(c)
The maximum permissible variation from the rates of

application of bituminous binders, aggregates or slurry, as
ordered by the Engineer, shall be plus or minus 5% of the
rate of application required for the aggregate, and plus or
minus 0.06 R/m2 net cold bitumen for conventional or
homogeneous modified binders, and within a tolerance of
5% for non-homogeneous modified binders at spraying
temperature.
(d)
The requirements relating to the base on which the seal is
constructed shall apply.
(ii)
Width
The edges of the seal shall be true to line with a maximum

deviation of 15 mm from the specified edge line.
(iii)
Cross section

(iv)
Surface regularity

(v)
General
Any areas which show signs of bleeding after the section

has been opened to traffic shall be corrected as specified in
Clause 4312. Corrective work shall be carried out in such a
manner as to blend in colour, texture and finish with adjacent
work.
The rate of application
Conditional acceptance
The provisions of Clause 7207 shall apply to conditional

acceptance.
4315
Measurement and payment will be made under the various

sections where the different seals are described.
The following items of work shall also be measured and paid
for as stated below:
Item
Unit
43.01 Treating areas inaccessible to mechanical equipment

with premixed bituminous material:
(a)
19.0 mm thick . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(b)
13.2 mm thick . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)

completed seal.
The completed seal shall be free from corrugations or any

other wave effect where depressions are preceded and
followed by humps or ridges no matter how small the
distance between the top of the hump to the bottom of the
preceding or following depression.
The tendered rate per square metre of seal shall include full
compensation for procuring and furnishing all materials, and
for all labour, plant, transport and other incidentals
necessary for completing the work as specified, including
application of a tack coat and the slurry.
(b)
Item
Resealing work on existing surfaces
Unit
The completed seal shall be of uniform texture without gaps

or patches and shall be free from any loose aggregate or
bitumen spillage.
43.02 Correction for bleeding:

(a)
Aggregate:
Any areas which show signs of bleeding after the section

has been opened to traffic shall be corrected as specified in
Clause 4312. Corrective work shall be carried out in such a
manner as to blend in colour, texture and finish with adjacent
work.
(i)
13.2 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(ii)
9.5 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(iii)
4.75 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
The completed seal shall be free from corrugations or any

other wave effect where depressions are preceded and
followed by humps or ridges no matter how small the
distance between the top of the hump to the bottom of the
preceding or following depressions.
(b)
Precoating of aggregate . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(c)
Treatment of surface . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
4300-14
The unit of measurement for aggregate shall be the cubic

metre of aggregate supplied. The tendered rates shall
include full compensation for procuring and furnishing the
materials, including all transport and, if required, for

stockpiling the aggregate at selected sites indicated by the
Engineer.
The unit of measurement for precoating the aggregate shall
be the cubic metre of material precoated. The tendered rate
shall include full compensation for precoating the material as
specified, for procuring and furnishing the precoating
material irrespective of the type of precoating material used,
and for all handling, loading and off-loading of all materials.
The unit of measurement for treatment of the surface shall
be the square metre of surface treated. The tendered rate
shall include full compensation for all labour, plant,
equipment and transport required to treat the surfaces as
specified, including maintenance and all incidentals
necessary for completing the work. This item shall apply
only to Methods 1 or 2 as described in Clause 4312.
Treatment according to Method 3 shall be paid for in
accordance with the provisions of Sections 4400 and 4700
according to what may be required.
Item
Unit
43.03 Application of a fog spray

of 30% spray-grade or
equivalent diluted stable
grade emulsion:
(a)
Spray-grade emulsion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
(b)
Stable-grade emulsion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
The unit of measurement shall be the litre of 30% spraygrade or equivalent diluted stable grade emulsion measured
providing the material and for applying the fog spray as
specified.
4300-15
4300-16
SERIES 4000 :
SEALS
SECTION 4400 :
SINGLE SEALS
CONTENTS
4401
4402
4403
4404
SCOPE
MATERIALS
CONSTRUCTION
4401
SCOPE
This Section covers the supplying and furnishing of all

materials for the repair of existing surfaces and for the
construction of new single seals.
Note: Section 4300: Seals : Materials and general
requirements shall apply to this Section.
4402
MATERIALS
(a)
Bituminous binders
(i)
Tack coat
The specified bituminous binders shall comply with the

conditions of Subclause 4302(a).
(ii)
Fog spray
30% or 60% spray-grade emulsion of the anionic or cationic

type, as specified or ordered by the Engineer.
(iii)
Cutting back of bitumen
The maximum amounts of cutter given in Table 4402/1 shall

be added to the basic 150/200 penetration-grade bitumen
depending on the road surface temperature at the time of
spraying. Lesser amounts than those indicated in the Table
may be used if conditions on the site allow the development
of sufficient adhesion between binder, aggregate and
existing surface.
The temperature of the bitumen, when the power paraffin is
introduced, shall not be higher than 140EC.
The power paraffin shall be sucked in measured quantities
from 200 R drums through the bitumen pump and circulated
with the bitumen for a minimum of 45 minutes. During this
process all burners shall be shut off and no open flames
allowed near the distributor.
The power paraffin shall not be introduced into the
distributor through the manhole, which shall be kept closed.
Each distributor shall at all times have two fire extinguishers
in a working order available.
(b)
Aggregate
(i)
Coarse aggregate
Coarse aggregate shall comply with the requirements of

Subclause 4302(b).
Table 4402/1
Binder detail
Min
temp for
24 hours
(C)
0 - 3 (a)
3-6
6-9
9 - 12
>12
Road
temp
%
Cutback
in
80/100
pen
bitumen
Spray
temp
(C)
Approx
air
temp
(C)
16 - 24
24 - 32
32 - 40
40 - 48
>48
10 - 16
16 - 21
21 - 26
26 - 31
>31
9-7
7-5
4-3
2-1
0
100 - 118
115 - 135
121 - 138
132 - 149
150 - 175
(C)
Notes:
(a)
Experience in the central parts of South Africa
indicates that the addition of 9% cutback is still
appropriate for conditions of Minimum temperatures for
24 hours = -4C
(b) During the rainy season it is recommended that 1 2% be added as a safety factor (not in addition to the
above percentages). Chemical analysis of the binder
and cutter should be carried out before bitumen from
other sources are cut back. If the weather is predictably
dry for the months November, December and January,
and the road temperature exceeds 31C, additives may
be omitted.
(ii)
Fine aggregate
Fine aggregate may be sand obtained from the natural

disintegration of stone or sand obtained from the crushing or
grinding of stone. Fine aggregate shall comply with the
requirements of the Project Specifications (eg SABS 1083
or equivalent).
4403
CONSTRUCTION
(a)
The tack coat and aggregate, of the size specified in the

Project Specifications or ordered by the Engineer, shall be
applied as specified in Subclause 4307(b).
The nominal rates of application given in Table 4403/1 shall
be used for tendering purposes only.
Table 4403/1
Nominal rates of application
Nominal size
of aggregate
mm
19.0
13.2
9.5
6.7
Tack coat
(litres of tar
or net
bitumen per
m2)
Aggregate
(m3 per m2)
1.80
1.50
1.10
0.80
0.015
0.010
0.007
0.005
4400-1
The actual rates of application shall be as determined by the

Engineer.
(d)
using 19.0 mm aggregate . . . . square metre (m2)

completed and accepted seal.
(b)
Initial rolling
Initial rolling shall be carried out as specified in Subclause

4307(b).
(c)
Final rolling
Any areas deficient in aggregate shall have additional

material added so as to leave the carpet with a single layer
of chippings lying shoulder to shoulder. It is essential to
ensure that only one layer of chippings is applied and every
care shall be taken to avoid over-application of chippings.
The final rolling shall be done with a pneumatic-tyred or a
rubber-soled steel-wheeled roller only, applying a minimum
of four coverages.
The finished surface shall be well-knit and have a uniform
appearance free of roller-tyre marks. All aggregate
contaminated by oil, fuel or grease shall be removed and
dumped in an approved waste site and replaced by clean
aggregate.
All loose aggregate shall be broomed off the surface with a
rotary broom or hard brooms as directed by the Engineer.
(d)
Item
Unit
44.02 Single seals: Bituminous

binder variations:
(a)
150/200 penetrationgrade bitumen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
(b)
(c)
70% spray-grade emulsion . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
(d)
(e)
(f)
PVC tar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
(g)
Precoating fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
(h)
Other binders (indicate type) . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
(i)
Power paraffin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
Fog spray
When required by the Project Specifications or, if so

directed by the Engineer in writing, a fog spray of 60% or
30% anionic or cationic emulsion shall be applied to the
surface of the aggregate by means of a pressure distributor
at the required rate.
(e)

furnishing all materials, marking the centre or reference
lines, spraying of binder, spreading of aggregate, rolling and
all other incidentals necessary for completing the work as
specified.
The unit of measurement of bituminous binder in respect of

an increase or a decrease in the specified rates of
application shall be the litres measured at spraying
temperature.
Blinding
If required in the Project Specifications or as may be

directed by the Engineer, a light blinding layer of natural or
crusher sand shall be applied by the Contractor to prevent
chippings from being picked up by traffic. The blinding layer
shall be spread evenly over the full indicated surface.
Should it be required by the Engineer, the layer shall be
spread evenly by means of hand brooms.

1213.
Where power paraffin is used to cut back the penetrationgrade bitumen, the rate for power-paraffin variation under
Subitem (i) shall include full compensation for providing the
power paraffin and mixing it with the bitumen.
Item
(f)
If required in the Project Specifications or as may be

directed by the Engineer, the aggregate shall be precoated
with a precoating fluid as specified in Subclause 4302(d).
4404
Item
44.03 Aggregate variations:

(a)
6.7 mm aggregate . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(b)
(c)
13.2 mm aggregate . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(d)
Unit
44.01 Single seals (indicate

type of binder):
(a)
using 6.7 mm aggregate . . . . . square metre (m2)
(b)
using 9.5 mm aggregate . . . . . square metre (m2)
(c)
using 13.2 mm aggregate . . . . square metre (m2)
4400-2
Unit
Precoating of aggregate

increased or decreased aggregate applied, as compared to
the amounts required at the specified nominal rate of
application.
1213.
Item
Unit
44.04 Application of fog spray:

(a)
(b)
The unit of measurement shall be the litre, measured at

spraying temperature.
furnishing the material and applying the fog spray as
specified.
Item
Prime-cost sum will be paid for in terms of the General

Conditions of Contract for providing and supplying an
approved wetting agent to the precoating fluid as specified
or as directed by the Engineer.
The tendered percentage of the prime cost sum shall
include full compensation for handling the material, storing
and introducing it into the mix, including any equipment
required, and for all other charges and profit.
Item
Unit
44.07 Aggregate for blinding:

(a)
Natural sand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(b)
Crusher sand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
Unit
44.05 Precoating the aggregate (indicate precoating

fluid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)

measured in the hauling vehicles or in stockpile.
The unit of measurement for the precoating of aggregate

shall be the cubic metre of aggregate so treated measured
in hauling vehicles and used on the surfacing.

providing the material and applying the blinding coat
complete as specified, and, should it be required, stockpiling
the sand at an approved locality.

furnishing the equipment and materials and precoating the
aggregate as specified, including the handling, stockpiling
and protecting of the stockpiles against inclement weather.
Item
Unit
44.06 Addition of Duomene T

or any other similar
approved wetting agent:
(a)
Providing and supplying . . . . . . . . prime cost sum
(b)
Handling, applying,
profit and all other costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . percentage of
prime cost sum
4400-3
4400-4
SERIES 4000 :
SEALS
SECTION 4500 :
DOUBLE SEALS
(b)
Initial rolling

4307(b).
CONTENTS
(c)
4501
4502
4503
4504
Dragging and final rolling of aggregate shall be carried out

as specified in Subclause 4307(b).
SCOPE
GRADES OF BINDER TO BE USED
CONSTRUCTION
(d)
4501
Second application of bituminous binder and

aggregate
SCOPE
This Section covers the supplying and furnishing of

materials for the construction of a bituminous double seal.
The seal shall be constructed using either 19.0 mm plus
9.5 mm aggregate or 13.2 mm plus 6.7 mm aggregate,
whichever is shown in the Schedule of Quantities.
The bituminous binder specified by the Engineer shall be

applied and followed by the second layer of aggregate of the
size specified in the Project Specifications or as ordered by
the Engineer.
be for purposes of tendering only and the actual rates of
application shall be as determined by the Engineer.
Note: Section 4300 : Seals : Materials and general

4502
Table 4503/2
Nominal size
of aggregate
(mm)
The tack coat and second coat of binder shall consist of one
of the following binders, whichever is specified in the Project
Specifications or the Schedule of Quantities or ordered by
the Engineer:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
RTH 45/50 or RTL 45/50 road tar;

150/200 penetration-grade bitumen,
penetration-grade bitumen;
60%, 65% or 70% spray-grade emulsion;
MC-3000 or MC-800 cut-back bitumen;
PVC tar.
4503
CONSTRUCTION
(a)

be for the purposes of tendering only and the actual rates of
application shall be as determined by the Engineer.
Nominal
size of
aggregate
(mm)
19.0
13.2

Tack coat (litres
of tar or net
bitumen per m2)
Aggregate
(m3 per m2)
1.2
1.0
0.014
0.009
Binder (litres of
net bitumen
per m2)
Aggregate
(m3 per m2)
0.8
0.8
0.006
0.005
80/100
The binder of the type and grade required, and the

aggregate of the size specified in the Schedule of Quantities
or ordered by the Engineer, shall be applied as specified in
Clause 4307.
Table 4503/1
9.5
6.7
The second application of binder shall preferably take place

within 48 hours of the application of the tack coat when
bitumen is used for the tack coat and not less than ten days
of the application of the tack coat when tar or cut-back
bitumen is used in the tack coat (ie new work).
(e)
Initial rolling of second layer
Initial rolling of the second layer of aggregate shall be

carried out as specified in Subclause 4307(b).
(f)
Broom drag and final rolling of second layer
Dragging and final rolling of the second layer of aggregate

shall be carried out as specified in Subclause 4307(b).
(g)
Fog spray
When required by the Project Specifications or if so directed

by the Engineer in writing, a fog spray of 30% or 60%
bitumen emulsion shall be applied to the surface of the
second layer of aggregate by means of a pressure sprayer
at the rate of application specified by the Engineer.
(h)
Precoating of aggregate
When required by the Project Specifications or if so directed

by the Engineer, the second application of aggregate shall
be precoated with precoating fluid as specified in Subclause
4302(d).
4500-1
4504
Item
Unit
45.01 Double seals using:
square metre (m2)
(b)
13.2 m and 6.7 mm
aggregate (state types of
binder to be used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
square metre (m2)

completed and accepted surface treatment.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation, inter alia,
for furnishing all materials, marking the centre line or
reference lines, spraying of binder, spreading of aggregate,
rolling, removing of dust or deleterious material, supplying
of water and spraying of haul roads and construction roads,
trimming the edges of the completed surface, and all other
incidentals necessary for completing the work as specified,
except the application of a fog spray and precoating of
aggregate, which shall be paid for separately.
Item
Unit
45.02 Bituminous binder variations:
(b)
(c)
(d)
70% spray-grade emulsion . . . . . . . . . . .
litre (R)
(e)
litre (R)
(f)
litre (R)
(g)
30% anionic spray-grade
emulsion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
(h)
Precoating fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
(i)
PVC tar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
(j)
MC-3000 cut-back bitumen . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
(k)
MC-800 cut-back bitumen . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
The unit of measurement of bituminous binder in respect of

variations in the specified rates of application shall be a litre,
measured at spraying temperature.
1213.
Unit
4500-2
(c)
(d)

1213.
Item
Unit
45.04 Application of fog

spray consisting of:
(a)
litre (R)
(b)
litre (R)
The unit of measurement shall be the litre of emulsion

sprayed as specified and measured at the application
temperature.
The tendered rate per litre of emulsion shall include full
compensation for procuring and furnishing the binder and
applying the fog spray as specified.
Item
(a)
RTH 45/50 or RTL 45/50
road tar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
(a)
The unit of measurement with respect to variations in

application of aggregate shall be the cubic metre of
aggregate measured in the truck.
(a)
19.0 mm and 9.5 mm
aggregate (state types of
binders to be used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Item
(b)
Unit
45.05 Precoating second

application of aggregate
(indicate precoating fluid) . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement for the precoating of aggregate
shall be the cubic metre of aggregate so treated measured
in hauling vehicles and used on the surfacing.
furnishing the equipment and materials and precoating the
aggregate as specified, including the handling, stockpiling
and protecting of the stockpiles against inclement weather.
Item
Unit
45.06 Addition of Duomene T

or any other similar
approved wetting agent:
(a)
Providing and supplying . . . . . . . . prime cost sum
(b)
Handling, applying, profit
and all other costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . percentage of
prime cost
The prime cost sum will be paid for in terms of the General
Conditions of Contract for providing and supplying an
approved wetting agent to the precoating fluid as specified
or as may be directed by the Engineer.
The tendered percentage of the prime cost sum shall
include full compensation for handling the material, storing
and introducing it into the mix, including any equipment
required, and for all other charges and profit.
SERIES 4000 :
SEALS

be used for the purposes of tendering.
SECTION 4600 :
SINGLE SEAL W ITH SLURRY

(CAPE SEAL)
Table 4603/1
Rates of application
Nominal
size of
aggregate
(mm)
CONTENTS
4601
4602
4603
4604
4605
SCOPE
CONSTRUCTION
BEFORE
APPLICATION
SLURRY
4601
SCOPE
SLURRY
This Section covers the construction of a seal consisting of

the application of a tack coat, spreading of 19.0 mm or
13.2 mm aggregate, a further application of bituminous
binder coat and the application of the slurry in one or two
coats.
Note: Section 4300 : Seals : Materials and general
(a)
Tack coat
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
RTH 45/50 or RTL 45/50 road tar;

150/200 penetration-grade bitumen,
penetration-grade bitumen;
PVC tar;
MC-3000 or MC-800 cut-back bitumen;
60%, 65% or 70% spray-grade emulsion.
(b)
Second application of binder
80/100
The second application of binder shall consist of either 30%

or 60% spray-grade emulsion, whichever is specified in the
Project Specifications or the Schedule of Quantities or as
ordered by the Engineer:
Where dilution by water is applied, the requirements of
TRH3 shall be complied with.
(c)
Slurry
(c)
0.6
1.2
0.009
0.013
The binder used for slurry shall be an anionic stable-grade

emulsion (60% bitumen).
4603
CONSTRUCTION
APPLICATION
SLURRY
(a)
The binder of the type and grade required, and the

aggregate of the size specified in the Schedule of Quantities
or ordered by the Engineer, shall be applied as specified in
Subclause 4307(b) at the rates as ordered by the Engineer.
Initial rolling
Dragging and final rolling of aggregate shall be carried out

as specified in Subclause 4307(b).
Second application of bituminous binder
The required binder shall be sprayed at the rate prescribed

by the Engineer. This shall be done at least two days after
application of the tack coat and the aggregate if bitumen is
used in the tack coat, and at least 14 days in summer and
21 days in winter after application of the tack coat and the
aggregate if tar is used in the tack coat.
For tender purposes a nominal rate of 0.33 R/m 2 (net
bitumen) shall be used for 13.2 mm aggregate and for
19.0 mm aggregate.
4604
SLURRY
(a)
Condition of surface
The surface shall be rolled once with a light flat-wheeled

roller early in the morning on the day of sealing to depress
any loose stones that may have been displaced.
The surface shall be cleaned to remove all dust, mud,
leaves, etc, and shall have a uniform closely knit
appearance, with edges trimmed correctly to the specified
width.
(b)
BEFORE
Aggregate
(m3 per m2)

4307(b).
(d)
The tack coat shall consist of one of the following binders,

whichever is specified in the Project Specifications or the
Schedule of Quantities or as ordered by the Engineer:
(i)
(ii)
Binder (litres of
tar or net
bitumen per m2)
13.2
19.0
(b)
4602

for tender purposes
Timing of slurry application
The slurry shall be applied only after the final spray has
cured or dried out (which usually takes at least two days).
(c)
Composition of slurry
The slurry shall consist of a mix of the grade of slurry

aggregate ordered by the Engineer and specified in
Subclause 4302(b) together with a 60% stable-grade
emulsion, filler and water in the proportions as directed by
the Engineer. The following proportions shall apply for
tendering purposes only:
4600-1
Slurry aggregate (saturated

volume) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 m3
Stable-grade emulsion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 R
Cement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.01 m3
Water (as directed by the
Engineer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . approx 235 R
If specified in the Project Specifications, the composition of
the slurry shall be based on the following mass proportions
for tender purposes:
Slurry aggregate (dry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Stable-grade emulsion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Cement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1.5
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
The saturated volume of slurry shall be determined by
applying a correction for bulking of moist aggregate, as
described in Item 46.05.
(d)
Mixing of slurry
A mixer of a type approved by the Engineer shall be

provided in a good working order capable of producing a
uniform slurry of the constituent materials. It may either be
a batch mixer or a continuous type mixer.
Material which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is not properly
mixed or in which the emulsion shows signs of having
broken during mixing shall not be applied to the road.
(i)
Batch mixer
The slurry shall be mixed in an approved type of mixer as

specified in Subclause 4303(f).
All the constituents of the slurry shall be accurately
proportioned and due care and attention shall be given to
the sequence in which the ingredients are introduced into
the mixer and to the period of mixing. Mixing shall be
continued until the materials in each batch are thoroughly
blended.
(ii)
Continuous mixer
Aggregate and filler contained in separate bins shall be fed

through metering devices at controlled rates to the mixer.
Water and bitumen emulsion contained in separate tanks
shall similarly be pumped to the mixer at controlled rates
through metering devices. The mixing of the slurry shall be
at a suitable rate adjusted to ensure complete blending of
the ingredients and uniformity of mix.
(e)
Application of slurry
Before slurry is applied, the road surface shall be thoroughly

cleaned and lightly sprinkled with water but no free water
shall be present on the surface when the slurry is applied.
The slurry shall be applied in two layers in the case of
19.0 mm chippings and in one layer in the case of 13.2 mm
chippings, unless otherwise specified in the Project
Specifications or ordered by the Engineer.
The nominal rate of application of slurry shall be as follows
for a seal using:
13.2 mm aggregate . . . . . . . . . . . 0.006 m3/m2 one layer
19.0 mm aggregate . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.008 m3/m2 total for
two layers
4600-2
If specified in the Project Specifications, the nominal rate of

application of the slurry on a mass basis shall be taken as:
13.2 mm aggregate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 kg/m2
19.0 mm aggregate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5 kg/m2
The rate of application of slurry shall be measured in cubic
metres of fine aggregate (saturated volume) contained in the
slurry applied, per square metre of surfacing.
The nominal rates of application given above are intended
for tendering purposes only and the actual rates of
application on the site shall be as directed by the Engineer.
When the slurry is applied in two layers, the first layer of
slurry shall be struck off level with the tops of the stones in
the aggregate layer so that, after application, the tops of the
stones will be just visible.
The second layer of slurry shall not be applied until the first
layer has dried. If required by the Engineer, the Contractor
shall open the road to traffic before the second layer of
slurry is applied. The surface shall be well-rolled with a
pneumatic-tyred roller. The second layer shall be applied
only after sufficient time has been allowed for the first layer
to cure. The Engineer will decide on the time necessary for
proper curing, which will in any case be not less than 24
hours.
The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dust, dirt or
foreign materials before the second layer of slurry is applied.
For seals using 13.2 mm nominal sized chippings, the slurry
shall be applied in one layer only. The slurry shall also be
struck off so that the tops of the stone chippings will be just
visible after the emulsion has set and cured.
Where slurry is spread by hand, the squeegee squad shall
be allowed to complete the spreading of each batch
discharged onto the road, using squeegees, before the next
is discharged.
Where spreading is carried out by means of the spreader
box, the slurry shall be discharged into the spreader box by
means of a chute, which shall be so directed that an even
supply of slurry is maintained against the full width of the
strike-off blade of the spreader box. Areas where an excess
of slurry has been applied by the spreader box shall be
corrected by squeegees being used immediately after the
passage of the spreader box. Should breaking of the
emulsion, segregation of the mix or formation of lumps
occur during the application of the slurry, the slurry
operations shall be discontinued at once and any defective
material removed from the road. Successive strips of slurry
shall overlap transversely by not less than 25 mm nor more
than 150 mm. Any overlapping on the longitudinal joints and
any omitted areas shall be rectified with squeegees.
The Contractor shall ensure that either edge of the road
surface is finished to the specified widths and lines. All
stones dislodged in the process of applying the slurry shall
be removed on the same day on which the slurry seal has
been applied. All spillage of slurry or excess slurry shall be
neatly removed from the road and buried in an approved
waste site.
If the slurry is spread with a spreader box, a moist burlap
drag shall be drawn behind the spreader box to ensure an
overall even texture.
If applied by hand, the slurry shall be worked from side to
side and criss-cross with the aid of squeegees so as to fill
as many spaces as possible. In this case the final layer of
slurry shall be struck off flush with the tops of the stone
chippings so as to leave the chippings to be visible after the
emulsion has stiffened and hardened.
(e)
Anionic stable-grade
emulsion (60% bitumen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
(f)
The work must be so programmed, that the two half road

widths of slurry shall be applied on two successive days to
complete a full road width section in two days.
PVC tar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
The unit of measurement in respect of variations shall be

the litre of binder measured at spraying (or mixing)
temperature.
Any damage to the slurry seal by rain or traffic before the

slurry has cured shall be rectified by the Contractor at his
own expense.

1213.
4605
Item
Unit

Item
46.01 Bituminous single seal
with 19.0 mm aggregate and
slurry (indicate type and
grade of binder) . . . . . . . . . . .
Unit
(a)
13.2 mm nominal sized
aggregate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
square metre (m2)
(b)
19.0 mm nominal sized
aggregate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement for the complete bituminous single

seal with aggregate and slurry shall be the square metre.
The unit of measurement in respect of variations shall be

the cubic metre of aggregate, measured loose in the truck.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation, for

furnishing all materials, demarcating the working area,
spraying the binders, spreading the aggregates, rolling,
mixing and applying the slurry, and all other incidentals
the watering of haul and construction roads in and about the
site.

1213.
Item
46.02 Bituminous single seal
with 13.2 mm aggregate and
slurry (indicate type and
grade of binder) . . . . . . . . . . .
Item
Unit
46.05 Variation in the rate

of application of the
slurry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
Unit
The unit of measurement for slurry variations shall be the
cubic metre of saturated fine aggregate.
square metre (m2)
The unit of measurement for the complete bituminous single

seal with aggregate and slurry shall be the square metre.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation, for
furnishing all materials, demarcating the working area,
spraying the binders, spreading the aggregates, rolling,
mixing and applying the slurry, and all other incidentals
the watering of haul and construction roads in and about the
site.
Item
Unit
46.03 Bituminous binder variations:

(a)
RTH 45/50 or RTL 45/50
road tar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
(b)
(c)
Spray-grade emulsion
(30% or 60% bitumen) (indicate type) . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
(d)
(65% bitumen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
litre (R)

1213.
Every load of fine aggregate used for the slurry shall be
struck off with a straight-edge at the stockpile, and the
volume shall then be measured, and corrected for bulking.
The following method shall be used for calculating the
corrected volume of fine aggregate when determining the
application rate of slurry:
(a)
The volume of a truck hopper filled with fine
aggregate shall be carefully measured in cubic metres
(A m3).
(b)
A representative sample of aggregate shall be
obtained from the conveyor belt feeding the mixer. 1 000 mR
of the sample shall be placed in a plastic measuring cylinder
and dropped ten times through a height of 50 mm onto a
wooden table, after which the volume of aggregate in the
cylinder shall then be measured in mR (B mR).
(c)
The sample in the cylinder shall then be saturated
with water and water shall be added until it covers the
aggregate by 50 mm. The mixture shall be shaken well, and
the cylinder containing the aggregate and water placed on
a horizontal surface allowing the aggregate to settle until the
liquid above the aggregate clears sufficiently for a reading
to be taken of the volume of the saturated aggregate, in mR
C mR).
(d)
The saturated volume of the aggregate in the hopper
of the truck shall be calculated from the following formula,
4600-3
and payment for the slurry application variations shall be

made in accordance with this formula:
Item
True (saturated) volume carried by the truck hopper:
46.06 Slurry application rate

variations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tonne (t)
A {(1 - 0.72) x [(B - C) / C]}
Unit
The unit of measurement for variations in the slurry

application rate shall be a tonne of mixed slurry.
1213.
4600-4
SERIES 4000 :
SEALS
SECTION 4700 :
SAND SEALS
(b)
Sand equivalent
The sand equivalent shall be at least 35.
4704
CONSTRUCTION
(a)
Equipment
CONTENTS
4701
4702
4703
4704
4705
SCOPE
SAND
CONSTRUCTION
4701
SCOPE
This Section covers the supply and application of all

materials used for constructing sand seals on new pavings.
The following equipment shall be readily available on the

site:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Pneumatic-tyred rollers
A rotary broom
A drag broom
Mechanical aggregate spreaders.
(b)
Preparation of surface before application of seal
Note: Section 4300 : Materials and general requirements

shall apply to this Section.
The surface of the base shall be watered, rolled and swept

until a smooth fine texture has been achieved. The base
shall then be primed in accordance with the provisions of
Section 4100 and as instructed by the Engineer.
4702
The road shall be cleaned of all loose or deleterious material

before the sand seal is applied.
The following grades of binder shall be used as specified in

the Project Specifications or the schedule of quantities or as
ordered by the Engineer:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
RTH 45/50 or RTL 45/50 road tar

RTH 50/55 or RTL 50/55 road tar
MC-800 cut-back bitumen
MC-3000 cut-back bitumen
Spray-grade cationic emulsion (65% or 70% of net
bitumen)
150/200 penetration-grade bitumen.
4703
SAND
As this specification is essentially for use in low-cost

construction, the grading of the sand may vary to a fair
degree, but the following conditions must be met:
(a)
Grading
The grading shall conform with Table 4703/1.

Table 4703/1
Grading for sand
Sieve size
(mm)
6.7
0.300
0.150
Percentage by mass
passing through sieve
100
0 - 15
0-2
The sand shall be screened to ensure the removal of all

material exceeding 6.7 mm. Water shall be used to assist
the screening process and to clean the sand of dust and
foreign matter.
(c)
Application of sand seal
The tack coat shall be applied at 0.8 R/m2 net bitumen, and,
immediately after the coat has been spread, the aggregate
shall be distributed thereon at a rate of 0.007 m3/m2 and
rolled with pneumatic-tyred rollers. Where emulsions are
used, the aggregate shall be applied only after the
emulsions have broken partially.
Note: The maximum rate of application when using an
emulsion is approximately 0.7 R/m2 before the binder tends
to flow off the surface.
During the rolling process, any uneven application of sand
shall be rectified with a light broom drag or other suitable
apparatus.
Where the binder is required to be applied in two
applications, the surface can be opened to controlled traffic
after the first application of binder and sand, as soon as it is
convenient to do so. The second application of binder and
sand may be applied when the first application has cured
sufficiently for it to take the traffic without requiring brooming
back of the sand. All loose sand and deleterious material
shall be removed from the surface and any damaged or
defective areas rectified before the second application of
binder and sand. While the traffic is using the road, the
sand shall be continuously broomed back onto the road until
the binder has cured sufficiently to retain the sand and until
traffic does not damage the surface. The sweeping-back
process shall be done with a rotary broom and may take as
long as two months before the surface finally retains all of
the sand. Tenders shall be based on brooming back for up
to 10 times.
As wet sand is difficult to apply, the preparation of the sand
should be done well ahead of the actual construction to
allow the sand to be fairly dry when it is applied. If the sand
is not cleaned to the Engineer's satisfaction by one
screening and washing operation, it shall be washed again
at no extra payment.
4700-1
4705
The unit of measurement shall be the litre, measured at

spraying temperature.
Item
Unit
47.01 Application of tack coat:

procuring and furnishing the material and applying the
binder, including all preparatory work to the surface prior to
application of the binder.
(a)
RTH 45/50 or RTL 45/50
road tar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
Item
(b)
RTH 50/55 or RTL 50/55
road tar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
(c)
MC-800 cut-back bitumen . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
(d)
MC-3000 cut-back bitumen . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
(e)
(65% net bitumen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
(f)
Spray-grade cationic emulsion
(70% net bitumen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
litre (R)
(g)
4700-2
Unit
47.02 Sand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)

The unit of measurement for the sand shall be the cubic
metre of sand applied to the road as specified, measured in
the trucks or in the stockpiles.
supplying the sand, washing, screening and preparing the
sand, applying the sand as specified, as well as brooming
the sand back onto the surface as often as is required.
SERIES 4000 :
SEALS
SECTION 4800 :
SURFACING OF BRIDGE DECKS
CONTENTS
4801
4802
4803
4804
4805
4806
4807
SCOPE
MATERIALS
PREPARATION OF SURFACE
TYPE AND THICKNESS OF SURFACING
CONSTRUCTION
SURFACE TOLERANCES
4801
SCOPE
Before commencing with the construction of the surfacing,

the actual levels of the bridge deck shall be determined by
means of accurate levelling. The levels and grades to which
the surfacing is to be constructed shall be as shown on the
Drawings or as indicated by the Engineer. If the levels of
the concrete deck as constructed by the Contractor deviate
by more than the specified tolerances from the specified
levels, he shall construct a levelling layer at his own cost.
The nominal size of the aggregate in the levelling layer shall
be 9.5 mm.
4805
CONSTRUCTION
Irrespective of the type of seal applications on the road on

both sides of the bridge, asphalt surfacing shall be
constructed in accordance with Section 4200, and seals in
accordance with Section 4300.
This Section covers the construction of a bituminous

surfacing on bridge decks where shown on the Drawings or
ordered by the Engineer.
4806
4802
The completed surfacing shall comply with the requirements

for base of Clause 3405 in respect of surface tolerances for
grade, smoothness, cross section and width.
MATERIALS
Bituminous binders and aggregate shall comply with the

requirements of Clauses 4202 and 4302 for asphalt
surfacing and seals respectively.
4807
Item
4803
PREPARATION ON SURFACE
Before the surfacing is constructed, the concrete deck shall

be thoroughly cleaned by washing and brushing to remove
all loose material. After drying, a tack coat consisting of
30% bituminous cationic emulsion shall be applied to the
surface at a rate of 0.4 R/m2. The tack coat shall then be
allowed to dry.
4804
TYPE AND THICKNESS OF SURFACING
SURFACE TOLERANCES
Unit
48.01 Surfacing on bridge deck

(indicate type and thickness) . . . . . . . . . tonne (t)
The unit of measurement shall be the tonne of surfacing
completed to the nominal thickness indicated.
procuring and furnishing all materials, heating the binder and
aggregate, mixing, transporting, placing and compacting the
material, and the provision and application of the surfacing.
The rate shall also include full compensation for variations
in thickness within the specified tolerance for bridge deck
levels and for the application of a tack coat.
The type and nominal thickness of the surfacing shall be as

indicated on the Drawings and specified in the Schedule of
Quantities.
4800-1
4800-2
SERIES 4000 :
SEALS
SECTION 4900 :
T R E AT M E N T O F S U R F AC E
DEFECTS, PATCHING, REPAIRING
EDGE-BREAKS AND CRACK
SEALING
CONTENTS
4901
4902
4903
4904
4905
4906
4907
4909
4910
4911
SCOPE
MATERIALS
PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
TREATMENT OF SURFACE DEFECTS
PATCHING
REPAIRING EDGE BREAKS
CRACK SEALING
OPENING TO TRAFFIC
JOINTS AND THE PROTECTION OF KERBS
4901
SCOPE
(a)
30% or 60% cationic or anionic spray-grade bituminous

emulsion.
(b)
Provision is made for treating existing seals exhibiting any

of the following defects:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(c)
Slurry binder (Treatment Type 3)
60% stable-grade bituminous emulsion.
(d)
Binder for asphalt skim coat (Treatment Type 4)
80/100 penetration-grade bitumen.
Screed (Treatment Type 5)
30% bitumen emulsion shall be used for the tack coat, and
the binder for the asphalt shall be 80/100 penetration grade
bitumen unless otherwise specified.
(f)
Binder for asphalt used in reconstructing

pavement edges
60% stable-grade bituminous emulsion for tack coat and

80/100 penetration-grade bitumen in asphalt.
The existing surface is deficient in binder.

Marked differences in texture occur over the surface.
The existing surface is open-textured.
The surface is uneven on account of bumps, slacks,
etc.
Edges require trimming and/or repairs.
(g)
Patching shall be any work to existing pavement layers (and

in exceptional cases to fills and the roadbed) with the
purpose of repairing local failures, and which is carried out
in an area having a width of less than 1.0 m, or a length of
less than 25 m or an area of less than 100 m2. This does
not include the repair of edge breaks, pretreatment of the
road surface, or the rehabilitation of concrete pavements.
(h)
(e)
Tack-coat binder (Treatment Type 2)
60% bituminous emulsion (Treatment Type 2)

30% bituminous emulsion (Treatment Types 3 and 4).
(e)
This Section covers the work in connection with the

treatment of existing road surfaces prior to the application of
a seal or asphalt surfacing, patching, repairing edge breaks
and crack sealing.
Binder for fog spray (Treatment Type 1)
Rubber pellets
Rubber pellets for crack sealing shall be obtained by

processing rubber tyres. The rubber shall be granulated and
free from fibres, steel wire and other impurities. The rubber
crumbs shall pass through a 2.00 mm sieve.
Herbicide
Herbicide shall be a non-selective environmentally

compatible herbicide approved by the Engineer.
Patching involves excavating the existing failed sections and

reconstructing the excavated fills and pavement layers with
the specified pavement material. Backfilling with asphalt will
be measured and paid for under Section 4200.
4903
Compensation for work in restricted areas shall not be

applicable to patching and repairing edge breaks.
All equipment shall be suitable for the specified use and

working areas and shall be capable of obtaining the
specified results.
Note: Section 4300 : Seals: Materials and general

(a)
4902
MATERIALS
The material shall comply with the requirements specified

for the various types of material in the appropriate sections
of the Specifications and the Project Specifications.
The following grades of binder may be used. The actual
type or grade used shall be as specified in the Project
Specifications or the Schedule of Quantities or as ordered
by the Engineer.
PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
Planing machine
The machine shall be of a design which will be suitable for

planing the existing surfacing in order to remove any
irregularities and to leave an even surface without tearing
the underlying material. An approved milling machine may
be used.
Before planing may start, the Contractor shall demonstrate
to the Engineer that the machine is capable of executing the
work in accordance with the Project Specifications.
4900-1
(b)
The nominal rates of application shall be:
Patching and repairing edge breaks
Only approved cutting or sawing equipment may be used for

cutting or sawing asphalt layers. The equipment shall be
capable of cutting asphalt layers to depths of 200 mm in one
operation without fragmenting the material, and in straight
lines within the required tolerances.
Emulsion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 R net bitumen/m2

Aggregate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0035 m3/m2
The following items of plant and equipment shall also be

available and in good working order:
It can be anticipated that spraying and spreading will have

to be carried out in narrow bands varying in width from 0.5 m
to 4.0 m. The emulsion shall be allowed to break before the
aggregate is applied.
(i)
A vibratory roller having a mass approximately equal
to that of a Bomag 765 or similar vibratory roller, with an
adjustable amplitude and frequency of vibration.
(ii)
A mobile compressor capable of producing at least
3 m3/minute compressed air at 750 kPa.
(iii)
Appropriate paving breakers.
(iv)
Manually-operated
required.
pneumatic
compactors
The actual rates of application shall be as instructed by the

Engineer.
As soon as the aggregate has been applied, the distribution

thereof shall be corrected by light handbrooming or by
means of a light broom drag.
Rollings shall be carried out as specified in Subclause
4307(b). Any excess aggregate remaining on the road after
it has been opened for two days or more shall be removed.
as
(c)
(v)
(c)
Treatment Type 3
Appropriate concrete mixers.
Crack sealing
This treatment shall be used when an existing surface

treatment, which is open-textured or exhibits cracking,
requires treatment with bituminous slurry.
Over and above the equipment normally used for surface

treatments, the following additional equipment shall be
available for crack sealing:
Prior to treatment with a slurry, the surface shall be sprayed

with a tack coat of 30% bitumen emulsion at the rate
(i)
Special spraying equipment with 2 mm nozzle
openings and provided with spare nozzles.
A distinction shall be made in respect of the payment for the

following two methods of construction:
(ii)
Special heating equipment where appropriate for
cleaning cracks, and custom-built applicators for applying
sealants to cracks.
(a)
Where the slurry can only be applied by hand
methods or where the Engineer so directs or where it is
specified that the slurry shall be applied by hand methods.
4904
(b)
Where the slurry can be applied mechanically with a
spreader box.
TREATMENT OF SURFACE DEFECTS
Before any treatment is carried out, the area to be treated

shall be cleaned and prepared and any major failures shall
be repaired as specified in the Project Specifications.
(a)
Treatment Type 1
This treatment shall be applied where the existing surface is

deficient in binder.
The treatment shall consist of the application of a fog spray
of the specified grade of emulsion to the existing surface by
means of a pressure distributor at the rates of application as
directed by the Engineer, in widths that may vary from 0.5 m
to 4.0 m.
(b)
Treatment Type 2
This treatment, or a sand seal as specified in Section 4700,

is intended for application where marked differences in
texture occur in the existing surfacing, in order to obtain a
uniform texture before resealing.
A tack coat of the specified type and grade of emulsion shall
be applied to the surface as specified in Subclause 4307(b)
followed by an application of double-washed crusher sand.
The crusher sand shall be the medium grade specified for
slurry in Clause 4302, but shall be on the coarse side of the
grading envelope.
4900-2
The slurry shall be prepared, mixed and applied as specified

in Subclauses 4604(c), (d), and (e), with the following
exceptions:
(a)
Slurry to be applied by hand may be mixed in a
suitable concrete mixer.
(b)
The slurry shall, in the case of application by
spreader box, be applied in a single layer at a nominal rate,
for tendering purposes, of 0.004 m3/m2. When applied by
hand with brooms or rubber squeegees, the slurry shall be
worked into cracks and other open areas until a sound,
uniform surface is obtained.
(d)
Treatment Type 4
This treatment is intended for use where the road surface is

uneven or contains slacks, bumps or minor rutting caused
by deformation of the pavement layers, but not by failure of
these layers.
The surface to be treated shall, after having been cleaned
and prepared, be given a tack coat of 30% bitumen
emulsion at rates directed in the field by the Engineer.
Asphalt used shall consist of a medium or fine-grade
asphalt-surfacing mix manufactured as specified in Table
4202/3 and with 6% of 80/100 penetration-grade bitumen
and 1.0% active filler. The actual composition of the mix
used shall be as directed by the Engineer or as dictated by

the required thickness of the asphalt layer.
The asphalt shall be applied as specified in Section 4200 in
thicknesses varying between 6 mm and 25 mm depending
on the nature of the irregularities that occur so that the final
surface will conform to the surface tolerances for cross
section and smoothness as specified in Clause 4212.
Where the thickness of asphalt required exceeds 25 mm, it
shall be laid in separate layers each not exceeding 25 mm
thickness.
If the final surfacing shows signs of ravelling, disintegration,
or an uneven surface, the surface shall be given a Type 3
Treatment or removed and replaced, all at the Contractor's
cost.
(e)
Treatment Type 5
(b)
Excavating pavement material
Unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer, the patching

shall have a neat rectangular shape. The existing material
shall be excavated and removed to the full specified depth.
Asphalt layers and surfacing shall be cut with approved
sawing equipment.
Excavation for patching shall be cut with sideslopes of
approximately 60 to the horizontal.
Where required, excavation shall be done with an approved
milling plant in accordance with Section 3800.
Excavated material from each pavement layer shall be
placed in separate stockpiles adjacent to the patch. The
stockpiled material shall be re-used or spoiled in an
approved manner in accordance with the Engineers
instructions. Stockpiled material shall not be spoiled next to
the road.
This treatment is used where the road surface is uneven

and where depressions, humps or small grooves occur,
which, in the opinion of the Engineer, are the result of the
deformation of the pavement layers, but not of structural
failure of the pavement.
After completion of the excavation to the specified depth, the

Engineer shall be afforded the opportunity to examine it.
Where required, the floor of the excavation shall be
compacted to the specified density for the layer concerned.
Where both planing and screening are specified, the screed

shall be placed after the planing has been completed.
(c)
Where milling is required, it shall be done in accordance

with the requirements of Section 3800.
Backfilling excavations
The existing surface shall be swept clean or cleaned by

other approved methods to be free from dust, soil, gravel,
loose stones or any other undesirable material. A tack coat
of 30% anionic stable-grade emulsion shall then be applied
at a rate prescribed by the Engineer.
(i)
Excavations shall be backfilled with pavement
material as specified in the Project Specifications or as
ordered by the Engineer, and the backfilling shall be
compacted and finished to the required levels. The
requirements for material quality, density and finish specified
in other appropriate Sections shall remain applicable.
Untested material from the sides of the road shall not be
used.
The bituminous material used for the screed shall be asphalt

or course slurry as specified in the Project Specifications.
Stabilised materials shall be mixed in concrete mixers or by

other approved equipment.
The slurry shall be prepared in accordance with Subclause

4904(c).
Subbase and base materials shall be permitted.
The asphalt shall be prepared in accordance with Subclause

4904(d).
(ii)
Unless otherwise specified in the Project
Specifications, the base shall be backfilled in accordance
with the following requirements.
4905
PATCHING
(1)
The base material shall be placed in a concrete
mixer, and water shall be added to moisten the material.
(a)
Demarcation
The Engineer will demarcate any failed areas to be repaired,

and shall instruct the Contractor in regard to the repair work
to be done.
The Contractor shall give adequate notice to the Engineer
of his intention to commence with repair work on any
specific section of the road so that the Engineer will have
sufficient time to demarcate the areas to be patched and
repaired.
In addition to his specified responsibilities for the
accommodation of traffic, the Contractor shall also be
responsible for traffic accommodation during the
demarcation work.
In addition to the provisions of Section 4900 the various
provisions of Sections 3200, 3400, 3500, 3600, 3800, 4100
and 4200 amongst others shall apply mutatis mutandis.
(2)
A suitably diluted 60% stable-grade anionic bitumen
emulsion shall be added at the specified rate.
(3)
Ordinary Portland cement shall be added at a rate of
1.0% by mass to the dry aggregate before adding water,
unless otherwise specified.
(4)
During mixing the fluid content (water plus emulsion)
shall not exceed the optimum fluid content (optimum
moisture content + percentage residual bitumen) of the
base. Mixing shall continue until a uniform mix of the base
material and the emulsion is obtained.
(5)
The Contractor shall place and spread the stabilised
material by hand in layers of appropriate thickness. Each
layer shall be compacted with a hand-operated selfpropelled vibratory roller to the specified density. The
process of placing, spreading and compacting shall be
repeated until the required total thickness of base is
obtained.
The stabilised materials shall be placed at a fluid content not
exceeding the optimum fluid content for the base.
4900-3
(d)
Restrictions
Unless otherwise instructed in writing by the Engineer, the

excavation, backfilling and all patching work, complete as
specified, for any patch shall be carried out and completed
on the same day. Special attention shall be given during
patching to controlling and protecting traffic, as specified.
4906
REPAIRING EDGE BREAKS
This treatment is intended for use where trimming and/or

repair of the edges of the surfaced area is required,
including restoring the road edges to the true edge lines of
the original road or to such other edge line as may be
required.
Where the existing edge of the surfacing is sound but
exceeds the required width by more than 150 mm, the
excess surfacing shall be cut back to the required width
keeping it parallel to the centre line of the road.
Where the edges of the surfacing have broken away or
where the surfacing is narrower than the required new width,
the existing broken edges shall be cut back until a sound
edge can be obtained.
Where the edge of the surfacing, as cut back, requires
building up to bring it to the required width, all material
between the edge of the surfacing and the line to which the
surfacing has to be built up, shall be removed to a depth of
60 mm below the final road surface or until firm material is
found, and the surface so exposed shall be cleaned,
watered and primed at a rate of 0.6 R/m2 with a 60% stablegrade emulsion diluted with three parts of water to one part
of emulsion. The exposed surface may also be compacted
with suitably sized vibratory rollers to ensure a sound
surface.
The edges shall then be built up with the asphalt specified
for Treatment Type 4 and shall be well compacted by means
of a suitable vibratory roller or compactor. The built-up
edges shall be finished neatly to the required line and levels.
4907
CRACK SEALING
(i)
General
The types of cracks treated will be specified in the Project

Specifications. The Engineer will instruct the Contractor
regarding the type of treatment to be used in the various
cases.
(ii)
Preparation
The cracks shall be blown clean with compressed air, and

all foreign and loose material shall be removed from the
cracks.
A supply of approved environmentally compatible herbicide
diluted in accordance with the requirements of the Project
Specifications shall be prepared. The solution shall be
sprayed into cracks on the surfaced shoulders of the road or
on such extended area as specified in the Project
Specifications by means of rucksack type sprayers, and
allowed to dry. Care shall be taken to spray only
undesirable plants and spray drift shall not affect adjacent
vegetation or fall onto water courses.
4900-4
Twenty-four hours after application of the herbicide, the

cracks shall be penetrated with primer specified by the
Engineer.
(iii)
Cracks narrower than 3 mm
Cracks narrower than 3 mm shall be treated with an

emulsion or by means of resealing the surface.
(iv)
Cracks 3 mm and wider
After the primer has been applied, anionic stable-grade

emulsion shall be mixed with synthetic modifiers, as
specified in the Project Specifications, and applied by
means of pneumatic spraying equipment or other approved
equipment at the rate specified in the Project Specifications.
Where the cracks are to be rolled, the Contractor, in
accordance with the Project Specifications or the
prescriptions of the Engineer, shall treat the cracks as
described below.
Where volcano cracks occur and these require to be
flattened, in accordance with the Project Specifications or
the prescriptions of the Engineer, the Contractor shall treat
the cracks as follows:
(1)
The cracks shall initially be treated for cleaning out
and priming the crack as described above.
(2)
The surface on either side of the crack shall be
sprayed with an approved rejuvenator for a width of 300 mm
on either side of the crack and allowed to soften the existing
surface.
(3)
The crack shall then be filled with cold rubber slurry
which shall be worked in with rubber squeegees. Any
excess slurry shall be removed from the sides of the crack.
(4)
Once the emulsion has broken, the crack can be
rolled with a pedestrian vibratory roller until a smooth finish
is obtained.
For other cracks, the instructions of the Engineer shall be
implemented. Cracks shall be treated with cold rubber
slurry, hot bitumen rubber, or any other approved sealant.
Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, the above treatments
are not suitable for the existing cracks, the Contractor shall
treat the cracks in accordance with the instructions of the
Engineer.
Rubber slurry
The rubber slurry mixture shall be proportioned as follows
(by volume):
10.0 parts of rubber crumbs
4.5 parts of 60% anionic stable-grade bitumen emulsion
0.2 parts of ordinary Portland cement
1.1 parts of SBR (net rubber)(anionic emulsified rubber)
Water may be added to improve workability. The mixture
shall be neatly worked into the cracks by rubber squeegees.
Excess slurry shall be removed from the surface as soon as
the emulsion has broken.
Bitumen rubber
Bitumen rubber may be used only where the Contractor is
able to convince the Engineer that he is able to mix, heat
and apply the material satisfactorily.
The bitumen rubber shall be mixed on the site or at another

approved locality on condition that the Contractor is able to
propose efficacious methods for controlling both the mixing
process and the end product.
Item
Approved heating equipment and mechanical equipment for

mixing and applying the mixture shall be used.
(a)
The rubber content of the mix shall be at least 25% by mass

of the total bitumen-rubber mix.
Other sealants
Other approved sealants shall comply with and be applied
in accordance with the requirements of the Project
Specifications.
(v)
Restrictions
Cracks may be sealed only where the temperature of the

road surface exceeds 10C. Crack sealing may not be done
within three days after rain has fallen on the site, unless
otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
Unit
49.02 Treatment Type 2

(crusher-sand seal):
60% bitumen emulsion . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
litre (R)
(b)
Application of doublewashed slurry aggregate . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement for binder application shall be the
litre, measured at spraying temperature. The unit of
measurement for the double-washed slurry aggregate shall
be the cubic metre of aggregate applied, measured loose in
the truck and corrected for bulking as described in Item
46.05.
furnishing all materials, demarcating the areas to be
sprayed, spraying the binder and applying the aggregate,
rolling, sweeping and all other incidentals necessary for
completing the work as specified.
The Contractor shall note that a single application of crack

sealant is usually insufficient and that the application will
have to be repeated.
Item
4909
(a)
Tack coat using 30%
bitumen emulsion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
OPENING TO TRAFFIC
The road shall be left open to traffic for such period as the
Engineer may direct before further surface treatment work
is carried out.
4910
JOINTS AND THE PROTECTION OF KERBS
The requirements of Subclause 4307(b) regarding joints

between sprays and the protection of kerbs, channels, etc,
shall be observed.
4911
Unit

(slurry):
(b)
Slurry applied by hand . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(c)
Slurry applied by
spreader box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
The unit of measurement for tack coat shall be the litre of
emulsion measured at spraying temperature and applied as
specified. The unit of measurement for slurry applied by
hand shall be the cubic metre of saturated fine aggregate
used, measured as described in Item 46.05. The unit of
measurement for slurry applied by spreader box shall be the
square metre of area to which the slurry is applied as
specified.
Item
Unit

(fog spray):
(a)
30% bitumen emulsion . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
litre (R)
(b)
60% bitumen emulsion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
The unit of measurement for Treatment Type 1 (fog spray)

shall be the litre of bituminous emulsion sprayed, measured
cleaning and preparing the existing surface, for furnishing
the material and applying the fog spray and for all other
incidentals necessary for completing the work as specified.

procuring and furnishing all the materials, for mixing and
applying the slurry, demarcating all areas to be treated and
for all plant, labour and incidentals necessary to complete
the work as specified.
Item
Unit
49.04 Variation in rate of

application of slurry
(variations apply to
Subitem 49.03(c) only) . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
additional or reduced slurry applied, measured as specified
for Item 46.05.
1213.
4900-5
Item
Unit
49.05 Treatment Type 4:

(asphalt skim coat):
(a)
Tack coat using 30%
(b)
Continuously-graded
asphalt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tonne (t)
The unit of measurement for the tack coat shall be the litre
of emulsion applied, measured at spraying temperature.
The unit of measurement for asphalt shall be the tonne of
asphalt laid according to the Specifications.
The tendered rate for tack coat shall include full
compensation for procuring, furnishing and applying the tack
coat and demarcating the areas to be sprayed, and for all
The tendered rate for asphalt shall include full compensation
for procuring, furnishing and mixing all the materials
required for applying the asphalt, and for all transport and
other incidentals necessary to complete the work as
specified.
Item
Unit
49.06 Treatment Type 5:

(screed)
(a)
Tack coat using 30%
(b)
Continuously-graded
asphalt (specify grade) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tonne (t)
(c)
Course grade slurry . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
Item
Unit
49.07 Sawing asphalt or

cemented pavement
layers for patching:
(a)
Sawing asphalt to an average

depth:
(i)
square metre (m2)
(ii)

exceeding 100 mm . . . . . . . .
square metre (m2)
(iii)
Exceeding 100 mm . . . . . . . .
square metre (m2)
(b)
Sawing cemented pavement

layers to an average depth:
(i)
square metre (m2)
(ii)

exceeding 100 mm . . . . . . . .
square metre (m2)
(iii)
Exceeding 100 mm . . . . . . . .
square metre (m2)

sawcut area calculated in accordance with the authorised
length of sawcut and the average saw depth measured after
excavation of the material.
plant, equipment, labour, supervision, materials, transport
and for all incidentals for sawing the asphalt and the
cemented pavement layers, complete as specified and
Item
Unit
The unit of measurement for the tack coat shall be the litre
of emulsion applied, measured at spraying temperature.
The unit of measurement for asphalt shall be the tonne of
asphalt laid according to the Specifications. The unit of
measurement for course grade slurry shall be the cubic
metre of aggregate mix used in the slurry.
49.08 Excavation in existing

pavements for patching in:
The tendered rate for tack coat shall include full

compensation for procuring, furnishing and applying the tack
coat and demarcating the areas to be sprayed, and for all
The tendered rate for asphalt shall include full compensation
for procuring, furnishing and mixing all the materials
required for applying the asphalt, and for all transport and
other incidentals necessary to complete the work as
specified.
The tendered rate for slurry shall include full compensation
for all materials, equipment and labour for producing and
applying the slurry, irrespective of the number of
applications required to attain the required thickness.
4900-6
(a)
Asphalt layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(b)
Cemented layers . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(c)
Other layers (specify type) . . .
square metre (m3)

material excavated from the existing pavement. The
quantity shall be computed in accordance with the
authorised dimensions of the excavation.
demarcating the excavation, excavating the material, placing
the excavated material in temporary stockpiles, spoiling of
material in the stockpiles where ordered by the Engineer,
including haul over a free-haul distance of 1.0 km, complete
as specified.
Payment will distinguish between the different types of
pavement material excavated.
Item
Unit
Item
Unit
49.11 Edge breaks:
49.09 Backfilling of
excavations for
patching with:
(a)
Trimming edges of
existing surfacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(a)
Chemically stabilised pavement

material (specify the pavement material
and the stabilising agent) for a patch
with a surface area:
(b)
Reconstructing edges
from continuously-graded
asphalt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tonne (t)
(i)
Not exceeding 5 m2
The unit of measurement for trimming edges shall be the

metre of pavement edge cut back and trimmed as specified.
(ii)
Exceeding 5 m2 but not

exceeding 100 m2 . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(iii)
Exceeding 100 m2 . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement for reconstructing pavement edges

shall be the tonne of continuously-graded asphalt furnished
and compacted as specified.
(b)
Base material stabilised

with bituminous emulsion (specify
the emulsion) for a patch with a
surface area:
The tendered rate for trimming the edges shall include full
compensation for cutting back the edges as directed, and
removing and dumping of all excavated and loose material
in an approved waste site.
(i)
Not exceeding 5 m2
(ii)
Exceeding 5 m2 but not

exceeding 100 m2 . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(iii)
Exceeding 100 m2 . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
The tendered rate for reconstructing pavement edges shall

include full compensation for compacting the surface on
which the new edge is to be constructed and procuring,
furnishing and mixing all materials and compacting and
trimming the asphalt to the required lines and levels. It shall
also include full compensation for applying a tack coat of
emulsion to the surface to be treated.
. . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
. . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of the

specified chemically or bituminously stabilised pavement
material placed in accordance with the specified
requirements. The quantity will be computed in accordance
with the authorised dimensions of the layer.
providing all the material, irrespective of its origin, including
gravel (notwithstanding the provisions of Section 1600), for
all mixing, placing, compacting and finishing as specified in
this Section and other appropriate Sections of the
Specifications, for all transport, work in restricted areas, and
also for all machinery, equipment, labour, supervision and
other incidentals for executing the work as specified.
chemical or bituminous stabilisation, including amongst
others the provision and application of the stabilising agents.
Item

transport, handling, labour, material and all incidentals
necessary to complete all the work specified in the
treatment of edge breaks.
Item
Unit
49.12 Cleaning the cracks

with compressed air . . . . . . . . . . kilometre (km)
The unit of measurement for cleaning the cracks with
compressed air shall be the kilometre of road along which all
the cracks have been blown clean.
providing all equipment, labour, supervision and incidentals
for blowing clean the cracks over the full width of the road to
Unit
49.10 Compacting the floor

of excavations for
patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
excavation floor compacted on the instruction of the
Engineer, and the quantity shall be computed in accordance
with the authorised dimensions of the excavation floor.
Item
Unit
49.13 Applying bituminous binders,

herbicides and insecticides
for sealing cracks
(a)
Herbicides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
(b)
Insecticides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)

compacting the floor of excavations complete as specified.
(c)
MSP/1 or similar primer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
Payment will not distinguish between the various methods

of compaction or various density requirements.
(d)
Anionic stable-grade emulsion
mixed with synthetic modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
(e)
Hot bitumen rubber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
(f)
Other specified agents

(Type indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
4900-7
The unit of measurement shall be the litre of material

applied as specified or as instructed by the Engineer.
providing, mixing, heating (where required) and applying all
the materials specified, and for all equipment, labour,
supervision and incidentals for completing the work. No
additional payment shall be made for multiple applications
of material, and payment will not distinguish between the
various types, widths or lengths of cracks.
Item
Unit
49.14 Cold rubber-slurry for

sealing cracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement for crack treatment with rubber
slurry shall be the cubic metre of fine rubber crumbs used
for preparing the mix.
4900-8

procuring and providing all the material, including emulsion,
synthetic modifiers, cement and water, and for mixing and
applying the mixture, and for all equipment, labour,
supervision, and incidentals for executing the work in
accordance with the Specifications.
Payment will not be made for redundant rubber pellets or
redundant mixture or for mixture which, in the opinion of the
Engineer, has been wasted.
Item
Unit
49.15 Rolling the cracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)

The unit of measurement shall be a metre of crack rolled to
SERIES 5000
ANCILLARY ROADWORKS
5100
5200
5300
5400
5500
5600
5700
5800
5900
Guide blocks
Guardrails
Fencing
Road signs
Road markings
Cattle grids
Landscaping and planting plants
Finishing the road and road reserve and treating old roads
Painting
4900-9
4900-10
SERIES 5000 :
ANCILLARY ROADWORKS
SECTION 5100 :
MARKER AND KILOMETRE POSTS
CONTENTS
5101
5102
5103
5104
5105
5106
SCOPE
MATERIALS
FABRICATING
SPACING THE MARKER AND KILOMETRE POSTS
ERECTING
5101
SCOPE
This Section covers the supply and erection of marker posts

in positions and in accordance with the dimensions shown
on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
5102
MATERIALS
(a)
Concrete
5105
Marker posts shall be erected after the seal has been

completed. They shall be located at such spacing as the
Engineer directs with their outside edges in line with the
shoulder breakpoint. The edge on which the recess is
located is the inner edge. The tops of the marker blocks
shall be at a constant height above the centreline of the
road.
Holes shall be excavated in the shoulder and the marker
posts placed vertically and square to the road centre line.
Backfilling shall be compacted in 100 mm layers right from
the bottom of the hole. Surplus excavated material shall be
disposed of as directed.
The marker posts shall be painted immediately after having
been placed.
Marker posts shall be maintained and protected during the
entire construction period and any that are damaged or
broken before the certificate of completion has been issued,
shall be repaired or replaced, as may be required, at the
Contractor's own cost.

provisions of Sections 6200, 6300 and 6400.
5106
(b)
Item
Paint
ERECTING
Unit
Paint for marker and kilometre posts shall be nonreflectorised road-marking paint as specified in Section
5500. Paint for the recess in the marker posts shall be Codit
or a similar approved retro-reflective paint.
51.01 Marker posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
5103

supplying all materials and labour, making and transporting
the marker posts, setting out, excavating and backfilling all
the holes and disposing of surplus excavated material,
including a free-haul of 1.0 km, placing and painting the
marker posts and all the equipment, the tools and incidentals
necessary for completing and maintaining the Works
described in this Section.
FABRICATING
Marker and kilometre posts shall be fabricated to the

dimensions shown on the Drawings. A mixture of four parts
of concrete sand to one part of Portland cement shall be
used. The forms shall be smooth and shall have accurate
dimensions. The mixture shall be placed in the forms and
vibrated on a vibrating table or by other approved means.
The posts shall be reinforced as shown on the Drawings and
shall have an F3 surface finish.
The posts shall be true to shape, smooth, and without any
honeycombing or other blemishes.
The recess near the top of the marker post shall be painted
with the reflective paint specified, while the remainder of the
exposed portion of the post shall be painted with white roadmarking paint.
5104
SPACING THE MARKER AND KILOMETRE POSTS
The marker posts shall be spaced as shown on the

The unit of measurement shall be the number of marker

posts supplied and erected in accordance with the
Specifications.
Item
Unit
51.02 Kilometre posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)

The unit of measurement shall be the number of kilometre
posts supplied and erected in accordance with the
Specifications.
supplying all materials and labour, making and transporting
the kilometre posts, setting out, excavating and backfilling all
the holes and disposing of surplus excavated material,
including a free-haul of 1.0 km, placing and painting the
kilometre posts and all the equipment, the tools and
incidentals necessary for completing and maintaining the
Works described in this Section.
5100-1
5100-2
CONTENTS
chrome-arsenic compound for timber preservation, which

complies with SABS 673 or equivalent, or with a creosote
which complies with SABS 538 or SABS 539 or equivalent.
The preservative specified in the Project Specifications shall
be used. After the posts have been treated, they shall not be
sawn, drilled or shaped.
5201
5202
5203
5204
5205
Where, however, the cutting of posts is unavoidable after

having been treated, the Engineer may permit the required
length to be cut off from the bottom of a post, provided that
the exposed area is subsequently thoroughly treated with
creosote.
SERIES 5000 :
ANCILLARY ROADWORKS
SECTION 5200 :
GUARDRAILS
5206
SCOPE
MATERIALS
CONSTRUCTION
REQUIREMENTS
REMOVING, RENOVATING AND RE-ERECTING
THE EXISTING GUARDRAILS
5201
SCOPE
This Section covers the supplying, installing and maintaining

of metal guardrails at locations and in accordance with the
details, dimensions and design shown on the Drawings or
5202
MATERIALS
(a)
Guardrails
Guardrails shall comply with the requirements of SABS 1350

or equivalent.
The dimensions of guardrails and end units shall be in
Guardrails shall be supplied together with all the bolts, nuts,
washers and fixing materials required, including the bolts for
fixing the guardrails to the posts.
(i)
Galvanising
Unless specified in the Project Specifications, all guardrails

shall be galvanised with a hot-dip (galvanised) zinc coating
which complies with the requirements of SABS 763 or
equivalent for the coating of Type A1 articles.
Timber posts shall not exhibit excessive cracking at the

ends, particularly cracks aligned at an angle to the guardrail
exceeding 45E. Posts which, in the opinion of the Engineer,
exhibit a degree of cracking that would render them unfit for
service during a much shorter than normal life shall not be
used.
(ii)
Steel posts
Normally only timber posts shall be used for supporting the

guardrails, but under certain circumstances, eg where
guardrails are placed on concrete retaining walls, steel posts
shall be used. Steel posts shall be of the type and size
shown on the Drawings or described in the Project
Specifications.
(c)
Reflective plates
V-shaped reflective plates shall be manufactured from

1.5 mm thick mild steel plate to the dimensions shown on
the Drawings. When supplied with galvanised guardrails,
they shall also be galvanised, and when supplied with
painted guardrails, they shall be finished in white baked
enamel.
The outer surfaces shall be coated with
engineering-grade retro-reflective material which complies
with the provisions of CKS 191 in the colours shown on the
Drawings. Holes for fixing shall be drilled before the
reflective plates may be galvanised or painted.
5203
CONSTRUCTION
All bolts, nuts and washers shall have a hot-dip (galvanised)

zinc coating which complies with the requirements of SABS
763 for the coating of Type C1 articles or equivalent.
Galvanised guardrails shall not be nested when stacked for
storage.
(a)
Erection
(b)
Guardrail posts
(i)
Timber posts
The holes for the timber posts shall be spaced to suit the
standard length of the guardrail supplied. Where shown on
the Drawings or directed by the Engineer, posts shall be set
at half the normal spacings. The hole for the concrete block
at the end of a length of guardrail shall be neatly excavated
and the top 120 mm shuttered.
Timber posts shall be supplied in lengths as shown on the

Drawings and shall comply with the requirements of SABS
457 or equivalent.
Posts shall have a top diameter of not less than 150 mm.
Posts with a top diameter up to 230 mm will be acceptable,
provided that posts with widely varying diameters shall not
be used together in the same length of guardrail.
Posts shall be drilled and shaped as shown on the Drawings
and provided with the necessary bolts, nuts, washers and
spacer blocks for fixing.
Timber posts and spacer blocks shall be treated in
accordance with SABS 05 or equivalent with a copper-
The holes for the timber posts shall be of sufficient size to

permit the proper setting of the posts and to allow sufficient
room for backfilling the hole and tamping the filling. At least
1.0 m of a post shall be embedded in the ground.
The posts, spacer blocks (if applicable) and guardrails shall

be completely erected and set true to line and level, so that
the guardrails will be at the required height above the level
of the completed road shoulder. Where jointed, the end of
the guardrails which overlaps on the side of the traffic shall
point in the direction of the traffic movement. The guardrail
shall be suitably braced to prevent any movement, and all
bolts shall be tightened prior to any holes being backfilled.
After the Engineer has signified his approval of the
guardrails so erected, the holes shall be backfilled with a
12:1 soil cement mixture. The material shall be mixed with
5200-1
the correct quantity of water to ensure that the mixture will

be placed while at or near the optimum moisture content.
5205
The mixture shall then be placed and thoroughly rammed in

layers not exceeding 100 mm of compacted thickness. The
approach ends, where the guardrail has to be bent down
and anchored, shall be constructed as shown on the
Drawings.
Every effort should be made to reuse existing guardrails

rather than dispose of them and purchase new units.
When the backfilling has been completed and the bracing

removed, the posts shall be rigid and vertical, and the
guardrail shall be true to line and level and firmly fixed to the
posts. Excess excavated material shall be disposed of as
Steel posts shall be erected and fixed as shown on the
Drawings.
All guardrails shall be so erected as to have no projecting
ends which might interfere with or endanger traffic. The
edges and the centre of the guardrails shall touch either the
spacer block or the post where no spacer blocks are used.
Guardrails, if specified, shall be provided with end units as
shown on the Drawings. All splices of guardrails shall be at
posts, and guardrails shall make contact over the entire area
of the splice.
Reflective plates shall be fixed in accordance with the
details shown on the Drawings. The reflective surfaces shall
be arranged with the colours as shown on the Drawings.
Where existing guardrails have to be removed, or removed

and re-erected, or removed, renovated and re-erected, the
three processes of removal, renovation and re-erection shall
be carried out as follows:
(a)
Painting
The following instructions shall apply where guardrails are

to be painted:
(i)
Before being fixed, the guardrails shall be cleaned,
primed and painted as specified in Clause 5908. After
erection, all abraded or damaged surfaces shall be
repainted as specified in Clause 5908. Galvanised
guardrails shall not be painted.
(ii)
When existing guardrails are required to be
repainted, they shall be thoroughly cleaned with wire
brushes and descaled with suitable tools to remove all rust
and loose and oxidised paint. They shall then be washed
down and all exposed steel surfaces shall be given a coat of
zinc based primer.
(iii)
The entire prepared surface shall then be given a full
coat of zinc based primer and two coats of paint as specified
in Clause 5908.
5204
REQUIREMENTS
The completed guardrail shall have a neat appearance, and

shall not show any visible deviations from line and grade.
The posts shall be straight and vertical. The guardrails shall
not be warped but shall be in a vertical plane parallel to the
road centre line except at flared terminal sections. The
painted or galvanised surface on the guardrail shall be
smooth and continuous and free from abrasions or
scratches. Any damage to the surface shall be repaired at
the Contractor's expense.
Guardrails which do not comply with the prescribed
requirements shall be replaced or otherwise repaired at the
Contractors expense.
5200-2
Removing the guardrails
All guardrails, reflective plates and end units shall be

loosened. Posts shall be carefully dug out and the holes
shall be filled and compacted in 150 mm layers. Items used
for fixing, such as bolts, nuts and washers, together with the
reflective plates, shall be placed into bags, after which all
the material shall be transported to a store approved by the
Engineer and all stored in groups by type.
Where material is intended for re-use, it shall first be
unpacked for inspection by the Engineer for deciding which
material will be suitable for re-use. Suitable material shall
then be stored separately from material which is unsuitable
for re-use.
(b)
(b)
REMOVING, RENOVATING AND RE-ERECTING

EXISTING GUARDRAILS
Renovating the guardrails
Guardrails and end units suitable for re-use shall be taken

to the workshop for cleaning and painting. Rust and existing
paint shall be completely removed and minor indentations
hammered out. The guardrails shall then be regalvanised
or receive surface treatment and be painted as described in
Clause 5908.
Posts suitable for re-use shall be cleaned and treated with
a timber preservative as described in Subclause 5202(b).
Bolts, nuts and washers to be re-used shall be cleaned and
all rust removed, and shall then be oiled.
(c)
Re-erection
The guardrails shall be erected in the positions as indicated,

and all the removed material suitable for re-use and as
much supplementary new material as may be necessary
shall be used. Re-erection shall be as specified for new
guardrails, including fixing the retro-reflective plates.
5206
Item
Unit
52.01 Guardrails on timber

posts:
(a)
Galvanised . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(b)
Painted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of guardrail as

erected, excluding end units.
furnishing all materials and labour and for erecting and
painting and galvanising the guardrails, complete with posts,
spacer blocks, bolts, nuts, washers and reinforcing plates,

and excavating and backfilling the post holes and removing
any surplus excavated material.
Item
Item
(a)
Timber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(b)
Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
Unit
52.02 Guardrails on steel

posts:
(a)
Galvanised . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(b)
Painted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of guardrail

erected, excluding end units.
furnishing all materials and labour and erecting and painting
and galvanising the guardrail, complete with posts, spacer
blocks, bolts, nuts, washers and reinforcing plates and
excavating and backfilling the post holes, including concrete
backfill, and removing any surplus excavated material.
Unit
52.05 Additional guardrail

posts:
The unit of measurement for additional guardrail posts shall

be the number erected over and above those erected in
accordance with the normal spacing shown on the
Drawings.
supplying additional posts, excavating the necessary holes,
erecting the poles, and backfilling the holes.
Item
Unit
52.06 Reflective plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)

The unit of measurement shall be the number of reflective
plates installed.
Item
Unit

52.02 and 52.11 for
horizontally curved guardrails factory bent to a
radius of less than 45 m . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)

supplying all materials and labour required for
manufacturing, painting and fixing the reflective plates as
specified and as shown on the Drawings.
Item
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of curved
guardrail erected and measured in place.
The tendered rate extra over the rates tendered for Items
52.01, 52.02 and 52.11 shall include full compensation for
incidentals in respect of supplying and erecting curved
guardrails.
Item
Unit
52.04 End units:

(a)
End wings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(b)
Terminal sections in
accordance with the Drawings
where single guardrail sections
are used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(c)
Terminal sections in
accordance with the Drawings
where double guardrail sections
are used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
52.07 Removing existing

guardrails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of guardrail
removed, and the quantity shall be measured between the
terminal points of the sections removed, including the end
units, but excluding the anchor blocks and anchor cables, if
any, projecting beyond the end units.
work as described in Subclause 5205(a), including loading,
transporting to any point on the site, and off-loading and
stacking the material.
Item
The unit of measurement shall be the number of end units

of each type erected.
labour, constructional plant and materials required for
installing the end units as shown on the Drawings, including
posts and fittings and the bending of turned-down sections,
excavations, concrete, backfilling and the removal of surplus
backfilling.
Unit
52.08 Renovating guardrail

material:
(a)
Guardrails and
end units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(b)
(d)
Cable stays complete
with anchor block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
Unit
Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurement for Subitem (a) shall be the metre

of single guardrail, whether straight or bent, or end units
renovated as specified, the length of which shall be
measured in accordance with the measurements of the
guardrail after dismantling.
The unit of measurement for Subitem (b) shall be the
number of treated posts.
work as specified in Subclause 5205(b), including the
loading, transporting to and from the workshops, off-loading
and storing of the material.
5200-3
Item
Unit
52.09 Re-erection of guardrails

with recovered material:
(a)
Single guardrail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(b)
Double guardrail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
Apart from anchors, anchor blocks and fixing materials,

payment will be made separately for all new materials. End
units made completely from new materials shall be paid for
in accordance with the appropriate rates for new end units.
Item
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of single or
double guardrail re-erected with used material and
measured between the points where they are joined to the
end units.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for reerecting the guardrails as specified in Subclause 5205(c),
including the loading, transporting between any two points
on the site and off-loading the material, and providing new
fixing material. Payment shall be made separately for any
new material required, including spacer blocks, but not for
other fixing materials. Where sections are made entirely
from new material, payment therefor shall be made under
the appropriate items for new guardrails.
Item
Unit
52.11 New material required for

the re-erection of guardrails with recovered materials:
(a)
Guardrails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(b)
Timber posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(c)
Steel posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(d)
Reflective plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(e)
Spacer blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurement for Subitem (a) shall be the metre

of guardrail provided, measured in accordance with the
measurements of the loose guardrail.
Unit
52.10 Re-erection of end units

with recovered material:
The unit of measurement for Subitems (b), (c), (d) and (e)
shall be the number of new timber posts, steel posts,
reflective plates and spacer blocks provided, respectively.
(b)
Terminal sections with
single guardrails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)

supplying the material as specified. Item 52.03 shall also
apply to horizontally bent guardrail factory bent to a radius
of less than 45 m.
(c)
Terminal sections with
double guardrails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
Item
(d)
Terminal sections complete with anchor block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
52.12 Drilling and blasting

holes for guardrail posts . . . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of end units

erected with recovered and, in part, new material.
The unit of measurement shall be the number of holes

drilled and blasted with explosives in hard material which
cannot be removed by auger.

erecting the end units and for providing all anchors, fixing
materials and anchor blocks.

drilling, explosives, materials, labour and equipment and all
incidentals to be incurred for making holes in hard materials.
(a)
5200-4
End wings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
Unit
SERIES 5000 :
ANCILLARY ROADWORKS
SECTION 5300 :
FENCING
Rolled steel sections shall be provided with a protective

coating of tar or other approved material.
(b)
CONTENTS
5301
5302
5303
5304
5305
5306
5307
5308
5309
5310
5311
5312
5313
5314
SCOPE
MATERIALS
TYPES OF FENCING
PROTECTING LIVESTOCK
CLEARING THE FENCE LINE
ERECTING STRAINING POSTS AND STANDARDS
ERECTING FENCE WIRES
ERECTING DIAMOND MESH OR WIRE NETTING
CLOSING OPENINGS UNDER FENCES
EXISTING FENCES
ERECTING GATES
TEMPORARY FENCING, GATES AND MOTOR
GATES
5301
SCOPE
This Section covers the moving of existing fences where

necessary and erecting new fences along the boundaries of
the road reserve and where elsewhere indicated on the
It shall also include the erection and later removal of
temporary fences. Except when the Engineer allows
otherwise, new and temporary fences shall be erected
before construction on a particular section of the road is
commenced with, or before temporary bypasses are opened
to traffic.
Bolts for stays
Bolts shall be galvanised steel bolts of the required length

and a diameter which shall not be less than 12 mm. All the
necessary bolts, nuts and washers, shall be supplied with
each post.
(c)
Wire
(i)
Barbed wire
Barbed wire shall comply with the requirements of SABS

675 or equivalent and shall be one or more of the following
types:
(1)
High-tensile-grade single-strand 3.15 mm x 2.5 mm
oval-shaped wire, with a 2.81 mm equivalent diameter and
fully galvanised.
(2)
High-tensile-grade single-strand fully galvanised
(first-class coating), 2.8 mm x 1.9 mm in diameter, ovalshaped wire, with a 2.31 mm equivalent diameter. This wire
shall not be used within 500 mm above ground level where
veld fires are common.
(3)
Mild-steel-grade double-strand uni-directional twist
wire, each strand 2.5 mm in diameter, for use at any height
above ground. The wire shall be fully galvanised.
Barbs shall be manufactured from 2 mm galvanised wire
and shall be spaced at not more than 152 mm.
(ii)
Smooth wire
This Section also covers the dismantling of existing fences

and the stacking of the fencing material.
Smooth wire shall comply with the requirements of SABS

675 or equivalent and shall be of the types specified below:
5302
MATERIALS
(1)
Straining wire shall be 4 mm in diameter and fully
galvanised.
(a)
Straining posts, stays, standards and droppers
(2)
Fencing wire shall be high-tensile-grade not less
than 2.24 mm in diameter wire fully galvanised.
Straining posts, stays, standards and droppers shall be of

the type and size indicated on the Drawings. Steel sections
shall comply with the requirements of CKS 82 or equivalent
and timber posts with the requirements of SABS 457 or
equivalent. Timber posts shall be treated with a preservative
in accordance with the requirements of Subclause 5202(b).
(3)
Tying wire shall be not less than 2.5 mm in diameter
mild-steel galvanised wire for tying fencing wire to standards
and droppers and 1.6 mm mild-steel galvanised wire for
tying netting and mesh wire to the fencing wire.
Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, rolled

steel posts shall be 15 or 22 kg/m rails as shown on the
Drawings. Standards shall be 2.5 kg/m Y-sections or timber
standards according to SABS 457 or equivalent.
Droppers shall be 0.56 kg/m ridgeback-pattern droppers or
timber droppers according to SABS 457 or equivalent.
Tubular straining posts and stays shall be galvanised in
accordance with SABS 763 or equivalent for Class B1
articles, or shall be painted as specified in Section 5900 as
may be required on the Drawings, and shall have a wall
thickness of at least 2.95 mm. Unless otherwise shown on
the Drawings, all tubular posts shall be provided with at least
a 200 mm x 200 mm footplate and a pressed-steel or castiron cap. Tubular stays shall have a nominal bore of at least
50 mm.
(d)
Diamond mesh
Diamond mesh (chain-link fencing material) shall comply

with the requirements of SABS 1373 or equivalent. The
width shall be shown on the Drawings and the edge finish
shall be both sides clinched or barbed.
The nominal diameter of the wire shall be 2.5 mm and the
mesh size shall be 64 mm x 64 mm.
The wire shall be fully galvanised.
(e)
Wire netting
Wire netting shall be fully galvanised mild-steel wire with a

minimum diameter of 1.8 mm, with 75 mm hexagonal mesh.
The width shall be as shown on the Drawings.
5300-1
(f)
traffic. No fences shall be cut without the approval of the

Engineer, and consultation with the Owner of the fence.
Barbed-tape concertina wire
Barbed-tape concertina wire shall comply with the

requirements of CKS 592 Type A or equivalent. The hightensile steel wire shall be heavily galvanised (Class A), and
the barbed tape and concertina clamps shall also be heavily
galvanised (Class Z600). The diameter of the roll shall be
950 mm or 700 mm according to requirements.
(g)
Gates
Gates shall be manufactured to the dimensions shown on

the Drawings.
Gates shall be complete in every respect, including hinges,
washers, bolts and locking chains attached to the gate.
Where alternative arrangements cannot be made, the

Engineer may direct the Contractor to erect temporary
fencing where necessary to protect livestock that may be
lost or are exposed to vermin through his operations. Such
fencing shall be of an adequate standard and shall be
erected ahead of construction operations. The fencing shall
be maintained in a good order during construction
operations and, on completion of the work, it shall be
removed from the site and all surfaces shall be restored.
The Engineer may order that any permanent fencing which
is required be erected ahead of construction operations,
where practicable, instead of erecting temporary fencing.
Gate posts shall not be used as straining posts and shall be

according to SABS 457 or equivalent.
Payment for the protection of livestock, excluding the

erection of temporary fences, shall be included in the
amounts tendered for the Contractor's establishment on the
site, as specified in Section 1300.
(h)
5305
Timber posts for wire mats
Timber posts for holding down wire mats where the fence
crosses streams shall comply with the requirements of
SABS 457 or equivalent and shall be in accordance with the
requirements of Subclause 5202(b).
(i)
Manufacturing tolerances for wire
The actual diameter of wire supplied shall nowhere be less

than the specified diameter minus the following tolerances:
Specified diameter
Tolerance
1.0 - 1.8 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.05 mm

2.0 - 2.8 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.08 mm
3.15 - 4.0 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.10 mm
5303
The fence line shall be cleared over a width of at least 1.0 m

on each side of the centre line of the fence and surface
irregularities shall be graded so that the fence will follow the
general contour of the ground. Clearing the line shall include
the removal of all trees, scrub, stumps, isolated boulders or
stones and other obstructions which will interfere with the
construction of the fence. Stumps within the cleared space
shall be grubbed as described in Section 1700. The bottom
of the fence shall be located at a uniform distance above the
ground line in accordance with the requirements shown on
the Drawings. All material removed shall be burnt or
disposed of in disused borrow pits.
Any areas outside the road reserve where clearing is not
permitted by the Owner or is impracticable shall not be
cleared if so directed by the Engineer.
TYPES OF FENCING
5306
The following types of fences shall be erected in accordance

with the dimensions shown on the Drawings:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Stock-proof fences
Vermin-proof fences
Pedestrian fences
Security fences
Where existing fences have to be dismantled and reerected, they shall be erected either to the same design as
the original, but with such modifications as may be required
by the Engineer, or they shall be erected up to one of the
standards specified above, all as ordered by the Engineer.
5304
PROTECTING LIVESTOCK
From the time of occupancy up to the date of the final

maintenance certificate being issued to the Contractor, he
shall take all measures necessary for preventing the ingress
of vermin, and for protecting and controlling livestock, etc,
on the sections of the properties affected by his operations.
He shall provide gates at the positions in existing fences cut
by him for gaining access and shall ensure that all gates are
kept closed except when they are opened for admitting his
5300-2
CLEARING THE FENCE LINE
ERECTING STRAINING POSTS AND STANDARDS
Straining posts shall be erected at all terminal points, low

points (as required), corners and bends in the fencing and
at all junctions with other fences. Straining posts shall not be
spaced further apart than shown on the Drawings. The
length of posts above ground shall be such that the correct
clearance between the lowest wire and the ground can be
obtained.
Straining posts shall be accurately set in holes and shall be
provided with concrete bases to the dimensions shown on
the Drawings.
Holes shall be dug to the full specified depth. Where, on
account of the presence of rock, the holes cannot be
excavated by hand or by pneumatic tools and the Contractor
has to resort to the use of explosives, he will be paid
separately for the drilling and blasting operations required.
All straining posts shall be braced by means of stays or
anchors as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer. Tubular stays shall be bolted to the posts. Gate
posts shall not be used as straining posts but at each gate
post a straining post shall be placed as shown on the
Drawings.
Standards shall be firmly planted into the ground at the
spacings shown on the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer. The spacing of standards between any two

successive straining posts shall be uniform and not greater
than that shown on the Drawings. In rock or hard material
standards shall be either driven or set in holes drilled into
the rock. The size of drilled holes shall provide a tight fit to
the standards. Care shall be taken when driving standards
to prevent their buckling or being damaged.
All straining posts and standards shall be accurately aligned
and set plumb. Where verandah-type security fencing is
used, the posts shall be planted with the overhang on the
road side and perpendicular to the direction of the fence.
After the straining posts and standards have been firmly set
in accordance with the foregoing requirements, fence wires
shall be attached thereto at the spacings shown on the
Drawings.
5307
ERECTING FENCE WIRES
All fencing wire shall be tied to the sides of standards or

posts to prevent the wires from being displaced or becoming
loose. The wire shall be carefully tensioned without sagging,
and true to line, care being exercised not to tension the wire
to such an extent that it will break, or that end, corner,
straining or gate posts will be pulled out, or that it will be
easily damaged during fires.
Each strand of fencing wire shall be securely tied in the
correct position hard up to each standard with soft
galvanised tying wire. The tying wire for each strand shall
pass through a hole or notch in the standard, while the ends
of the tying wire shall be wound at least four times around
the fencing wire to prevent it from moving in a vertical
direction.
At end, corner, straining and gate posts the fencing wire
shall be securely wrapped twice around the post and
secured against slipping by tying the end tightly around the
wire by means of at least six neat tight twists.
Where high-tensile wire is used, two long twists may first be
made followed by the six tight, neat twists around the post
to prevent the wire from breaking at the first twist. When
smooth wire is used, the loose end shall preferably be bent
over and hooked into the notch between the fencing wire
and the first twist.
Splices in the fencing wire shall be permitted if made in the
following manner with a splicing tool. The end of each wire
at the splice shall be taken at least 75 mm past the splicing
tool and wrapped around the other wire by not less than six
complete turns with the two separate wire ends being turned
in opposite directions. After the splicing tool has been
removed, the space left by it in the spliced wire shall be
closed by pulling the wire ends together. Unused wire ends
shall be cut close so as to leave a neat splice.
The gaps between gate posts and the adjacent straining
posts shall be fenced off with short lengths of fencing wires.
Droppers shall be tied to each fence wire with soft tying wire
in the required position as specified for standards to prevent
slippage in a vertical direction. The spacing of droppers
between any two straining posts shall be uniform. Anchoring
to structures shall be done as shown on the Drawings.
Barbed-tape concertina wire shall be attached to the fence
as shown on the Drawings at maximum spaces of 1.0 m
between tying points. Barbed-tape concertina wire rolls shall
be spliced by overlapping for one full circle and tied at four
evenly spaced points along the circumference. Spliced ends

shall coincide with the positions of the standards.
5308
ERECTING DIAMOND MESH OR WIRE NETTING
Where vermin-proof, pedestrian or security fences are

erected, or where instructed by the Engineer, wire netting or
diamond mesh shall be stretched against the fence and
properly tied to the fencing wire as shown on the Drawings.
The diamond mesh or wire netting shall be secured by soft
tying wire at 1.2 m centres along the top and bottom wires
and at 3 m centres along each of the other fencing wires,
unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
In the case of vermin-proof fencing, vermin shall be
prevented from creeping under the fence by either one of
the two methods described below as ordered by the
Engineer:
(a)
By folding back the bottom 130 mm of the wire
netting so that it lies flat on the ground and by tightly packing
stones (having a minimum dimension of 200 mm) end to
end on this flap to secure it in position.
(b)
By embedding the lower 130 mm of the wire netting
in the ground and thoroughly compacting the earth around
it on both sides, to secure the netting.
5309
CLOSING OPENINGS UNDER FENCES
At ditches, streams, drainage channels or other depressions

where the fence cannot be erected so as to follow the
general ground contour, the Contractor shall close the
opening under the fence with horizontal barbed wires at
150 mm spacings, stretched between additional posts or
straining posts as shown on the Drawings or as directed by
the Engineer. In the case of pedestrian, vermin-proof and
security fences the opening shall be covered with strips of
wire netting or diamond mesh 1 000 mm wide, fixed to the
barbed wires.
In the case of larger streams where damming of debris
against the fence would constitute a hazard, the opening
below the bottom fencing wire shall be closed with loosehanging wire nets. For this purpose additional straining
posts shall be planted on both sides of the stream with a
cable consisting of at least five strands of smooth fencing
wire stretched between them. Onto this cable vertical strips
of diamond mesh hanging down to ground level shall be
fixed. The edges of the various strips of diamond mesh shall
be tied to each other so that the entire mat will be raised by
water flowing underneath to leave a free stream area. These
mats at streams shall be erected only when instructed by
the Engineer. If it should be necessary to keep the bottoms
of the mats on the ground, the Engineer may order that
timber posts or pipes be fixed horizontally to the bottom
ends of the diamond-mesh strips.
5310
EXISTING FENCES
Where a new fence joins an existing fence whether in line or

at an angle, the new fence shall be erected with a new
straining post positioned at the terminal point of the existing
fence.
Existing fences that require to be taken down or moved to a
new location shall be dismantled. Material not required for
5300-3
re-erection or unsuitable for re-use shall be neatly stacked

at approved locations in accordance with the Engineer's
instructions. Fencing wire and wire netting shall be stacked
clear of the ground. Payment will be made only for fences
removed in accordance with the written instruction of the
Engineer.
Where fences require moving, the Contractor shall re-use all
the material, declared to be suitable for this purpose by the
Engineer, plus such new material as may be required to
erect the fence again to the standard specified for new
fences. The Engineer shall not be responsible for any delays
or costs arising from the breaking of re-used wire during
straining.
5311
ERECTING GATES
Gates shall be erected at the positions indicated by the

Engineer. The gates shall be hung on gate fittings in
accordance with the requirements shown on the Drawings.
Gates shall be so erected as to swing in a horizontal plane
at right angles to the gate posts, clear of the ground in all
positions. In pedestrian and security fences the double
swing gates shall leave a gap not exceeding 25 mm
between them when closed and other gates shall not be
further than 25 mm from the gate post when closed.
Gates shall be stock-proof to the same extent as the
adjoining fence. The clearance below the gates shall not
exceed 75 mm with the gates closed. Where the gate
crosses a public road, it shall be fitted with a disc or other
device easily visible at night, as instructed by the Engineer.
5312
TEMPORARY FENCING, GATES AND MOTOR

GATES
If required, the Contractor shall erect temporary fencing,

gates and motor gates in accordance with the Drawings,
Project Specifications or the Engineer's instructions. The
material and erection shall be in accordance with the
provisions of this Section, but the material need not
necessarily be new. Where used materials are offered, they
shall be in a good condition and approved in advance by the
Engineer.
When no longer required, the temporary fencing, gates and
motor gates shall be dismantled and removed.
5313
The completed fence shall be plumb, taut, true to line and

ground contour, with all posts, standards and stays firmly
set. The height of the lower fencing wire above the ground
at posts and standards shall not deviate by more
than 25 mm from that shown on the Drawings. Other fencing
wires shall not deviate by more than 10 mm from their
prescribed vertical positions.
The Contractor shall, on completion of each section of
fence, remove all cut-offs and other loose wire or netting so
as not to create a hazard to grazing animals or a nuisance
to the Owners of the ground.
5300-4
5314
Item
Unit
53.01 Clearing the fence line,

2 m wide strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kilometre (km)
The unit of measurement for clearing the fence line shall be
the kilometre of fence line measured along each fence line.
The tendered rate shall be in full compensation for clearing
the fence line as specified, including the removal of trees,
stones, and other obstructions and the disposal of all waste
material resulting from clearing operations, as may be
directed.
The removal of trees and stumps with a girth
exceeding 1.0 m shall be paid for as specified in
Section 1700.
Item
Unit
53.02 Supplying and erecting new

fencing material for new
fences and for supplementing material in existing
fences which are being
repaired or removed:
(a)
Barbed wire (grade,
size and type of galvanising
indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kilometre (km)
(b)
Smooth wire (grade,
size and type of galvanising
(c)
Diamond mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(d)
Wire netting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(e)
wire
Barbed-tape concertina
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kilometre (km)
(f)
Steel and timber straining posts, including
anchors (type, size and length
and whether galvanised, treated
or painted indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(g)
Steel and timber standards (length and
type indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(h)
Steel and timber droppers (length and
(i)
Timber posts to be
fixed to the bottom of wire
mesh in streams (diameter
The quantity of material used shall be determined by
measuring the quantities of individual items of material used
in the completed fence. The linear measurement of the
completed fence shall not apply.
The appropriate units of measurement are as follows:

(i)
(b)
Double leaf (size and
Fencing wire (Subitems (a) and (b))
The unit of measurement shall be the kilometre of each type

of fencing wire measured between end posts. Tying wire
and wire used for anchoring the posts shall not be measured
for payment.
(ii)
Diamond mesh and wire netting (Subitems (c) & (d))

diamond mesh or wire netting, the quantity of which shall be
calculated according to the prescribed width and the length
between straining posts or gate posts, or the length of strips
used for covering openings under fences, or the length used
for covering the gates.
(iii)
Straining posts (Subitem (f))
The unit of measurement shall be the number of posts, as

follows:
(1)
All straining posts erected in accordance with the
maximum specified spacing or such lesser spacing as
authorised by the Engineer, all corner posts authorised by
the Engineer, and all end posts. Gate posts for new gates
shall not be measured for payment.
(v)

procuring and furnishing all material, including gates, gate
posts, hinges, bolts, disks, concrete and straining wire, and
for erecting the gates as specified and as shown on the
Drawings. It shall not include compensation for any fencing
wire or mesh fitted onto the gate.
Item
Unit
53.04 Moving existing fences

and gates:
Barbed-tape concertina wire (Subitem (e))
The unit of measurement shall be the kilometre of fence

provided with barbed-tape concertina wire of which each
concertina is opened to the maximum effective open
concertina length as specified in the Drawings.
(iv)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of new gates

erected. At pedestrian and security fences the pair of gates
shall be measured as one.
Standards and droppers (Subitems (g) and (h))
The unit of measurement shall be the number of standards

and droppers erected to the maximum specified spacing or
such lesser spacing as authorised by the Engineer.
(vi)
Timber posts to be fixed to the bottom of wire mesh
in streams (Subitem (i))
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of timber post
of every diameter erected in accordance with the Drawings
and the instructions of the Engineer.
(a)
Fences:
(i)
Stock-proof fences . . . . . . . . . . . . . kilometre (km)
(ii)
Vermin-proof fences . . . . . . . . . . . kilometre (km)
(iii)
Pedestrian fences . . . . . . . . . . . . . kilometre (km)
(iv)
Security fences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kilometre (km)
(b)
Gates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurement for moving existing fences shall be

the kilometre of fence, the quantity of which shall be taken
as the length of fence which has been put up permanently
with material obtained from fences which have been
dismantled elsewhere. Additional new material used during
the re-erection of existing fences shall be measured under
Item 53.02. The unit of measurement for moving gates shall
be the number of gates moved.
The tendered rate for each kilometre of existing fence
moved or for each existing gate moved shall include full
compensation for dismantling the old fence, coiling and
stacking the material unsuitable for re-use, moving all
material, including posts and wire and again putting up the
fence or gate at the new position and the provision of
binding, tying and straining wire. New material used for reerection of old fences shall be paid for under Item 53.02.
The tendered rate for each straining post, standard, dropper,

each kilometre of fencing wire and barbed-tape concertina
wire, and each square metre of diamond mesh or wire
netting and for each metre of timber post, shall include full
compensation for providing all the materials, including all
concrete, tying wire, straining wire, bolts, washers and nuts,
for excavating or drilling holes for standards, for erecting the
posts, standards and droppers and the complete putting up
of the fence as specified and as shown on the Drawings. No
separate payment will be made in respect of stone packing
and/or trenching in the case of wire netting. The tendered
rate for posts shall include full compensation for erecting the
stays of the types shown on the Drawings.
The tendered rate for each gate moved shall include full
compensation for taking down the gate and re-erecting it
where required, including all new bolts, nuts and other
accessories required but excluding new gate posts.
Item
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for taking

down existing fences and gates, coiling wires, rolling netting
into rolls, transporting the material to designated sites and
stacking the material.
Unit
53.03 New gates:

(a)
Single leaf (size and
Item
Unit
53.05 Dismantling existing

fences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kilometre (km)
The unit of measurement shall be the kilometre of existing
fencing and gates taken down and dismantled on the
instruction of the Engineer.
5300-5
Item
Unit
53.06 Providing temporary

fences and gates:
(a)
Stock-proof fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . kilometre (km)
(b)
Vermin-proof fence . . . . . . . . . . . . kilometre (km)
(c)
Pedestrian fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kilometre (km)
(d)
Temporary gates (type
and size indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(e)
Temporary motor gates . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
General
Where new or second-hand material is used which has been
provided by the Employer, eg material obtained from taking
down existing fences, such material obtained from taking
down the temporary fences or gates shall remain the
property of the Employer. Material provided by the
Contractor for temporary fences will similarly become the
Contractor's property after the temporary fences have been
dismantled.
Item
Unit
53.07 Ringbolts for anchoring

fencing to structures . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurement for Subitems (a), (b) and (c) shall
be the kilometre of each type of temporary fencing erected
on the instructions of the Engineer.
The unit of measurement shall be the number of ringbolts

supplied and fixed to the structure.

providing all labour, new or suitable second-hand material,
putting up the temporary fence and when no longer required,
dismantling and removing it from the site to any new locality
where it is required.

supplying and fixing ringbolts of the type shown on the
Drawings to the structure, including, where necessary,
drilling holes, anchorage, grouting ringbolts in with epoxy
resin, and for all incidentals.
The unit of measurement for Subitem (d) shall be the

number of temporary gates provided by the Contractor.
Item

procuring, supplying and erecting new or second-hand
gates, their later removal, and replacing the fence.
53.08 Drilling and blasting

holes for posts and
anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurement for Subitem (e) shall be the

number of temporary motor gates provided by the
Contractor.
The unit of measurement shall be the number of holes for

posts and anchors made by drilling and/or blasting where
excavation by hand or by pneumatic tools cannot be done
economically.

erecting the motor gates in accordance with the Drawings,
by using new or second-hand material, and, if required,
dismantling and removing the motor gates and again putting
up any fencing removed from the positions where the motor
gates have been erected.
5300-6
Unit

and blasting the holes and for all other expenses in
connection with providing, storing, transporting and using
explosives.
SERIES 5000 :
ANCILLARY ROADWORKS
(c)
SECTION 5400 :
ROAD SIGNS
(i) Steel plate
CONTENTS
5401
5402
5403
5409
SCOPE
MATERIALS
MANUFACTURING OF ROAD SIGN BOARDS AND
SUPPORTS
ROAD SIGN FACES AND PAINTING
STORAGE AND HANDLING
ERECTING ROAD SIGNS
DISMANTLING, STORING AND RE-ERECTING
EXISTING ROAD SIGNS
5401
SCOPE
5404
5405
5406
5407
5408
This Section covers the supply and erection of permanent

and temporary road traffic signs alongside and over the
carriageway, ramps and cross roads at intersections and
interchanges and at the locations indicated on the Drawings
or as directed by the Engineer.
The signs shall be of the standard regulatory, warning and
information signs as detailed on the Drawings and shall be
fabricated in accordance with the SATCC Road Traffic Signs
Manual, except where otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
5402
MATERIALS
(a)
Structural steel
Structural steel shall comply with the requirements of BS

4360 for the type of steel specified or shown on the
Drawings. Where specified, all structural steel, including
tubes shall be coated in accordance with Subclause
5202(a).
Were specified, all structural steel shall be galvanised in
accordance with the requirements of SABS 763 or
equivalent for Type A1 or B2 articles, as may be applicable.
Steel tubes shall comply with the requirements of SABS 657
or equivalent.
(b)
Bolts, nuts and rivets
Steel bolts and nuts shall comply with SABS 135 or SABS
1143 or equivalent. Aluminium bolts and nuts shall be
manufactured from alloy B51S or D65S.
All steel bolts, nuts and washers shall have a hot-dip
(galvanised) zinc coating which complies with the
requirements of SABS 763 or equivalent for coatings on
Type C1 articles.
Blind rivets used for fixing road sign boards to square-tubing
framework shall be 4.76 mm rivets manufactured from or
coated with a material that will not cause corrosion through
electrolytic action. Hardened blind or aluminium rivets shall
be used for attaching aluminium sections.
Steel plate and steel profiles
Steel plate for road signs shall comply with SABS 1519 or
equivalent and shall be 1.4 mm thick galvanised steel plate
or approved equivalent, which has been treated on both
sides with an epoxy primer followed by a silicon polyester
top coat. The total dry thickness of the treatment shall be at
least 25 m.
Where a reflectorised road sign is required, its reverse side
shall be painted with a dull grey prime coat and the face with
only the specified top coat.
(ii) Steel profiles
Standard sign profiles shall be 200 mm sections with a
thickness of 1.0 mm, manufactured from prepainted
galvanised mild steel, and shall comply with the details on
the Drawings.
(d)
Other plate material
Temporary roadworks delineator signs shall be

manufactured from a flexible material and shall comply with
the requirements of SABS 1555 or equivalent. Other plate
material shall be as specified in the Project Specifications.
(e)
Aluminium
Aluminium sections shall be of the sizes detailed on the

Drawings, shall be manufactured from Grade 6063.T.5 alloy
and shall comply with the provisions of BS 1474.
Aluminium plate shall be manufactured from Grade
5251.H.3 alloy and shall conform to the requirements of BS
1470 and shall be 2 mm in thickness.
(f)
Paint and inks
All paints used shall comply with the requirements of

SATCC Road Traffic Signs Manual, and also with the
standards mentioned therein. All inks used shall comply
with the requirements of SABS 1519 or equivalent. Except
where RETRO- reflecting surfaces are specified, the surface
of painted road signs shall be semi-mat. The 60E specular
gloss measured in accordance with SABS 134 or equivalent
shall not exceed 50. No thinners shall be added to the paint.
The colours of paints and inks shall comply with the
requirements of ordinary colours in SABS 1519 or
equivalent. The reference numbers of the colours to be
used for paints are:
B49 golden yellow, A11 signal red G13 dark grey, F04
national flag blue, E08 flag green, B03 dark brown, and G80
cloud white as detailed in SABS 1091 or equivalent.
(g)
Retro-reflective material
Retro-reflective material shall be supplied in the following

grades and shall comply with the requirements of SABS
1519 or equivalent:
(i)
(ii)
Class I - Engineering-grade retro-reflective material

7 year warranty grade.
Class II - Super-engineering-grade retro-reflective
material 10 year warranty grade.
5400-1
(iii)
Class III - High-intensity grade retro-reflective

material 10 year warranty grade.
The material shall be supplied with a pressure sensitive or

heat applied adhesive backing protected by a removable
lining. No material from different manufacturers shall be
overlaid without approval of the Engineer.
(h)
Timber posts for road sign supports
Timber posts for road sign supports shall conform to the

requirements of SABS 754 or equivalent, shall be equal to
or better than strength Group B timber posts. The posts
shall be treated as specified in Subclause 5202(b). The
exposed surface of the cut shall be given two coats of the
applicable preservative. Any holes drilled in the timber posts
after creosote treatment shall be re-treated with two coats of
creosote.
SABS 1519 or equivalent. Direct contact between the

aluminium and any supporting steel framework shall be
avoided by adhering corrosion-protection tape to the parts
of the board in contact with the steel frame.
(b)
All welding of steelwork shall be carried out in accordance

with the standards laid down in BS 5135. All welding shall be
done before painting.
(c)
Silkscreening of inks
Silkscreening is permissible and shall be done strictly in

accordance with the requirements of the approved ink
manufacturer.
(k)
Aluminium sections for road sign boards shall be joined

together by blind aluminium rivets or bolts. They shall not be
joined longitudinally.
Where aluminium sections are to be faced with retroreflective background material, it shall be applied in advance
to individual sections before assembly, with the material
folded around the face edges of each section for at least
10 mm. Retro-reflective material shall be heated to facilitate
adhesion around the edges and to prevent damage being
caused to the material.
Where possible, letters across the joint between two
sections should be avoided. If it cannot be avoided, the
letters concerned shall be bisected on the joint.
Non-retro-reflective sheeting
Non-retro-reflective sheeting of a 7 year outdoor warranty

grade may be used. This material shall comply with SABS
1519 or equivalent
5403
MANUFACTURING OF ROAD SIGN BOARDS AND

SUPPORTS
(a)
Road sign boards
Road sign boards shall be manufactured strictly in

accordance with the details tabulated on the Drawings. They
shall be manufactured from either steel plate, steel profiles
and aluminium plate or aluminium sections according to
what is specified on the Drawings.
Road sign boards shall be manufactured by a recognised
manufacturer of road signs.
In so far as is possible, road sign boards shall be
manufactured as one unit. Where road signs are
manufactured in more than one unit, the completed units
shall be assembled in the workshop prior to delivery to
ensure that all sections and legends fit together properly.
Joints in road sign boards shall be provided only at locations
and to details as shown on the Drawings. Where rivets are
used, their spacing shall not exceed 150 mm, and the rivet
heads shall be painted in the same colour as the sections
which are being joined.
The surface of the rear of the sign board and its stiffening
structure shall be painted dark grey. The sign board and its
stiffening structure shall be constructed to comply with
5400-2
Aluminium sections
Corrosion-protection tape
Corrosion-protection tape used between aluminium and

steel shall be a black PVC tape not less than 0.25 mm in
thickness, shall be resistant to ultra-violet rays, and shall
have an adhesive backing. The breaking strength of the
material shall be not less than 3.5 kN/m.
(j)
Structural steel
The relevant provisions of Section 6700, Structural

Steelwork, shall apply to all steel-supporting structures for
road signs.
(d)
(i)
Welding
(e)
Galvanising
Where the galvanising of structural-steel frames and signboard supporting structures is specified, it shall be done as
far as is practicable after welding. Where this is not
practicable, the steel sections shall be galvanised before
assembly and then welded. All welds shall be thoroughly
cleaned, loose material removed and dressed, after which
the welds shall be coated with two coats of an approved zinc
based paint.
Unless otherwise specified in the Schedule of Quantities or
the Project Specifications, galvanised steel shall not be
painted.
(f)
Road sign supports
Road sign supports shall be constructed in accordance with

the details shown on the Drawings.
(g)
General
Where details for the construction of road sign boards, the

framework of the road sign boards and their attachment to
the supporting steel framework are not shown on the
Drawings, the Contractor shall design them and submit the
details to the Engineer for approval before manufacture.
5404
ROAD SIGN FACES AND PAINTING
(a)
Colours, symbols and legends
Paint colours, symbols, legends and borders used on road

signs shall comply with the applicable statutory provisions,
and also with the requirements of the SATCC Road Traffic
Signs Manual.
The colours and shades shall conform to the colours and
shades specified in the SATCC Road Traffic Signs Manual.
(b)
Preparing surfaces and applying paint and retroreflective sheeting
The preparation of surfaces and painting shall be carried out

as specified in Section 5900.
The surface of structural steel for the frames and supports
of road signs shall be prepared by it being cleaned with a
wire brush and shall then be painted as specified in Clause
5907.
Unless otherwise specified, aluminium road signs and
galvanised frameworks, with the exception of painted road
sign boards shall not be painted. Care shall be taken to
treat all holes and cutting edges. The preparation of
surfaces and application of retro-reflective sheeting shall be
done in strict accordance with the requirements of the
sheeting manufacturer.
The soil or soil-cement mixture shall then be compacted by

tamping at optimum moisture content in 100 mm thick layers
in the excavation.
Where posts or structures are to be fixed in concrete, or
where concrete footings are to be cast, the concrete,
formwork and reinforcement shall comply with the
requirements of Sections 6200, 6300 and 6400. The holes
shall be completely filled with concrete up to the level shown
on the Drawings or indicated by the Engineer. The upper
surface of the concrete shall be neatly finished with
sufficient fall to ensure proper drainage.
(c)
Road signs shall be erected as shown on the Drawings or as

directed by the Engineer. During erection the structural
steelwork shall be firmly bolted and protected to prevent
buckling or damage during erection, or by the equipment
used for erection.
Posts to which road signs are to be fixed shall be vertical
and the undersides of road signs shall be horizontal after
having been erected.
Where timber posts are used for erecting the signs, all holes
that are drilled in the timber shall be impregnated with
creosote.
(d)
(c)
Time of manufacture
The faces and backs of road sign boards and the legend
shall not be painted more than six months prior to their
erection. Each road sign shall be marked as required by
5405
STORAGE AND HANDLING
All road signs or parts of road signs shall be transported

and handled so as to prevent any damage and deformation.
All road signs shall be stored in a vertical position in a
weather-proof storeroom. There shall be sufficient space
between the road signs to permit free air circulation and
moisture evaporation. Contact of road signs with treated
timber, diesel, dirt or water shall not be permitted.
When required, existing or newly erected road signs shall be
fully or partially covered with burlap or other approved
adequately ventilated material to obscure destinations that
are temporarily inapplicable or irrelevant.
5406
ERECTING ROAD SIGNS
(a)
Position
Road signs shall be erected in the positions shown on the

Drawings or indicated by the Engineer.
Field welding
All welding done during erection shall comply with the

requirements for welding during manufacture.
(e)
On-site painting
All painting done after the road signs have been erected
shall comply with the requirements for painting during
manufacture.
All places where the paintwork has been damaged during
erection shall be repaired by the Contractor at his own cost
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(f)
Time of erection
Road signs shall be erected immediately prior to the road

being opened to public traffic, unless otherwise directed by
the Engineer.
(g)
General
All destinations and route numbers shown on the Drawings

shall be subject to amendment, and confirmation of the
details shall be obtained from the Engineer before any
particular signs are made. Such particulars may be
available only at a late stage, for which allowance shall be
made by the Contractor in his programme.
5407
(b)
Erection
Excavation and backfilling
Excavations for the erection of road signs shall be made

according to the dimensions shown on the Drawings. Where
the excavations are to be backfilled with soil, a 12:1 soilcement mixture shall be made if required by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall protect the completed road signs

against damage until they have been finally accepted by the
Employer, and he shall maintain the road signs until the
maintenance certificate has been issued. Damage or
5400-3
defects caused by negligence or faulty workmanship shall

be rectified by the Contractor at his own cost to the
Payment shall distinguish between road sign boards made

from the various materials specified.
Item
5408
DISMANTLING, STORING AND RE-ERECTING

EXISTING ROAD SIGNS
Where ordered by the Engineer, the Contractor shall

dismantle existing road signs, store them, and re-erect them
at new positions indicated.
Where required by the Engineer, the signs shall be
repainted or repaired and new materials shall be used for
part or all of the supporting structure.
5409
Unit
54.01 Road sign boards with painted or coloured background.

Symbols, lettering and borders
in Class 1 retro-reflective
material, where the sign
board is constructed from:
(a)
Aluminium sheet (2 mm thick):
(i)
Area not exceeding 2 m2 . . . .
square metre (m2)
(c)
Sheet steel:
(i)
Area not exceeding 2 m2 . . . . . square metre (m2)
(ii)
Area exceeding 2 m2
but not 10 m2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
Area exceeding 10 m2 . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(d)
Other sheeting (details
indicated):
(i)
Area not exceeding 2 m2 . . . . . square metre (m2)
(ii)
Area exceeding 2 m2
but not 10 m2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
completed road sign board.
providing the completed road sign board, frame, fixing
brackets, angle-irons, channel profiles, etc including
painting, galvanising if specified, reflective lettering,
symbols, legends and borders, attaching the road sign
board to the road sign support, or to the overhead road sign
structure, or to an over-bridge, and for all other materials
and workmanship, brackets, bolts, nuts, etc, for the
completion of the road sign boards as specified.
5400-4
(i)
Class 1 Engineering grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(ii)
Class 3 High-intensity grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(b)
Lettering, symbols and bordears of retro-reflective material of:
(i)
Class 3 High-intensity grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(ii)
Class 2 Super-engineering grade . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
The tendered rates paid extra over suites 54.01(a), (b), (c)
and (d) shall include full compensation for the additional cost
of providing retro-reflective background, symbols, lettering
and borders of the types specified in each case.
Area exceeding 10 m2 . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(b)
Aluminium sections
(type indicated) all sizes . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(iii)
(a)
Background of retroreflective material of:
The area measured for payment shall be the full area of the
road sign board as measured in Item 54.01.
(ii)
Area exceeding 2 m2
but not 10 m2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(iii)

for using:
(iii)
Class 2 Super-engineering grade . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
Item
Unit
Item
Unit
54.03 Road sign supports (overhead road sign structures

excluded):
(a)
Steel tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tonne (t)
(b)
Timber (diameter and
type indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(a)
The unit of measurement of supporting structures
manufactured from steel tubing shall be the tonne of steel
tubing used. Bolts and other accessories shall not be
measured.
(b)
The unit of measurement for timber supporting
structures shall be the metre of each diameter post used.
Bolts and other accessories shall not be measured.
manufacturing and erecting the road sign supports, including
all bolts, screws, rivets, welding and accessories, together
with the painting required and the provision of breakaway
holes in timber supports.
Overhead road sign supporting structures shall not be
measured and paid for under this Item, but under the
appropriate Items of Series 6000.
Item
Unit
(c)
Exceeding 10 m2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
54.04 Excavation and backfilling

for road sign supports . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of signs

dismantled, stored and re-erected in each size group.

excavation measured in place according to the neat
dimensions of the footings or excavations as shown on the
Drawings or directed by the Engineer. In the case of timber
posts not in concrete, the plan area of the excavated hole
shall be taken as 0.15 m2, irrespective of the actual size of
the excavated hole.

dismantling and storing the road signs and supporting
structures, transporting the material to a new location, reerecting the road signs, and restoring the location where
they were dismantled.
The tendered rate shall be in full compensation for

excavating, backfilling and compacting the backfill material,
for the disposal of all surplus excavated material, and for
providing the backfill material and mixing it with cement.
Item
Payment for excavations, and the new material and concrete

required for re-erecting the road signs shall be made under
the appropriate Item, and any repairs and painting which
may be necessary, shall be paid for as "extra work". No
separate payment shall be made for new bolts and nuts
required for such re-erection, the cost of which shall be
included in the rates tendered above.
Unit
Item

for cement-treated soil
backfill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
Unit
54.09 Dismantling and storing

road signs with a surface
area of:

additional cost of providing and mixing in cement.
(a)
Item
(b)
Exceeding 2 m2
but not 10 m2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
Unit

for rock excavation . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
additional cost of excavating in rock.
Item
Unit
54.07 Dismantling, storing

and re-erecting road
signs with a surface
area of:
(a)
Up to 2 m2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(b)
Exceeding 2 m2
but not 10 m2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(c)
Up to 2 m2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
Exceeding 10 m2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number in each size

group dismantled and stored.
carefully dismantling and disassembling the road signs,
loading, transporting, off-loading and carefully stacking all
the materials as required by the Engineer. It shall also
include compensation for restoring the site where the road
signs have been dismantled.
Note: Concrete, formwork and reinforcing steel for road
sign footings shall be measured and paid for in accordance
with the provisions of Sections 6200, 6300 and 6400, but
such payment Items shall appear under this Section in the
5400-5
5400-6
SERIES 5000 :
ANCILLARY ROADWORKS
SECTION 5500 :
ROAD MARKINGS
CONTENTS
5501
5502
5503
5504
5505
5506
5507
5508
5509
5510
5511
5512
5513
5514
SCOPE
MATERIALS
WEATHER LIMITATIONS
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT FOR PAINTING
SURFACE PREPARATION
SETTING OUT THE ROAD MARKINGS
APPLYING THE PAINT
APPLYING THE RETRO-REFLECTIVE BEADS
ROADSTUDS
TOLERANCES
GENERAL
FAULTY WORKMANSHIP OR MATERIALS
PROTECTION
5501
SCOPE
This Section covers the permanent marking of the road

surface with white, red or yellow painted lines or symbols
and the supply and fixing of retro-reflective roadstuds as
indicated on the Drawings or as specified by the Engineer.
All road markings shall be of the standard regulatory,
warning and guidance markings as detailed on the Drawings
and in accordance with the SATCC Road Traffic Signs
Manual.
5502
MATERIALS
(a)
Paint
(i)
Road-marking paint
Road-marking paint shall comply with the requirements of

SABS 731 or equivalent for Type 1, Type 2 or Type 4 as
specified in the Project Specifications. The no-pick-up time
of road marking paint shall comply with the Class 1
requirement in SABS 731-1 or equivalent.
The paint shall be delivered at the site in sealed containers
bearing the name of the manufacturer and the type of paint.
The viscosity of the paint shall be such that it can be applied
without being thinned.
(ii)
Retro-reflective road-marking paint
Retro-reflective road-marking paint shall comply with the

requirements of Subclause 5502 and CKS 192.
(iii)
Plastic road-marking material
Where specified in the Project Specifications, hot-melt

plastic road-marking material shall comply with the
requirements of BS 3662. The binder shall be plasticised
synthetic resin and the material shall be reflectorised by
mixing in 20% by mass Class A glass beads in accordance
with BS 6088.
(iv)
The colour of the yellow and red paint shall be as specified

in the SATCC Road Traffic Signs Manual.
(v)
Skid resistance
The skid resistance of all types of marking material shall

comply with the requirements of SABS 731-1 or equivalent.
(b)
Roadstuds
Roadstuds shall comply with the requirements of SABS

1442 or equivalent and shall be of the size and type
indicated on the Drawings or specified in the Project
Specifications. The Contractor shall, prior to delivery, submit
to the Engineer for approval, samples of the type of
roadstuds he proposes to use.
5503
WEATHER LIMITATIONS
Road-marking paint shall not be applied to a damp surface

or at temperatures lower than 10EC, or when, in the opinion
of the Engineer, the wind strength is such that it may
adversely affect the painting operations.
5504
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT FOR PAINTING
The equipment shall consist of an apparatus for cleaning the

surfaces, a mechanical road-painting machine and all
additional hand-operated equipment necessary for
completing the work. The mechanical road-marking machine
shall be capable of painting at least two parallel lines
simultaneously and shall apply the paint to a uniform film
thickness at the rates of application specified. The machine
shall be so designed that it will be capable of painting the
road markings everywhere to a uniform width with sides
within the tolerances specified, without the paint running or
splashing. The machine shall further be capable of painting
lines of different widths by adjusting the spray jets on the
machine or by means of additional equipment attached to
the machine.
Machines which apply the beads by means of gravity only
shall not be used. The beads shall be sprayed onto the paint
layer by means of a pressure sprayer.
The machine shall be provided with clearly visible amber
warning flashing lights which shall always be in operation
when the machine is on the road.
5505
SURFACE PREPARATION
Road markings shall be applied to bituminous surfaces only

after sufficient time has elapsed to ensure that damage will
not be caused to the painted surface by volatiles
evaporating from the surfacing.
Before the paint is applied, the surface shall be clean and
dry and completely free from any soil, grease, oil, acid or
any other material which will be detrimental to the bond
between the paint and the surface. The surface where the
paint is to be applied shall be properly cleaned by means of
watering, brooming or compressed air if required.
Colour
The colours to be used shall be bright white, red or yellow.
5500-1
5506
SETTING OUT THE ROAD MARKINGS
The lines, symbols, figures or marks shall be premarked by

means of paint spots of the same colour as that of the final
lines and marks. These paint spots shall be at such intervals
to ensure that the road markings can be accurately applied,
and in no case shall they be more than 1.5 m apart. Spots
of approximately 10 mm in diameter should be sufficient.
The dimensions and positions of road markings shall be as
shown on the Drawings or as specified in the appropriate
statutory provisions and the SATCC Road Traffic Signs
Manual.
After spotting, the positions of the proposed road markings
shall be indicated on the road. These premarkings shall be
approved by the Engineer prior to any painting operations
being commenced.
The positions and outlines of special markings shall be
produced on the finished road in chalk and shall be
approved by the Engineer before they are painted. Approved
templates may be used on condition that the positioning of
the marking is approved by the Engineer before painting is
commenced.
The position of roadstuds shall be marked out on the road
and shall be approved by the Engineer before they are fixed
in position.
road is opened to traffic. Each layer of paint shall be

continuous over the entire area being painted.
5508
APPLYING THE RETRO-REFLECTIVE BEADS
Where retro-reflective paint is required, the retro-reflective

beads shall be applied by means of a suitable machine in
one continuous operation, immediately after the paint has
been applied. The rate of application of the beads shall be
0.8 kg/R of paint or such other rate as may be directed by the
Engineer.
5509
ROADSTUDS
Roadstuds shall be of the type indicated on the Drawings

and shall be fixed in the positions indicated and approved by
the Engineer.
The roadstuds shall be fixed by means of an approved
epoxy resin in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions, subject to such amendments to the method as
may be required by the Engineer. The studs shall be
protected against impact until the adhesive has hardened.
Before fixing the roadstuds, the surface shall be thoroughly
cleaned as specified in Clause 5505.
Roadstuds must be protected during painting of any lines
and application of any surface treatments.
5507
APPLYING THE PAINT

5510
The figures, letters, signs, symbols, broken or unbroken

lines or other marks shall be painted as shown on the
Where the paint is applied by machine, it shall be applied in
one layer. Before the road-marking machine is used on the
permanent Works, the satisfactory operation of the machine
shall be demonstrated on a suitable site which is not part of
the permanent Works. Adjustments to the machine shall be
followed by further testing. Only when the machine has been
correctly adjusted and its use has been approved by the
Engineer after testing, may the machine be used on the
permanent work. The operator shall be experienced in the
use of the machine.
After the machine has been satisfactorily adjusted, the rate
of application shall be checked and adjusted if necessary
before application on a large scale is commenced.
Where two lines are required parallel to each other, the lines
shall be applied simultaneously by the same machine. The
paint shall be stirred before application in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions. Paint shall be applied
without the addition of thinners.
Where painting is done by hand, it shall be applied in two
layers, and the second layer shall not be applied before the
first layer has dried. As most road-marking paint reacts with
the bitumen surface of the road, the paint shall be applied
with one stroke only of the brush or roller.
Ordinary road-marking paint shall be applied at a nominal
rate of 0.42 R/m2 or as directed by the Engineer and
proprietary brand paints shall be applied at the rates
Unless otherwise prescribed by the Engineer, the road
marking shall be completed before a particular section of the
5500-2
TOLERANCES
Road markings shall be painted to an accuracy within the

tolerances given below:
(a)
Width
The width of lines and other markings shall not be less than
the specified width, nor shall it exceed the specified width by
more than 10 mm.
(b)
Position
The position of lines, letters, figures, arrows, retro-reflective

roadstuds and other markings shall not deviate from the true
position by more than 100 mm in the longitudinal and
20 mm in the transverse direction.
(c)
Alignment of markings
The alignment of the edges of longitudinal lines shall not

deviate from the true alignment by more than 10 mm in
15 m.
(d)
Broken lines
The length of segments of broken longitudinal lines shall not

deviate by more than 150 mm from the specified length.
5511
(d)
White lettering and
symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
GENERAL
The length of segments and the gap between segments in

broken lines shall be as indicated on the Drawings. If these
lengths are altered by the Engineer, the ratio of the lengths
of the painted section to the length of the gap between
painted sections shall remain the same. Lines shall not be
painted more than 3 months prior to the road being opened
to public traffic.
Lines on curves, whether broken or unbroken, shall not
consist of chords but shall follow the correct radius.
Where plastic road-marking material is used, the
manufacturer shall produce an approved guarantee as
specified in the Project Specifications. Where specified by
the Engineer, the Contractor shall remove existing painted
markings from the road surface by means of sand blasting
or other approved method. The use of black paint or
chemical paint remover to obliterate existing markings will
not be permitted, except where it is ordered by the Engineer
as a temporary measure.
5512
FAULTY WORKMANSHIP OR MATERIALS
If any material which does not comply with the requirements

is delivered to the site, or is used in the Works, or if any
work of an unacceptable quality is carried out, such material
or work shall be removed, replaced or repaired as required
by the Engineer at the Contractor's own cost. Rejected road
markings and paint which has been splashed or dripped
onto the pavement, kerbs, structures or other such surfaces,
shall be removed by the Contractor at his own cost, in an
approved manner so that the markings or spilt paint will not
show up at all.
5513
(f)
Traffic-island markings
(any colour) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(g)
Kerb markings (any
colour) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
The unit of measurement for painting the lines shall be the
kilometre of each specified width of line and the quantity
paid for shall be the actual length of line painted in
accordance with the instructions of the Engineer, excluding
the length of gaps in broken lines.
The unit of measurement for painting the lettering, symbols
or traffic-island markings shall be the square metre, and the
quantity to be paid for shall be the actual surface area of
lettering, symbols or traffic-island markings completed.
The tendered rate per kilometre or per square metre as the
case may be for painting the road markings shall include full
compensation for procuring and furnishing all material and
the necessary equipment, and for painting, protecting and
maintenance as specified, including the setting-out of
lettering, symbols and traffic-island markings, but excluding
setting out and premarking the lines.
Item
Unit
55.02 Retro-reflective roadmarking paint:

(a)
White lines (broken
or unbroken) (width of line
PROTECTION
After the paint has been applied, the road markings shall be
protected against damage by traffic or other causes. The
Contractor shall be responsible for erecting, placing and
removing all warning boards, flags, cones, barricades and
other protective measures which may be necessary in terms
of any statutory provisions and/or as may be recommended
in the SATCC Road Traffic Signs Manual.
5514
(e)
Yellow lettering and
(b)
Yellow lines (broken
(c)
Red lines (broken
Indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kilometre (km)
(d)
White lettering and
(e)
Unit
(f)
(a)
White lines (broken

Item
55.01 Road-marking paint:
(b)
(c)
Red lines (broken

compensation for procuring and furnishing all material,
including the retro-reflective beads, and the necessary
5500-3
equipment, and for painting, protecting and maintenance as

specified, including the setting-out of lettering, symbols and
traffic-island markings, but excluding setting out and
premarking the lines.

1213.
Item
Item
Unit
Unit
55.05 Roadstuds (type stated) . . . . . . . . . number (No)
55.03 Hot-melt plastic road-marking

material (particulars stated):
The unit of measurement for roadstuds shall be the actual

number of approved roadstuds placed.
(a)
White lines (broken

procuring and furnishing all the necessary material, labour
and equipment, and for fixing and maintenance as specified.
Distinction shall be made between various types of
roadstuds.
(b)
Item
(c) Red lines (broken
Indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kilometre (km)
(d)
White lettering and
(e)
symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(f)
compensation for procuring and furnishing all material, and
the necessary equipment, and for painting, protecting and
maintenance as specified, including the setting-out of
lettering, symbols and traffic-island markings, but excluding
setting out and premarking the lines.
Item
Unit
55.04 Variations in rate of

application:
Unit
55.06 Setting out and premarking the lines

(excluding trafficisland markings, lettering and symbols) . . . . . . . . . . . kilometre (km)
The unit of measurement for setting out lines shall be the
kilometre of lines set out and marked. Where two or three
lines are to be painted next to each other, the setting-out of
lines shall be measured only once.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for setting
out and premarking the lines as specified, including all
materials.
Item
Unit
55.07 Re-establishing the

painting unit at the end
of the maintenance period . . . . . . . . lump sum
The tendered lump sum shall include full compensation for
the re-establishment on the site and for later removal of all
special equipment, personnel, etc, as may be required for
repainting the road markings at the end of the maintenance
period. The Contractor will be paid at tender rates for
repainting the road markings.
The re-establishment during the construction period shall
not be paid for specially, and allowance therefor shall be
made by the Contractor in his programme and his rates for
painting.
Item
Unit
(a)
White paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
(b)
Yellow paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
55.08 Removal of existing,

temporary or permanent
road marking by:
(c)
Red paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
(a)
(d)
Retro-reflective beads . . . . . . . . . . . kilogram (kg)
(b)
Overpainting as a
temporary measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(e)
Plastic road-marking
paints (specify) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litre (R)
The unit of measurement for variations in the rate of
applying of the paint and retro-reflective beads shall be the
litre and the kilogram respectively.
5500-4
Sandblasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of road

marking removed.
Item
Unit
55.09 Removal of existing

roadstuds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (no)
The unit of measurement shall be the actual number of
roadstuds removed.
5500-5
5500-6
SERIES 5000 :
ANCILLARY ROADWORKS
5603
CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 5600 :
CATTLE GRIDS
(a)
Excavation
CONTENTS
5601
5602
5603
5604
SCOPE
MATERIALS
CONSTRUCTION
Excavation shall be made large enough to permit

construction of the base slab to the dimensions in the
Drawings. Excavation shall be made in accordance with the
requirements of Section 2100. All excavations for cattle
grids shall be classified as provided in Clause 2105.
(b)
5601
SCOPE
This Section covers the construction of cattle grids in

conformity with the details, dimensions and design shown
on the Drawings, and at locations shown on the Drawings or
Formwork and concrete finish shall conform to the

requirements of Section 6200. Formed surfaces shall have
Class F2 finish and unformed surfaces shall have Class U2
finish.
(c)
A cattle grid is a structure constructed across a road which
is designed to prevent the passage of cattle while permitting
other traffic to pass.
Formwork and concrete finish
Concrete
Concrete shall be Class 30/19 and shall be as specified in

Section 6400.
Fencing and gates are as given in Section 5300.

(d)
5602
MATERIALS
(a)
Cement
Cement shall comply with the requirements of Subclause

6402(a).
(b)
Aggregate
Steel reinforcement shall be as shown on the Drawings and

(e)
5604
(c)
Item
Water shall comply with the requirements of Subclause

6402(d).
Admixtures
Admixtures shall not be used in the concrete mix without the

approval of the Engineer who may require tests to be
performed before their use. Admixtures, if allowed, shall
comply with the requirements of Subclause 6402(e).
(e)
Unit
56.01 Cattle grids

(a)
(d)
Structural steel
Structural steel shall be as shown on the Drawings.

Painting of structural steel shall be in accordance with
Section 5900 or as directed by the Engineer.
Aggregate shall comply with the requirements of Subclause

6402(b).
Water
Steel reinforcement
Cattle grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No.)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of cattle grids

supplied, the type as indicated in the Drawings.
providing the materials and constructing the cattle grids, but
shall not include compensation for excavating the in situ
material.
Reinforcement
Item
Reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of Section

6300.
(f)
Structural steel
Structural steel shall conform to the requirements of Section

6700.
Unit
56.02 Excavation for cattle grids

(a)
Excavating soft material to the
depth required for the construction of
the cattle grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(b)
for excavation in hard material . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
material excavated.
5600-1
5600-2
SERIES 5000 :
ANCILLARY ROADWORKS
(d)
SECTION 5700 :
LANDSCAPING AND GRASSING
Plants shall be of the variety and size shown on the

Drawings or in the Project Specifications.
CONTENTS
5701
5702
5703
5704
5705
5706
5707
5708
5709
SCOPE
MATERIALS
LANDSCAPING AREAS
PREPARING AREAS FOR GRASSING
GRASSING
MAINTAINING THE GRASS
TREES, SHRUBS AND HEDGING PLANTS
GENERAL
5701
SCOPE
(a)
Scope
This Section covers the landscaping of designated areas,

the establishing of vegetation for functional and aesthetic
purposes on cut and fill slopes, landscaped areas and such
other areas where it may be required.
Trees, shrubs and hedge plants
The Contractor shall supply the number of plants as shown

on the Drawings or in the Project Specifications and/or
Schedule of Quantities. The Contractor shall give at least six
week's advance notice of his requirements to the Employer.
Upon receipt of the plants, the Contractor shall ensure that
the plants are in a good condition and free from plant
diseases and he shall accept full responsibility for
maintaining the plants in a good condition throughout the
Contract and the maintenance periods. The plants shall be
fully maintained and watered during this period and any
losses of plants on account of lack of care or disease during
the Contract and maintenance periods, shall be replaced at
the Contractor's own cost.
Each plant shall be handled and packed in the approved
manner for that species or variety, and all the necessary
precautions shall be taken to ensure that the plants will
arrive at the site of the Works in a suitable condition for
successful growth. Trucks used for transporting plants shall
be equipped with covers to protect the plants from windburn.
Containers shall be in a good condition.
Any declared weeds, as well as any exotic tree, shrub, herb,

grass or water plant which, in the opinion of the Engineer,
may pose any problems in specified areas at certain times,
is regarded as being undesirable.
Plants supplied by the Contractor shall be healthy, correctly

shaped, and well rooted. The plants must be hardened off
and be exposed to direct sunlight for at least 6 months prior
to planting in the road reserve. Roots shall not show any
evidence of having been restricted or deformed at any time.
Plants shall grow well and shall be free from insect pests
and diseases.
5702
MATERIALS
(e)
(a)
Fertiliser/soil-improvement material
(b)
Definition
The type of fertiliser/soil-improvement material to be used

shall be one or more of the following types and any other
type of fertiliser/soil-improvement material specified in the
Project Specifications or prescribed by the Engineer.
(i)
Soil-improvement materials such as dolomitic lime,
basic slag, gypsum, superphosphate and agricultural lime.
(ii)
Fertilisers such as limestone ammonium nitrate,
2:3:2 (22) and 3:2:1 (25).
(b)
Grass cuttings
Grass cuttings shall be fresh cuttings of an approved type of

grass with sufficient root material to ensure good growth.
(c)
Grass seeds
Only fresh certified seed shall be used and the types of

seeds in the seed mixture shall be as specified in the
Mixing the various types of grass seeds for obtaining the
prescribed grass-seed mixture shall be done on the site in
the presence of the Engineer. Storing and identifying the
grass seeds and the grass-seed mixtures on the site shall
be the responsibility of the Contractor.
Grass sods
Grass sods shall be either nursery-grown or veld sods as

described below. Both types shall be harvested, delivered,
planted and watered within 36 hours unless otherwise
authorised by the Engineer. The grass sods shall be free
from noxious weeds and diseases. Sods obtained from a
nursery shall be in moist soil not less than 30 mm deep, and
sods taken from the veld in moist soil not less than 50 mm
deep.
(i)
Nursery-grown sods
These sods shall be of the variety of grass specified in the

Project Specifications, unless the use of an alternative has
been approved by the Engineer. The grass shall have been
grown specifically for sod purposes, mown regularly and
cared for to provide an approved uniformity to the
(ii)
Veld sods
These sods may be obtained from approved areas within or

near the site where a suitable type and density of grass and
type of soil are found.
(f)
Anti-erosion compounds
Anti-erosion compounds shall consist of an organic or

inorganic material to bind soil particles together and shall be
a proven product able to suppress dust and form an
encrustation. The application rate shall conform to the
manufacturers recommendations. The materials used shall
be of such a quality that grass seeds may germinate and
penetrate the crust.
5700-1
(g)
Topsoil
Topsoil shall consist of fertile loamy soil, obtained from

areas with a good soil coverage of natural vegetation,
preferably grasses. It shall be free from deleterious matter
such as large roots, stones, refuse, stiff or heavy clays and
the seeds of noxious weeds, which will adversely affect its
suitability for grass being planted. Topsoil stripped from
areas infested with weeds shall be stockpiled separately.
Topsoil shall be obtained from wherever suitable material
occurs either in the road reserve or from areas where cuts
and fills are to be constructed. Topsoil stripped from borrow
areas may not be removed from that site for topsoiling of
other areas, but must be used to rehabilitate the borrow pit
itself. The Engineer shall communicate his requirements to
the Contractor regarding the quantity of topsoil which is
necessary and the areas from which it shall be selected and
removed by the Contractor. Unless otherwise specified,
topsoil shall be taken from not deeper than 400 mm from the
surface. If the Contractor fails to conserve the topsoil as
instructed, he shall obtain suitable substitute material from
other sources at his own cost.
Where so specified, the Contractor shall procure and furnish
topsoil from his own sources outside the site, after such
sources have been approved by the Engineer.
Topsoil shall be stockpiled in separate loose heaps as
tipped from the trucks and shall not be stockpiled in heaps
exceeding 2 m in height. Care shall be taken to prevent the
compaction of the topsoil in any way, especially by trucks
being driven over such material.
(h)
Compost
Compost shall be well decayed, friable and free from weed

seeds, dust or any other undesirable materials. It shall not
contain any particles that will not pass through a 50 mm
screen and shall be approved by the Engineer before being
delivered to the site.
5703
LANDSCAPING THE AREAS
(a)
Shaping
Trimming shall consist of trimming the existing or previously

shaped ground to an even surface with the final levels
generally following the original surface. Trimming shall
normally be done by grader, or in more confined or steep
areas by bulldozer. Where machine operations are not
practicable, because of confined spaces or steep slopes, or
when approved by the Engineer, trimming shall be done with
hand tools. When trimming is done on slopes steeper than
1:3, the ridges shall be made parallel to the contour. Such
ridges shall be approximately 100 mm wide, and the centres
between the ridges approximately 400 mm. Trimming shall
be done where instructed by the Engineer to areas inside
the road reserve but outside the road prism, ie normally
outside the tops of cuts or the toes of fills, but trimming of
rock outcrops will not be required.
Trimmed surfaces shall be left slightly rough to facilitate a
better binding with topsoil or the natural establishing of
vegetation.
When subsequent grassing is required or when it is ordered
by the Engineer, areas previously shaped shall be trimmed
as described above to within a tolerance of plus or minus
100 mm with all undulations following a smooth curve. The
above tolerance shall apply only to areas where the final
contours are given on the Drawings.
During trimming, all stones in excess of 100 mm in size and
all excess material shall be removed. Areas which require
grassing shall be trimmed in such a way that, after
cultivation and the application of topsoil, the finished surface
of the area shall be approximately 25 mm below the top of
adjacent kerbing, channelling or pavement.
(c)
Areas within the road reserve but outside the road prism
which require shaping by means of bulk earthworks such as
contoured areas at interchanges and intersections and rest
areas which require earthworks shall be excavated, filled
and compacted when required, and shaped to the correct
contours to within a tolerance of plus or minus 150 mm.
Such work shall be regarded as being earthworks and
measurement and payment therefor shall be made under
Section 3300, except that quantities may be measured by
means of a grid system of levels taken at 10 m intervals
before and after shaping or else it may be determined by
levelled cross-sections.
Plant rates
The Engineer shall be entitled to pay for shaping and

trimming as described above on the basis of hourly plant
rates. The motor grader and bulldozer to be provided shall
each have a flywheel power of not less than 93 kW. All
machines shall be in a good condition. Any labour or other
plant required shall be paid for as extra work as specified in
the General Conditions of Contract.
5704
PREPARING AREAS FOR GRASSING
The various areas to be grassed shall be prepared as

follows:
(a)
5700-2
Trimming
Manure
Manure shall, unless another type has been approved by the

Engineer, be pure kraal manure free from soil, weed seeds
or other undesirable material. It shall not contain any
particles that will not pass through a 50 mm screen and
shall be approved by the Engineer before being delivered to
the site.
(i)
(b)
Soil ripping
Where soil is too hard to be ploughed with a light tractor, the

soil shall be ripped up to a depth of 300 mm before it is
loosened by plough to a depth of 150 mm.
(b)
Areas which do not require topsoil
Where the areas to be grassed consist of organically

suitable material, the topsoil shall be loosened by ploughing
to a minimum depth of 150 mm. All loose stones exceeding
50 mm in size on areas to be mowed by machine and falling
within the road reserve and all stones exceeding 150 mm in
size in other areas shall be removed.
(c)
Areas which require topsoil
Where areas to be grassed consist of organically unsuitable

material, the surface shall be roughened to ensure a proper
bond between the topsoil and the subsoil. If required, the
area shall be scarified as described in paragraphs (a) or (b)
above.
Topsoil shall be placed on the prepared surfaces and
trimmed to the uniform thickness required. The topsoil shall
be scarified by means of handraking or light rotavators and
all stones removed as specified for areas not requiring
topsoil in subparagraph (b) above.
Areas inaccessible for topsoil being placed after the
construction works have been completed shall be covered
with topsoil and protected against erosion during
construction works.
(d)
General
After an area has been prepared for grassing, the grassing

shall be completed before crusting. Where a crust has been
formed before grassing is done, the Contractor shall, at his
own cost, loosen the crust by ploughing to a depth of
150 mm.
5705
GRASSING
The method of establishing grass shall depend on the

circumstances relating to each case, and the Engineer shall
decide which method is to be used. Provision is made for
the following methods:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(a)
(b)
Sodding
Areas to be grassed by sodding shall be given a layer of

topsoil of at least 50 mm in thickness unless, where suitable
soil is present, the Engineer orders the topsoil to be omitted.
The areas to be sodded shall be thoroughly watered
beforehand so that it will be wet to a depth of at least
150 mm during sodding. The surface shall be roughened
slightly to ensure a good penetration of roots into the soil.
Sods shall be protected against drying out and kept moist
from the time of harvesting until they are finally placed.
Fertilising
For all areas to be planted, the Contractor shall have the top
150 mm of the prepared surface tested to determine the
quantity and type of fertiliser which will be required for
establishing proper growth conditions for the grass. The
location of the soil sample taken shall be indicated on plans
by the Contractor. The Engineer shall be furnished with the
test results. Only after approval by the Engineer of the
nature and quantity of the fertiliser, may its application
proceed. The fertiliser shall be evenly applied over all
surfaces where grass is to be planted, and shall then be
thoroughly mixed with the soil to a depth of 100 mm either
mechanically or manually. Where hydroseeding is to be
performed, the fertiliser may be mixed with the cellulose
pulp and water used in hydroseeding.
(e)
An approved variety of grass cuttings shall be evenly

planted by hand or mechanically at a rate of at least 600 kg
of cuttings per hectare. Fresh cuttings only shall be used.
Any grass cuttings that have been allowed to dry out shall
be discarded. Immediately after having been planted, the
grass cuttings shall be given a copious watering, and, when
sufficiently dry, shall be rolled with a light agricultural roller.
Planting grass cuttings

Sodding
Hydroseeding
Topsoiling only, using, where available, topsoil
selected for the presence of natural grass seeds
Grassing with an approved grassing machine
Hand seeding
The use of any other method specified in the Project
Specifications.
The areas to be grassed shall, unless already wet, be

thoroughly watered before the cuttings are planted to ensure
that the soil will be uniformly wet to a depth of at least
150 mm when the planting is done.
The first row of sods shall, where possible, be laid in a

straight line, and if on a slope, laying the sods shall start at
the bottom of the slope. The sods shall be butted tightly
against each other, and care shall be taken not to stretch or
overlap the sods. Where a good fit cannot be obtained, any
intervening spaces shall be filled with topsoil. The next row
shall be similarly placed tightly against the bottom row with
staggered joints, and so on until the entire area has been
covered with sods. On steep slopes, when instructed by the
Engineer, the sods shall be held in position by a sufficient
number of wooden stakes approximately 300 mm long by
20 mm in thickness and these stakes shall be knocked into
the subsoil to a depth of 100 mm.
The Contractor shall water the sods directly after they have
been placed to prevent undue drying out. As sodding is
completed, each section shall be lightly rolled and
thoroughly watered.
(c)
Hydroseeding
Where it is specified that hydroseeding is to be carried out

on topsoil, the thickness of the topsoil shall be as specified
in the Project Specifications or as directed by the Engineer.
The types and mixtures of seeds to be used shall be as
specified in the Project Specifications or, if not so specified
therein, shall be agreed on by the Engineer and the
Contractor before any seed he may wish to use is ordered
by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be solely responsible
for establishing an acceptable grass cover, and any
approval by the Engineer of seed or seed mixtures intended
for use by the Contractor shall not relieve him of this
responsibility.
A mulch shall be added to the hydroseeding mix at an
approved rate.
Hydroseeding shall then be carried out with an approved
hydroseeding machine at a rate of application of not less
than 38 kg of seed mixture per hectare, unless otherwise
When the use of anti-erosion compounds is required and
such compound is to be applied simultaneously with the
hydroseeding, it shall be mixed with the hydroseeding
mixture before application.
5700-3
(d)
Topsoiling only
Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, the planting of grass

or hydroseeding can be dispensed with on account of
favourable climatic and other conditions, he may attempt to
establish grass by topsoiling only. Topsoil shall be selected
for the presence of natural grass and seeds and shall be
removed and placed whenever possible at a time that would
favour the establishing of grass. These areas shall be
treated with an anti-erosion compound, if so instructed by
the Engineer.
After the topsoil has been placed, it shall be lightly rolled
and well watered, and afterwards watered and mown
whenever instructed by the Engineer.
The Contractor will not be held responsible for establishing
an acceptable grass cover as defined in Subclause 5706(b)
when this procedure is followed, but will be responsible for
the consequences of any omission to water, weed or mow
the grass as instructed by the Engineer.
No payment for grassing shall be made other than for
placing topsoil, and for mowing and watering the grass,
which will be paid for at the tendered rates, and for any
replanting of grass on bare patches, repairs caused by
erosion, and similar work, which will be paid for as extra
work in terms of the General Conditions of Contract.
(e)
5706
MAINTAINING THE GRASS
(a)
Watering, weeding, mowing and replanting
All sodded and grassed areas shall be adequately watered

at regular and frequent intervals to ensure the proper
germination of seeds and growth of grass until the grass has
established an acceptable cover and thereafter until the
beginning of the maintenance period of the grass. The
quantity of water and the frequency of watering shall be
subject to the Engineer's approval. With hydroseeding the
commencement of watering may be postposed until a
favourable time of the year, but watering shall in any case
commence and continue as soon as the seeds have
germinated and growth has started.
The Contractor shall further mow the grass on all areas
where grass has been established whenever so instructed
by the Engineer, until the end of the maintenance period. All
grass cuttings shall be collected and disposed of if so
directed by the Engineer. Weeds shall be controlled by
approved means. Any bare patches where the grass has not
taken or where it has been damaged or has dried out shall
be recultivated, planted, sodded or hydroseeded at the
Contractor's own expense.
All grassed areas shall have an acceptable cover as defined
below at both the beginning and the end of the maintenance
period.
Grassing with an approved grassing machine

(b)
Grassing shall be done with an approved grass planter

which plants the seeds in rows spaced not more
than 250 mm apart. The planter shall plant the seeds
approximately 6 mm deep and shall lightly compact the soil.
The prescribed fertiliser may be distributed simultaneously
with the grass planting.
(f)
Other methods
Whenever specified in the Project Specifications, other

methods of grassing may be employed.
(h)
The grassing of borrow pits, temporary

bypasses, camp sites, access roads and
stockpile sites
Prior to any grassing that may be required on such areas,

the finishing-off of borrow pits as described under Clause
3105, obliterating the bypasses and access roads as
described in Clauses 1516 and 5803 respectively, and the
clearing of camp sites as described in Section 1300, shall
have been carried out as specified in the relevant Sections.
Note: With regard to Subclauses 5705 (e) and (f), the
areas to be grassed shall be prepared as described in
Clause 5704 and the areas shall be thoroughly watered after
completion of the operation. Also if so instructed by the
Engineer, an anti-erosion compound shall be applied.
5700-4
An acceptable grass cover shall mean that not less than

75% of the area grassed or hydroseeded shall be covered
with grass and that no bare patches exceeding 0.25 m2 in
any area of 1.0 m x 1.0 m shall occur. In the case of
sodding, acceptable cover shall mean that the entire area
shall be covered with live grass at the end of any period not
less than three months after sodding.
Hand seeding
If approved by the Engineer, sowing may be done by hand.

The seed shall be spread uniformly over the surfaces and
then lightly raked into the soil.
(g)
Acceptable cover
(c)
Maintenance period
The maintenance period in respect of grass shall commence

when an acceptable grass cover as defined in (b) above has
been established and shall be one year. This means that the
maintenance period in respect of grass can commence
earlier or later than the maintenance period for other parts
of the Contract.
If the maintenance period in respect of grass expires before
the end of the maintenance period for the other roadworks,
the Contractor shall further mow the grass on such areas as
instructed by the Engineer up to the end of the maintenance
period for the other roadworks. For mowing that is executed
after the maintenance period in respect of grass has
expired, the Contractor shall be paid under Item 57.07.
5707
TREES AND SHRUBS
(a)
Positions of trees and shrubs
The localities where trees and shrubs are to be planted are

as follows:
(i)
Trees and shrubs shall be planted at locations
(ii)
Plants in the median shall be planted in a line 1.5 m
from the centre line of the median or as directed by the
Engineer.
(iii)
When the carriageways are at different levels, the
plants in the median shall be planted 2 m from the edge of
the shoulder on the high side of the median or as directed
by the Engineer.
(iv)
Where the road curves, the plants in the median
shall be planted on the inside of the median centre line.
(v)
Where the carriageways are at different levels as
well as on a curve, the plants in the median shall be planted
on the high side, provided they do not impede on sight
distance, or as directed by the Engineer.
(vi)
At freeway crossings over roads or rivers, shrubs
shall be planted in the positions shown on the Drawings.
(vii)
At the headwalls of culverts or similar structures,
trees and/or shrubs shall be planted to indicate the positions
of these structures. The locations for planting the plants
shall be as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer.
(viii) Care shall be taken not to obscure traffic signs by
plants.
(ix)
Trees shall not be planted closer than 10 m from the
yellow line on the outside shoulder.
(b)
All holes shall be square in plan.
(ii)
Holes for hedge plants and shrubs shall be at least
500 mm square by 600 mm deep and 1.5 m from centre to
centre. Alternatively a 500 mm wide trench 600 mm deep
may be dug.
(iii)
Holes for trees shall be at least 600 mm square by
700 mm deep.
(iv)
The holes for plants shall be refilled with selected
and approved topsoil thoroughly mixed with manure or
compost (one heaped spadeful added to every plant hole)
and, depending on soil-test reports, the required quantity
and type of fertiliser.
(v)
The holes shall be thoroughly watered before plants
are planted. Where the soil is poorly drained, 150 mm of
crushed stone shall be placed at the bottom of the hole
before it is filled with soil.
(c)
(d)
Maintenance
During the period of maintenance, which shall be twelve

months after completion of the actual planting of trees,
shrubs and hedges, the Contractor shall be responsible for
watering the trees, shrubs and hedges and keeping the
plants free from weeds and pests.
Every hedge plant, tree or shrub, which is not healthy or
shows unsatisfactory growth shall be replaced by the
Contractor at his own expense, within one month of having
been notified by the Engineer, in writing.
5708
GENERAL
(a)
Time of planting
Grass, trees and shrubs shall be planted as far as is

practicable during periods of the year most likely to produce
best growing results. The Contractor shall make every effort
to programme his operations in such a manner that grass,
trees and shrubs shall, as far as is possible, be planted
during this period.
Preparing plant holes
Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, holes shall be

spaced and prepared as follows:
(i)
the Engineer and firmly planted in the ground. The stake

shall be 300 mm longer than the planted tree, and its
maximum length shall be 1.5 m above ground level. After
planting, the ground surface around the plant shall be
covered with straw or grass or any other type of mulch to
minimise evaporation.
Planting
Before trees, shrubs and hedging plants are removed from

their containers for planting, they shall be well watered.
Directly after having been planted, each plant shall be well
watered with a view to settling the soil. After the soil has
settled, additional soil shall be added where necessary to
bring the replaced soil in the hole to within 150 mm of the
ground surface, so as to ensure that sufficient water can be
retained in the hole around the plant. All trees shall be tied
to a suitable creosote-treated timber stake with a minimum
diameter of 35 mm or other suitable stake as approved by
(b)
Traffic on grassed areas
The Contractor shall not plant any grass until all operations
which may require road-building equipment to be taken over
grassed areas have been completed. No road-building
equipment, trucks or water carts shall be allowed onto areas
which have been grassed and only equipment required for
the preparation of areas, application of fertiliser, spreading
of topsoil, watering and mowing will be allowed to operate on
areas to be grassed. All damaged areas shall be reinstated
by the Contractor at his own expense.
(c)
Erosion prevention
During construction the Contractor shall protect all areas

susceptible to erosion by installing all the necessary
temporary and permanent drainage works as soon as
possible and by taking such other measures as may be
necessary to prevent the surface water from being
concentrated in streams and from scouring the slopes,
banks or other areas.
Any runnels or erosion channels developing during the
construction period or during the maintenance period shall
be backfilled and compacted, and the areas restored to a
proper condition. The Contractor shall not allow erosion to
develop on a large scale before effecting repairs and all
erosion damage shall be repaired as soon as possible and
in any case not later than three months before the
termination of the maintenance period. All topsoil or other
material accumulated in side drains shall be removed at the
same time. Topsoil washed away shall be replaced.
5700-5
(d)
Proprietary brand materials used for erosion

prevention
Certain proprietary brands of materials which may be

necessary for erosion prevention to enable natural grass to
become established, shall, if required, be specified in the
Project Specifications. The method according to which the
material is to be applied, the surface preparation required,
the type of material to be provided and the method of
payment shall be as specified in the Project Specifications.
(e)
Responsibility for establishing an acceptable

cover
Notwithstanding the fact that the Engineer will determine the

method of grassing and that the type of seed or grass used
and the rate of application of the seed may be specified or
agreed on by the Engineer, and that the frequency of
mowing will be as ordered by him, the Contractor shall be
solely responsible for establishing an acceptable grass
cover and for the cost of replanting grass or re-hydroseeding
where no acceptable cover has been established. Where
however, in the opinion of the Contractor, it is doubtful from
the outset if it will be possible to establish an acceptable
cover he may inform the Engineer of his reasons therefor,
and the Engineer may, if he agrees, either adopt another
method of grassing or agree to accept whatever cover can
be obtained, provided that all reasonable efforts shall be
made to establish a good grass cover by the proposed
method. Any such agreement shall be valid only if given in
writing by the Engineer beforehand.
In the case of grassing by topsoiling only the Contractor will
not be held directly responsible for establishing an
acceptable grass cover but will be held responsible for the
consequences of supplying workmanship which does not
conform to the Specifications, or for lack of proper care.
(f)
Re-fertilising
Should it become necessary, the Engineer may instruct the

Contractor to undertake a Re-fertilising programme on
grassed areas during the twelve month maintenance period.
Payment for re-fertilisation will be made under Subitem
57.03(e).
5709

trimming the areas to the specified finishing requirements,
including the moving of a small quantity of material which
would be inherent in this process and the removal of surplus
material and stones. Payment shall distinguish between
machine trimming which can reasonably be done by
bulldozer or motor grader, and hand trimming.
Item
Unit
57.02 Using machines for trimming

or shaping (alternative to
Subitem 57.01(a)):
(a)
Bulldozer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hour (h)
(b)
Motor grader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hour (h)
The unit of measurement shall be the hour actually worked

by each machine in trimming or shaping areas. Standing
time will not be measured.
furnishing and using the machines, including the cost of fuel,
operators, maintenance, transporting the machine to and
from the point where it is to be used, and for all other
incidentals necessary for carrying out the work.
Item
Unit
57.03 Preparing the areas

for grassing:
(a)
Ripping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hectare (ha)
(b)
Ploughing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hectare (ha)
(c)
Topsoiling within the
road reserve, where the following materials are used:
(i)
Topsoil obtained from
within the road reserve or borrow areas (free-haul 1.0 km) . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(ii)
Topsoil obtained from
other sources by the Contractor
(including all haul) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
Item
Unit
57.01 Trimming:
(a)
Machine trimming . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(b)
Hand trimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(d)
Topsoiling of borrow
pits by using topsoil obtained
from borrow areas or from the
road reserve (free-haul
1.0 km) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(e)
Providing and applying
chemical fertilisers and/or
soil-improvement material:
Note: All bulk earth-moving operations as described under

shaping in Subclause 5703(a) shall be measured and paid
for under Section 3300.
(i)
Lime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tonne (t)
(ii)
Superphosphate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tonne (t)
The unit of measurement for trimming shall be the square

metre of area trimmed on the instruction of the Engineer,
including areas trimmed after having been shaped. No
trimming within the road prism shall be measured for
payment.
(iii)
Limestone ammonium nitrate . . . . . . . . tonne (t)
(iv)
2:3:2(22) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tonne (t)
(v)
3:2:1(25) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tonne (t)
5700-6
(vi)
Other fertilisers and/
or soil-improvement materials
if required (type stated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tonne (t)
(f)
Stockpiling topsoil . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(a)
Ripping
(e)
Providing and applying fertiliser and/or soilimprovement material
The unit of measurement for fertiliser shall be the tonne of

each type of fertiliser and/or soil-improvement material
ordered and applied.
The unit of measurement for ripping shall be the hectare of

soil ripped. Only areas ripped on the written instructions of
the Engineer shall be measured for payment.

furnishing the fertiliser and/or soil-improvement material,
transporting it to the point of use, spreading and mixing it
into the scarified soil or topsoil, irrespective of the method of
application.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for ripping,

complete as specified.
(f)
Ploughing for loosening the soil will be paid for under

Subitem 57.03(b).
(b)
Ploughing
The unit of measurement for loosening the topsoil by

ploughing shall be the hectare of soil loosened and prepared
in accordance with the Specifications. Only areas loosened
by ploughing on the written instructions of the Engineer shall
be measured for payment.
loosening the topsoil by ploughing, removing stones, and
levelling and trimming the surface.
Stockpiling the topsoil
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of topsoil

stockpiled on the written instructions of the Engineer where
this operation is unavoidable despite proper advance
planning. Only material actually loaded, transported to and
stockpiled on sites designated for stockpiling will be
measured, but not any material merely pushed or bladed
into heaps next to the area from which it is taken, unless it
was done with the prior approval of the Engineer, and the
material was stockpiled in an approved area.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for loading
the topsoil, placing it in stockpile and for any payments to
private Owners for the use of stockpile areas.
Item
Unit
(c) and (d) Placing the topsoil
57.04 Grassing:
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of topsoil

applied at the specified thickness or as directed by the
Engineer, measured in situ after the topsoil has been
placed. The quantity shall be calculated from the net area of
the topsoiled surface multiplied by the average thickness of
the topsoil but before the grass sods are placed. Any topsoil
placed in excess of the average thickness specified or
prescribed will not be measured for payment.
(a)
Planting of grass cuttings
(type of grass indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hectare (ha)
Payment shall distinguish between topsoil obtained from

designated areas within the road reserve or borrow areas
and topsoil obtained by the Contractor from outside sources
when sufficient topsoil is not available from the designated
areas mentioned above. Payment shall further distinguish
between topsoil applied to slopes, at interchanges and at
other areas within the road reserve and topsoil applied at
borrow areas.
(ii)
Veld sods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(c)
Hydroseeding:

excavating and loading the topsoil, any royalties or
compensation that may be payable in the case of topsoil
under Subitem 57.03(c), transport (except overhaul), offloading, placing and spreading it to the required thickness,
levelling it off to a smooth surface, for removing any stones
as specified and for roughening the surface to be topsoiled.
(d)
Planting grass seed
with an approved grass-planting machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hectare (ha)
The free-haul distance of topsoil obtained from the road

reserve or borrow areas shall be 1.0 km. The tendered rate
for topsoil under Subitem 57.03(c) shall also include full
compensation for transporting the topsoil to the point of
eventual use.
(b)
Sodding by using the
following types of sods:
(i)
Nursery sods (type of
grass specified) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(i)
Providing an approved
seed mixture for hydroseeding . . . . . . . . . . kilogram (kg)
(ii)
Hydroseeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hectare (ha)
(e)
Hand sowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(f)
Other methods (specify).
(a)
The unit of measurement for planting grass cuttings shall be

the hectare of established grass with an acceptable grass
cover.
furnishing and planting the cuttings, watering, weeding, and
replanting if necessary, and all other incidentals which may
5700-7
be necessary for establishing an acceptable cover and

maintaining the grass, except mowing.
(b)
planted areas until an acceptable grass covering has been

established. Payment for the grass seeds shall be separate
under Subitem 57.04(c).
Sodding
(f)
The unit of measurement for sodding shall be the square

metre covered with sods, which has an acceptable cover.
procuring, excavating, loading, transporting, off-loading,
placing and watering the sods, for replanting dead areas, for
watering and weeding the grass, for supplying and placing
timber stakes and for all other incidentals, except for
mowing, which may be necessary for establishing an
acceptable cover, and maintaining the grass. Payment shall
distinguish between nursery-grown sods and veld sods
obtained from within the road reserve or borrow areas. In the
case of veld sods the tendered price shall include levellingoff and trimming areas from which the sods are taken.
Whenever other methods of grassing are specified in the

Project Specifications, measurement and payment shall be
as specified.
(g)
Hydroseeding
(i)
The unit of measurement for providing seed shall be
the kilogram of seed of the specified seed mixture. The
mass of any pulp added shall not be measured.
procuring and furnishing the seeds.
(ii)
The unit of measurement for hydrosdeeding shall be
the hectare of grass established by hydroseeding, which has
an acceptable cover.
furnishing cellulose pulp and mixing it with seed and water
and with any anti-erosion compound if required, applying the
mixture, watering, weeding, re-hydroseeding bare patches,
and for any other work, except mowing, which may be
necessary for establishing an acceptable cover and
maintaining the grass.
(d)
Grassing with an approved grass planter
The unit of measurement for planting any grass seeds by

using an approved planter shall be the hectare of grass with
an acceptable cover, where the seed has been planted with
an approved planter.
labour, material, equipment, weeding, and all incidentals
which may be necessary for planting the grass seeds and
establishing an acceptable grass cover. The tendered rate
shall also include full compensation for watering the planted
areas until an acceptable grass cover has been established.
Payment for the grass seed will be separate under Subitem
57.04(c).
(e)
Hand-sowing
General
Half the payments under Item 57.04 will become due when
the grassing or hydroseeding has been done, and the
remainder will become due when satisfactory cover has
been established.
Item
(c)
Other methods
Unit
57.05 Watering the grass

when established by
topsoiling only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kilolitre (kR)
The unit of measurement for watering areas which have
been topsoiled on the instruction of the Engineer but which
have not been hydroseeded or planted with grass, shall be
the kilolitre of water applied on the instructions of the
Engineer and calculated from the number of tank loads
applied, multiplied by the capacity of the tank used in each
case.
procuring, transporting and applying the water as specified.
Item
Unit
57.06 Watering the already planted

grass, trees and shrubs planted
during periods of drought
experienced during the
growing season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kilolitre (kR)
The unit of measurement for watering the grass, trees and
shrubs shall be the kilolitre of water used.
obtaining, transporting and applying the water.
The Contractor shall keep a careful record of the quantity of
water used by him for watering the grass, trees and shrubs
planted and shall submit such information to the Engineer
on a daily basis. When there are times during the normal
growing season, as specified in the Project Specifications,
when the monthly rainfall figure is less than 75% of the
monthly average, the Contractor will be compensated under
this Item for the same percentage of the quantity of water
used for watering as that for the monthly rainfall that fell
short of the average rainfall.
The unit of measurement for hand-sowing the grass seeds

shall be the square metre of grass with an acceptable
covering on surfaces instructed by the Engineer to be handsown.
Item

labour, materials, equipment, weeding, and all incidentals
which may be necessary for planting the grass seeds and
establishing an acceptable grass covering. The tendered
rate shall also include full compensation for watering the
The unit of measurement shall be the hectare measured

each time when the grass has been cut on the instructions
of the Engineer.
5700-8
Unit
57.07 Mowing the grass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hectare (ha)

plant, equipment and labour, required for every cutting of the
grass and disposing of the grass cuttings, ie payment will be
made every time the grass has been cut on the instructions
of the Engineer.
Item
including any other incidentals which may be necessary for

properly executing the work. Where the Employer furnishes
the plants, the above rates shall also include full
compensation for taking delivery of the plants, maintaining
them until required, transporting them to point of final use,
and for providing substitutes for plants which die or become
diseased during storage.
Unit
57.08 Anti-erosion compound

(specify) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kilogram (kg)
The unit of measurement shall be the kilogram net mass of
anti-erosion compound used with the approval of the
Engineer.
The tendered rate for each kilogram of anti-erosion
compound applied with the hydroseeding or by itself shall
include full compensation for furnishing the material and
mixing and applying it during hydroseeding or by itself.
Item
Unit
57.09 Trees and shrubs

(a)
Providing the trees and shrubs
(types indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of each
species or variety of tree and shrub furnished and
established.
furnishing the plants at the point of final use, including
substitutes for plants which may become diseased or die.
(b)
Planting and establishing:
(i)
Trees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(ii)
Shrubs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)

planted and established.
excavating the holes to the specified dimensions, furnishing
topsoil, wooden stakes, crushed stone, manure and
compost and mixing them together with any fertiliser
required for planting and refilling each hole with the topsoil
mixture and other soil, for watering the plants until the end
of the maintenance period, furnishing and planting
substitutes for plants that have died and for maintaining the
plants as specified until the end of the maintenance period,
Any chemical fertiliser and/or soil-improvement material

required will be measured and paid for under Subitem
57.03(e).
Item
Unit
57.10 Extra work for landscaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . provisional sum

The provisional sum allowed shall be expended at the
discretion of the Engineer to cover the cost of work in
addition to the scheduled Items which may be required in
respect of shaping and trimming areas where plant is used
at hourly rates, eg the cost of loading and transporting
surplus material, establishing grass by topsoiling only,
repairing erosion damage after topsoil has been applied, or
any other Items of work required for which no pay Items
have been provided.
Payment shall be made as specified in Subclause 1209(f).
Item
57.11 Weeding all grass-seeded
areas and the grass when
established by topsoiling
only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hectare (ha)
The unit of measurement for weeding all grass-seeded
areas that have been topsoiled on the instruction of the
Engineer (but have not been hydroseeded or planted with
grass), shall be the hectare.
weeding the prescribed areas in accordance with the
Specifications.
Note: Measurement and payment for overhaul shall be as
specified in Item 16.02, but no overhaul shall apply to topsoil
paid for under Subitem 57.03(c).
5700-9
5700-10
SERIES 5000 :
ANCILLARY ROADWORKS
SECTION 5800 :
FINISHING THE ROAD AND ROAD

RESERVE AND TREATING OLD
ROADS
surrounding area and to permit the re-establishment of

vegetation. Should the Engineer require landscaping and
grassing to be performed, it shall be done in accordance
with Section 5700.
5803
TREATING OLD ROADS
CONTENTS
5801
5802
5803
5804
SCOPE
FINISHING THE ROAD AND ROAD RESERVE
TREATING OLD ROADS
5801
SCOPE
This Section covers the final finishing and cleaning up of the

road and road reserve after construction, and scarifying and
treating old roads and temporary diversions.
All old roads, temporary diversions, haul roads and

construction roads shall, in so far as is practicable, be
levelled with the original ground. Surfaces shall be scarified
and broken up to a depth of 150 mm for promoting plant
growth. The old roads shall be rehabilitated as shown in the
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer and shall be
revegetated in accordance with Section 5700.
Where required by the Engineer, in order to prevent soil
erosion, banks, dykes or ditches shall be constructed over
the old road to dimensions ordered by the Engineer. All
roads and temporary diversions treated as above, shall be
left in a neat and tidy state.
The Contractor shall note that this Section does not cover
the finishing which has to be done under Sections 1700,
3100, 3300 and Section 5700.
5804
5802
Item
FINISHING THE ROAD AND ROAD RESERVE
After completing the seal or surfacing, or gravel surface on

gravel roads, the road and road reserve shall be cleared of
all excess earth, stones, boulders, debris and other waste
material resulting from the construction of the Works and
disposed in an approved waste site. All finishing and
clearing not previously done or completed as specified in the
Sections of the Specifications set out in Clause 5801 above
shall be completed. This specification, however, does not
intend the finishing, clearing and maintenance which must
be done as provided for in other Sections of these
Specifications, to be postponed until the final finishing
operations provided for in this Section.
Culvert inlets and outlets, culvert barrels, and open drains
shall be cleared of all debris, soil, silt and other material.
The surfacing shall be cleared of all dirt, mud and foreign
objects. Dragging, pushing or scraping material across the
finished surfacing shall not be permitted.
All junctions, intersections, islands, kerbing and other
elements making up the completed Works shall be neatly
finished off.
The Contractor shall ensure that all declared noxious weeds
have been removed from the road-reserve and borrow-pit
areas. All noxious weeds shall be burnt to prevent the
spread of the seed and cut stumps or coppice shall be
sprayed with a suitable herbicide.
All soil, stones, boulders and indigenous plant material
resulting from the finishing operations shall be disposed of
at locations not visible from the road, and where they will not
pollute water sources or create a hazard for livestock or
wildlife (eg old borrow pits). All other waste such as drums,
excess steel, litter, etc which cannot be sold or recycled
shall be dumped in an approved waste site. The Contractor
himself shall make his own arrangements with the Owners
of properties on which such materials are to be deposited.
Disposal shall be carried out in a neat and uniform manner.
Any borrow pits used for material disposal shall be finished
off as described in Clause 3106. Any other areas used for
material disposal shall be shaped so as to blend with the
Unit
58.01 Finishing the road and

road reserve:
(a)
Dual carriageway road . . . . . . . . . . kilometre (km)
(b)
Single carriageway
road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kilometre (km)
The unit of measurement shall be the kilometre of road
measured along the centre line. No separate measurement
shall be made of ramps at interchanges.
clearing, trimming, disposing of material, tidying and all
other work to be done for finishing off the road and road
reserve as specified.
Any landscaping and grassing shall be measured and paid
Item
Unit
58.02 Treatment of old roads

and temporary diversions . . . . . . kilometre (km)
The unit of measurement shall be the kilometre of old road
or temporary diversion treated.
Any landscaping and grassing shall be measured and paid
The construction of banks, dykes or ditches shall be
measured and paid for under Section 2100.
levelling and scarifying any surfaces and tidying old roads
and diversions as specified.
No payment will be made in regard to treating haul roads
and construction roads, for which the Contractor shall make
allowance in his rates for constructing the relevant items of
work for which such roads are necessary.
5800-1
5800-2
SERIES 5000 :
ANCILLARY ROADWORKS
SECTION 5900 :
PAINTING
Baking enamels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SABS 783

or equivalent
CONTENTS
5901
5902
5903
5904
5905
5906
5907
5908
5909
5910
5911
5912
SCOPE
MATERIAL
GENERAL
APPLYING THE PAINT
PROTECTING THE WORKS DURING PAINTING
OPERATIONS
PREPARING SURFACES FOR PAINTING
PAINTING STRUCTURAL STEEL
PAINTING GUARD RAILS
PAINTING CONCRETE
PAINTING GALVANISED SURFACES
MEASURING PAINT THICKNESSES
5901
SCOPE
MATERIAL
Paints shall comply with the requirements of the following

Specifications:
(a)
Primers
Zinc-chromate primers for

steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SABS 679 (Type 1
or Type 2, Grade II)
or equivalent
Wash primer (metal etch primer) . . . . . . . . . . . SABS 723
or equivalent
Calcium-plumbate primer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SABS 912
or equivalent
Two-pack Zinc-rich epoxy primer . . . . . . . . . . . SABS 926
or equivalent
(b)
Undercoats
Undercoat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SABS 681 (Type II)

or equivalent
(c)
Finishing coats
Decorative enamel for interior

and exterior use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SABS 630
or equivalent
High-gloss paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emulsion paint for exterior

use (polyacrylic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SABS 634
or equivalent
Chloro-rubber paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SABS 1413
or equivalent
Bituminous aluminium paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SABS 802
or equivalent
(d)
Other
Epoxy-tar paints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SABS 801 (Type I)

or equivalent
Bonding liquid for concrete surfaces . . . . . . . . . CKS 564
or equivalent
This Section covers the painting of structural steel, guard

rails, overhead road sign supports and other structures
according to the requirements of the various Sections of
these Specifications where painting is called for. It does not
included the treatment of timber posts which are included
under Subclause 5202 (b).
5902
Micaceous iron-ore-pigmented
paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SABS 684
or equivalent
684 (Type A)
or equivalent
Bituminous-emulsion paint shall consist of a stable

bituminous emulsion with a minimum of 45% of bitumen and
about 5% of approved fibre.
5903
GENERAL
No paint shall be applied to surfaces containing physically

adhering contaminants such as oil, grease, dirt, marking
material, water-soluble salts, wax, paint and temporary
protectives, or to surfaces containing chemically bonded
contaminants such as rust, mill scale, slag and flux.
All surfaces which are to be painted shall be dry. Unless
otherwise stated, subsequent coats of paints shall be
applied over dry paint surfaces.
All traces of soluble salts and corrosive airborne
contaminants shall be thoroughly washed from the surface
prior to painting, and the surface shall be dried and painted
immediately afterwards.
Where surfaces are to be welded, unless otherwise
specified, any paint shall not be applied within 75 mm of the
weld position.
After the welding has been completed, the welds and
adjacent parent metal shall be completely deslagged, and
the surfaces shall then be inspected and approved by the
Engineer. All spatter shall be removed prior to the surfaces
being painted. The weld area shall be abrasive-blasted
and/or ground and all contaminants such as flux shall be
removed prior to the surface being painted.
Surfaces which are to rest on concrete or other floors shall
receive all the prescribed coats of paint prior to the member
being erected.
Damaged paint areas shall be cleaned, rust spots removed
and the surface again be primed so that the patch painting
covers the damaged areas and extends over a strip of
20 mm beyond each damaged area.
Where the shop coat is allowed to age for a few months
before the next layer of paint is applied, light sanding with
5900-1
sandpaper or rubbing with steel wool and scrubbing with

clean water with a bristle brush shall be carried out.
Steel to be embedded in concrete shall be entirely painted
to a distance of 50 mm within the concrete measured from
the concrete outer surface.
or of paint materials. The Contractor shall be responsible

for any damage to or paint on or contamination to vehicles,
persons or property, including plants and animals, as a
result of his operations, and he will be required to provide
protective measures at his own cost to prevent such
damage.
The paint manufacturer's instructions shall be strictly

adhered to.
Any unsightly paint stains shall be removed by the

Contractor at his own cost.
Painted steel members shall be stacked so as to be off the

ground.
If passing traffic creates sufficient dust to harm or spoil the

appearance of painted surfaces, the Contractor shall
sprinkle the adjacent roads and shoulders with water at his
own cost, for a sufficient distance on each side of the
location where the painting is being done, to keep the dust
away from freshly painted surfaces. The Contractor shall,
at his own cost, also furnish and post DRIVE SLOWLY
signs and take other necessary precautions to prevent dust
and dirt from adhering onto freshly painted surfaces.
Friction-grip surfaces shall not be painted but shall be

treated in accordance with the Project Specifications.
5904
APPLYING THE PAINT
Unless otherwise specified, paint may be applied either by

brush, spray or roller method, or by any combination of
these three methods.
5906
PREPARING SURFACES FOR PAINTING
Where brushes are used, they shall have sufficient body and
length of bristle for spreading the paint in a uniform coat.
Paint shall be evenly spread and thoroughly brushed out. If
brush marks are visible, it will be considered that the paint
has been improperly applied, and the paint will not be
accepted.
Before paint is applied to any surface, the appropriate

specified surface preparation shall be carried out in
accordance with the paint manufacturers recommendations.
5907
PAINTING STRUCTURAL STEEL
On all surfaces which are inaccessible to painting by regular

painting equipment, the paint shall be applied by bottle
brushes, sheepskin daubers, or by any other acceptable
method so as to render the required coating of paint.
(a)
General
If spray methods are used, the operator shall be thoroughly

experienced. Runs, sags, thin areas in the paint coat, skips,
or where air bubbles have formed or the paint has
delaminated, shall be considered as being unsatisfactory,
and the Contractor will be required to repaint the surface by
brush.
A water trap and an air-regulating valve acceptable to the
Engineer shall be furnished and installed on the equipment
used for spray-painting.
Mechanical mixers shall be used for mixing paint properly
when no ready-mixed paints are used. Prior to application,
the paint shall be remixed for a sufficient length of time to
mix the pigment and vehicle thoroughly. Paint shall be
constantly kept well stirred to keep the pigments in
suspension during its application. All skins in the paint shall
be removed by screening. If it cannot be removed
effectively, the paint and paintwork already completed may
be condemned at the discretion of the Engineer.
Paint shall not be applied when the temperature of the
surface to be painted is not at least 3C above dew point or
when the temperature of the steel is below 5C or above
35C, unless otherwise prescribed by the Engineer.
Paint shall not be applied in fog or mist, when it is raining or
when rain is expected, or when the relative humidity is
above 90%.
5905
PROTECTING THE WORKS DURING PAINTING

OPERATIONS
The Contractor shall protect all parts of the structure against

disfigurement by spatters, splashes and/or smirches of paint
5900-2
This Section includes the painting of steel guard rail posts,

steel road sign supports and steel sign face frames, where
required.
The surface preparation, priming and application of an
undercoat shall be carried out under cover at the fabricator's
works. Where possible, all painting shall be done at the
fabricator's works but, where this is not feasible, the
Engineer may permit the application of the finishing coats on
the site, in which case an undercoat shall be applied at the
fabricator's works prior to the members being despatched to
the Works.
Unless otherwise specified, the protection described in
Subclauses 5907(c), (d) and (e) shall be applied to all steel
work. Corrosion protection of steel work exposed to
aggressive or severe conditions shall comply with the
requirements of the Project Specifications.
(b)
Surface preparation
(i)
New structures
After all cutting, drilling, welding and punching have been

completed, it shall be ascertained that all sharp edges have
been uniformly rounded off and smoothed down. All
physically adhering contaminants shall be removed and the
surface shall then be abrasive-blasted to Sa 2 finish in
accordance with the Swedish Standard SIS 05/59/00 or
equivalent. The profile limit of the surface finish shall be
between 30 and 60 m. The abrasive-blasting profile shall
be measured in accordance with SABS Method 772 or
equivalent and shall comply with SABS Code of Practice
064 or equivalent.
No abrasive-blasting shall be done during rainy weather or
when corrosive air conditions prevail.
Unless the application of a primer follows within four hours

of abrasive blasting and before any oxidation of the
prepared surface takes place, the abrasive-blasted surface
shall immediately after abrasive blasting be given one coat
of a wash primer.
of paint, but, where this is impossible, each surface shall be

given a copious coating of primer and the surfaces drawn up
while the paint is still wet.
(g)
(ii)
Existing structures
Back-to-back members and areas not easily

accessible
The surface preparation of existing structures shall be

carried out on site in accordance with SABS 064 or
equivalent.
Back-to-back members and areas not easily accessible

shall be fully coated with all the specified coats of paint up
to and including the finishing coats before erection.
(c)
(h)
Primer
The prepared surface shall be given two coats of a zincchromate primer in accordance with SABS 679, Type 1,
Grade II or equivalent. The first coat shall be applied within
12 hours in the case of wash-primed surfaces and within
four hours, but before any oxidation of the surface takes
place, in the case of abrasive-blasted surfaces that have not
been wash-primed.
A fast-drying zinc chromate in
accordance with SABS 679, Type II, Grade II or equivalent,
may be used as primer. In all cases the dry-film thickness
shall not be less than 30 m per coat.
When steel has to be welded after the primer has been
applied, the steel shall be left unpainted for a distance of 75
mm from the weld joint unless a weldable type of paint has
been used. The welds shall be treated in accordance with
the instructions of Clauses 5903 and 5907.
(d)
Finishing coat
Two finishing coats of high-gloss structural paint (SABS

684, Type A or equivalent) of the specified colour shall be
applied to leave a dry-film thickness of not less than 25 m
per coat.
Where the finishing coats are applied on the site, the
undercoat shall be lightly sanded and the members washed
and cleaned of all contaminants. The first finishing coat shall
be applied as soon as the structural members are dry.
Where specified in the Project Specifications, the second
finishing coat shall consist of a micaceous iron-orepigmented structural paint of the specified colour to a dryfilm thickness of not less than 30 m. Unless otherwise
specified, the second finishing coat shall be applied within
48 hours of the application of the first finishing coat.
The dry-film thickness of the total paint system shall not be
less than 110 m when no undercoat is used and not less
than 135 m when an undercoat is used. Where the second
finishing coat is an iron-ore-pigmented paint, these
thicknesses shall be increased by 5 m.
(f)
Damaged areas shall be treated as follows:

Sand down to bright metal and clean. Spot prime with two
coats and sand down lightly when hard. Rinse off with water
and allow to dry. Apply two finishing coats.
(i)
Structural steel to be embedded below ground
Those parts of structural-steel members to be embedded in

soil and all bases to a height of 500 mm shall be given two
coats of an epoxy-tar prime instead of the zinc-chromate
prime specified for other surfaces.
5908
PAINTING GUARD RAILS
(a)
General
Undercoat
Where the finishing coats are to be applied on the site, the

primed surfaces shall be given one coat of a universal
undercoat with a suitable colour in the fabricator's shop
before despatch. The undercoat shall be applied as soon as
the prime coat has dried sufficiently. The dry-film thickness
shall not be less than 25 m.
(e)
Damaged areas
Mating surfaces
When mating surfaces are brought together, both surfaces

shall already have been covered with all the specified coats
This Section covers the painting of guardrails, should it be

prescribed. The painting of steel guardrail posts is covered
in Subclause 5907 and the treatment of timber guardrail
posts is covered in Subclause 5202 (b).
(b)
Surface preparation and priming
All dirt, loose mill scale and loose corrosion products shall
be removed by hand or power tools and all rust and mill
scale by pickling, after which the surface shall be rinsed. A
neutralising rinse shall also be applied, or the surface shall
be phosphated.
(c)
Priming
Apply two coats of zinc-chromate primer to a dry-film

thickness of not less than 20 m per coat.
After the prime coats have hardened, the guard rails may be
transported to the site.
(d)
Storage on the site
The primed guard rails shall be stored off the ground under
cover and protected against rain and weather until erection.
Guard rails shall be stacked individually and not nested so
as to prevent corrosion during storage. The finishing coats
shall be applied as soon as possible and the primed
surfaces shall not be allowed to corrode as a result of
prolonged exposure to the weather. Any guard rails showing
signs of rust before the application of the finishing coats
shall be rubbed down with steel wool or fine sandpaper until
all rust is removed, and it shall then be recoated with a zincchromate primer.
5900-3
(e)
Finishing
Before the first finishing coat is applied, the guard rails shall
be thoroughly washed down to remove all traces of salt
and/or other air-borne corrosive materials and all dirt or
other contaminants.
As soon as the rinsed guard rails are dry, a finishing coat of
aluminium paint in accordance with SABS 802 or equivalent
or a white high-gloss enamel in accordance with SABS 684
or equivalent shall be applied to a dry-film thickness of not
less than 25 m. Within 48 hours this shall be followed by
a second coat as described before.
The guard rails shall preferably be given both finishing coats
before erection, but, where this is impossible, the Engineer
may permit the finishing coats to be applied after the guard
rails have been erected, provided that all mating surfaces
and spots which are not easily accessible shall be painted
with the finishing coats before the guard rails may be
erected.
The total dry-film thickness of all coats of the paint shall not
be less than 90 m. All damaged spots shall be treated as
specified in Subclause 5907(h).
5910
Galvanised surfaces shall be painted as specified in this

Section for steel surfaces, except that the surface
preparation and priming shall be as follows:
(a)
PAINTING CONCRETE
(a)
Surface preparation
The surface of the concrete to be painted shall be cleaned

of all dust, loose particles, laitance, impurities and other
deleterious materials, and then washed and allowed to dry.
Unless the surface is to be covered with a bituminous paint,
all cracks, holes and cavities shall be filled with grout or an
acrylic filler.
The surface shall be washed down and scrubbed to remove

all traces of grease, oil, dirt, etc.
(b)
Priming
Two coats of calcium-plumbate primer shall be applied to a

dry-film thickness of at least 25 m.
The undercoat shall follow within one week of the primer.
MEASURING PAINT THICKNESSES
The dry-film thickness of paint shall be determined in

accordance with SABS Method 141 or equivalent.
At least 90% of all thickness measurements shall comply
with the minimum specified requirements. The thickness
shall not in any case be less than 70% of the specified
thickness.
5912
(b)
Surface preparation
Freshly galvanised surfaces shall be thoroughly scrubbed

down with an approved galvanised-iron cleaner to remove all
traces of the resin protective coating.
5911
5909
PAINTING GALVANISED SURFACES
Sealing and priming
The surface shall be sealed with an approved clear sealer

which complies with CKS 564 or equivalent and then primed
with a primer consisting of an undercoat diluted to 50%.
Item
Unit
59.01 Painting:
(a)
(Describe structure/
article) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(c)
Undercoat and finishing
An undercoat shall be applied after priming, followed by two

finishing coats of the prescribed paint.
(b)
article) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(c)
article) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(d)
Bituminous paint
The surface shall be prepared in accordance with the

requirements of Subclause 5909(a). Before it dries out, a
primer shall be applied in accordance with the instructions
of the fabricator of the bituminous paint.
After the primer has been applied, two coats of bituminous
paint shall be applied at the rate of 0.75 R/m2/coat. No paint
coat shall be applied unless the previous coat has dried out
completely, and no paint shall be applied to the paintwork
for so long as any moisture occurs on the surface.
(d)
article) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tonne (t)
surface painted. Only the surface covered by the final
finishing coat shall be measured.
The unit of measurement may also be the number of
structures or articles painted, or a metre length of the
structures or articles painted, or a tonne of the structures or
articles painted, the quantities are calculated as specified in
Item 67.01.
surface preparation, applying all the coats of paint, repairing
any damaged surfaces, and all materials and construction
plant necessary for completing the work.
5900-4
SERIES 6000
STRUCTURES
6100
6200
6300
6400
6500
6600
6700
6800
Foundations for structures

Falsework, formwork and concrete finish
Steel reinforcements for structures
Concrete for structures
Prestressing
No-fines concrete, joints, bearings, bolt groups for electrification,
parapets and drainage for structures
Structural steelwork
Construction tolerances for structures
5900-5
5900-6
SERIES 6000 :
STRUCTURES
(d)
SECTION 6100 :
FOUNDATIONS FOR STRUCTURES
Granular material used for constructing the compacted

granular fill shall be approved granular material of at least
gravel subbase quality.
Granular fill
CONTENTS
6101
6102
6103
6104
6105
6106
6107
6108
6109
6110
6111
6112
6113
6114
6115
SCOPE
MATERIALS
GENERAL
ACCESS AND DRAINAGE
EXCAVATION
FOUNDING
UTILISATION OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL
BACKFILL AND FILL NEAR STRUCTURES
FOUNDATION FILL
GROUTING OF ROCK FISSURES
FOUNDATION DOWELS
FOUNDATION LINING
FOUNDATION PILING
CAISSONS
6101
SCOPE
This Section covers all foundation work which, for the

purposes of these Specifications, shall comprise those
elements of construction below the level of the bottom
surface of the footings, the pile-capping slabs or the caisson
cover slabs, collectively hereinafter referred to as base or
bases, which shall include all the associated temporary
works. Foundations for prefabricated culverts are not
included but are specified in Section 2200.
6102
MATERIALS
(a)
General
(e)
Sand used for filling the caissons shall be clean, hard sand
free from lumps of clay or organic or other deleterious
matter.
(f)
(b)
Rock (for rock fill)
Stones shall be hard, angular, natural or quarry stones of

such quality that they will not disintegrate on exposure to
water or weathering. The stones shall be free from soil, clay
or organic material. Neither the breadth nor thickness of a
single stone shall be less than one-third its length. Not more
than 10% of the total volume of rock fill shall consist of
stones with a mass of less than 0.5 times the specified mass
and not more than 10% of the total volume of rock fill shall
consist of stones with a mass of more than 5 times the
specified mass. At least 50% of the total volume of rock fill
shall consist of stones the mass of which exceeds the
specified mass.
(c)
Crushed stone
Crushed stone used for the construction of crushed-stone fill

shall originate from sound unweathered rock approved by
the Engineer.
Structural steel
Steel in the steel piles shall comply with the requirements of

BS 4360 or SABS 1431 or equivalent, BS EN 10113 and BS
EN 10155 for the grade of steel specified on the Drawings.
I and H sections shall comply with the requirements of BS 4:
Part 1.
Fabricated sections shall comply with the details shown on
the Drawings and the requirements of Section 6700.
(g)
Permanent pile casings
Permanent pile casings shall be sufficiently rigid so as not to

deform permanently or damage during handling and
construction. The casings shall be sufficiently dense to
prevent the fluid components of the concrete from leaking
during the placing of the concrete or thereafter. Where steel
casings contribute to the strength of the pile, the casings
shall have a minimum wall thickness of 4.5 mm and shall
comply with the requirements of ASTM A 252-68. Welded
joints shall comply with the requirements of Section 6700.
(h)
Material used in the permanent foundation work shall comply
with the requirements specified for the particular material in
Series 6000.
Sand fill
Driven pile casings
Driven pile casings shall have sufficient strength to permit

their being driven and not being distorted by the driving of
adjacent piles, and they shall be sufficiently watertight to
prevent water leaking through the casing walls during the
placing of concrete.
(i)
Grouting
(i)
Cement grout
Cement grout shall meet the appropriate requirements of

Subclause 6503(g).
(ii)
Proprietary-brand grout
Proprietary-brand grout shall be prepared and used strictly

in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer.
6103
GENERAL
(a)
Subsurface data
The provisions of Clause 1216 shall apply in regard to any

information supplied regarding any subsurface conditions
likely to be encountered.
If it is found during the course of excavating, founding-pile or
caisson work that the soil or founding conditions differ
6100-1
greatly from those shown on the Drawings, the Contractor

shall immediately notify the Engineer.
The Engineer shall, as often as he may deem necessary
during the course of excavation, be entitled to call on the
Contractor to conduct additional foundation investigations
and/or tests at or below the respective founding levels in
view of establishing safe bearing pressures and founding
depths.
(b)
Channel preservation
The flow of the stream and the conservation of marine and

freshwater life shall be maintained at all times. Access to
cofferdams, artificial islands and piling platforms shall be
effected without unnecessarily disrupting the flow of the
stream at the point of crossing, unless otherwise specified.
Precautions shall be taken by the Contractor to maintain
water quality standards. Water contaminated with silt shall
be settled in ponds before being pumped into streams.
Water contaminated with chemicals shall be purified before
being returned to the stream or disposed of in an appropriate
manner as directed by the Engineer. Precautions shall be
taken by the Contractor to ensure that the natural pH,
electrical conductivity and other indicators as prescribed of
the water are not raised or lowered.
On completion of the work, surplus excavated materials,
including materials excavated from caisson compartments
and holes for piles, materials used in cofferdams and other
temporary works, as well as in situ material, shall be
removed and disposed of by the Contractor to the level of
the original bed or such elevation as agreed to by the
Engineer or required for stream channelisation.
construction, the Contractor shall submit drawings to the

Engineer, which show details of the cofferdams and the
method of construction.
(c)
Drainage
The Contractor shall apply suitable, effective drainage

methods for preventing the ingress of water into excavations
and to keep them dry.
The drainage measures, with the exception of pumping, shall
be maintained until the backfilling has been completed.
Between the various construction stages pumping may be
interrupted in consultation with the Engineer.
Any draining or pumping of water shall be done in a manner
that will preclude the concrete or materials or any part
thereof from being carried away.
6105
EXCAVATION
(a)
General
This work shall include excavations not provided for

elsewhere in these Specifications, which are required for
founding the structures as well as for the excavating required
in respect of the demolition, extension or modification of
existing bridges and culverts.
Excavation required for diverting, channelling or widening
streams within 5 m of concrete structures shall be measured
and paid for under Item 61.02. Excavations beyond the 5 m
limit shall be measured and paid for under the appropriate
Items of Sections 2100 and 3300.
6104
ACCESS AND DRAINAGE
(b)
(a)
General
Prior to commencing with any excavation, the Contractor

shall notify the Engineer in good time to ensure that levels
be taken of the undisturbed ground surface for determining
a ground surface from where the excavation can be
measured, and this ground surface shall be agreed on by the
Engineer and the Contractor.
This Clause covers the provision of access, including the

construction of cofferdams, and draining the excavations.
Where it is unnecessary to provide access in terms of
Subclause 6104(b), the Contractor shall be paid separately
for draining the excavations.
After completion of the permanent works, all temporary
works shall be completely removed, the ground levelled and
the site left neat. Where this is impracticable, such portions
as have not been removed, shall be dealt with in accordance
with the Engineer's instructions.
(b)
Access
Where temporary banks or artificial islands are constructed

in view of affording access to the location where structural
members, piles or caissons are to be constructed, the banks
or islands shall be adequately compacted in view of
supporting any plant and material without any undue settling,
which may have a harmful effect on the end product.
The Contractor may use any material deemed by him to be
suitable for constructing the islands, but he shall note that no
separate payment will be made in terms of Items 61.02(b),
61.21, 61.22, 61.23 and 61.47(b) for any obstructions or
hard material occurring in the material used for constructing
temporary banks or artificial islands.
Designing and constructing any cofferdams shall comply
with the requirements of BS 8004. Before starting with
6100-2
(c)
Surface levels agreed on for excavations
Excavation
Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, the casting of

concrete against the excavated earth faces is not
permissible, or where formwork has to be provided, the
extremities of the excavation, for purposes of measurement
and payment, shall be deemed to be the vertical planes
parallel to and 0.5 m outside the perimeter of the member for
which formwork is to be provided.
Where suitable stable material is encountered during
excavating, that part of the trench or foundation pit shall be
excavated to the neat dimensions of the base unless
otherwise directed by the Engineer. Over-excavation
(overbreak) in hard material shall be backfilled with the same
class of concrete as that in the base or with mass concrete
fill as specified or as directed by the Engineer.
Where blasting is required, the Contractor shall complete the
entire foundation excavation before he commences with the
construction of any permanent concrete work, unless
Boulders, logs or any other unsuitable material excavated
shall be spoiled.
When hard material suitable for founding is encountered at

the founding level, it shall be cut and trimmed to a firm
surface, either level, stepped or serrated, as may be
required.
Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, unsuitable material is
encountered at founding level, such material shall be
removed and replaced with foundation fill in accordance with
Clause 6109 and as directed by the Engineer.
(d)
Classification of excavated material
For payment purposes distinction shall be made between

excavation in hard and soft material. All excavation for the
foundations of structures shall be classified in accordance
with the following classification:
(i)
Hard material
Boulders with a volume of 0.1 m3 or more;

or
Soft material
Inspection
No concrete shall be placed before the excavation has been

properly cleaned by the Contractor and inspected and
(i)
Excavation by hand
Where circumstances prevent the use of mechanical

excavators and material can be removed only by hand
implements, the Engineer shall authorise the supplementary
payment to the Contractor for such work at the tendered
rates for excavation by hand should he be satisfied that the
Contractor had been unable to prevent the necessity for
excavation by hand by proper planning and precautionary
measures. The supplementary rate for excavation by hand
shall not apply to minor finishing or clearing jobs in
excavations which are otherwise being done by mass
excavation plant.
6106
material which cannot be excavated except by drilling and

blasting or by using pneumatic tools or mechanical breakers
shall be classified as hard material.
(ii)
(h)
FOUNDING
In consequence of possible variations of the anticipated

founding conditions, the dimensions and founding levels
specified or shown on the Drawings may have to be varied
during construction.
All material not classified as hard material shall be classified

as soft material.
The Engineer has full and absolute power to order such

variations and to specify the actual founding level for each
foundation fill, base or caisson during construction.
(e)
The Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional

payment in consequence of any such variation in the
dimensions or founding depths over and above that provided
for in Clause 6115, irrespective of the stage of construction
at which the instruction to alter the dimensions or founding
depths is given. However, if in consequence of such order to
alter the Contractor is compelled to substitute other
machines and equipment for machines and equipment for
successfully completing the work, the Engineer may
reimburse the Contractor at a fair price for incidentals
incurred, provided that the original machines and equipment
had been suitable for the work required prior to the order to
alter having been issued.
Blasting
Where blasting is permitted, it shall be carried out in

accordance with the requirements of Clause 1222.
(f)
Deterioration of foundation excavations
Where soft material, or hard material which quickly

deteriorates when exposed, is found at foundation level, the
excavation shall be excavated to the final slope and level
immediately before the screed is placed.
Where the bottoms or sides of excavations, in which bases
are to be cast, are softened on account of negligence on the
part of the Contractor in allowing storm or other water to
enter the excavations, the softened material shall be
removed and replaced with foundation fill as directed by the
Engineer, at the Contractor's expense.
(g)
The safety of excavations
The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to

safeguard the stability and safety of the excavations and
adjacent structures.
The personal safety of no person shall be jeopardised
neither shall any situation be allowed to arise which may
result in damage of whatsoever nature.
Precautionary measures taken by the Contractor shall
comply with the appropriate legal provisions.
No bases, caissons or piles shall be founded unless

authorised by the Engineer. Each founding level shall be
accurately measured and recorded and agreed on.
The term "founding level" used in these Specifications shall
be deemed to have the following meanings in respect of:
(i)
Foundation fill
The surface of the in situ material that has been prepared to

receive foundation fill.
(ii)
Bases
The underside of the base.

(iii)
Piles
The underside of the underream, bulbous base or rock

socket; the tip of the pile shoe or lower pile end, as may be
relevant.
(iv)
Caissons
The underside of the cutting edge.

6100-3
6107
UTILISATION OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL
Excavated material and material recovered from temporary

works shall, if suitable, be utilised for backfill. Material
unsuitable for use as backfill or in excess of the required
quantity, shall be spoiled or utilised as directed by the
Engineer.
(c)
Fill
Before the space between the structure and the approach

fill, or between the structure and the faces of the surrounding
excavation is backfilled, the slope of the approach fill, or the
faces of the excavation shall be shaped by benching or
serrations to prevent wedge action from occurring between
the structure and the approach fill or the excavation faces.
Excavated material not used for backfill or not taken to spoil

but used in the construction of embankments or other parts
of the work, as directed by the Engineer, will be paid for
under foundation excavation as well as under the relevant
item for the purpose for which it is used.
The distance between the exposed face of the structure and

the toe of the approach fill or the excavation face shall not
under any circumstances be less than the height of the
exposed face of the structure.
The free-haul distance on excavated material and imported

material for backfill shall be 1.0 km.
(d)
Excavated and stockpiled material shall be so dumped as

not to endanger the uncompleted structure either by direct
pressure or indirectly by overloading the fills contiguous to
the structure, or in any other way.
6108
BACKFILL AND FILL NEAR STRUCTURES
(a)
General
When backfill and fill are placed, the following precautionary

measures shall be taken:
(i)
The material shall be placed simultaneously, in so far
as is possible, to approximately the same elevation on both
sides of an abutment, pier, or wall where appropriate. If
conditions require the backfill or fill to be placed appreciably
higher on one side than on the other, the additional material
on the higher side shall not be placed until authorised by the
Engineer, and preferably not until the concrete has been in
place for 14 days, or until tests show that the concrete has
attained sufficient strength to safely withstand any pressure
extended by the backfill or fill or by the method of
construction.
(ii)
The material behind abutments directly restrained at
the top by the superstructure, eg portal type of structures,
shall be placed as shown on the Drawings or as directed by
the Engineer.
(iii)
The material behind the portal walls of portal
structures shall not be placed until the top slab has been
placed and cured, unless otherwise authorised by the
Engineer.
(b)
Backfill
Excavated areas around structures shall be backfilled with

approved material in horizontal layers not exceeding
150 mm in thickness after compaction, to the level of the
original ground surface. Each layer shall be moistened or
dried to the optimum moisture content for the material and
then compacted to a density of not less than 90% of
modified AASHTO density for soils and gravels, and not less
than 100% of modified AASHTO density for cohesionless
sands, or the density of the surrounding soil, whichever shall
be the less, except that, in the road prism, the material shall
be compacted to a density of not less than 93% of modified
AASHTO density.
Fill within restricted area
That part of the fill within a horizontal distance of 3 m from

the vertical and inclined concrete faces of the structure and
that part between the pillars of the spill-through abutments
or that part shown on the Drawings, shall be termed "fill
within restricted area".
Fill within the restricted area shall comply with the
requirements of Section 3300, except that it shall be
compacted to a density of not less than 93% of modified
AASHTO density. In order to achieve the specified density,
the Contractor shall, where necessary, import material of
suitable quality.
Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, only mechanical
compaction equipment that is pushed or drawn by hand shall
be used to achieve the required density within a horizontal
distance of 3 m from any concrete structure. Fill in spaces
below concrete soffits that are inaccessible for mechanical
compaction equipment shall be constructed by methods
specified or approved by the Engineer.
Payment in accordance with Item 61.05 for the construction
of fill within restricted areas shall be made only when
specifically provided for in the Schedule of Quantities.
6109
FOUNDATION FILL
If it is found during the course of excavation that the material

at the indicated founding depth does not have the required
bearing capacity as specified on the Drawings, the
excavations shall be extended at the discretion of the
Engineer until satisfactory founding material is encountered.
The Engineer may order the Contractor to make up the
difference in levels with foundation fill.
Where the foundation fill consists of rock or crushed stone,
it shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements
of the Project Specifications or as directed by the Engineer.
Foundation fill consisting of granular material shall be
constructed in layers not exceeding 150 mm in thickness
after compaction. Each layer shall be moistened or dried to
the optimum moisture content for the material and
compacted to a density of not less than 95% of modified
AASHTO density for soils and gravels, and not less that
100% modified AASHTO density for cohesionless sands.
Mass concrete fill to be used shall be of the class or mix of
concrete fill as specified or directed by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer, the
foundation fill constructed from rock, crushed stone or
compacted granular material shall be defined by a prism with
vertical sides. The base of the prism lies in the founding
6100-4
plane and coincides with the base of a prismoid with

trapezium-shaped inclined sides which extend downwards
and outwards at an angle of 60 with the horizontal from
each outer edge of the underside of the footing down to the
founding level. The upper plane of the prism lies in the
plane of the underside of the footing.
A concrete screed which complies with the requirements
shown on the Drawings shall be placed underneath all bases
except where mass concrete fill is used or where authorised
by the Engineer that this need not be done.
Where mass concrete fill is constructed under a base it shall
be constructed accurately to the final levels of the underside
of the base.
shall be of sufficient strength to provide a durable working

surface and to support the concrete and reinforcement
without tearing. The joints of the material between strips
shall have a 150 mm overlap and the lining shall be held
firmly in position by nails, pegs, etc.
Polyethylene sheeting with a thickness of 0.150 mm is
generally considered to be adequate for use below bridge
approach slabs and bases.
6113
FOUNDATION PILING
(a)
General
This Section covers the construction of bearing piles of

concrete or steel or a combination of these materials.
6110
GROUTING OF ROCK FISSURES
Where specified, fissures in the rock below and around the

bases shall be sealed by pressure grouting with a neat
cement or sand-cement grout or with a proprietary brand
grout as specified.
The cement:water ratio of the grout shall be approved in
advance by the Engineer.
The extent of the fissuring shall be established by means of
water testing under pressure.
Holes of at least 40 mm in diameter shall be drilled at places
indicated by the Engineer and grout shall then be pumped
into these holes under suitable pressures. Grouting shall be
done in 3 m stages to the maximum depth ordered. Care
shall be taken to avoid further fracturing of the rock strata by
excessive grouting pressures.
Grouting of the rock fissures shall be done by specialised
operators with adequate experience in this class of work.
6111
FOUNDATION DOWELS
Where required, foundation dowels of specified material,

diameter and length shall be installed at the positions and to
the dimensions shown on the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer. After exposing, clearing and trimming the rock
formation, holes with specified diameters and depths shall
be drilled in the rock. After the holes have been cleared and
prewetted, they shall be filled with grout. Within 15 minutes
of having been filled with grout, the dowels shall be carefully
driven into the holes. The cement and water in the grout
shall be mixed in the ratio of 50 kg of cement to 20 R of
water, and an approved expanding additive which complies
with the requirements of Subclause 6402(e) shall be added.
The dowels shall comply with the requirements of Clause
6305.
6112
FOUNDATION LINING
Where specified or directed by the Engineer, foundation

linings shall be installed as described hereafter. The
Engineer shall have the right to order the use of linings
against the sides of excavations and the undersides of
bases and slabs in lieu of formwork and concrete blinding.
All surfaces to be lined shall be covered with an approved
sheeting to provide a clean impervious layer. The material
(b)
Piling layout
The piling layout, the minimum pile size and/or bearing

capacity and type together with the steel reinforcement and
class of concrete required shall be as detailed and specified
on the Drawings unless otherwise specified in the Project
Specifications.
(c)
Alternative designs for piling and piling layouts
(i)
Submission
The priced Schedule of Quantities submitted for alternative

designs shall be compiled strictly in accordance with the
relevant measurement and payment clauses of these
Specifications.
Where pay items defined in these Specifications have been
omitted, it shall mean either that the items do not apply, or
that where the Engineer requires work falling under such
items to be done, it shall be done without any cost to the
Employer. The inclusion of "rate-only" items will not be
permitted.
Where pay items not defined in these Specifications are
used, the measurement and payment requirements for such
items shall be specified in detail by the Contractor. In the
absence of such definitions, or in the case of any ambiguity,
the interpretation of the Engineer shall be final and binding.
Except in piling-only Contracts or where otherwise provided
in the Project Specifications, the Contractor shall price the
Schedule of Quantities for the original design irrespective of
whether or not an alternative design is offered.
(ii)
Design
The critical design-load combinations acting upon the

underside and the centre of gravity of the pile-capping slab,
the maximum permissible set of the pile-capping slab, and
the technical data required for designing alternative piles
and/or piling layouts will be indicated on the Drawings.
Alternative designs shall comply with the provisions of
Clause 1212 and the prescriptions set out below.
For alternative designs submitted the Contractor shall submit
with his tender a detailed description of the method of
analysis used in the design of the piles and the pile-group
layouts. The average length of pile and/or of the piles per
group on which the quantities in the Schedule of Quantities
for the alternative designs are based shall be stated in each
case. The type of pile offered shall be defined in terms of
size, materials, working and breaking load.
6100-5
The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall bear the

cost for redesigning, drafting and submitting the detail
drawings for any structural element affected by the
alternative pile design. Any economy or incidental caused by
constructing such element as compared to the original
design shall be for the account of the Contractor.
where:
p = paid, d = designed and b = built.
The term "units" means items of work measured and
paid for in the respective pay items such as piles,
raking piles, casings, underreams, concrete, etc.
The Contractor shall, as specified in Clause 1212 for

alternative designs, submit to the Engineer at least three
months prior to work being commenced, drawings detailing
the piling-group layout and piles, incorporating such
amendments to his original design as may be required by
the Engineer, and drawings detailing the amendments
required to the pile-capping slab dimensions and
reinforcement as a result of the layout of the piles, all as
applicable.
Np = number of "units" measured and finally paid for

in a particular pile group.
Nd = number of "units" provided for in the tender for
the alternative design in the same pile group.
Nb = number of approved and accepted "units"
finally installed in the same pile group.
No work of whatsoever nature shall be commenced on the

piling until the Drawings have been submitted to and have
been approved by the Engineer, in writing.
Lp = the length of the "units" measured and paid for

or the length to be used in calculating quantities
which are a direct function of the length of the "units"
for the same pile group.
After approval of the Drawings, no departure therefrom shall

be made without authorisation by the Engineer.
Ld = the average length of the "units" provided for in

the tender for the alternative design in the same pile
group.
Final working drawings shall comply with the provisions of

Clause 1221.
Where the alternative piles fail in regard to the load test
specified in Subclause 6113(u), the Contractor shall be
responsible for the cost of the work required for improving
the piles and pile layout so as to comply with the design
requirements.
(iii)
Basis of payment
Where the quantities in the Schedule of Quantities referred

to in Subclause 6113(c), on the one part, differ from the
number of piles and the average pile length given in the
submission for the alternative pile design, on the other part,
the Engineer shall accept the sum in the said Schedule of
Quantities, correct the quantities, and adjust the rates for the
applicable pay items accordingly.
In addition to these corrections, the Employer shall be
justified in using one of the following methods for paying for
piles constructed in accordance with the alternative design:
(1)
Method 1
The Employer may check the alternative designs, calculate

the quantities and adjust the rates as set out in the first
paragraph of Subclause 6113(c). The Employer will then pay
for the work in accordance with the actually measured
quantities.
(2)
Method 2
The Employer may use the following formulae for calculating

the quantities under Items 61.16 to 61.34 for payment:
Lb = the average length of the Nb "units" actually

installed in the same pile group.
The values Nd and Ld for each pile group for which an
alternative design has been offered shall be supplied with his
tender by the Contractor for the respective "units".
The values of Nd, Nb, Ld and Lb for each pile to be used in
the formulae for determining the quantity for a particular pay
item shall relate only to the piles measured for that Item.
(d)
In all cases where the choice of the type of pile to be used

is left to the Contractor, full particulars, specifications,
calculations and drawings of the piles proposed for use by
the Contractor shall be submitted with the tender.
The Contractor shall submit the following information to the
Engineer, two weeks before any piles are driven or holes are
formed:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
Np
Lp
Lp
= Nd
= Nd . Ld + Nb(Lb-Ld)K for Nd $ Nb and
= Nd . Ld + Nd(Lb-Ld)K for Nd # Nb
K
Lb
Ld
for Ld $ Lb and
K
Ld
Lb
for Ld # Lb
Details to be furnished by the Contractor
(viii)
(ix)
(e)
How the piles and casings will be installed or the

holes will be formed;
How the piles and casings will be installed or the
holes will be made through identified obstructions;
The mass of the hammer;
The set during the last ten blows;
The expected size of the bulbous base, underream,
rock socket, etc, if any;
How concrete or grout is to be placed and
compacted in the case of cast in situ piles;
How reinforcing steel is to be placed and held in
place during placing and compacting the concrete in
cast in situ piles;
Details of permanent casing, if any;
The mix design for the concrete together with
an adequate quantity of cement and
aggregate to enable the Engineer to conduct the
necessary tests.
Pile-installation frames and equipment
The pile-installation frames and equipment used for driving

the piles or forming the holes or for other methods of sinking
6100-6
the piles shall be in a good working condition and to the prior

approval of the Engineer and shall comply with the relevant
legal provisions.
The Contractor shall supply the necessary equipment, gear
and instruments required for the prescribed investigations
and inspections.
The installation frames shall be so designed as to ensure
that piles can be installed in their proper positions and true
to line and slope.
(f)
Piling platforms
Piling platforms shall include the prepared in situ material or

artificial islands or any structure (excluding the piling
equipment) constructed for gaining access to the position
where the pile is to be installed and for carrying out the piling
operations.
Contractor, with the permission of the Engineer, may replace

the bars shown on the Drawings with bars with different
diameters and spacing and of different types, on a basis of
equivalent strength.
The reinforcement shall be assembled in cages, which shall
be sufficiently robust to prevent their permanent deformation
during handling. In the case of cast in situ piles, the inner
sides of the cages shall be kept open in view of the
unrestricted placing of concrete therein.
The longitudinal bars shall project above the cut-off point by
the distance shown on the Drawings, or by 40 times the bar
diameter if no dimension has been given.
Splicing the reinforcing may be ordered, and the Contractor
shall keep available on the site sufficient steel reinforcing so
that an additional length of pile reinforcing can be assembled
whenever necessary.
Structural piling platforms shall be rigid, and floating barges

used for piling operations shall afford sufficient stability to
enable piles to be properly installed.
The assembly of this additional reinforcing shall be carried

out expeditiously and before any concreting of any specific
pile commences. If splices have to be provided, the
longitudinal bars shall overlap for a distance of 40 bar
diameters, or as required by the Engineer.
On completion of the piling, the Contractor shall remove all

the artificial, constructed platforms and reinstate the site to
(ii)
(g)
Setting out
The Contractor shall set out the pile positions and shall
stake these positions with a durable marker. Where the level
from which the piling is undertaken is above the underside
of the pile-capping slab, due allowance shall be made for the
offset of raking piles so that the pile at the underside of the
pile-capping slab will be in the correct position.
(h)
Ground surface for foundation piling
Before starting any piling work, the Contractor shall notify the
Engineer in good time to ensure that levels of the ground
surface be taken in order that an average ground surface
from which the piling is to be measured can be established
and agreed on by the Engineer and the Contractor. Where
foundation piling at a site is preceded by excavation or the
construction of fill, the surface from which the piling is to be
done shall be formed as near as possible to the underside
of the pile-capping slab as directed by the Engineer.
(i)
Cast in situ concrete piles
(i)
Reinforcement
Reinforcement shall not be placed in the pile holes until

immediately before concreting. Before the reinforcement is
placed in position, all mud, water, and any loose or soft
material shall be removed from the hole.
Steel reinforcing shall be accurately maintained in position
without damage being done to the sides of the hole or the
reinforcing itself. Spacers shall be used to keep the
reinforcing steel at the required distance from the inside face
of the pile casing and wall of the pile hole but shall not cause
zones through which aggressive ground water may
penetrate to the reinforcement.
Pile reinforcement will not be shown in the bending
schedules. Only the number, diameter and type of bars and
their arrangement will be shown on the Drawings. The
The concreting of piles
The concreting of the piles shall not be commenced before

the Engineer has given his permission therefor.
Except in self-supporting pile holes, a temporary or
permanent casing shall be installed for the full depth of the
hole to prevent lumps of material from falling from the sides
of the hole into the concrete. Where concrete is to be placed
under the drilling mud, the temporary casing may be omitted,
except at the top end of the hole.
The concrete shall be so proportioned as to be of sufficient
strength, but shall be sufficiently workable to enable it being
properly placed, and, where self-compacting concrete is not
used, it shall be thoroughly compacted by approved means.
Extraction of the temporary casing during placement of the
concrete shall be such that no damage is caused to the pile
and the advancing concrete level is at all times kept
considerably above the temporary casing's trailing edge.
Concrete shall generally be placed in the dry, but where this
is impracticable, it shall be placed by tremie.
The requirements of Subclause 6407(c) together with the
following requirements shall apply when concrete is placed
under water by tremie:
(1)
The cement content shall be not less than 400 kg/m3
and the slump shall be such that the concrete of the
specified strength and desired density can be obtained.
(2)
The hopper and tremie shall be a closed unit which
cannot be penetrated by water.
(3)
The tremie shall be at least 150 mm in diameter for
19.0 mm aggregate and larger for larger aggregates.
(4)
The concrete shall be so placed as to prevent the
mixing of water and concrete. The tremie shall at all times
penetrate into the concrete.
(5)
Placing the concrete in that part of the pile below the
water level in the casing shall be done in one operation, and
the same method of placing the concrete shall be
maintained throughout.
6100-7
(6)
All tremies shall be scrupulously cleaned before and
after use.
(7)
Before placing the concrete in the water, the
Contractor shall ensure that no silt or other materials have
collected at the bottom of the hole, and where drilling mud is
used, the Contractor shall ensure that no drilling mud
suspension with a relative density exceeding 1.3 has
collected at the bottom of the hole.
Whenever practicable, concrete shall be placed in a manner
that will prevent segregation.
(j)
Precast concrete piles
(k)
Steel piles
Hollow steel piles may be filled with cast in situ concrete

and, provided that adequate connections are provided
between the steel and the concrete with a view to
transferring the load, the concrete may be deemed to assist
in carrying the load.
Wherever steel piles are used, they shall be given a
protective coating of bitumen, coal-tar pitch or synthetic
resins to the satisfaction of the Engineer or as specified. The
cross-sectional area of the steel shall be adapted to the
aggressiveness of the subsurface conditions to compensate
for possible reduction in the pile wall thickness caused by
abrasion and corrosion during the service life of the pile.
The piles shall be of reinforced or prestressed concrete and

shall be manufactured, handled, stored and installed in
accordance with BS 8004, unless otherwise specified.
Steel piles shall be used only where permitted by the

Engineer.
(i)
(l)
Driving the piles
(i)
Pile-installation frames
Manufacture
The piles may be manufactured in a factory or a casting yard

on the site of the Works. The Contractor shall ensure that
the factory or casting yard will at all reasonable times be
accessible for inspection by the Engineer.
The relevant requirements of Section 6400 shall apply to the
concrete work.
Transverse reinforcement
requirements of BS 8004.
shall
comply
with
the
The piles shall be cast on a rigid horizontal platform in

approved moulds. Particular care shall be taken to keep the
reinforcement, coupler sockets and pile shoes accurately in
position. Adequate provision shall be made for lifting the
piles.
Each pile shall be clearly marked with the date of casting, a
reference number, and from the tip of the pile at 1.0 m
intervals, with distance marks.
Piles shall be cured for a period sufficient to develop the
strength required to withstand, without damage to the pile,
the stresses caused by handling, transporting, storing and
driving. The piles shall not be driven before the concrete in
the pile has attained the specified strength.
(ii)
Handling, transport and storage
Care shall be taken at all stages of lifting, handling and

transporting to ensure that the piles are not damaged or
cracked.
Piles shall be stored on firm ground which will not settle
unequally under the weight of the stack of piles. The piles
shall be placed on timber supports which are truly level and
spaced so as to avoid undue bending in the piles. The
supports in the stack shall be located vertically above one
another.
(iii)
Lengthening of precast piles
Piles shall be lengthened where required by such means

and methods as approved by the Engineer. Care shall be
taken to ensure that the additional length of pile joined is
truly axially in line with the original pile within the tolerance
requirements for straightness set out in Subclause 6803(a).
Driving shall not be resumed until the pile extension and any
bonding agent used has attained the required strength.
6100-8
Piles and pile casings shall be driven with a gravity hammer,

a rapid-action power hammer or by other approved means.
Prestressed-concrete piles shall be driven with a hammer
with a mass of at least equal to that of the pile. Other piles
shall preferably be driven by a hammer with similar mass
characteristics. The hammer shall not, during driving
operations, damage any permanent component of the pile.
Pile driving leaders shall be constructed in such a manner as
to afford freedom of movement of the hammer and shall be
held in position to ensure adequate support for the pile or
pile casing during installation. Inclined leaders shall be used
for installing raking piles.
The heads of precast concrete piles shall be protected with
packing of resilient material, care being taken to ensure that
it is evenly spread and held in place. A helmet shall be
placed over the packing, and a dolly of hardwood or other
material not thicker than the diameter of the pile shall be
placed on top.
(ii)
Water jetting
The Contractor may employ water jetting to install piles in

granular material. Jetting shall be discontinued before the
leading end of the pile reaches a depth of 80% of the
anticipated final depth or a depth as agreed on with the
Engineer. After jetting, piles or their casings shall be driven
to the required depth, level or set.
(iii)
Installation sequence
Unless otherwise specified or ordered, the sequence for

installing the piles shall be left to the Contractor. However,
the sequence for driving the piles in a group shall be
programmed to minimise the creation of consolidated blocks
of ground into which piles cannot be driven or which cause
fictitious penetration values. Piling shall generally commence
at the centre of the group and be progressively extended to
the perimeter piles unless otherwise agreed on by the
Engineer.
The installation of piles shall be undertaken in such a
manner that structural damage, distortion or positioning
defects will not be caused to previously installed piles or
casings.
(iv)
Heaving of piles
In soils in which the installation of piles may cause

previously installed piles to heave, accurate level marks
shall be placed on each pile immediately after installation
and all piles that have heaved shall be redriven to the
required resistance, unless redriving tests on neighbouring
piles have shown this to be unnecessary. Piles shall not be
concreted neither shall any pile-capping slab be constructed
until the piles within a heave-influence zone have been
redriven as required.
(v)
Bulbous bases
Where required, bulbous (enlarged) bases shall be formed

after the driven casing has reached the required depth. The
base shall be formed by progressively displacing the
surrounding subsoil with concrete placed by the repeated
action of a gravity hammer. The size of the base will depend
on the compressibility of the surrounding subsoil but shall in
no case have a diameter of less than 1.5 times the diameter
of the pile.
(vi)
(iii)
Bulbous bases
Bulbous bases shall comply with the requirements of

Subclause 6113(l).
(iv)
Inspecting preformed holes
Equipment for inspecting the pile shafts shall be provided

and operated in accordance with the latest amendment or
edition of the Code of Practice Relating to the Safety of Men
Working in Small Diameter Vertical and Near Vertical Shafts
for Civil Engineering Purposes, obtainable from the South
African Institution of Civil Engineers, or similar document.
Immediately before the reinforcement is to be installed or the
concrete placed, the Engineer shall be informed thereof with
a view to inspecting the pile holes. When piles are to be
underreamed, the excavation shall be inspected twice by the
Engineer, firstly to ascertain that suitable founding material
has been obtained before underreaming may start, and,
secondly, after the underreaming has been completed for
approval to be given by the Engineer for casting the pile.
Piling alignment
(n)
Where the inclination of a precast concrete pile deviates

from the correct slope during installation, the pile shall not be
forced into the correct position. The slope of the guiding
frame shall be adjusted so as to coincide with the actual
inclination of the pile to preclude the bending of the pile.
Where the verticality or the inclination of the installed pile
falls outside the specified tolerances, the pile will be
classified as being defective.
Rock sockets
Where required, rock sockets to the required dimensions

shall be formed in rock formations of adequate strength,
quality and thickness for transmitting the specified load.
(o)
Obstructions
(i)
Definitions
Identified obstructions
(m)
Augering and boring
(1)
(i)
Auger and bore pile holes
Identified obstructions shall mean any obstruction described

on the Drawings or in the Project Specifications and for
which provision for payment has been made in the
Schedule of Quantities in respect of penetrating the
obstructions.
The augering and boring of pile holes shall be carried out as

expeditiously as local conditions permit taking due account
of services or other restrictions on the site.
Holes shall be cleaned after augering and boring to obtain a
clean and level surface.
(2)
Unidentified obstructions
The use of water for augering and boring holes shall not be
permitted unless approved by the Engineer.
Where provision has been made in the Schedule of

Quantities in terms of Item 61.21 for penetrating identified
obstructions and obstructions not described are
encountered, such obstructions shall be classified as
unidentified obstructions and the penetration of such
obstructions shall be paid for under Item 61.22 subject to the
condition that the rate of penetration drops to below that
achieved for identified obstructions when the same method
and effort are used, or subject to additional methods and
effort over and above those required for identified
obstructions being required for penetrating the obstruction.
Surface water shall not be allowed to enter the hole.
OR
(ii)
Where no provision has been made in the Schedule of

Quantities for penetrating identified obstructions and
obstructions are encountered and, after resorting to the
methods specified in the submission in terms of Subclause
6113(d), it is found to be impossible to form the holes in the
proper positions and at the proper inclinations and depths,
and the Contractor has to resort to additional methods for
forming the pile holes successfully, such obstructions shall
be classified as unidentified obstructions.
Where indicated by the Engineer, suitable casing shall be

installed in those parts of the augered holes where the sides
are in danger of caving in before the concreting has been
completed.
During extraction of the casing, care shall be taken to avoid
lifting the concrete and damaging the pile.
Underreaming
Where required, the holes shall be enlarged or belled out to

form an underream. The earth excavated shall be removed
in a manner which will not damage the walls of the hole.
The shape of the underream shall be a truncated cone of
which the base diameter depends on the bearing capacity of
the founding material, but it shall be not less than twice the
shaft diameter. The base angle of the cone between the
inclined face and horizontal plane shall be not less than 60E.
Full safety measures shall be enforced to protect workmen
working at the bottom of the pile hole.
(ii)
Classification of materials
For piling, only the following classification of materials shall

apply to the identification and description of obstructions.
6100-9
(1)
Matrix
The matrix shall comprise that part of the material which will
pass through a sieve with 50 mm x 50 mm openings.
(2)
Coarse gravel
Coarse gravel shall comprise that part of the material

(stones, pebbles, cobbles, etc) which will pass through a
200 mm x 200 mm opening, but will not pass through a
50 mm x 50 mm opening. The gravel shall be obtained from
material with at least a Class R2 hardness.
(3)
Boulders
Boulders shall mean any rock mass with a hardness of at

least Class R2 which will pass through a square opening
with dimensions equal to the maximum size boulder
specified in the Schedule of Quantities but will not pass
through a 200 mm x 200 mm opening.
(4)
Rock formation
A rock formation shall be any rock mass with a hardness of

at least Class R2 which will not pass through a square
opening with dimensions equal to the maximum size boulder
specified in the Schedule of Quantities.
Where a boulder is cut through and part of it is left imbedded
in the wall of the hole, such boulder obstruction shall be
classified as rock formation.
For the identification of rock in terms of this Clause, the
classification in Table 6113/1 (at the end of the Section)
shall apply.
(iii)
Driven displacement and prefabricated piles
Where obstructions make it difficult to install driven

displacement and prefabricated piles in the positions and at
the inclinations shown and to the proper lengths by the
methods specified in the submission in terms of Subclause
6113(d), the Contractor shall resort to additional methods
which are suitable for the type of pile. If the successful
installation of a pile proves to be impossible after such
methods have been tried, the Engineer may order an
additional pile or piles to be installed.
All such work and additional piles shall be paid for in
accordance with the tendered rates where applicable, or
where they do not apply, under Item 61.23.
(iv)
Auger and bore pile holes
Where identified or unidentified obstructions are

encountered when shaping holes for piles, payment for
penetrating the obstructions shall be made against the
appropriate pay items.
(p)
Determining pile lengths
The design of the piles and pile groups, and the quantities in
the Schedule of Quantities are based on the subsurface data
The Engineer will determine the depth of piles as work
proceeds.
Where variations in the subsurface conditions occur as
regards the material and height of the water table, the
Engineer shall be informed immediately.
6100-10
If the Contractor is not satisfied that the piles will be capable

of carrying the specified loads at the depth determined by
the Engineer he may, in consultation with the Engineer,
lengthen the piles to reach a suitable founding depth. Where
the Engineer and the Contractor cannot agree on the
founding depth, the Engineer may require the Contractor to:
(i)
undertake additional foundation investigations and/or
core drilling in accordance with Subclauses 6103(a) and
6113(t) respectively, and/or
(ii)
install one or more test piles and conduct a load test
in accordance with 6113(u). The Engineer will prescribe the
positions for each test pile. Test piles shall comply with the
specified requirements for piling.
(q)
Piling data
The following data on each pile installed shall be recorded in

a form prescribed by the Engineer:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
(r)
The effort used for driving the pile and the resistance
to penetration at founding level.
A description of subsurface material, the presence of
ground water and the quality of material on which the
pile is founded.
The quality of the materials used in the construction
or manufacture of the pile, as well as of the
permanent casing if used. The method of placing
and compacting the concrete in cast in situ piles.
The method of founding of the piles eg bulbous
bases, underreams, rock sockets, etc, and their
dimensions.
The maximum working load of the pile.
The length of the pile and the accuracy of installation
in respect of position and inclination.
Nominal dimensions and type of pile.
Length and details of any temporary and permanent
casings used.
Stripping the pile heads
Precast piles shall be installed to a level of at least 1.0 m

above the cut-off level, and cast in situ piles shall be cast to
a level of at least 150 mm above the cut-off level. The
excess concrete shall be so stripped off that only sound
concrete will project into the pile-capping slab.
Before a pile head is stripped, the cut-off plane shall be
marked by cutting a 20 mm deep groove with a grindingmachine along the full circumference of the pile. Heavy
concrete demolishing equipment may not be used for the
stripping of pile heads. All loose aggregate shall be
removed from the cut-off plane.
The concrete shall be so stripped off that the pile below the
cut-off level will not be damaged, or, should defective
concrete be found in the completed pile, the damaged or
defective concrete shall be cut away by the Contractor at his
own cost and replaced with new concrete well bonded to the
old concrete, or the pile shall be replaced as directed by the
Engineer.
The main reinforcement of the piles shall extend at least 40
times the diameters of the reinforcing bar beyond the cut-off
level into the pile-capping slab. This reinforcement shall be
left straight unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
The cut-off level for piles shall be the level shown on the
Drawings.
(s)
Construction of pile-capping slab
The Contractor shall not construct the pile capping slab

before the Engineer has confirmed, in writing, that all the
relevant load tests have been completed and the piles have
been accepted.
(t)
Core drilling
The Engineer may instruct core drilling to be done with a

view to obtaining cores of the founding formation and/or of
the concrete in the completed structural member. In the
case of piling, the core drilling may precede the piling or may
be done through the completed pile, as specified, or as
The Contractor shall supply the necessary construction plant
on the site for drilling under the above conditions. The plant
and techniques used shall be suitable for ensuring 100%
core recovery. The diameters, depths and lengths of the
cores shall agree with the specifications or the instructions
of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall keep accurate records of the drilling,
which, together with the cores, shall be handed over to the
Engineer. The cores shall be placed in the correct sequence
in a clearly identified wooden core box with a lid.
(iii)
The ultimate test load in the compression-load test shall be

the load where settlement suddenly increases
disproportionately to the load applied.
The ultimate test load in the tension-load test shall be the
load where the upward movement suddenly increases
disproportionately to the load applied or the load producing
a permanent rise of 10 mm at the top of the pile, whichever
is the smaller.
(v)
If required, the defective piles shall be corrected by the

Contractor at his own cost, by applying one of the following
methods approved by the Engineer:
(u)
Load test
(i)
General
(iv)
No working pile shall be used as an anchor pile. Where

anchor piles or earth anchors are required for providing
reaction, they shall be so placed as to have a minimal effect
on the test results.
The Contractor shall provide the complete testing assembly,
the necessary plant, equipment, instruments and labour for
carrying out the test and for determining accurately the
settlement of the piles under each increase or decrease of
the load. The test assembly, plant, equipment and
instruments used shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
Within two days of having completed the tests, the
Contractor shall supply the Engineer with the test results and
neatly plotted load against settlement, load against time, and
settlement against time graphs.
(ii)
Loading
The maximum test load applied shall be equal to twice the

specified working load or the ultimate test load, whichever
shall be the smaller.
The maximum working load shall be half of the maximum
test load or the test load which corresponds with the
allowable settlement, whichever shall be the smaller.
The allowable settlement shall be as specified on the
Drawings.
Defective piles
The test pile and the piles represented by the test pile shall
be classified as defective if shown in terms of Subclause
6113(u) to have a maximum working load of less than the
specified working load, or to exhibit excessive settlement.
Defective piles shall also include piles damaged beyond
repair, piles with structural defects, or piles which do not
comply with the tolerance requirements of Subclause
6803(a).
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
The Engineer may order certain selected piles to be load

tested. The procedure for loading tests shall comply with the
requirements of Subclause 7111(c). During the period of
testing, driving of other piles which may affect the testing
shall cease.
Ultimate test load
(w)
Extracting the pile and replacing it with a new pile.

Installing a new pile adjacent to the defective pile.
Lengthening the pile to the correct length if defective
in length only.
Altering the design to fit in with the new conditions
caused by the defective pile(s).
Standing time in respect of pile-installation

frames
Standing time shall only be paid for pile-installation frames

standing during normal working hours as laid down in the
General Conditions of Contract for such periods during
which the pile-installation work has come to a standstill
following an action by the Employer.
As soon as the pile-installation frames have come to a
standstill, the Contractor shall inform the Engineer, in writing,
that he intends to claim standing time, and shall also furnish:
(i)
(ii)
full particulars of the action which gave rise to the

claim
a list of pile-installation frames in respect of which
standing time will be claimed, complete with date
and time.
The period in respect of which a claim is lodged shall

become operative from the moment when the notice has
been handed over to the Engineer and shall continue until
the restriction has been removed and normal procedure may
be resumed.
(x)
Nuclear integrity
Integrity tests using both the nuclear and neutron method

shall be performed on all bored piles. The purpose of these
tests is to prove that the technique used in constructing the
piles is satisfactory, by checking for necking of concrete in
the pile shafts, checking concrete cover to reinforcement
and by checking for honeycombing, grout loss and
segregation of aggregates.
6100-11
6114
CAISSONS
(a)
General
Caissons shall, for the purposes of these Specifications, be

hollow concrete vessels which are wholly or partly
constructed at a higher level and lowered by internal
excavation or kentledge to the desired founding level to form
structural bearing members. Caissons may be of circular,
rectangular or any other shape and may contain one or more
excavation compartments, all as detailed on the Drawings.
Unless otherwise specified hereafter, the provisions of
BS 8004 shall apply in regard to the construction of
caissons.
The Contractor shall employ a competent diver to carry out

work under water and shall make provision in the rates
tendered for the respective items for this cost.
Where the caisson strikes a hard inclined layer and work has
to be carried out below the cutting edge, such work shall be
measured and paid for under the relevant items of Clause
6115, and, where no applicable items exist, such work shall
be paid for as extra work.
Should the Contractor wish to apply the pneumatic caisson
method (with a compressed air chamber) for construction,
he shall furnish the Engineer with full details of the plant,
equipment and method for approval.
(c)
(b)
Construction and sinking
A firm horizontal base shall be prepared on which the cutting

edge of the caisson shall be laid truly horizontally. The level
of the base shall be determined and shall be agreed on by
the Engineer and the Contractor and shall serve as the
ground surface from which the excavation inside the caisson
will be measured.
Successive stages of the caisson shall be of convenient
height, or as directed by the Engineer, and shall be lined up
accurately with the preceding stages.
All precast elements shall have properly constructed joints
in accordance with the Drawings to ensure that they fit
snugly together.
For in situ phase construction, all construction joints in the
walls shall be reinforced and the joints shall be made as
specified in Clause 6408.
The lowest element of every caisson, which contains the
cutting edges, shall be cured for at least four days or shall
have reached a strength of at least 50% of the specified
strength before sinking is commenced. Subsequent
elements shall be cast in sufficient good time to ensure
adequate strength for safely resisting the applied forces.
During constructing and sinking, the caissons shall be
maintained truly vertically and kept in their correct positions.
The position and inclination of each caisson shall be
determined accurately by measurement after every 2 m of
sinking, or after sinking through the depth of one element,
whichever distance is the smaller.
With a view to eliminating excess friction, the Contractor
may use bentonite or a similar lubricant, or a water-jet
system.
Excavation inside caisson compartments shall, unless
otherwise specified herein, comply with the provisions of
Clause 6105.
In multi-compartmented caissons, the excavation in any one
compartment shall not be taken deeper than 0.6 m below
that in any other compartment, except where necessary for
correcting deviations.
Cutting edges shall be frequently inspected or probed to
locate obstacles, which shall be removed immediately.
The Contractor shall supply all grabs, pumps, diving gear
and other plant required for sinking and founding all caissons
and shall allow the Engineer to use the diving suit and
equipment for inspection purposes.
6100-12
Founding
The material at the founding level, if sloping and/or irregular,

shall in so far as is possible be cut to as nearly level a
surface as possible until the entire cutting edge is evenly
and firmly supported on the material. Subject to the approval
of the Engineer, blasting may be used for this purpose. If
blasting should be resorted to, only light charges may be
used and the caisson shall be protected against damage by
suitable cushioning being provided.
Should the sloping surface be of hard rock which cannot be
cut or broken by any safe and feasible means, the
foundation shall be built up by means of a solid wedge of
concrete which fills the entire space between the bedrock
surface and the horizontal plane through the cutting edge.
This concrete shall be of the same class as that specified on
the Drawings or in the Schedule of Quantities for the
concrete seal.
The rock or hard material on which the structure is to be
founded shall be completely uncovered. The founding
surface shall be cleared of all loose material before
inspection by the Engineer immediately prior to casting the
concrete seal.
No concrete shall be placed in the wedge or the seal before
the Engineer has inspected and approved the foundation.
For this purpose the Contractor shall adequately dewater the
caisson to enable the Engineer to conduct the inspection.
In the event of a caisson not being vertical or in its correct
position when it has reached the required depth, or in the
event of a caisson being cracked during the sinking process,
the Contractor shall at his own cost carry out the necessary
remedial work to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(d)
Data
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a complete

record of the types of material excavated during sinking,
together with the level at which each type of the material was
found. In addition, a log showing the rate of sinking shall be
kept by the Contractor and furnished to the Engineer.
(e)
Filling the caissons
(i)
Concrete seal
The seal shall be constructed of mass concrete of the class

specified and shall be placed in accordance with the
dimensions and levels shown on the Drawings or as
If this seal cannot be placed in the dry and has to be placed

under water, the method of placing this concrete shall be
approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall cease
placing the concrete under water when sufficient concrete
has been placed to seal the foundation effectively.
After the concrete has been placed, the concrete seal and
the head of water over it shall remain undisturbed for a
period of at least seven days after which the caisson shall be
dewatered by pumping for inspection. If more water is still
leaking into the caisson, the process of sealing as specified
herein shall be continued until the water level within the
caisson does not rise at a rate exceeding 10 mm per hour.
The relevant requirements of Subclauses 6407(c) and
6113(i) shall apply for placing the concrete under water. For
concrete placed under water by methods other than by
tremie, the cement content shall be 20% more than the
quantity required for ordinary concrete of the same mix but
shall be not less than 450 kg/m3 of concrete.
(ii)
Filling
Subsequent to inspection of the caisson compartments

above the concrete seal, the compartments shall be filled
with sand. The sand shall be sufficiently wetted to obviate
bulking.
A provisional sum shall be provided in the Schedule of

Quantities to cover the cost of this work.
The work authorised by the Engineer shall be paid for in
accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of
Contract.
Item
Unit
61.02 Excavation:
(a)
Excavating soft material situated
within the following successive depth
ranges:
(i)
0 m up to 2 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(ii)
Exceeding 2 m and up
to 4 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(iii)
Etc in increments of
2 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(b)
The first 2 m of filling above the concrete seal shall be

lowered gently into position. The sand may then be poured
from the top and compacted sufficiently to prevent
settlement while the cover slab concrete is being placed.
(c)
for additional excavation required
by the Engineer after the excavation has been completed . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
The top of the sand fill within the caisson shall be finished off
to the level specified below the underside of the caisson
cover slab.
(d)
for excavation by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(f)
Stripping
Where the walls of the caisson have been overbuilt, the

concrete shall be stripped to the required level without
damage being done to the concrete below the cut-off level.
The longitudinal reinforcement of the caisson shall project
above the cut-off level by a distance of at least 40 times the
bar diameter.
(g)
Concrete screed below the caisson cover slabs
A concrete screed of the specified thickness and class of

concrete shall be provided to the level shown on the
Drawings over the area covered by the cover slab, including
the area within the caissons on top of the sand filling, except
where the underside of the cover slab is being formed with
formwork.
(h)
General
Water quality and marine life shall not be adversely affected

in any way during operations.
6115
Item
The limits for the successive depth ranges shall be

measured down from the surface levels agreed on
(Subclause 6105(b)) to the founding level (Clause 6106)
agreed on.
In the case of excavations that are required for diverting,
channelling or widening streams, the successive depth
ranges for those portions of the excavations that are within
5 m of a concrete structure shall be measured from the
surface levels agreed on to the invert level of the channel or
stream.
material, measured in the original position before excavation.
The quantity of excavation for each depth range shall be
calculated from the neat outlines of the base or floor and the
depth of excavation completed within each range.
of material within each depth range shall be measured and
Supplementary payment for excavation by hand as specified
in Subclause 6105(i), shall be the full compensation for
incidentals for hand-excavating the materials instead of with
mass-excavating equipment.
At the concrete faces for which formwork has to be provided,
additional excavation shall be measured to 0.5 m outside the
concrete perimeter to make provision for a working space.
Unit
61.01 Additional foundation

investigations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . provisional sum
Where foundation fill is constructed in an excavation, the

quantity of excavated material measured for payment shall
be the material excavated between the average ground
level, as described in Subclause 6105(b), and the founding
level, from a prism with vertical sides, as described in
Clause 6109 or as prescribed by the Engineer.
6100-13
In no case shall any of the following excavations be included

in the measurement for payment:
(i)
The volume of excavation in excess of the abovementioned limits.
(ii)
The volume included within the excavated road
prism, contiguous channels, ditches, etc, for which payment
is provided elsewhere in the specifications.
excavation in each class of material, the spoiling or
stockpiling of material, the hauling of excavated material for
the free-haul distance of 1.0 km, any additional excavation
the Contractor may require for additional working space
outside the authorised limits, trimming and cleaning the
bottoms and sides of excavations, and strutting, shoring and
safeguarding the excavations.
If, after a foundation excavation has been completed,
cleaned and trimmed ready for concrete screeding, the
Engineer orders further excavations to be made on account
of changed dimensions and/or founding conditions, an extra
over payment (Subitem 61.02(c)) on the additional
excavation measured for payment shall be payable in full
compensation for any incidentals to the Contractor over and
above the normal excavation costs.
Item
Unit
61.03 Access and drainage:

(a)
Soil cement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of backfill

material measured in the excavation. The quantity measured
shall be calculated from within the neat outlines defined for
the excavation under Item 61.02 and the height to which the
backfilling is constructed. The volume occupied by the
structure shall be subtracted when calculating the volume of
backfilling. The volume occupied by the structure shall be
subtracted when calculating the volume of backfilling.
The height shall be determined by the upper surface of the
road prism or the reference ground surface (Subclause
6105(b)), whichever is the lower.
furnishing and placing all materials within the entire
excavation, transporting the material within the free-haul
distance of 1.0 km, and preparing, processing, shaping,
watering, mixing and compacting the material to the
specified densities.
Item
Unit
61.05 Fill within a restricted

area (extra over Item 33.01) . . . cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre and the
quantity shall be taken as the total volume of material within
the restricted area as defined in Subclause 6108(d). The
quantity shall not include the volume of backfill which is
measured and paid for under Item 61.04 above.
Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lump sum

providing access, which, inter alia, shall include constructing
temporary banks, artificial islands and/or cofferdams, their
protection, safeguarding and maintenance, draining and
keeping dry the working areas and draining the excavations
within the access, and any incidentals in respect of work to
be done below standing water.
75% of the lump sum will be paid when the access has been
constructed. The remaining 25% will be paid after the
access has been removed.
(b)
Drainage where no
access has been provided . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lump sum
Payment will be made for this work by way of a lump sum for
each structure or series of structures appearing separately
in the Schedule of Quantities. The lump sum shall be paid
on a pro rata basis as the work progresses.
draining by pumping or in any other way and for any other
work necessary for keeping the excavation dry or for working
in the dry.
Item
Unit
61.04 Backfill to excavations

utilising:
(a)
Material from the excavation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(b)
(c)
Imported material . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
6100-14

additional work necessitated by working in the restricted
area and for the increased density required in the restricted
area.
Item
Unit
61.06 Overhaul in excess of

1.0 km on excavated material
and on material imported for
backfill, foundation fill and
fill for caissons . . . . . . . . cubic metre-kilometre
(m3-km)
Overhaul shall be measured and paid for as specified in
Clause 1603 and shall apply only to that portion of the
material qualifying for payment under Items 61.02, 61.04(b),
61.08(a) and (c), and 61.47.
Overhaul shall not apply to concrete used in the foundation
fill.
Item
Unit
61.07 Overbreak in excavation

in hard material . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
surface area of the vertical outer faces of the base.
overbreak material removed from the excavation, for the
concrete fill in accordance with Subclause 6105(c), and any
additional screeding concrete required.
Item
Unit
61.08 Foundation fill consisting of:
Item
61.11 Drilling of holes

(diameter and type of
drilling indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(a)
Rock fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(b)
Crushed-stone fill . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(c)
Compacted granular
material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(d)
Mass concrete (class
(e)
Concrete screed (thickness and class of concrete indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
approved material placed and compacted below the bases
as specified or where directed by the Engineer.
The quantity of foundation fill to be measured for payment
shall be the material contained within the prism specified in
Clause 6109 or shall otherwise be the quantity to the
outlines shown on the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer.
procuring, furnishing, transporting, placing and compacting
the material.
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of hole drilled.

and clearing the holes as specified. Where no provision has
been made for payment in the Schedule of Quantities under
Items 61.09 and 61.10, the tendered rate shall also include
full compensation for work falling under these items.
Item
Unit
61.09 Establishment on the

site for the drilling
of holes (type of
drilling indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lump sum
establishment on the site and the subsequent removal of all
special plant for drilling the holes and additional plant for
carrying out operations, the cost of which does not vary with
the actual amount of work to be done.
The unit of measurement for grouting shall be the kilogram

of cement or proprietary brand of grout as may be applicable
used in the grouting operation.
providing the equipment and all the material, and mixing and
pumping the grout into the prepared holes in accordance
with the instructions of the Engineer, and also for the waterpressure tests.
Unit
61.13 Dowel bars (type, diameter and

length of dowel bars, together
with type of grout, indicated) . . . . . . kilogram (kg)
The unit of measurement for the dowel bars shall be the
kilogram of bars provided and secured in position.
supplying all the material and positioning and grouting the
dowel bars as specified.
Item
This work will be paid for by way of a lump sum, 75% of
which will become payable when all the equipment is on the
site and the first hole has been drilled. The remaining 25%
will become payable after all the holes have been drilled and
the equipment has been removed from the site.
Unit
61.12 Grouting (type of grout

and for which purpose it
is required indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . kilogram (kg)
Item
Item
Unit
Unit
61.14 Foundation lining

(type of material and
The unit of measurement for foundation lining shall be the
square metre of concrete surface lined.
Item
Unit
61.10 Moving to and setting

up the equipment at each
hole to be drilled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of positions to
which the equipment has to be moved and set up in position.
The number to be measured shall equal the number of holes
to be drilled as instructed by the Engineer.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all the
costs involved in moving and setting up the equipment.

procuring, furnishing and placing all material and for all
labour and incidentals required for completing the work as
specified.
Item
Unit

site for piling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lump sum
generally levelling the piling site, establishing on the site and
subsequently removing all structural platforms, rafts, and all
special constructional plant and equipment for foundation
piling and for carrying out operations, the cost of which does
not vary with the actual amount of piling done.
6100-15

which will become payable when all equipment is on the site
and the first pile has been installed. The second instalment
of 25% of the lump sum will be payable after half the total
number of piles have been installed, and the final instalment
of 25% after all the piles have been completed and the
equipment has been removed from the site.
Item
The tendered rates for forming augered holes shall include

full compensation for augering and disposing of surplus
material resulting from the hole having been formed.
The tendered rates for forming bored holes shall include full
compensation for boring, supplying, installing and extracting
the driven temporary casing as well as for disposing of
surplus material resulting from the hole having been formed.
Unit
Item
61.16 Moving to, and setting

up the equipment at each
position for installing
the piles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of positions to
which the installation equipment has to be moved and set up
in position. The quantity measured shall be the number of
piles installed plus the number of piles redriven on the
instruction of the Engineer, plus any piles provided in
addition for load tests, which do not form part of a specific
pile group.
Unit
61.18 Driving the temporary

casing for driven displacement piling systems
for forming holes for
piles with a diameter of
(diameter indicated)
through material situated
within the following
successive depth ranges:
(a)
0 m up to 10 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)

costs involved in moving and setting up any equipment.
(b)
to 15 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
Item
(c)
Etc in increments of 5 m
depths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
Unit
61.17 Augered or bored holes

for piles with a diameter
of (diameter indicated)
through material situated
within the following

measured down from the average ground surface
(Subclause 6113(h)) to the agreed founding level (Clause
6106).
(a)
Augered holes:
(i)
0 m up to 10 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of hole plus the

depth of bulbous base formed, as may be applicable. The
depth of the bulbous base shall be deemed to be equal to
the diameter of a sphere, the volume of which shall be equal
to the quantity of compacted concrete in the bulbous base.
(ii)
to 15 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
Irrespective of the total depth of the hole, the quantity within

each depth range shall be measured and paid for separately.
(iii)
depths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)

supplying, driving and subsequently extracting the temporary
casing.
(b)
Bored holes:
(i)
0 m up to 10 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(ii)
to 15 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(iii)
depths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(Subclause 6113(h)) to the agreed founding level (Clause
6106).
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of hole,
including the depth of the bulbous base formed, as may be
applicable. The depth of the bulbous base shall be deemed
to be equal to the diameter of a sphere, the volume of which
shall be equal to the quantity of compacted concrete in the
bulbous base.
Irrespective of the total depth of the hole, the quantity within
6100-16
Item
Unit
61.19 Manufacturing, supplying

and delivering prefabricated
piles (type and size indicated) . . . . . . . . metre (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of accepted
prefabricated pile delivered on the site in accordance with
the Engineer's written instructions.
supplying all the materials, manufacturing, transporting and
delivering to the point of use and handling the prefabricated
piles.
Item
61.20 Installation of prefabricated piles (type and size
indicated) through material
Unit
(a)
0 m up to 10 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(b)
to 15 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(c)
depths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(Subclause 6113(h)) to the founding depth agreed on
(Clause 6106).
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of prefabricated
pile installed. That part of the prefabricated pile projecting
above the average ground surface shall not be measured
and paid for.
Irrespective of the total length of pile installed, the quantity
installed within each depth range shall be measured and
hoisting and driving the pile.
Item
Unit
61.21 Extra over Item 61.17,

irrespective of the depth,
to form augered and bored
pile holes through identified
obstructions consisting of:
(a)
Coarse gravel with a matrix content of less than (maximum percentage indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(b)
Boulders (description of
and maximum size indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(c)
Rock formation (description and class of rock indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of pile hole
formed through the identified obstruction, measured from the
depth at which the identified obstruction is encountered to
the depth at which normal auger drilling or boring can be
resumed or another type of identified obstruction is
encountered.
additional work and incidentals required for forming the pile
hole through the identified obstruction.
Notes:
(a)
Subitem 61.21(a): The matrix content indicated shall
be the percentage by volume of matrix in material containing
coarse gravel. Where the maximum percentage indicated is
exceeded, payment for forming holes through such material
shall be made under Item 61.17. Unless otherwise specified,
the maximum percentage of matrix shall be accepted to be
60%.
(b)
Where obstructions other than those provided for in
Item 61.21 can be identified, they shall be described on the
Drawings and/or in the Project Specifications. Provision
therefor shall be made in the Schedule of Quantities under
extensions to Item 61.21.
Item
Unit
61.22 Forming augered and bored

pile holes through unidentified obstructions . . . . . . . . . . provisional sum
A provisional sum shall be allowed in the Schedule of
Quantities for covering the cost of this work.
Payment for the work authorised by the Engineer shall be in
accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of
Contract.
Item
Unit
61.23 Driving temporary casings

for driven displacement
piling systems or installing
prefabricated piles through
identified or unidentified
obstructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . provisional sum
A provisional sum shall be allowed in the Schedule of
Quantities for covering the cost of this work.
The method of payment for the work authorised by the
Engineer shall be in accordance with the provisions of the
Item
Unit

61.18 and 61.20 for
raking piles:
(a)
Holes for piles of (diameter and rake indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(b)
Temporary casing for
driven displacement pile systems (diameter and rake indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(c)
Prefabricated piles (type,
size and rate indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
additional work and incidentals for forming the pile holes or
for driving and later extracting the temporary casing, or for
installing prefabricated piles to the rake shown.
Item
Unit
61.25 Forming underreams for

piles of (diameter indicated) . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of pile holes
underreamed.
to be done in forming the underreams.
Item
Unit
61.26 Forming the bulbous

bases for piles of
(diameter indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
6100-17
The unit of measurement shall be the number of bulbous

bases formed.
to be done in forming the bulbous bases but shall exclude
the concrete work.

supplying, delivering, cutting, bending, welding, trial welds,
placing and fixing the steel reinforcing, including all tying
wires, spacers and waste.
Item
Item
Unit
61.27 Socketing piles into

rock formation (class
of rock and length of
socket indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of sockets,
the length of which shall be not less than the specified
length, formed in rock, the hardness of which shall be not
less than that of the specified class of rock.
to be done for socketing into the rock formation.
Item
Unit
61.28 Installing and removing

temporary casings in augered
holes for piles of (diameter
indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of temporary
casing installed as directed by the Engineer or shown on the
Drawings. Only the installed temporary casing below the
average ground surface (Subclause 6113(h)) shall be
measured for payment.
supplying, installing and removing the temporary casings.
Item
Unit
Unit

in piles, underreams,
bulbous bases and
sockets (class of
concrete indicated) . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
concrete placed in the cast in situ piles, underreams,
bulbous bases and sockets. The quantity shall be calculated
from the nominal pile diameter and length of pile from the
founding level to the specified cutting-off level, plus the
additional quantity of concrete in the underream and bulbous
base as may be relevant.
supplying and storing all material, providing all plant, mixing,
transporting, placing and compacting the concrete, curing
the concrete and repairing defective concrete. Payment shall
distinguish between the different classes of concrete.
Item
Unit

for concrete cast under
water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
concrete cast under water, the quantity being calculated as
for Item 61.31.
additional work, incidentals and extra cement required for
placing the concrete under water.
61.29 Installing permanent

pile casing for piles
of (diameter indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
Item
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of permanent

casing installed as instructed by the Engineer or shown on
the Drawings.
61.33 Splicing/coupling prefabricated piles for

lengthening (size of
pile indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)

supplying and installing permanent pile casing.
The unit of measurement shall be the number of splices/

couplings in prefabricated piles for each size of pile.
Item
required for splicing/coupling the piles in accordance with the
specifications.
Unit
Unit
61.30 Steel reinforcement in

cast in situ piles:
Item
(a)
Unit
Mild-steel bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tonne (t)
(b)
High-yield-stress-steel
bars (type indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tonne (t)
61.34 Stripping/cutting the pile

heads (type and diameter/size
of pile indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurement for steel bars shall be the tonne of

reinforcement in place in accordance with the Drawings or
as authorised.
The unit of measurement shall be the number of heads of

each type and diameter/size of pile stripped/cut.
Ties and other steel used for keeping the reinforcing steel in
position shall be measured as steel reinforcing under the
appropriate subitem.
6100-18

providing all tools and stripping/cutting the pile heads.
Item
Unit

site for the load
testing of piles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lump sum
the establishment on the site and subsequently removing all
the special plant and equipment required for conducting the
load tests on piles. This cost does not vary with the number
of load tests to be conducted.
Payment for this work shall be made by way of a lump sum,
100% of which will be paid after the testing assembly has
been completely assembled and the first load test has been
started.
Item
Unit
61.36 Load tests on piles (compression/tension test,

diameter/ size, specified
working load indicated) . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of load tests
conducted on the instruction of the Engineer, for each
specified working load.
Test piles, but not anchor piles and anchors, shall be
measured as specified above for permanent piles. Anchor
piles and anchors shall be deemed to form part of the testing
equipment under this item.
installing the anchor piles and anchors where necessary;
conducting load tests, and processing and submitting the
results.
Item
Unit

site for core drilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lump sum
the establishment on the site and subsequently removing all
the equipment required for conducting the core drilling. This
cost does not vary with the quantity of work to be done.
This work shall be paid for by way of a lump sum, 100% of
which will become payable when the equipment has been
set up at the first location and drilling has started.
Item
Unit
61.38 Moving the equipment

to and assembling it
at each location where
cores are to be drilled . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of locations to
which the core-drilling equipment is to be moved and at
which it has to be assembled.
cost of moving and assembling the equipment.
Item
Unit
61.39 Drilling the cores

(diameter indicated) in:
(a)
Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(b)
Founding formation
(i)
irrespective of hardness . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(ii)
with a hardness of (hardness
indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of hole drilled.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for drilling,
recovering and packing the cores, keeping the drilling
records, providing core boxes, providing and installing the
casings, and backfilling the holes with grout.
Item
Unit
61.40 Standing time for

pile-installation
frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hour (h)
The unit of measurement for the standing time of a pileinstallation frame shall be the hour during which the pileinstallation frame is standing in terms of Subclause 6113(w).
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all fixed
costs for the pile-installation frame, which is not connected
with its operation and the quantity of work done.
Item
Unit
61.41 Establishment on the site

for constructing the
caissons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lump sum
the establishment on the site and later removing all special
plant and equipment necessary for constructing the
caissons. This cost shall not vary in accordance with the
number of caissons constructed.
This work shall be paid for by way of a lump sum, 50% of
which will be paid when all the equipment is on the site and
the first caisson has been constructed. The second payment
of 25% of the lump sum will be paid after half the number of
caissons have been completed, and the final instalment of
25% after all the caissons have been completed and the
equipment has been removed from the site.
Item
Unit
61.42 Formwork for caissons

(class of finish
indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
formwork, and only the area of formwork in contact with the
finished face of the concrete shall be measured. Formwork
for construction joints shall be measured for payment under
Class F1 surface finish but shall be measured only for
construction joints shown on the Drawings or as prescribed
by the Engineer.
6100-19

suppling all the materials, erecting the falsework and
formwork, constructing the forms, forming the grooves,
fillets, chamfers, stopends for construction joints, treating the
forms, all accessories, and stripping and removing the
formwork after completion of the work. Payment for
formwork shall be made only after the formwork has been
stripped and the surface finish approved.
Item
Unit
61.43 Steel reinforcement for

caissons:
(a)
(b)
bars (type indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tonne (t)
reinforcement in place in accordance with the Drawings or
as may have been authorised.
Ties and other steel used for positioning the reinforcing steel
shall be measured as steel reinforcing under the appropriate
subitem.
supplying, delivering, cutting, bending, welding, trial welding
joints, placing and fixing the steel, including all tying wire,
spacers and waste.
Unit

in caissons and
concrete seals (class
of concrete indicated) . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement for cast in situ concrete shall be
the cubic metre of concrete in place. Concrete quantities in
the caissons shall be calculated from the dimensions shown
on the Drawings or authorised by the Engineer, and the
length of the caisson from the founding level to the specified
cut-off level. The quantity of concrete in the concrete seal
shall be calculated in accordance with the dimensions shown
on the Drawings or authorised by the Engineer.
procuring and furnishing all the materials, storing the
material, providing all plant, mixing, transporting, placing and
compacting the concrete, all sealing, curing the concrete and
repairing defective concrete. Payment shall distinguish
between the different classes of concrete.
Item
61.45 Cutting edge for
(diameter/size
indicated) caissons
Unit
. . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of caissons

provided with cutting edges, irrespective of the material they
have been constructed of.
manufacturing, supplying, delivering and installing the
complete cutting edge as well as for joining the cutting edge
to the caisson unit. Where the cutting edge is of concrete
6100-20
Item
Unit
61.46 Sinking (diameter/size

indicated) caissons through
material situated within the
following successive depth
ranges:
(a)
Mild-steel bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tonne (t)
Item
and forms part of the bottom element, the tendered rate shall
include full compensation for all additional work required for
completing the element.
0 m up to 5 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(b)
to 10 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(c)
depths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
The limits of the successive depth ranges shall be measured
down from the firm horizontal base (Subclause 6114(b)) to
the agreed founding level (Clause 6106).
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of caisson sunk.
Irrespective of the length of caisson sunk, the quantity for
locating and holding in position, dewatering, pumping,
kentledge and lubricating the sides of the caisson, and for all
work in connection with the sinking of the caisson which is
not paid for elsewhere.
Item
Unit
61.47 Excavation for caissons:

(a)
situated within the following successive depth ranges:
(i)
0 m up to 2 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(ii)
to 4 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(iii)
depths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(b)
measured down from the firm horizontal base (Subclause
6114(b)) to the excavated level inside the caisson.
material, measured in the original position before excavation.
The quantity of excavation for each depth range shall be
calculated from the gross area of the caisson in plan and the
depth of excavation completed within each depth range.
Irrespective of the total depth of excavation, the quantity of
material within each depth range shall be measured and

excavation in the classified material, spoiling or stockpiling
the material, hauling the excavated material for the free-haul
distance of 1.0 km, trimming the bottom of the excavation,
dewatering, pumping and removing the material leaking into
the caisson before sealing.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for cutting

away, trimming and disposing of the concrete removed.
Item
Unit
61.50 Nuclear integrity testing

on bored piles:
Item
Unit
(a)
Constructing 5 m long
calibration piles of (indicate
diameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(b)
Installing 65 mm internal
diameter steel ducts in the piles . . . . . . metre (m)

supplying and placing the sand, transporting the material
within a free-haul distance of 1.0 km, and compacting the
material as specified.
(c)
Performing integrity tests using:
(i)
The nuclear method . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(ii)
The neutron method . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
Item
The unit of measurement for Subitem (a) shall be the

number of calibration piles constructed. The unit of
measurement for Subitem (b) shall be the metre of 65 mm
internal diameter steel duct installed.
The unit of
measurement for Subitem (c) shall be the number of integrity
tests performed by each method.
61.48 Filling the caissons . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)

placed above the concrete seal in the caisson
compartments.
Unit
61.49 Stripping the (size of

caisson indicated)
caisson heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of caissons of
each size stripped.

procuring and furnishing all materials, constructional plant,
equipment, labour and incidentals for forming the bored
holes, constructing the calibration piles, installing the steel
ducts, and performing the prescribed integrity tests,
complete as specified.
6100-21
Table 6113/1
Rock classification
Description of hardness
Field indicator tests
Unconfined
compression
strength
(MPa)
Class
Description
R1
Very soft rock
Material crumbles under firm (moderate) blows with the sharp end of
geological pick and can be peeled off with a knife; it is too hard to cut a
triaxial sample by hand. SPT refusal.
1 to 3
R2
Soft rock
Can just be scraped and peeled with a knife, firm blows of the pick point
leave indentations 2 mm to 4 mm in specimens.
3 to 10
R3
Medium hard
rock
Cannot be scraped or peeled with a knife; hand-held specimen can be

broken with the hammer end of a geological pick with a single firm blow.
10 to 25
R4
Hard rock
25 to 70
R5
Very Hard rock
Point load tests shall be conducted for distinguishing between these

categories. These results may be verified by means of uniaxial
compressive-strength tests.
R6
Extremely hard
rock
70 to 200
> 200
Classification after Care Logging Committee, South African Section, Association of Engineering Geologists: "A guide to Core
Logging for Rock Engineering" Bulletin of the Association of Engineering Geologists, Vol. XV, No. 3, 1978.
6100-22
SERIES 6000 :
STRUCTURES
blemishes to the concrete surface, and shall also be free

from indentations and warps.
SECTION 6200 :
FALSEWORK, FORMWORK AND

CONCRETE FINISH
(iii)
CONTENTS
6201
6202
6203
6204
6205
6206
6207
6208
6209
6210
SCOPE
MATERIALS
GENERAL
DESIGN
CONSTRUCTION
REMOVING THE FALSEWORK AND FORMWORK
FORMED SURFACES : CLASSES OF FINISH
REMEDIAL TREATMENT OF FORMED SURFACES
UNFORMED SURFACES : CLASSES OF FINISH
6201
SCOPE
This Section covers the design, supply and erection of all

falsework and formwork used in the construction of
permanent work.
This Section also describes the classes of surface finishes
on formed and unformed concrete surfaces.
6202
MATERIALS
(a)
General
The materials used in the construction of falsework and

formwork shall be suitable for the purpose for which they are
required and be of such quality as to produce the specified
standard of work. The type, grade and condition of the
material shall be subject to the Engineer's approval.
(b)
Falsework
The timber, structural steel and scaffolding used shall be

free from defects that may prejudice the stability of the
falsework. The jacks, devices, clamps and fittings shall all
be in a good working order and of adequate design and
strength.
(c)
Formwork
(i)
Tongue-and-groove boarding
Tongue-and-groove boarding shall be of suitably dried

timber which will not warp, distort or cause discolouration of
the concrete. The widths of the boards shall be as specified
on the Drawings or in the Schedule of Quantities or as
prescribed by the Engineer. Boards shall be supplied in
lengths not shorter than 3 m.
(ii)
Steel forms to exposed surfaces
For classes F2 and F3 surface finish the individual panels

shall be assembled sufficiently rigidly and so clamped as not
to deform or kick during handling or under the pressure of
the wet concrete.
The surfaces of forms which are to be in contact with the
concrete shall be clean, free from deposits or adhering
matter, ridges or spatter which will impart irregularities and
Void formers
Void formers used in permanent work shall be subject to the

Where void formers of a special design are required, details
thereof will be specified.
Void formers shall be manufactured from material which will
not leak, tear or be damaged during the course of
construction and shall be of such tight construction as to
prevent undue loss of the mortar component of the concrete
through leakage. The units shall be sufficiently rigid so as
not to deform during handling or under the pressure of the
wet concrete.
For mild-steel spiral-lock-formed void formers, the metal
thickness shall be as follows, unless otherwise specified:
(1)
Unbraced void formers
0.6 mm for diameters of up to 600 mm.

0.8 mm for diameters exceeding 600 mm and up to
800 mm.
1 000 mm.
(2)
Braced void formers
0.6 mm for diameters of up to 800 mm.

1 000 mm.
1.0 mm for diameters exceeding 1 000 mm and up
to 1 200 mm.
1.2 mm for diameters exceeding 1 200 mm.
The thickness specified for braced void formers shall apply

to formers internally braced with timber or equivalent braces.
The braces shall be at spacings not exceeding 2 m and not
further than 1.0 m from the end of each unit. Timber cross
braces shall consist of members with cross-sectional
dimensions of at least 50 mm x 50 mm.
All hollow void-former units shall be provided with a 12 mm
diameter drainage hole at each end.
(iv)
Chamfer and recess fillets
Timber fillets used for forming chamfers and recesses on

exposed surfaces shall be made from new material unless
otherwise authorised.
(v)
Jack rods for sliding formwork
The jack rods, base plates and couplers shall be strong

enough to carry the design load under all operating
conditions without buckling, distorting or causing damage to
the concrete. Jack rods which are to remain permanently
embedded in the concrete shall comply with the
requirements of Clauses 6303 and 6305. Under no
circumstances shall bent rods be used in the work.
The jack rods used shall have a diameter of at least 25 mm.
6203
GENERAL
Notwithstanding approval given by the Engineer for the

design and drawings prepared by the Contractor for the
6200-1
falsework and formwork, and the acceptance of the

falsework and formwork as constructed, the Contractor shall
be solely responsible for the safety and adequacy of the
falsework and formwork and shall indemnify and keep
indemnified the Employer and Engineer against any losses,
claims or damage to persons or property whatsoever which
may arise out of or in consequence of the design,
construction, use and maintenance of the falsework and
formwork and against all claims, demands, proceedings,
damages, costs, charges and expenses whatsoever in
respect thereof or in relation thereto.
For Works on, over, under or adjacent to any railway line
which is controlled by a Rail Authority, the Contractor shall
comply, inter alia, with the requirements for the preparation
and submission of drawings for falsework and formwork,
and the submission of certificates for the proper construction
thereof, all in accordance with the relevant Rail Authority
Specification.
After having constructed the falsework and formwork, and
prior to placing the reinforcing steel and/or the concrete, the
Contractor shall inspect the falsework and formwork.
Dimensions shall be checked, unevenness of surface shall
be corrected, and special attention paid to the adequacy and
tightness of all bolts, ties and bracings as well as to the
soundness of the foundations.
The Contractor shall give the Engineer at least 24 hours
notice of his intention to place the concrete to enable the
Engineer to inspect all aspects of the completed work.
However, before notifying the Engineer, the Contractor shall
satisfy himself that the work complies in all respects with the
specifications.
Concrete sections with dimension of smaller than 200 mm
shall not be formed with sliding formwork unless authorised
by the Engineer.
Where no provision has been made in the Schedule of
Quantities for sliding formwork, the Contractor may, in a
covering letter to the Tender, submit a lump sum which
reflects a saving in the cost for the use of sliding formwork
in lieu of conventional formwork. The tendered lump sum
quoted shall be accompanied by rates for pay Items 62.07,
62.08, 62.09 and 63.03, all in accordance with Clauses 6210
and 6310.
due account shall be taken of the effect of wetting on the

foundation material.
In designing the falsework, cognisance shall also be taken
of the redistribution of load which may occur on account of
the effect of temperature, wind force, the prestressing of
curved and skewed structures, stage construction, flooding
and debris.
Particular attention shall be given to providing transverse
and diagonal bracing as well as rib stiffeners on cross
bearers.
(c)
Formwork
(i)
General
Formwork shall be so designed as to be sufficiently rigid to

ensure that the specified dimensional tolerances can be
achieved under the combined action of self-weight, dead
load and imposed loads as well as the additional loads
resulting from the rate of concreting, the layer thickness of
the concrete cast in one operation and the method of
placing and compaction.
(ii)
Sliding formwork
The Contractor shall be responsible for the design of the

sliding formwork. Prior to fabrication or bringing the sliding
formwork and any additional equipment to the site, the
Contractor shall submit drawings of the complete slidingformwork assembly to the Engineer for approval. The
drawings shall show full details of the forms, jacking frames,
access ladders, hanging platforms, safety rails and curing
skirts as well as details of the jacks and jack layouts.
The Contractor shall be required to submit to the Engineer,
before slide casting commences, an instruction manual in
which the sliding techniques, jacking procedure, methods of
keeping the formwork level, the procedure to be adopted to
prevent bonding of the concrete to the forms and a method
for releasing the forms in the event of bonding, the
instrumentation and monitoring of the slide casting and
correcting for verticality, twisting and levelness are
described in detail.
The formwork panels shall be inclined to give a small taper,
the forms being slightly wider at the bottom than at the top.
6204
DESIGN
(a)
General
The Contractors design and drawings of the falsework and

formwork shall comply amongst others with all statutory
requirements.
The Engineer may require the Contractor to submit to him
for consideration and approval the design and drawings of
the falsework and formwork for any structure. The
Contractor shall submit his design criteria and calculations
and detail drawings of the falsework and formwork to the
Engineer at least 14 days before the Engineers approval is
required.
(b)
Falsework
The Contractor shall make his own assessment of the

allowable bearing pressure on the foundation material and
shall design the footings and falsework to prevent
overloading, differential settlement and unacceptable overall
settlement. In assessing the allowable bearing pressure,
6200-2
The taper shall be so designed as to produce the specified

concrete thickness at the mid-lift level of the form.
The spacing of the jacks with their jack rods shall be so
designed that the dead load of the sliding-formwork
assembly, the frictional load, and the mass of materials,
personnel and equipment will be evenly distributed and
within the design capacity of the jacks used.
6205
CONSTRUCTION
(a)
Falsework
Falsework shall be erected in accordance with the approved

drawings incorporating such modifications as required by the
Engineer.
The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent
deterioration of the foundations during the course of
construction.
The falsework shall incorporate features which will permit

adjustment to the alignment of the formwork to neutralise
the expected settlement and deflection under load.
(b)
Formwork
(i)
General
The formwork for bridge decks shall be erected to levels

calculated from the information given on the plans for
roadworks and bridges. The levels shall be adapted to make
provision for the specified precamber as well as for the
expected deflection and settlement of the fully loaded
falsework and formwork. The levels shall be set out and
checked at intervals not exceeding 2.5 m.
For constructing the formwork, the Contractor may, subject
to the provisions of Clause 6202, use any material suitable
for and compatible with the class of surface finish and
dimensional tolerances specified for the particular member.
Formwork shall be sufficiently rigid to maintain the forms in
their correct position, shape and profile and shall be of such
tight construction that the concrete can be placed and
compacted without undue loss or leakage of the mortar
component of the concrete.
The joints between contiguous formwork elements shall be
of a tight fit and, where necessary, the joints shall be
caulked, taped or packed with a sealing gasket, all at no
extra payment if undue leakage occurs or can be expected.
Paper, cloth or similar material shall not be used for this
purpose.
The formwork construction shall permit accurate erection
and easy stripping without shock, disturbance or damage to
the cast concrete. Where necessary, the formwork
assembly shall permit the removal or release of side forms
independently of the soffit forms.
Metal supports, ties, hangers and accessories embedded in
the concrete shall be removed to a depth of not less than
the cover specified for the reinforcement. No wire ties shall
be used.
All external corners shall be chamfered by fillet strips being
fixed into the corners of the formwork to form 25 mm x
25 mm chamfers. Re-entrant angles need not be chamfered
unless specified.
Where polystyrene or similar material, susceptible to
damage is used, it shall be lined with a hard surface on the
side to be concreted. The hard material shall be sufficiently
resilient to ensure that the required quality of work can be
achieved.
Where it is specified, all formwork ties shall be provided with
recoverable truncated cones between sleeve ends and
formwork faces to ensure that sleeve ends are not exposed
on concrete surfaces. The cones shall have a minimum
depth of 15 mm.
(ii)
Formwork to exposed surfaces
The formwork and boards shall be so arranged as to form a

uniform and regular pattern in line with and perpendicular to
the main axis of the member, unless otherwise approved or
Joints between contiguous members shall, after caulking,
taping or sealing, be treated to prevent blemishes, stains
and undue marks from being imparted to the concrete

surface.
Bolt and tie positions shall be so arranged that they conform
to the symmetry of the formwork panels or boards. Bolt and
rivet heads which will be in contact with the formed surface
shall be of the countersunk type and shall be treated to
prevent marks from forming on the concrete surface.
The formwork at construction joints shall be braced to
prevent steps from forming in the concrete surfaces at the
joints between successive stages of construction.
Where moulding or recess strips are specified, they shall be
neatly butted or mitred.
(iii)
Formwork for open joints
The requirements for formwork for open joints shall, unless

otherwise specified, apply only to cases where the distance
between opposite concrete surfaces is equal to or less than
150 mm.
Formwork for open joints shall be constructed to produce a
Class F1 surface finish to concealed surfaces or a Class F2
or F3 surface finish corresponding to the in-plane surface
finish of the bordering concrete surfaces. The material used
and construction of the formwork shall permit its complete
removal to form the open joint.
No solvent shall be used to remove formwork unless
(iv)
Openings and wall chases
Openings and wall chases shall be provided only where

indicated on the Drawings or as authorised by the Engineer.
Frames for openings shall be rigid and firmly secured in
position to prevent their moving. Temporary holes shall be
so formed that they will not create an irregular pattern in
relation to the rest of the exposed formed concrete surface.
(v)
Sliding formwork
(1)
Plant and equipment
Unless otherwise specified in the Project Specifications,

hoisting equipment for sliding formwork, which operates
stepwise with upward movements of between 10 mm and
100 mm will be acceptable. However, the use of linked
hydraulic or pneumatic jacks is preferable, which are
reversible and driven by an electrically operated pump, and
which can hoist at a steady rate. The jacks shall have
independent controls for regulating verticality and levelness.
The jacking system shall ensure that the sliding-formwork
assembly can be hoisted evenly.
The use of hoisting systems which operate without jack rods
shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
All equipment shall be thoroughly tested and inspected
before installation and shall be maintained in a good working
order throughout the entire sliding operation.
The Contractor shall keep adequate back-up plant,
equipment and quantities of materials on the site to ensure
that the slide casting can proceed without interruption.
(2)
Instrumentation and monitoring
The Contractor shall supply and install suitable

instrumentation on the sliding platform and foundations and
against the sides of the structure for monitoring the height,
6200-3
verticality, levelness and twisting at regular distances. The

equipment used, its utilisation and the frequency of
recording any readings shall be approved by the Engineer.
operative and the complete stock of all materials required for

the slide casting as well as back-up plant and equipment are
on the site.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all monitoring work

and shall ensure that records of all readings and
measurements taken are filed systematically and are at all
times available to the Engineer and the person in control of
the sliding operation.
The Contractor shall ensure that the rate of sliding is such

that the concrete at the bottom of the formwork has obtained
sufficient strength to support itself and all loads which may
be placed on the concrete at the time, and that the concrete
does not adhere to the sides of the forms.
Unless otherwise specified, the verticality of the structure

shall be controlled with laser alignment apparatus or optical
plummets, and the levelness of the sliding forms with a
water-level system with reference control points placed at
strategic locations.
The slide-casting operation shall be continuous, without any

interruptions, until the full height of the structure has been
reached, and shall be geared and organised so as to
maintain an average rate of sliding of 350 mm per hour.
(6)
Height and verticality shall be monitored at intervals not

exceeding four hours. The readings shall be plotted
immediately on graphs. When the structure is more than
10 mm out of vertical, the Engineer shall be notified
immediately.
(3)
Supervision
During the entire period of the sliding operation, a

competent person who is fully acquainted with the sliding
technique and the Contractor's methods of construction
shall be in attendance on the sliding platform and in control
of the sliding operations.
(4)
Interruptions
When the sliding operations are delayed for more than 45

minutes, the Contractor shall prevent adhesion of the setting
concrete to the formwork panels by easing the forms or
moving them slightly every 10 minutes, or alternatively,
where reversible jacks are used, by lowering the forms by
10 mm to 25 mm. Wherever interruptions occur, emergency
construction joints shall be formed and treated in
accordance with Clause 6408. Before concreting is
restarted, the form shall be adjusted to fit snugly onto the
hardened concrete so as to prevent steps from being formed
on the exposed concrete surface. When slide casting is
recommenced, care shall be taken to prevent the fresh
concrete from being lifted off from the old concrete.
Construction
(vi)
The jacking frame shall be constructed with adequate

clearance between the underside of the cross members and
top of the formwork to allow the horizontal reinforcement
and embedded items to be correctly installed. A control
procedure shall be agreed on by the Contractor and the
Engineer to ensure that all the reinforcement is placed. At all
times there shall be horizontal reinforcement above the level
of the top of the formwork panel.
Guides shall be provided to ensure that the vertical
reinforcement can be correctly placed and the specified
concrete cover over the reinforcement maintained.
Permanent formwork
Void formers shall be secured in position at regular intervals

to prevent displacement and distortion during concreting.
The void formers shall be supported on precast concrete
blocks or rigid welded steel cradles, all subject to approval
by the Engineer. The ties securing the void formers shall be
attached to the formwork and cross bearers of the
falsework. The void formers shall not be tied to or supported
on the reinforcement.
Fibre-cement plates shall be supported so that the plate
spans in the direction parallel to the orientation of the
asbestos fibres.
Where the jack rods are to be recovered, adequate

precautions shall be taken in respect of their removal
without damage being caused to the concrete.
(vii)
Where jack rods occur at openings or wall chases, adequate

lateral support shall be provided to prevent their buckling.
The surfaces of forms which are to be in contact with fresh

(wet) concrete shall be treated to ensure non-adhesion of
the concrete to the forms and easy release from the
concrete during the stripping of the formwork.
Equipment and material shall be so distributed on the

working platforms that the load will be evenly distributed
over the jacks.
Guard plates shall be provided at the tops of the forms to
the outside walls to prevent the concrete from falling down
the outside.
The framework, forms and platforms shall be regularly
cleared and the accumulation thereon of redundant concrete
prevented.
Preparing the formwork
Release agents shall be applied strictly in accordance with

the manufacturer's instructions, and every precaution shall
be taken to avoid the contamination of the reinforcement,
prestressing tendons and anchorages. In the selection of
release agents, due regard shall be given to the necessity
for maintaining a uniform colour and appearance throughout
on the exposed concrete surfaces.
Before the concrete is placed, all dirt and foreign matter
shall be removed from the forms and the forms shall be
thoroughly wetted with water.
The Contractor shall take all precautions to prevent

contamination of the concrete by leaking oil or other causes.
6206
(5)
The Contractor shall give the Engineer 24 hours' notice of

his intention to commence with slide casting. Permission to
commence with the sliding shall not be given by the
Engineer before the sliding-formwork assembly is fully
6200-4
REMOVING THE FALSEWORK AND FORMWORK
The sliding process

Falsework and formwork shall not be removed before the
concrete has attained sufficient strength to support its own
mass and any loads which may be imposed on it. This
condition shall be assumed to require the formwork to
remain in place after the concrete has been placed, for the
appropriate minimum period of time given in Tables 6206/16206/3, unless the Contractor can prove, to the satisfaction
of the Engineer, that shorter periods are sufficient to fulfil
this condition. In such case the formwork may be removed
after the shorter periods of time agreed on by the Engineer.
Table 6206/1
Removing falsework and frameworkOrdinary Portland cement
Falsework and formwork for:
Beam sides, walls and

unloaded columns
Soffits of slabs and

beams
Spans up to 3 m
Spans 3 m to 6 m
Spans 6 m to 12 m
Spans over 12 m
a)
b)
c)
d)
Days
Normal
weather
Cold
weather
1.5
4
10
14
21
7
17
24
30
Table 6206/2
Removing falsework and frameworkRapid hardening ordinary Portland cement

unloaded columns

beams
Spans up to 3 m
Spans 3 m to 6 m
Spans 6 m to 12 m
Spans over 12 m
a)
b)
c)
d)
Days
Normal
weather
Cold
weather*
0.5
Falsework and formwork shall be carefully removed without

exposing the cast concrete to damage, disturbance or
shock.
Weather may be regarded as being "normal" when
atmospheric temperatures adjacent to the concrete, as
measured by a maximum-and-minimum thermometer, do
not fall below 15C, and as "cold" when temperatures,
similarly measured, fall below 5C. When the minimum
temperatures fall between these values, the length of the
period after which the formwork may be removed, shall be
between the periods specified for normal and cold weather.
Any period during which the temperature remains below 2C
shall be disregarded in calculating the minimum time which
shall elapse before the forms are removed.
On continuously reinforced concrete structures the
falsework and supporting formwork shall not be removed
before the concrete of the last pour has reached the
appropriate minimum age given in Table 6206/1 or the
appropriate minimum strength. Where the structure is
constructed in stages, the falsework and supporting
formwork shall be removed as specified or authorised.
On prestressed-concrete structures the falsework and
supporting formwork shall be removed after the full
prestressing force relating to the particular stage of
construction has been applied, unless otherwise specified or
authorised.
6207
FORMED SURFACES : CLASSES OF FINISH
(a)
General
In addition to complying with the tolerances specified in

Clause 6803, the surface finish on formed concrete surfaces
shall also comply with the following requirements.
(b)
2
5
10
18
4
10
18
28
* Shorter periods may be used for sections thicker

than 300 mm
After repair work has been done to surface defects in

accordance with Subclause 6208(b), no further treatment of
the as-stripped finish will be required. This finish is required
on concealed formed surfaces.
(c)
Table 6206/3
Removing falsework and frameworkCements with more than 15% blast furnace slag
or flyash
Days
Normal
weather
Cold
weather

unloaded columns

beams
Spans up to 3 m
Spans 3 m to 6 m
Spans 6 m to 12 m
Spans over 12 m
a)
b)
c)
d)
6
14
21
28
10
24
28
36
Class F2 surface finish
This finish shall be equivalent to that obtained from the use

of square-edged timber panels and boards wrought to the
correct thickness, or shutter boards or steel forms arranged
in a regular pattern. This finish is intended to be left as
struck but surface defects shall be remedied in accordance
with Subclause 6208(b). Although minor surface blemishes
and slight discolourations will be permitted, large blemishes
and severe stains and discolouration shall be repaired
where so directed by the Engineer.
(d)
1
This finish shall be that obtained by first producing a Class

F2 surface finish with joint marks which form an approved
regular pattern to fit in with the appearance of the structure.
All projections shall then be removed, irregularities repaired
and the surface rubbed or treated to form a smooth finish of
uniform texture, appearance and colour. This surface finish
is required on all exposed formed surfaces unless a Class
F2 finish is specified.
6200-5
Unless specified to the contrary, steel forms may be used to

form surfaces with a Class F3 surface finish.
(e)
Board surface finish
This finish shall be that obtained by using tongue-andgroove timber boarding arranged in an approved regular
pattern. The finish is intended to be left as struck but surface
defects shall be remedied in accordance with Subclause
6208(b) and large fins trimmed where directed by the
Engineer.
(f)
Protecting the surfaces
The Contractor shall ensure that permanently exposed

concrete surfaces are protected from rust marks, spillage
and stains of all kinds and other damage during
construction.
6208 REMEDIAL
SURFACES
(a)
TREATMENT
OF
The surface shall be saturated with water for at least one

hour. Initial rubbing shall be done with a medium-coarse
carborundum stone, where a small amount of mortar, having
a sand and cement ratio equal to that of the concrete being
repaired, is used on the surface. Rubbing shall be
continued until all form marks, projections and irregularities
have been removed and a uniform surface has been
obtained. The paste produced by the rubbing shall be left in
place. The final rubbing shall be carried out with a fine
carborundum stone and water. This rubbing shall continue
until the entire surface is of a smooth, even texture and is
uniform in colour. The surface shall then be washed with a
brush to remove surplus paste and powder.
Where the concrete surfaces formed by sliding formwork
require treatment to achieve the surface finish specified for
the member, the concrete shall, as soon as the surfaces
under the formwork are exposed, be floated with rubberlined floats to the desired finish.
FORMED
6209
UNFORMED SURFACES : CLASSES OF FINISH
(a)
Class U1 surface finish (rough)
General
Agreement shall be reached between the Engineer and the

Contractor regarding any remedial treatment to be given
after the surfaces have been inspected immediately after
the formwork has been removed, which treatment shall be
carried out without delay. No surfaces may be treated before
inspection by the Engineer.
(b)
Engineer, rub down the exposed surfaces of the entire

structure or of any part of it as specified below.
Repairs to surface defects
Surface defects such as small areas of honeycombing,

cavities produced by form ties, large isolated blow-holes,
broken corner edges, etc, shall be repaired with mortar
having a cement and sand ratio equal to that of the concrete
being repaired.
This surface finish is required on those portions of bridge

decks or culvert decks which are to receive bituminous or
concrete surfacing or which are to be covered by backfilling
material.
Where the placing and compacting of the concrete have
been completed as specified in Clause 6407, the top surface
shall be screeded off with a template to the required crosssection and tamped with a tamping board to compact the
surface thoroughly and to bring mortar to the surface, so as
to leave the surface slightly rough but generally at the
required elevation.
(b)
For the repair of large or deep areas of honeycombing and
defects, special approved methods and techniques, such as
pneumatically applied mortar, pressure grouting, epoxy
bonding agents, etc, may be used.
Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, the extent of the
honeycombing or defects is of such a degree that doubt
exists about the effectiveness of repair work, the Contractor
shall at his own cost perform a load test in accordance with
Subclause 6414(b) to prove that the structural safety of the
repaired member has not been prejudiced, failing which, the
structure shall be rebuilt in part or in full at the Contractor's
cost.
Where the concrete has been damaged by adhesion to the
formwork panel, the cracked and loose concrete shall be
removed; or where the fresh concrete has lifted off at
construction joints, the crack shall be scraped out
immediately on both sides of the wall to a depth of at least
50 mm. The cavities so formed shall then be repaired as
described above.
(c)
Rubbing the surfaces
If the finish of exposed formed surfaces does not comply

with the requirements for uniformity of texture, appearance
and colour, the Contractor shall, when so instructed by the
6200-6
Class U2 surface finish (floated)
This surface finish is required on sidewalks; the tops of wing

walls and retaining walls; exposed concrete shoulders and
unsurfaced areas on bridge decks, and the inverts of box
culverts.
The surface shall first be given a Class U1 surface finish
and after the concrete has hardened sufficiently, it shall be
wood-floated to a uniform surface free from trowel marks.
For non-skid surfaces such as on sidewalks and bridge
decks, the surface shall then be given a broom finish. The
corrugations so produced shall be approximately 1.0 mm
deep, uniform of appearance and width and shall be
perpendicular to the centre line of the pavement.
(c)
Class U3 surface finish (smoothly finished)
This surface finish shall be required at bearing areas and

the tops of concrete railings. The surface shall first be given
a Class U1 surface finish, and after the concrete has
hardened sufficiently, it shall be floated with a steel float to
a smooth surface to within the dimensional tolerances
specified in Subclause 6803(h).
Rubbing with carborundum stone after the concrete has
hardened shall be allowed but under no circumstances will
plastering of the surface be permitted.
6210
Item
Unit
62.05 Permanent formwork:

Item
Unit
62.01 Formwork to provide

(class of finish
indicated as F1, F2,
F3 or board) surface
finish to (description
of member to which
applicable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
Item
Unit
62.02 Vertical formwork to

provide (class of finish
indicated as F1, F2, F3 or
board) surface finish to
(description of member to
which applicable) . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
Item
Unit
62.03 Horizontal formwork to

Item
Unit
62.04 Inclined formwork to

The unit of measurement shall be the square metre, and
only the actual area of formwork in contact with the finished
face of the concrete shall be measured. Formwork for the
different classes of finish shall be measured separately.
Formwork for construction joints shall be measured for
payment under Class F1 surface finish, but only formwork
for mandatory construction joints shall be measured for
payment.
procuring and furnishing all materials required, erecting the
falsework and formwork, constructing the forms, forming the
grooves, fillets, chamfers and stop-ends for construction
joints, treating and preparing the forms, all bolts, nuts, ties,
struts and stays, stripping and removing the formwork after
completion of the work, all labour, equipment and
incidentals, and rubbing and surface treatment. Payment of
80% of the amount due for formwork will be made when the
formwork has been removed, and payment of the remaining
20% will be made on approval of the concrete surface finish.
Note: Vertical and horizontal formwork shall be the
formwork of which inclination of the finishing surface in
relation to the horizontal level shall be larger and smaller
than 40E respectively. Inclined formwork shall be the
formwork described as such in the Schedule of Quantities.
(a)
To form voids of (diametre/size of void indicated)
in (description of member to
which applicable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(b)
Of (description of material and member to which
applicable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
concrete area formed with permanent formwork.
procuring and furnishing all the materials required, installing
the formwork, and labour, equipment and incidentals.
Item
Unit
62.06 Formwork to form open

joints (description of
member to which applicable, and location) . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
concrete area formed.
Surfaces formed prior to the construction of the final surface
for completing the joint, shall be measured under Items
62.01, 62.02, 62.03 or 62.04, as may be applicable.
procuring and furnishing all the materials required,
constructing the formwork and subsequently removing all
the material within the joint space, as well as labour,
equipment and incidentals. Payment for formwork to open
joints shall be made only after the forms and filler material
have been completely removed and approval of the surface
finish has been obtained.
Item
Unit

site for sliding formwork
operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lump sum
the establishment on the site and the subsequent removal
of the complete sliding-formwork assembly, special plant
and equipment, and incidentals for the sliding work, the cost
of which does not vary with the actual amount of sliding work
done.
which will become payable when the sliding-formwork
assembly, plant and equipment have been fully installed at
the first structural member on the site, and the remaining
25% will become payable after all sliding work has been
completed and the said items have been removed from the
site.
Item
Unit
62.08 Transporting to and setting up

the sliding formwork assembly at
(description of each structure) . . . . . number (No)
6200-7
The unit of measurement shall be the number of structures

to which the complete sliding-formwork assembly has to be
transported and set up in position ready to be
commissioned.
The unit of measurement shall be the metre height of each

structure formed by sliding formwork. The quantity
measured shall be the actual height of each structure
formed by the sliding technique.

costs involved in dismantling, transporting and erecting of
the complete sliding-formwork assembly.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for sliding,

instrumentation and monitoring, the maintenance of the
complete sliding-formwork assembly, plant and equipment,
supplying, installing and recovering the jack rods, floating,
repairing and treating the concrete surfaces, forming the
emergency construction joints, and all labour, equipment
and incidentals.
Item
Unit
62.09 Forming the concrete by sliding

formwork for (description of
each structure and class of
surface finish to exposed
surfaces indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
6200-8
SERIES 6000 :
STRUCTURES
SECTION 6300 :
STEEL REINFORCEMENT FOR

STRUCTURES
tensile couplers offered comply with the specified

requirements.
All mechanical couplers used shall be subject to the
CONTENTS
6303
6301
6302
6303
6304
6305
6306
6307
6308
6309
6310
SCOPE
MATERIALS
STORING THE MATERIALS
BENDING THE REINFORCING STEEL
SURFACE CONDITION
PLACING AND FIXING
COVER AND SUPPORTS
LAPS AND JOINTS
WELDING
6301
SCOPE
This Section covers the furnishing and placing of reinforcing

steel in concrete structures.
6302
MATERIALS
(a)
Steel bars
Steel reinforcing bars shall comply with the requirements of

SABS 920 or equivalent. For each consignment of steel
reinforcement delivered on the site, the Contractor shall
submit a certificate issued by a recognised testing authority
to confirm that the steel complies with the specified
requirements.
The type of bar required shall be indicated on the Drawings
by the symbols R, Y or Z in accordance with SABS 82 or
equivalent.
(b)
Welded steel fabric
Welded steel fabric shall comply with the requirements of

(c)
Reinforcing steel shall be stacked off the ground and, in

aggressive environments, shall be stored under cover.
6304
BENDING THE REINFORCING STEEL
Reinforcement shall be cut or cut and bent to the

dimensions shown on the bending schedules and in
accordance with SABS 82 or equivalent.
No flame-cutting of high-tensile steel bars shall be permitted
except when authorised.
Except as described below, all bars shall be bent cold and
bending shall be done slowly, a steady, even pressure being
exerted without jerking or impact.
If approved, the hot bending of bars of at least 32 mm in
diameter will be permitted, provided that the bars do not
depend on cold working for their strength. When hot bending
is approved, the bars shall be heated slowly to a cherry-red
heat (not exceeding 840C) and shall be allowed to cool
slowly in air after bending. Quenching with water shall not be
permitted.
Already bent reinforcing bars shall not be re-bent at the
same spot without authorisation.
6305
SURFACE CONDITION
When the concrete is placed around the reinforcing steel

and/or dowels, the reinforcing steel and/or dowels shall be
clean, free from mud, oil, grease, paint, loose rust, loose mill
scale or any other substance which could have an adverse
chemical effect on the steel or concrete, or which could
reduce the strength of bond.
Mechanical couplers
The tensile properties determined on a test sample with a

maximum gauge length of 610 mm, and which consists of
reinforcing bars butt-jointed by a mechanical coupler shall
comply with the following requirements:
(i)
When tested in accordance with the relevant
requirements of Clause 5.3 of SABS 920 or equivalent, the
tensile properties of the test sample shall show an
improvement of at least 10% on the requirements of Clause
3.7 of SABS 920 or equivalent.
(ii)
Where the test sample is subjected to a load equal
to 0.58 of the specified minimum yield force of the bar, the
elongation measured on the gauge length shall not exceed
the calculated theoretical elongation for a 610 mm length of
the bar, based on a stress of 0.58 of the specified minimum
yield stress of the bar and a Young's modulus of 200 GPa.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer test certificates
from a recognised testing authority to confirm that the
6306
PLACING AND FIXING
Reinforcement shall be positioned as shown on the

Drawings and shall be firmly secured in position within the
tolerance given in Subclause 6803(f) by being tied with
1.6 mm or 1.25 mm diameter annealed wire or by suitable
clips being used, or, where authorised, by tack welding.
Any cover and spacer blocks required to support the
reinforcement shall be as small as may be consistent with
their use and shall be of an approved material and design.
The concrete cover over the projecting ends of ties or
clamps shall comply with the specifications for concrete
cover over reinforcement detailed in Table 6306/1 (at the
end of the Section).
Where protruding bars are exposed to the elements for an
indefinite period, the bars shall be adequately protected
against corrosion and damage and shall be properly cleaned
before being permanently encased in concrete.
6300-1
In members which are formed with sliding formwork, spacer

ladders for placing and fixing the wall reinforcement shall be
used at spacings indicated on the Drawings or as prescribed
by the Engineer. The spacer ladders shall consist of two
bars 3.7 m in length with ties 4 mm in diameter welded to
them to resemble a ladder. The ties shall be spaced at
multiples of the horizontal bar spacing in the wall, and shall
be used to secure the horizontal reinforcement. The laps in
the horizontal reinforcement shall be staggered to ensure
that no part of two laps in any four consecutive layers lie in
the same vertical plane.
Flash butt welding shall be done only with the combination

of flashing, heating, upsetting and annealing to the
satisfaction of the Engineer, and only those machines which
control this cycle of operations automatically shall be used.
6307
Trial welding joints shall be made on the site in

circumstances similar to those which will govern during the
making of production welding joints by the person who will
be responsible for the production welding joints.
COVER AND SUPPORTS
The term "cover" in this context shall mean the minimum

thickness of concrete between the surface of the
reinforcement and the face of the concrete.
The minimum cover shall be as shown on the Drawings.
Where no cover is indicated, the minimum cover provided
shall be at least equal to the appropriate values shown in
Table 6306/1.
Metal-arc welding of reinforcement shall be done in

accordance with BS 5135, and with the recommendations of
the reinforcement manufacturers, subject to approval by the
Engineer and the satisfactory performance of trial joints.
Hot-rolled high-yield-stress steel shall be preheated to
between 240C and 280C and low-hydrogen electrodes
only may be used.
Other methods of welding eg resistance welding, may be

used subject to approval by the Engineer and to their
satisfactory performance in trial joints.
Welded joints shall be full-strength welds and their strength
shall be assessed by destruction tests on samples selected
by the Engineer.
The cover shall be increased by the expected depth of any

surface treatment, eg when concrete is bush hammered or
when rebates are provided.
6310
Additional cover as prescribed by the Engineer shall be

provided if porous aggregates are used.
Item
The cover blocks or spacers required for ensuring that the

specified cover is obtained shall be of a material, shape and
design acceptable to the Engineer.
Concrete spacer blocks shall be made with 5 mm maximum
sized aggregate and shall be of the same strength and
material source as those of the surrounding concrete. The
blocks shall be formed in specially manufactured moulds
and the concrete compacted on a vibratory table, and cured
under water for a period of at least 14 days, all to the
Unit
63.01 Steel reinforcement for:

(a)
(Description of portion
of structure to which applicable):
(i)
Mild-steel bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tonne (t)
(ii)
bars (type indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tonne (t)
(iii)
Ties cast into spacer blocks shall not extend deeper into the
spacer block than half the depth of the spacer block.
(b)
Etc for other structures
or parts of structures
The Contractor shall provide stools as shown on the

Drawings, or where they are not detailed on the Drawings,
wherever the Engineer requires them to be installed. The
stools shall be suitably robust, and fixed securely so that
they can not swivel or move. The stools shall have
sufficient strength to perform the required functions, taking
into account amongst others temporary loads such as the
weight of workmen and wet concrete, and forces caused by
vibrators and other methods of compacting the concrete.

reinforcing steel in place in accordance with the Drawings or
as authorised.
6308
LAPS AND JOINTS
Laps, joints, splices and mechanical couplings shall be

applied only by the specified methods and at the positions
shown on the Drawings or as authorised.
6309
WELDING
Reinforcement shall be welded only where shown on the

Drawings or as authorised.
6300-2
The unit of measurement for welded steel fabric shall be the

kilogram of welded steel fabric in place, the quantity of
which shall be calculated from the area of the mesh used in
accordance with the Drawings or as authorised.
Ties, stools and other steel used for positioning the
reinforcing steel shall be measured as steel reinforcement
under the appropriate Subitem.
supplying, delivering, cutting, bending, welding, trial weld
joints, placing and fixing the steel reinforcement, including
all tying wire, spacers and waste.
Item
Unit
Item
Unit
63.02 Mechanical couplers

(type of coupler and
diameter of bar indicated) . . . . . . . . number (No)
63.03 Spacer ladders for

(description of part of
structure to which applicable) . . . . . . . . tonne (t)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of mechanical

couplers for each bar diameter installed.
The unit of measurement for spacer ladders shall be the

tonne of steel in place in accordance with the Drawings or
as authorised.

supplying all the material, preparing and modifying the bar
ends to be joined, and all tools, equipment and labour
required for completing the work.

supplying, delivering, cutting, bending, welding, placing and
fixing the ladders, including all tying wire, spacers and
waste.
6300-3
Table 6306/1
Minimum concrete cover over reinforcement
Min cover (mm)
Condition of exposure
1.
MODERATE
Description of member/surface to which the

cover applies
1.1
Concrete surfaces above

ground level and
protected against
1.2
alternately wet and dry
conditions caused by
water, rain and sea-water 1.3
spray.
1.4
1.5
20
25
30
40
50
)
)
)
)
) 50
)
)
)
)
45
40
30
25
NA
NA
NA
30
30
NA
NA
NA
30
55
50
30
50
30
50
40
30
45
35
50
45
40
35
NA
NA
NA
30
30
NA
NA
NA
30
55
50
30
50
40
30
50
40
30
45
35
(i) Wet cast against casing

(ii) Wet cast against soil
(iii) Dry cast against soil
50
)
) 75
50
50
50
50
75
75
75
75
All exposed surfaces of structures within 30 km

from the sea
Surfaces in rivers polluted by industries
Cast in situ piles, wet cast against casings
)
) NA
)
NA
NA
NA
60
50
NA
NA
80
80
Surfaces in contact with sea water of industrially

polluted water
Surfaces in contact with marshy conditions
)
) NA
)
NA
NA
65
55
Surfaces protected by the superstructure, viz the

sides of beams and the undersides of slabs and
other surfaces not likely to be moistened by
condensation
Surfaces protected by a waterproof cover or
permanent formwork not likely to be subjected
to weathering or corrosion
Enclosed surfaces
Structures/members permanently submerged
Railway structures:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
2.
SEVERE
Concrete surfaces
exposed to hard rain and
alternately wet and dry
conditions
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
3.
VERY SEVERE
3.1
Concrete surfaces
3.2
exposed to aggressive
3.3
water, sea-water spray or a
saline atmosphere
4.
EXTREME
4.1
Concrete surfaces
4.2
exposed to the abrasive
action of sea water or very
aggressive water
6300-4
Surfaces of precast elements not in contact

with soil
Surfaces protected by permanent formwork
not likely to be subjected to weathering or
corrosion
Surfaces in contact with ballast
All other surfaces
All exposed surfaces

Surfaces on which condensation takes place
Surfaces in contact with soil
Surfaces permanently under running water
Railway structures:
(i)
2.6
Class of concrete
Surfaces of precast elements not in contact

with soil
Surfaces protected by permanent formwork
not likely to be subjected to weathering or
corrosion
Surfaces in contact with ballast
All other surfaces
)
)
) NA
)
Cast in situ piles:
SERIES 6000 :
STRUCTURES
SECTION 6400 :
CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES
CONTENTS
6401
6402
6403
6404
6405
6406
6407
6408
6409
6410
6411
6412
6413
6414
6415
6416
SCOPE
MATERIALS
CONCRETE QUALITY
MEASURING THE MATERIALS
MIXING
PLACING AND COMPACTING
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
CURING AND PROTECTING
ADVERSE WEATHER CONDITIONS
PIPES AND CONDUITS
APPLIED LOADING
PRECAST CONCRETE
DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL OF EXISTING
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
6401
SCOPE
This Section covers the manufacture, transport, placing and

testing of concrete used in the Works where plain,
reinforced or prestressed concrete is specified.
6402
MATERIALS
(a)
Cement
Cement used for concrete shall be any of the following:
(1)
For use in prestressed concrete, concrete bridge
decks and slender columns the shrinkage of both fine and
coarse aggregate shall not exceed 130% of that of the
reference aggregate.
(2)
For use in other reinforced concrete members the
shrinkage of the fine aggregate shall not exceed 175% and
of the coarse aggregate 150% of that of the reference
aggregate.
(3)
For use in mass concrete substructures and
unreinforced concrete head walls and wing walls, the
shrinkage of both the fine and coarse aggregate shall not
exceed 200% of that of the reference aggregate.
Where there is any doubt about the shrinkage
characteristics of aggregates, the Contractor shall submit a
certificate by an approved laboratory which gives the
shrinkage characteristics of the aggregate.
The drying shrinkage of concrete samples made from each
of the required three concrete mixtures for preparing the
compressive-strength and flexural-strength samples shall
not exceed 0.04%.
Drying-shrinkage tests shall be
conducted in accordance with SABS 1085 or equivalent.
(ii)
The flakiness index of the stone as determined by
TMH 1 Method B3 shall not exceed 35%.
(iii)
Aggregates shall not contain any deleterious
amounts of organic materials such as grass, timber or
similar materials.
(iv)
Where there is any danger of a particular
combination of aggregate and cement giving rise to a
harmful alkali-aggregate reaction, the particular combination
shall be tested in accordance with the testing method as
described in Clause 7105, and, where the result points to
such reaction, either the aggregate or the cement or both
shall be replaced so that an acceptable combination may be
obtained.
(i)
Ordinary Portland cement or rapid-hardening
Portland cement complying with the requirements of SABS
471 or equivalent.
(v)
The fineness modulus of the fine aggregate shall not
vary by more than 0.2 from the approved modulus.
(ii)
Portland blast-furnace cement complying with the
(c)
(iii)
Ordinary Portland cement 15 or rapid-hardening
Portland cement 15 which complies with the requirements
of SABS 831 or equivalent.
(iv)
Sulphate-resistant cement, but only where shown on
the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer.
(v)
In prestressed concrete members or units the use of
Portland blast-furnace cement will not be permitted. A
50/50 mixture of ordinary Portland cement and ground
granulated blast-furnace slag may be used only if authorised
in the Project Specifications or by the Engineer, in writing.
(b)
Aggregates
Both coarse aggregate (stone) and fine aggregate (sand)

equivalent, subject to the following:
(i)
The drying shrinkage of both the fine and coarse
aggregate when tested in accordance with SABS 836 or
equivalent shall not exceed the following limits:
Plums
Plums used in concrete shall comply with the following

requirements:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(d)
The plums shall be clean, durable and inert.

The aggregate crushing value may not exceed 25%.
The mass of each plum shall be between 15 kg and
55 kg.
No dimension of any plum shall be less than
150 mm or exceed 500 mm.
Water
Water shall be clean and free from detrimental

concentrations of acids, alkalis, salts, sugar and other
organic or chemical substances that could impair the
durability and strength of the concrete or the imbedded
steel. The Contractor shall prove the suitability of the water
by way of tests conducted by an approved laboratory. The
water used for concrete shall comply with the requirements
in Clause 7113 unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
For reinforced and prestressed concrete the chloride content
of the mixing water shall not exceed 500 mg/R when tested
in accordance with SABS 202 or equivalent.
6400-1
(e)
Admixtures
Admixtures shall not be used in concrete without the

approval of the Engineer, who may require that tests be
conducted before the admixtures be used to prove their
suitability.
Admixtures, if their use is allowed, shall comply with the
following requirements:
(i)
Admixtures shall be used only in liquid form and shall
be batched in solution in the mixing water by mechanical
batcher capable of dispensing the admixture in quantities
accurate to within 5% of the required quantity.
(ii)
All admixtures shall comply with the requirements of
ASTM C-494 or AASHTO M-194 and shall be of an
approved brand and type.
(iii)
Air entraining agents shall comply with the
requirements of ASTM C-260 or AASHTO M-154.
(iv)
(f)
Admixtures shall not contain any chlorides.
Curing agents
Curing agents shall be tested in accordance with ASTM

C-156 and shall comply with the requirements of ASTM
C-309, except that the loss of water within 72 hours shall not
exceed 0.40 kg/m2. Approved curing agents only shall be
used.
be tipped on the concrete apron slab. The storage bin shall

have a concrete floor of 150 mm thickness.
(c)
The storage capacity provided and the quantity of material

stored (whether cement, aggregates or water) shall be
sufficient to ensure that no interruptions to the progress of
the work will be occasioned by any lack of materials.
(d)
(a)
Cement
Cement stored on the site shall be kept under cover which

provides adequate protection against moisture and other
factors which may promote deterioration of the cement.
When the cement is supplied in bags, the bags shall be
closely and neatly stacked to a height not exceeding 12
bags and arranged so that they will not be in contact with
the ground or the walls, and can be used in the order in
which they were delivered to the site.
Cement in bulk shall be stored in waterproof containers so
designed as to prevent any dead spots from forming, and
the cement drawn for use shall be measured by mass.
Deteriorated material
Deteriorated or contaminated or otherwise damaged

material shall not be used in concrete. Such material shall
be removed from the site without delay.
6404
CONCRETE QUALITY
(a)
General
Concrete shall comply with the requirements for strength

concrete or prescribed-mix concrete, as specified in
Subclauses 6404(b) and (c) below.
The total alkaline content (Na2O equivalent) of the concrete
shall be limited taking into account the degree of reactivity
as specified in Clause 7105.
(b)
6403
Storage capacity
Strength concrete
The Contractor shall be responsible for the design of the

concrete mix and for the proportions of the constituent
materials necessary for producing concrete which complies
with the requirements specified below for each class of
concrete.
The class of concrete is indicated by the characteristic 28day cube crushing strength in MPa and the maximum size
of coarse aggregate in the mix, eg Class 30/38 concrete
means concrete with a characteristic cube crushing strength
of 30 MPa after 28 days and a maximum sized coarse
aggregate of 38 mm.
The aggregate size shall be selected in accordance with
Cement shall not be kept in storage for longer than eight

weeks without the Engineer's permission, and different
brands and/or types of the same brand of cement shall be
stored separately.
The characteristic cube crushing strength of strength

concrete shall be of any strength from 15 MPa, in
increments of 5 MPa, up to 60 MPa, as indicated on the
Drawings or in the Schedule of Quantities or as may be
prescribed by the Engineer. The strengths preferred are 15,
20, 25, 30, 40, 50 and 60 MPa.
(b)
The cement content for any class of concrete shall not

exceed 500 kg per cubic metre of concrete.
Aggregates
Aggregates of different nominal sizes shall be stored

separately and in such a manner as to avoid segregation
occurring. Intermixing of different materials and
contamination by foreign matter shall be avoided.
Aggregates exposed to a marine environment shall be
covered to protect them from salt contamination.
Where for reasons of durability or other considerations

concrete is designated by the prefix W eg Class W30/19,
such designations shall denote concrete having a
cementitious content not less than and a water:cement ratio
not exceeding the limits specified in the Project
Specifications.
Where concrete is batched on site, the aggregates shall be

stored in bins with a 3 m wide concrete apron slab
constructed around the outer edge of the aggregate
stockpile area to prevent contamination during the process
of tipping and hoisting the aggregate. The aggregates shall
In such cases, characteristic cube compressive strengths

should be:
6400-2
(i)
the specified 28-day

compressive strength, or
characteristic
cube
(ii)
a characteristic cube
corresponding to the
water:cement ratio, or
compressive strength
designated maximum
(iii)
a characteristic cube compressive strength

corresponding to the designated cementitious
content.
Table 6404/1
Nominal mixes
Mix
Constituent or property
(i)
(ii)
a statement regarding the test results, which shall be

furnished by an approved laboratory; or
an authoritative report on previous use of and
experience in regard to the material.
The actual mix proportions used as well as any changes

thereto shall be subject to the Engineer's approval, but such
approval shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for producing concrete with the specified
properties.
50
50
50
0.46
0.33
0.26
Max total quantity of water

(R)
62
46
37
Estimated average 28day compressive strength

(MPa)
17
24
(e)
Consistency and workability
The concrete shall be of suitable workability without the

excessive use of water so that it can be readily compacted
into the corners of the formwork and around the
reinforcement, tendons and ducts without the material
segregating.
Slump measurements obtained in accordance with the test
method described in TMH-1 Method D3 on concrete used
in the Works shall fall within the ranges specified in Table
6404/2.
Table 6404/2
Slump values
Type of construction
The Contractor is cautioned that the quality of cement may

vary considerably from consignment to consignment so as
to necessitate adjustments in the cement content of mixes.
In order to ensure a uniform quality of concrete, the
Contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer the data
regarding the relevant cement quality for each consignment
with a view to ascertaining the required adjustment in the
cement content. This information shall be submitted to the
Engineer.
(c)
1:4:4
Total quantity of
aggregate (m3)
Where any change occurs in the material sources, the

aggregate sizes, or any other components of the concrete,
the above procedure shall be repeated.
Evidence shall be in the form of:
1:5:5
Cement (kg)
Before starting with any concrete work on the site, the

Contractor shall submit, for approval, samples of the
constituent materials of the concrete and a statement of the
mix proportions which he proposes to use for each class of
concrete indicated in the Schedule of Quantities.
The samples submitted shall be accompanied by evidence

that they comply with the requirements for the various
materials specified. The statement regarding the mix
proportions shall be accompanied by evidence establishing
that concrete made from the materials in the proposed
proportions will have the specified properties.
1:7:7
Max
slump
(mm)*
75
Min
slump
(mm)*
25
Concrete nosings and prefabricated units
75
50
Mass concrete
100
25
Prestressed concrete
Reinforced concrete footings,

125
50
cast in situ piles (except drycast piles), slabs, beams and
columns
* Where high-frequency vibrators are used, the values
above shall be reduced by one-third.
Prescribed-mix concrete
The Contractor shall submit samples of every constituent of

the concrete in accordance with the appropriate provisions
of Section 7200 and Subclause 6404(b) for approval.
The nominal mixes for prescribed-mix concrete for which no
strength requirements have been laid down are shown in
Table 6404/1.
(f)
The class of concrete is indicated by the mix and the

maximum size of the coarse aggregate in the mix, eg Class
1:7:7/38 concrete shall mean concrete with a prescribed mix
in a volume ratio of one part of cement : seven parts of sand
: seven parts of stone, with a nominal stone size of 38 mm.
The total water soluble sulphate content of the concrete mix,

expressed as SO, shall not exceed 4% (m/m) of the
cementitious binder content of the mix. The sulphate
content shall be calculated as the total from the various
constituents of the mix using the following test methods:
(d)
Bleeding
The concrete shall be so proportioned with suitable

materials that bleeding is not excessive.
Sulphate content
Cementitious binder :
Aggregates :
Water :
SABS 741 or equivalent

6400-3
(g)
Pumped concrete
Where pumping of the concrete is approved by the

Engineer, the concrete mix to be pumped shall be so
designed that:
(i)
settlement will not exceed 125 mm;
(ii)
graded aggregate and suitable admixtures be used,

wherever necessary, with a view to improving the
pumpability of the mix; and
(iii)
its shrinkage capacity shall not be excessively higher

than that of ordinary concrete mixes.
6405
MEASURING THE MATERIALS
(a)
Cement
Where cement is supplied in standard bags, the bags shall

be assumed to contain 50 kg. All cement taken from bulkstorage containers and from partly used bags shall be
batched by mass, accurate to within 3% of the required
mass.
(b)
MIXING
(a)
General
Mixing the material for concrete shall be conducted by an

experienced operator. Unless otherwise authorised, mixing
shall be carried out in a mechanical batch-mixer of an
approved type which will be capable of producing a uniform
distribution of ingredients throughout the batch.
(b)
Aggregates
All aggregates for strength concrete shall be measured

separately by mass, except as otherwise provided in this
Clause, accurate to within 3% of the required quantity.
Aggregates for strength concrete may be volume batched
subject to the approval of the Engineer, and to the quantity
of cement being increased, at the cost of the Contractor, by
25 kg per cubic metre of concrete, over and above the
quantity which would have been necessary were the
aggregate to have been batched by mass.
The sequence of charging the ingredients shall be subject

to approval by the Engineer, and, unless otherwise
instructed, the same sequence of charging the ingredients
shall be maintained.
The volume of the mixed material by batch shall not exceed
the volume recommended by the manufacturer of the mixer.
(c)
Mixing and discharging
The period of mixing shall be measured from the time when

all the materials are in the drum until the commencement of
discharge.
The mixing period for the materials shall be 90 seconds and
may be reduced only if the Engineer is satisfied that the
reduced mixing time will produce concrete with the same
strength and uniformity as concrete mixed for 90 seconds.
The reduced mixing time, however, shall be not less than 50
seconds or the manufacturer's recommended mixing time,
whichever is the longer. A suitable timing device shall be
attached to the mixer to ensure that the minimum mixing
time for the materials has been complied with.
The first batch to be run when starting with a clean mixer,
shall contain only 2/3 of the required quantity of coarse
aggregate to make provision for "coating" the mixer drum.
Discharge shall be so carried out that no segregation of the
materials will occur in the mix. The mixer shall be emptied
completely before it is recharged with fresh materials.
(d)
Aggregates for prescribed-mix concrete as specified in
Subclause 6404(c) may be measured separately by volume.
Batching boxes for volume batching shall be filled without
any tamping, ramming or consolidating the material (other
than that occurring naturally during the filling of the
container), and shall be screeded off level with their topmost
edges.
Any adjustment to the volume shall be made by
supplementary containers of a suitable size being used.
Adjustments to the volume, by the incomplete filling of
batching boxes to marks on their inside faces will not be
permitted.
Fine aggregate shall be tested for bulking at the beginning
of and halfway through each concreting shift, and
adjustment shall be made to the batch volume to give the
true volume required.
The measurement of cement in gauge boxes will not be
permitted and volume batching shall be so planned as to
use full bags of cement.
6400-4
Charging the mixer
Water
The mixing water for each batch shall be measured, either

by mass or by volume, accurate to within 3% of the required
quantity. The quantity of water added to the mix shall be
adjusted to make allowance for moisture in the aggregates.
(c)
6406
Maintaining and cleaning the mixer
If the mixer has stopped running for a period in excess of 30

minutes, it shall be thoroughly cleaned out, particular
attention being given to the removal of any build-up of
materials in the drum, in the loader, and around the blades
or paddles. Worn or bent blades and paddles shall be
replaced.
Before any concrete is mixed, the inner surfaces of the
mixer shall be cleaned and all hardened concrete shall be
removed.
(e)
Standby mixer
When sections are cast where it is important for the casting

to continue without interruption, a standby mixer shall be
held in readiness to run on 15 minutes notice should the
stock mixers break down.
(f)
Ready-mixed concrete
Where ready-mixed concrete is delivered at the site, the

requirements of SABS 878 or equivalent shall have priority
over the requirements specified in this Section should
inconsistencies occur.
(ii)
no plum laid shall have a dimension exceeding one

third of the smallest dimension of the concrete in any
plane, and
(iii)
each plum is surrounded by at least 75 mm of

concrete.
Placing under water
6407
PLACING AND COMPACTING
(c)
(a)
General
Placing under water shall be allowed only in exceptional

circumstances where it is not feasible to dewater the
location before the concrete is placed. No concrete shall be
placed in running water.
Concrete shall be transported and placed in a manner that

will prevent segregation or loss of constituent materials or
the contamination of the concrete.
Concrete shall not be placed in any part of the Works until
the Engineer's approval has been given. If concreting is not
started within 24 hours of approval having been given,
approval shall again be obtained from the Engineer.
Concreting operations shall be carried out only during
daylight hours unless proper lighting arrangements have
been made and the lights are in working order by noon.
Workmen shall not be allowed to work double shifts and the
Contractor shall provide a fresh team for night shifts.
Placing and compacting the concrete shall at all times be
under the direct supervision of an experienced concrete
supervisor.
Once the casting of concrete has begun, it shall be carried
out in a continuous process between construction joints.
Concrete shall be placed within 60 minutes from the start of
mixing. These times may be extended by the Engineer
where a retarding admixture has been used. All excavations
and other contact surfaces of an absorbent nature such as
timber formwork shall be damp but no standing water shall
be permitted to remain on these surfaces. The formwork
shall be clean on the inside.
Water quality, marine life or any other sensitive environment
shall not be adversely affected in any way.
(b)
Placing
Whenever possible, concrete shall be deposited vertically

into its final position. Where chutes are used, their length
and slope shall be such as not to cause segregation, and
suitable spouts and baffles shall be provided at the lower
end to minimise segregation. The displacement of concrete
by vibration instead of by direct placing shall be done only
when approved by the Engineer.
Care shall be taken when casting bridge decks of a
substantial thickness to avoid layering of the concrete, and
the entire thickness shall be placed in one pass. Fresh
concrete shall not be placed against concrete which has
been in position for more than 30 minutes unless a
construction joint has been formed or unless a retarding
additive has been used in the concrete.
The pumping of concrete shall be subject to approval by the
Engineer. Aluminium pipes shall not be used for this
purpose.
In plain concrete with a thickness of not less than 300 mm,
plums may, if approved, be included to displace concrete for
up to 20% of the total volume, provided that (i)
the plums are spread evenly throughout the

concrete;
Underwater concrete shall be placed by means of tremies.

Full details of the method proposed by the Contractor shall
be submitted in advance for approval. Placing by skip or
pipeline will also be considered in certain circumstances.
During concreting by tremie, the pipe shall be kept filled with
concrete at all times to prevent air and water form entering
the tremie. When the tremie is charged, an approved sliding
plug shall be used. Once concreting has begun by tremie,
the discharge end of the tremie shall be kept well below the
surface of the concrete. Should this seal be broken, the
tremie shall be lifted and plugged before concreting is
recommenced. Distribution of concrete by lateral movement
of the tremie will not be permitted.
The concrete mix to be placed underwater shall be specially
designed and approved for this purpose to ensure good
flowability, plasticity and cohesion. Increased sand and
cement contents over those of normal mixes will usually be
required.
(d)
Compaction
Concrete shall be fully compacted by approved means

during and immediately after placing. It shall be thoroughly
worked against the formwork, around reinforcement bars,
tendons, ducts and embedded fittings and into corners to
form a solid mass free from voids.
The concrete shall be free from honeycombing and planes
of weakness, and successive layers of the same lift shall be
thoroughly bonded together.
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, concrete shall
be compacted by means of vibrators. Internal vibrators shall
be capable of producing not less than 10 000 cycles per
minute and external vibrators not less than 3 000 cycles per
minute. Sufficient standby vibrators shall be kept available
in case of breakdowns.
Vibration shall be applied by experienced labourers, and
over-vibration resulting in segregation, surface water and
leakage shall be avoided. Contact with reinforcement and
formwork shall, in so far as is practicable, be avoided when
internal vibrators are used. Concrete shall not be subjected
to disturbance by vibration within 4 to 24 hours of it having
been compacted.
Whenever vibration is applied externally, the design of the
formwork and positioning of vibrators shall be such as to
ensure efficient compaction and avoidance of surface
blemishes.
Special attention shall be given to the compaction of
concrete in the anchorage zones and behind the anchor
plates and in all places where high concentrations of
reinforcing steel or cables occur.
6400-5
Where the placing and compaction of concrete is difficult, a

mix containing smaller sized aggregate may be used but
only with the approval of the Engineer and after a mix
containing such aggregate has been designed and tested.
and leave a sound, irregular surface. The roughened surface

shall be washed with clean water to remove all laitance, dirt
and loose particles.
Surface retarding agents may be used only with the
(e)
Requirements in respect of sliding formwork
Where sliding formwork is used, the following additional

requirements shall apply:
(i)
The Contractor shall take all the necessary
measures to ensure the continuity of operations. All the
necessary lighting and standby equipment for mixing,
hoisting, placing and compacting shall be provided and all
the materials required for completing each structure shall be
ready on the site before casting commences.
(ii)
Concrete shall be cast in uniform layers in the
formwork so that the level of the top surface of the concrete
differs by no more than 250 mm between any two points in
the formwork. In addition, the top level of the concrete shall
never be so low down in the formwork as will cause
structural instability in the formwork. The working platform
shall be kept clean and no concrete which has dried out in
part may be swept into the formwork.
(iii)
The concrete shall be compacted during and
immediately after placing. Care shall be taken not to
damage or disturb previously placed concrete. To ensure
the proper bonding of successive layers, not more than one
hour shall elapse between the placing of successive layers
except where an approved admixture has been applied, in
which case the delay may be amended in consideration of
such circumstances.
(iv)
The slump of concrete may be up to 150 mm should
the approved method of sliding so require.
6408
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
(a)
General
Concreting shall be carried out continuously up to the

construction joints shown on the working drawings or as
approved, except that if, because of an emergency (such as
breakdown of the mixing plant or the occurrence of
unsuitable weather), concreting has to be interrupted, a
construction joint shall be formed at the place of stoppage
and in the manner which will least impair the durability,
appearance, and proper functioning of the concrete.
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the exact position
of horizontal construction joints shall be marked on the
formwork by means of grout checks in order to obtain truly
horizontal joints.
Stub columns, stub walls and stays on footings shall be cast
integrally with the footings and not afterwards, even where
another class of concrete is being used.
(b)
Preparing the surfaces
When the concrete has set and while it is still green, the
surface film and all loose material shall be removed, without
disturbing the aggregate, by means of a water jet assisted
by light brushing to expose the aggregate and leave a
sound, irregular surface. Where this is not possible, the
surface film shall be removed after the concrete has
hardened, by mechanical means appropriate to the degree
of hardness of the concrete so as to expose the aggregate
6400-6
(c)
Placing fresh concrete at construction joints
Where fresh concrete is placed the same day as that on

which the construction joint was formed, the fresh concrete
shall be cast directly against the face of the construction
joint.
When concreting recommences a day or more after the
construction joint has been formed, the following procedure
shall be followed:
(i)
The construction joint shall be kept constantly wet for
a period of at least six hours. The surface shall be in a
saturated, surface dry condition when concreting has to
recommence.
(ii)
Any dirt, excess water and loose particles shall be
removed prior to reconcreting being started.
(iii)
For horizontal construction joints a 25 mm thick
concrete layer of the same grade of concrete made richer by
reducing the coarse aggregate content by 25% shall be
placed on the joint plane immediately before concreting.
(iv)
For vertical construction joints the fresh concrete
shall be placed against a surface prepared in accordance
with Subclause 6408(b), which is in a saturated, surface-dry
condition.
Epoxy resins specially designed for bonding old concrete to
new shall be used at construction joints where so specified.
The preparation of the construction joint surface and the
application of the epoxy resin shall be strictly in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations and the
Engineer's instructions. The actual brand and type of resin
used shall be subject to the Engineer's approval.
6409
CURING AND PROTECTING
Formwork shall be retained in position for the appropriate

times given in Clause 6206, and, as soon as may be
practicable, all exposed concrete surfaces shall be protected
from loss of moisture by one or more of the following
methods:
(a)
Retaining formwork in place for the full curing period.
(b)
Ponding the exposed surfaces with water, except
where atmospheric temperatures are low, ie less than 5C.
(c)
Covering it with sand or mats made from a moistureretaining material, and keeping the covering constantly wet.
(d)
Constantly spraying the entire area of the exposed
surfaces with water (only on surfaces where sand cover or
ponding is impossible).
(e)
Covering with a waterproof or plastic sheeting firmly
anchored at the edges.
(f)
Using an approved curing compound applied in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, except
that, where the surface has to be subsequently
waterproofed, coated or gunited, this method may not be

used.
(g)
Steam curing the concrete (precast units).
The method of curing adopted shall be subject to the

Engineer's approval and shall not cause staining,
contamination, or marring of the surface of the concrete.
measures include spraying aggregate stockpiles with water

to promote cooling down by evaporation and, where
feasible, shading the stockpiles and the area where
concreting is carried out.
Curing shall commence
immediately after concrete has been placed to prevent an
excessive loss of moisture.
(c)
The curing period shall be continuous for at least seven
days for concrete made with ordinary Portland cement or
ordinary Portland cement 15, rapid-hardening Portland
cement or rapid-hardening Portland cement 15, and at least
10 days if Portland blast-furnace cement or a 50/50 mixture
of Portland cement and ground granulated blast-furnace
slag is used. When the temperature of concrete falls below
5C, these minimum curing periods shall be extended by the
period during which the temperature of the concrete was
below 5C.
When sliding formwork is used, the concrete shall be
protected against the weather and rapid drying out by
means of a 4 m wide skirt attached to the lower perimeter of
the formwork and hanging over the working platform. The
skirt shall consist of hessian in summer months and of
canvas or other suitable material in winter. The skirt shall be
weighted at the bottom to prevent it flapping in windy
conditions.
The concrete shall be cured by means of a fog spray to
keep it wet constantly for the periods stated above or until a
curing compound is applied. Wetting the concrete by
spraying shall be by means of a fixed spraybar along the full
length of the sliding formwork. The spraybar shall be
connected to a suitable high-pressure water supply. Wetting
shall be discontinued when the ambient air temperature
drops below 5C, and care shall be taken by the Contractor
to ensure that the water will not erode the surface of the
fresh concrete.
6410
ADVERSE WEATHER CONDITIONS
(a)
Cold weather
Concrete shall not be placed during falling temperatures

when the ambient air temperature falls below 7C or during
rising temperatures when the ambient air temperature is
below 3C. When concrete is placed at air temperatures
below 5C the concrete temperature shall not be below
10C, for which purpose heating of the water and/or the
aggregate shall be permitted. The Contractor shall make all
the necessary arrangements for heating the material.
Heated water and aggregate shall first be mixed and the
cement shall then be added only while the temperature is
below 30C.
The temperature of placed concrete shall not be allowed to
fall below 5C until the concrete has attained a strength of
at least 5 MPa, and the Contractor shall be responsible for
all protective measures necessary to this end. All concrete
damaged by frost or by the formation of ice in the concrete
shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at this own
expense.
(b)
Hot weather
When the ambient air temperature exceeds 30C during

concreting, the Contractor shall take measures to control the
temperature of the concrete ingredients so that the
temperature of the placed concrete will not exceed 30C
unless otherwise determined by the Engineer. Such
Precautionary measures for using

formwork
sliding
During sliding operations in cold weather, the water only, or

the water and the aggregate, shall be heated to ensure that
the concrete temperature will not drop below 10C until it
has attained a strength of 5 MPa.
During cold weather the rate of sliding shall be suitably
decreased to ensure sufficient strength in the concrete
which leaves the bottom of the formwork.
6411
PIPES AND CONDUITS
No pipes and conduits other than those shown on the

Drawings shall be embedded in the concrete without the
Engineer's approval. The clear space between such pipes
or between such pipes and any reinforcing steel shall be at
least 40 mm or the maximum size of the aggregate plus
5 mm, whichever is the greater. The thickness of the
concrete cover over pipes and fittings shall be at least
25 mm.
The ends of all ferrules used for bracing formwork shall be
neatly finished off to the details shown on the Drawings.
Where no details are given on the Drawings, ferrules shall
be cut back to a depth of at least the specified cover, and
the holes shall be filled in with mortar and finished off flush
with the concrete surface.
6412
APPLIED LOADING
No load shall be applied to any part of a structure until the

specified curing period has expired, after which applied
loading shall be allowed only when approved by the
Engineer. The Engineer's decision will be based on the type
of load to be applied, the age of the concrete, the magnitude
of stress induced and the propping of the structure.
No structure shall be opened to traffic until test cubes made
from the concrete in all parts of the structure have attained
the specified minimum 28-day compressive strength.
6413
PRECAST CONCRETE
This Clause applies to all reinforced and prestressed

concrete members other than precast concrete piles,
culverts and pipes in so far as they are dealt with separately
elsewhere in these Specifications.
All precast members shall be manufactured in accordance
with the requirements specified for cast in situ members in
so far as these requirements are relevant. In addition, the
following shall apply:
(a)
The Contractor shall take all necessary safety and
precautionary measures during the handling and erection of
precast members and for ensuring the stability of members
as positioned and prior to their being cast in.
6400-7
(b)
Where precast concrete members have not been
manufactured on the site, the manufacturer shall keep and
make available to the Engineer complete records of all the
concrete mixes and strength tests pertaining to the
members cast. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in
advance of the dates on which members are to be cast so
that arrangements for inspecting and testing the precast
members can be made.
(c)
For the purposes of identification, all members shall
be marked with paint in neat lettering with the member
number shown on the Drawings or as agreed on and an
identification number relating to the manufacturing records.
Letters etc shall be so positioned as not to be visible when
the structural member is placed in its final position in the
completed structure.
(d)
All precast members which have been chipped,
cracked, warped or otherwise damaged to the extent that
such damage will, in the opinion of the Engineer, prejudice
the appearance, function or structural integrity of the
members shall be rejected or, where so allowed, repaired to
6414
QUALITY OF WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS
(a)
Criteria for compliance with the requirements
Routine inspection and quality control will be done by the

Engineer as specified in Section 7200. The criteria for
compliance with the requirements specified for 28-day
characteristic compressive strength shall be as specified in
Clause 7205 for full acceptance, and as specified in Clause
7207 for conditional acceptance. The re-submission of
concrete lots on the basis of cores for full or conditional
acceptance shall not be allowed. The Contractors attention
is drawn to Clause 7208. If the Engineer is satisfied that the
requirements of the Contractors process control have been
met, the Engineer may decide at his discretion to use the
Contractors test results in the evaluation of the concrete.
(b)
Procedure in the event of non-compliance with

the requirements
Any lot represented by test cubes failing to comply with the

criteria specified for the characteristic strength shall be
rejected, or the Engineer may at his discretion allow the
following tests to be conducted in order to decide whether
the concrete may be left in position at further reduced
payment:
(i)
The Engineer may allow the elements or units
concerned to be cured for an additional period not
exceeding 56 days. Thereafter the Contractor shall drill
cores in accordance with SABS 865 or equivalent, and the
Engineer will evaluate these cores in accordance with SABS
0100 - Part II or equivalent.
(ii)
Where the Engineer so directs, full-scale load tests
shall be conducted in accordance with SABS 0100 Part II or
equivalent to determine whether any particular structure or
member can be left in position. The cost of such tests shall
be for the Contractor's account regardless of the outcome of
the tests.
.
In all cases where concrete has been supplied which fails to
comply with the strength requirements, the Contractor shall
immediately take the required remedial action by changing
the mix proportions to obtain the required strength.
6400-8
(c)
Tests ordered by the Engineer
Where the routine testing of concrete cubes is not

conducted on the site by the Engineer, he may order the
Contractor to have the concrete cubes, which have been
made by the Engineer, tested at an approved testing
laboratory, in which case payment will be made for such
tests in accordance with the provisions of Section 7100.
6415
DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL OF EXISTING

CONCRETE
Where partial demolition is required for extension work to

existing structures the first three paragraphs of Clause 2214
shall apply. In addition the following shall apply:
(a)
The Contractor shall take great care to ensure that
the reinforcement required to tie in the extension work is not
cut off or damaged in the demolition process. Where
reinforcement has been cut off, or where in the opinion of
the Engineer, the reinforcement has been damaged to such
an extent that it will not adequately perform its function, the
Contractor shall, at his own expense, install dowel bars of
the same diameter as the bar cut off or damaged, all to the
(b)
Only hand operated breaking equipment shall be
used for the demolition of concrete where extension work is
required.
6416
Item
Unit
64.01 Cast in situ concrete:

(a)
(Class of concrete and
part of structure or use indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(b)
Etc for other classes
of concrete and other uses or
parts of the structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement for cast in situ concrete shall be
the cubic metre of concrete in place. Quantities shall be
calculated from the dimensions shown on the Drawings or
as authorised. No deduction in volume measured for
payment shall be made for the volume of any reinforcing
steel, inserts and pipes or conduits under 150 mm in
diameter embedded in the concrete.
procuring and furnishing all the materials, storing the
materials, providing all plant, mixing, transporting, placing
and compacting the concrete, forming the inserts,
construction joints (except mandatory construction joints),
and contraction joints, curing and protecting the concrete,
repairing defective surfaces, and finishing the concrete
surfaces as specified. Payment shall distinguish between
the different classes of concrete.
Item
Unit
64.02 Manufacturing precast

concrete members
(description of member
with reference to drawing) . . . . . . . . number (No)

members or elements of each type and size in position in
the Works.
The tendered rate for each precast member shall include full
compensation for concrete work, formwork, reinforcing steel
and prestressing as required for manufacturing the member
complete, excluding only prestressing in connection with in
situ concrete cast subsequent to the placing of the precast
members for which prestressing separate payment is
provided elsewhere in the Schedule of Quantities.
Item
Unit
64.03 Transporting and

erecting precast concrete
members (description of
member and approximate
mass to be given) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
Item
Unit
64.05 Extra over Items 61.08, 61.31

and 64.01 for the use of
sulphate-resistant cement in
concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m)
concrete manufactured with sulphate-resistant cement and
placed in accordance with the details on the Drawings, or as
The tendered rate shall be extra over each of the rates
tendered for Items 61.08, 61.31 and 64.01, and shall include
full compensation for all additional costs for procuring,
furnishing and using sulphate-resistant cement in the
concrete.
Item
Unit
The unit of measurement shall be the number of precast

concrete members of each type and size placed into
position.
64.06 Demolishing existing concrete:

(a)
Plain concrete in:
The tendered rate for each precast member shall include full
compensation for all work, costs and equipment required for
transporting, erecting and placing into position the precast
concrete members.
(i)
(Member indicated) . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
(b)
Reinforced concrete in:
(i)
(Member indicated) . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
Item
Unit
64.04 Epoxy bonding of new

concrete surfaces to old . . . . square metre (m2)
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of new
concrete surface bonded to old by means of an approved
epoxy bonding agent as set out in the Specifications.
preparing the surfaces and for furnishing and applying the
bonding agent and for chamfering the concrete on visible
joints, complete as shown on the Drawings.
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of plain or

reinforced concrete demolished for each member or portion
thereof scheduled separately in the Schedule of Quantities.
labour, plant and equipment required to demolish the
existing concrete and disposal of the product of the
demolition to an approved disposal site. The tendered rate
shall also include full compensation for any necessary
measures to ensure no debris falls into rivers and for any
debris that has fallen into rivers to be recovered.
6400-9
6400-10
SERIES 6000 :
STRUCTURES
(f)
SECTION 6500 :
PRESTRESSING
Duct is the void formed to house the tendon(s) and may be

formed by coring, or by using sheaths or by way of
extractable cores.
Duct
CONTENTS
6501
6502
6503
6504
6505
6506
6507
6508
6509
6510
6511
6512
SCOPE
DEFINITIONS
MATERIALS
EQUIPMENT
TECHNICAL DATA
PRESTRESSING SYSTEM
DRAWINGS PREPARED BY THE CONTRACTOR
PRECASTING
PRE-TENSIONING
POST-TENSIONING
LOSS OF PRESTRESS
6501
SCOPE
(g)
Prestress
Prestress is the stress induced in concrete by tensioned

tendons.
(h)
Prestressed concrete
Prestressed concrete is structural concrete in which

effective internal stresses are induced by means of
tensioned tendons.
(i)
Pre-tensioned concrete
Pre-tensioned concrete is prestressed concrete where the

tendon is tensioned before the concrete has been cast.
This Section covers the materials, equipment and work

required for prestressing structural concrete members.
(j)
6502
DEFINITIONS
Post-tensioned concrete
Post-tensioned concrete is prestressed concrete where the

tendon is tensioned after the concrete has hardened.
The following definitions shall apply to these Specifications:

(k)
(a)
Anchorage
Anchorage is the device comprising all the components and

materials required for retaining the force in a tensioned
tendon and to transmit this force to the concrete of the
structure.
Pull-in is the elastic shortening of the tendon caused by

relative movement between the anchorage or coupler
components on account of seating and gripping action
during or immediately after transfer.
(l)
(b)
Anchorage reinforcement
Anchorage reinforcement is the spiral and other

reinforcement which forms part of the anchorage and is
required for strengthening the anchorage and/or assisting in
transmitting the tendon force to the concrete.
(c)
Bursting reinforcement
Bursting reinforcement is the reinforcing steel required in

and adjacent to the anchorage zones to resist the tensile
stresses induced in the concrete by the anchorage(s).
(d)
Cable
Pull-in
Release
Release is the specified elastic shortening of the tendon at

the anchorage achieved before or during transfer.
(m)
Sheath
Sheath is the tube or casing enclosing the tendon and which

temporarily or permanently allows a relative movement
between the tendon and the surrounding concrete.
(n)
Tendon
Tendon is the prestressing steel consisting of the bar, wire

or strand individually placed, or of bars, wires or strands
placed in a duct, all of which are tensioned to impart
prestress to a concrete member.
Cable is the tendon, together with the anchorage, sheathing

and all fittings.
(o)
(e)
Characteristic strength
Characteristic strength of prestressing steel is the

manufacturer's guaranteed tensile strength below which no
more than 5% of the test results in a statistical population
shall fall.
Tensioning
Tensioning is the action of inducing and regulating the force

in a tendon by means of tensioning and measuring
equipment.
6500-1
(p)
Transfer
(ii)
Bars
Transfer in the case of post-tensioned concrete is the action

of transferring the tensioning force from the tensioning
equipment (jack) to the anchorage.
Cold-worked high-tensile alloy steel bars for prestressed

concrete shall comply at least with the requirements of BS
4486.
Transfer in the case of pre-tensioned concrete is the action

of transferring the force in the tensioned tendon(s) to the
concrete.
The type of prestressing steel shall be indicated in

accordance with the requirements of Clause 4.2 of BS 4486,
eg BS 4486-RR-32-1230 for 32 mm diameter double-ridged
bar with a characteristic strength of 1 230 MPa.
(q)
(iii)
Bond breaker
Wires and seven-wire steel strand
Bond breaker is the coating or sheath placed on a tendon to

prevent it from bonding to the surrounding concrete.
Steel wire and seven-wire steel strand for prestressed

concrete shall comply at least with the requirements of BS
5896.
(r)
The type of prestressing steel shall be indicated in

accordance with the requirements of Clauses 14 and 20 of
BS 5896 for wire and strands respectively, eg :
Coupler
Coupler is the device comprising all components required to

join two tendons.
(s)
Deflector
(1)
BS 5896/2 wire 1770-7-PE-relax 1 for a 7 mm
diameter plain wire of Class 1 relaxation with a characteristic
strength of 1 770 MPa; and
Deflector is the device used to deflect a tendon alignment

within a structural element.
(2)
BS 5896/3 superstrand 1860-12.9-relax 2 for a
12.9 mm diameter superstrand of Class 2 relaxation with a
characteristic strength of 1 860 MPa.
(t)
(iv)
Transmission length
Transmission length is the tendon length required to

transmit via bond stresses the full force in the tendon to the
concrete.
6503
MATERIALS
(a)
General
All materials and prestressing systems used in the

prestressing of structural concrete members shall be subject
to approval by the Engineer.
(b)
Prestressing steel
(i)
General
The type of prestressing steel shall be designated in

accordance with the requirements of Subclause 6503(b).
The Contractor shall keep proper records of all material
analyses and test certificates for the batches of prestressing
steel used in the Works. Where required by the Engineer,
the Contractor shall produce certificates from recognised
testing authorities certifying compliance of the prestressing
steel with the specified requirements.
Where prestressing steel is available in weld-free lengths
(production lengths) and lengths containing welds (standard
lengths), the batches delivered at the site shall be clearly
labelled for identification purposes.
In no circumstances shall prestressing steel after
manufacture be subjected to heat treatment other than
provided for in these Specifications.
Straightness
Prestressing bars delivered at the site shall be straight.

Only small adjustments for straightness may be made,
which shall be done by hand on the site at a temperature
above 5C and under the supervision of the Engineer.
Where heating of the bars is required, this shall be by
means of steam or hot water. Bars bent in the threaded
portion shall not be used.
Prestressing wire and strand shall be supplied in coils with
a sufficiently large diameter to ensure that the wire and
strand will pay off straight.
(v)
Surface condition
Prestressing steel shall be clean, free from faults or defects,

and without any harmful films and matter which may impair
adhesion to the grout or concrete. A film of rust is not
necessarily harmful and may improve the bond. It may,
however, increase the friction between the tendon and duct.
The depth of imperfections or pits on the surface of
prestressing steel shall not exceed 0.1 mm for wire with a
diameter up to and including 8 mm, or 0.2 mm for bars or
wire with a diameter exceeding 8 mm.
Tendons may be cleaned by wire brushing or by passing
through a pressure box containing carborundum powder.
Solvent solutions shall not be used for cleaning without the
Prestressing steel shall be delivered at the site suitably
protected against damage and corrosion. Such protection or
the use of a corrosion inhibitor where allowed by the
Engineer, shall not have any deleterious effect on the steel
or concrete or impair the bond between the two.
(vi)
Galvanising
Galvanised prestressing steel shall not be used unless

specified. In no circumstances shall prestressing steel be
subjected to galvanising after manufacture.
6500-2
(vii)
Welds
(e)
Cable supports
Prestressing steel used in structural prestressed concrete

shall be weld-free. Where the steel is supplied in standard
lengths, the welds shall be cut out and delivered to the
Engineer.
Supports of reinforcing steel or structural steel suitably

braced to prevent buckling under load shall be used to
support the cables. The cable saddles shall be rigid and
secured in position by welding or by equivalent mechanical
means to resist both gravitational and buoyancy forces.
(c)
Normal web reinforcement shall not be utilised to support

cables.
Anchorages and couplers
Anchorages and couplers to be used in prestressed

concrete shall comply with the requirements of BS 4447 and
shall be of a proved and approved type, constructed from
durable material completely free from imperfections and
shall not damage, distort or kink the prestressing steel in a
manner that will result in ultimate tensile strength reduction.
They shall resist, without failure and/or excessive
deformation or relaxation of the force in the tendons, the full
ultimate tensile strength of the tendons. The characteristic
value for anchorages and couplers, determined in
accordance with BS 4447, shall not be less than 90%.
The anchorages shall effectively distribute the force in the
tendon to the structural member, and the resulting local
stresses and strains in the member shall be so limited as to
prevent damage. Unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer, all anchorages and couplers shall be provided
with anchorage reinforcement.
Wedges and the insides of barrels or cones shall be clean
to allow the free movement and seating of the wedges
inside the taper.
The threads of bars, nuts, anchorages and couplers shall be
suitably protected against damage and corrosion. The
protection shall be removed at the last moment and the
threads properly lubricated before use.
(d)
Sheaths
Sheaths shall be grout-tight and of such material and

configuration that bond forces can be transferred from the
grout to the surrounding concrete. The properties of the
sheath material shall be such that no corrosion attack of the
prestressing steel will be induced. The sheath shall be
sufficiently flexible to accept the required curvature without
kinking, and strong enough to retain its cross-section and
alignment and to resist damage on account of handling,
transporting, tying and contact with vibrators during
concreting. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, the
thickness of the metal of steel sheaths shall not be less than
0.4 mm.
Metal sheathing shall be delivered at the site suitably
protected against damage and corrosion. At the time of
incorporation into the structural member, the sheathing shall
be free from loose mill scale, loose rust, lubricants and
harmful matter.
Galvanised sheathing shall not be used unless specified.
Unless otherwise specified, the internal diameter of the
sheath shall be at least 10 mm greater than the diameter of
the tendon. For vertical tendons and where tendons are to
be drawn into cast-in sheaths, the cross-sectional duct area
shall be at least three times the cross-sectional area of the
tendon.
Saddles for external cables shall be of special design and

material to ensure low friction and to prevent the tendon or
parts thereof from grooving the surface. The saddle plates
shall be curved to the requisite radius to prevent the tendon
or part thereof from bearing on the end of the plate and shall
incorporate features to ensure that individual bars, wires and
strands are seated separately.
(f)
Tendon spacers
Tendon spacers used inside the ducts to separate individual

bars, wires or strands of the tendon shall be of a proved and
approved type and manufactured from material which will
not induce corrosion of the prestressing steel.
(g)
Grout
(i)
Materials
In addition to the requirements of Subclause 6402(d), water

shall not contain more than 500 mg of chloride ions per litre
of water.
Only ordinary Portland cement which complies with the
requirements of SABS 471 or equivalent and ordinary
Portland cement 15 which complies with the requirements
of SABS 831 or equivalent shall be used. The temperature
of the cement shall be less than 40C, and the cement shall
be stored in accordance with the requirements of Subclause
6403(a).
Fine aggregate shall consist of siliceous granules, finely
ground limestones, trass or very fine sand. The aggregate
used shall pass through a 0.600 mm sieve. The use of fine
aggregate shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer
and shall be restricted to grout for ducts with a diameter
exceeding 150 mm. The aggregate content in the grout
shall not exceed 30% of the mass of the cement.
The use of admixtures shall be subject to tests having
shown that their use improves the properties of the grout, eg
by increasing workability, reducing bleeding, entraining air,
or expanding the grout. Admixtures shall be free from any
product liable to damage the steel or the grout itself, such as
halides, nitrates, sulphides, sulphates, etc. The quantity of
admixture to be used shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
(ii)
Properties of the grout
The mixed grout shall have the following properties:

(1)
The chloride ions content shall not exceed 750 mg
per litre.
(2)
The viscosity of the grout measured in accordance
with Subclause 7111(b) for horizontal cables shall be 500 to
2 500 cP and for vertical cables 400 to 1 500 cP. The
viscosity of the grout, 20 minutes after mixing, shall not
6500-3
exceed 2 500 cP and 1 500 cP for horizontal and vertical

cables respectively.
(3)
Bleeding at 20C measured in accordance with
Subclause 7112(b) shall not exceed 2% by volume three
hours after the grout has been mixed, and the maximum
bleeding shall not exceed 4%. In addition, the separated
(bleed) water must be reabsorbed after 24 hours.
(4)
The compressive strength of 100 mm cubes made
of the grout and cured in a moist atmosphere for the first 24
hours and then in water at 20C shall exceed 20 MPa at
seven days.
(h)
Protecting agents for unbonded tendons
The material used for permanent protection of unbonded

tendons shall have the following properties:
The force in the tendon during tensioning shall be measured

by a direct-reading dynamometer or obtained direct from
pressure gauges fitted in the hydraulic system to determine
the pressure in the jacks.
Pressure gauges shall have concentric scale dials which
comply with the requirements of BS 1780. The dials shall
not be less than 150 mm in diameter and the gauges shall
be used within the range of 50 - 90% of their full capacity at
maximum service pressure.
When pressure gauges not using glycerine are used, a
snubber or similar device shall be fitted to protect the gauge
against any sudden release of pressure. Provision shall
also be made for T-connections for the attachment, when
required, for supplementary control gauges.
Only self-sealing connections shall be used in the hydraulic
circuit. Where the pressure input pipe is connected to the
jack, a pipe rupture valve shall be installed in the circuit.
(i)
It shall remain free from cracks and shall not

become brittle or fluid within the temperature range
of -20C to 70C.
(ii)
It shall be chemically stable for the entire life of the

structure.
(iii)
It shall be non-reactive with the surrounding

materials, ie concrete, tendons, wrapping or
sheathing.
(iv)
It shall be non-corrosive or corrosion-inhibiting.
(v)
It shall be impervious to moisture.
(c)
Grouting equipment
(vi)
It shall be sufficiently tough to withstand the

abrasion caused when a tendon, precoated with the
material, is drawn into the sheath.
(i)
Mixer
(vii)
It shall have no appreciable shrinkage or excessive

volume increase.
(viii)
It shall have a suitable viscosity at ambient

temperature or require only moderate preheating to
permit injection.
Tensioning equipment shall be calibrated before the

tensioning operation and thereafter at frequent intervals, as
directed by the Engineer, with a master gauge or proving
ring, and the Engineer shall be furnished with a calibration
chart. The load-measuring devices shall be calibrated to an
accuracy of 2%.
The extension of tendons shall be measured to an accuracy
of 2% or 2 mm, whichever is the more accurate, and pullin and release to an accuracy of 2 mm.
Mechanically operated mixers only, of a type capable of

producing high local turbulences while imparting only a slow
motion to the body of the grout shall be used.
The mixer shall be equipped with a screen with openings not
exceeding 1.0 mm and shall be capable of consistently
producing grout with a colloidal consistency.
(ii)
(i)
Testing
Prestressing steel, anchorages and couplers, and grout

shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of
Subclause 7111(b). Testing shall be carried out at the
frequencies as directed by the Engineer.
Agitator
Where the capacity of the mixer is insufficient to fill the duct

completely with grout, an agitator shall be used.
6504
EQUIPMENT
Mechanical agitators only shall be used, which are capable

of maintaining the colloidal condition of the grout fill during
the storing and injection processes. The grout shall be
delivered at the structure from the agitator, and the system
shall make provision for recirculating the grout from the
pump back to the agitator.
(a)
General
(iii)
All equipment used shall be in a good working order and

properly maintained.
(b)
Tensioning and measuring equipment
Tensioning and measuring equipment shall be such that the

tendon force can be established to an accuracy of 2%
during any stage of the tensioning operation.
Unless otherwise authorised by the Engineer, the tensioning
equipment shall be power driven and capable of gradually
applying a controlled total force without inducing dangerous
secondary stresses in the tendon, anchorage or concrete.
6500-4
Injection equipment
The pump shall be of the positive displacement type (piston,

screw or similar type), capable of exerting a constant
pressure of at least 10 bars on completely grouted cables
and shall incorporate a safety device for preventing the
build-up of pressure above 20 bars. The pump shall be
fitted with a pressure gauge and a valve which can be
locked-off without loss of pressure in the cable.
The pump shall be capable of delivering grout at a speed
that will produce a speed of the grout in the cable of
between 6 and 12 m per minute.
All connections in the pipes and between the pipe and the
cable shall be airtight. Only bayonet, threaded, or similar
types of connectors shall be used.
factor (k) caused by unintentional variation from the

specified alignment.
(ii)
6505
TECHNICAL DATA
The following technical data for pre-tensioned and posttensioned structural members required for the Contract will
be furnished on the Drawings:
(a)
Tendon alignment
Elastic deformation of concrete
The elastic factor, which, when multiplied by the

compressive stress in the concrete adjacent to the tendon,
will give the loss caused by the deformation of the concrete.
(iii)
Creep of the concrete
The creep factor, which, when multiplied by the compressive

stress in the concrete adjacent to the tendon, will give the
loss caused by the creep of the concrete.
A diagram showing the alignment of each tendon or group

of tendons in both the horizontal and vertical planes,
together with the horizontal and vertical coordinates, and
curve equations of the centroid of the tendon(s), as may be
relevant.
(iv)
(b)
The stress loss in MPa at a stress level of 70% of the

characteristic strength of the prestressing steel caused by
the relaxation of the prestressing steel.
Tendon system
The design shall be based on the system shown on the

Drawings, but the Contractor may use any suitable system
which will meet all the specified requirements, subject to
approval by the Engineer.
(c)
Tensioning the tendons
Full particulars regarding the partial tensioning of the

tendons, the stage during which the tendons shall be
tensioned, and the sequence of tensioning to be followed.
(d)
The stress loss in MPa caused by the shrinkage of the

concrete.
(v)
(g)
(h)
Bursting reinforcement
The bursting reinforcement for the prestressing system on

which the design is based.
(i)
Precamber
The precamber at intervals not exceeding 0.25 times the

span length.
Compressive strength of the concrete during

transfer
Extension
The extension per tendon or group of tendons under the

maximum tensioning force, together with the modulus of
elasticity (E) on which it has been based. The release to be
attained at each live anchorage as well as the pull-in for
which provision has been made.
The Contractor shall show on his drawings the expected
extension based on the actual modulus of elasticity of the
strand as well as the expected wedge pull-in and any
provision for shimming.
Prestressing losses in tendons
The losses allowed for in the design from the causes listed
below will be given as follows:
(i)
Anchorages
The positions where loop or fan-type dead-end anchorage

may be used.
(j)
(f)
Relaxation of prestressing steel
Tensioning force
The maximum tensioning force and the effective force at the

live anchorages, after transfer, as well as the corresponding
stress level in the prestressing steel, for each tendon or
group of tendons. The forces will be given in MN units, and
the stress levels will be expressed as a percentage of the
characteristic strength.
(e)
Shrinkage of the concrete
Friction loss
The formula used for determining the tendon/duct friction

loss together with the values adopted for the friction
coefficient () caused by curvature, and the wobble
The compressive strength to be attained by the concrete in

the relevant member before transfer may be effected.
6506
PRESTRESSING SYSTEM
The use of all prestressing systems will be subject to

approval by the Engineer. Tenderers are advised to obtain
approval for the prestressing system they intend using, prior
to submitting their tenders.
Within one month of the tender having been awarded, or
within a period agreed on with the Engineer, the Contractor
shall submit full details regarding the prestressing
system(s), materials and equipment he intends using, as
well as regarding the methods he proposes to adopt in the
prestressing and related operations.
The Engineer, at his own discretion, may call for further
information in the form of detailed drawings, proof of
successful previous use, performance certificates from an
approved independent testing authority, and calculations
substantiating the adequacy of the system. The Contractor
6500-5
shall furnish such information within two weeks of being

called upon to do so or within a period agreed on with the
Engineer. If, after investigating all the information, the
Engineer is not satisfied that the prestressing of the
structural member can be carried out satisfactorily with the
prestressing system offered by the Contractor, the Engineer
reserves the right to order the Contractor to use any system
which is suited to the work and which is readily available to
the Contractor.
detail the layout of the Works, together with a flow diagram

of the construction stages and storage.
Only minor alterations to the concrete dimensions shown on

the Drawings will be considered in order to accommodate
the prestressing system finally selected. Major alterations
occasioned by the prestressing system offered by the
Contractor and which is at variance with the tendon system
specified in Subclause 6505(b) shall be treated as
alternative designs and shall be dealt with as specified in
Clause 1212.
Within seven days of transfer, the Contractor shall submit to

the Engineer a certificate giving the tendon force(s) and
extension(s) attained as well as records of the cube crushing
strength and age of concrete at transfer.
6507
DRAWINGS PREPARED BY THE CONTRACTOR
All drawings prepared by the Contractor and submitted to

the Engineer for consideration shall comply with the
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer at least two
months before he intends commencing with the prestressing
work, drawings detailing the layout and alignment for the
individual tendons, the cable supports, modifications to the
bursting and other reinforcement, anchorage recesses,
tensioning sequence, tensioning loads and extensions, as
well as requirements for controlling the tensioning
operations. For the prestressing system finally selected, the
technical data which are at variance with the information
given on the Drawings shall be shown on the Drawings.
Each tendon shall be separately numbered for identification.
Where required, the Contractor shall submit calculations in
respect of the variation of the tendon force along the length
of the tendon, the expected extension and the bursting
forces.
(b)
Manufacture off the site
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in advance of the

dates when tensioning of tendons, casting of members and
transfer, will be undertaken.
Test results relating to all aspects of the work shall be sent

to the Engineer immediately upon their becoming available.
Where the Engineer requires tests to be conducted on
completed members, no member to which the tests relate
shall be dispatched to the site until the tests have been
satisfactorily completed and the members accepted by the
Engineer.
(c)
Manufacture
Before work is commenced, details of the manufacture and

phasing of the work shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval. After approval no changes shall be made to the
methods or systems without approval by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall ensure that the specified precamber is
incorporated in the formwork. The magnitude of the
precamber shown on the Drawings shall be subject to
variation depending on the Contractor's construction
programme, and the Contractor shall, before manufacture,
ascertain in writing from the Engineer, the increase or
decrease in precamber. This procedure shall also apply to
the cases where no precamber has been specified.
Lifting and supporting the precast members shall be made
only at the points marked and provided on the members.
After approval by the Engineer of the Drawings and

calculations prepared by the Contractor, no departure shall
be permitted from the forces, stresses and extensions
shown thereon, without authorisation by the Engineer.
Precast members which have not been fully tensioned or

fully stage-tensioned or which have ungrouted tensioned
tendons shall not be handled without authorisation by the
Engineer.
The prestressing work shall not be commenced before the

relevant drawings have been accepted by the Engineer.
Where members with ungrouted tensioned tendons are

handled, control shall be exercised to guard against possible
slip of the tendon at the anchorage.
The Contractor shall make full allowance in his tendered

rates for all costs in connection with the furnishing of
information, making calculations, and preparing and
submitting the Drawings. However, no allowance need be
made for the cost of checking, undertaken by the Engineer,
of drawings and calculations for work which does not qualify
as an alternative design.
Alternative designs shall comply with the requirements of
Clause 1212 and the relevant provisions of this Section.
6508
PRECASTING
(a)
Casting yard on the site
Subject to approval by the Engineer, precast work may be

done at any location selected by the Contractor.
Before the casting yard is established, the Contractor shall
submit plans to the Engineer which demarcate the site and
6500-6
Prestressed precast concrete members shall also comply

with the requirements of Clause 6413.
6509
PRE-TENSIONING
During the period between tensioning and transfer, the force

in the tendon shall be fully maintained by some positive
means. At transfer, detensioning shall take place slowly to
minimise any shock which could adversely affect the
transmission length of the tendon.
In the long-line method of pre-tensioning, sufficient locator
plates shall be distributed through-out the length of the bed
to ensure that the straight tendons are maintained in their
proper position during concreting. Where a number of units
are manufactured in line, they shall be free to slide in the
direction of their length so as to permit transfer of the tendon
force to the concrete along the entire line.
In the individual-mould system, the moulds shall be

sufficiently rigid to provide the reaction to the tendon force
without distortion.
Where possible, the mechanism for holding down or holding
up deflected tendons shall ensure that the part in contact
with the tendon will be free to move in the line of the tendon
so that friction losses are eliminated. If, however, a system
is used which develops a frictional force, this force shall be
determined by test and due allowance made therefor.
For single tendons, the deflector in contact with the tendon
shall have a radius of not less than 5 times the tendon
diameter for wire, or 10 times the tendon diameter for a
strand, and the total angle of deflection shall not exceed 15.
Transfer of the tendon force to the concrete shall be
effected in conjunction with the release of hold-down and
hold-up forces in accordance with an approved method.
Transfer shall not be effected until compressive-strength
tests on the concrete show that the concrete of the
particular member has attained a compressive strength of
at least the compressive strength shown on the Drawings.
The transmission length is affected by the concrete strength,
and the necessary modification for the concrete strength at
transfer shall be made in conjunction with the Engineer.
(b)
Fabrication
All cutting of prestressing steel shall be performed with a

high-speed abrasive cutting wheel or by a method approved
by the Engineer. Flame cutting will not be permitted.
Care shall be taken to prevent the prestressing steel or
anchorages from coming into contact with splashes from
flame-cutting or welding processes in the vicinity.
Where possible, all bars, wires or strands tensioned in one
operation shall be taken from the same parcel of
prestressing steel. The tendon or cable shall be labelled to
show the tendon or cable number, as well as identify from
which parcel the steel has been taken.
Where bars, wires or strands in a tendon are not tensioned
simultaneously, tendon spacers shall be used in accordance
with the recommendations for the prestressing system or, in
the absence thereof, as directed by the Engineer.
Cables shall be fitted at both ends with pipes with a
diameter of at least 10 mm for the injection of grout or
protection agents. The ends of the injection pipes shall be
fitted with a clamp, valve or device capable of withstanding
a pressure of at least 15 bars without loss of grout or
protection agent.
The tendons shall be cut off flush with the end of the
member and the exposed ends covered with a heavy coat
of approved bituminous material or epoxy resin. The cutting
of the prestressing steel shall be performed with a highspeed abrasive cutting wheel. Flame cutting will not be
permitted.
Vent pipes with a diameter of at least 25 mm shall be

provided in the duct at every high point, change of sheath
cross-section and at such intermediate positions as may be
shown on the Drawings or required by the Engineer. The
vent pipes shall extend to at least 500 mm above the
concrete and shall comply with the requirements for injection
pipes.
6510
POST-TENSIONING
(a)
Storage, handling and protection
Connections to, and joints in sheaths shall be made grouttight by using special sheathing couplings and taping. With
bonded cables, the length of taping shall not exceed six
sheath diameters. Where oversleeves are used, equal
overlaps shall be provided over each length of sheathing.
Joints in adjacent sheaths shall be spaced at least 300 mm
apart.
During storage, transit, construction and after installation the

sheaths, prestressing steel, anchorages and couplers shall
be protected against corrosion, damage or permanent
deformation. The manner and extent of protection required
will depend on the environmental factors and the length of
time before permanent corrosion protection is applied, and
shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Under severe
corrosive conditions in coastal, damp and wet areas and
under aggressive conditions the materials shall be stored in
weatherproof sheds. All materials shall be stored clear of
the ground and while in storage shall not be exposed to the
weather.
When prestressing steel has been stored for a prolonged
period and there is evidence of its deterioration, the
Contractor may be called on to prove by tests that the
quality of the steel has not been significantly impaired and
that the prestressing steel still complies with the provisions
of these Specifications.
Suitable protection shall be provided to the threaded ends
of bars.
After fabrication, the cable ends shall be covered with
protective wrapping to prevent the ingress of moisture into
the duct.
When the tendon is to be left untensioned for a prolonged
period after installation, precautions shall be taken to protect
the tendon against corrosion. Corrosion inhibitors, oils or
similar materials used as lubrication or to provide temporary
protection shall be such that they can be completely
removed before permanent protection is effected.
(c)
Installation
The installation of tendons shall not commence until the

requirements of Clause 6507 have been complied with.
The cable, sheath or extractable core shall be accurately
installed to the specified alignment and securely held in
position both vertically and horizontally at intervals
appropriate to its rigidity and so as not to be displaced
during concreting, either by the weight of the concrete or by
buoyancy. The spacing of the cable supports shall
furthermore ensure that the tendon can be installed to a
smooth alignment without kinks and within the tolerance
specified in Subclause 6803(g). Cable sheaths shall be
supported and held in position by means of separate
reinforcing steel supports with a diameter of not less than
16 mm. The transverse bars must be welded to the vertical
bars or must rest on lugs welded to the vertical bars. The
spacing of the vertical supports shall not exceed 1.0 m
Extractable cores shall not be coated with release agent
unless approved by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the alignment of
the tendon within a distance of 1.0 m from the live
anchorage and/or coupler shall be straight. The tendon axis
shall be set perpendicular to the bearing surface of its
anchorage and firmly secured in position so as not to move
6500-7
during concreting. External anchorages shall be seated on

a thin mortar bedding to bear evenly on the concrete bearing
surface, and the tendon axis shall be perpendicular to the
bearing surface of the anchorage.
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the minimum
concrete cover over the outside surface of the sheath or
cable support shall comply with the requirements of Clause
6307, except that, for sheaths, the cover shall not be less
than 50 mm.
which he may have to incur as a result of having to tension

fully only some of the tendons at any one stage or instant.
Where partial tensioning of tendons is required, the work
shall be executed in accordance with the details on the
Drawings or as specified. The Contractor shall, in his
tendered rates, make provision for all incidentals he may
have to incur as a result of having to tension partially only
some of or all the tendons at any one stage or instant.
(iii)
The spacing of cables will depend on the size of the cable

and shall be such that the concrete can be properly placed
and compacted.
Immediately before concreting, the Contractor shall inspect
the sheaths for grout-tightness and shall seal all damaged
and suspect sections.
External tendons shall be installed to the same standards
and accuracy specified herein for internal tendons. The
tendons shall be temporarily supported at regular intervals
along the straight length between saddles. The supports
shall consist of rigidly constructed frames secured to the
concrete face.
(d)
Concrete strength
Full tensioning of all or some of the tendons shall not

commence until the compressive-strength of the concrete is
35 MPa or the strength shown on the Drawings, whichever
is the greater.
The compressive strength of the concrete shall be
determined from cubes manufactured and tested in
accordance with Subclause 7106(a) which have been cured
under the same conditions as the structural member which
is to be prestressed. The number of concrete cubes
required for this purpose shall be as agreed on with the
Engineer.
Where initially all or some of the tendons are to be partially
tensioned, tensioning shall not commence before the
concrete has attained the compressive strength indicated on
the Drawings.
(e)
Tensioning
(i)
Preparation
Within two hours of the concrete having been placed, the

Contractor shall demonstrate that sheaths are free from
obstructions, that extractable cores can be removed and,
where the design permits, that all tendons are free to move
in the ducts. All water in the ducts shall then be expelled
with compressed air and the cables sealed until tensioning
takes place.
Before tensioning is commenced, the side forms and other
restraining elements shall be released or removed to give
the structural member the freedom to deform under the
induced force.
(ii)
Tensioning sequence
The sequence of tensioning to be followed shall be as

shown on the Drawings and/or on drawings prepared by the
Contractor in terms of Clause 6507. The Contractor shall
make allowance in his tendered rates for all incidentals
6500-8
Assembling the equipment, and safety precautions
The tensioning and measuring equipment shall be

assembled for tensioning in exactly the same way as they
are combined for calibration.
The Contractor shall take all the necessary safety
precautions to prevent accidents caused by the
malfunctioning or failure of any part of the equipment or
material and shall accept full responsibility for injury
sustained by persons or damage to property resulting
therefrom.
(iv)
Friction
The Engineer may require the Contractor to perform friction

tests on designated tendons and to revise the relevant
theoretical extensions to compensate for the discrepancy
between the values adopted in the design and the test
results. Payment for these tests shall be made under Item
71.02.
Where applicable, allowance shall be made in the tensioning
force to compensate for friction loss in the jack and in the
anchorage.
(v)
Tensioning
Tensioning shall be carried out under the supervision of a

technician skilled in the use of the prestressing system and
equipment and the methods of tensioning to be adopted.
Tensioning shall not be commenced before the Engineer
has been advised of each tensioning operation and has
given his approval for the work to be started.
The technician and operators shall be supplied with a
schedule listing the sequence of tensioning the various
tendons and a tensioning record sheet showing the
theoretical gauge readings, jacking forces, extensions,
release and pull-in for each tensioning operation. The
record sheet shall furthermore provide room for entering the
corresponding information recorded and observations made
during tensioning. A graph of the tensioning force and/or
gauge reading versus theoretical extensions shall, where
required, be appended to the record sheet and the actual
extensions measured for each load increment shall be
plotted on the graph. Copies of the completed record
sheets and graphs shall be submitted to the Engineer within
24 hours of each tensioning operation having been
completed.
The Contractor shall note that the extensions shall be
regarded as an indirect measurement of the tensioning force
and shall serve as a control on the tensioning force applied.
The protruding ends of all bars, wires and strands shall be
clearly marked for the accurate measurement of extension,
release and pull-in.
Before tensioning is commenced on external tendons, a
small load shall be applied to each tendon, commencing
with the uppermost tendon. The force shall be sufficient to

take up all slack and prevent entanglement of the tendons.
The jacking force shall be increased to approximately 5 to
10% of the final jacking force to take up the tendon slack
and to determine the zero position for measuring the
extension and to check the gripping devices and the position
and alignment of the jacks. The load shall then be
increased gradually to the full specified tensioning force
while intermediate gauge readings and extensions are
recorded at regular intervals.
The final stage of tensioning shall be deemed to have been
satisfactorily accomplished when all the following
requirements have been complied with:
Protection and bonding of the tendons shall be effected

within seven days of the final tensioning of the tendons, or
as specified on the Drawings, but shall not take place
without the prior approval of the Engineer having been
obtained.
After the permanent protection or bonding has been
completed the anchorages shall be encased in concrete or
grout which shall be bonded to the old concrete with epoxy
resin designed for this purpose, or shall be completely
coated with a corrosion-resistant material. The protection
provided shall in all cases prevent the ingress of water or
aggressive agents.
(ii)
Preparation of ducts
(1)
The tendons have been tensioned to the required

force.
Before permanent protection and/or bonding of tendons is

effected, the following precautions shall be taken:
(2)
The measured extension on individual tendons is

within 6% of the theoretical extensions.
(1)
The cables shall be checked for blockages by water
or compressed air being injected.
(3)
The average variation between the measured and

theoretical extensions of all the tendons in a
structural member is less than 3%.
(2)
Unlined ducts which are to be filled with grout shall
be flushed with water to wet the concrete.
(4)
The release and/or pull-in is within 2 mm of the

theoretical values.
Where the above conditions are not met individually and

collectively, the Contractor shall immediately advise the
Engineer and obtain a ruling as to the procedure to be
followed.
In the event of the tendon friction being too high, the
Contractor may, subject to approval by the Engineer, inject
an approved lubricant into the sheath after first having
detensioned the tendon.
The cost of the remedial and corrective measures and of the
release and retensioning of tendons, which have been
occasioned by failure of the operations to meet the above
requirements shall be for the Contractor's account.
After the tensioning has been accepted by the Engineer, the
Contractor may cut off the tendons behind the anchorage as
described in Subclause 6510(b).
(f)
Permanent protection and bonding of tendons
(i)
General
After tensioning, all tendons shall receive permanent

protection against mechanical damage and corrosion.
Internal tendons shall be protected and bonded to the
structural member by cement grout or, when permitted by
the Engineer, by sand-cement grout. Where bond is not
important, protection may be effected by the use of bitumen,
petroleum-based compounds, epoxy resins, plastics and
similar products, all complying with the requirements of
Subclause 6503(h) and subject to approval by the Engineer..
Tendons located outside the structural section (ie external
tendons) shall be encased with a dense concrete, dense
mortar or material sufficiently stable and hard, all subject to
approval. The encasement shall be of the thickness shown
on the Drawings. Where bonding of the tendon to the
structural concrete is required, this shall be achieved by
bonding the concrete encasement to the structure with
reinforcing steel as detailed on the Drawings.
(3)
Temporary protection or lubricants which are
incompatible with the permanent protection or bonding, shall
be removed by flushing the duct with water or an inert
solution, or by any suitable approved method.
(4)
On completion of the above, any excess fluid shall
be expelled from the ducts by means of compressed air or
shall be displaced by the protecting agent or grout, as may
be relevant.
Any blockages, leakages or factors which in any way may
affect the permanent protection or bonding shall immediately
be reported to the Engineer.
(iii)
Mixing
(1)
Protecting agents
The mixing of protecting agents shall be strictly in

accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
(2)
Grout
The aggregate, if used, and the cement shall be measured

by mass, and the water by mass or by volume.
The water:cement ratio by mass shall be as low as possible
within the range between 0.36 to 0.45, and shall be
consistent with the fluidity requirements of Subclause
6503(g).
Where an admixture is used, it shall be dissolved in a part
of the mixing water before it is added to the grout.
Mixing shall be commenced by two-thirds of the cement
being added to the greater part of the mixing water, and, if
used, an additive predissolved in part of the mixing water,
and finally the remainder of the cement. Mixing shall
continue for not longer than four minutes after which the
grout shall be continually agitated at slow speed throughout
the injection operation.
Where aggregate is used in the grout mix, the word
"cement" in the preceding paragraph shall be replaced by
the term "cement/aggregate component".
6500-9
(iv)
Injection
(1)
General
6511
LOSS OF PRESTRESS
Before injection commences all air shall be expelled from

the injection equipment and hoses and all connections
checked for airtightness.
Any structural member which has lost all or part of its

prestress through the failure or malfunctioning of any part of
the prestressing component may be rejected by the
Engineer and shall be removed from the Works unless
approved remedial measures have been successfully
carried out on the member. No payment will be made in
respect of such remedial work or loss suffered by the
Contractor in this regard.
Injection shall take place from the anchorage or coupler,

whichever is situated at the lower end of the cable.
6512
Grout injection shall proceed without any interruption until

the cable has been completely filled and closed off.
Item
(2)
65.01 Prestressing tendons:
The injection of permanent protecting agents or grout shall

not commence before approval has been granted that the
work may start.
Protecting agents
Unit
The injection of protecting agents shall be strictly in

accordance with the instructions, and with the equipment
specified by the manufacturer.
(a)
Longitudinal
tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . meganewton-metre (MN-m)
(3)
(b)
Transverse
tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . meganewton-metre (MN-m)
Grout
Immediately after mixing, and also during injection, the

fluidity of the grout shall be tested at regular intervals in
accordance with Subclause 6503(i).
Injection shall be continuous at a rate of 6 to 12 m per
minute. As soon as grout with the original consistency flows
from the intermediate vent pipes they shall be successively
closed. Injection shall continue until the grout flowing from
the vent at the free end is of the same consistency as that
of the injected grout. At this stage the vent shall be closed
and the final pressure or a pressure of 5 bars, whichever is
the greater, shall have been maintained on the grout column
for five minutes before the valve at the injection end is
closed.
All vents shall be kept closed and supported vertically until
the grout has finally settled. On vertical cables, a riser pipe
with funnel shall be fitted to the top anchor to ensure that the
separated water migrates upwards and will not remain in the
cable.
If an expanding agent is used in the grout mix, the air vents
shall be re-opened after grouting to release any separated
water, and shall then again be closed.
Unless a retarder is used in the grout mix, the grout not
used within 60 minutes of mixing shall be discarded.
During the course of grouting 100 mm cubes shall be made
for testing in accordance with Subclause 6503(i). Whilst the
grout is being poured into the cube mould, the sides of the
mould shall be slightly tapped to permit any entrapped air to
escape.
Precautions shall be taken not to discharge the escaping
grout onto railway lines, public roads, water courses or
private property.
If a blockage occurs during the course of grouting, the
grouting shall be stopped before the maximum grouting
pressure is reached. The duct shall then be flushed out
immediately and the blockage cleared.
Grouting shall not be carried out during very cold weather
when the ambient air temperature drops below 5C. Care
shall be taken that the ducts are completely free from frost
or ice before grouting commences after frosty weather.
6500-10
(c)
Vertical tendons . . . . meganewton-metre (MN-m)
The unit of measurement shall be the meganewton-metre

which is calculated as the product of the characteristic
strength in megapascals of the prestressing steel, the crosssectional area of the tendon in square metres and the length
of the tendon in metres between the faces of the
anchorages. In the case of fan and loop anchorages the
"length of the tendon" shall include the length of tendon
forming the loop or fan.
preparing and submitting the Drawings, supplying, storing,
handling and protecting all materials (excluding anchorages
and couplers), fabricating, supporting and installing the
cables; lubricating, permanently protecting and bonding the
tendons, for the using of all the equipment, as well as for all
work and incidentals required for completing the work as
specified.
Item
Unit
65.02 Anchorages and couplers:

(a)
Anchorage at jacking
end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . meganewton (MN)
(b)
Anchorage at dead end . . . . . . meganewton (MN)
(c)
Coupler at jacking end . . . . . . . meganewton (MN)
(d)
Coupler at dead end . . . . . . . . meganewton (MN)
The unit of measurement shall be the meganewton which is

calculated as the product of the characteristic strength in
megapascals of the prestressing steel and the crosssectional area of the tendon in square metres, effectively
anchored or coupled.
supplying, storing, handling, fabricating and protecting the
complete anchorage or coupler assembly, anchorage
reinforcing, constructing the recesses for the anchorage or
coupler, tensioning, anchoring and/or coupling, trimming the
tendon ends, using all the equipment, as well as for all work
and incidentals required for completing the work as
specified.
The coupler shall include the complete assembly consisting
of the anchorage built into the first-stage construction and
the part coupled to it.
The tendered rate for loop or fan anchorages shall exclude
the cost of the length of tendon forming the loop or fan.
Item
Unit

for partially tensioning
the tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . meganewton (MN)
The unit of measurement shall be the meganewton, which
is calculated as for Item 65.02.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for the use
of all equipment, as well as for all work and incidentals
required for tensioning and anchoring the tendons to the
specified partial force.
6500-11
6500-12
SERIES 6000 :
STRUCTURES
SECTION 6600 :
NO-FINES CONCRETE, JOINTS,

BEARINGS, PARAPETS AND
DRAINAGE FOR STRUCTURES
Table 6602/1
Volumes of aggregate
CONTENTS
6601
6602
6603
6604
6605
6606
6607
6608
SCOPE
NO-FINES CONCRETE
JOINTS IN STRUCTURES
BEARINGS FOR STRUCTURES
PARAPETS, RAILINGS AND SIDEWALKS
BOLT GROUPS FOR ELECTRIFICATION
BRACKETS
6601
SCOPE
This Section covers:

(a)
the manufacture and placing of no-fines concrete
used in the Works;
(b)
the supply and installation of all permanent joints
which will permit relative movement between contiguous
structural members;
(c)
the construction, supply and installation of bearings
for structures;
(d)
the construction of parapets, railings and sidewalks
on structures;
(e)
the construction and/or installation of drainage works
such as weep holes, drainage pipes and gulleys, no-fines
concrete blocks, filter lining and concrete channelling;
(f)
Bolt groups for electrification brackets.
6602
NO-FINES CONCRETE
(a)
Materials
Cement, aggregate and water shall comply with the

(c)
Class of cement
Aggregate per 50 kg
NF38
NF19
NF13
0.33 m3
0.30 m3
0.27 m3
Batching and mixing
Cement shall be measured by mass or in full pockets of

50 kg each and aggregate shall be measured by volume in
approved measuring boxes or barrows.
The aggregate shall be moist or wetted before the cement
is added. Where drum mixers are used, about 20% of the
water shall be poured into the drum before the aggregate
and cement are loaded. The mixing time in the drum shall
be about 45 to 50 seconds.
The quantity of water added shall be just sufficient to form
a smooth grout which will adhere to and completely coat
each and every particle of aggregate, and which is just wet
enough to ensure that, at points of contact of aggregate, the
grout will run together to form a small fillet to bond the
aggregate together. The mix shall contain no more than
20 litres of water for every 50 kg of cement.
Mixing shall be done in an approved batch-type mechanical
mixer, but small quantities may be hand mixed.
(d)
Placing
No-fines concrete shall be placed in accordance with the

procedure approved by the Engineer. It shall be placed in its
final position within 15 minutes of having been mixed.
The concrete shall be worked sufficiently to ensure that it
will completely fill the space to be concreted and that
adjacent aggregate particles are in contact with one another.
Excessive tamping shall be avoided and the concrete shall
not in any circumstances be vibrated.
(e)
Protection
Each size of aggregate shall be a single size aggregate

graded in accordance with SABS 1083 Part II or equivalent.
All no-fines concrete shall be protected from the elements

and loss of moisture. Protection against loss of moisture
shall be accomplished by one or more of the following
methods:
(b)
(i)
(ii)
Classes of no-fines concrete
No-fines concrete shall be classified by the prefix NF and

the size of aggregate to be used. Class NF 19 means a nofines concrete with a 19.0 mm nominal size aggregate.
The volume of aggregate per 50 kg of cement for each class
of concrete shall be as detailed in Table 6602/1.
(iii)
Retaining formwork in place.

Covering exposed surfaces with sacking or other
approved material kept continuously wet.
Covering exposed surfaces with plastic sheeting.
No-fines concrete placed during cold weather shall be

adequately protected against frost for at least three days.
6603
JOINTS IN STRUCTURES
(a)
Materials
(i)
General
All materials used in forming, constructing and sealing

permanent joints as well as all proprietary or custom-built
6600-1
expansion-joint assemblies shall be subject to the approval

of the Engineer.
When required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit
test certificates issued by an approved, independent testing
authority to confirm that the respective materials comply
with the specified requirements, or a certificate by the patent
holder or designer certifying that the manufactured item
complies in all respects with relevant product specifications.
(ii)
Joint filler shall consist of sheets or strips of the following

materials complying with the requirements of the relevant
specifications listed:
(1)
Bitumen-impregnated fibreboard and bitumenimpregnated corkboard - US Federal Specification HHF-341F or AASHTO Specification M-213.
corkboard
US
Federal
(3)
Flexible foams of expanded polyethylene,
polyurethane, PVC or polypropylene - AASHTO
Specification M-153.
(4)
Rigid foams of expanded polyethylene, polyurethane
or polystyrene - BS 4840 or BS 3837.
Other joint filler materials may be used if approved by the
Engineer after he has been furnished with full specifications
and information by the Contractor.
(iii)
Accessory material
(1)
Primers
Where a primer is to be used in conjunction with the sealant,

it shall be of the prescribed proprietary material.
(2)
Bond breakers
Polyethylene tape, coated paper, metal foil or similar

material may be used where bond breakers are required.
Joint filler
(2)
Resin-impregnated
Specification HH-F-341F.
(v)
(3)
Backup material
Backup material shall consist of a compressible material of

correct width and shape to ensure that, after installation, it
will be in approximately 50% compression and the sealant
can be formed to the specified depth.
Backup materials shall be compatible with the sealant used.
Material containing bitumen or volatiles shall not be used
with thermosetting chemically curing sealants.
(vi)
Cover plates
Steel cover plates shall be of Grade 43A steel which

complies with the requirements of BS 4360, or of Grade
300W steel which complies with the requirements of SABS
1431 or equivalent. Galvanising shall comply with the
requirements of SABS 763 or equivalent. Anchor bolts shall
be of stainless steel Grade 302 S.21, which complies with
the requirements of BS 970 Part 4.
Sealants
Thermoplastic hot-poured sealants shall comply with the

requirements of US Federal Specification SS-S-1401B, BS
2499 or AASHTO Specification M-173. The sealants shall
be of the rubberised bituminous type containing a minimum
of 20% natural or synthetic rubber.
Thermoplastic cold-applied sealants shall comply with the
requirements of US Federal Specification SS-S-156. The
sealant shall be of the rubberised bituminous type
containing a minimum of 20% natural or synthetic rubber.
Thermosetting chemically curing sealants shall comply with
the requirements of ASTM C-920 or BS 4254.
(b)
Filled and unfilled joints
(i)
General
Wherever polystyrene or similar material susceptible to

damage is used for forming joints, it shall be lined with a
hard surface on the side to be concreted. The hard surface
shall be sufficiently resilient to ensure that the joint and
surfaces can be formed free from defects.
(ii)
Filled joints
The final IRHD (International Rubber Hardness Degree)

hardness of the sealant shall be 20 5.
Filled joints shall be accurately formed to the dimensions

shown and with the filler material specified on the Drawings.
The filler shall be secured in position not to displace during
concreting or thereafter if the filler is to remain permanently
in the joint.
Silicone sealants shall comply with the requirements of

Subclause 7112.
Where the removal of the filter is required, it shall be done

prior to the installation of the proprietary joint.
Other sealants may be used if approved by the Engineer

after he has been furnished with full information and
specifications by the Contractor.
(iii)
(iv)
Waterstops
Waterstops shall be of natural rubber or flexible PVC and of

the type specified or shown on the Drawings.
Natural-rubber waterstops
requirements of CKS 388.
shall
comply
with
the
Flexible PVC rubber waterstops shall comply with the

requirements of CKS 389.
Unfilled joints
Unfilled joints shall be accurately formed to the dimensions

given on the Drawings, and all external corners chamfered
or rounded for at least 5 mm. The concrete face against
which the fresh concrete is placed shall be treated in good
time with an approved bond breaker.
(c)
Concrete nosings
Concrete nosings forming the edges of expansion joints

shall be constructed as follows:
(i)
After the concrete in the structural member has
hardened sufficiently, the protruding ends of the reinforcing
6600-2
steel shall be bent flat onto the concrete surface of the

formed recess.
(ii)
Before the asphalt surfacing is laid, the recess shall
be filled with well-compacted crusher run, sand or weak
mortar. The Contractor shall ensure that the concrete
surfaces of the recess and the reinforcing steel are not
contaminated with bituminous agents. The asphalt surfacing
shall then be laid continuously over the joint.
(iii)
The asphalt surfacing shall be cut with a diamond
saw blade to correspond to the width of the nosing and all
material shall be removed from the nosing recess. The
concrete surfaces of the recess shall then be roughened to
expose the aggregate and leave sound, irregular surfaces.
The reinforcing steel shall then be bent, fixed and placed as
(iv)
The prepared concrete surfaces of the recesses
shall be treated with an approved epoxy-resin adhesive,
immediately before the concrete nosings are cast. Opposite
concrete nosings, separated by a joint filler strip, shall be
cast simultaneously in accordance with Subclause 6408(c),
and compacted by vibrator. The nosing shall be screeded
flush with the premix surfacing and be given a Class U2
surface finish.
(v)
Curing shall be in accordance with Method (f) of
Clause 6409.
(vi)
After three days, the gap between the nosings shall
be enlarged to the requisite dimensions by cutting both
sides with parallel diamond saw blades. The depth of the
saw cut shall be such that a ledge is formed along the lower
edge of the cut on which the sealer unit can be supported.
(vii)
The exposed corners of the nosings shall be ground
to a 10 mm chamfer.
(viii) After the joint has been sealed, the wearing surface
of the nosings shall be treated with a bituminous primer to
waterstops shall be bonded or fused to have a tensile

strength of at least 50% of that of the unjointed material. At
intersections and abrupt changes of direction, waterstops
shall be jointed with prefabricated junction pieces.
Restrictions on joint width and on the temperature at the
time of installing the sealant or seal will be shown on the
Drawings. In the absence of such restrictions on the
Drawings, and unless otherwise specified, installation shall
be carried out only within the temperature range between
5C and 30C.
(ii)
Preparing the joints
Where required, joints shall be sawn at a suitable time so as

to avoid edge spalling or ravelling.
After the temporary filler material has been removed or the
excess concrete has been broken out, the inside faces of
the joint shall be wire-brushed or sand-blasted to remove all
laitance and contaminants. The joint shall then be cleaned
and blown out with compressed air to remove all traces of
dust. Solvents shall not be used for removing contaminants
from the concrete and porous surfaces.
The Contractor shall ensure that primers are applied only to
surfaces which are absolutely dry. The primer shall be
applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions. Unless otherwise specified, the primer shall be
applied within the temperature range of 10C and 40C, and
the sealant shall be applied after the curing period of the
primer and within the period when the primer remains active.
(iii)
Sealants
Sealants shall be applied strictly in accordance with the

manufacturer's instructions by a person skilled in the use of
the particular type of sealant. Trapping of air and the
forming of voids in the sealant shall be avoided. The
sealant shall be finished to a neat appearance to the
specified depth.
Unless otherwise specified, traffic shall not be permitted to

pass over the joint before the concrete in the nosing has
aged for at least 10 days.
Thermoplastic hot-poured sealants shall not be poured into

the joints when the temperature of the joint is below 10C.
The safe heating temperature shall not exceed the specified
pouring temperature by more than 10C.
Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, the concrete

used in the construction of the nosings shall be Class 40/13
and shall have a slump of not less than 50 mm and not
exceeding 75 mm.
Two-part thermosetting chemically curing sealants shall not

be applied after expiry of the specified pot-life period which
commences once the base and activator of the sealant have
been combined.
Concrete nosings shall be constructed under the direct

supervision of experienced and skilled personnel.
(iv)
(d)
Plug type expansion joints
Plug type expansion joint systems, shall be constructed in

accordance with the details on the Drawings and the
specifications and instructions of the licences.
(e)
Sealing the joints
(i)
General
Sealed joints shall be made watertight over the full length of

the joint, including the full height of the kerbing, unless
otherwise prescribed in the Project Specifications.
Unless a waterstop is equipped with an effective watertight
interlocking system for joining sections, all joints in
Waterstops
Waterstops shall be securely and accurately located in

position so that they will not be displaced or deformed
during construction.
(f)
Proprietary expansion joints
(i)
General
The use of any type of expansion joint shall be subject to

approval. Tenderers shall obtain approval for the type of
expansion joint they intend using prior to submitting their
tenders.
(ii)
Dimensions
The Contractor shall note the overall dimensions of the

expansion joints and the limiting dimensions of that portion
of the concrete structure which is to accommodate the
6600-3
joints. No alterations to the concrete which will be visible in

the final structure or major re-arrangement of the
prestressing anchorages will be permitted in order to
accommodate joints of excessive size.
All joints to be installed skew shall be accurately
dimensioned to ensure compliance with the requirements of
Subclause 6603(g).
Unless otherwise specified, proprietary expansion joints
shall include the complete expansion-joint assembly,
traversing the entire roadway, kerbs, sidewalks and median,
and shall include the coping and parapet cover plates as
well as the drainage system to drain the expansion joint.
(iii)
Design and manufacture
The expansion joint shall be designed to withstand the

movements, displacements and rotations specified on the
Drawings in conjunction with the loads described in the code
of practice adopted for the design of the structure without
exceeding in any member the requirement for serviceability
limit state. Any strengthening of the supporting member
required to resist forces imparted by the joint to the structure
shall be for the Contractor's account.
The specified movements, displacements and rotations shall
be withstood without the efficacy or riding quality of the joint
being impaired.
On completion of the installation of the proprietary

expansion joints, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer
a certificate from the manufacturer or supplier of the joints,
certifying acceptance of the installation. Notwithstanding the
issuing of such certificate, it shall not relieve the Contractor
of his responsibility under the Contract. Payment for the
inspection of the joints and the issuing of the certificate by
the manufacturer or supplier will be made under Item 71.02.
6604
BEARINGS FOR STRUCTURES
(a)
Materials
(i)
General
When requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall

submit test certificates from an approved, independent
testing authority to show that the respective materials
comply with the specified requirements, or a certificate from
the patent holder or designer certifying that the
manufactured item complies in all respects with relevant
product specifications.
Unless otherwise specified, all the materials used for
manufacturing the bearings shall comply with the
requirements of BS 5400 : Part 9.2.
(ii)
Roofing felt
The joint shall be vibration free, resistant to mechanical

wear and other forms of abrasion, and shall resist corrosion.
It shall have good riding characteristics, shall be highly skid
resistant, silent, and of watertight construction or have
provision for the disposal of water, debris or grit collecting in
the joint. It shall be of a construction that will facilitate easy
inspection, maintenance and repair.
Roofing felt shall be 3-ply and comply with the requirements

of SABS 92 or equivalent for Type 1 roofing felt.
Apart from stainless steel, all steel surfaces shall be

prepared in accordance with the requirements of Subclause
5907(b) and sprayed with a galvanising coat which complies
with the requirements of SABS 1391 Part I or equivalent for
Zn 150 coverage. All exposed surfaces sprayed with zinc
shall, within four hours, be covered with a sealant suitable
for use with the zinc and the subsequent layer. Two coats
of chlorinated rubber paint with a combined dry-coat
thickness of not less than 150 Fm shall then be applied.
They shall be of two different colours.
Natural rubber shall comply with the requirements of BS

1154 for specified IRHD hardness.
Prior to manufacture of the joints, the Contractor shall

submit for approval detail drawings in accordance with the
requirements of Clause 1221 of each expansion joint.
The expansion joints delivered at the site shall be suitably
marked to show clearly the sequence and position of
installation.
(iii)
The elastomer used in the manufacture of bearings shall be

natural rubber or synthetic rubber.
Synthetic rubber shall comply with the requirements of BS

2752 for specified IRHD hardness.
(iv)
(v)
Stainless steel dowels and bolts
Stainless steel used for the manufacture of dowels and

anchor bolts shall comply with the requirements of BS 970 :
Part 4 for steel 316S16.
Mortar
Installing the expansion joints
Proprietary expansion joints shall be installed by approved

specialist subcontractors only.
Installed proprietary
expansion joints shall have a 15 year written guarantee.
No expansion joint or part thereof shall be installed prior to
the construction of the final surfacing, unless otherwise
approved.
The expansion joint shall form an even surface with the road
surface on either side and the deviation across and along
the expansion joint shall comply with the requirements of
Subclause 3405(e) and Subclause 3405(f) for surface
regularity measured by ordinary straight-edge.
6600-4
Stainless steel plate
The texture of the sliding surface of stainless steel plate

used in conjunction with PTFE to form low-friction sliding
surfaces shall be equal to or better than 0.2 Fm Ra in
accordance with the requirements of BS 1134.
(vi)
(g)
Elastomer
Mortar beddings for seating the bearings shall be composed

of an approved sand and either cement or epoxy resin, or
may consist of an approved proprietary mortar. The mortar
shall comply with the following strength requirements:
(1)
Sand-cement mortar
The 7-day compressive strength of 150 mm cubes made

from the mortar and cured in a moist atmosphere for the first
24 hours and afterwards in water at 20C shall be not less
than 1.5 times the average contact stress under the bearing
or 15 MPa, whichever is the greater.
(2)
Sand-epoxy resin mortar
L = length of bearing in the transverse direction, in

mm
The cured compressive cube strength of the mortar shall be

not less than two times the average contact stress under the
bearing, or 20 MPa, whichever is the greater.
B = width of bearing in the span direction, in mm

t = thickness of individual elastomer layers, in mm
(3)
Proprietary mortar
n = number of elastomer layers.
The strength requirements for proprietary mortars shall be

in accordance with either Subclause 6604(a)(vi)(1) or (2) as
may be relevant.
(b)
Concrete hinges
Concrete hinges shall be constructed in accordance with the

details shown on the Drawings.
Construction joints shall not be formed in the throat area.
Where a joint is necessary, it shall be formed as a recess
below the throat, level with the top reinforcement mat. The
width of the recess shall be slightly greater than that of the
throat.
Care shall be taken to eliminate the formation of shrinkage
cracks within the throat.
During construction, adequate bracing and support shall be
provided to the satisfaction of the Engineer to prevent
rotation in the throat from the time of casting to completion
of the structure incorporating the hinge. During the course
of construction the hinge shall not be subjected to conditions
which will induce tensile stresses in the throat area.
Upon completion of the structural members incorporating
the hinge, the space around the throat shall be filled and
sealed with an approved compressible material.
(c)
Roofing felt
Roofing felt used as bearing strips shall consist of at least

three layers.
Where lubricated linings are specified, the roofing felt shall
be saturated with used motor oil and then liberally dusted
with graphite powder before it is laid on the bearing surface.
(d)
Elastomeric bearings
(i)
Technical data
The steel plates shall be encased in a 3 mm thick

elastomer layer.
(3)
Hardness and type of elastomer
The IRHD hardness and type of elastomer, ie natural or

synthetic rubber, from which the specified bearings are to be
manufactured.
(4)
Identification
Each bearing shall be identified by a number.

(ii)
Alternative bearings
Where alternative bearings are offered by the Contractor,

they shall be designed in accordance with the requirements
of BS 5400 Part 9.1 for the loadings and deformations
Where a bearing consisting of a type of rubber is offered,
which differs from that which is specified, the bearing shall
be redesigned to make provision for the variation in
hardness and/or type of rubber.
(iii)
Inspection and testing
On completion of the manufacture of the bearings, the

Contractor shall submit bearings selected by the Engineer,
or specially manufactured bearings to serve as samples as
authorised by the Engineer, to an independent testing
authority for testing.
The testing facilities of the manufacturer or supplier may be
used if so approved and on condition that the tests are
conducted in the presence of the Engineer.
The Engineer shall determine which tests are to be
conducted, and the tests shall comply with the appropriate
requirements of Subclause 7111(a). Payment will be made
under Item 71.02 for these tests, for bearings damaged, and
for sample bearings.
The following technical data for the elastomeric bearings will

be supplied on the Drawings, and shall also be supplied on
drawings prepared by the Contractor for submission to the
Engineer:
Copies of test results and certificates for the abovementioned tests shall be submitted by the Contractor to the
Engineer in good time to enable the Engineer to assess the
information before the bearings are installed.
(1)
The dimensional tolerances for the bearings shall comply

with the requirements of Subclause 6803(h).
Design loads and deformations
The critical design-load combinations and co-existing

rotations and horizontal displacements for each bearing or
each group of identical bearings.
(2)
Size and construction of bearing
The size and construction of the bearing shall be designated

by:
L x B x n(t)
where:
Before the bearings are dispatched to the site of the Works,

each bearing, with the exception of large bearings as
provided for in the Project Specifications, shall be subjected
simultaneously to a vertical load equal to 150% of the
maximum design load, and to a shear distortion equal to
150% of the maximum design value. The bearings shall be
visually inspected for defects by the Engineer or his
nominee and shall not at any stage under this test show any
cracks visible to the naked eye or any other defects. The
cost of this testing shall be included in the rate tendered for
Item 71.01.
6600-5
The Engineer may instruct that one bearing of each

consignment shall be cut open with a view to a visual
assessment of the bonding and the thickness of layers.
(e)
Proprietary bearings
(i)
General
This Clause covers custom-built bearings and bearings

manufactured under licence, except elastomeric bearings.
Combined bearings, consisting of an assembly of an
elastomeric bearing in conjunction with a low-friction sliding
or mechanical component shall fall under this Clause.
The tenderer may base his tender on any bearing which
complies with the specified requirements, provided that the
efficacy of the bearing has been verified by tests and
successful previous use. Evidence hereof as well as
information on the durability and suitability of the bearings
for the specified use shall be submitted to the Engineer for
consideration.
Details of the product guarantee shall be submitted with the
tender.
(ii)
Drawings and approval
Prior to manufacturing the bearings, the Contractor or his

nominee shall submit the following information to the
Engineer for consideration:
(1)
The manufacturer's specification containing detailed
information on the design standards, materials, manufacture
and technical data.
(2)
Drawings complying with the provision in Clause
1221 showing the bearing construction and installation
details.
(3)
Friction properties based on actual tests conducted
on the relevant materials.
(iii)
Technical requirements
(1)
The average pressure on the area of the elastomer
shall not exceed 25 MPa under the serviceability limit state,
unless otherwise prescribed by the Engineer.
(2)
The maximum average contact stress and maximum
edge stress on the concrete or mortar bedding shall not
exceed 0.5 and 0.6 times the 28-day cube characteristic
compressive strength under the serviceability limit state
respectively, unless otherwise prescribed by the Engineer.
(3)
The bearing pad shall be of dimensions as will fit into
the space allowed for its installation. Major alterations to the
contiguous members will not be permitted.
(v)
Construction
Unless otherwise specified, the following shall be complied

with:
(1)
The thickness of the elastomer disc shall be not less
than 0.066 times its diameter.
(2)
Approved lubricants only shall be used on the PTFE
sliding surfaces.
(3)
The bearing shall be provided with tight-fitting seals
to prevent the ingress of dust or deleterious matter onto the
moving parts. The seals shall be of an approved type and
sufficiently durable to last in excess of 50 years.
(4)
The assembled bearing shall be supplied with
welded or bolted lugs or straps, temporarily securing the
moving parts firmly in position to ensure that no undesirable
relative movement occurs before or during construction.
(5)
The bearing shall be recessed into adaptor plates or
be of such construction as to facilitate removal of the
bearing from the installed position without damage to any
part of the bearing or the surrounding material after the
relevant structural member has been raised by 15 mm or the
distance specified.
(6)
Anchors and holding-down bolts shall be of the
specified material.
The following technical requirements will be supplied on the

Drawings, and shall also be supplied on the Drawings
prepared by the Contractor for submission to the Engineer:
(7)
Corrosion protection of all exposed steel surfaces,
with the exception of the stainless-steel sliding plate, shall
involve the following treatment:
(1)
Preparing the surfaces by abrasive blasting to a

finish equal to the Sa3 finish of Swedish Standard
SIS 05 59 00 or equivalent.
Spraying the surfaces with zinc to comply with the

requirements of SABS 1391 Part I or equivalent for
Type Zn 150 surfacing.
Coating the zinc-sprayed surfaces within four hours

with a sealer compatible with the zinc and the
subsequent coats of paint.
Applying a coat of chlorinated rubber paint with a

minimum of 75 Fm of dry-film thickness and of a
colour which differs from that of the final coat of
paint.
Applying a final coat of chlorinated rubber paint with

a minimum of 75 Fm of dry-film thickness and of
dark grey colour.
Design loads and movement
The maximum and minimum vertical loads and co-existing

horizontal loads as well as the maximum horizontal load and
co-existing vertical load.
The maximum values in each direction of the reversible and
irreversible movements and the rotation about each axis.
(2)
Identification
Identification of each bearing by a number, data on the

degree of freedom of movement (fixed, multi-directional or
unidirectional bearings) and the type of bearing (spherical,
elastomer-pot, etc) shall appear on each bearing.
(iv)
Design
The bearings shall be designed in accordance with the

requirements and recommendations of BS 5400 Part 9.1.
The following shall also be complied with:
6600-6
Surfaces in contact with concrete shall be sprayed

with zinc so that it complies with the requirements of
SABS 1391 Part I or equivalent for Type Zn 150
surfacing.
The bearings shall be accurately installed to the specified

level, alignment and orientation, all within the construction
tolerances set out in Subclause 6803(h) and the details
(vi)
Inspection and testing
Where the bearing has long sliding plates, the latter shall be
rigidly supported to prevent their being distorted under the
weight of the wet concrete and the construction loads.
The Engineer may require tests to be conducted to verify

compliance of the bearing with the specifications and/or its
satisfactory performance under the design loads. Payment
for this testing will be made under Item 71.02.
Test certificates of all the tests conducted shall be submitted
to the Engineer.
The Contractor shall give the Engineer at least seven days
notice prior to final assembly of the bearings to enable the
Engineer to inspect the bearings at the factory.
Under no circumstances shall bearings be taken apart and
reassembled on the site, except where it is an unavoidable
feature of the installation procedure, in which case the
dismantling, installation and reassembly shall be under the
supervision of qualified personnel.
Rehabilitation, modification and repair work to bearings shall
be carried out only in the factory or in an approved
engineering Works.
(f)
On completion of installation of proprietary bearings, the

Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a certificate from the
manufacturer or supplier of the bearings certifying
acceptance of the installation. The issuing of such a
certificate shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility under this Contract. Payment for the
inspection of the bearings by the manufacturer or supplier
and the issuing of the certificate will be made under Item
71.02.
6605
PARAPETS, RAILINGS AND SIDEWALKS
(a)
Materials
(i)
Concrete
Storage and handling
The bearings shall at all times be stored under cover and

clear of the ground, away from sunlight, heat, oils and
chemicals deleterious to the bearings. The bearings shall
not be stacked in a manner or on a surface which will cause
distortion of the bearings.
The bearings shall be handled with care to ensure that they
are not subjected to impact loads or any other conditions
which may be harmful.
(h)
After installation, the polyethylene wrapping shall be

removed, the bearing and the space around the bearing
thoroughly cleaned and the lugs removed as prescribed by
the Engineer.
Dowels and guides
Where dowels and guides are used in conjunction with

bearings they shall not complicate or prevent the removal of
the bearings.
(g)
Before the bearing is incorporated into the structure, it shall

be cleaned to remove all deleterious substances and
adhering matter, after which it shall be wrapped in
polyethylene sheeting and so sealed as to prevent the
ingress of mortar and/or slush onto the bearing during the
course of construction.
Installation
The concrete surfaces of elements required to receive

bearings shall comply with the requirements of Subclause
6209(c). Plastering of the surface will not under any
circumstances be permitted.
Before the mortar bedding is constructed, the concrete
surface shall be chipped back to expose the aggregate and
leave a sound irregular surface. Bonding of the mortar
bedding to the concrete surface shall be in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations and the Engineer's
instructions.
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the bearings shall
be installed on a horizontal plane and shall be in full contact
with the concrete and bedding surfaces.
To accommodate soffit irregularities and camber in the case
of precast members, the member shall be lowered onto a
mortar skim on top of the bearing. The member shall then
be propped until the mortar skim has hardened into a
wedge.

requirements of Sections 6200, 6300, 6400 and Clause
6603.
(ii)
Structural steel
Structural steel work shall comply with the provisions of

Subclause 6702(a).
(iii)
Mortar
Mortar shall comply with the requirements of Subclause

6604(a).
(b)
Concrete parapets
Concrete parapets shall be either cast in situ or precast or

a combination of the two as shown on the Drawings. Where
possible, precast elements shall be placed with the
unformed surface downwards or outwards.
Concrete parapets shall be constructed after the removal of
the falsework and the completion of the prestressing, but not
before the bridge deck has been accurately measured so as
to determine the final lines and levels.
Service ducts in parapets and blocks shall be fixed and cast
into position in accordance with the requirements of Clause
6411 and the details shown on the Drawings.
The pipes and fittings to be used for the construction of the
ducting shall be rigid PVC pipes and fittings with flexible
rubber joints which comply with the requirements of SABS
967 or equivalent. Duct ends shall be provided with suitable
6600-7
conical wooden stoppers to prevent dirt, concrete, etc, from

entering the ducts. Two strands of 2.5 mm diameter
galvanised steel wire shall be threaded through each duct.
The strands shall extend 2 m beyond each end and be
wedged firmly into position with the wooden stoppers.
Inspection eyes for the ducts shall be constructed in
No separate payment will be made for service ducts in
parapets and end blocks and the rates tendered for the
parapets and end blocks shall include full compensation for
the provision and installation of service ducts complete with
stoppers, draw wire and inspection eyes.
(c)
Steel railings
All steelwork shall be manufactured in accordance with the

requirements of Section 6700.
The previously cast bridge deck area shall be prepared as

specified in Clause 6408 to receive the sidewalk concrete.
Forms shall be accurately set to the final lines and levels
and shall be firmly held in position during the placing of the
concrete. Stops at the ends of sections shall be accurately
placed to ensure that joints between adjacent sections will
be truly perpendicular to the surface of the concrete and at
right angles to the edge of the road or to the skew angle of
the deck at the expansion joint.
After removal of the forms, the exposed surfaces of the
kerbs and copings shall be rubbed and finished in
accordance with the requirements of Subclauses 6208(a)
and (c) and 6209(b). All edges shall be rounded to a radius
of 20 mm unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
(f)
Concrete surface finish requirements
A mortar bed, not less than 10 mm in thickness, shall be

provided below all steel base plates over the full dimensions
of the plate. The sides of the beds shall be neatly chamfered
at 45. All open spaces between the bolt and the sides of
the holes in the base plate shall be grout filled.
All formed concrete surfaces shall have a Class F3 surface

finish as specified in Subclause 6207(d) and all unformed
concrete surfaces shall have a Class U3 surface finish in
accordance with Subclause 6209(c).
Steelwork which is to be cast or grouted into concrete shall

be completely painted to a distance of 75 mm in the
concrete or grout, and shall be cleaned of all loose rust, mill
scale, oil or other material which may impair the bond
between the concrete and steel.
(g)
All steelwork shall be painted in the shop and on site in

accordance with the provisions of Section 5900. Surfaces
which will be inaccessible after erection of the units shall be
painted before erection commences. If called for on the
Drawings or in the Schedule of Quantities, steelwork shall
be galvanised and painted. Galvanising shall be done after
fabrication, in accordance with SABS 763 or equivalent for
Type A1 articles.
(h)
(d)
Numbers for structures
(i)
Number plates
Number plates shall be fixed in the positions and according

to the method of fixing shown on the Drawings.
(ii)
Painted numbers
The surface onto which the numbers are to be painted shall

be prepared in accordance with the requirements of
Subclause 5909(a). The background shall be of at least two
coats of the prescribed paint. The letters and figures shall
be in accordance with the details given on the Drawings and
shall be written at the prescribed positions with a template.
(iii)
Transition blocks
Transition blocks shall be constructed in accordance with

the details shown on the Drawings.
Nose Endings
Nose endings at balustrades shall be constructed in

accordance with the details on the Drawings.
6606
(a)
Weep holes, drainage pipes and channelling
Weep holes shall not be placed within 40 mm of any

reinforcement and shall be carefully cleaned and kept clean.
Drainage pipes shall be of the material prescribed on the
Drawings, and the interior surface shall, on completion, be
smooth and clean.
Cast in situ concrete channelling shall be provided next to
the kerbing if shown on the Drawings and according to the
details provided. Concrete work shall be carried out in
accordance with the provisions of Section 6400 and
channelling shall be given a Class U2 surface finish as
specified in Subclause 6209(b). The channelling shall be
bonded to the bridge deck concrete in accordance with the
provisions of Clause 6408.
Numbers shaped in concrete
Bridge numbers shall be placed and shaped in accordance

with the requirements shown on the Drawings. The
minimum concrete cover over the steel reinforcement
behind the numbers shall not be less than the prescribed
cover for the structural member in question.
(b)
No-fines concrete blocks
Blocks shall be of the class of prescribed no-fines concrete

and to the required dimensions and shall be placed in
advance of backfilling.
No-fines concrete shall comply with the requirements of
Clause 6602.
(e)
Concrete sidewalks
After completion of the prestressing and the removal of the

formwork, the sidewalks and kerbing shall be constructed,
but not before the bridge deck has been accurately surveyed
to establish final lines and levels.
6600-8
(c)
Item
Synthetic-fibre filter fabric shall be of the type and grade

shown on the Drawings or specified in the Project
Specifications. Filter fabric shall be placed as shown on the
Drawings and shall be protected against sunlight and
mechanical damage during storage and installation.
The fabric shall comply with the requirements of Subclause
2104(a).
(d)
Crushed stone in drainage strips behind walls
The crushed stone used in drainage strips shall comply with

the requirements for 19.0 mm nominal size stone as
specified in SABS 1083 or equivalent. The crushed stone
shall be wrapped in synthetic-fibre geotextile and placed in
accordance with the details shown on the Drawings or as
The fabric shall comply with the requirements of Subclause
2104(a).
6607
BOLT GROUPS
BRACKETS
FOR
ELECTRIFICATION
The Contractor shall supply and install bolt groups in bridge

decks for the electrification brackets of Railway Owners.
The bolt groups shall consist of stainless-steel sockets
complete with stainless-steel bolts and mild-steel plates.
The sockets, bolts and plates shall be manufactured in
accordance with the details shown on the Drawings. The
Contractor shall install the sockets in bridge decks in the
positions and in the manner shown on the Drawings.
On completion of the deck, the Contractor shall ensure that
the threads of the bolts and sockets are clean and that the
bolts can be secured in the sockets. The Railway Owner
will supply and install the brackets at a later stage.
66.03 Proprietary expansion joints:

(a)
Prime cost sum allowed
for purchasing and taking delivery of expansion joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . prime cost sum
(b)
Percentage on prime cost
sum for charges and profit . . . . . . . . . . . . . per cent (%)
Payment for purchasing and taking delivery of proprietary
expansion joints shall be in accordance with the provisions
of the General Conditions of Contract (see Note 2 below).
Item
Unit
66.04 Installation of proprietary expansion joints:

(a)
(Description of joint
measured per metre) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(b)
measured by number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be either the metre of
complete joint of each type installed or the number of
complete joints of each type installed.
supplying all materials not covered under Item 66.03,
transporting, handling and storing, and all labour,
equipment, shaping the recesses, and incidentals required
for installing the expansion joint complete in accordance
with instructions (see Notes 1 and 2 below).
The tendered rate shall be final and binding, irrespective of
the type or make of joint finally installed.
Item
6608
Unit
Unit

66.05 Expansion joints:
Item
Unit
66.01 Cast in situ nofines concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)

The provisions of Clause 6415 Item 64.01 shall apply
mutatis mutandis.
Item
Unit
66.02 Precast no-fines

concrete units (class
of concrete and
description of unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(a)
(b)
measured by number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of complete
expansion joint of each type installed or the number of
completed joints of each type installed.
supplying all the materials, manufacturing the expansion
joint, transporting, handling and storing, and all labour,
equipment, shaping the recesses, and incidentals required
for installing the expansion joint complete in accordance
with instructions (see Notes 1 and 2 below).

units of each size and type in position in the Works.
The tendered rate for each precast concrete unit shall
include full compensation for providing all the materials,
labour, plant and formwork required for manufacturing the
unit complete as shown on the Drawings and for
transporting and placing the unit in position.
6600-9
Item
Unit
66.06 Filled joints:

(a)
and thickness of joint filler
for joints measured per square
metre) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)

supplying all materials, forming or cutting the concrete to the
required shape and size, all labour, equipment and
incidentals required for sealing the joint complete in
accordance with the prescriptions, and for all waste
materials (see Note 2 below).
Item
(b)
and thickness of joint filler
for joints measured per metre) . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of filled
joint calculated from the surface area of the joint. Where
the filled joint is 150 mm or less in depth, the unit of
measurement shall be the metre of filled joints measured
along the joint centre line. Concrete surfaces formed prior
to the construction of the final surface for completing the
filled joint shall be measured under Items 62.01, 62.02,
63.03 or 62.04, as may be applicable.
supplying and installing the joint filler and all materials not
covered under Item 66.08, and for all labour and incidentals
required for completing the filled joint as prescribed.
66.09 Proprietary bearings:

(a)
Prime cost sum allowed
for purchasing and taking delivery of bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . prime cost sum
(b)
Percentage on prime
cost sum for charges and
profit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . percentage (%)
Payment for purchasing and taking delivery of proprietary
bearings, complete with anchor bolts and/or dowels, shall be
in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions
of Contract.
Item
Item
Unit
66.07 Unfilled joints:

(a)
for joints measured per square
metre) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
(b)
for joints measured per linear
metre) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
unfilled joint, calculated in accordance with the joint area.
Where, however, the depth of the joint is 150 mm or less,
the unit of measurement shall be the metre of unfilled joint
measured along the joint centre line. Concrete areas
formed before the final surface is constructed to complete
the unfilled joint, shall be measured under Items 62.01,
62.02, 62.03 or 62.04, as may be applicable.
providing and applying the bond breaker and all materials
not paid for under Item 66.08, also for the labour and
incidentals required for completing the unfilled joint as
prescribed.
Item
Unit
66.08 Sealing joints with:

(a)
Sealant (description
of joint, sealant and size) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(b)
Seal (description of
joint, seal and size) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(c)
Waterstop (description
of joint, waterstop and size) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of sealant, seal
or waterstop of each type installed.
6600-10
Unit
Unit
66.10 Installing the proprietary bearings

(description of each
type, and state class) . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
bearings of each type and class installed.
supplying all the materials not covered under Item 66.09,
constructing the bedding, transporting, handling and storing,
and all labour, equipment and incidentals required for
installing the bearings complete as detailed.
The tendered rate shall be final and binding, irrespective of
the type or make of bearing finally installed.
Item
Unit
66.11 Bearings (description of each type

and class) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
bearings of each type and class installed.
supplying all the materials, including anchor bolts and/or
dowels, constructing the bedding, manufacturing the
bearings, transporting, handling and storing, and all labour,
equipment and incidentals required for installing the
bearings complete as detailed.
Item
Unit
66.12 Concrete hinges:

(a)
(Description of hinge
(b)
(Description of hinge
measured by number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)

complete hinge of each type manufactured and installed or
the number of complete hinges of each type manufactured
and installed.
supplying all materials, including formwork, manufacturing
the hinges, transporting, handling and storing, sealing the
hinges, and all labour, equipment and incidentals required
for installing the hinges complete as detailed.
The tendered rate for steel railings shall include full

compensation for all steelwork and corrosion protection,
including fastenings, anchor bolts, mortar bedding, etc, as
may be required for erecting the railings.
Item
Unit
66.17 End blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
Unit
The unit of measurement of bridge end blocks shall be the

number of end blocks constructed complete in accordance
with the Drawings.
66.13 Bearing strips

(description of the
material and number of
layers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)

materials, labour, plant, and other incidentals required for
constructing the end blocks complete as specified,
excluding only reinforcing steel.

bearing area lined with the specified material irrespective of
the number of layers placed.
Item
Item

suppling all the materials, transporting, handling and storing,
and all labour and incidentals required for installing the
bearing strips complete as detailed.
Item
Unit
66.14 Dowels/guides (description of each type) . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)

dowels/guides of each type installed.
supplying all materials, including anchor bolts,
manufacturing the dowels/guides, transporting, handling and
storing, and all labour, equipment and incidentals required
for installing the dowels/guides complete as detailed.
Item
Unit
66.18 Numbers for structures:

(a)
Number plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(b)
Painted numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(c)
Numbers formed in concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be either the number of
bridge number plates provided and installed, or the number
of complete numbers painted on the structures, or the
number of complete numbers formed in concrete. A bridge
number may consist of a combination of letters and digits,
eg B1533.
providing and installing either the number plates, or
preparing the surface and painting the numbers, or forming
the numbers in concrete, and for all material, labour and
equipment required in this connection.
Unit
Item
Unit
66.15 Concrete parapets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)

The unit of measurement for concrete parapets shall be the
metre of concrete parapet complete in accordance with the
Drawings. Concrete parapets shall include all work above
the top level of the sidewalks or, where not placed on a
sidewalk, above the top of the bridge deck concrete,
wingwalls or retaining walls and shall also include any
kerbing and coping forming an integral part of the concrete
parapet.
The tendered rate for concrete parapets shall include full
compensation for all concrete, formwork, service ducts,
drawing wires and accessories. The rates will exclude only
the cost of reinforcing steel as this will be measured and
paid for under another pay item.
Item
Unit
66.16 Steel railings

(type described) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
66.19 Drainage pipes and

weep holes:
(a)
Drainage pipes:
(i)
(Type and size indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(ii)
(Type and size indicated) . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(b)
Weep holes:
(i)
(Type and size indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(ii)
(Type and size indicated) . . . . . . . . . number (No)

pipe/weep hole or the number of pipes/weep holes of each
type and size of pipe/weep hole completed.
supplying all the materials, manufacturing and installing the
pipes and making weep holes.
The unit of measurement for steel railings shall be the metre

of railing complete in accordance with the Drawings.
6600-11
Item
Unit
66.20 Drainage gulleys

(description of each
type given) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of drainage
gulleys of each type installed.

labour, constructional plant and materials required, for filling
the recesses with concrete or nosing material, 20 mm x
20 mm plastijoint seal between the end block and the
transition block, steel cover plate complete with anchor
bolts, and all incidentals required for constructing the nose
endings complete.

providing all the material and manufacturing and installing
the drainage inlets.
Item
Item
The unit of measurement shall be the number of each size

of concrete transition block constructed complete in
Unit
66.21 Synthetic-fibre filter

fabric (type indicated
and description) . . . . . . . . . . . . square metre (m2)
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of filter
fabric installed as specified, including the specified overlap.
supplying, cutting and installing the filter fabric, and for
waste material.
Item
Unit
Unit
66.25 Concrete transition blocks

(length indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)

labour, constructional plant, materials and all incidentals
required for constructing the transition blocks.
Item
Unit
66.26 Supplying and installation

bolt groups complete for
electrification brackets
(a)
Single-bolt groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
66.22 Concrete channelling

(size indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(b)
Double-bolt groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)

concrete channelling of each size constructed.

of bolt group installed complete in position in accordance

providing all the material, all labour, equipment and
expenses required for completing the work.
Item
Unit
66.23 Crushed stone in

drainage strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . cubic metre (m3)
crushed stone placed in position as specified, in accordance
with the details shown on the Drawings or instructed by the
Engineer.
procuring, furnishing and placing the crushed stone, and for
wrapping it in synthetic-fibre geotextile as specified.
The geotextile will be measured for payment under Item
66.21.
Item
Unit
66.24 Nose endings at

balustrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of nose
endings constructed complete in accordance with the details
6600-12

procuring and furnishing all materials, manufacturing,
transporting and storing, and all labour, constructional plant
and materials required for installing the bolt groups as
specified.
Notes:
(1)
The cost of forming the open joint(s) shall not be
included in the rates tendered for Items 66.04 and 66.05 as
payment for this work shall be made under Item 62.06.
(2)
Separate payment shall not be made for supplying
and/or installing the seal in proprietary expansion joints or
the seal between concrete or synthetic nosings.
(3)
Measurement of and payment for concrete sidewalks
(including kerbing and coping) shall be made in accordance
with Clauses 6210, 6310 and 6415.
SERIES 6000 :
STRUCTURES
(d)
SECTION 6700 :
STRUCTURAL STEELWORK
Mild-steel rivets shall comply with the requirements of SABS

435 or equivalent.
High-tensile rivets shall be so
manufactured that they can be driven and their heads
formed satisfactorily without the physical properties of the
steel being impaired.
CONTENTS
6701
6702
6703
6704
6705
6706
6707
6708
SCOPE
MATERIALS
CODES OF PRACTICE
SHOP DETAILS
FABRICATION AND ASSEMBLY
ERECTION
TESTING
6701
SCOPE
This Section covers the manufacture, transport and erection

of structural steelwork for minor structures, eg overhead
road-sign structures. It does not apply to major steel
structures such as steel bridges, which will be covered in the
Project Specifications where work of this nature is required.
(e)
MATERIALS
(a)
Structural steel
The quality, handling and storage of all consumables shall

be so as to achieve the desirable properties of the weld
metal.
The welding consumables used shall be appropriate to
produce weld metal which will yield all the weld-metal test
specimens as specified in BS 709 having both minimum
yield and minimum tensile strengths not less than those of
the parent metal.
Mild steel:
BS 4360, Grade 43A; or

SABS 1431, Grade 300W.
High-yield stress steel:
BS 4360, Grade 50B; or

SABS 1431, Grade 350W.
The dimensions and properties of rolled steel sections shall

comply with the prescriptions given in the structural steel
tables issued by the SA Institute of Steel Construction or
equivalent.
Steel tubes
Steel tubes shall comply with the requirements of SABS

657, Part I or equivalent.
(c)
Test certificates
The Contractor shall submit test certificates, as required by

the Engineer, of the structural steel and anchor bolts that will
be used.
Structural steel shall comply with the following requirements:
(b)
Welding consumables
Welding electrodes shall comply with the requirements of

(f)
6702
Rivets
6703
CODES OF PRACTICE
The design, where undertaken by the Contractor, of all work

equivalent.
6704
SHOP DETAILS
Where shop details have not been furnished on the

Drawings, the Contractor shall prepare his own shop details
in accordance with the provisions of Clause 1221. Shop
details shall be approved and signed by the Engineer prior
to the fabrication of any items.
6705
FABRICATION AND ASSEMBLY
(a)
General
Bolts, nuts and washers
Ordinary bolts and nuts shall be bolts and nuts used for
transferring forces by tensile stress, compressive stress and
shear stress without any friction-grip action being
considered. Ordinary bolts and nuts shall comply with
SABS 135, SABS 136 or SABS 1143 or equivalent.
All structural steel both before and after fabrication shall be

within the tolerances specified in Subclause 6803(j) and
shall be flat, straight (unless required to be formed to
another shape) and free from twists.
Washers for ordinary bolts and nuts shall comply with the
(b)
High-strength friction-grip bolts, nuts and washers shall

comply with the requirements of SABS 1282 or equivalent.
Marking the steel
At all stages of fabrication, all structural steel other than

Grade 300W and Grade 43A steel shall be clearly marked
by grade by means of a suitable marking system.
Other approved friction-grip fasteners equal to the above

may be used.
(c)
Cutting
Steel shall be cut by sawing, shearing with shears, cropping,

or flame-cutting.
6700-1
Edges shall be free from any defects or distortions and all

burrs, notches and similar defects shall be removed.
All structural welds shall be full-strength joints.
(i)
(d)
Bolting
Holes for fasteners
Holes for fasteners shall not be formed by flame cutting.

Holes in light members not thicker than 12 mm or the
diameter of the hole, whichever is the smaller, may be
punched.
Holes for fasteners of up to 25 mm in diameter shall not be
more than 2 mm larger than the diameter of the fastener
and holes for larger fasteners not more than 3 mm larger
than the diameter of the fastener.
The jointed parts shall be firmly drawn together. Where

necessary, tapering washers shall be used for each bolt
head and nut to transfer the compressive stress over its full
surface. Where bolt holes have greater than normal
clearance, washers shall be placed under the bolt heads
and nuts.
The length of each bolt shall be such that, after tightening,
at least one full thread projects through the nut on the
outside and at least one full thread (in addition to the thread
run-out) remains clear between the nut and the bolt head.
Holes for friction-grip fasteners shall be in accordance with

(j)
Friction-grip fastening
All burrs shall be removed from holes before assembly.
(e)
Joints in compression
The abutting surfaces of joints dependent on contact for the

transmission of load shall be accurately prepared so that the
full area intended for bearing will be in contact as specified
in Subclause 6803(j).
The use of friction-grip bolts shall be in accordance with

SABS 094 or equivalent. Where use is made of equivalent
types of friction-grip fasteners, they shall comply with the
requirements of SABS 094 or equivalent for equivalent
fasteners and shall be installed in accordance with the
appropriate requirements of SABS 094 or equivalent.
(k)
(f)
Hollow sections
Unless protection against corrosion is provided by other

means, the interior of any hollow section shall be sealed to
prevent the ingress of moisture. Where a sealed hollow
member is holed for a fastener or pin, precautionary
measures shall be taken to prevent the ingress of water to
the interior of the member. Vent holes for galvanising shall
be sealed after galvanising has been completed.
(g)
Wherever possible, rivetting shall be done with pneumatic

equipment.
Rivetted units shall have all parts firmly drawn together and
aligned before rivetting. Every rivet shall, when driven,
completely fill the hole and shall have a well-formed head or,
if countersunk, fill the countersink completely.
All loose, eccentric-headed, badly formed, burnt or
otherwise defective rivets shall be cut out and replaced.
Alignment of holes
(l)
All matching holes for fasteners or pins shall be accurately

aligned so that the fasteners can be inserted freely through
the assembled members in a direction at right angles to the
faces in contact. Drifting for aligning the holes shall not
distort the metal or enlarge the holes.
(h)
Trimming
All fabricated steel work shall be neatly trimmed so as not to

show any sharp edges. Acute angles shall be rounded off
to a radius of at least 1.0 mm.
(m)
Corrosion prevention
(i)
Painting
Welding
Welding shall be done in accordance with the requirements

of BS 5135.
The welding techniques shall be such as to avoid undue
distortion and to minimise shrinking stresses.
All slag shall be removed.
Where required for certain welding:
(i)
the manufacturer shall hold a valid weldingprocedures certificate in accordance with SABS 044 Part III
or equivalent for Grade B welding joints, and the welding
shall be done by a welder qualified in accordance with SABS
044 Part IV or equivalent; or
(ii)
the welder shall hold a valid certificate of
competency in accordance with SABS 044 Part V or
equivalent for the specified type of welding.
6700-2
Rivetting
Before removal from the place of manufacture the steelwork

shall be painted as specified in Section 5900.
Where the finishing coats are to be applied on the site, the
shop painting shall include the application of an undercoat
Galvanised steel shall not be painted unless painting is
specifically called for in the specifications.
(ii)
Sprayed metal coatings
Where the sprayed metal coating of steel surfaces is called

for, it shall be done in accordance with the requirements of
SABS 1391 Part I or equivalent. The type of metal used
shall be as specified, and, unless otherwise specified, the
metal coating shall comply with the requirements of Type Al
150 or Type Zn 150.
(iii)
Galvanising
Where the galvanising of structural steelwork is required, the

members shall be hot-dip galvanised. Structural steel
members shall be given an 85 Fm coating or such other
thickness as may be specified, in accordance with SABS
763 or equivalent and sheet steel and strip a Class M
coating in accordance with SABS 934 or equivalent.
All nuts, bolts, screws and threaded articles shall be hotdipped galvanised in accordance with the appropriate
requirements of SABS 763 or equivalent for Type C1 or
Type C2 articles.
alignment and height and after the approval of the Engineer

has been obtained to proceed with the grouting. The
column base plates shall be supported by the top and
bottom nuts and by steel wedges. The area under the steel
shall be thoroughly cleaned and shall be dust and oil-free,
and the concrete shall be thoroughly rinsed with water to
leave the surface clean and moist.
The grout shall be an approved non-shrinking, pourable,
cementitious grout. The grout shall be prepared and applied
strictly in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations and the Engineers directives.
Cut ends and small damaged areas shall be repaired by the

application of a zinc-rich paint or by zinc spraying.
Leak-proof formwork shall be used for the pourable grout,

and all corners shall be chamfered. The surface finish shall
be Class F2 and Class U2 as applicable.
6706
ERECTION
6707
TESTING
(a)
General
(a)
Testing by the Engineer
Where specified, details of the method of erection shall be

submitted to the Engineer for approval. All structural steel
shall be stored, transported, handled and erected so as not
to subject it to undue stress or damage.
The Engineer may nominate a testing authority to inspect

the Works and to conduct such tests as he may deem to be
necessary to test compliance with the specifications. Where
required, test samples of welds shall be prepared by the
Contractor, free of charge.
Erection over traffic is not permitted, and a temporary

diversion for traffic shall be provided.
Payment for these tests shall be made under Item 71.02.
Provision for traffic accommodation will be paid for in

accordance with the appropriate items under Section 1500.
(b)
(b)
Safety during erection
During the erection of a structure, the steelwork shall be

bolted, braced or otherwise secured so as to make
adequate provision for all erection loads.
(c)
Alignment
Process control
Welds shall be regularly inspected and tested by the

Contractor in terms of his obligations in regard to process
control, as described in Clause 1205. This shall include
visual inspection of welds to ensure that no undercutting,
uneven lengths, porosity, or evidence of cracking occurs
and that full fusion of the metals has been achieved. In
doubtful areas, cores containing weld metal and adjacent
parent material shall, if so required by the Engineer, be cut
out, polished and examined and the hole repaired.
Each part of a structure shall be aligned as soon as possible

after erection.
Members shall not be permanently
connected until sufficiently large members of the structure
have been aligned, plumbed, levelled, and temporarily
secured to prevent their displacement during the erection or
alignment of the remainder of the structure.
At least 30% of the welds shall be examined by ultrasonic or

radiographic means. If more than 5% of the examined
welds show unsatisfactory results, additional examinations
covering all welds shall be performed. Certificates of the
examination confirming that the steel plates and welds
comply with the requirements of SABS 044 Part III or
equivalent shall be submitted to the Engineer.
(d)
The cost of testing shall be deemed to be included in the

rate tendered for Item 67.01 Structural steel.
Corrections
Drift pins, jacking equipment and the like shall not be used
for bringing improperly fabricated members into place. A
moderate degree of cutting and reaming may be done to
correct minor misfits if, in the opinion of the Engineer, this
will not be detrimental to the appearance or strength of the
structure. The burning of holes will not be permitted without
written approval.
6708
Item
Unit
67.01 Structural steel:

(e)
Repairs to painting and site painting
Repairs to painting and site painting shall be effected in

accordance with the provisions of Clause 5907.
(f)
Grouting
(a)
(Structure/article
described) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tonne (t)
(b)
(Structure/article
described) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(c)
(Structure/article
described) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The grout shall be poured under and around the base plates
of columns after the steelwork has been finally checked for
6700-3
The unit of measurement shall be either the tonne or the

metre of erected permanent steel structures or articles, or
the number of erected permanent steel structures or
articles. Where the unit of measurement is the tonne, the
mass of the steel waste caused by punching, drilling,
sheared edges, milling or planning, or metal cut-outs shall
not be deducted, and the mass of rivets, bolts, nuts,
washers, welding fillets or temporary bracing shall not be
added. In computing the mass of steel, the nominal mass
per unit of length or area will be used and tolerances and
other permissible deviations will be ignored.
preparing shop details where not provided on the Drawings,
the supply of all the required materials, fabrication, process
control, loading, transporting to the site, off-loading, and
erecting. It shall also include full compensation for all nuts,
bolts, washers, rivets, cutting, waste, and any temporary
bracing necessary for transporting and erecting.
Item
Unit
67.03 Corrosion protection:

(a)
Sprayed-on metal:
(i)
(Type of metal and
thickness or type symbol of
coating indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tonne (t)
(ii)
(Type of metal and
coating indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(iii)
(Type of metal and
coating indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(b)
Hot-dip galvanising:

supplying and pouring the specified grout under and around
the base plates of steel columns, for procuring and
supplying all the necessary labour, constructional plant,
tools and materials, as well as waste, formwork for the
grout, and finishing to obtain the required surface finish for
the grout under and around base plates of steel columns.
(i)
(Thickness or type
symbol of zinc coat indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tonne (t)
Item
The unit of measurement shall be either a tonne or a metre

of steel structures or articles protected against corrosion, or
the number of steel structures or articles protected against
corrosion. The quantities are calculated as specified in Item
67.01.
Unit
67.02 Anchor bolts:

(a)
(Description of each
assembly, and grade/type of
steel, diameter and length
indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kilogram (kg)
(b)
(Description of each
assembly, and grade/type of
steel, diameter and length
indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be either the kilogram of
installed anchor-bolt assemblies or the number of installed
anchor-bolt assemblies.
materials, fabrication, handling, transporting and installing
the anchor-bolt assemblies, including corrosion protection.
6700-4
(ii)
(Thickness or type
symbol of zinc coat indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . metre (m)
(iii)
(Thickness or type
symbol of zinc coat indicated) . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The tendered rates shall be extra over the rates for Item
67.01 and shall include full compensation for applying the
specified corrosion protection, including surface preparation,
materials, labour, tools, equipment and all incidentals
required.
Note: Payment for painting shall be made under Item
59.01.
SERIES 6000 :
STRUCTURES
SECTION 6800 :
FOR STRUCTURES
CONTENTS
6801
6802
6803
SCOPE
DEFINITIONS
TOLERANCES
6801
SCOPE
This Section covers the requirements in regard to the

construction tolerances applicable to the various structures
and structural members.
6803
TOLERANCES
The tolerances given below shall be the maximum

permissible deviations from the specified dimensions, levels,
alignment, positions, etc, shown on the Drawings of the
structures or structural members.
(a)
Foundations
(i)
Piles
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.167 times the diameter

of the pile, or
100 mm, whichever
shall be the greater
External dimensions:
Prefabricated piles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + 25 mm - 5 mm
6802
DEFINITIONS
Except where otherwise specified, the following aspects of

construction to which tolerances apply shall have the
meanings attributed to them below:
(a)
Position
The position of a structure or structural member shall be the

horizontal position of its centre line(s) and/or centre point(s)
in relation to the overall layout of the Works as shown on the
Drawings.
(b)
Alignment
The alignment of a structure or structural member shall be

the alignment of its centre line(s) in relation to the overall
layout of the Works as shown on the Drawings. Deviation
from true alignment shall be measured in degrees of an arc.
(c)
Leading and cross-sectional dimensions
The leading and cross-sectional dimensions of a structure

or structural member shall be the dimensions relating to
width, length, height, thickness, etc, which collectively
determine its shape, and are shown on the Drawings.
Dimensional tolerances not relating to leading or crosssectional dimensions shall be shown on the Drawings.
(d)
Levels
The level of any structure or structural member shall be the

level of the upper or lower surface, as may be relevant, with
reference to an established datum-level on the site.
(e)
Surface regularity
Surface regularity is the shape of a surface with reference

to a 3 m straight-edge (or template in the case of curved
surfaces) placed on the surface.
Cast in situ piles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . plus-tolerance not

specified, minustolerance 0 mm
Pile-head level : Average level
of trimmed/cut pile head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 mm
Verticality or rake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5
Straightness:
For precast piles the permissible maximum deviation from
straight is 5 mm for piles up to 3 m in length and 1.0 mm
more for each additional metre of pile length.
(ii)
Caissons
Position of top of caisson . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10% of the

smallest outer
dimension of the
caisson, measured
in plan.
Verticality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5
Dimensions:
Wall thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + 25 mm - 5 mm
Outer dimension of circular,
rectangular or square
cross-section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 mm
Level: Upper level of
trimmed/cut caisson head:
Maximum deviation of
average level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 mm
Maximum deviation of any
individual level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 mm
Foundation fill:
Average level of top of fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 mm
The tolerance for surface regularity is expressed as a

distance by which the surface tested may deviate from a
straight-edge (or template in the case of curved surfaces)
held against the surface.
6800-1
(b)
Footings, pile capping slabs, caisson cover

slabs, etc
Alignment: Superstructure as
a whole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 minute
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 mm
Dimensions:
Alignment:
Leading dimensions in plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 mm
Alignment of individual
members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Thickness of slabs, width and

depth of beams: plus-tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 mm
Alignment of members as
they collectively determine
the alignment of the
structure as a whole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 minute
Minus-tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3% of the
specified dimensions within
the range of 5 mm to 15 mm
Dimensions: Leading dimensions in plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 mm
Surface regularity (all surfaces other than upper

surface of deck) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 mm
Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + 25 mm - 15 mm
Bridge and culvert decks, surface tolerances:
Levels: Average level of slabs,

footings, etc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 mm
The tolerances specified in Clause 3405 for the base in

respect of level, grade, cross-section and surface regularity
shall apply. Surface regularity shall be tested by straightedge.
(c)
Columns, walls, piers, abutments, etc
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 mm
(e)
Alignment: Alignment of walls,

piers, abutments and column
groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 minutes
The following tolerances shall apply to precast beams in

addition to the requirements stated in Subclause 6803(d) for
the superstructure.
Dimensions:
The width of the gap between contiguous beams shall not

exceed twice the width of the specified nominal gap shown
on the Drawings or the width of the nominal gap plus
40 mm, whichever is the less, and the overall width between
the outermost beams of the bridge deck shall be within
40 mm of the specified width.
Leading dimensions of walls,

piers and abutments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 mm
Thickness of walls, piers and
abutments and cross-sectional
dimensions of columns:
Plus-tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 mm
Minus-tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3% of the
specified dimensions within
the range of 5 mm to 25 mm
Levels: Average level of
finished or trimmed/cut
columns, piers, walls, abutments, etc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 mm
Verticality:
(i)
Using ordinary
formwork . . . . . . . . . . . 1 in 400.Maximum 25 mm
(ii)
Using sliding
formwork . . . . . . . . . . . 1 in 200.Maximum 50 mm
Surface regularity:
(i)
Using ordinary formwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 mm
(ii)
Using sliding formwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 mm
(d)
Bridge and culvert superstructure
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 mm
6800-2
Precast beams
Straightness or bow: The deviation from the prescribed line

measured on the overall length of the beam shall not exceed
the following:
(i)
In the horizontal plane:
0.5 mm per metre length of the beam within the tolerance

range of 6 mm to 15 mm.
(ii)
In the vertical plane:
(1)
I-beams: 2 mm per metre length of the beam within
the tolerance range of 6 mm to 20 mm.
(2)
Other beams: 1.0 mm per metre length of the beam
within the tolerance range of 3 mm to 20 mm.
Camber: The soffits of adjacent beams when placed side by
side on the bridge deck shall not at any place differ by more
than 2 mm per metre length of the beam within the tolerance
range of 6 mm to 20 mm.
The lengths of precast beams before stressing shall be
0.1% of the total length within the tolerance range of
5 mm to 20 mm.
Surface regularity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 mm
(f)
Reinforcing steel
Except for the requirements given below, no tolerances are

given for the placing and fixing of reinforcing steel. The
steel, however, shall be neatly and accurately fixed in a
manner which is consistent with proper workmanship and

the structural integrity of the structural member. Specifically
the following requirements shall apply:
chamfer on the concrete shall not vary by more than 3 mm

from the specified dimensions.
(ii)
(i)
Tension steel
The actual position of tension steel shall not deviate from

the true position by a distance which would reduce the
effective lever arm by more than 2% of the overall depth of
the member, or 10 mm, whichever is the greater.
(ii)
Kerbs, copings, sidewalks, bridge railings, parapets,

etc
The members shall be constructed within a tolerance of

5 mm for all dimensions. The alignment shall not deviate
from the true alignment by more than 10 mm in any place,
nor shall the alignment deviate by more than 5 mm from the
true alignment over any length of 5 m.
Concrete cover
The concrete cover on reinforcing steel shall nowhere be

less than the specified cover.
(j)
Fabrication and
structural steel
(iii)
(i)
General
Spacing between bars
assembly
tolerances
for
The spacing between closely spaced parallel bars,

especially in beams and columns, shall, unless otherwise
specified, be not less than the maximum size of the
aggregate used in the concrete.
The fabrication and assembly tolerances on all dimensions

for structural steel shall be 2 mm. Holes for connections
shall be drilled/punched and aligned as specified in
Subclauses 6705(d) and (g) respectively.
(iv)
(ii)
Bending of reinforcement
The requirements of SABS 82 or equivalent regarding

dimensional tolerances for cutting and bending of the
reinforcing steel shall apply, with the proviso that the other
requirements set out in this Clause shall be complied with
even if the tolerances in SABS 82 or equivalent are not
exceeded.
(g)
Prestressing
Sheaths for prestressing tendons shall be placed and

maintained in position within the following tolerances:
In the direction of the width of the member:
Cross-section
The tolerances on cross-sectional dimensions of rolled

sections shall be as specified in the Structural Steel Tables,
published by the SA Institute of Steel Construction or
equivalent.
(iii)
Straightness
A structural member before erection shall not deviate from

straightness (or the specified shape) by more than the
following:
For compression members and beams, one-thousandth of
the length between points which are laterally restrained.
For members of up to 200 mm in depth . . . . . . 20 mm
For other members, one five hundredth of the overall length,

but not exceeding 25 mm.
For members exceeding 200 mm in depth . . . . 10 mm
(iv)
In the direction of the depth of the member:
The length of a member shall not deviate from its prescribed

length by more than the following:
For members of up to 200 mm

in depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.025 x depth
For members exceeding 200 mm
in depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.01 x depth
within the tolerance range of
5 mm to
25 mm.
(h)
Bearings
Bearings for structures shall be installed to within 5 mm of

the position shown on the Drawings and to within 2 mm of
the required level.
Dimensional tolerances for elastomeric bearings shall
comply with the requirements of BS 5400 Part 9.2.
For compression members faced at both ends for bearing,

1.0 mm
For other members, + 0 mm, - 4 mm
For such members as trusses and lattice girders, the above
tolerances shall apply to the members as a whole.
The lengths of component parts shall be such that the
structural member can be properly assembled with the
required accuracy.
(v)
Miscellaneous
(i)
Chamfers
Bearing surfaces
Where two steel surfaces are required to be in contact for

transferring compressive forces, the maximum clearance
between the bearing surfaces shall not exceed 1.0 mm
when the members in contact are aligned.
(vi)
(i)
Length
Accuracy of erection
Steelwork shall not be out of plumb over any vertical

distance by more than 5 mm or one thousandth of the
distance, whichever is the greater.
Fillets used for forming chamfers shall be within a tolerance

of 1.0 mm in cross-sectional dimensions, and the actual
6800-3
(k)
Fabricating and construction tolerances for

reinforced-earth structures
(i)
Individual concrete panels:
Surface regularity:
When tested with a 1.5 m straight-edge, the deviation shall
not exceed 5 mm.
Leading dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 mm
6800-4
(ii)
Completed walls:
Surface regularity:
When tested with a 3 m straight-edge, the deviation shall
not exceed 20 mm.
No point of the structure shall be out of position vertically by
more than 10 mm per metre height of the structure, with a
maximum of 50 mm.
SERIES 7000
TESTING AND QUALITY CONTROL
7100
7200
Testing material and workmanship

Quality control
6800-5
6800-6
SERIES 7000 :
SECTION 7100 :
TESTING OF MATERIALS AND

WORKMANSHIP
CONTENTS
7101
7102
7103
7104
7105
7106
7107
7108
7109
7110
7111
7112
7113
7114
7115
SCOPE
TESTING METHODS
THE COSTS OF TESTING
TAKING AND SUBMITTING SAMPLES
TESTING THE AGGREGATES
TESTING THE CONCRETE
TESTING THE SOILS, GRAVELS AND CRUSHEDSTONE MATERIALS FOR EARTHWORKS AND
PAVEMENT LAYERS
TESTING TAR, BITUMEN AND ASPHALT
TESTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL STABILISATION
TESTS ON PAVEMENTS
STRUCTURAL TESTS
TESTS ON SILICONE SEALANTS
TESTS ON CONSTRUCTION WATER
CLASSIFYING THE TESTS
7101
SCOPE
During the progress of the work tests shall be conducted on

materials and workmanship to ensure compliance with the
requirements of the specifications.
Certain sampling and testing procedures not covered in the
other Sections of the Specifications by reference to the
standard methods mentioned in Clause 7102, are given in
this Section.
7102
TESTING METHODS
All tests shall be conducted in accordance with the standard

methods specified in the following, in order of precedence
unless otherwise stated in the text:
(a)
The Specifications of the American Association of
State Highway and Transportation Officials (abbreviated as
AASHTO).
(b)
The Specifications of the American Society for
Testing and Materials (abbreviated as ASTM).
(c)
British Standards
(abbreviated as BS).
Institute
Specifications
(d)
The Technical Methods for Highways (TMH) series
and the Technical Recommendations for Highways (TRH)
series, published by the Committee of State Road
Authorities, South Africa.
(e)
South African Bureau of Standards Specifications
(abbreviated as SABS).
(f)
Test methods prescribed by the Southern African
Bitumen and Tar Association (abbreviated as SABITA).
In addition to the above standard methods of testing,
standard specifications or test methods of other bodies may
also be referred to in these Specifications, or test methods
may be described where no acceptable standard methods

exist.
Note: Significant differences can exist between various test
methods, particularly compaction efforts specified by various
Authorities and the Liquid Limit carried out using the
AASHTO and the BS equipment and methods. The
AASHTO Liquid Limit device shall be used for all testing
pertaining to these Specifications. All CBR tests relate to
material compacted to the maximum dry density obtained
using Modified AASHTO effort (AASHTO T-180, ASTM
D1557 or TMH 1 (Test A8).
In all cases the latest amendment or revision current at the
closing date of the tender is implied when reference is made
to one of the above standards in the Specification.
7103
THE COSTS OF TESTING
(a)
Process control
The cost of testing undertaken by the Contractor in terms of

his obligations under Clause 1205 for purposes of process
control, including the taking of samples, reinstating where
samples have been taken, and all testing equipment, labour,
materials, etc, shall be included in the rates tendered for the
various items of work supplied and will not be paid for
separately.
(b)
Producing certificates
Where the properties of materials or manufactured products

are required in these Specifications to comply with specified
specifications published by a Standards Authority, the
Contractor shall produce, when called upon to do so,
certificates from the manufacturer confirming that the
materials or products supplied comply with the relevant
specifications. The cost of providing such certificates shall
be borne by the Contractor.
(c)
Testing materials and products covered by

certificates
The Engineer shall be entitled to take samples of and order

tests to be made on products and materials in respect of
which certificates of compliance may be required as
described in Subclause (b) above. The Contractor shall be
paid at the appropriate rates if the cost of such tests are
itemised in the Schedule of Quantities, and, if no appropriate
rates exist, such tests shall be classed as extra work under
the relevant Clause of the General Conditions of Contract,
provided that such tests indicate compliance with the
Specifications, otherwise the cost shall be borne by the
Contractor.
7104
TAKING AND SUBMITTING SAMPLES
Where the Contractor is required in these Specifications to

submit samples of materials or mixtures to the Engineer for
approval prior to their being used in the Works, the use of
these materials or mixtures without the Engineer's written
approval shall constitute default on the part of the
Contractor, who shall be liable for the consequence of such
default. All samples shall be submitted in sufficient time for
proper testing.
7100-1
The Engineer's approval of any materials or mixtures shall

in no way relieve the Contractor of his obligation to provide
materials, mixtures and workmanship which comply with the
Specifications.
All samples for testing shall be taken in a random
pattern or as prescribed by the Engineer.
Where
specified or required by the Engineer, stratified
random sampling methods shall be followed. For the
testing of layerwork stratified random sampling
methods shall be used for obtaining all the sample
portions and for determining the locations of in situ
test sites.
The method of taking samples shall be as specified in the
appropriate sampling and testing methods. The sampling
methods described in TMH5 shall apply where no other
methods are available.
The Engineer shall have full access to the Works for the
purpose of taking samples. The Contractor shall render any
assistance necessary for taking the samples and shall be
responsible for the reinstatement of pavement layers or
other structures at the positions where the samples have
been taken. Full compensation for rendering assistance with
sampling and for reinstatement where samples have been
taken shall be included in the rates tendered for the various
items of work tested, and no additional payment will be
made in this respect.
Table 7104/1 (at the end of the Section) provides guidelines
in respect of submitting the materials in regard to the time
and quantity of material required for testing, approval and
the mix design. As the time stated in this Table does not
make any allowance for possible rejection and the
resubmission of alternative materials, the Contractor shall
submit any doubtful materials at an early stage or together
with alternative materials in order to minimise any delays in
final approval.
The Contractor shall note that any samples submitted direct
to the Engineer's laboratory for approval shall be
accompanied by a covering letter signed by the Engineer.
7105
TESTING THE AGGREGATES
(a)
General
(c)
Free-water content
The free-water content of aggregate shall be determined in

accordance with SABS Method 855 or equivalent. Rapidtesting methods approved by the Engineer may also be
applied.
Suitable adaptations of the above method may be used for
determining the free-water content of course aggregate.
(d)
Bulking the fine aggregates
The bulking of fine aggregates shall be determined in

(e)
Determining the effect of sand on the water

demand of a concrete mix.
Water demand is defined as the quantity of water per cubic

metre of concrete required to give a slump of 75 mm in a
concrete with an optimum quantity of stone with a nominal
size of 19 mm.
The following materials are required:
-

Crushed stone with a nominal size of 19 mm
Sand or a sand mix to be tested.
(i)
Method:
Determine the relative density (Rsa) in accordance

with SABS Method 844 or equivalent and the
fineness modules (FM) of the sand or sand mix.
Determine the compacted bulk density (CBD) of the

19 mm aggregate in accordance with SABS Method
845 or equivalent. Also determine the relative
density of the stone (Rst).
Determine the required quantity of stone (S) per

cubic metre of mix (in kg/m3) in accordance with the
formula:
S = CBD (0.975 - 0.1FM).
Aggregates shall be regularly tested by the Contractor as

part of his process control as they are being manufactured
or brought onto the site and used or taken to stockpile.
The appropriate test methods shall be those included under
Clause 7102 or any other relevant tests authorised by the
Engineer.
(b)
Estimate the water demand (W) of the mix (in R/m3).

220 R/m3 may be used as a starting point.
Determine the required cement content (C) for the

mix (in kg/m3) by using the water content (W) as
obtained from (4) and a water:cement ratio of 0.59.
Determine the required sand content (SC) of the mix

(in kg/m3) in accordance with the formula:
SC = 1 - (C/3140 + W/1000 + S/Rst)
Determining acid insolubility
A sample of fine aggregate with an approximate mass of

1.0 kg shall be dried and weighed. The sample shall then be
treated with an adequate amount of a 6 N solution of
hydrochloric acid to react with all the acid-soluble particles
in the sample. When the reaction is complete, the residue
shall be removed from the solution by filtration (Whatman
No 4 filter paper), washed with water, screened through an
0.075 mm sieve, dried and weighed. The mass of insoluble
residue retained on the 0.075 mm sieve, expressed as a
percentage of the total sample, shall be reported as the acidinsoluble content.
7100-2
Decide on the mix size which will apply to the

available equipment and calculate the mix quantities
in relation to the calculated quantities per cubic
metre. Do not produce a mix of less than 10 R.
Prepare the mix and determine the slump in

Where the slump does not amount to 75 mm, repeat
the test with adjusted quantities of cement, water
and sand. A good rule to remember is that a change
of 10 R/m3 in the water content either halves or
doubles the slump.
The water content giving a slump of 75 mm will then

be the water demand for the mix.
In view of obtaining repeatable results, the following

parameters shall be kept constant in so far as is
possible:
Table 7105/1
Criteria for mortar-prism testing
Criteria
- Material temperature
- Mixing time
- Source of cement and stone
(f)
Accelerated-test method for determining the

potential alkali reactivity of aggregates
(i)
The method
Percentage of
linear
expansion after
10 days
Three motor prisms shall be prepared in accordance with the

requirements of ASTM C 227-90. The prisms shall be
removed from the mould after 24 hours and immersed in
water in a closed container, placed in an oven and kept at a
constant temperature of 80C. After 24 hours in the oven,
the prisms shall be taken to a room with a temperature of
23C, where their lengths are measured with a vertical
comparator (an indicator type of deformation meter)
accurately to 2 Fm before any significant cooling-down takes
place.
This reading will be taken as the nil reading. After the initial
reading has been taken, the prisms are immersed in a 1 N
NaOH solution kept at 80C. This solution is kept in a
plastic container which seals tightly and is large enough for
the prisms to be completely immersed. Plastic is used, as
the caustic solution corrodes glass and metal. The prisms
are measured every working day for a period of 14 days at
a room temperature of 23C, and their linear expansion is
calculated. The average expansion of the three prisms for
each day is then calculated. Where none of the values
deviate by more than 15% from the average, the
repeatability is regarded as being satisfactory. The average
expansion after 10 or 12 days is taken to be the reference
value for determining the potential alkali reactivity.
(ii)
Criteria
The criteria proposed provisionally for the accelerated

mortar-prism testing method shall be prescribed in Table
7105/1.
(iii)
Interpretation
For aggregates falling in the slowly expanding group, the

alkalinity per m3 of concrete shall not exceed 2.8 kg of an
Na2O equivalent.
For aggregates falling in the rapidly expanding group, the
alkalinity per m3 of concrete shall not exceed a value of
2.1 kg of an Na2O equivalent per m3, depending on the
reactivity.
The dilution and palliative effect of extenders in the
cementitious binders, such as slagment (where permitted in
structural concrete) and fly ash, shall be taken into account
in the interpretation of the results.
Percentage of
linear
expansion after
12 days
TESTING THE CONCRETE
(a)
Determining the compressive strength
The procedure for sampling and manufacturing, storing,

curing and testing test cubes shall be in accordance with
TMH1 Method D1.
Interpretation
<0.08
Alkali reactivity is not

harmful
$0.08
but
<0.20
Alkali reactivity is
harmful and aggregate
is expanding slowly
$0.20
is expanding rapidly
<0.10
Alkali reactivity is not

harmful
$0.10
but
<0.25
is expanding slowly
$0.25
is expanding rapidly
Where instructed by the Engineer, the compaction of

concrete specimens in the moulds by means of a vibrating
table shall be obligatory. The method of compaction shall be
as follows:
(i)
Plastic concrete
Fill the mould halfway and vibrate it and spade it on all four
sides with a suitable trowel to remove air bubbles. Stop the
vibration as soon as a wet sheen appears on the surface.
Fill the mould and repeat the procedure, but stop when again
a wet sheen appears on the surface.
(ii)
Stiff concrete
The same procedure is followed, except that the mould is

filled in three to four steps instead of in two. The vibration is
stopped for each layer when a wet sheen appears.
(b)
Consistency
The test method described in TMH1 Method D3 shall apply

in regard to the slump test, and the method described in BS
881 (Part 104) in regard to the VEBE test.
(c)
Air content
The air content of the freshly mixed concrete shall be tested

by the method given in TMH1 Method D5. Air-content tests
shall be conducted on the same samples of concrete from
which cubes were made for the 28-day compressivestrength tests.
(d)
7106
Limit
Drilling and testing the cores
Where sections of concrete which have failed to comply with

the Specifications are required to be further investigated by
extracting and testing concrete cores, 100 mm or 150 mm
cores shall be drilled and tested. The sampling and testing
procedure to be followed shall be in accordance with the
publication Concrete Core Testing for Strength - Concrete
7100-3
Society Technical Report No 11, published by the Concrete

Society of Great Britain.
The instructions of this report shall be followed for
determining the "estimated potential strength", which shall
be compared with the 28-day cube strength specified for
each type of concrete. Corrections to the actual core
strength to allow for excess voidage, included steel and the
length:diameter ratio of cores shall be as stated in this
publication, and the correction for curing shall be determined
by the Engineer in accordance with this publication and such
other information as he may deem to be appropriate.
The Engineer's decision regarding the degree to which the
concrete which is represented by the cores tested as
described above, complies with the requirements and also
regarding the properties and suitability of the concrete, shall
be final and binding.
(e)
(f)
Curing concrete cubes to attain accelerated

strength development (55-C/20 hours)
(i)
Scope
A method is described for curing concrete cubes at 55C for

20 hours with a view to pre-estimating the 28-day
compressive strength for purposes of quality control.
Apparatus
The following apparatus is required:

-
Apparatus for preparing the concrete cubes in

accordance with Method D1 of TMH1
Plastic sheets of 180 mm x 180 mm
Hessian sheets for covering the samples
A suitable water bath with a thermostat to maintain
the temperature constantly at 55C 1C, with a
circulation system and adequate capacity.
(iii)
Method
Prepare the required number of concrete cubes in

accordance with Method D1 in TMH1 and completely
cover the exposed surface within the cube mould
with small plastic sheets and then with wet hessian.
Keep it covered for 3 hours 15 minutes.
Place the concrete cubes into their moulds in the

hot-water bath at a rate which will not allow the water
temperature to drop below 54EC. Record the exact
time when each cube is placed into the water and
leave it in the water at a temperature of 55C 1C
for 20 hours 15 minutes.
Remove the cubes, in their moulds, from the water

and then carefully from their moulds. Cool the cubes
for 2 hours 15 minutes in water at 20C 5C.
Test the compressive strength of the cubes in

accordance with Method D1 of TMH1.
7100-4
Calculating the compressive strength
The cube compressive strength is calculated in accordance

with Method D1 of TMH1. For calculating the expected 28day compressive strength, the ratio between the 28-day
compressive strength and the strength of rapid-hardening
cubes shall be determined for each type of concrete mix by
correlation techniques.
For purposes of the initial work, it is mentioned that research
has shown that the strength of the cubes treated and tested
as described above will be approximately 0.58 times the 28day compressive strength for concrete cubes prepared from
ordinary Portland cement (for strengths between 30 and
65 MPa). For rapid-hardening cement, the corresponding
factor is 0.59, and for PBFC it is 0.66.
7107
TESTING THE SOILS, GRAVELS AND CRUSHEDSTONE MATERIALS FOR EARTHWORKS AND
PAVEMENT LAYERS
(a)
General
Flexure strength test (modulus of rupture)
The procedure for sampling, making tests beams, curing,

storing and testing, and the moulds used, shall be in
(ii)
(iv)
Specimens of soils, gravels and crushed-stone materials in

earthworks and pavement layers shall be taken in
accordance with the methods described in TMH5, and any
tests thereon shall be conducted in accordance with the
methods as defined in 7102 subject to the following
additional provisions:
(i)
All field-density determinations shall be done in
accordance with Method C (direct radiation) of Method
A10(b). Method A10(a) may be used where so instructed by
the Engineer. Method A10(b) will be the reference method,
except where the material is of such a nature that, when the
radiation method is applied, disturbances will occur which
will affect the results. Radiation apparatus shall be properly
calibrated, and a valid calibration certificate by a recognised
laboratory shall be produced to the Engineer on demand.
The Engineer may insist on recalibration at any stage.
(ii)
The apparent density of crushed-stone material shall
be determined as specified in Subclause 7107(c).
(iii)
In the case of chemically stabilised material,
determining the optimum moisture content and the
maximum dry density shall be completed within the period
given in Table 3305/1, and field density shall be determined
within 24 hours of compaction having been completed.
(iv)
The moisture content at the specified saturation
degree (Sr) shall be determined as follows:
(The apparent density (Gs) of the material shall also be
determined for this purpose).
W v Sr
Xw
Xd
1000
Gs
where
W v = moisture content of the specified degree of
saturation (%)
Xw = density of water (kg/m3)
Xd = dry field density of the material (kg/m3)
Gs = apparent density of the material (kg/m3)
Sr = specified degree of saturation (%).
(b)
The total approximate dry bulk relative density of base

material shall be determined as follows:
-
The -0.075 mm fraction is removed from the sample

and then the sample is divided up into +4.75 mm and
-4.75 mm fractions.
For the +4.75 mm fraction the dry bulk density and

water absorption are determined according to
Method B1 of TMH1.
The apparent relative density only is required for the

-4.75 mm fraction.
(i)
With a pipette, fill the pycnometer up to the mark

with distilled water at 25 C. Dry the pycnometer
quickly and thoroughly, and weigh it.
Approximate dry bulk relative density
Definitions
The definitions in Methods B14 and B15 of TMH1 are

applicable.
(ii)
Apparatus
(1)
+4.75 mm fraction
Gently pour off the water without spilling any of the

sample. Dry the pycnometer with its contents to a
constant mass in an oven at 105C to 110C and
weigh it.
Clean the pycnometer, fill it with distilled water at

25C, dry the outside, and weigh it.
Record the mass determinations on a suitable data

sheet.
(iv)
Calculations
(1)
+4.75 mm fraction
Calculate the dry bulk relative density (25C) to the

nearest 0.001 g/cm3 from the following formula:
Gbc = a/(b-c)
where
a=
b=
The same apparatus as that required by Method B14.

(2)
-4.75 mm fraction
A 2 R pycnometer.
A balance with a capacity of at least 5 kg and
accurate to 0.5 g.
A vacuum pump capable of maintaining a reduced
pressure of 100 mm mercury.
A water bath capable of maintaining a temperature of
25C 1C.
A drying oven, thermostatically controlled and
capable of maintaining a temperature of 105C to
110C.
A 25 mR pipette.
A 0.075 mm sieve.
(iii)
(1)
c=
mass of oven-dry sample in air

mass of saturated surface-dry
sample in air
mass of saturated surface-dry
sample in water at 25C.
The test shall be repeated if the duplicate results do

not agree within 0.005. Report the result to the
nearest 0.001 g/cm3.
Calculate the percentage of water absorbed (Pwa)

(mass) from the following formula:
Pwa = 100 (b - a)/a
Report the result to the nearest 0.1%.
Method
(2)
-4.75 mm fraction
+4.75 mm fraction
Calculate the apparent relative density (25C) to the

nearest 0.001 g/cm3 from the following formula:
The method is the same as Method B14.

(2)
-4.75 mm fraction
After riffling, the volume of the sample shall be 40%

5% of that of the pycnometer.
Wash the sample thoroughly to remove the 0.075 mm fraction and soak the sample for 24 hours
4 hours.
After the sample has been soaked, transfer it to a

clean pycnometer.
Add distilled water to the sample in the pycnometer

until the pycnometer is approximately three-quarters
full. Remove any entrapped air by subjecting the
sample to partial vacuum (air pressure approximately
100 mm mercury) for a few minutes. This can be
done by connecting the pycnometer directly to an
aspirator or a vacuum pump, or by using a bell jar.
Some soils boil violently when subject to reduced air
pressure, in which cases the pressure should be
increased. Place the pycnometer and contents in
the constant temperature bath at 25C 1C and
leave it for approximately 20 minutes until the
contents of the pycnometer are at this temperature.
Gaf = (A - E)/[(D - E) - C - A)]

where
A=
C=
D=
E=
mass of oven-dry sample and

pycnometer
mass of saturated sample and
pycnometer filled with water at 25C
mass of pycnometer filled with water
only, at 25C
mass of clean. dry pycnometer.
The test shall be repeated if the duplicate results do

not agree within 0.005. Report the result to the
nearest 0.001 g/cm3.
Calculate the dry bulk relative density (25C) of the

-4.75 mm fraction from the following formula:
Gbf = Gaf/(Pwa.Gaf/100 + 1)
Calculate the dry bulk relative density (25C) of the

total sample less the -0.075 mm fraction. from the
following formula:
7100-5
Gbt = 100/(P1/Gbf + P2/Gbs)
and sample together. (The sample should not take

up more than half of the pycnometer's volume.)
where
P1 =
P2 =
(v)
percentage passing through the

4.75 mm sieve
percentage retained on the 4.75 mm
sieve.
Add clean water at 25C to the pycnometer until it is

approximately three quarters full. Add three drops of
the 10% Teepol solution to the water, close the
pycnometer and shake it thoroughly for one or two
minutes.
Fill the pycnometer to near the brim with water at

25C and place it in a thermostatically controlled
bath at 25C. Leave it for 30 minutes without
disturbing or for so long as may be determined by
the Engineer.
Remove the pycnometer without shaking or jarring

and place it on a spread-out towel. Fill it with water
at 25C and carefully slide the glass sheet over the
brim from one side. Make sure that no air bubbles
are trapped beneath the glass sheet. Dry the entire
pycnometer and glass sheet carefully and determine
the mass of the filled pycnometer plus the glass
sheet.
Remove the contents of the pycnometer, clean and

fill it in the same manner with water at 25C. Dry
and determine the mass of the pycnometer filled with
water together with the glass sheet.
(iii)
Calculation
The apparent density of the material is calculated as

follows:
The standard temperature is taken as 25C. If the test is

conducted at any other temperature, this shall be stated, or
the relative density shall be adjusted for a temperature of
25C.
The relative density of material retained on the 4.75 mm
sieve can also be determined by using a pycnometer. The
volume of the pycnometer should not be less than 2 R (the
volume occupied by the aggregate shall be 40% 5% of the
pycnometer capacity).
The pycnometer may be a relative-density flask with a
perforated glass stopper, or a volumetric flask, or any other
glass container equipped with a suitable means of ensuring
that it can be filled to a constant volume.
When the particle size of the -4.75 mm grains is widely
distributed, the test may not be repeatable and more
samples shall be tested.
The apparent relative density (25C) of the +4.75 mm
fraction is not called for, but if required, it can be calculated
from the following formula:
Gac = a/(a - c).
(c)
Apparent density of material
(ba)
(da) (cb)
1000
Apparent density
where
a=
b=
mass of pycnometer + glass sheet

mass of pycnometer + glass sheet +
material
(b-a) = mass of material only
c=
mass of pycnometer + material +
water + glass sheet
d=
mass of pycnometer + water + glass
sheet
The apparent density of crushed-stone materials shall be

determined as follows:
(i)
Apparatus
A balance to weigh 5 kg accurately to within 0.5 g.

A pycnometer, eg a preservative jar with a smooth
flat rim.
A thermostatically controlled bath capable of
maintaining a temperature of 25C 1C.
A drying oven capable of maintaining the
temperature between 105C and 110C.
A thermometer marked from 0 - 100C.
Towels.
Teepol (10%) solution.
(ii)
Method
Take 3 000 g - 4 000 g of the material as obtained

from a density hole in the road. All the material
obtained from the hole should preferably be used. If
it is too much for one pycnometer, more than one
pycnometer shall be used.
Dry the material in the oven at 105C - 110C to a

constant mass.
Ensure that the pycnometer is clean and determine

its mass together with that of a marked sheet of
glass.
7100-6
Place the dried sample into the pycnometer and

determine the mass of the pycnometer, glass sheet
Notes:
(i)
No chemicals other than the Teepol solution may be
added to the water.
(ii)
No suction may be applied to the water to remove air.
(iii)
The temperature of the water shall be 25C 1C
and no other temperature may be used.
(iv)
Where two pycnometers are used, the apparent
density shall be calculated from the weighted average of the
two results.
(v)
The soaking period will be determined by the
Engineer for aggregate, the water absorption of which
exceeds 1.0%.
(d)
Determining the durability of aggregate
The test method provides a measure of the ability of an

aggregate to withstand degradation both during construction
and under various service conditions. It also furnishes

additional data pertaining to the quality of the material and
the possible change in index properties likely to occur in the
road and be detrimental to its performance.
(i)
The sub-sample obtained should then be clearly

marked to avoid confusion during further testing (ie
A, B, C and D).
(1)
Sub-sample A (Reference)
Definition
The Durability Mill values are taken as the mass of dry

material passing the 0.425 mm sieve after treatment,
expressed as a percentage of the original dry mass of the
sample. The Durability Mill Index (DMI) value is taken as the
product of the highest Durability Mill Value for any treatment
and the highest Plasticity index for any treatment.
This is a reference sample for standard grading and

Atterberg limits according to TMH1 Methods A1, A2, A3 and
A4.
(2)
Sub-sample B (Wet Ball Mill)
Place the sample in a pan of suitable size and

measure out 2.5 R of water. Use enough of the water
to cover the sample and allow to soak for one hour.
The remainder of the water should be retained for
washing the sample into the Durability Mill prior to
testing.
After soaking decant off the excess water and

combine with the remainder of the 25 R for washing
purposes.
Wash the soaked sample into the Durability Mill

using all the remaining water from the first step and
ensure that the whole sample is transferred without
loss of fines.
Add the six steel spheres to the sample and water in

the Durability Mill and secure the watertight cover.
An abrasive charge of six steel spheres approximately

46 mm diameter and with a mass of 410-455 g. The total
abrasive charge will be 2600 g 50 g.
Operate the Durability Mill for 10 minutes (i.e. 600

revolutions at 60 rpm).
On completion of the rotations the apparatus is tilted

to the upright position and the cover is released.
The steel spheres are rinsed clean in the water of the
mill and removed.
A drying container capable of holding up to 10 R of

sample and washing water is placed under the mill
cylinder.
A 0.425 mm sieve protected by 2.0 mm sieve is

placed in the drying container.
Tilt the mill cylinder so that the water passes through

the sieves and into the container. Using the
minimum amount of excess water possible, wash the
remaining sample through the sieves. This operation
should be carried out incrementally so as not to
damage the 0.425 mm sieve.
The washed material retained on the 0.425 mm

sieve shall be transferred to a separate drying
container.
When all the sample has been washed from the

Durability Mill through the 0.425 mm sieve, the
coarse, and fine fractions plus the washings, shall be
placed in the oven and dried at 105C - 110C to
constant mass.
The dried fines should be prepared as in AASHTO T87 or TMH1 (Method A1) for Atterberg limit tests.
The total mass of prepared fines is recorded and is

then riffled to obtain a representative sample of
approximately 100 g for testing. The actual mass of
fines tested is recorded, and the fraction passing
0.075 mm (Y) is obtained by wet analysis (ie
AASHTO T-87 or TMH1 Method A1). The mass of
(ii)
Apparatus
A Durability Mill which shall conform in all its essential

dimensions to the design shown in Figure 7101. The
machine shall consist of a watertight steel cylinder, closed at
one end, with internal dimensions of 250 mm diameter and
264 mm length. The cylinder is fitted with a removable cover
and watertight gasket and is mounted on a rigid support in
such a way that it may be rotated about a central axis in a
horizontal position. A steel baffle, projecting 80 mm into the
cylinder and 264 mm in length is welded along one element
of the interior surface of the cylinder. The baffle shall be of
such thickness and so mounted as to be rigid. The machine
should be driven by a motor capable of maintaining a
uniform speed of 60 rpm.
Balances
measuring up to 20 kg, accurate to 5 g - for
sample preparation
measuring up to 5 kg, accurate to 1 g - for
sieve analysis
measuring up to 100 g accurate to 0.01 g - for
Atterberg limits.
Sieves as recommended in TMH1 Method A1.
An oven with a temperature range of 40C to 110C
5C.
Equipment for Atterberg limit tests to Methods
AASHTO T-89 and T-90 or Methods A2, A3 and A4
of TMH1.
Drying pans capable of holding up to 10 R of liquid.
A riffler.
A wash bottle with distilled water.
Brushes
A hard-bristle brush
A soft-bristle paint brush, 50 mm wide.
(iii)
Method
Obtain a representative sample of not less than

20 kg and dry at a temperature not exceeding 50C.
The bulk sample should normally be material less
than 37.5 mm but if oversized aggregate is present,
it should be crushed to pass 37.5 mm and added
back to the sample after drying. The crushing of any
oversized aggregate should be noted when reporting
the results.
The bulk sample shall be reduced to 15 kg 1.0 kg

by riffling. The sample shall then be further riffled to
provide four representative sub-samples each
weighing 3.750 kg 250 g. If these weight limits are
exceeded, then the sub-samples should be
recombined and re-riffled.
7100-7
fines passing 0.075 mm is then corrected back to the

actual mass using the factor X:
where X
Total mass of fines

Mass of fines used (Y)
then actual % passing 0.075 mm =

Y
Sample mass 100 w
The remaining fines are used for Atterberg limit tests
to Methods AASHTO T-89 and T-90 or A2, A3 and
A4 of TMH1.
(iii)
It is important that the same operator performs all
grading and Atterberg limit tests for each sub-sample.
(iv)
The coarse fraction should be dried overnight to
constant mass and removed from the oven for grading to
TMH1 requirements. Any additional material passing
0.425 mm should be added to the dried fines. A drying time
of 48 hours for the fines may be required.
7108
TESTING TAR, BITUMEN AND ASPHALT
(a)
Tests described in the Standard Specifications

for tars, bitumens and bituminous emulsions
The grading of the coarse and fine fraction should be

recorded together.
(3)
Sub-sample C (Dry Ball Mill)
The Engineer shall be entitled to order the Contractor to

have materials tested by an approved laboratory for
compliance with all or any of the requirements specified, and
the results of such tests shall be submitted direct to the
Engineer by the testing laboratory with copies, if requested,
to the Contractor.
Place the dry sample in the dry Durability Mill taking

care to brush all the dust and fines into the mill.
The cost of such tests shall be borne as specified in

Subclause 7103(c).
Add the six steel spheres, secure the cover and

rotate for 10 minutes (NB do not add water to this
sub-sample).
(b)
After testing is complete, the mill is left in an upright

position for five minutes to allow the dust to settle
and the cover is removed.
Remove and brush the steel spheres.
Carefully brush the dry sample from the cylinder and

retain for a dry grading of the fraction retained on the
0.425 mm sieve. A dry grading is recommended
especially for moisture sensitive materials such as
mudrocks and some pedocretes.
The passing 0.425 mm fraction shall then be treated

as for the previous sample to determine the
Atterberg limits.
(4)
Sub-sample D (Wet Mill)
Determining the film thickness
The film thickness of the binder in asphalt mixes shall be

determined as described in TRH8.
(c)
Field calibration of distributor
(i)
Apparatus
4 x 10 R drums with a cross section of approximately

350 mm
15 kg balance accurate to 1.0 g
asbestos gloves
solvent for cleaning the drums for re-use
(ii)
Method
Mark each drum clearly at the bottom and determine

the weight of each drum.
The same procedure as for Sub-sample B is followed except

that the six steel spheres are omitted.
Ensure that the binder and the spray bar are at the
correct spraying temperature.
(5)
The Durability Mill Value shall be calculated for sub-samples

B, C and D, as the mass of dry material passing the
0.425 mm sieve expressed as a percentage of the original
dry mass of the sub-sample.
Place one drum under each of the extensions of the

spray bar and two drums under main portion of the
spray bar.
The drums should be on suitable stands (eg bricks),

so that three nozzles can spray directly into each
drum.
The Durability Mill Index shall be calculated as the product

of the highest Durability Mill values for any of the treatments
(B, C or D) and the plasticity index.
Nozzles adjacent to the sides of the drums should be

rotated so that binder will not be spilt outside the
drums.
Open the spray bar and spray between five and eight
litres of binder into each drum. Care should be taken
to ensure that the binder is at the correct
temperature and is sprayed at the specified
pressure.
Weigh the drums and calculate the variation.
Results
Notes:
(i)
The mass of the steel spheres should be checked
periodically for loss due to wear.
(ii)
If it is necessary to check the passing 0.425 mm
fraction for accuracy before treatment of the sub-samples,
then a dry sieving technique should be used. Variance of
less than 3% between the sub-samples should be achieved.
7100-8
7109
TESTS RELATING TO CHEMICAL STABILISATION
(ii)
Apparatus
(a)
Test for cementitious-binder content
balance (accuracy : 0.1g)

pH meter (accuracy : 0.02 units)
six plastic beakers (150 mR, tall)
spatula or pallet knife
soft tissues
glass beaker (200 mR)
distilled water
stabiliser to be used
jet bottle (for cleaning electrode)
drying oven (105 - 110C)
thermometer (accuracy 0.5C)
sample riffler of splitter (25 mm openings approx. are
sufficient in general)
The test method used for determining the cementitiousbinder content of soils, gravels or crushed stone mixed with
a chemical stabilising agent shall be determined by the
Engineer and may be any test method currently recognised
by the Employer as being acceptable.
Where the cementitious-binder content is determined, due
allowance shall be made for the presence in the unstabilised
material of naturally occurring MgO or CaO which affects the
result of such tests. If the standard deviation of the natural
CaO plus MgO content of the untreated material exceeds
0.35%, any determination of the cementitious-binder content
shall be ignored.
Sample holes shall be randomly spaced transversely as well
as longitudinally over the area to be tested, or as directed by
the Engineer, and if the material is road-mixed, samples
shall be taken from the top and bottom of each hole. The
minimum number of samples per test shall be 10.
(b)
Canvas-patch test for the spreading rate of

cementitious binder
The following method shall be used for determining the

spreading rate of a chemical stabilising agent where bulk
distributors are used.
At least 10 clean canvas patches, each measuring 1.0 m x
1.0 m, shall be placed flat on the road in selected positions
in relation to the bulk distributor's track. After the stabilising
agent has been spread by the bulk distributor, the canvas
patches shall be carefully lifted and all the material on the
patches transferred to a container and weighed. The total
mass of stabilising agent on each patch is then recorded and
the average rate of application determined. Instead of
canvas patches, flat metal trays may be used for collecting
the stabilising agent.
(c)
Tests for mix uniformity in chemically stabilised

layers
Coning and quartering may also be employed

(iii)
Preparation of soil samples
The test is carried out on 2 kg of material finer than

19 mm. Any oversize material is crushed to pass 19
mm.
Oven dry the sample at 105 - 110C.
The sample is further reduced to 300 g quantities by

means of sample splitters or coning and quartering
and placed into 150 mR (or larger) plastic containers.
(iv)
Method
Since most materials required between 2 and 5 per

cent lime, it is advisable to set up six beakers with
lime percentages of 1; 2; 3; 4; 5 and 6 of the dry soil
mass, i.e. 200 g soil + 2; 4; 6; 8; 10 and 12 g of Ca
(OH2). This will ensure, in most cases, that the
percentage of lime required can be determined in
one hour.
Measure out the lime to the nearest 0.1 g and add it

to the soil.
Mix the soil and dry lime.
Slightly over-saturate samples with distilled water.

The material shall be judged over-saturated when
the pores of the material are water filled and free
water can be observed on the surface of the mix.
The surface particles need not be submerged
completely.
Mix for 30 seconds every 10 minutes.
After one hour, measure the pH by inserting the pH

electrode gently into a hole made in the material with
a spatula to a depth of about 20 - 30 mm and gently
covering this part of the electrode with the material.
Tap the beaker gently for contact between electrode
and material. The pH meter must be equipped with
a Hyalk electrode and standardised with a buffer
solution having a pH of 12.
Record the pH of each of the soil/lime/water

mixtures. The lowest percentage lime at which the
pH remains constant is the saturation lime content of
this particular gravel. It should be noted that as the
pH of the lime-soil-water mixture is temperature
dependent the actual saturation pH value will not be
constant but at normal temperatures it will be in the
order of 12.4.
Where required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall

determine the mix uniformity in chemically stabilised layers
by means of unconfined compressive strength tests, using
an approved method.
The Contractor shall timeously make the necessary
arrangements to take samples in accordance with the
requirements of the method used.
(d)
Test for the initial consumption of lime
This test is known as the gravel ICL and tests the

construction material as a whole (crushed to pass a 19 mm
sieve).
(i)
Objective
The objective of the gravel ICL test is the control of the pH

in lime and cement stabilized soil in order to allow the
possible formation of cement minerals, calcium silica
hydrate in particular, and for proper modification to take
place. It is recommended that the stabiliser to be used
during construction (or the nearest equivalent) should be
used to carry out this test.
7100-9
(v)
Recording of results
The results are recorded to the nearest 0.5 per cent lime
required to produce the maximum pH in the soil/water/lime
mixture as indicated by the pH of the mix. Since the pH
depends on the temperature, this must also be recorded.
This percentage of lime is read as the ICL of the soil.
(vi)
Interpretation
The amount of lime required to satisfy the ICL when added

in the field will be sufficient to permit modification to take
place completely but little if any stabiliser will be available for
cementation or pozzolanic action. The lime required to
produce any strength in the long term must be in addition to
that required to satisfy the ICL.
Note: At present most ICL tests are performed with
hydrated lime (Ca(OH)2). It may well be argued that where
Portland cement or mixtures of lime and slag or cement and
slag are proposed for stabilisation the ICL test should be
performed with the agent proposed.
7110
STRUCTURAL TESTS
(a)
Tests on elastomeric bearings
(i)
General
Tests on elastomeric bearings shall be conducted in

accordance with BS 5400 Part 9.2, and the bearings shall
comply with the test requirements specified in the said
specification.
(ii)
Compression and shear-stiffness tests
When compression and shear-stiffness tests are conducted

on sample bearers or on only a limited number of bearers in
a consignment, the stiffness values as determined by the
tests shall be within 20% of the theoretical values.
(b)
Prestressed concrete : Testing prestressing

steel, anchorage assemblies, couplings and
grout
(i)
General
TESTS ON PAVEMENTS
The following tests shall apply to pavements when specified:

texture depth
straight-edge
rolling straight-edge.
(a)
7111
Determining the texture depth
Where so directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall

make arrangements for samples of the materials he intends
to use in the Works to be tested by an independent testing
authority. The cost of testing prestressing steel, anchorage
assemblies and couplings will be paid for as specified in
Subclause 7103(c). Control tests on the viscosity and
bleeding of grout will be regarded as part of the Contractor's
obligations under Clauses 1205 and 7208 for process control
and will not be paid for separately.
The texture depth shall be determined by way of the sandpatch test as described in test Method ST1 of TMH6.
Material represented by samples which do not comply with

the specified requirements shall be removed and replaced
with suitable material.
(b)
(ii)
Straight-edge test for surface irregularities on

surfaces with a coarse surface texture
Where surface irregularities are measured on surfaces with

a coarse surface texture such as grooved concrete
pavements, crushed-stone pavement layers, natural gravel
base, asphalt with rolled-in chippings, seals and other like
surfaces, the following procedure shall be followed:
A metal wedge of 100 mm in length and 50 mm in width
shall be constructed with a taper of 7.5 horizontal to 1.0
vertical and tapering to a feather edge (50 mm wide).
Parallel lines spaced at 7.5 mm intervals shall be engraved
on the sloping face and numbered to indicate the positions
where the wedge is 1.0 mm, 2.0 mm, etc, thick.
Where surface irregularities are measured, the 3 m straightedge, which shall have sharp right-angled corners at the
bottom, shall be placed on the road and the thin edge of the
wedge inserted below the straight-edge from the front at the
position where a surface irregularity is to be measured. The
size of the irregularity shall be determined in accordance
with the mark to which the wedge can be inserted without
lifting the straight-edge.
(c)
Using the rolling straight-edge for measuring

surface irregularities
The apparatus and testing method for this test shall be in

accordance with testing Method ST3 of TMH6.
7100-10
Anchorages and couplers shall be tested in accordance with

the requirements of Subclause 6503(c). The anchorages
and couplers shall be assembled in accordance with their
practical application on the site where all the components
necessary for anchoring shall be used, but excluding the
ducts.
(iii)
Prestressing steel
Prestressing steel shall be tested in accordance with the

requirements of Subclause 6503(b). Should any test piece
fail to comply with the requirements specified for the
prestressing steel, the material represented by that sample
shall not be used without further testing and shall be
replaced with materials conforming to the specifications if
further testing confirms that they do not comply with the
specifications.
(iv)
Grout
The fluidity of grout shall be measured with a flow cone,

immersion apparatus or viscometer. The instrument shall be
accurately calibrated in a laboratory so that the specified
viscosity of the grout can be controlled satisfactorily.
The procedure for conducting the flow-cone test for
measuring the fluidity of grout shall be as follows:
-
Unless otherwise approved, the flow cone shall be as

shown in Figure 7102 (at the end of the Section).
Immediately after the grout has been mixed, the prewetted flow cone, which is held firmly with its top rim
in a level position, shall be filled with grout to the
level indicated by the pre-set pointer, whilst the
bottom orifice is held closed with a finger.
The test load shall be applied to the top of the pile with a
hydraulic jack. Where more than one jack is used for
applying the load, all the jacks in the circuit shall be
activated by the same pumping unit. The jack(s) shall be
placed so as to ensure that the load is applied axially.
As soon as the required volume of grout,

( 1 750 mR), is reached, the finger shall be released
to allow the grout to flow out freely through the
bottom orifice. A stop watch shall be used to
determine the flow time for emptying the cone, to the
nearest second.
The readings obtained during grouting shall be

compared with the times determined in the
laboratory for grouts of the specified viscosities.
The applied load shall be calculated in accordance with the

hydraulic pressure which is being monitored by two pressure
meters in the circuit. The pressure meter shall be calibrated
in divisions not exceeding 2% of the maximum pressure
applied, and the range of the meters shall not exceed 150%
of the maximum pressure. The jack(s) and meters shall be
calibrated by an approved testing laboratory not more than
four weeks before the tests will commence.
The bleeding of grout shall be measured in a metal or glass

container with an internal diameter of approximately 100 mm
and a height of approximately 120 mm. The grout and water
levels in the container shall be controlled with a metal bridge
into which two adjustable studs A and B are secured. See
Figure 7103 (at end of the Section) for details of the
apparatus.
The procedure for determining the bleeding of grout shall be
as follows:
-
Studs A and B in the metal bridge shall be adjusted

and locked so that the distance from the lower tips of
the studs to the bottom of the container will be
approximately 100 mm and 107 mm respectively.
The volumes VA and VB for the container at the
respective levels of the stud settings shall then be
determined to the nearest millilitre.
The container shall be filled with freshly mixed grout
to a level where the grout will just touch the tip of
stud A which points downwards. The bridge shall
then be removed and the container tightly sealed to
prevent evaporation. The container shall then be
stored at 20C and kept free from vibrations for the
entire duration of the test.
Three hours after the grout has been mixed, the
container shall be opened and the free (bleed) water
poured off. The bridge shall be placed over the
container with the tip of stud B pointing downwards
and water poured onto the grout with a measuring
apparatus until the water level touches the tip of stud
B. The volume of water added shall be determined
to the nearest millilitre and designated as V.
The percentage of bleeding shall be calculated from
the following formula:
% Bleeding 1 (
(c)
V B V
VA
) x 100
Load test on foundation piles
The head of the test pile shall be exposed for checking

position and slope. Where necessary, the head shall be cut
further back so as to expose a full bond length of main
reinforcing steel, and a suitable pile head slab for applying
an axial load to the pile shall be cast. As an alternative, the
head may be cut at right angles and the load applied directly
to the pile.
The deflection of the pile head shall be measured with two

scale rulers and two dial extensometers. The scale rulers
shall be fixed to the pile and placed on both sides of the pile
on a diameter line, and the dial extensometers shall be
similarly placed but on a diameter line at right angles to that
in which the scale rulers have been mounted.
Level measurements shall be taken on the scale rulers, and
reduced as a level mark to a similar scale ruler placed at a
distance from the test pile. All three scale rulers shall be
calibrated in millimetres and the level-indicating instrument
shall be capable of taking readings to 0.5 mm, and
approximate readings of up to 0.1 mm.
The dial extensometers shall have a range of 50 mm, and
shall be marked in 0.1 mm divisions to enable
measurements to 0.05 mm to be taken. The plungers of the
extensometer shall rest on a machined metal or glass
surface.
The extensometers shall be supported by one or more
beams kept in the shade. The supports for the beams shall
be so placed as to limit the effect of earth movements
around the test pile on the deflection readings.
The test load shall be applied in increments of 20% of the
specified working load to a maximum test load equal to twice
the specified working load or the ultimate test load,
whichever is the smaller.
A load increment may not be applied before the subsidence
or heave rate has stabilised at a rate of not more than
0.10 mm in 20 minutes under the load applied.
After the loading has been completed, the maximum test
load shall be maintained until the movement is less than
0.2 mm within a period of 24 hours. The load shall be
removed in decrements of 20% of the specified working load
at intervals of not less than 20 minutes.
After the load has been removed, the readings on both
meters registering the movement of the pile shall be
recorded accurately to 0.1 mm, at intervals of 5, 10 and 20
minutes, and then every 30 minutes until the load is
changed. The final recovery shall be recorded 24 hours
after the maximum test load has been removed.
During the test, the pile shall be loaded with up to 100% of
the specified working load, and the load shall then be
removed. It shall then be loaded to the maximum test load
after which the test load shall be removed.
7112
TESTS ON SILICONE SEALANTS
The following tests on silicone sealants will apply as

determined in Subclause 7102(e).
7100-11
(a)
Three briquettes, shaped in accordance with AASHTO T-132

and moisture-cured for at least 28 days, are sawn in half,
cleaned and dried to a constant mass in an oven at a
temperature of 110C 5C. After having cooled off, they
are bonded with approximately 0.25 mm of silicone sealant
and tested with clamps which comply with AASHTO T-132.
They are tested under stress at a loading rate of
7.62 mm/min.
(b)
Deformability and adhesion
Prepare concrete blocks of 25.4 mm x 25.4 mm x 76.2 mm

in accordance with ASTM C-719. A sawn surface is used as
the bonding surface. Seal 50.8 mm of the block and leave
12.7 mm at each end of the specimen unsealed. The
sealant shall be 9.5 mm thick and 12.7 mm wide. Cure the
specimen for seven days in air at 25C 1.7C, and for
seven days in water at 25C 1.7C. Subject the sealant to
deformation in accordance with ASTM C-719. The ductility
or compressive rate shall be 3.18 mm per hour. One cycle
is defined as extension to a width of 25.4 mm and returning
to the initial width of 12.7 mm.
7113
TESTS ON CONSTRUCTION WATER
(a)
Compressive strength test
The average 28 day strength of three mortar cubes made

with ordinary Portland cement and the water that is to be
tested shall be at least 90% of that of three similar cubes
made with water of known purity.
Additional tests shall be carried out to ensure that the setting
time of the cement is not adversely affected by impurities.
(b)
Inorganic impurities criteria
The water used to manufacture concrete shall comply with

the criteria in Table 7113/1 unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
7114
Criteria for inorganic impurities in water used

to manufacture concrete
Characteristic
CLASSIFYING THE TESTS
For the purposes of this Section tests are defined as follows:

(a)
Ordinary tests are tests which are constantly
conducted by the Contractor on a regular basis in terms of
Clauses 1205 and Section 7100, for which no specified pay
items have been provided, and which include the following,
inter alia:
7100-12
Criteria
Method
pH
4.5 - 8.5
SABS 113
Sulphates
Reinforced concrete
and prestressed
concrete : 400 ppm
Mass concrete :
1 000 ppm
SABS 212
Chlorides
500 ppm
SABS 202
Conductivity @
25C
330 mS/m
Total dissolved
solids @ 180C
Mass concrete :
3 000 ppm
Reinforced concrete
: 1 500 ppm
SABS 213
Alkali
carbonates and
bicarbonates
1 000 ppm
SABS 841
Sugar
Negative
SABS 837
Organic
impurities
300 ppm (applicable

if pH <5)
Chemical
oxidation
demand
Non-adhesive period
Prepare the specimens in a mould with an area exceeding

that of the brass weight described below, and which is
6.35 mm thick. Place a 30 g brass weight with dimensions
of 41.28 mm x 25.4 mm x 3.18 mm on a polyethylene strip
applied to the sample after the specified curing period. After
the weight has been removed, the polyethylene strip is
removed by pulling it off at an angle of 90 to the mix and at
a rate of 25.4 mm in five seconds. No material may adhere
to the polyethylene while it is non-adhesive.
(c)
Table 7113/1
Bond to cement mortar
(i)
Tests for determining the properties of all natural
materials such as, inter alia, sand, stone, water, soil and
gravel, inter alia, provided by the Contractor for use in the
Works.
(ii)
Tests on processed natural materials such as
aggregate for concrete, asphalt and seals, purchased or
produced on the site by the Contractor.
(iii)
Tests for determining the properties of products such
as concrete and asphalt, etc, produced specially for use on
the Works by the Contractor, or purchased from commercial
producers or subcontractors.
(iv)
Tests on completed elements of construction such as
fills, pavement layers, concrete structures, etc, for
establishing compliance with the specified properties.
(b)
Special tests are tests which have to be conducted
by the Contractor only at the specific request of the
Engineer, and include the following:
(i)
Tests on commercial products such as cement, lime,
paint, bituminous products, pipes, valves, cranes and bridge
bearings. The requirements are specified as a whole or in
part by reference being made to the specifications of a
recognised standards organisation.
(ii)
Special tests on structures or elements of structures
to determine their efficacy, for the payment of which clear
provision has been made in the specifications and the
(iii)
Any test requested by the Engineer purely for
purposes of acceptance control. Such tests, however, will
not be classified as a special test if the test is requested
because the Contractor has neglected to conduct sufficient

or proper tests in terms of Clause 1205 and with a view to
submitting the result to the Engineer for his approval of
completed work or materials.
Payment will be made under the pay items of Clause 7115
only in regard to special tests. Payment for ordinary tests
shall be included in the rates tendered by the Contractor for
the items of work to which the ordinary tests relate.
Payment for special tests as requested by the Engineer in

terms of Clause 7114 will be made in accordance with the
provisions of the General Conditions of Contract. Payment
will not be made for any special test should the test indicate
that the specifications have not been complied with.
Item
Unit
71.03 Providing testing

equipment:
7115
Item
Unit
71.01 Special tests on elastomeric bearings (150%

vertical load and 150%
shear distortion) as
described in Subclause 6604(d) . . number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of elastomeric
bearings tested as described.
(a)
Rolling straight-edge . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
(b)
Core drill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of each item

provided. The rolling straight-edge shall comply with the
requirements of Test Method ST3 of TMH6. The core drill
shall be of an approved type capable of drilling cores with
diameters of 100 mm and 150 mm in concrete and asphalt
respectively. It shall be provided with the necessary drilling
parts.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for having

the test conducted by an approved laboratory, also for
replacing the bearings which may possibly have been
damaged during testing.

providing the apparatus on the site and making it available
and using it on the site for as long as may be necessary.
After the work has been completed, and subject to the
provisions of the General Conditions of Contract, it shall
revert to the Contractor as his property.
No payment will be made in respect of a special test should

the test indicate that the bearing does not comply with the
specifications.
Note: Providing testing equipment for use by the Engineer.
Item
Unit
71.02 Other special tests

requested by the Engineer:
(a)
Except for the equipment listed in Item 71.03, this

Specification does not envisage the provision of testing
equipment by the Contractor for the use of the Engineer, but,
where necessary, provision shall be made therefor in the
Project Specifications, and the relevant pay items shall be
described.
Cost of testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . prime cost sum

(PC sum)
(b)
Charge on prime cost
sum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . percentage (%)
7100-13
Table 7104/1
Schedule showing quantities and times for submitting the
materials for approval and mix designs
Submission for quality
approval only
Material
submitted
Proposed
use
Crushed
stone
Submission for quality

approval and mix design
Minimum time
to be allowed
for testing
and approval
Minimum
quantity
to be
submitted
Minimum time
to be allowed
for testing,
approval and
mix design
Minimum
quantity
to be
submitted
Coarse aggregate for concrete
2 weeks
50 kg of
each size
of stone
8 weeks for
structures and
concrete roads
150 kg of each size

of stone for each
class of concrete
Bituminous
seals
2 weeks
50 kg of
each size
of stone
2 weeks
50 kg of each size
of stone
Asphalt
mixes
2 weeks
50 kg of
each size
of stone
8 weeks
100 kg of each
size of stone
Crushed-stone
base or
subbase
3 weeks
50 kg
8 weeks
(stabilisation)
200 kg
Fine aggregate
for concrete
2 weeks
50 kg of
each size
of aggregate
10 weeks
150 kg of each
type proposed
for use for
each class
of concrete
Asphalt mixes
2 weeks
15 kg of
each size
of aggregate
8 weeks
150 kg of each
type proposed
for use
Slurry or
sand seal
2 weeks
15 kg of each
type proposed
for use
6 weeks
50 kg of each
type proposed
for use
Gravel
Subbase
and/or base
4 weeks
200 kg of
each sample
8 weeks
(stabilisation)
200 kg
Other materials eg paint,

cement, additives, etc
As specified
Crusher dust
and/or sand
7100-14
As prescribed by the Engineer
Figure 7101 : Durability Mill apparatus
7100-15
Figure 7102: Apparatus for flow-cone test
Figure 7103 : Apparatus for determination of bleeding of grout
7100-16
SERIES 7000 :
SECTION 7200 :
QUALITY CONTROL
CONTENTS
7201
7202
7203
7204
7205
7206
7207
7208
7209
7201
SCOPE
JUDGEMENT PLANS : GENERAL
DEFINITIONS
PROCEDURES
CONTROLLING MORE THAN ONE PROPERTY
CONDITIONAL ACCEPTANCE
PROCESS CONTROL BY THE CONTRACTOR
ROUTINE TESTS AND INSPECTION BY THE
ENGINEER
SCOPE
This Section describes the scheme used for determining, by

means of tests and measurements and by applying
statistical judgement plans, whether certain requirements
specified in the Specifications in regard to the properties of
materials and workmanship are being complied with.
It also covers the requirements in regard to the control to be
exercised by the Contractor for monitoring the quality of his
work and materials and the routine tests and inspections to
be carried out by the Engineer.
7202
JUDGEMENT PLANS : GENERAL
Certain requirements and limit values are laid down in the

Specifications in regard to the properties of materials and
workmanship to be supplied. Tests shall be conducted and
measurements taken for controlling the relevant properties
of the workmanship and materials supplied, and the results
of such tests and measurements shall be assessed on the
basis of the prescribed criteria for compliance with the
specified requirements.
Wherever possible, acceptance criteria shall be determined
by way of statistical principles described in this Section.
Wherever impracticable and where no statistical judgement
criteria have been prescribed, the specified requirements
and limit values shall be fully complied with.
Despite acceptance of those properties judged by these
statistical methods, the materials or work submitted will be
rejected when other properties (which are not controlled by
statistical methods) fail to comply with the requirements of
the Specifications, or where there are other causes for
rejection such as obviously defective workmanship or
excessively variable properties, visible signs of poor
workmanship, and similar considerations which constitute
sufficient grounds for rejecting the work without any further
testing.
The Engineer shall be entitled to assess separately any
specified portion of a lot if, in his opinion, it exhibits
significant deviations as compared with the remainder of the
lot.
condition of this Contract that the theoretical validity of the

various statistical judgement plans be accepted and that the
validity of the decisions made on the basis of these
judgement plans cannot be disputed on the grounds of
statistical theory or a specified or implied producer's risk, or
unjust on the grounds of enrichment.
7203
DEFINITIONS
For the purposes of this Section the following words and

symbols shall have the following meanings:
(a)
Lot
A lot is a sizeable portion of work or quantity of material

which is assessed as a unit for the purposes of quality
control, and selected to represent material or work produced
by essentially the same process and from essentially the
same materials.
(b)
Random sample
A random sample is a group of "n" test measurements at "n"

separate test positions or on "n" sample portions obtained
from the lot in an unbiased manner.
Random sampling shall mean stratified random sampling,
unless inconsistent with the context.
(c)
Sample mean (/
xn)
/
xn is the arithmetic mean of a set of "n" test results

G
constituting the sample.
(d)
Sample standard deviation (Sn)
The sample standard deviation Sn is defined by:
Sn
x 2n
xn2
n1
where G
xn is the sample mean
(e)
is the value of an individual sample portion, i

e an individual test result or measurement.
is the sample size, i e the number of

individual test results or measurements.
Specification limit (Ls)
This is the limit value of the property of any product outside

which not more than a specified percentage () of the
population of values representing an acceptable product
property is allowed to lie. The specification limit may be a
single lower limit Ls, or a single upper limit L's, or a double
limit consisting of a lower limit Ls and an upper limit L's.
In order not to change the Contractor's or the Employer's

risks, the statistical judgement plans shall be strictly
adhered to in all cases where they are used, and decisions
based on these plans shall not be altered. It shall be a
7200-1
(f)
Acceptance limit for sample mean (La)
This is the limit value of a product property within which the

sample mean shall lie for a product to be acceptable.
For a lower-limit specification, this acceptance limit is
denoted by La. For an upper-limit specification, this
acceptance limit is denoted by L'a. For a double-limit
specification, the lower and upper limits are denoted by La
and L'a.
(g)
Acceptance limits for individual test values (Le)
7204
(a)
Determining the lot size
(i)
Road-construction layers
The lot size shall normally be a section compacted in one

process where essentially the same materials and
construction equipment have been used. Where production
is on a continuous basis, a lot shall normally mean the
product of one day's work and shall not exceed the product
of two full days' work. However, a lot of any smaller size
may be ordered by the Engineer where:
These are the limit values of a product property within which

the sample values representing a product shall lie for the
product to be acceptable.
The limit values will depend on the sample sizes "n" and
may be a lower limit Le, an upper limit L'e, or double limits Le
and L'e.
the properties under investigation exhibit abnormal

local variation within the normal lot size;
an area is obviously of a different quality than the
rest;
the rate of production is very high.
(ii)
Concrete
(h)
Conditional acceptance
This is the acceptance of a lot at reduced payment in lieu of

rejection. Conditional acceptance shall be subject to the
(i)
Outliers
Where, in a sample, one or more test results differ

significantly from the other values obtained, this difference
could be ascribed to an assignable cause, in which case
such test result shall be regarded as an outlier and
disregarded when assessing the lot.
To determine whether or not a test result is an outlier, the
method given in Subclause 7204(d) shall be adopted.
The lot size shall be determined by the Engineer, with due

regard being had to the size and the type of structure in
which the concrete is placed, the specific portion of the
structure, and the total quantity of concrete placed in a day.
The lot sizes in concrete structures could therefore vary
considerably, and, particularly in the case of small
structures, it could be necessary to combine samples of the
same grade of concrete from different structures, provided
that the concrete has been obtained from the same concrete
plant and has been cast in the same period.
(iii)
In other cases, as for example in material stockpiles where

the definition of a lot in accordance with Subclause 7203(a)
does not apply directly, the Engineer will determine lot sizes
in accordance with circumstances pertaining to each case.
(b)
(j)
First submission
The submission of a lot for approval will be classified as a

first submission when actually submitted for the first time or
when submitted for a second time on the basis of a second
set of test values which shall be regarded as a first
submission in terms of Subclause 7204(e), because the
properties of the first and the second sets of test values
differ significantly.
Resubmission
The submission of a lot for approval for a second time shall

be classified as a resubmission should it be regarded as a
resubmission in terms of Subclause 7204(e), as the
properties of the first and second sets of test values do not
differ significantly.
Payment-reduction factor (fr)
This is the factor by which payment at Contract rates shall

be multiplied for calculating payment for conditionally
accepted work.
Sample sizes
For purposes of acceptance control, the Engineer will, in

advance, determine sample size "n". The larger the sample,
the more reliable the result will be, and no sample sizes may
be smaller than those given in Clause 7205.
(d)
(l)
Random sampling
When any lot is tested, whether a normally sized lot or an

isolated section which clearly exhibits an abnormal variation
of the properties under consideration, all samples shall be
taken in a stratified random pattern. For this purpose use
shall be made of tables of random numbers as applied
locally, or the instructions in TMH5 shall be followed if no
local equivalent exists.
(c)
(k)
Other
Outliers
Test results shall be scanned for possible outliers. Where

there is reason to believe that a test result may be
erroneous, it shall, if possible, be re-examined by further
testing, and, if there is reasonable evidence to suggest that
the test result is erroneous, it shall be regarded as an
outlier, rejected, and replaced with a fresh test result.
Where repeating a test or re-examining a test result is
impossible, the method described below shall be used for
identifying outliers:
7200-2
Calculate the value of T; from

T;
where
xn =
G
Sn =
x; =
x;
xn
Sn
arithmetic mean
sample standard deviations
value of the test result differing most from the
mean.
Compare the value of T; with the value of T for the

applicable value of "n", from Table 7204/1.
Table 7204/1
Critical values
7205
No of observations
(n)
Critical values
(T)
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1.46
1.67
1.82
1.94
2.03
2.11
2.18
2.23
2.29
2.33
2.37
2.41
2.44
2.47
2.50
2.53
2.56
Resubmission
Where a lot has been accepted conditionally or has been

rejected, the Engineer may agree to its resubmission for
approval if:
(i)
it has been reworked and the Engineer is satisfied
that a proper attempt was made to improve the properties
which were unacceptable;
or
(ii)
where, in his opinion there are valid technical
reasons therefor.
In both cases a fresh sample shall be taken, and a fresh
(second) set of test values determined.
The first and second sets of test values shall then be
compared with each other to determine whether their
properties differ significantly.
Where in the opinion of the Engineer a significant difference
does occur, the submission of the lot shall be regarded as
a first submission and assessed as such, and only the
second set of test values shall then be used for this
purpose.
PROCEDURES
The statistical judgement procedures described below will

apply to the corresponding product properties for purposes
of acceptance control.
(a)
If the absolute value of T; is greater than T, then x; is an

outlier.
(e)
Where in the opinion of the Engineer no significant

difference occurs, the submission of the lot shall be
regarded and assessed as a resubmission. Where a lot is
resubmitted, it shall be assessed on the same basis as a
first submission, except that the original and the second set
of sample results shall be combined for purposes of
assessment.
Surface levels of fills and pavement layers
At least 50, but preferably more, level measurements shall

be taken according to a stratified random pattern of each lot
of completed layer work, and the specified levels shall then
be determined. Outliers shall be identified and examined.
The lot will be considered to comply with the requirements
in respect of surface levels if, before any repair work is
undertaken, at least 90% of the level measurements show
a deviation from the specified levels which is smaller than
the H90 tolerance specified in the relative sections in regard
to each layer.
Isolated spots, where the surface levels deviate by more
than the appropriate Hmax tolerance of the specified levels
shall be repaired to bring the deviation to within the H90
tolerance.
(b)
Layer thicknesses of pavement layers
At least 30, but preferably more, layer thicknesses shall be

determined in accordance with a stratified random pattern
for each lot of completed layer work. Layer thicknesses may
be determined by means of level measurements taken
before and after construction of the layer in exactly the same
position, but may be augmented by thicknesses
measurements taken by means of holes made in the layer.
In the case of asphalt layers, the Engineer may require
thickness determinations to be made only by means of
measurements on drilled cores, in which case the minimum
number of cores per lot shall be 20 instead of 30.
Outliers shall be identified, disregarded, and, if possible,
replaced.
The lot will be considered to comply with the requirements
for layer thicknesses if (i)
at least 90% of all the thickness measurements
taken before any thickness repairs are made are equal to or
greater than the specified thickness, minus the D90 tolerance
specified in the appropriate section; and
(ii)
the mean layer thickness of the lot is not less than
the specified thickness, minus the Dmean tolerance.
Isolated spots where the actual thickness is less than the
specified thickness less the Dmax tolerance shall be repaired
so as to fall within the D90 tolerance.
7200-3
(c)
Table 7205/2
Acceptance limits for bituminous-binder content
Relative compaction of pavement layers
At least four relative density determinations shall be taken

in the case of selected layers and at least six in the case of
all other pavement layers in accordance with a random
pattern. After outliers have been examined and replaced,
compliance with the specified density requirements shall be
determined as in Table 7205/1 (at end the of the Section).
Continuous and open-graded mixes
The sample mean G

xn shall be at least equal to or higher than
the acceptance limit (La) for the sample mean as given in
Table 7205/1, and no single test value shall be lower than
the acceptance limit (Le) for single values.
(d)
Cementitious-binder content of stabilised layers

and uniformity of mix
(i)
Method
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Analysis
(1)
The mean cementitious-binder content shall be not
less than 91% of the specified binder content.
(e)
Binder content of asphalt
(i)
Method
Concrete : 28-day cube compressive strength
(i)
Method
Take at least the minimum number of samples as given in

Table 7205/4 according to a random pattern and make test
cubes.
Table 7205/4
Minimum sample sizes for
strength concrete (structural)
Anlaysis
Determine the sample mean and assess the lot by using the
following criteria:
The binder content of asphalt mixes shall not deviate from
the specified binder content by more than the values given
in Tables 7205/2 and 7205/3.
0.54
0.58
0.60
0.62
0.64
0.65
0.66
(f)
Take at least four specimens of asphalt in a random pattern

and determine the binder content. Examine the results and
replace any outliers as specified.
(ii)
Continuous and open-graded mixes
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The quantity of cementitious binder in the mixed material

determined by taking 50 samples per lot and testing them as
specified, shall fall within the following limits:
The requirements for uniformity of the mix shall apply only

on condition that the variation of these adjustments fall
within the limits specified in Subclause 7109(a).
Maximum deviation of any single test

value from the specified binder content
(% of binder)
Sample
size
(number)
As described in Subclause 7109(a), the test results shall be

adapted to make provision for the presence of minerals,
which may affect the test results, in the material to be
stabilised.
(2)
The cementitious binder content in not more than 12
of the 50 samples may be lower than 70% of the specified
binder content.
0.37
0.33
0.30
0.28
0.27
0.26
0.25
Table 7205/3
Acceptance limits for bituminous-binder content
Take 50 samples according to a random pattern and

determine their cementitious-binder content. Examine the
results for outliers and replace them if any.
(ii)
Maximum deviation of the sample

mean from the specified binder
content (% of binder)
Sample size
(number)
Volume of lot (m3)
Minimum sample size
0 - 20
21 - 40
41 - 70
71 - 100
101 - 150
>150
4
6
9
12
14
16
Test them for cube compressive strength after 28 days.

(ii)
Analysis
Examine the results for outliers and disregard if any. The

results are then assessed according to the criteria set out
below. A lot will comply with the requirements for the
characteristic strength if it meets the following requirements:
7200-4
(1)
x $ Ls + A
G
(ii)
the lot is approved in respect of all other
requirements not judged by a statistical judgement plan;
x=
G
a mean value of the

compressive strength tests
(iii)
the Contractor shall have the option to remove and
reinstate at his own cost conditionally accepted work with
work which complies with the requirements for acceptance
at full payment;
Ls =
characteristic strength specified in the

concrete-class indication (see Clause 6404)
where
(2)
28-day cube
the applicable value given in Table 7205/5
No single test value is lower than the value

Ls - B
(b)
Properties to which conditional acceptance
applies
Conditional acceptance may be applied in respect of the
properties of structures listed below in Table 7207/1.
where
(iv)
conditional acceptance and the corresponding
reduced payment shall apply only in respect of the work and
properties listed in Subclause 7207(b) below.
the applicable value is given in Table 7205/5.
Table 7207/1
Properties to which conditional
acceptance may apply
Table 7205/5
Acceptance factors for strength concrete
Property
Sample size (n)
A (MPa)
B (MPa)
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0.5
1.1
1.4
1.7
1.9
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.7
3.9
4.2
4.5
4.7
4.9
5.0
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
7206
CONTROLLING MORE THAN ONE PROPERTY
Where more than one property of a lot is being controlled,

the lot shall be accepted if all the properties comply with the
specified requirements, but if one or more of the properties
do not comply with the requirements, the lot shall be
rejected, or it may be conditionally accepted subject to the
7207
CONDITIONAL ACCEPTANCE
(a)
General
Where a lot is rejected under a statistical judgement plan

described in this Section, but the test results are such that
the lot complies with the requirements for conditional
acceptance specified hereafter, the Engineer may accept
the lot conditionally, that is, the lot may be accepted at
reduced payment in lieu of complete rejection, provided that:
(i)
conditional acceptance shall be the sole discretion
of the Engineer and is not an option which may be exercised
by the Contractor or a right he may claim;
Structure
Relative
compaction
(i) Asphalt base or surfacing

(ii) Chemically stabilised layers
(iii) Plant mixed paver laid layers
Bituminousbinder content
Asphalt base or surfacing
Cementitiousbinder content
Chemically stabilised layers
28-day cube
compressive
strength
All structural concrete (excepting

concrete pavements)
Note: Conditional acceptance shall not apply to crushedstone layers, but, where compaction to 88% of apparent
density has been specified but cannot be attained, the
Engineer may accept the layer at payment at the rate for
compaction to 86% of apparent density on condition that the
layer complies with the requirements for this compaction
standard.
The same provisions shall apply mutatis mutandis where a
specified density of 102% of modified AASHTO density
cannot be attained, but 100% of modified AASHTO density
has in fact been attained.
(c)
Criteria for conditional acceptance
In terms of the respective judgement plans relating to the

properties to which conditional acceptance applies, two
requirements shall always apply, viz one in relation to the
sample mean (G
xn), and one in relation to individual test
values xn. A lot may be conditionally accepted when it
complies with one of the two requirements for acceptance,
but not with the second requirement provided that it
complies with the requirements for conditional acceptance
in relation to the second requirement. There are therefore
always two cases:
7200-5
(i)
Case 1
(i)
The lot complies with the requirement for sample mean, but
not in all cases with the requirement for individual test
values.
The lot may be accepted conditionally, subject to the
following additional conditions:
(1)
In regard to the relative compaction of pavement
layers, the bituminous-binder content of asphalt and the
concrete cube compressive strength, not more than one test
value may not comply with the requirements of individual
test values.
The lot complies with the requirements for sample mean,

but not in all cases with the requirements for single values.
fr is always taken as being equal to 0.85.
(ii)
Case 2
Case 2
The lot complies with the requirements for single values, but
not with the requirements for sample mean (G
xn).
For conditional acceptance at a lower limit
(2)
In regard to the cementitious-binder content, the
binder content may be below 70% of the specified binder
content in not more than 13 cases.
(ii)
Case 1
f r 0.67 0.3
f r 0.67 0.3
The lot may be accepted conditionally on condition that the

sample mean G
xn lies within the rejection limit Lr given in
Table 7207/2.
Table 7207/2
xn)
Rejection limits (Lr and L'r) for the sample mean (G
Structure
Rejection limits
(Lr and L'r)
(a) Chemically
stabilised layers
in accordance
with Section
3500
Lr = (La 2.000)% relative

compaction
Cube
compressive
strength
Bituminous
binder content
%
(d)
All strengthconcrete
(excluding
pavement
concrete)
Lr = 0.85 La
(iii)
Chemically stabilised layers
Asphalt
Lr = (La 0.200)% binder
Asphalt base and surfacing
Items 42.01, 42.02 and 42.03.

Concrete
Items 64.01, 64.02 and 64.03.
Lr = 0.80 La
Determining the payment reduction factor (fr)
Where a lot is conditionally accepted, compensation will be

reduced by multiplying the tender rates for the items
concerned, as set out below, with the payment reduction
factor fr.
The factor fr is determined as follows in regard to the two
cases set out in Subclause 7207(c) above.
7200-6
(i)
(ii)
Chemically
stabilised layers
Applying the payment-reduction factor
Items 34.01, 34.02, 34.03, 35.01, 35.02, 35.05 and 35.06.
L'r = (L'a +
0.200)% binder
Cementitiousbinder content
L'r L'a
The payment-reduction factor shall be applied to the

following payment items as may apply and be described in
the Specifications.
Lr = (La 1.000)% relative

compaction
(b) Asphalt
base or
surfacing
L'r
xn
(See Subclause 7202 for definitions of symbols).
(e)
Relative
compaction
La Lr
For conditional acceptance at an upper limit
The lot complies with the requirements for individual test

values but not with the requirements for sample mean.
Property
xn L r
No reduction shall apply to payment items for formwork,

reinforcing or tendons.
(iv)
General
Where payment items are incorporated in the Project

Specifications or have been amended in the Schedule of
Quantities, the payment-reduction factor shall apply to the
payment items corresponding to the payment items
mentioned above.
Where a lot is conditionally accepted in regard to more than
one property, the payment-reduction factor for each property
shall be calculated, and the factor giving rise to the largest
reduction shall be applied.
7208
PROCESS CONTROL BY THE CONTRACTOR
The requirements of Clause 1205 shall apply in respect of

the Contractor's obligation to institute and implement a
control system for monitoring the quality of the work and
materials supplied.
For continuous concrete and asphalt-production processes,

the Engineer may order the Contractor to augment the
above control system by introducing a process-control
system for monitoring the various properties to be
controlled. The specific system to be applied shall be
subject to the Engineer's approval, and the attention of the
Contractor is drawn to the systems described in TRH5,
which will normally be regarded as suitable.
All sections of completed work shall be submitted to the

Engineer for routine inspection and testing, and the
Contractor shall not cover up or construct any work on top
of sections of completed work before being advised by the
Engineer of the outcome of his tests and inspection. The
Contractor shall arrange the submission of work for testing
in a manner as will afford the Engineer reasonable
opportunity for inspecting and testing.
The Contractor shall take immediate steps to rectify any

deviation from the specified requirements indicated by his
process-control system, and the Engineer shall have the
right to inspect and be given all details of tests and testing
procedures in order to satisfy himself that the Contractor is
implementing an adequate process-control system.
7209
ROUTINE TESTS AND INSPECTION BY THE

ENGINEER
The Engineer will at regular intervals inspect and test

materials and completed work for compliance with the
specified requirements, and, where applicable, the various
specified judgement plans will be applied. The testing
frequencies and sample and lot sizes for routine testing
shall be at the Engineer's discretion.
7200-7
Table 7205/1
Acceptance limits in respect of compaction
Layer
Prescribed
density
Unit of measurement
Selected layer
90%
93%
95%
100%
Subbase
Minimum average density for the following sample sizes
Minimum value for any single test for the following sample sizes
Mod. AASHTO density

Mod. AASHTO density
Mod. AASHTO density
Mod AASHTO density
90.1
93.1
95.1
100.1
90.4
93.4
95.4
100.4
90.6
93.6
95.6
100.6
90.7
93.7
95.7
100.8
90.9
93.9
95.9
100.9
91.0
94.0
96.0
101.0
86.4
89.4
91.4
96.4
86.2
89.2
91.2
96.2
86.0
89.0
91.0
96.0
85.9
88.9
90.9
95.9
85.8
88.8
90.8
95.8
85.7
88.7
90.7
95.7
95%
96%
97%
Mod. AASHTO density

Mod. AASHTO density
Mod AASHTO density
95.1
96.1
97.1
95.4
96.4
97.4
95.6
96.6
97.6
95.7
96.7
97.7
95.9
96.9
97.9
96.0
97.0
98.0
91.4
92.4
93.4
91.2
92.2
93.2
91.0
92.0
93.0
90.9
91.9
92.9
90.8
91.8
92.8
90.7
91.7
92.7
Gravel base
100%
98%
97%
Mod. AASHTO density

Mod. AASHTO density
Mod. AASHTO density
100.1
98.1
97.1
100.4
98.4
97.4
100.6
98.6
97.6
100.7
98.7
97.7
100.9
98.9
97.9
101.0
99.0
98.0
96.4
94.4
93.4
96.2
94.2
93.2
96.0
94.0
93.0
95.9
93.9
92.9
95.8
93.8
92.8
95.7
93.7
92.7
Crushed-stone base
102%
Apparent density
102.1
102.4
102.6
102.7
102.9
103.0
98.4
98.2
98.0
97.9
97.8
97.7
Asphalt base and

surfacing
100%
(97 - % voids in mix) %

of theoretical density
100.1
100.3
100.5
100.6
100.7
100.8
97.1
96.9
96.8
96.7
96.6
96.5
Shoulders and
wearing course
93%
95%
Mod. AASHTO density

Mod. AASHTO density
93.2
95.2
93.6
95.6
93.8
95.8
94.0
96.0
94.2
96.2
94.3
96.3
87.9
91.4
87.6
91.2
87.4
91.0
87.2
90.9
87.0
90.8
86.9
90.7
BIBLIOGRAPHY
SPECIFICATIONS AND TEST METHODS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
American Association of State Highway and Transport Officials (AASHTO)

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
British Standards Institute (BS)
Standard Coordination Specification (CKS)
Deutshe Ingineur Norme (DIN)
South African Bureau of Standards (SABS)
Southern African Bitumen and Tar Association (SABITA)
Swedish Standard (SIS)
Technical methods for highways (TMH)
Technical recommendations for highways (TRH)
US Federal
8000-1
8000-2
DOCUMENT SOURCING
The AASHTO, ASTM, BS, CKS, DIN, SABS, SIS and US Federal specification and test method documents referred
to in this document can be obtained from the following sources:
1.
Botswana Bureau of Standards

Private Bag BO48
Gabarone
Tel +267 351 420
Fax +267 324 064
E-mail
bobs.standard@info.bw
2.
Malawi Bureau of Standards

PO Box 946
Blantyre
Tel +265 670 488
Fax +265 670 756
E-mail
mbs@malawi.net
Telex
44325
3.
Mauritius Standards Bureau

Moka
Tel +230 433 3648
Fax +230 433 5150
4.
Mozambique National Institute of Standardisation and Quality

CP 2983
Maputo
Tel +2581 303 822
Fax +2581 303 658
5.
South African Bureau of Standards

PBag x191
Pretoria
0001
Tel +2712 428 6925
Fax +2712 428 6928
E-mail
info@sabs.co.za
6.
South African Bureau of Standards (Namibia)

PO Box 1797
Windhoek
Tel +92641 243 502
Fax +92641 243 502 (ask for fax)
7.
Tanzania Bureau of Standards

Ubongo Area
Morogoro Road
Dar es Salaam
Tel +255 514 3298
Fax +255 514 3583
E-mail
tbs@costech.gn.apc.org
Telex
41667 tbs tz
8000-3
8.
Standards Association of Zimbabwe

PO Box 2259
Harare
Tel +2634 882 017
Fax +2634 882 020
E-mail
sazinfo@samara.co.zw
The SABITA specification and test method documents can be obtained from:
1.
SABITA
PO Box 6946
Roggebaai
South Africa
8012
Tel +2721 421 2577
Fax +2721 425 1279
E-mail
sabita@iafrica.com
The TMH and TRH documents can be obtained from:

1.
8000-4
Department of Transport (Publications Department)

PO Box 415
Pretoria
South Africa
0001
Tel +2712 309 3310
Fax +2712 328 5102
American Association of State Highway and Transport Officials (AASHTO)
M-85
M-140
M-153
M-154
M-173
M-194
M-213
M-216
M-240

Bituminous prime coat
Joint filler
Air entraining agents
Thermoplastic hot poured sealant
Concrete admixtures
Joint filler
Road lime
Portland blast furnace cement
T-87
T-89
T-90
T-132
T-180
Atterberg limits test method

Sealant tests
Maximum dry density test method
8000-5
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
A-252-68
Pile casings
C-156
C-260
C-309
C-494
C-719
C-920
C-227-90
Curing agents
Air entraining agents
Curing agents
Concrete admixtures
Sealant tests
Thermosetting chemically cured sealant
Test method for alkali reactivity of aggregates
D-36
D-244
D-1557
D-4402
Bitumen tests (softening point)

Bitumen tests (binder content test)
Maximum dry density test
Bitumen tests (dynamic viscosity)
8000-6
British Standards Institute (BS)
BS-162
BS-470
BS-709
BS-812
BS-881
BS-970
BS-1134
BS-1154
BS-1474
BS-1721
BS-1780
BS-2499
BS-2752
BS-3662
BS-3837
BS-4254
BS-4360
BS-4447
BS-4486
BS-4840
BS-5135
BS-5400
BS-5896
BS-6088
BS-8004
Working under power lines

Aluminum plate
Welding
Fillers for asphalt
VEBE test
Stainless steel
Stainless steel plate
Natural rubber
Aluminum sections
Fire extinguishers
Pressure gauges
Joint sealant
Synthetic rubber
Plastic road marking paint
Joint filler (rigid foams)
Joint sealant
Structural steel
High tensile alloy steel bars
Joint filler (rigid foams)
Welding
Bridge bearings
Steel wire
Glass beads
Structures
EN-10113
EN10155
Structural steel
Structural steel
8000-7
Standard Coordination Specification (CKS)
CKS-82
CKS-176
CKS-191
CKS-192
CKS-388
CKS-389
CKS-437
CKS-564
CKS-592
8000-8
Steel sections
Corrugated metal culverts
Retro-reflective material
Retro-reflective road marking paint
Natural rubber water stops
PVC rubber water stops
Corrugated metal culverts
Bonding liquid for concrete surfaces
Barbed tape concertina wire
Deutshe Ingineur Norme (DIN)
DIN-52013
Bitumen tests (ductility and elastic recovery)
8000-9
South African Bureau of Standards (SABS)
SABS-044
SABS-064
SABS-094
SABS-0100
SABS-0142
SABS-0162
SABS-05
SABS-82
SABS-92
SABS-113
SABS-134
SABS-135
SABS-136
SABS-141
SABS-202
SABS-212
SABS-213
SABS-227
SABS-307
SABS-308
SABS-309
SABS-435
SABS-455
SABS-457
SABS-471
SABS-533
SABS-538
SABS-539
SABS-548
SABS-558
SABS-626
SABS-630
SABS-634
SABS-657
SABS-673
SABS-675
SABS-677
SABS-679
SABS-681
SABS-684
SABS-723
SABS-731
SABS-741
SABS-748
SABS-749
SABS-754
SABS-763
SABS-772
SABS-783
SABS-791
SABS-801
8000-10
Welding procedures
Abrasive blasting
Holes for friction grip fasteners
Concrete cores
Electrical installations
Design of work/codes of practice
Timber treatment
Steel reinforcing bars
Roofing felt (bridge bearings)
pH test (water)
Paint
Bolts and nuts
Bolts and nuts
Paint thickness test
Chloride content (water)
Sulphate content (water)
Total dissolved solids (water)
Bricks
Penetration grade bitumen
Prime
Bitumen emulsion
Rivets
Welding electrodes
Timber posts
Pipes
Timber treatment
Timber treatment
Bitumen emulsion
Manhole covers
Portland blast furnace cement
Finishing coats (paint)
Steel tubes
Timber treatment
Wire
Pipes
Primer (paint)
Undercoat (paint)
Primer (paint)
Road marking paint
Sulphate content (cementitious binders)
Prime
Prime
Timber posts
Galvanising
Abrasive blasting
Pipes
Epoxy tar paint
SABS-802
SABS-824
SABS-831
SABS-836
SABS-837
SABS-838
SABS-841
SABS-844
SABS-845
SABS-848
SABS-850
SABS-855
SABS-856
SABS-862
SABS-864
SABS-865
SABS-878
SABS-912
SABS-920
SABS-921
SABS-926
SABS-927
SABS-934
SABS-967
SABS-986
SABS-1024
SABS-1058
SABS-1077
SABS-1083
SABS-1085
SABS-1091
SABS-1143
SABS-1149
SABS-1223
SABS-1260
SABS-1282
SABS-1350
SABS-1373
SABS-1391
SABS-1413
SABS-1431
SABS-1442
SABS-1500
SABS-1519
SABS-1555
SABS-1580

Road lime
Rapid hardening cement (OPC15)
Aggregate test
Sugar content (water)
Sand equivalent test
Alkali carbonates and bicarbonates (water)
Relative density tests
Compacted bulk density
Polished stone value test
Sulphate content (aggregates)
Free water content (aggregates)
Bulking of fine aggregates
Slump (concrete)
Flexure strength test (concrete)
Compression strength (concrete cores)
Ready mix concrete
Primer (paint)
Steel reinforcing bars
Pipes
Zinc rich epoxy
Kerbing
Galvanising
Rubber joints for pipes
Culverts
Welded steel fabric
Paving blocks
Joint sealant
Aggregate
Sand
Paint
Steel bolts and nuts
Washers
Pipes
Prime
Friction grip nuts and bolts
Guardrails
Diamond mesh
Galvanising
Structural steel
Road studs
Electrical installations
Paint
Delineation signs
Wire mesh
8000-11
Southern African Bitumen and Tar Association (SABITA)
Manual 3
Manual 8
8000-12
Test methods for bitumen rubber

Bitumen safety hand book
Swedish Standards (SIS)
SIS 05/59/00
Abrasive blasting
8000-13
Technical Methods for Highways (TMH)
TMH-1
TMH-5
TMH-6
8000-14
Standard methods of testing road construction materials

Sampling methods for road construction materials
Special methods for testing roads
Technical Recommendations for Highways (TRH)
TRH-3
TRH-5
TRH-8
Surfacing seals for rural and urban roads

Statistical concepts of quality control and their application in road construction
Design and use of hot mix asphalt in pavements
8000-15
US Federal
HHF-341F
SS-S-1401B
SS-S-156
8000-16
Joint filler
Thermoplastic hot poured sealant
Thermoplastic cold poured sealant

Standard Specification For Roads and Bridges Works

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Standard Specification For Roads and Bridges Works

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Standard Specification For Roads and Bridges Works

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Draft

Standard Specifications for

Prepared by the Division of Roads and Transport Technology, CSIR

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

SERIES 1000 : GENERAL

Definitions and terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SERIES 2000 : DRAINAGE

SERIES 3000 : EARTHWORKS AND PAVEMENT LAYERS OF GRAVEL

SERIES 4000 : ASPHALT PAVEMENTS AND SEALS

SERIES 5000 : ANCILLARY ROADWORKS

SERIES 6000 : STRUCTURES

Foundations for structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SERIES 7000 : TESTING AND QUALITY CONTROL

Testing material and workmanship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Definition and terms

DEFINITIONS AND TERMS

Unless inconsistent with the context, in these Specifications,

A mixture to predetermined proportions of aggregate, filler

The layer or layers of asphalt constructed on top of the

A layer of material constructed on top of the subbase, or in

An area within designated boundaries, approved for the

Any gravel, sand, soil, rock or ash obtained from borrow

A structure erected over a depression, river, watercourse,

The surface normally traversed by vehicles and which

CATCHWATER DRAIN OR BANK

A longitudinal drain or bank outside the road prism for

A structure other than a bridge, which provides an opening

Cut shall mean all excavations from the road prism,

Overburden within a borrow area which is not required or is

That portion of the road prism consisting of approved

GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

The appropriate edition of the General Conditions of

The grade line is a reference line in the Drawings of the

GRADING MODULUS (GM)

selected to represent material or work produced by

The area between the two travelled ways of a dual

A longitudinal drain situated between the inner shoulders of

MITRE DRAIN AND BANK

A drain constructed at an angle to the centre line of the road

The upper layers of the road comprising the selected layers,

An initial layer constructed over a weak roadbed where

The cumulative percentages by mass of material in a

The specifications relating to a specific project, which form

INLET AND OUTLET DRAINS

Channels leading into or discharging from culverts,

The natural in situ material on which the fill, or in the

Part of a travelled way intended for a single stream of traffic

A sizable portion of work or quantity of material which is

That portion of the road construction included between the

The entire area included by the boundaries of a road as

Unless otherwise specified in the Specifications or the

The treatment of the materials used in the construction of

Unless otherwise stated, slope is given in terms of the ratio

The application of one or more layers of bituminous binder

Material originating from construction operations and which

The lower layer or layers of the pavement which is

The layer of material on top of the selected layers or fill and

SUBSOIL DRAINAGE SYSTEM